BibliografiaInsular1980 2009

ANEXO
Bibliografia INSULAR. 1980-2009
Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico
REGIÃO AUTÓNOMA DA MADEIRA

ANUÁRIO
DO CENTRO DE ESTUDOS DE HISTÓRIA DO ATLÂNTICO
n.º 1
2009
ANEXO
BIBLIOGRAFIA INSULAR
1980-2009
Secretaria Regional de Educação e Cultura

Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico
Funchal
CEHA 3
BIBLIOGRAFIA INSULAR. 1980-2009
1. 1968-1983: New Guinea periodical index, Boroko, Papua New Guinea: Library, University of
Papua New Guinea.
2. 1980: Our islands’ treasure, Cayman Islands: Pirate’s Week Committee.
3. 1980: The Blasket Islands: next parish to America (Island series, 4). Dublin: O’Brien Press.
4. 1981: Archaeology in Oceania, University of Sydney.
5. 1982: The Economic structure and national accounts of Bermuda, 1975/76 to 1980/81,
prepared by Statistical Department, Ministry of Finance, Hamilton: The Department.
6. 1983: “History of Mopelia Atoll, Society Islands”, in Atoll research bulletin, no 274, pp. 1-37.
7. 1983: The Salomon Islands: Independance and Political Change, Civilisations, vol. vol. 33, no
2, pp. 227-261.
8. 1984: Bermuda national bibliography, [Hamilton]: Bermuda Library, Technical Services.
9. 1984: Characteristics of state plans for aid to families with dependent children under the Social
Security Act, Title IV-A, and for Guam, Puerto Rico, & Virgin Islands, old age assistance,
aid to the blind, aid to the permanently & totally disabled, under Titles I, X, XIV, and XVI
of the Social Security Act, Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of Health and Human Services,
Social Security Administration, Office of Family Assistance.
10. 1984: Development and ocean management in the Eastern Caribbean: the case of the
Leeward Islands, Halifax, N.S., Canada: Dalhousie Ocean Studies Programme.
11. 1984: Grenada: diary of an invasion Race & Class, Jan 1984; vol. 25: pp. 15 - 26.
12. 1984: Nature et hommes dans les îles tropicales: réflexions et exemples, CRET Bordeaux III:
CEGET (C.N.R.S.).
13. 1984: Yagl-Ambu, Vol 11, 3, 1984, Special issue on the 1984 Jackson Report (on Australia’s
Overseas Aid Program).
14. 1985: Andaman and Nicobar Islands, New Delhi, Usha.
15. 1985: Tourism in a Small Island Economy: The Case of Malta. Miles Oglethrope, Tourism
Management, vol. 6, no. 1, March 1985, pp. 23-31.
16. 1986 – 1992: Country profile. Guyana, Barbados, Windward & Leeward Islands, EIU, the
Economist Intelligence Unit, London: The Unit.
17. 1986: Development in the Pacific: what women say, Canberra, ACT, Australian Council for
2009
4 Bibliografia Insular. 1980-2009
Overseas Aid.
18. 1986: La France de l’Ocean Indien, St. Benoit: Editions et Impressions Réunionnaises.
19. 1986: Pacific Island States: selected countries; Papua New Guinea, Fiji, Solomon Islands,
Western Samoa, Vanuatu, Tonga, Kiribati, The Federated States of Micronesia and Micro
States / prepared by the Regional and Country Studies Branch, [New York?]: UNIDO.
20. 1986: Religious Regionalism: Achievements & Prospects, Catalyst, 16 (4): 285301, Condensed
reprint in Report of the 5th Assembly, Pacific Conference of Churches, Apia, pp. 191-7.
21. 1986: Small unit actions, Washington, D.C., Center for Military History, U.S. Army.
22. 1987: ”Problemes et possibilites de developpement des petits etats insulaires”, in Courrier
Afrique Caraibes Pacifique Communaute Europeenne, no 104, pp. 77-87.
23. 1987: A bibliography of plant conservation in the pacific islands: endangered species, habitat
conversion, introduced biota, Atoll research bulletin, no 311, pp. 1-195.
24. 1987: Energy for Islands: Opportunities for British Science, Technology and Industry, London,
England), London; Boston: Graham & Trotman.
25. 1987: Iles, Paris: Gallimard.
26. 1987: Independence for Bermuda: a compendium of those official documents that have been
produced and published by the Bermuda Government and presented to Parliament during
the period 1977-1987, Bermuda Islands, Hamilton, Bermuda: Cabinet Office.
27. 1987: Problemes et possibilites de developpement des petits etats insulaires, Courrier Afrique
Caraibes Pacifique Communaute Europeenne, no 104, pp. 77-87.
28. 1987: Travaux Geographiques sur Madagascar la grande Ile: Notes, Annales de Geographie,
no 533, pp. 103-128.
29. 1987:”Vanuatu”, Oceania, vol. 58(2), 119-139.
30. 1988: A Historical Note on the Early Contacts with the Outside World of Bellona and Rennell
Islands (Solomon Islands), The Journal of Pacific History, 23(2):191-200.
31. 1988: Disadvantaged island regions, Brussels: European Communities, Economic and Social
Committee.
32. 1988: Problèmes spécifiques et besoins particuliers des pays en développement insulaires,
Genève, Rapport du secrétariat général, Nations unies, A/43/513, 25/08/1988.
33. 1988: Répertoire, institutions/organisations et des personnes physiques des îles du sud
ouest de l’océan Indien et des pays/régions francophones de l’océan Indien = Directory,
institutions/organisations & individuals in the South West Indian Ocean Islands and other
French speaking countries/areas bordering the Indian Ocean. Rose Hill, Ile Maurice:
Centre de documentation, de recherches et de formation indianocéaniques.
34. 1988: The Law of the sea: régime of islands: legislative history of Part VIII (Article 121) of the
United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea, United Nations.
35. 1989, 1995: Philippines in pictures, prepared by Geography Department, Minneapolis: Lerner.
36. 1989: Development co-operation report on Fiji, Kiribati, Nauru, Solomon Islands, Tonga,
Federated State of Micronesia, Republic of the Marshall Is., Palau, Tuvalu, Vanuatu, and
Pacific regional programmes / compiled by the Office of the Resident Representative,
United Nations Development Programme, Suva, Fiji, Suva, Fiji: The Office.
37. 1989: Islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean, Washington, D.C.: Dept. of the Army.
38. 1989: L’ Île miroir: actes du colloque d’Aix-en-Provence, 27-28 novembre 1987, la Marge.
2009
CEHA 5
39. 1989: L’Île, territoire mythique, Centre de recherche sur la littérature des voyages (Paris) /
Aux Amateurs de Livres.
40. 1990: International Relations in the Pacific Islands, The Pacific Basin: Economic & Political
Viewpoints, Pacific Science Congress & Chilean Council on Foreign Relations, Santiago,
pp. 15-38.
41. 1991: Flood insurance study: Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana, Saipan, Tinian and
Rota Islands, [Washington, D.C.?]: Federal Emergency Management Agency.
42. 1991: From Tortola to Kingstown: a report on eastern Caribbean political union. [Saint Lucia?]:
Voice Press.
43. 1991: Iles et sociétés insulaires: [Extraits du colloque «Territoires et sociétés insulaires:
permanences, changements et devenir», Brest, 15-17 novembre 1990, Norois.
44. 1992: Global climate change and the Pacific islands: hearing before the Committee on
Energy and Natural Resources, United States Senate, One Hundred Second Congress,
second session, on the scientific evidence and policy implications of sea level rise ...
Honolulu, HI, May 26, 1992, United States. Congress. Senate. Committee on Energy and
Natural Resources. Washington: U.S. G.P.O.: For sale by the U.S. G.P.O., Supt. of Docs.,
Congressional Sales Office.
45. 1992: Oceania nera: arte, cultura e popoli della Melanesia nelle collezioni del Museo di
antropologia e etnologia di Firenze: Firenze, Sala d’arme di Palazzo vecchio 30 aprile-9
agosto 1992.
46. 1992: Our islands’ past: historical documents about Cayman from the Cayman Islands
National Archive, George Town, Grand Cayman, B.W.I.: Cayman Islands National Archive
and Cayman Free Press.
47. 1992: Staten Island secession: the price of independence, Mayor’s Task Force on Staten
Island Secession, New York (N.Y.), [City of New York: Office of Management and Budget,
Dept. of Finance].
48. 1992: Studies on the natural history of the Caribbean region, Amsterdam:
Natuurwetenschappelijke Studiekring voor het Caraïbisch Gebied.
49. 1992: Voces de ultramar: arte en América Latina y Canarias, 1910-1960. [Las Palmas de
Gran Canaria]: Centro Atlántico de Arte Moderno.
50. 1993: Achievements & Problems of the First Ten Years, Independence, Dependence &
Interdependence: The First Ten Years of Solomon Islands Independence, University of the
South Pacific. pp. 164-8.
51. 1993: Cook Islands: national environmental management strategy. Apia, Western Samoa:
South Pacific Regional Environment Programme.
52. 1993: The Aleutians Campaign, June 1942-August 1943, Washington: Naval Historical
Center, Dept. of the Navy: For sale by the U.S. G.P.O., Supt. of Docs.
53. 1994: America, 1994 annual meeting, Boulder, CO, United States, Geological Society.
54. 1994: Bibliography of the Philippine Islands, Library of Congress, Ermita Manila: Reprinted
by National Historical Institute.
55. 1994: L’Intégration régionale dans le Monde, Paris, Karthala/GEMDEV.
56. 1994: Qing dai Zhong Liu guan xi dang an xu bian - Zhongguo di 1 li shi dang an guan bian,
Beijing: Zhonghua shu ju: Xin hua shu dian Beijing fa xing suo fa xing.
57. 1994: Sri Lanka: State of Human Rights, Colombo, Sri Lanka: Law and Society Trust.
2009
58. 1994: Verslunarskýrslur, Reykjavík: Statistical Bureau of Iceland.

59. 1995: The big death: Solomon Islanders remember World War II, University of the South
Pacific, Suva, 1995.
60. 1995: The Solomon Islands economy: achieving sustainable economic development.
[Canberra]: Australian Agency for International Development.
61. 1996: Guadeloupe, les Saintes, Marie-Galante, la Désirade, Saint-Martin, Saba, Saint-
Barthélemy et Anguilla, [Éd.] 1997-98, Hachette.
62. 1996: Kinalamten Pulitikat: Sinenten I Chamorro (Issues in Guam’s Political Development:
The Chamorro Perspective), 1996, Hale’-ta Series, Agana Guam: The Political Status
Education Coordinating Commission.
63. 1996: La mer: espace, perception et imaginaire dans le Pacifique Sud: actes du neuvième
Colloque, CORAIL.
64. 1996: Rade de Brest, baie de Douarnenez et les îles : atlas de la mer d’Iroise, Gallimard.
65. 1996: Sustainable tourism in islands and small states, Pinter.
66. 1997 : Vivre dans une île: une géopolitique des insularités: [actes du colloque, 19-22
septembre 1995, Casa de Cultura de Mahón]m, l’Harmattan.
67. 1997: Cambridge History of the Pacific Islanders, Cambridge University Press.
68. 1997: Coordination pour l’Océanie des recherches sur les arts, les idées et les littératures.
Colloque (09 ; 1996), Université française du Pacifique: CORAIL: l’Harmattan.
69. 1997: Hai wai Tai gang bao diao yun dong zhuan ji, Carbondale, Ill, Riben qin hua yan jiu xue
hui, (ilhas senkaku).
70. 1997: Île des merveilles: mirage, miroir, mythe, Centre culturel international (Cerisy-la-Salle,
Manche). Colloque (1993-08-02), l’Harmattan.
71. 1997: Îles : vivre entre ciel et mer, Muséum national d’histoire naturelle: Nathan.
72. 1997: L’éternel Recours: les impasses de l’économie assistée en Nouvelle-Calédonie, In: Le
Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut d’Etude du Développement
Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, pp..
99-119.
73. 1997: L’île et le volcan : formes et forces de l’imaginaire, Lettres modernes.
74. 1998: Literary archipelagoes, Éd. universitaires de Dijon] / impr.
75. 1998: A different kind of voyage: development and dependence in the Pacific Islands, [Manila,
Philippines], Asian Development Bank, Office of Pacific Operations.
76. 1998: Banking and finance in islands and small states, Pinter.
77. 1998: Land Tenure in the Pacific Developing Countries, Improving Growth Prospects in the
Pacific, Asian Development Bank, Manila, pp.37-68.
78. 1998: Quel transports dans les petites iles caraïbes?, in Geode Caraibe, Paris: Karthala.
79. 1998: Seminario internazionale di studi sul tema «Le grandi isole del Mediterraneo orientale tra
tarda antichità e medioevo»: in memoria di Luciano Laurenzi: Ravenna, 19-21 settembre.
80. 1998: The legacy of Ibo landing: Gullah roots of African American culture, edited by Marquetta
L. Goodwine & the Clarity Press Gullah Project, Atlanta, GA, Clarity Press.
81. 1998: The Past in the Future: Trends in the Diverse Histories of Pacific Islands Societies
& their Relevance for Today & Tomorrow (with Marjorie Tuainekore Crocombe), Pacific
2009
CEHA 7
Studies, Commonwealth Youth Programme, Honiara & Huddersfield.

82. 1999: An economic study for the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Saipan, MP:
Business Development Center, Northern Marianas College.
83. 1999: Archives Administration in Oceania, Archives and Manuscripts, vol. 27.
84. 1999: Islands 2000: the world of islands: what development on the eve of the year 2000
?: selected papers from the International Conference Giardini-Naxos, Italy, 19-24 May
1992, National Technical University.
85. 1999: Les outre-mers français: enjeux de la mondialisation: les grandes villes: insularité et
continentalité... [etc.], Paris: Belin.
86. 1999: Pacific islands nations in the age of globalization, Tokyo, Fondation for advanced
information and research.
87. 1999: Recent trends in population, labor force, employment, unemployment and wages:
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands 1973 to 1999, [Saipan, Mariana Islands],
Central Statistics Division, Department of Commerce.
88. 1999: Sustainable energies: building the future of islands: island solar agenda,
recommendations, proceedings: Island Solar Summit. Tenerife 1999, ITER: INSULA.
89. 2000, 2005: syllabi & bibliographies: 2000 to present, UHM, Center for Pacific Island Studies.
Disponível online em url: url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/content.html#biblio. Consulta
em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
90. 2000: Athènes et les îles grecques, Hachette.
91. 2000: Caribbean development strategies: issues and options, Largo, International
development options.
92. 2000: Polynesian Migrations & Voyaging Traditions Bibliography, Polynesian Voyaging
Society. Disponível online em url: http://pvs.kcc.hawaii.edu/traditionsbib.html. Consulta
93. 2000: Security Challenges in the New Millenium, The South Pacific: Zone of Peace or Sea of
Troubles? Australian Defence Studies Centre, Canberra. Reprinted in Islands Business
under the title “Australia, NZ Need to Understand Region Better”, vol 26(9), 38-9.
94. 2000:Leiđsögn um íslenska byggingalist, Reykjavík, Arkitektafélag Íslands.
95. 2000-2005: Pacific Studies Site Links to other Bibliographies, Pacific Studies Initiative,
University of Hawaii. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/inet-links.
html#Biblio. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
96. 2000: Isule literarie = Des îles littéraires: nouvelles de Méditerranée, Ajaccio [Corsica],
Albiana-CCU.
97. 2001: “Cultural Geographies in Practice: Intimate distance: fantasy islands and English
lakes”, in Cultural Geographies, vol. 8: pp. 112 - 119.
98. 2001: Anon. War in the Falklands, 1982, London: The Stationery Office.
99. 2001: Au bout du voyage, l’île: mythe et réalité, Centre de recherche VALS (Reims, Marne).
Colloque international (1; 1999; Reims), Presses universitaires de Reims.
100. 2001: Foreign investment climate in Forum island countries, Suva: Pacific Islands Forum
Secretariat.
101. 2001: Protocols Guide; Drumming the story; its our business, 2001, Mackay, Mackay and
District Australian South Sea Islander Association.
2009
102. 2001: To islands far away: the story of the Thomasites and their journey to the Philippines,
Manila, Public Affairs Section, U.S. Embassy.
103. 2001:Corso di cultura sull’arte ravennate e bizantina (44; 1988; Ravenne, Italie), Edizioni
del Girasole.
104. 2002: A Polynesian People’s Struggle to Maintain Community in the Solomon Islands, In
Constructing Moral Communities: Pacific Islander Strategies for Settling in New Places,
edited by Judith Modell. Special issue, Pacific Studies, 25(1/2):45-70.
105. 2002: Pacific diaspora; Island peoples in the United States and across the Pacific, Honolulu,
UH Press, 1-340, 22(4): 250-256.
106. 2002: Regional tourism strategy for the South and Central Pacific, Suva, Fiji: South Pacific
Tourism Organisation.
107. 2003: L’outre-mer français dans le Pacifique: Nouvelle-Calédonie, Polynésie française,
Wallis-et- Futuna, Paris-Nouméa, L’Harmattan.
108. 2003: Security for Small Polynesian States: The Cook Islands, Niue & Tuvalu (with Siliga
Kofe), Pacific Islands Forum, Suva.
109. 2004: United Nations, ESCAP - Economic and social Commission for Asia and the Pacific
(New York), Economic and Social Survey of Asia and the Pacific 2004: Asia-Pacific
Economies: Sustaining Growth and Tackling Poverty, no 2004, p. 1-293.
110. 2005: Archaeology and early history of the Channel Islands, Heather Sebire. (Revealing
history). Stroud: Tempus.
111. 2005: The Falklands War: [seminar] held at the Joint Services Command and Staff College
(JSCSC), Watchfield, Wiltshire on 5 June 2002, chaired by Geoffrey Till; paper by Lawrence
Freedman ; seminar edited by Andrew Dorman, Michael D. Kandiah and Gillian Staerck.
London: Centre for Contemporary British History, Institute for Historical Research.
112. 2006, 2008: Fiji Arthropod Survey bibliography online, the Fiji Terrestrial Arthropod Survey,
the National Science Foundation and the Schlinger Foundation. Disponível online em
url: http://hbs.bishopmuseum.org/fiji/biblio.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. Obs.:
informação bibliográfica sobre as ilhas Fiji.
113. 2006: Borneo bibliography, Free library. Disponível online em url: http://www.thefreelibrary.
com/Borneo+bibliography+2006.-a0166350079. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
114. 2006: The Aid Trade: Resource Flows, Trade-Offs, Sovereignty & Development, Pacific
Connection, vol 9.
115. 2006: The Channel Islands 1941-45: Hitler’s impregnable fortress; Charles Stephenson;
illustrated by Chris Taylor. (Fortress: The Castles & Fortifications Quarterly, 41). Oxford:
Osprey.
116. 2006: The decline and fall of St. Kilda: proceedings of an international conference organised
by The Islands Book Trust in August 2005 to mark the 75th anniversary of the evacuation
of St. Kilda. Port Ness: Islands Book Trust.
117. 2007: Tales and travels of a school inspector, in the Highlands and Islands at the end of the
19th century, including Jura, Heisker, Islay, Orkney, Coll, Argyll, Lewis and many others;
John Wilson. Edinburgh: Birlinn.
118. 2007: The biographical dictionary of Britain’s railway personalities, organisations & events
1597-1923: excluding Ireland, Isle of Man, and Channel Islands; Dawn Smith. Peterlee:
Glebe.
119. 2007: The Indian Uprising of 1857-8: prisons, prisoners, and rebellion; Clare Anderson.
2009
CEHA 9
(Anthem South Asian studies), London; New York: Anthem Press.

120. 2007: The official history of the Falklands Campaign; Lawrence Freedman. (Whitehall
histories: government official history series). Rev. and updated edn. London: Routledge,
2 vols.
121. 2007: Viking-age communities: pap-names and papar in the Hebridean Islands; Kristján
Ahronson. (BAR, British ser., 450). Oxford: Archaeopress.
122. 2008: Kourosh Ahmadi Islands and international politics in the Persian Gulf: Abu Musa and
Tunbs in strategic perspective, London; New York: Routledge, cop.
123. Aalen, F. H. A. ‘The mythical isles and North Atlantic discovery’, In Clarke, Howard B.;
Prunty, Jacinta; Hennessy, Mark (ed.), Surveying Irelands’ past: multidisciplinary essays
in honour of Anngret Simms (Dublin: Geography Publications), 169-195.
124. Aarsse, Robert, 1993: L’Indonesie, Paris, karthala.
125. Abad, Ricardo G., Visayas Rowe V. Cadeliña, Violeta Lopez-Gonzaga, 1986: Faces
of Philippine poverty: four cases from the editors, [Philippines],Visayas Research
Consortium, Philippine Social Science Council.
126. Abbott, G.C., 1975: ‘Small states - the paradox of their existence.’ In P. Selwyn (ed.),
Development Policy in Small Developing Countries, London: Croom Helm.
127. Abbott, L. D., 1995: “Neogene Tectonic Reconstruction of the Adelbert-Finisterre-New Britain
Collision, Northern Papua New Guinea”, in Journal of Southeast Asian Earth Sciences
11(1): 33-51.
128. Abbott, Roland W., 1994: A brief history of the Offer Wadham Island, Newfoundland: the
million dollar rock, St. John’s, Nfld.: Creative.
129. Abers, G. A. and S. W. Roecker, 1991: “Deep-Structure of an Arc-Continent Collision -
Earthquake Relocation and Inversion For Upper Mantle P and S-Wave Velocities Beneath
Papua New Guinea.” Journal of Geophysical Research-Solid Earth and Planets 96(B4):
6379-6401.
130. Abeyasekere, Susan, 1987: Jakarta: A History, Singapore: Oxford University Press.
131. Abeyratne, R.I.R., 1997: The impact of tourism and air transport on the small island
developing states, Environmental Policy and Law. 27(3), pp. 198-202.
132. Abraham, Sara, 2007: Labour and the multiracial project in the Caribbean: its history and its
promise, Lanham: Lexington Books.
133. Abulafia, David, 1994: A Mediterranean emporium: the Catalan kingdom of Majorca,
Cambridge [England]; New York: Cambridge University Press.
134. Abulafia, David, 2008: The discovery of mankind: Atlantic encounters in the age of Columbus,
New Haven [Conn.]: Yale University Press.
135. Accilien, Cécile, 2008: Rethinking marriage in francophone African and Carribean literatures,
Lanham, MD: Lexington Books.
136. ACCT: Agence Intergouvernementale de la Francophonie – París, France, 1983: Medecine
traditionnelle et pharmacopee: contribution aux etudes ethnobotaniques et floristiques a
maurice (iles maurice et rodrigues), Paris: acct.
137. Ackrén, Maria e Olausson, Pär M., Condition(s) for Island Autonomy, International Journal
on Minority and Group Rights, Volume 15, Numbers 2-3, 2008, pp. 227-258(32).
138. Ackrén, Maria, 2002: Microstates and Autonomies in the Caribbean and South Pacific,
Islands of the Workshop VII Conference: New Horizons in Island Studies, June 26-30,
2009
Canada.
139. Ackrén, Maria, 2005: Territoriella autonomier i världen – En empirisk studie över de
självstyrda områdena i världen. Monography, The Åland Islands’ Peace Institute.
140. Ackrill, Margaret, 1994: British imperialism in microcosm: the annexation of the Cocos
(Keeling) Islands (London School of Economics, working papers in economic history,
18), London: London School of Economics and Political Science, 1994.
141. Acosta, Miguel Angel Cabrera, José Alcaraz Abellán...[et al.], 2000: La Guerra Civil en
Canarias, La Laguna,Francisco Lemus Editor.
142. Acquaviva, Sabino, 1987: La Corsica: Storia di un genocidio, Franco Angeli, Milano.
143. Adams, Kathleen M. 1984, Come to Tana Toraja, “Land of the Heavenly Kings”: Travel
Agents as Brokers in Ethnicity, Annals of Tourism Research, 11:469-485.
144. Adams, Kathleen M., 1988: Carving a New Identity: Ethnic and Artistic Change in Tana
Toraja. Ph.D. dissertation, University of Washington.
145. Adams, Kathleen M., 1990: Cultural Commoditization in Tana Toraja, Indonesia, Cultural
Survival Quarterly, 14(1):31-33.
146. Adams, Kathleen M., 1991: Distant Encounters: Travel Literature and the Shifting Images of
the Toraja of Sulawesi, Indonesia, Terrae Incognitae, 23:81-92.
147. Adams, Kathleen M., 1995: Making-Up the Toraja? The Appropriation of Tourism,
Anthropology, and Museums for Politics in Upland Sulawesi, Indonesia.Ethnology,
34:143-153.
148. Adams, Kathleen M., 1997: Ethnic Tourism and the Renegotiation of Traditionin Tana Toraja
(Sulawesi, Indonesia), Ethnology, 36:309-320.
149. Adams, Kathleen M., 1997a: Touting Touristic “Primadonas”: Tourism, Ethnicity, and national
Integration in Sulawesi, Indonesia. In Tourism, Ethnicity, and the State in Asian and Pacific
Societies. Robert E. Wood andMichel Picard, eds. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.
Pp. 155-180.
150. Adams, Kathleen M. 1998. Domestic Tourism and Nation-Building in South Sulawesi,
Indonesia and the Malay World, 26:77-96.
151. Adams, R., and M. (eds), 1992: European discovery or multiple discoveries, in Quanchi
Culture contact in the Pacific, Melbourne, CUP (Chps 3 and 4).
152. Adams, Ron, 1984: In the land of strangers: a century of European contact with Tanna,
1774-1874, Canberra.
153. Adamson, E., [et al.], 1984: “West Nakanai (Kimbe) oil palm scheme, Papua New Guinea:
social, economic and environmental aspects”, in Environmental Report No. 20.
154. Adamson, E., L. Fett, A. Huntsman and G. Scarlett, 1984: West Nakanai (Kimbe) oil
palm scheme, Papua New Guinea: social, economic and environmental aspects,
Environmental Report No. 20. Melbourne, Graduate School of Environmental Science,
Monash University.
155. Adamthwaite, Anthony, 2003: ‘The British experience of war since 1945: Suez 1956,
Falklands 1982’. In Domergue Cloarec, Danielle; Coppolani, Antoine (ed.), Des conflits
en mutation? : de la guerre froide aux nouveaux conflits : essai de typologie : de 1947 à
nos jours, Bruxelles: Editions Complexe, 255-69.
156. ADB, 2005: Toward a new Pacific regionalism: an Asian Development Bank-Commonwealth
Secretariat joint report to the Pacific Islands Forum Secretariat. Metro Manila: Asian
2009
CEHA 11
Development Bank.
157. ADCOL (n.d.), Communications Systems - A 1979 Study of Cape Gloucester, Port Moresby,
Administrative College of PNG.
158. Adderley, Rosanne Marion; others, 2006: New negroes from Africa: slave trade abolition
and free African settlement in the nineteenth-century Caribbean (Blacks in the diaspora),
Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
159. Addy, G., 1984: An economic analysis of banana intercropping in the windward islands,
Fruits, no 2, p. p. 100-106.
160. Adelaide Merlande, Jacques, 1992: La Caraibe et la Guyane au temps de la revolution et de
l’Empire (1789-1804), Paris: karthala.
161. Adkin, Mark, 1989: Urgent Fury: The Battle for Grenada: The Truth Behind the Largest U.S.
Military Operation Since Vietnam. Trans-Atlantic Publications.
162. Adler, Emily Stier; Lemons, J. Stanley, 1990: The Elect: Rhode Island’s women legislators,
1922-1990, Providence: League of Rhode Island Historical Societies.
163. Adrover Rosselló, Pedro, 1995: La Orden de Predicadores en la historia de Baleares (siglos
XIII-XX), presentación, Lorenzo Galmés Más, epílogo, Teodor Ubeda Gramage, Palma,
Mallorca: Lleonard Muntaner.
164. Afonso, João, 1997: Bibliografia Geral dos Açores, Sequência açoriana do dicionário
bibliográfico português, Angra do Heroísmo, SREC, Direcção Regional dos Assuntos
Culturais, 3 vols.
165. Afflerbach, Holger, 2001: ‘”Mit wehender Fahne untergehen”: Kapitulationsverweigerungen
in der deutschen Marine’, Vierteljahrshefte für Zeitgeschichte, 49:4, 598-612.
166. Aglioni, François, 2004: La coopération régionale dans l’Océanie insulaire: des processus
polymorphes, In Maillard, Jean-Claude (coord.), Insularité, société et développement,
les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. 57, no 225, p. p. 53-74.
167. Agniel, D., 1998: Aux Marquises, Paris, L’Harmattan/IRD.
168. AGS, 1943: Routes Across New Britain, Special Report No. 25, Allied Geographical Section,
Southwest Pacific Area.
169. Aguillon, Florian, 1997: Chroniques marquisiennes, 1978-1983: la philosophie du ravage,
Paris, Harmattan.
170. AHelu Thaman, K., 2007: ‘Towards Different Island Research’ in G. Baldacchino (ed.) A
Historical Geography, Vol. 39, No. 4, pp. 554-581.
171. Ahern, Emily, 1981: The Anthropology of Taiwanese Society, Stanford, Calif.: Stanford
University Press.
172. Ahlburg, D., 1994: Return migration from the United States to American Samoa …, PS, 17,
2, 71-84.
173. Ahmadi, Kourosh, 2008: Islands and international politics in the Persian Gulf: Abu Musa and
Tunbs in strategic perspective, London; New York: Routledge.
174. Ahronson, Kristján, 2007, Viking-age communities: pap-names and papar in the Hebridean
Islands, Oxford: Archaeopress.
175. Ainet, Guy, 1998: Goree et l’Ile Saint-Louis du Senegal: de l’insularite a l’urbanite, revue de
geographie du cameroun, 1998, vol. vol. 13, no 2, p. p. 50-65.
176. Akauola, L., Ilaiu, L. and Samate, A., 1980: The social and cultural impact of tourism in
2009
Tonga. In: Crocombe, R. and Rajotte, F. (eds) Pacific Tourism as Islanders See it. Suva,
Institute of Pacific Studies: USP, pp.17-23.
177. Akimichi, Tomoya, 1984: Uo to bunka: Satawarutō minzoku gyoruishi, Tōkyō: Kaimeisha.
178. Akis, S., Peristianis, N, and Warner, J., 1996: Residents attitudes to tourism development:
the case of Cyprus, Tourism Management, 17(7), pp. 481-404.
179. Akus, W., [et al.], 1996: “West New Britain Province galip survey: June 24th to July 7th
1996”, in KGIDP galip nut conference, Kandrian.
180. Alamkan, Myriam, 2003: Histoire maritime des Petites Antilles, XVIIe et XVIIIe siècles,
préface de René-Roger Annerose. – Matoury (Guyane): Ibis rouge.
181. Alan A. Block, 1998: Masters of Paradise, New Brunswick and London, Transaction
Publishers.
182. Alante-Lima, Willy, 2000: L’île de Monrire: chronique et histoires breves, Saint-Maur-des
Fossés, Editions Sépia.
183. Alasia, Sam, 1997: «Party Politics and Government in the Solomon Islands», Discussion
Paper 97:7, State, Society and Governance Project, Australian National University,
Canberra, Australia.
184. Albertini, F.; Salini, D. (dir.), 1998: Îles et mémoires, Corte, Université de Corse/Presses
universitaires Corses.
185. Albinski, 1994: America’s future in the Pacific Islands region, Journal of the Pacific Society,
16, 4, 14-25.
186. Albuquerque, Luís de, 1990: “As ilhas que estavam lá…”, in Oceanos, nº 5, pp. 52 – 67.
187. Albuquerque, Luís de; Madeira Santos, Maria Emília, 1995: História Geral de Cabo Verde,
[Trad.: Histoire generale du Cap Vert], Instituto de Investigacao Cientifica Tropical –
Lisbonne, Portugal; Instituto National da Cultura de Cabo Verde.
188. Alcaraz Abellán, José, 1999: Instituciones y sociedad en Gran Canaria, 1936-1960, Las
Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo de Gran Canaria.
189. Aldrich, R., 1990: The French presence in the South Pacific 1842-1940, London.
190. Aldrich, Richard James, 2000: ‘The decolonisation of the Pacific islands’, Itinerario, 24:3-4,
173-191.
191. Aldrich, Robert, 1990: The French presence in the South Pacific, 1842-1940, Basingstoke.
192. Aldrich, Robert, 1993: France and the South Pacific since 1940, Basingstoke: Macmillan.
193. Aldrich, Robert; Connell, John, 1998: 1946 - The last colonies, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
194. Alenyar i Fuster, Miquel, 1984: Introducció a l’economia de les Balears, Palma de Mallorca:
Caixa de Balears “Sa nostra”.
195. Alexander, Alison (editor), 2005: The Companion to Tasmanian History Centre for Tasmanian
Historical Studies, University of Tasmania, Hobart.
196. Alexander, Caroline, 2003: The Bounty: The True Story of the Mutiny on the Bounty, Viking
Penguin, Londres.
197. Alexander, L., 1980: «Centre and Periphery: The Case of Island Systems», in Gottmann J.
(dir.), Centre and Periphery. Spatial Variations in Politics, Beverly Hills, Sage Publications,
p. 135-147.
2009
CEHA 13
198. Alexander, Ronni, 1994: Putting the earth first: alternatives to nuclear security in Pacific
Island states, Honolulu, Hawaii: Matsunaga Institute for Peace, University of Hawaii.
199. Alexeyeff, Kalissa, 2008: Globalizing Drag in the Cook Islands: Friction, Repulsion, and
Abjection, The Contemporary Pacific, Volume 20, Number 1, Spring pp. 143-161.
200. Alié Claudy et al., 2007: Une méditerranée caraïbe: Clovis F. Beauregard, 60 ans de
coopération régionale, 1946-2005, Fort-de-France: Archives départementales de la
Martinique.
201. Allaire, Louis, 1997: «The Caribs of the Lesser Antilles». In Samuel M. Wilson, The Indigenous
People of the Caribbean, Gainesville, Florida: University of Florida. pp. 180–185.
201. Allan, Colin H., 1983: “The Transfer of Power: Ministerialization in Island Countries”, in
International Review of Administrative Sciences, Jan 1983; vol. 49: pp. 49 - 60.
202. Allan, H.H., 1982: Indigenous Tracheophyta - Psilopsida, Lycopsida, Filicopsida,
Gymnospermae, Dicotyledons, Flora of New Zealand Volume I. Botany Division,
Department of Scientific and Industrial Research.
203. Allen, Harry, 1981: The censuses of 1901 and 1911 for Copeland Island, Journal of Bangor
Historical Society, 1, 10-12.
204. Allen, J.; Rath, Daniel; Johnston, Raymond, 1980: “The Lamogai Family of Languages”, in
Raymond Johnston, ed., Language, Communication and Development in New Britain,
Ukarumpa: SIL, Pp. 185-196.
205. Allen, J. and C. Gosden, Eds. 1991: Report of the Lapita Homeland Project, [Occasional
Papers in Prehistory, No.20], Canberra, Dept Prehistory, RSPacS, ANU.
206. Allen, J. and J. P. White, 1989: The Lapita Homeland: some new data and an interpretation,
Journal of the Polynesian Society, 98:129-57.
207. Allen, J., 2000: “From beach to beach: The development of maritime economies in prehistoric
Melanesia”, In: S. O’Connor and P. Veth, Eds, East of Wallace’s Line: studies of past
and present maritime cultures of the Indo-Pacific region, Rotterdam; Brookfield, VT, A.A.
Balkema, pp. 139-176.
208. Allen, Madelene, 1997: Wake of the Invercauld: shipwrecked in the sub-Antarctic, Montréal,
McGill-Queen’s University Press.
209. Allen, Matthew, 2002: Identity and Resistance in Okinawa. Lanham, Maryland: Rowman &
Littlefield Publishers, Inc..
210. Allen, Philip M., 1987: Security and nationalism in the Indian Ocean: lessons from the Latin
Quarter Islands, Boulder, Westview Press.
211. Alley, R., 1998: The United Nations in Southeast Asia and the South Pacific, Basingstoke,
Macmillan.
212. Alley, R., 2000: The domestic politics of international relations: cases from Australia, New
Zealand and Oceania, Aldershot, Ashgate.
213. Allibert, C. Mayotte, 1984: Plaque tournante et microcosme de l’Ocean Indien occidental,
son histoire avant 1841, Paris: anthropos.
214. Allibert, Claude, 1996: The early pre-Islamic history of the Comores islands: links with
Madagascar and Africa, in Indian Ocean in antiquity, edited by Julian Reade, London;
New York: Kegan Paul International in association with the British Museum, pp. 461-470.
215. Allibert, Claude, 2008: “Austronesian Migration and the Establishment of the Malagasy
Civilization: Contrasted Readings in Linguistics, Archaeology, Genetics and Cultural
2009
Anthropology”, in Diogenes, May; vol. 55: pp. 7 - 16.

216. Allied Geographical Section, 1944-45: An Annotated bibliography of the southwest Pacific and
adjacent areas, Allied Geographical Section, Southwest Pacific Area, [Brisbane?]:Allied
Geographical Section.
217. Allison, Karen J., 1984: A View from the islands: the Samal of Tawi-tawi, Dallas, Tex.:
International Museum of Cultures.
218. Allman, James, 1983: L’Emigration Haitienne vers l’Etranger de 1950 a 1980, Conjonction,
no 157, p. p. 65-81.
219. Allsworth-Jones, P., 2008: Pre-Columbian Jamaica, Tuscaloosa, AL: University of Alabama
Press.
220. Almeida Aguiar, Antonio S., 2005: Británicos, deporte y burguesía en una ciudad atlántica:
Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, 1880-1914, [Las Palmas]: Ayuntamiento de Las Palmas de
Gran Canaria: Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones.
221. Almeida Serra, António M. de, 2001: “Timor Loro Sa’e: It’s Hard to Build a New Country”, in
Lusotopie, pp. 269-298.
222. Almeida, Germano, 2003: Cabo Verde: Viagem pela História das Ilhas, Lisboa, Editorial
Caminho.
223. Almeida, Onésimo Teotónio, 1989: Açores, Açorianos, Açorianidade: um espaço cultural,
Marinho Matos.
224. Almeida, Onésimo Teotónio, [org.], 1986: Da Literatura Açoriana-subsídios para um balanço.
Angra do Heroísmo, SREC.
225. Almond, R. A., 1981: Investigation of 12, 13 August, 1979 earthquake swarm near Bialla,
west New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Geological Survey, Report.
226. Alomar Esteve, Gabriel; Canyelles, Antoni I. Alomar i., 1994: El patrimoni cultural de les Illes
Balears: idees per una política de defensa i protección,[Palma, Spain?]: Institut d’Estudis
Baleàrics.
227. Alomar i Canyelles, Antoni I., 1998: L’Estendard, la festa nacional més antiga d’Europa (s.
XIII-XXI), pròleg d’Armand de Fluvià, Palma, Edicions Documenta Balear.
228. Alomar i Canyelles, Antoni, 1998: L’exércit mallorquí de la fi de l’edat mitjana a la seva
desaparició, pròleg de Gabriel Cardona, Palma de mallorca: Documenta Balear.
229. Alomo, Tony, 1984: An Island in Agony, Published by Tony Palomo.
230. Alonso, Irma T., 2002: Caribbean economies in the twenty-first century, Gainesville,
University Press of Florida.
231. Als, Thomas D., Tove H. Jorgensen, Anders D. Børglum, Peter A. Petersen, Ole Mors and
August G. Wang, 2006: Highly discrepant proportions of female and male Scandinavian
and British Isles ancestry within the isolated population of the Faroe Islands, European
Journal of Human Genetics, 14, 497–504. doi:10.1038/sj.ejhg.5201578. Disponível
online em url: http://www.nature.com/ejhg/journal/v14/n4/full/5201578a.html. Consulta em
29 de Julho de 2009.
232. Alsop, James D., 2005: “Island Refashioning: The Nantucket Agricultural Society, 1856-
1880”, New England Quarterly, vol.77, no.4, pp.563-587.
233. Altinay, Mehmet; Biçak, Hasan Ali, 1998: “Competitive strategies for the tourism sector of a
small island state: The case of North Cyprus”, in Journal of Vacation Marketing, Jan; vol.
4: pp. 136 - 144.
2009
CEHA 15
234. Altman I. and Butler R., 1994: The contact of cultures; perspectives on the Quincentenary,
(of Columbus in the Americas in 1492), American Historical Review, April, pp.478-503.
235. Altman, Ann M., 2004: Early Visitors to Easter Island 1864-1877 (translations of the
accounts of Eugène Eyraud, Hippolyte Roussel, Pierre Loti and Alphonse Pinart; with an
Introduction by Georgia Lee). Los Osos, CA: Easter Island Foundation.
236. Alvar, Manuel, 1993: Estudios canários, Islas Canarias: Viceconsejería de Cultura Y
Deportes, Gobierno de Canarias.
237. Álvarez Astacio, Mrinali, 2009: De dónde dicen que vino la gente, San Juan, P. R.: La
Editorial Universidad de Puerto Rico.
238. Alvarez, José, 2004: Cuban Agriculture Before 1959: The Social Situation, Cuba’s Agricultural
Sector, University Press of Florida.
239. AM, Gibson, 1993: Yankees in paradise; the Pacific basin frontier, University of New Mexico
Press.
240. Amadio, Nadine, 1993: Pacifica: myth, magic, and traditional wisdom from the South Sea
Island, photographs by John Tristram, Sydney, Australia; New York, NY, USA: Angus &
Robertson.
241. Amaral, Ilídio do, 2001: «As Ilhas Atlânticas e Índicas como Pontos Nodais na Rede de
Globalização Iniciada nos Séculos XV a XVII», Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.) Actas
do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama a Portugal,
Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999,2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos
Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses,
pp. 113-138.
242. Amaral, João Bosco Mota, 1990: O Desafio Insular, Ponta Delgada, Signo.
243. Amarílis, Orlanda, 1992: “Josefa de Sta. Maria nas Ilhas de Cabo Verde Achadas pelo
Piloto Diogo Gomes e pelo Genovês Antonioto Usodimore, Companheiro de Cadamosto
no Ano de 1460”, in Oceanos, nº 10, pp. 129 – 130.
244. Ambrose, W. R.; Johnson, R. W., 1986: “Unea: an obsidian non-source in Papua New
Guinea”, in Journal of the Polynesian Society 95(4): 49l-7.
245. Ambrose, W.; Golson, J.; Yen, D., 2000: Jim Allen and the Lapita Homeland Project, in: A.
Anderson and T. Murray, Eds. Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of
Jim Allen. Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, The Australian National University,
pp. 31-37.
246. Amiot-Jouenne, Pascale, editor, 2001: Irlande: insularité, singularité?: actes du Colloque de
la Société française d’études irlandaises, Université de Perpignan, 23 et 24 mars 2001,
Société française d’études irlandaises, Pascale Amiot-Jouenne, Colloque, Université de
Perpignan, Presses universitaires de Perpignan, 2001.
247. Amirahmadi, edited by Hooshang, 1996: Small islands, big politics: the Tonbs and Abu
Musa in the Persian Gulf, New York: St. Martin’s Press.
248. Amorim, Norberta, «Um Estudo de População e Sociedade: O Caso de S. João do Pico
(Séculos XVII e XVIII)», pp. 33-55, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do
Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas
Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos
Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses.
249. Amuedo-Dorantes, Catalina, Susan Pozo and Carlos Vargas-Silva, 2007: Remittances
and the Macroeconomy: The Case of Small Island Developing States, No UNU-WIDER
2009
Research Paper RP2007/22, Working Papers from World Institute for Development
Economic Research (UNU-WIDER). Disponível online em url: 2009. http://www.wider.
unu.edu/stc/repec/pdfs/rp2007/rp2007-22.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
250. Amussen, Susan Dwyer, 2007: Caribbean exchanges: slavery and the transformation of
English society, 1640-1700, Chapel Hill: The University of North Carolina Press.
251. Anastasiou, Harry, 2008: Broken Olive Branch: Nationalism Ethnic Conflict and the Quest for
Peace in Cyprus, Syracuse University PressAnckar, Dag Carsten, 1998: Cultural heritage
and electoral systems: the case of small island states, Åbo: Dept. of Political Science, Åbo
Akademi University.
252. Anckar, Dag Carsten, 2002: Why are Small Island States Democracies? In The Round Table,
Vol. 91, No 365, pp. 375-390.
253. Anckar, Dag Carsten, 2007: Islands, size, volcanoes: the study of the physical setting of
politics, Åbo, Finland: Department of Political Science, Åbo Akademi University.
254. Anckar, Dag Carsten, 2008: “Size, Islandness, and Democracy: A Global Comparison”, in
International Political Science Review/ Revue internationale de science politique, Sep.;
vol. 29: pp. 433 - 459.
255. Andaya, Leonard Y., 1993: The World of Maluku: Eastern Indonesia in the Early Modern
Period. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.
256. Anderson A, 1998: The welcome of strangers; an ethnohistory of Southern Maori AD 1650-
1850, Dunedin, University of Otago Press.
257. Anderson D., ed., 1990: The PNG-Australia relationship; problems and prospects, Sydney,
Pacific Security Research Institute/Institute of Public Affairs.
258. Anderson, Kay, 1998: “Science and the Savage: the Linnean Society of New South Wales,
1874-1900”, in Cultural Geographies, Apr.; vol. 5: pp. 125 - 143.
259. Anderson, Atholl and Tim Murray, 2000: Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour
of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, he Australian National University,
pp. 161-170.
260. Anderson, Atholl J., 2001: The Prehistoric Archaeology of Norfolk Island, Southwest Pacific,
Canberra, Australian National Museum.
261. Anderson, Benedict, 2001: “Imagining East Timor”, in Lusotopie, pp. 233-239.
262. Anderson, Clare, 2007: The Indian Uprising of 1857-8: prisons, prisoners, and rebellion,
(Anthem South Asian studies), London; New York: Anthem Press.
263. Anderson, Duncan, 2002: The Falklands War 1982 (Essential histories (Osprey Publishing),
Oxford: Osprey.
264. Anderson, John, 2001: Between slavery and freedom: special magistrate John Anderson’s
journal of St. Vincent during the Apprenticeship; edited by Roderick A. McDonald;
foreward by Richard S. Dunn (Early American studies), Philadelphia (PA): University of
Pennsylvania Press.
265. Anderson, Robert S., Grove, Richard H.; Hiebert, Karis (ed.), 2006: Islands, forests and
gardens in the Caribbean: conservation and conflict in environmental history (Warwick
University Caribbean Studies). Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean.
266. Anderson, Stephen, Raphael Apuatimi, 1985: Tiwi Pima Art: Bathurst and Melville Islands,
Nguiu, N.T., Nguiu Nginingawila Literature Production Centre.
267. Anderson, Tim, 2003: Self-determination after Independence: East Timor and the World
2009
CEHA 17
Bank, Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 11, No. 1, Pp. 169-185.

268. Andrade Silva, Luiz, 1995: “Le rôle des émigrés dans la transition démocratique aux Îles du
Cap-Vert”, in Lusotopie, 315-322.
269. Andrade, Elisa, 2000: Quelques aspects du développement économique, social et politique
aux Iles du Cap-Vert (1975-1999), Documents de Travail - Most, Andrea A.J., Overfield
O.H., 2005: The Human Record, Vol 1; Letter by Christopher Columbus concerning recently
discovered islands. Houghton Mifflin Company.
270. Andreani, Jean-Louis et Yves Marc Ajchenbaum [textes sélectionnés et présentés], 2005:
La Corse: histoire d’une insularité, Paris: [EJL: «Le Monde»], impr.
271. Andreou, Stelios, 2001: “The Ionian Islands in the Bronze Age and Early Iron Age 3000–800
BC”, in European Journal of Archaeology, vol. 4: pp. 414 - 415.
272. Andress, Reinhard, 2000: «Der Inselgarten»: das Exil deutschsprachiger Schriftsteller auf
Mallorca, 1931 – 1936, Rodopi.
273. Andrews, Philip, 1991: Ko Mata: the life in New Zealand of Anne Chapman, missionary at
the Bay of Islands, Rotorua and Maketu 1830-1855,[Rotorua, N.Z.]: Rotorua & District
Historical Society.
274. Andriantsiferana, Marta; Ramiarison, Claudine responsables de l’édition. 1993: Médecine
traditionnelle et pharmacopée, environnement et développement durable: réunion sous-
régionale de l’Océan Indienne, Antananarivo, Madagascar, du 26 au 30 avril 1993, [Paris]:
Direction générale de la coopération technique et du développement économique, Agence
de coopération culturelle et technique; Antanananarivo: Tsipika.
275. Andriotis, K., 1998: An Analysis of the Economic Impacts of Regional Tourism Development
in Greece: The Island of Crete, Bournemouth University, Bournemouth.
276. Andriotis, K., 2000: Local Community Perceptions of Tourism as a Development Tool: The
Island of Crete, PhD thesis. Bournemouth: Bournemouth University.
277. Andriotis, K., 2001: Tourism Planning and Development in Crete. Recent Tourism Policies
and their Efficacy, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 9(4): 298-316.
278. Andriotis, K., Titomichelaki, M., Kafetzakis, V., Mavrikakis, A., Kapetanakis, G., Marnelakis,
I. and Bardis, V., 2001: Tourism and Development of Health Services in the Region of
Crete, Medical Annals, 26(11): 545-553, [in Greek].
279. Andriotis, K., 2002: Local Authorities in Crete and the Development of Tourism, The
Journal of Tourism Studies, 13(2):53-62. Disponível online em url: http://www.jcu.edu.au/
business/idc/groups/public/documents/journal_article/jcudev_012849.pdf. Consulta em
15 de Agosto de 2009.
280. Andriotis, K., 2002a: Residents’ Satisfaction or Dissatisfaction with Public Sector Governance.
The Cretan Case, Tourism and Hospitality Research: The Surrey Quarterly Review, 4(1):
53-68.
281. Andriotis, K., 2002b: Scale of Hospitality Firms and Local Economic Development - Evidence
from Crete, Tourism Management, 23(4): 333-341.
282. Andriotis, K. and Vaughan D.R., 2003: Urban Residents’ Attitudes Towards Tourism
Development: The case of Crete, Journal of Travel Research, 42(2): 172-185.
283. Andriotis, K., 2003: Coastal Resorts Morphology: The Cretan Experience, Tourism
Recreation Research, 28(1): 67-76.
284. Andriotis, K., 2003a: Dependency on Tour Operators. Problem Faced by the Cretan Tourism
Businesses and the Views of their Owners/Managers, International Journal of Hospitality
2009
and Tourism Administration, 4(3): 23-48.

285. Andriotis, K., 2003b: Problems faced by the Cretan tourism industry as perceived by the
business people, Tourism: An International Interdisciplinary Journal, 51(1): 21-30.
286. Andriotis, K., 2003c: Problems in Island Tourism Development: The Insular Greek Regions
In: Bramwell, B. (ed), Coastal Mass Tourism. Diversification and Sustainable Development
in Southern Europe, Channel View Publications.
287. Andriotis, K., 2003d: Tourism in Crete. A Form of Modernisation, Current Issues in Tourism,
6(1): 23-53.
288. Andriotis, K. and Vaughan D.R., 2004: The Tourism Workforce and Policy: The Case of
Crete, Current Issues in Tourism, 7(1): 66-87.
289. Andriotis, K., 2004: Problems in Island Tourism Development: The Insular Greek Regions. In:
Bramwell, B. (ed.) Coastal Mass Tourism. Diversification and Sustainable Development
in Southern Europe, Clevedon: Channel View Publications, pp. 114-132.
290. Andriotis, K., 2004a: The Perceived Impact of Tourism Development by Cretan Residents,
Tourism and Hospitality Planning and Development, 1(2): 1-22.
291. Andriotis, K., 2005: Community Groups Perceptions and Preferences to Tourism
Development. Evidence From Crete, Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Research, 29(1):
67-90.
292. Andriotis, K., 2005a: Seasonality in Crete. Problem or a way of life?, Tourism Economics,
11(2): 207-227.
293. Andriotis, K., 2006: Researching the development gap between the Hinterland and the
Coast Evidence from the Island of Crete, Tourism Management, 27(4): 629-639.
294. Andriotis, K., 2006a: The Cretan Resort Cycle - From Explorers and Cruisers to Mass
Tourism, In: Dixit, Ê. (ed), Promises and Perils in Hospitality and Tourism Management,
(pp. 261-280), Aman Publications, New Delhi.
295. Andriotis, K., 2008: The Greek Islands, In: Luck, M. (ed.), Encyclopedia of Tourism and
Recreation in Marine Environments, CAB International.
296. Andriotis, K., 2008a: Integrated resort development: The case of Cavo Sidero, Crete, Journal
of Sustainable Tourism, 16 (4), 428-444.
297. Andriotis, K. and Vaughan, D.R., 2008b: Reality, Perceptions and Tourism Policy in Crete,
The Interrelationship. Journal of Hospitality and Tourism, 1: 29-43.
298. Andronicou, Antonios, 1979: Tourism in Cyprus. In Tourism--Passport to Development?
Perspectives on the Social and Cultural Effects of Tourism in Developing Countries,
Emanuel de Kadt, ed. New York: OxfordUniversity Press, pp. 237-264.
299. Anell, B., 1960: “Hunting and Trapping Methods in Australia and Oceania”in Upsala, Studia
Ethnographica Upsaliensia,18.
300. Angel, Marc, 1978, 1980, 1998: The Jews of Rhodes: The History of a Sephardic Community.
New York: Sepher-Hermon Press Inc. and The Union of Sephardic Congregations.
301. Angleviel, Frederic, M. Charleux, W.G. Coppell, Jean-Pierre Doumenge 1991: Le Pacifique
Sud, bibliographie des thèses et mémoires récents = The South Pacific, a bibliography of
the recent theses and dissertations, Talence: CRET, Université de Bordeaux III et CEGET-
CNRS.
302. Angleviel, Frédéric, 1994: Les missions à Wallis et Futuna au 19e siècle, Iles et archipels n°
18, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
2009
CEHA 19
303. Angus, Sandra, 1997: “Promoting the Health of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Island People:
Issues for the Future”, in Promotion & Education, Sep 1997; vol. 4: pp. 22 - 24.
304. Annis, B., 1995: The Economy in Honduras: a country study (pp. 107-144), T.E. Merrill (ed.).
Washington DC: GPO.
305. Anon, 2001: “More IPM `tools’ for oil palm growers in Papua New Guinea”, in Appropriate
Technology 28(1): 43.
306. Anon, 2001: War in the Falklands, 1982. London: The Stationery Office.
307. Aranjo, Daniel, 1980: Insularité et outre-mer chez l’abbé Bégarie, Pau: Marrimpouey jeune.
308. Association Culture, arts et lettres des îles (Ouessant, Finistère), 2001: Les iles de Bretagne
sud: approche bibliographique / publ. à l’occasion du 3e Salon international du livre
insulaire.
309. Anson, D., 1983: Lapita Pottery of the Bismarck Archipelago and its affinities, PhD. University
of Sydney, Sydney.
310. Anson, D., 1986: “Lapita Pottery of the Bismarck Archipelago and its affinities” in Archaeology
in Oceania 21: 157-165.
311. Antheaume, B. et Bonnemaison J., 1988: Atlas des îles et des États du Pacifique sud,
Montpellier, Publisud/GIP Reclus.
312. Anthias, Floya; Ayres, Ron, 1983: Ethnicity and class in Cyprus, Race & Class, Jan 1983;
vol. 25: pp. 59 - 76.
313. Anthony, Rowland (ed.), 2001: Grouville, Jersey: the history of a country parish, Jersey:
Parish of Grouville.
314. AnthroGlobe. Contains bibliographies for Cook Islands, Fiji, Tonga, and Polynesian
Outliers, as well as a bibliography for Vanuatu languages. Disponível online em url: http://
anthroglobe.ca/contents/contents.htm. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
315. Anthropological Institute, 17,305-317.
316. Anzai, Shin, 1984: Nantō ni okeru Kirisutokyō no juyō, Tōkyō: Daiichi Shobō, Shōwa 59.
317. Aoyagi, Machiko, 1985: Modekugei: Mikuroneshia Parao no shinshūkyo, Tōkyō: Shinsensha,
1985.
318. Apostle, Richard,... [et al.] 2002: The restructuration of the Faroese economy: the significance
of the inner periphery, Frederiksberg, Denmark: Samfundslitteratur.
319. Apostolides, A., 2008: “How Similar to South-Eastern Europe were the Islands of Cyprus and
Malta in terms of Agricultural Output and Credit? Evidence during the Interwar Period”,
in: Bank of Greece Working papers No. 80: pp. 1-26. Disponível online em url: http://www.
bankofgreece.gr/BogEkdoseis/Paper200880.pdf .Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
320. Apostolopoulos, Y., 1994: The Perceived Effects of Tourism Industry Development: A
Comparison of two Hellenic Islands, PhD thesis. The University of Connecticut: Ann
Arbor MI.
321. Apostolopoulos, edited by Yorghos and Dennis J. Gayle, 2002: Island tourism and sustainable
development: Caribbean, Pacific, and Mediterranean experiences, Westport, Conn.:
Praeger.
322. Aragonès, Joandomènec; Olivella i Prats, Ignasi; Sardà, M. Gili i., 1984: Els Sistemes naturals
de les illes Medes, Barcelona: Institut d’Estudis Catalans.
323. Arai, Shōjirō, 1983: Tsuranuke hoppō ryōdo, Tōkyō: Nihon Kōgyō Shinbunsha, Shōwa 58.
2009
324. Aranda Mendíaz, Manuel, 1993: El hombre del siglo XVIII en Gran Canaria: el testamento como
fuente de investigación histórico-jurídico, prólogo de José Antonio Escudero López, Las
Palmas de G.C.: Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones.
325. Aranjo, Daniel, 1980: Insularité et outre-mer chez l’abbé Bégarie, Pau: Marrimpouey jeune;
[Tanger]: [D. Aranjo].
326. Araújo, Adília Maria Henriques Araújo, 2006: O existencialismo na obra de Fernando Aires:
uma consequência da insularidade?, Vila Real: Universidade de Trás-os-Montes e Alto
Douro. Dissertação doutoramento.
327. Araújo, Maria Benedita, 1995: “Elementos para o Estudo da Emigração Açoriana para o
Brasil no Início do Século XVIII”, Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 81–102.
328. Archer, B. H., 1988: Tourism and island economies: impact analyses. In: Cooper, C.P. and
Lockwood, A. (eds), Progress in Tourism, Recreation and Hospitality Management. Vol.
1. Chichester: Wiley, pp.125-134.
329. Archer, B.H., 1995: Importance of tourism for the economy of Bermuda, Annals of Tourism
Research, 22(4), pp.918-930.
330. Archer, B. H. and Fletcher, J., 1996: The economic impact of tourism in the Seychelles,
Annals of Tourism Research, 23(1), pp.32-47.
331. Archer, E., 1984: Estimating the relationship between tourism and economic growth in
Barbados, Journal of Travel Research, 22(4), pp.8-12.
332. Archives Historiques Nationales (Praia - Cap-Vert), 1998: Découverte des îles du Cap-Vert.
Praia, Monteiro, António Mascarenhas (préf.); Almeida, José Maria (introd.): AHN.
333. Archuleta, Margaret, Ed., 2000: Away from Home: American Indian Boarding, School
Experiences, Heard Museum Shop.
334. Are, Te Ariki Tara, History and traditions of Rarotonga, Auckland Polynesian Society, Dept.
of Anthropology, University of Auckland.
335. Areias, Laura, 2002: Ilhas riqueza, ilhas miséria: uma expressão literária da insularidade num
triângulo atlântico lusófono, Novo Imbondeiro.
336. Arena, Giuseppe A., 2003: Bibliografia generale delle Isole Eolie, Messina, Società
messinese di storia patria.
337. Arentz, F., [et al.], 1989: “Traditional uses of flora and vegetation of the Talasea, Hoskins,
Kapiura and Ania-Fulleborn timber areas, in Scientific Report 5.2B” in Scientific Reports
for Talasea, Hoskins, Kapiura and Ania-Fulleborn Environment Plan, Lae, Unitech
Development and consultancy Ptty. Ltd. Forestry, Environment and Ecology Unit.
338. Arge, Símun V., 1993: On the landnam of the Faroe Islands, In Batey, Colleen E.; Jesch,
Judith; Morris, Christopher D. (ed.), The viking age in Caithness, Orkney and the north
Atlantic, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 465-72.
339. Argentino, Automóvil Club, 1985: Territorio Nacional de la Tierra del Fuego, Antártida e
Islas del Atlántico Sur, Argentina, Automóvil Club Argentino, Sector de Cartografía Vial y
Turística, [Buenos Aires], El Club.
340. Aria, Matteo, 2007: Cercando nel vuoto: la memoria perduta e ritrovata nella Polinesia
francese, Ospedaletto, Pisa: Pacini.
341. Aribeth Erb, 1997: Contested Time and Place: Constructions of History in Todo, Manggarai
(Western Flores, Indonesia); Journal of Southeast Asian Studies, Vol. 28.
342. Arioli, A., 1989: Le isole mirabili: periplo arabo medievale, Torino: Einaudi.
2009
CEHA 21
343. Armesto, F. Fernández ...[et al.], 1995: Canarias e Inglaterra a través de la historia, Las
Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
344. Armonk, N.Y., M.E. Sharpe, 2000: Landscapes and communities on the Pacific Rim: cultural
perspectives from Asia to the Pacific Northwest, Armonk, N.Y. ; London: M.E. Sharpe.
345. Armstrong, H. W., Johnes, G., Johnes, J., and MacBean, A.I., 1993: ‘The role of transport
costs as a determinant of price level variations between the Isle of Man and the United
Kingdom’, World Development, vol. 21, 311-318.
346. Armstrong, H.W., and Read, R., 1994: ‘Micro-states, autonomous regions and the European
Union’, European Urban and Regional Studies, vol. 1, 71-78.
347. Armstrong, H. W., and Read, R., 1995: ‘Western European micro-states and EU autonomous
regions: The advantages of size and sovereignty’, World Development, vol. 23, 1229-
1245.
348. Armstrong, H. W., and Read, R., 2000: ‘Comparing the economic performance of dependent
territories and sovereign micro-states’, Economic Development and Cultural Change, vol.
48, 285-306.
349. Armstrong, H. W. and Read, R., 2002: ‘The phantom of liberty? Economic growth and the
vulnerability of small states’, Journal of International Development, 14(3), 435-458.
350. Armstrong, H.W. and Read, R., 2002a:‘Small states, islands and small states that are also
islands’, Studies in Regional Science, vol. 33(1), 1-24.
351. Armstrong, H. W. and Read, R., 2003b: ‘Small states and island states: Implications of
size, location and isolation for prosperity’, in J. Poot (ed), On the Edge of the Global
Economy: Implications for Economic Geography for Small and Medium Sized Economies
at Peripheral Locations, Edward Elgar, Cheltenham, 6-34.
352. Armstrong, H. W., and Read, R., 2003c: ‘Micro-states and sub-national regions: Mutual
industrial policy lessons’, International Regional Science Review, vol. 26, 117-141.
353. Armstrong, H. W., de Kervenoael, R.J., Li, X., and Read, R., 1998, ‘A comparison of the
economic performance of different micro-states and between micro-states and larger
countries’, World Development, vol. 26, 639-656.
354. Armstrong, H. W. and Read, R., 2005: ‘Insularity, remoteness, mountains and archipelagoes:
a combination of challenges facing small states?’Asia Pacific Viewpoint, 47(1), 79-92.
Disponível online em url: http://www.regional-studies-assoc.ac.uk/events/presentations04/
armstrongread.pdf. Consulta dem 11 de julho de 2009.
355. Armstrong, John, 2008: Historia civil, y natural de la isla de Menorca: descripción topográfica
de la ciudad de Mahón, y demás poblaciones de ella ... / escrita en ingles por Jorge
Armstrong... ; y traducida al castellano por Josef Antonio Lasierra y Navarro, Mairena de
Aljarafe, Sevilla: Extramuros.
356. Armstrong, Patrick, 1991: Under the blue vault of heaven: a study of Charles Darwin’s
sojourn in the Cocos (Keeling) Islands, foreword by Carolyn Stuart, Nedlands, W.A.:
Indian Ocean Centre for Peace Studies.
357. Armstrong, Patrick H., 1992: Darwin’s desolate islands: a naturalist in the Falklands 1833-
1834, Chippenham: Picton.
358. Armstrong, Patrick H., 1995: Darwin’s other islands, Durham: University of Durham Research
Foundation.
359. Armstrong, Patrick, 2004, 2006: Darwin’s other islands, London; New York: Continuum.
360. Árnadóttir, Lilja, Ketil Kiran, 1997: Church and art: the medieval church in Norway and
2009
Iceland, [Oslo] Norwegian Institute for Cultural Heritage Research, [Reykjavík], National
Museum of Iceland.
361. Arnason, edited by Ragnar and Lawrence Felt, 1995: The North Atlantic fisheries: successes,
failures, and challenges, Charlottetown, P.E.I.: Institute of Island Studies.
362. Arnaud, Vicente Guillermo, 2000: Las Islas Malvinas: descubrimiento, primeros mapas y
ocupación: siglo XVI Buenos Aires: Academia Nacional de Geografía.
363. Arnberger, E.; Arnberger, H., 1988: Die tropischen inseln des indischen und pazifischen
ozeans, Vienne: F. Deuticke.
364. Arnberger, H.; Arnberger, E., 2001: The tropical islands of the Indian and Pacific oceans,
Vienne, Austrian Academy of Sciences Press.
365. Arnett, Chris, 1999: The terror of the coast: land alienation and colonial war on Vancouver
Island and the Gulf Islands, 1849-1863, Burnaby, B.C.: Talonbooks.
366. Arniston, Tristam, 2006: ‘Two intaglios from St Peter Port, Guernsey’. In Henig, Martin (ed.),
Roman art, religion and society: new studies from the Roman art seminar, Oxford 2005
(BAR, British ser., 1577), Oxford: Archaeopress, 67-69.
367. Arno, T.; Orian, C., 1985: Ile Maurice, une société multiraciale, Paris, L’Harmattan.
368. Arnold, Caroline, 1997: Stone Age farmers beside the sea: Scotland’s prehistoric village of
Skara Brae, photographs by Arthur P. Arnold, New York, Clarion Books.
369. Arnold, compiled and edited by Charles, 2008: Mediterranean islands: a unique and
comprehensive guide to the islands and islets of the Mediterranean, London: Mediterranean
islands.
370. Arnold, Jeanne E., 1987: Craft specialization in the prehistoric Channel Islands, California,
Berkeley, University of California Press.
371. Arnold, J., 2001: The origins of a Pacific Coast chiefdom: the Chumash of the Channel
Islands, Salt Lake City, University of Utah Press.
372. Arthur, W. S, 2001: Autonomy and identity in the Torres Strait; a borderline case, JPH, 36,
2, pp.215-24.
373. Aruca Alonso, coordinadores, Lohania J.; Camero Álvarez José María, Expediciones,
exploraciones y viajeros en el Caribe: Antonio Núñez Jiménez, sus exploraciones
en Cuba y el Caribe: I Conferencia Científica Regional, 2004, Conferencia Científica
Regional (1st: 2004: Havana, Cuba) El Vedado, Ciudad de La Habana, Cuba: Ediciones
Unión, 2006.
374. Ås, Stefan, Jan Bengtsson, Torbjörn Ebenhard, 1997: Archipelagoes and Theories of
Insularity Archipelagoes and Theories of Insularity, Ecological Bulletins, No. 46, Boreal
Ecosystems and Landscapes: Structures, Processes and Conservation of Biodiversity,
pp. 88-116.
375. Asafu-Adjaye, John and Renuka Mahadevan, 2009: Regional Trade Agreements versus
Global Trade Liberalisation: Implications for a Small Island Developing State, The World
Economy, 2009, vol. 32, issue 3, pages 509-529.
376. Asann, Ridvan, 2007: A Brief History of the Caribbean (Revised ed.). New York: Facts on
File, Inc.
377. Asato, Seiichi, 1990: Okinawa no uta sanshin: sono fūdo to kokoro, Tōkyō: Ikkei Shobō.
378. Asato, Tsumichiyo, 1983: Hitotsubu no mugi: hachijūnen no kaiko: Beigun shiseika no
shihanseiki, Okinawa-ken Naha-shi: Minshatō Okinawa-ken Rengōkai.
2009
CEHA 23
379. Ashby, G. (Ed.), 1985: Micronesian Customs and Beliefs, Eugene (Oregon): Rainy Day
Press.
380. Ashley, Scott, 2001: “The poetics of race in 1890s Ireland: an ethnography of the Aran
Islands”, in Patterns of Prejudice, 35:2, 5-18.
381. Ashton, Stephen Richard; Louis, William Roger (ed.), 2004: East of Suez and the
Commonwealth 1964-1971, (British documents on the end of empire, Series A, 5).
London: TSO.
382. Asian Productivity Organization, 1993: Environment and forestry management, Tokyo, Asian
Productivity Organization (APO).
383. Asin Cabrera, M.A., (1988), Islas y archipelagos en las Comunidades Europeas, Madrid,
Tecnos.
384. Aspalter, Christian, 2001: Conservative Welfare State Systems in East Asia, Westport,
Conn.: Praeger.
385. Association Bibliographie de Bretagne, 2002: Les îles de Bretagne nord: approche
bibliographique / Association Bibliographie de Bretagne; Association Culture arts et
lettres des îles, Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne; [Ouessant]: Association Culture arts
et lettres des îles, 29-Briec-de-l’Odet: Impr. Côté.
386. Atchoarena, D., 1989: Educational Planning in Small States: the case of the Caribbean,
Paris: UNESCO, International Institute for Educational Planning.
387. Atha, Mick, 1998: Jerbourg Battery: a multiperiod military site in Guernsey, Société
Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 24:3, 492-504.
388. Athukorala, S. Lakshman and Barry Reid, 2002: Diagnostic study of accounting and auditing
practices in selected developing member countries: Azerbaijan, Fiji Islands, Republic of
the Marshall Islands, Philippines, Sri Lanka. Manila, Philippines: Asian Development
Bank, Disponível online em url: http://www.adb.org/Documents/Books/Diagnostic_Study_
Accounting_Auditing/Selected_DMCs/. Consulta em 29 e Julho de 2009.
389. Atkins, by Jonathan, Sonia Mazzi and Carlen Ramlogan, 1998: A Study on the Vulnerability
of Developing and Island States: A Composite Index, issued by the Commonwealth
Secretariat in August.
390. Atkins, J.; Mazzi, S.; Easter, C., 2000: “Commonwealth Vulnerability Index for Developing
Countries: The Position of Small States,” Economic Paper, No. 40, Londres, Commonwealth
Secretariat.
391. Attenbrow, edited by Val and Fullagar, Richard, 2004: A Pacific odyssey: archaeology and
anthropology in the Western Pacific: papers in honour of Jim Specht,Sydney:Australian
Museum.
392. Attwood, Bain, Fiona Magowan, 2001 Telling Stories: Indigenous History and Memory in
Australia and New Zealand, Allen & Unwin.
393. Aubert de la Rue, Edgard, 1956: L’homme et les îles, Paris: Gallimard.
394. Aubin, Jean, Denys Lombard, 1988: Marchands et hommes d’affaires asiatiques dans
l’océan Indien et la mer de Chine, 13e-20e siècles, Éditions de l’École des hautes études
en sciences sociales.
395. Audley-Charles, M.G., 1987: “Dispersal of Gondwanaland: relevance to evolution of the
Angiosperms” In: Whitmore, T.C. (ed.), 1987: Biogeographical Evolution of the Malay
Archipelago, Oxford Monographs on Biogeography 4, Clarendon Press, Oxford, pp.
5–25.
2009
396. Aufsess, Hans Max; Freiherr von und zu, 1985: The von Aufsess occupation diary, edited
and translated by Kathleen J. Nowlan, Chichester: Phillimore.
397. Augé, M., 1995: Non-Places: An Introduction to an Anthropology of Supermodernity, London,
Verso.
398. Aulich, edited by James, 1992: Framing the Falklands War: nationhood, culture and identity,
Philadelphia: Open University Press.
399. Aunay, Arnaud d’, 2006: Napoléon, empereur des îles, empereur d’exil / textes et illustrations
d’Arnaud d’Aunay; préface de la princesse Napoléon, [Paris]: Gallimard loisirs.
400. Auphan, Éric, 1996 : Les Iles de la Mer D’ouest: Approche Historique des Societes Insulaires
de L’armor D’apres le Temoignage de la Litterature Regionale; Sous La Direction De
Jean Martin, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Histoire: Lille 3.
401. Auphan, Eric, 1999: Les îles de la mer d’Ouest: approche historique des sociétés insulaires
de l’Armor d’après le témoignage de la littérature régionale, Villeneuve d’Ascq.
402. Auphan, établie par Éric et Jacques Bayle-Ottenheim, 2000: Les îles de la mer d’Iroise:
approche bibliographique, Association Bibliographie de Bretagne; Association Culture,
arts et lettres des îles, Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne.
403. Auphan, Eric, sous la dir. 2002: Les îles de Bretagne nord, approche bibliographique,
Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne; Ouessant: Culture, Arts et Lettres des Îles. Disponível
online em url: http://www.livre-insulaire.fr/index.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
404. Auphan, Éric, 2005: Les îles de la mer d’Ouest: approche historique des sociétés insulaires
de l’Armor d’après le témoignage de la littérature régionale; sous la direction de Jean
Martin, Université Charles de Gaulle (Lille). UFR Sciences historiques, artistiques et
politiques. Université de soutenance.
405. Aupiais, Damien, 2006: Les immigrants bretons à l’île Bourbon de 1665 à 1810, Saint Paul
(La Réunion).
406. Austin Ranney, Howard R. Penniman, 1985: Democracy in the Islands: The Micronesian
Plebiscites of 1983, American Enterprise Institute.
407. Australia, Government of: Australian International Development Assistance Bureau and
Government of Papua New Guinea, Department of West New Britain, 1989: Kandrian-
Gloucester District Development Project Feasibility Study, Stages 1 and 2 Report:
Institutional Capacity and Resource Assessment and Program and Project Planning
Induction.
408. Australia, Government of: Australian International Development Assistance Bureau and
Government of Papua New Guinea, Department of West New Britain, 1990: Kandrian
Gloucester Integrated Development Project: Final Draft, Volume 1. Main Report.
409. Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra
Academic Publishing, The Australian National University, pp. 161-170.
410. Australian Mobile Veterinary Survey Unit, 1946: Report on the animal diseases survey of
Papua and the Mandated Territory of New Guinea, Australian Mobile Veterinary Survey
Unit.
411. Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), 2001: Portos, Escalas e Ilhéus no Relacionamento entre
o Ocidente e o Oriente, Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso
de Vasco da Gama a Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de
1999, 2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações
dos Descobrimentos Portugueses.
2009
CEHA 25
412. Ayala, H., 1995: From quality product to eco-product: will Fiji set a precedent?, Tourism
Management, 16(1), pp. 39-47.
413. Aymes, Marc, 2004: Chypre en archipel: d’une modernité insulaire des réformes Ottomanes
au milieu du XIXe siècle, Cahiers de la Méditerranée, vol. 68–vol. 68.
414. Azevedo, Lucas Pereira de Araújo; Sousa, Celso Batista de (Introdução e notas), 1992:
“Memórias da Ilha de S. Tomé”, in Mare Liberum, nº 4, Dezembro, pp. 165–183.
415. Aznar Vallejo, Eduardo, La integración de las Islas Canarias en la Corona de Castilla, 1478-
1526, Las Palmas: Ediciones de Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
416. Azuaje, Ricardo, 1995: Autobiografía de un dodo: biodiversidad, extinción y algunas
insensateces, sobre trabajos científicos realizados por Franklin J. Rojas Suárez y Jon
Paul Rodríguez, Caracas: Ediciones Angria: Fundación Polar: Provita.
417. Babadzan, A., 1982: Naissance d’une tradition. Changement culturel et syncretisme religieux
aux iles australes (polynesie francaise). Paris: Orstom.
418. Babadzan, Alain, 1993: Les dépouilles des dieux: essai sur la religion tahitienne à l’époque
de la découverte, Paris: Editions de la Maison des sciences de l’homme.
419. Babadzan, textes réunis par Alain, 2003: Insularités: hommage à Henri Lavondès, Nanterre:
Société d’ethnologie.
420. Babbage, R, 1989: Australian interests in the South Pacific, in Albinski H, et.al., The South
Pacific; political, economic and military trends, Washington, Brasseys.
421. Babich, J., 1996: Making peoples; a history of the New Zealanders from Polynesian
settlement to the end of the Nineteenth Century, Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press.
422. Bacchus, K and C Brock, 1987: The Challenge of Scale: Educational Development in the
Small states of the Commonwealth. London: Commonwealth Secretariat.
423. Bachimon, P., 1990: Tahïti entre mythes et réalités, Paris, Comité des travaux historiques
et scientifiques.
424. Bachimon, P., 1995: “L’insularité océanienne dans la cosmogonie maohi”, L’Espace
géographique, n ° 3, p. 227-235.
425. Backhurst, Marie-Louise, 1990: Family history in Jersey, St. Helier, Jersey, Channel Islands:
Channel Islands Family History Society.
426. Badsey, Stephen, 2005: The Falklands Conflict as a media war In Badsey, Stephen; Havers,
Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future
(Sandhurst conference series, 5), London ; New York: Cass, 39-58.
427. Baert, Annie, 1999: Le paradis terrestre, un mythe espagnol en Océanie: les voyages de
Mendaña et de Quiros, 1567-1606, Paris.
428. Baglole, H. & Weale, D., 1974: Cornelius Howatt: Superstar, Charlottetown PEI, Williams &
Crue.
429. Bahuchet, Serge, et all..., 2004: Un terrien des îles: A propos de Jacques Barrau, Jatba,
2004, vol. 42, p 1-206.
430. Bailey, Dan E., 1982: WW II wrecks of the Kwajalein and Truk lagoons, Redding, CA: North
Valley Diver Publications.
431. Bailey, Jennifer L., 1992: Philippine Islands, [Washington, D.C.]: U.S. Army Center of Military
History.
432. Bailey, Jonathan; Benest, David, 2005: ‘The development of joint doctrine since the
2009
Falklands Conflict’. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands
conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London;
New York: Cass, 282-94.
433. Bailey, Roderick, 2002: “The hidden hand: Britain, America and Cold War secret itelligence”,
in Defense and Security Analysis, 18:4, 383-88.
434. Bailleul, Michel, 2001: Les îles Marquises: Histoire de la Terre des Hommes du XVIIIe siècle
à nos jours, Papeete.
435. Bain Attwood, 2001: Telling Stories: Indigenous History and Memory in Australia and New
Zealand, Fiona Magowan; Allen & Unwin.
436. Bain, A., 1988: A protective labour policy? An alternative interpretation of early colonial
labourpolicies in Fij, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 23(2), 119-136.
437. Baines, Graham B K, and Edvard Hviding, 1992: Traditional Environmental Knowledge from
the Marovo Area of the Solomon Islands. In LORE: Capturing Traditional Environmental
Knowledge, edited by Martha Johnson, 92–110. Ottawa: International Development
Research Centre.
438. Baines, Graham B K, and Edvard Hviding, 1993: Traditional Ecological Knowledge for
Resource Management in Marovo, Solomon Islands. In Traditional Ecological Knowledge:
Wisdom for Sustainable Development, edited by Nancy M Williams and Graham B K
Baines, Canberra: Cres, Australian National University.Pp 56–65.
439. Baker, C. Ashford, 1988: The ultimate dilemma: obligation conflicts in wartime, Lanham,
MD: University Press of America.
440. Baker, edited by Gordon, 2007: No island is an island: the impact of globalization on the
Commonwealth Caribbean, London: Chatham House.
441. Baker, Emerson W., 2007: The devil of Great Island: witchcraft and conflict in early New
England, New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
442. Baker, R. (ed.), 1992: Public administration in small and island states, West Hartford,
Kumarian Press.
443. Balbi, J., 1989: “Identité culturelle”, In: Les îles européenes, Corse, Univ.
444. Baldacchino & D. Milne (eds.) Lessons from the Political Economy of Small Islands: The
Resourcefulness of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp. 141-155.
445. Baldacchino, Godfrey, ‘De la Forme et la Dimension de l’Île’, Introduction to Jean-Yves
Vigneau (ed.) Artistes aux Îles de la Madeleine, pp. 1-5.
446. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 1993: ‘Bursting the Bubble: The Pseudo-Development Strategies of
Microstates’, Development & Change, Vol. 24, No. 1, pp. 29-51.
447. Baldacchino, Godfrey and Robert Greenwood, 1998: Competing strategies of socio-
economic development for small islands, Charlottetown, P.E.I., Institute of Island Studies,
University of Prince Edward Island.
448. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 1998: ‘Far Better to Serve in Heaven than to Reign in Hell: Malta’s Logic
of Relating to the European Union’ in G. Baldacchino & R. Greenwood, eds., Competing
Strategies of Socio-Economic Development for Small Islands, Canada, Institute of Island
Studies, University of Prince Edward Island, pp. 213-238.
449. Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with Robert Greenwood) 1998: Competing Strategies of Socio-
Economic Development for Small Islands, Canada, Institute of Island Studies, University of
Prince Edward Island.
2009
CEHA 27
450. Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with David Fabri), 1999: ‘The Malta Financial Services Centre: A Study
in Microstate Dependency Management?’, in M.P. Hampton & J.P. Abbott, eds.: Offshore
Finance Centres and Tax Havens, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp.140-166.
451. Baldacchino, edited by Godfrey and David Milne, 2000: Lessons from the political economy
of small islands: the resourcefulness of jurisdiction, Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire:
Macmillan; New York: St. Martin’s Press.
452. Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with David Milne) 2000: ‘Introduction’ and ‘Conclusion’ in: Lessons from
the Political Economy of Small Islands: The Resourcefulness of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke,
UK, Macmillan/ New York, St Martin’s Press.
453. Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with Charles J. Farrugia) 2002: Educational Management and
Planning in Small States: Concepts and Experiences, London, Commonwealth Secretariat.
454. Baldacchino, Godfrey (ed.), 2004: Island Studies, Tesg: Tijdschrift voor economische en
sociale geografie, 2004, p. 269-355.
455. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2004a: ‘Editorial Introduction’, Tijdschrift voor Economische en
Sociale Geografie (Journal of Economic and Social Geography), Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 269-
271.
456. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2004b: ‘Introduction’, Island Studies sub-section, World Development,
Vol. 32, No. 2. p. 327.
457. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2004c: ‘Island Studies Comes of Age’, Tijdschrift voor Economische
en Sociale Geografie (Journal of Economic and Social Geography), Vol. 95, No. 3, pp.
272-283.
458. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2004d: ‘Sustainable User Practices on/for Islands’, INSULA:
International Journal of Island Affairs, February pp. 5-10.
459. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2005: ‘Successful Small Scale Manufacturing from Small Islands:
Comparing Firms benefiting from Local Raw Material Input’, Journal of Small Business &
Entrepreneurship, Vol. 18, No. 1, pp. 21-38.
460. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2005a: ‘The Contribution of Social Capital to Economic Growth:
Lessons from Island Jurisdictions’, The Round Table: Commonwealth Journal of
International Affairs, Vol. 94, No. 378, pp. 35-50.
461. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2005b: ‘The Representation of Islands’, Editorial Introduction,
Geografiska Annaler, Vol. 87B, No. 4, pp. 247-251.
462. Baldacchino, [edited by] Godfrey, 2006: Extreme tourism: lessons from the world’s cold
water islands, Amsterdam; Boston: Elsevier.
463. Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with T. Fairbairn) 2006a: ‘Entrepreneurship and Small Business
Development in Small Islands’, Journal of Small Business & Entrepreneurship, Vol. 19,
No. 4, pp. 331-340.
464. Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with L. Dana) 2006b: ‘Impact of Public Policy on Entrepreneurship:
Investigating the Protestant Ethic on a Divided Island Jurisdiction’, Journal of Small
Business & Entrepreneurship, Vol. 19, No. 4, pp. 419-430.
465. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006c: ‘Innovative Development Strategies from Non-Sovereign
Island Jurisdictions: A Global Review of Economic Policy and Governance Practices’,
World Development, Vol. 34, No. 5, pp. 852-867.
466. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006d: ‘Managing the Hinterland beyond: Two, ideal-type Strategies
of Economic Development for Small Island Territories’, Asia-Pacific Viewpoint, Vol. 47,
No. 1, pp. 45-60.
2009
467. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006e: ‘Warm versus Cold Water Island Tourism: A Review of Policy
Implications’, Island Studies Journal, Vol. 1, No. 2, pp. 183-200.
468. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006f: ‘Small Islands versus Big Cities: Lessons in the political
economy of regional development from the world’s small islands’, Journal of Technology
Transfer, Vol. 31, No. 1, pp. 91-100.
469. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006g: ‘Small States as Holons: The Transnational Survival Kit of
Small (often island) Jurisdictions’ in L. Briguglio, G. Cordina & E.J. Kisanga, eds. Building
the Economic Resilience of Small States, Malta & London, University of Malta and
Commonwealth Secretariat, pp. 212-224.
470. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006h: ‘The Brain Rotation and Brain Diffusion Strategies of Small
Islanders: Considering ‘Movement’ in lieu of ‘Place’’, Globalisation, Societies and
Education, Vol. 4, No. 1, pp. 143-154.
471. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2006i: Extreme Tourism: Lessons from the World’s Cold Water Islands,
Oxford & Amsterdam, Elsevier Science.
472. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007: ‘Fixed Links and the Engagement of Islandness: Reviewing the
Impact of the Confederation Bridge’, to appear in Canadian Geographer, Vol. 50, No. 3.
473. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007a: ‘Governance in Small Places: The Unleashing of Asymmetric
Federalism’ in G. Baldacchino, L. Felt & R. Greenwood (eds.) Remote Control: Lessons
in Governance from/for Small Places, St John’s NL, ISER Press.
474. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007b: ‘Introducing a World of Islands’ in G. Baldacchino (ed.) A
World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Malta & Canada, Agenda & Institute of Island
Studies, pp. 1-29.
475. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007c: ‘Serving Sustainable Island Tourism: Hot or Cold?’, INSULA:
International Journal of Island Affairs (Paris, UNESCO).
476. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007d: ‘The Internationalization of SMEs in Malta: A Critical
Assessment in the Context of Five European Island Regions’. in: The Handbook of
International Entrepreneurship: European Perspectives, UK, Edward Elgar.
477. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007e: A World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Malta &
Canada, Agenda Academic and Institute of Island Studies.
478. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007f: Bridging Islands: The Impact of Fixed Links, Charlottetown,
Acorn Press.
479. Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with A. Spears) 2007g: ‘The Bridge Effect: A Tentative Score Sheet
for Prince Edward Island’ in G. (ed.): Bridging Islands: The Impact of Fixed Links,
Charlottetown, Acorn Press, pp. 49-68.
480. Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with D. Milne (eds.), 2007h: The Case for Non-Sovereignty: Lessons
from Sub-National Island Jurisdictions, London, Routledge.
481. Baldacchino, Godfrey, (with L. Felt & R. Greenwood (eds.) 2007i: Remote Control: Lessons
in Governance from/for Small Places, St John’s NL, ISER Press.
482. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2007j: ‘Bridges and Islands: A Strained Relationship’ in G. Baldacchino
(ed.) Bridging Islands: The Impact of Fixed Links, Charlottetown, Acorn Press, pp. 1-13.
483. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2008: Countries within Countries: Lessons in Creative Governance
from Sub-National Island Jurisdictions, Montreal, McGill-Queens University Press.
484. Baldacchino, Godfrey, 2008a: Studying Islands: On Whose Terms? Some Epistemological
and Methodological Challenges to the Pursuit of Island Studies, Island Studies Journal,
Vol. 3, No. 1, pp. 37-56.
2009
CEHA 29
485. Balfour, Roderick A. C., 1993: “The Highland and Island Emigration Society, 1852-1858”, in
Transactions of the Gaelic Society of Inverness, 57 (1993 for 1990-2), 429-566.
486. Ball, Simon, 2006: ‘The unchanging lessons of battle: the British Army and the Falklands
War, 1982’. In Strachan, Hew (ed.), Big wars and small wars: the British Army and the
lessons of war in the twentieth century (Military History and Policy), London: Routledge,
145-61.
487. Ballance, Alison, 2003: South Sea islands: a natural history, Toronto: Firefly Books.
488. Ballantyne, John H. and Brian Smith, Shetland documents, 1195-1579, with contributions by
Michael Barnes, Adolf Hofmeister, and Athol Murray, Lerwick, Shetland Islands Council
& Shetland Times.
489. Ballard, C., 1995: “The forces of habit: time, being and unconscious acts in archaeological
explanation”, Review Article: in TAJA, 6(3): 203-213.
490. Ballard, C, 2006: ‘The last unknown: Gavin Souter and the historiography of New Guinea’,
in D. Munro and B. V. Lal (eds), Texts and Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands
Historiography, University of Hawai’i Press, Honolulu, 238–349.
491. Ballendorf, D., 1984: Secrets without substance; US intelligence in the Japanese mandates
1915-1935, Journal of Pacific History, 83-99.
492. Balme, Christopher, B, 2007: Pacific performances: theatricality and cross-cultural encounter
in the South Seas, Houndmills, Basingstoke; New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
493. Balme, R. (dir.), 1996: Les politiques du néo-régionalisme. Paris, Economica.
494. Baloch, G. M., 1972: “Review of the coconut leaf miner and tree hopper problems in Papua
New Guinea, with a report on their incidence on Southern New Britain,” in The Papua
New Guinea Agricultural Journal, 23(1/2): 27-40.
495. Band, Jonathon, 2005: ‘British High Command during and after the Falklands Campaign’
In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years
on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass,
30-38.
496. Bandler, F., and Fox, L, 1980: Marani in Australia, Wacvie, Rigby.
497. Bankoff, G., 2005: Wants, Wages, and Workers: Laboring in the American Philippines, 1899-
1908, Pacific Historical Review, Vol 74; Part 1, Pages 59-86.
498. Banks, G. and Ballard, C., eds, 1997: The Ok Tedi settlement; issues, outcomes and
implications, Canberra NCDS.
499. Baptista, Maria Luísa, 1993: Vertentes da insularidade na novelística de Manuel Lopes,
Edições Afrontamento.
500. Barber, IG, 1999: Early European contact and understanding ... the Grass Cove conflict, in
Calder, A, Lamb J and Orr B, eds, 1999, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-
1840, UH Press, Honolulu, pp.156-79.
501. Barbier, Jean Paul and Douglas Newton, edited by, 1989: Islands and ancestors: indigenous
styles of Southeast Asia, München, Federal Republic of Germany: Prestel; New York, NY,
USA: Distributed in the USA and Canada by te Neues Pub.
502. Bardolet, Esteban, 1989: El coste de la insularidad, Cámara Oficial de Comercio Industria y
Navegación de Mallorca, Ibiza y Formentera, Servicio de Publicaciones.
503. Baré, Jean François, 1987: Tahiti, les temps et les pouvoirs: pour une anthropologie
historique du Tahiti post-européen, Paris, Editions de l’ORSTOM.
2009
504. Baré, Jean-François, 1985: “L’Angleterre dans la mythologie historique polynésienne: Tahiti
et Hawaii”, In: Lagayette P. (ed.), Deckker de P. (ed.), Etats et pouvoirs dans la Pacifique
français: schéma d’évolution, Paris: L’Harmattan, p. 17-25.
505. Baré, Jean-François, 1985: Le malentendu pacifique: des premières rencontres entre
polynésiens et anglais et de ce qui s’ensuivit avec les français jusqu’à nos jours, Paris:
Hachette.
506. Baré, Jean-François, 1985: “Les conversions tahitiennes au protestantisme comme
malentendu productif (1800-1820)”, In, Anthropologie et histoire, Cahiers ORSTOM,
Série Sciences Humaines, 21 (1), p. 125-136.
507. Barfleur, L.; Jos, E., 1997: Coopération et intégration économique régionale dans la Caraïbe,
Paris, Montchrestien.
508. Barker, David; McGregor, Duncan F.M., edited by. 1995: Klaus de Albuquerque and Jerome
L. McElroy --The cost of housing a tourist economy: the US Virgin Islands, in Environment
and development in the Caribbean: geographical perspectives, Mona, Kingston, Jamaica:
The Press, University of the West Indies.
509. Barker, David; McGregor, Duncan F.M., edited by. 1995a: Lesley France and Brian
Wheeller -- Tourism development in small islands: St. Maarten, St. Martin and Bermuda,
in Environment and development in the Caribbean: geographical perspectives, Mona,
Kingston, Jamaica: The Press, University of the West Indies.
510. Barker, Nicholas, 1997: Beyond Endurance: an epic of Whitehall and the South Atlantic, with
a foreword by Sir Rex Hunt, London, Leo Cooper.
511. Barlow, Kathy, and Stephen Winduo, editors, 1997: Logging the Western Pacific:
Perspectives from Papua New Guinea, Solomon Islands, and Vanuatu. Special issue of
The Contemporary Pacific 9 (1).
512. Barlow, Virginia, 1993: The nature of the islands: plants and animals of the eastern Caribbean,
color illustrations by Katie Shears, photographs by John Douglas, Virginia Barlow, Chris
Doyle, underwater photographs by Joan Bourque, black and white drawings by Joan
Waltermire, Chris Doyle, edited by Chris Doyle, Dunedin, FL, C. Doyle Pub., Cruising
Guide Publications.
513. Barnes, Brooks Miles, Barry R. Truitt, 1997: Seashore chronicles: three centuries of the
Virginia Barrier Islands, Charlottesville, University Press of Virginia.
514. Barnes, Natasha, 2006: Cultural conundrums: gender, race, nation, and the making of
Caribbean cultural politics, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
515. Barnes, Robert, 2000: Falkland Islands: the black and red postal franks (1869-1878),
Baldock: The author.
516. Barnett, J., 2002: «Environmental change and human security in Pacific island countries»,
Development Bulletin, 58, p. 28-32.
517. Barquisseau, R., 1941: Les îles. Paris, Grasset.
518. Barr, Cameron W., 1996: “More nations whip up squalls over tiny islands”, Christian Science
Monitor, 88 (Nr 84, 29 March-4 April): 1, 10-11.
519. Barratt, Glynn R. V., 1988-92: Russia and the South Pacific, 1696-1840, 4 vols: Vol.1: The
Russians and Australia; Vol.2: Southern and Eastern Polynesia; Vol.3: Polynesian Fringe;
Vol.4: The Tuamotu Islands and Tahiti, Vancouver (BC).
520. Barratt, Glynn, 1988: Southern and Eastern Polynesia, University of British Columbia Press.
521. Barratt, Glynn, 1992: The Tuamotu Islands and Tahiti, Vancouver: UBC Press.
2009
CEHA 31
522. Barrault, Michèle, 1985: Malte: et ses îles, Paris: Éd. BEBA.
523. Barrett, Charles, 1944: The island world: an anthology of the Pacific, Melbourne.
524. Barry, M Gough, 1992: The Falkland Islands/Malvinas: the conquest for empire in the South
Atlantic, London; Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Athlone Press.
525. Barry, T.; Wood, B.; Preusch, D., 1984: The other side of paradise: foreign control in the
Caribbean, New york: resource center.
526. Barthélémy, G.; Girault, C. (dir.), 1993: La République haïtienne. États des lieux et
perspectives, Paris, ADEC/Karthala.
527. Bartlett, Kenneth R.; Rodgers, Jimmie, 2004: “HRD as National Policy in the Pacific Islands”,
in Advances in Developing Human Resources, vol. 6: pp. 307 - 314.
528. Bartmann, B., 2000: The Microstate Experience: Very Small States in the International
System. Disponível online em URL: http://www.fodk.dk/Baggrund/microstate_experience.
htm. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009.
529. Barthon, Céline, 2001 : Géographie, culture et patrimoine: essai sur l’identité insulaire
charentaise à partir des exemples des îles de Ré et d’Oléron, Lille: Atelier national de
Reproduction des Thèses.
530. Barton, K. J.; [et al.], 1980:”Excavations at the Chateau des Marais (Ivy Castle), Guernsey”,
in Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 20:5, 657-702.
531. Barton, Ken, 1989: The principal fortifications of the Channel Islands before 1750, Fortress:
The Castles & Fortifications Quarterly, 1:3, 24-32.
532. Barton, Kenneth James, 2003: The archaeology of Castle Cornet, St. Peter Port, Guersnsey;
edited by Nigel Jee (Guernsey Museum monograph, 7), St. Peter Port, Guernsey:
Guernsey Museum.
533. Bartstra, Gert-Jan Susan Keates, Basoek, Bahru Kallupa, 1991: On the dispersal of Homo
sapiens in Eastern Indonesia: the Paleolithic of South Sulawesi, Current Anthropology,
32(3): 317-21.
534. Baskett, Geoffrey, 1991?: Islands and mountains, Castle Hill, N.S.W.: G. Baskett.
535. Bassargette, Denis et Guy Di Meo, 2008: Les limites du modèle communal français en
Guyane: le cas de Maripasoula, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 241-242, Janvier-Juin.
Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index3273.html. Consulta em 20 de
Agosto de 2009.
536. Bastian, Jeannette Allis, 2003: Owning memory: how a Caribbean community lost its
archives and found its history, Westport, Conn., Libraries Unlimited.
537. Bastien, D., (dir.); Lemoine, M. (collab.). 1989: Antilles: espoirs et dechirements de l’ame
creole, Paris: Autrement.
538. Bastin, R., 1984: Small island tourism: development or dependency? Development Policy
Review, 2(1), pp. 79-90.
539. Basu, Paul, Pilgrims to the far country: North American “roots-tourists” in the Scottish
Highlands and islands, in Ray, Celeste (ed.), Transatlantic Scots, Tuscaloosa (AL):
University of Alabama Press, 286-31.
540. Bataille Benguigui, M.C.; Bare, J.F., 1992: Pecheurs de mer, pecheurs de terre. La mer
dans la pensee tongienne, In: La terre et le Pacifique, ER - Etudes Rurales, no 127-128,
p. p. 55-73.
Bataille Benguigui, Marie Claire, 1994: Le cote de la mer: quotidien et imaginaire aux Iles Tonga
2009
Polynesie Ocidentale, Iles et archipels n° 19, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.

Batalha, Luís, 2004: The Cape Verdean diaspora in Portugal: colonial subjects in a postcolonial
world, Lanham, Md.; Oxford: Lexington Books.
541. Bateman, David ed., 2005: Bateman New Zealand Encyclopedia, David Bateman (Auckland,
N.Z).
542. Bates, Stephen, 1990: The South Pacific island countries and France: a study in inter-state
relations, Canberra: Dept. of International Relations, Research School of Pacific Studies,
the Australian National University: Distributed by, Bibliotech ANUTECH.
543. Batey, P. et alii., 2000: Regional competition, New York, Springer.
544. Bathgate, Murray Alexander, 1991: Three Folk Stories from West Guadalcanal, Solomon
Islands, Wellington, New Zealand: Alexander Enterprise.
545. Battersby, Paul, 2007: To the Islands: White Australians and the Malay Archipelago since
1788, Lanham, MD: Lexington Books.
546. Baudry, R., et al..., 1994: Ile des merveilles: mirage, miroir, mythe: colloque de Cerisy, textes
réunis et présentés par Daniel Reig, Paris, France, L’Harmattan.
547. Bauer, Brian S. Charles Stanish, 2001: Ritual and pilgrimage in the ancient Andes: the
islands of the sun and the moon, Austin: University of Texas Press.
548. Bault, A. E., 1982: Les industries de l’alimentation dans les iles antillaises, Bibliographie
analytique et signaletique. Bordeaux: Ceget.
549. Bault, A. E., 1983: Les industries de l’alimentation dans les iles antillaises, Quebec: presses
de l’universite Laval.
550. Bault, A. E., 1984: Le rhum aux antilles, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3, Institut de
geographie et d’etudes regionales.
551. Baum, T., 1997: Island tourism as an emerging field of study, Islander Magazine, Jan (3).
552. Baum, T., 1997a: The fascination of islands: A tourism perspective. In: Lockhart, D.G. and
Drakakis-Smith, D. (eds) Island Tourism: Trends and Prospects. London and New York:
Pinter, pp.21-35.
553. Bauman, Kay, 1998: Solomon Island Folktales from Malaita, Danbury, CT: Rutledge Books.
554. Baver, edited by Sherrie L., Barbara Deutsch Lynch, 2006: Beyond sun and sand: Caribbean
environmentalisms, New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press.
555. Baxter, John M.; Usher, Michael B., edited. 1994: The islands of Scotland: a living marine
heritage, and [London]: HMSO.
556. Bayle-Ottenheim, Jacques (dir.), 2000: Les îles de la mer d’Iroise, approche bibliographique,
Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne.
557. Bayliss-Smith, T. P.; Bedford, R. D.; Brookfield, H. C.; Latham, M. Islands, 1988: Islanders
and the World: the Colonial and Post-Colonial Experience of Eastern Fiji, Cambridge,
New York.
558. Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1982: A Polynesian Atoll, In The Ecology of Agricultural Systems by T.
P. Bayliss-Smith, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, Pp. 56-65.
559. Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1986: Ontong Java Population, Economy and Society, 1970-1986,
Armidale, NSW: South Pacific Smallholder Project, University of New England. Occasional
Paper No. 9. Reprinted (1988) by Ministry of Agriculture and Lands, Solomon Islands
Government, Dodo Creek Research Bulletin No. 19.
2009
CEHA 33
560. Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1987: Ontong Java: Ethnographic Description, Recent History, and
Profile of the Survey Samples, In The Solomon Islands Project: A Long-Term Study
of Health, Human Biology and Culture Change, edited by J. S. Friedlaender. Oxford:
Clarendon Press. Pp. 23-26 and 51-55.
561. Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1987a: Tattooing on Ontong Java, Solomon Islands, Journal of the
Polynesian Society, 96:107-110.
562. Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1988: Ontong Java Atoll, 1970-86, In Problems of Atoll Development,
edited by J. Abington and S. Jones, Honiara, Solomon Islands: Ministry of Agriculture and
Lands. Pp. 43-52.
563. Bayliss-Smith, Tim... [et al.], 1988a: Islands, islanders, and the world: the colonial and post-
colonial experience of Eastern Fiji, with contributions from Muriel Brookfield, Cambridge
[Cambridgeshire]; New York: Cambridge University Press.
564. Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1988b: Role of Hurricanes in the Development of Reef Islands,
Ontong Java, Solomon Islands, Geographical Journal, 54:377-391.
565. Bayliss-Smith, Tim P., 1990: Atoll Production Systems: Fish and Fishing on Ontong Java Atoll,
Solomon Islands, In Pacific Production Systems, edited by D. E. Yen and J. Mummery,
Canberra: Department of Prehistory, Australian National University. Pp. 57-69.
566. Beaman, Libby, 1987: Libby: the sketches, letters & journal of Libby Beaman, recorded in
the Pribilof Islands, 1879-1880, Tulsa, Okla., Council Oak Books, Austin, Tex., Distributed
by Texas Monthly Press.
567. Beasant, J., 1986: The Santo rebellion: an imperial reckoning, Honolulu.
568. Beaton, Rick, 2001: An Eye on the Island’s Future, Canadian Issues, August- September
pp.25-28.
569. Beattie, A. G.; Beattie, M. H. (ed.). 1990: Pre-1855 gravestone inscriptions in Lochaber
and Skye: a summary of, and index to, pre-1855 gravestone inscriptions found in burial
grounds in the western part of the main land portion of Invernessshire, the small isles,
Skye and associated islands, Edinburgh.
570. Beaumont, John, 2005: Achillbeg: the life of an island, Usk: Oakwood.
571. Beauvir, L., 1988: Le Pacifique insulaire: geographie politique et sa geopolitique. Universite
de Bordeaux 3, Uer de Geographie.
572. Beauvir, L., 1987: Le tourisme dans l’Archipel des Hawaii. Universite de Bordeaux 3 –
Talence, France, Institut de Geographie, Mem. Ter: Geogr.: Bordeaux 3.
573. Beck, E Boyde; Burden, P John, 1996: Prince Edward Island: an (un)authorized history,
Charlottetown, PE, Canada.
574. Beck, Peter J., 1987: “A cold war: Britain, Argentina and Antarctica”, in History Today, 37,
16-23.
575. Beck, Peter J., 1988: The Falkland Islands as an international problem, London; New York:
Routledge.
576. Beck, Robert J., 1993: The Grenada Invasion: Politics, Law, and Foreign Policy
Decisionmaking. Boulder: Westview Press.
577. Becke, Louis, 2000: The ebbing of the tide [Exploration & exchange: a South Seas anthology,
1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and Thomas Nicholas, (Chicago (IL)
and London: Chicago University Press), 327-33.
578. Beckett, Jeremy, 1987: Torres Strait Islanders: custom and colonialism Cambridge
2009
[Cambridgeshire], New York, Cambridge University Press.

579. Beckles, Hilary McD., 1994: The colours of property: brown, white and black chattels and
their responses on the Caribbean frontier, Slavery & Abolition, 15:2, 36-51.
580. Beckles, Wilson, 1901: The Truth About Newfoundland, The Tenth Island, second edition,
London.
581. Bedford, R., 1986: La filiere polynesienne: Migrations et changements sociaux en Nouvelle-
Zelande et dans le Pacifique Sud, l’Espace Geographique, no 3, p. p. 172-186.
582. Bedford, S.; C. Sand and D. Burley, Eds. 2002: Fifty years in the field: Essays in honour
and celebration of Richard Shutler Jr’s archaeological career, Auckland, New Zealand
Archaeological Association.
583. Bedford, S.; Sand, C.; Burley, D., Eds. 2002: Fifty years in the field: Essays in honour
and celebration of Richard Shutler Jr’s archaeological career, Auckland, New Zealand
Archaeological Association.
584. Beehler, B., 2001: Island Biogeography redux, with a speciation twist, (Book Review: of Mayr
and Diamond, The Birds of Northern Melanesia), Science, 294 (2 November): 10078.
585. Beem, E. A., 1992: ‘Casco Bay Morning’, Island Journal, Maine, Island Institute, No. 9, 86-
87.
586. Beer, G., 1989: ‘Discourses of the Island’ in F. Amrine, ed., Literature and Science as Modes
of Expression, Dordrecht, Kluwer Academic, pp. 1-27.
587. Beer, G., 1990: ‘The Island and the Aeroplane: The Case of Virginia Woolf’ in H.K. Bhabha,
ed., Nation and Narration, London, Routledge, pp. 265-290.
588. Beer, G., 2003: ‘Island Bounds’ in R. Edmond & V. Smith, eds., Islands in History and
Representation, London, Routledge, pp. 32-42.
589. Beerman, Eric, 1988: “The Last Battle of the American Revolution: Yorktown, no, the
Bahamas!”, in The Americas, 45:1, 79-96.
590. Beillevaire, Patrick, 2002: Ryukyu studies since 1854: western encounter. Part 2, Richmond:
Curzon.
591. Belanger, Jacqueline, 2000: “The desire of the west: the Aran Islands and Irish identity in
Grania” In Litvack, Leon; Hooper, Glenn (ed.), Ireland in the nineteenth century: regional
identity (Dublin: Four Courts), 95-107.
592. Bélanger, L.; Mace, G. (eds), 1999: The Americas in transition: the contours of regionalism.
Boulder, Lynne Rienner Publishers.
593. Belfield, A. G., 1999: The stamps of the pictorial issue of the Falkland Islands and
dependencies 1938 to 1951, Falkland Islands.
594. Bélisle, François J., 1984a: Food Production and Tourism in Jamaica: Obstacles to Increasing
Local Food Supplies to Hotels, Journal of Developing Areas, 19:1-20.
595. Bélisle, François J., 1984b: Tourism and Food Imports: The Case of Jamaica, Economic
Development and Cultural Change, 32:819-842.
596. Bélisle, François J., 1985: Food Production and Tourism in Jamaica: Obstacles to Increasing
Local Food Supplies to Hotels, Journal of Developing Areas, 10:1-16.
597. Bell L, 1992: Colonial constructs; European images of Maori 1840-1914, Auckland Uni
Press, Auckland.
598. Bell, H. C. P., 1883: The Maldive Islands, An account of the Physical Features, History,
2009
CEHA 35
Inhabitants, Productions and Trade, Colombo.

599. Bell, H.C.P., 1989: The Maldive Islands; Monograph on the History, Archaeology and
Epigraphy, Reprint Colombo 1940. Council for Linguistic and Historical Research. Male’.
600. Bell, H. C. P., 1999: Excerpta Maldiviana, Reprint Colombo 1922/35 edn. Asian Educational
Services, New Delhi.
601. Bell, L., 1999a: Augustus Earle’s The meeting of the artists …., In Calder, A., Lamb, J. and
Orr, B., eds, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-1840, Honolulu, UH Press.
602. Bell, L., 1999b: Looking at Goldie; face to face with ‘All ’e Same T’e Pakeha, in N Thomas
and D Losche, eds, Double Vision, Cambridge, CUP, pp.163-192.
603. Bell, R.; McDonald, T.; Tidwell, A., eds, 1996: Negotiating the Pacific century; the new Asia,
the United States and Australia, Allen and Unwin 1996.
604. Bell, Walter F., 1999: The Philippines in World War II, 1941-1945: A Chronology and Select
Annotated Bibliography of Books and Articles in English, Greenwood Press.
605. Bell, William M., 1995: I beg to report: policing in Guernsey during the German occupation,
Guernsey: Guernsey Press, 1995.
606. Bell, William M., 2002: Guernsey occupied but never conquered, Exeter: Studio.
607. Belle, Nicole, Bramwell, Bill, 2005: “Climate Change and Small Island Tourism: Policy Maker
and Industry Perspectives in Barbados”, in Journal of Travel Research, vol. 44: pp. 32 -
41.
608. Beller, W.; D’Ayala, P.; Hein, P. (eds.). 1990: Sustainable development and environmental
management of small islands, Paris: UNESCO.
609. Bell-Krannhals, Ingrid, 1990: Haben um zu geben: Eigentum und Besitz auf den Trobriand-
Inseln Papua New Guinea, Basel: Ethnologisches Seminar der Universität und Museum
für Völkerkunde: In Kommission bei Wepf & Co..
610. Bello Jiménez, Víctor M., 2005: Allende las columnas: la presencia cartaginesa en el
Atlántico entre los siglos VI y III a. C. Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Anroart Ediciones.
611. Bellwood, P.; Koon, V., 1989: “Lapita colonists leave boats unburned! The question of Lapita
links with Island Southeast Asia”, in Antiquity, 63: 613-622.
612. Bellwood, Peter, 1997: Prehistory of the Indo-Malaysian archipelago. Honolulu: University
of Hawai’i Press.
613. Bellwood, Peter; Fox, James J.; Tryon, Darrell, edited by. 1995: The Austronesians:
historical and comparative perspectives, Canberra: Dept. of Anthropology as part of
the Comparative Austronesian Project, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies,
Australian National University.
614. Belot, Victor R., 1980: Guide des îles des côtes françaises: accès, hébergement, histoire,
navigation, tourisme, écologie, Paris: P. Horay.
615. Bender, Barbara, Robert Caillaud, 1986: The archaeology of Brittany, Normandy, and the
Channel Islands: an introduction and guide, London, Boston, Faber and Faber.
616. Bengtsson, S.; Ebenhard, T., 1997: “Archipelagoes and theories of insularity”, Ecological
bulletins, n°46, p. 88-97.
617. Benitez-Rojo, Antonio, 1992: The Repeating Island: The Caribbean and the Postmodern
Perspective, Durham, North Carolina: Duke UP.
618. Benjamin, C. and I. Wapi, 1982: Subsistence gardening on the Hoskins oil palm scheme,
2009
in R. M. Bourke and V. Kesavan, Eds. Proceedings of the Second Papua New Guinea
Food Crops Conference. Part One. Port Moresby, Department of Primary Industry. Pp.
168-175.
619. Benjamin, C., 1985: Some food market influences of a large-scale small-holder development
in the West New Britain area of Papua New Guinea, Papua New Guinea Journal of
Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, 33(3-4): 133-141.
620. Benjamin, C., 1996: “Walindi Plantation: An example of ecotourism and its role in conservation
management”, in D. Gladman, D. Mowbray and J. Duguman, Eds. From Rio to Rai:
Environment and Development in Papua New Guinea up to 2000 and beyond, Volume 2:
Voices Unheard and Unheeded. Port Moresby, University of Papua New Guinea Press,
Pp. 215-224.
621. Benjamin, Didier; Godard, Henry, 1999: Les outre-mers Français: des espaces en mutation,
Gap; Paris: Ophrys.
622. Bennett S. and Quanchi M., 1994: South Sea Islanders in Australia; from kidnapping to a
call for recognition”, The History Teacher, Vol 32/4, pp.23-41.
623. Bennett, Geoffrey Martin, 2000: Coronel and the Falklands. Edinburgh: Birlinn.
624. Bennett, Judith A., 1987: Pacific Studies, University of Hawaii: University of Hawaii Press.
625. Bennett, Judith A., 1987a: Wealth of the Solomons: a History of a Pacific Archipelago, 1800-
1978 (Pacific Islands Monograph, 3), Honolulu (HI).
626. Bennett, Judith A., 1994: Britain, and Germany in Melanesia, In Howe, Kerry Ross; Kiste,
Robert C.; Lal, Brij V. (ed.), Tides of history: the Pacific islands in the twentieth century,
Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, 40-70.
627. Bennett, Judith A., 2000: “Across the Bougainville Strait: commercial interests and colonial
rivalry, c.1880-1930”, in Journal of Pacific History, 35:1, 67-82.
628. Bennett, Judith A., 2000a: “The grievous mistakes of the Vanikoro concession”: the Vanikoro
Kauri Timber Company, Solomon Islands, 1926-1964”, in Environment and History, 6:3,
317-348.
629. Bennett, Judith A., 2000b: Pacific forest: a history of resource control and contest in the
Solomon Islands, c.1800-1997, Leiden: Brill Academic; Knapwell: White Horse.
630. Benoist, J., 1987: «L’insularité comme dimension du fait social» in Îles tropicales: insularité,
insularisme, Bordeaux, CRET, coll. «îles et archipels», n°8, p. 37-44.
631. Benoît, Antheaume, 1983: L’atlas de Nouvelle Calédonie: itinéraire d’un programme, Paris:
ORSTOM. Disponível online em url: http://horizon.documentation.ird.fr/exl-doc/pleins_
textes/divers07/04108.pdf. consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009.
632. Benoit, France, 1989: Greenland since 1979: An annotated, cross-referenced bibliography.
Ottawa ON: Canadian Arctic Resources Committee.
633. Bensa A and Wittersheim E., 1998: Nationalism and interdependence; the political thought
of Jean-Marie Tjibaou, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 10, 2, 369-90.
634. Bensa, Alban et Isabelle Leblic (éd.), 2000: En pays kanak: ethnologie, linguistique,
archéologie, histoire de la Nouvelle-Calédonie, Paris: Maison des sciences de l’homme.
635. Bensa, Alban; Wittersheim, Eric, 1997: Nationalisme d’interdépendance: la pensée politique
de Jean-Marie Tjibaou, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut
d’Etude du Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, France, Revue
Tiers Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, pp. 197-21.
2009
CEHA 37
636. Benton, Russell E., 1988: Emma Naea Rooke (1836-1855), beloved queen of Hawaii, v. 5.
Lewiston, N.Y.: Edwin Mellen Press.
637. ́Berard, Benôit, 2004: Les premìeres occupations agricoles de l’ arc antillais, migration
et insularíte: le cas de l’occupation saladöide ancienne de la Martinique, Oxford,
Archaeopress.
638. Berg, P., 1992: Singsing tumbuan, (mask dance), text & research by Paula van den Berg;
photos by Marsha Berman, David Hannan, Paula van den Berg; concept & design by
Marsha Berman. Boroko, Papua New Guinea, Asples Productions in cooperation with the
P.N.G. National Museum & Art Gallery.
639. Bergé-Gobit, Johanna; Augustin, Jean-Pierre (Directeur de thèse), 2004: Territoire politique
et identités autochtones spatialités en mutation: Le cas de la communauté inuit des îles
Belcher au Nunavut (Canada), Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3. U.F.R. de
Géographie et d’Aménagement, Pessac.
640. Bergreen, Laurence, 2003: Over the Edge of the World, Morrow.
641. Beriatos, E., 1990: Evolutions and impacts of immigration movement in islands: The case
of the islands Kefalonia and Ithaki, The Greek Review of Social Research, 77(l):62-94.
[in Greek].
642. Berlin, Ira; Morgan, Philip D., edited by. 1991: The Slaves’ economy: independent production
by slaves in the Americas, London, England; Portland, Or.: Frank Cass.
643. Berlinguer, L et Mattone, 1998: La Sardegna. Storia d´Ítalia. Le regioni dall’Unita a oggi.
Einaudi, Torino.
644. Berloquin-Chassany, P., 2004: Haïti, une démocratie compromise (1890-1911). Paris,
L’Harmattan.
645. Berman, M., 1983: Arawe: a traditional Melanesian culture in modern times, Kimbe, Papua
New Guinea, Asples Productions.
646. Berman, M., 1994: Experiences of development in Arawe, West New Britain, Research in
Melanesia, 18.
647. Berman, M., 1996: Legislating for people’s participation in resource planning and
management, D. Gladman, D. Mowbray and J. Duguman, Eds From Rio to Rai:
Environment and Development in Papua New Guinea up to 2000 and beyond Volume 2:
Voices Unheard and Unheeded. Port Moresby, University of Papua New Guinea Press,
pp. 197-208.
648. Bernabéu-Casanova, Emmanuel, 2004 : La Corse, la Sardaigne, l’Europe: une nouvelle
donne géopolitique entre régions, Etats-nations et Union européenne ? , Lille: Atelier
national de reproduction des thèses.
649. Bernabò Brea, Luigi; Cavalier, M.; Spigo, Umberto, 1995: Lipari, Museo eoliano, Palermo:
Novecento; [Rome]: Libreria dello Stato.
650. Bernardie, Nathalie, 1999: Malte, parfum d’Europe, souffle d’Afrique, Iles et archipels n° 27,
Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
651. Bernardie-Tahir, Nathalie; Omar, El-Mahaboubi, 2001: MAYOTTE: des parfums au tourisme,
Les nouveaux enjeux du litoral, Les Cahiers D’Outre Mer, 2001, vol. 54, no 216, p. P. 369-
396.
652. Bernardie-Tahir, Nathalie, 2004: L’île et l’illicite: les nouvelles formes du relais maltais dans
l’antimonde méditerranéen, Mappemonde, 2004, no 75, p. 1-10. Disponível online em
url: http://mappemonde.mgm.fr/num3/articles/art04304.html. Consulta em 29 de Julho de
2009
2009.
653. Bernardie, Nathalie (Directrice scientifique); Taglioni, François (Directeur scientifique);
Pelletier, Philippe (Préfacier); Marrou, Louis (Postface), 2005: Les dynamiques
contemporaines des petits espaces insulaires: De l’île-relais aux réseaux insulaires,
Paris: Karthala.
654. Bernardie-Tahir, Nathalie, 2005: Des “bouts du monde” à quelques heures: l’illusion de
l’isolement dans les petites îles touristiques, Annales de géographie, juillet-août 2005,
vol. 114, no 644, p. 362-382.
655. Bernardie-Tahir, sous la direction de Nathalie, 2008: L’autre Zanzibar: géographie d’une
contre-insularité, Paris: Karthala; Pessac: ADES-Dymset; Limoges: GEOLAB-Limoges.
656. Bernhard, Virginia, 1999: Slaves and slaveholders in Bermuda, Columbia, MO, University
of Missouri Press.
657. Bernhardt, R., 1981: Federalism and Autonomy in Models of Autonomy, (pp.23 47), Y.
Dinstein (ed.), New Brunswick: Transaction Books.
658. Berno T., 1999: When a guest is a guest. Cook islanders view tourism, Annals of Tourism
Research, 26(3), pp.656-675.
659. Bernsteintaylor, B. L., [et al.], 1992: “Basement Slivers Within the New Britain Accretionary
Wedge - Implications For the Emplacement of Some Ophiolitic Slivers,” in Tectonics,
11(4): 753-765.
660. Berry, M., 2001: Refined white, Innisfail, Australian Sugar Industry Museum.
661. Berry, William E. 1989. U.S. Bases in the Philippines: The Evolution of the Special
Relationship. Boulder: Westview.
662. Bertile, W., 1987: La Reunion, developpement, integration europeenne et cooperation
regionale, In: L’ile de la Reunion, Bulletin de l’association de geographes Francais, vol.
vol. 64, no 5, p. p. 395-406.
663. Bertile, W., 1987a: La Réunion: atlas thématique et régional, Saint-Denis, Éditions arts
graphiques modernes.
664. Bertram, I.G. & R.F. Watters, 1985: The MIRAB economy in South Pacific microstates,
Pacific Viewpoint, vol. 26 (3), 1985: 497-520.
665. Bertram, G., 1986: ‘Sustainable development’ in Pacific micro-economies’, World
Development, vol. 14, 809-822.
666. Bertram, G., 2003: ‘On the convergence of small island economies with their metropolitan
partons’, World Development, vol. 32, 343-364.
667. Bertram, G. & Poirine, B., 2007: ‘Island Political Economy’ in G. Baldacchino (ed.) A World
of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Canada and Malta, Institute of Island Studies and
Agenda Publications, pp. 323-377.
668. Bertrand, Romain, 2001: “Indonesia Raya: les trois âges du nationalisme indonésien”, in
669. Besson, edited by Jean and Janet Momsen, 2007: Caribbean land and development
revisited, New York, N.Y.: Palgrave Macmillan.
670. Besson, Gérard & Brereton, Bridget, 1992: The Book of Trinidad, Port of Spain: Paria
Publishing Co. Ltd..
671. Bethel, N., 2002: “Navigations: Insularity versus Cosmopolitanism in the Bahamas: Formality
and Informality in an Arichipelagic Nation”, Social Identities, Volume 8, Number 2, 1 June,
2009
CEHA 39
pp. 237-253(17).
672. Béthencourt Massieu, Antonio, 1991: Canarias e Inglaterra: el comercio de vinos, 1650-
1800, Las Palmas: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
673. Bettencourt, Urbano, 2003: Ilhas conforme as circunstâncias, Lisboa, Edições Salamandra.
674. Bhabha, J. et alii., 1999: “Aspects sociaux et culturels de l’intégration à l’échelle régionale”,
Revue internationale des sciences sociales, n°159.
675. Bhattacharya, Asutosh, 1983: Andhakārera Āndāmāne: nr’tattvamūlaka bhramaṇa-kāhinī,
Kalikātā : E. Mukhārji.
676. Biagini, E.; Hoyle, B., 1999: Insularity and development: international perspectives on
islands, Londres, Pinter.
677. Bibliography - Sri Lanka, U.S. Library of Congress, on-line disponível em http://countrystudies.
us/sri-lanka/76.htm¸ consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
678. Bibliography On Borneo. Disponível online em url: http://lib.ysnet.org.my:8000/kborneo/
bibliography.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
679. Bicheno, Hugh, 2006: Razor’s edge: the unofficial history of the Falklands War, London:
Weidenfeld and Nicolson.
680. Bickerton, James, 1998: Federal Regional Development Policies and Atlantic Canada’s
Islands in Baldacchino, G and Greenwood, R (eds.), Competing Strategies of Socio-
EconomicDevelopment for Small Islands, The Institute of Island Studies, University of
Prince Edward Island Charlottetown Prince Edward Island, Canada, pp. 238-267.
681. Biedermann, Hans, 1984 – 1983: Die Spur der Altkanarier: eine Einführung in die
Altvölkerkunde der Kanarischen Inseln, Hallein: Burgfried-Verlag, 1984.
682. Bigelow, G. F., 1987: “Domestic architecture in medieval Shetland”, in Review of Scottish
Culture, 3, 23-38.
683. Bigelow, G. F., 1987: Domestic architecture in medieval Shetland, Review of Scottish
Culture, 3 (1987), 23-38.
684. Biggi, M., 1992: Structures et Systèmes Administratifs en Corsica in The Political
Administrative Systems of the European Island Regions, Ponta Delgada: Secretaria
Regional da Administração Interna.
685. Biggi, M. (dir.), 1996: Les systèmes de transport dans les îles, Paris, L’Harmattan/Eurisles.
686. Bijl, Nicholas van der; Aldea, David, 2003: 5th Infantry Brigade in the Falklands 1982,
Barnsley: Leo Cooper.
687. Biggi, M. (sous la direction de), 2003: Les systèmes de transport dans les îles, Paris,
Editions L’Harmattan.
688. Bilney G., 1994: Australia’s relations with the South Pacific’; challenge and change, MPA6
of 1994, Ministerial Press Release, Canberra.
689. Bingham, F. M. and R. Lukas, 1995: The Distribution of Intermediate Water in the
Western Equatorial Pacific During January February 1986, Deep-Sea Research Part
I-Oceanographic Research Papers 42(9): 1545-1573.
690. Binns, R. A., 2000: “Geochemical comparison between the Oligocene volcanic sequences in
the Finisterre Mountains, New Britain and New Ireland, Papua New Guinea”, in Geological
Society of Australia Abstracts 59: 40.
691. Birch, Chris, 2008: The milk jug was a goat: two families, two Caribbean islands, 1635-
2009
1987: being an historical survey of the true adventures in the West Indies and Australia
of various distinguished members of the Burt and Berridge families in 1635 onwards for
more than three and a half centuries with an account of the history of the Caribbe islands
of Saint Christopher and Nevis; Cambridge: Pegasus.
692. Birchenall, Peter; Birchenall, Mary (ed.), 2001: Occupation Nurse: nursing in Guernsey,
1942-45, Bognor Regis: Woodfield.
693. Bird, R.; Torrence, R. G.; Summerhayes, R.; Bailey, G., 1997: “New Britain Obsidian
Sources”, in Archaeology in Oceania 32(1): 61-67.
694. Bird, Wal (Wal F.), 1996: South Sea Island trader: narrative of a voyage to the islands of
Melanesia on the M.V. Malaita, 1950, Wollongong, NSW: W. Bird.
695. Bishop Museum, Papuan Herpetological Bibliography. Disponível online em url: http://www2.
bishopmuseum.org/PBS/PapuaHerpBib/query.asp. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
696. Bishop, K. D. and L. S. Broome, 1980: Report of a preliminary survey of the wildlife of the
Kapuluk timber development area Kombe, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Papua
New Guinea, Department of Environment and Conservation.
697. Bishop, K. D. and D. N. Jones, 2001: The montane avifauna of West New Britain, with
special reference to the Nakanai Mountains, Emu, 101(3): 205-220.
698. Bissessar, Ann Marie, 2001: The historical development of the health system in Trinidad and
Tobago; edited by Mary Hadley, Anne Mills (PHP departmental publication, 34; Health
care reform: policy content and process in the Caribbean, 2), [London]: London School of
Hygiene and Tropical Medicine.
699. Bisson, J.; Veyret, Y.; Vidal, T.; Noni, Georges de (ed.); Roose, Eric (ed.); Nouvelot, Jean
François (ed.); Veyret, Y. (ed.), 1995: Minorque ou l’exception en Méditerranée: une île
sans erosion, In: Environnement humain de l’érosion, Reseau Erosion Bulletin, ORSTOM:
Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer,cahiers des sciences
humaines, Paris, France 1995, no 15, p. p. 137-148.
700. Bitterli U., 1986/1993: Cultures in conflict; encounters between European and non-European
cultures 1492-1800, Cambridge, Polity Press.
701. Bittner, A., editor. 1992: Madagaskar: Mensch und Natur im Konflikt, Birkhauser Verlag,
Basel, Boston, Berlin.
702. Blache, J., 1936: “Le problème des îles”, Revue de géographie alpine, p. 717-723.
703. Blache, J., 1948: «Les particularités géographiques des îles», Bulletin de la société de
géographie d’Aix-Marseille, n°44, p. 5-22.
704. Black, David W., 1992: Living close to the ledge: prehistoric human ecology of the Bliss
Islands, Quoddy Region, New Brunswick, Canada, Dundas, Ont.: Copetown Press.
705. Black, edited by Ronald, 2007: To the Hebrides: Samuel Johnson’s Journey to the western
islands of Scotland and James Boswell’s Journal of a tour to the Hebrides, Edinburgh:
Birlinn.
706. Black, G., 1985: Mare Nostrum: US security policy in the english-speaking Caribbean,
Nacla, no 4, pp. 13-48.
707. Black, Jeremy, 1990: “Johnson’s Thoughts on the Falklands: a Tory tract”, in Literature &
History, ns, 1, 42-47.
708. Black, Jeremy, 2002: Samuel Johnson, Thoughts on the late transactions respecting
Falkland’s Islands, and the Tory tradition of foreign policy, In Clark, Jonathan Charles
Douglas; Erskine-Hill, Howard (ed.), Samuel Johnson in historical context (Basingstoke:
2009
CEHA 41
Palgrave), 169-83.
709. Black, Ronald, 2005: The Gaelic Otherworld: John Gregorson Campbell’s Superstitions of
the Highlands and Islands of Scotland and Witchcraft and Second Sight in the Highlands
and Islands, Birlinn.
710. Black, Ronald, 2007: To the Hebrides: Samuel Johnson’s Journey to the western islands of
Scotland and James Boswell’s, Journal of a tour to the Hebrides; edited by. Edinburgh:
Birlinn.
711. Black, Wallace B.; Blashfield, Jean F., 1992: Island hopping in the Pacific, New York:
Crestwood House; Toronto: Maxwell Macmillan Canada; New York: Maxwell Macmillan
International.
712. Blackburn, J., 1997: The Emperor’s Last Is land: A Journey to St. Helena, London, Vintage.
713. Blackman, Francis, 1989: Methodism: 200 years in British Virgin Islands, Bridgetown,
Barbados: [Methodist Church in the British Virgin Islands].
714. Blackmore, G. C., 2003: Sense of Place: Loss and the Newfoundland and Labrador Spirit,
Report presented to the Royal Commission on Renewing and Strengthening Our Place in
Canada. Disponível online em URL: http://www.gov.nl.ca/publicat/royalcomm/research/
blackmore.pdf. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009.
715. Blackwood, Ray, 1997: Whitsunday Islands: an historical dictionary, Rockhampton, Qld.,
CQU Press.
716. Blair P., 1968: Le problème des micro-États, Genève: Dotation Carnegie pour la paix
internationale.
717. Blais, Hélène, 2005: Voyages au grand océan. Géographies du Pacifique et colonisation
1815-1845, Paris: CTHS.
718. Blake, Emma, 1999: “Identity-Mapping in the Sardinian Bronze Age”, in European Journal
of Archaeology, Apr 1999; vol. 2: pp. 35 - 55.
719. Blanc, Pierre (Editeur scientifique), 2006: Dossier: Eau et pouvoirs. Confluences Méditerranée
[Texte imprimé], Blake, N. M.; B. R. Hawkins; R. L. Kirk; R. Bhatia; P. Brown, R.M. Garruto
and D. C. Gajdusek, Eté, no 58, p 9-165.
720. Blancher, N.; Mainguy, C., 1998: “Comparaison des processus de régionalisation en Afrique
sub-saharienne et en Asie orientale. Revue analytique de la littérature”, Revue Tiers
Monde, n°155, p. 505-528.
721. Blanchet, Gilles, 1981: Les petites et moyennes entreprises Polynesiennes: le cas de la
petite hotellerie, ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer,
Paris, France.
722. Blanchet, Gilles, 1984: L’Economie de la Polynesie Francaise de 1960 a 1980: un apercu
de son evolution, ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer,
Cahiers des sciences humaines, Papeete, Paris, France.
723. Blanchet, Gilles, 1985: Le développement régional en question: une voie pacifique pour le
Pacifique Sud ?, Papeete: ORSTOM.
724. Blanchet, Gilles, 1985: L’economie de la Polynésie française de 1960 à 1980: un aperçu de
son évolution, Paris: ORSTOM, (195), (Travaux et Documents de l’ORSTOM; 195).
725. Blanchet, Gilles, 1985a: Les fondements d’une identité: territoire, histoire et société dans
l’archipel de Vanuatu (Mélanésie): essai de géographie culturelle, 2. Les hommes-lieux
et les hommes-flottants, Paris: ORSTOM, 2/2, 679 p. multigr. Th. 3e cycle: Lett. et Sci.
Hum. : Paris 4.
2009
726. Blanchet, Gilles, 1994: La Polynésie française à la croisée des chemins, Mondes en
Développement, 22, p. 23-35. Disponível online em url: http://horizon.documentation.
ird.fr/exl-doc/pleins_textes/pleins_textes_6/b_fdi_35-36/41005.pdf. Consulta em 15 de
Agosto de 2009.
727. Blanchet, Gilles, 1994a: La Polynesie Francaise a la croissee des chemins / Gilles Blanchet,
Honolulu, HI: East-West Center.
728. Blanchet, Gilles; Bonnemaison, Joùl (ed.); Freyss, J. (ed.), 1997: L’aide au développement
dans le Pacifique insulaire: réflexion en forme de bilan, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations,
aides, espaces, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 57-78.
729. Blanchet, Gilles (éd.), et all…, 2002: La pêche aux Antilles (Martinique et Guadeloupe),
Paris: IRD Editions.
730. Blanchy Daurel, S., 1990: La vie quotidienne a Mayotte (Archipel des Comores), Paris:
L’Harmattan.
731. Blanchy, Sophie, 1992: Famille et parente dans l’archipel des Comores, journal des
africanistes, no 1, p. p. 7-53.
732. Blandy, Richard, 1986: The Pacific Island labour markets, Port Moresby, Papua New Guinea:
Institute of National Affairs.
733. Blanes i Blanes, Coloma... [et al.], 1990: Les Illes a les fonts clàssiques, Mallorca: M. Font.
734. Blank, Hannah, 2002: A Short Life on a Sunny Isle: An Alphonse Dantan Mystery. New York:
Hightrees/Prism Corporatio.
735. Blanton, Casey, editor. 1995: Picturing paradise: colonial photography of Samoa, 1875 to
1925, with essays by Elizabeth Edwards ... [et al.], [Daytona Beach, Fla.]: Daytona Beach
Community College.
736. Bleasdale, S., and S. Tapsell. 1994. Contemporary Efforts to Expand the Tourist Industry in
Cuba: The Perspective from Britain. In Tourism: The Stateof the Art. A. V. Seaton, ed..
Chichester, England: Wiley. Pp. 100-109.
737. Bleeker, P. and D. F. Freyne, 1981: Areas suitable for cocoa production in Papua New
Guinea. Papua New Guinea, Department of Primary Industries, Papua New Guinea,
Department of Primary Industries.
738. Bleeker, P.; Freyne, D. F., 1981: Areas suitable for cocoa production in Papua New Guinea,
Papua New Guinea, Department of Primary Industries.
739. Blerald, P A., 1986: “Dépendances étatiques et souverainetés dans la Caraïbe: essai de
typologie”, Les Cahiers de l’Administration Outre-Mer, n° 1, mai, Martinique, p. 122-236.
740. Bleznick, Donald W., 1995: A Sourcebook for Hispanic Literature and Language: A Selected,
Annotated Guide to Spanish, Spanish-American, and United States Hispanic Bibliography,
Literature, Linguistics, Journals and Other Source Materials, 3rd ed. Metuchen, N.J.:
Scarecrow Press.
741. Bligh, William, 1991: A narrative of the mutiny, on board His Majesty’s ship Bounty: and the
subsequent voyage of part of the crew, in the ship’s boat, from Tofoa, one of the Friendly
Islands, to Timor, a Dutch settlement in the East Indies, illustrated with charts.
742. Blm Lee, 2000: The relationship between the United States and the Native Hawaiian people;
a case of spouse abuse, in Borofsky R, ed, Remembrances of Pacifivc pasts, UH Press,
358-60.
743. Bloch, Michael, 1988: The secret file of the Duke of Windsor, London: Bantam, xvi, 326 p.
2009
CEHA 43
744. Bloch, M., 1993: Placing the Dead: Tombs, Ancestral Villages, and Kinship Organisation in
Madagascar, Waveland Pr. Inc.
745. Block, Alan A., 1998: Masters of Paradise, New Brunswick and London, Transaction
Publishers.
746. Blondy, Caroline, 2005: Le tourisme en Polynésie française: les acteurs privés de
l’hébergement dit « chez l’habitant » (exemples des îles hautes de Tahiti et Moorea,
archipel de la Société), Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 230, Avril-Juin. Disponível online em
url: http://com.revues.org/index243.html. Consulté le 19 août 2009. Consulta em 20 de
Agosto de 2009.
747. Blouet, Olwyn M., 2007: The contemporary Caribbean: history, life and culture since 1945,
London: Reaktion Books.
748. Blum, Gabriella, 2007: Islands of agreement: managing enduring armed rivalries, Cambridge,
Mass.: Harvard University Press.
749. Blume, H. Kuba, 1985: Die Karibische, zuckerinsel, Geographische rundschau, 1985, no 6,
pp. 286-294.
750. Blythe, Jennifer M., 1978: Following both sides: processes of group formation in Vitu, Ph.D.
dissertation, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario, Canada.
751. Blythe, Jennifer M., 1992: “Climbing a mountain without a ladder: chronologies and stories”,
in Time and Society, 1(1):45-50.
752. Blythe, Jennifer M., 1995: “Vanishing and Returning Heroes: ambiguity and persistent hope
in an Unea island legend”, in Anthropologica, 37(2):207-228.
753. Boa, Sheena, 2001: “Experiences of women estate workers during the Apprenticeship
period in St Vincent, 1834-38: the transition from slavery to freedom”, In Women’s History
Review, 10:3, 381-407.
754. Boase, Alice M., 1985: When the Sun Never Set, [Uckfield, Sussex].
755. Bobbé, Sophie 1999: Banquises: les Inuit et l’infini arctique, Paris, Editions Autrement.
756. Bobrow, Jill & Jinkins, Dana. 1985, 1993: St. Vincent and the Grenadines. 4th Edition
Revised and Updated, Concepts Publishing Co., Waitsfield, Vermont.
757. Bock Digne, Marie-S., 2003: Paysages urbains et lieux de vie: étude diachronique des villes
maritimes insulaires du sud-ouest et de l’ouest de l’océan Indien, Paris, Harmattan.
758. Bodiguel, Maryvone, 1997: Le littoral entre nature et politique, Paris: L’Harmattan.
759. Böhm, Karl, 1983: Leben einiger Inselvölker Neuguineas, Berlin: D. Reimer.
760. Böhm, Karl, 1983a: The life of some island people of New Guinea: a missionary’s
observations of the volcanic islands of Manam, Boesa, Biem, and Ubrub, introduction by
Nancy Lutkehaus, Berlin: D. Reimer.
761. Boia, L. – 1994: “L’île, lieu de l’étrange”, In: Cahiers e l’Imaginaire, n.10.
762. Bois, Paul, Pierre Boyer, Yves J. Saint-Martin, 1998: L’ancre et la croix du sud: la marine
française dans l’expansion coloniale en Afrique noire et dans l’océan Indien, de 1815 à
1900, cartographie de Robert Baud, Vincennes, Service historique de la marine.
763. Boissevain, J., 1996: ‘But we live here!’ perspectives on cultural tourism in Malta. In:
Briguglio, L., Butler, R., Harrison, D. and Filho, W.L. (eds), Sustainable Tourism in Islands
and Small States: Case studies, London: Pinter, pp.220-240.
764. Boisson, Danièle, 1981: Une notion d’insularité: trois îles bretonnes: Belle Ile, Houat, Hoëdic;
2009
dirigée par Madame Uzan, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université de Paris-Val-
de-Marne. UER Lettres et Sciences humaines. Université de soutenance, Mémoire de
maîtrise: Géographie: Paris 12.
765. Bolia, Robert S., 2004: “The Falklands War: The Bluff Cove Disaster”, in Military Review,
84, 66-72.
766. Bologna, Alfredo Bruno, 1988: Los derechos de la República Argentina sobre las Islas
Malvinas, Georgias del Sur (San Pedro) y Sandwich del Sur, Buenos Aires: Ediar.
767. Bolton L., 1999: Radio and the redefinition of kastom in Vanuatu, The Contemporary Pacific,
Vol 11, 2, pp.335-60.
768. Bolton, Lissant 1996: Tahigogona’s Sisters: Women, Mats and Landscape on Ambae, In
Arts of Vanuatu, edited by Joël Bonnemaison, Christian Kaufmann, Kirk Huffman, and
Darrell Tryon. Bathurst: Crawford House Publishing, 112–119.
769. Bon, Olivier, 2005: L’insoutenable développement urbain de l’île de Tahiti: politique du « tout
automobile » et congestion des déplacements urbains, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 230,
Avril-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index433.html. Consulté le 19
août 2009. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
770. Bonanno, Carmela, 1998: I sarcofagi fittili della Sicilia, Roma, “L’Erma” di Bretschneider.
771. Bondarenko, O., 1992: Neizvestnye Kurily: ser’eznye razmyshleni i a o statuse Kuril’skikh
ostrovov, Moskva: “VTI-Deĭta Press”.
772. Boneparth, E. and MJ Wilkinson, 1995: Terminating trusteeship for the FSM and RMI;
independence and self-sufficiency in the post-Cold War Pacific, PS, 18, 1, 61-78.
773. Bongie, Chris, 1998: Islands and exiles: the Creole identities of post colonial literature,
Stanford (Calif.): Stanford university press.
774. Boninu, Antonietta (appendice), con la collaborazione di Maria Christiana Oppo, 2002:
Insulae Christi: il Cristianesimo primitivo in Sardegna, Corsica e Baleari / a cura di Pier
Giorgio Spanu, Oristano: Mythos iniziative; S’Alvure.
775. Bonisch, D. K. (ed), 1980: Some Pacific priorities, in Priorities in Medicine, Massey University,
Palmerston North.
776. Bonnard, Brian, 1993; Alderney at war: 1939-49, Dover, NH: A. Sutton.
777. Bonneuil, C., Et P. Petitjean, 1996: « Les Chemins De La Création De L’orstom, Du Front
Populaire A La Libération En Passant Par Vichy, 1936-1945 : Recherche Scientifique Et
Politique Coloniale », Dans Roland Waast Et Patrick Petitjean (Dir.), Les Sciences Hors
d’Occident Au Xxe Siècle, Paris, ORSTOM, P. 113-161.
778. Bonnemaison, J., 1985: ‘The Tree and the Canoe: Roots and Mobility in Vanuatu Societies’,
Pacific Viewpoint, Vol. 26, No. 1, pp. 30-62.
779. Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985a: “Les lieux de l’identité: vision du passé et identité culturelle
dans les îles du sud et du centre de Vanuatu (Mélanésie)”, In: Anthropologie et histoire,
Cahiers ORSTOM, Série Sciences Humaines, 21 (1), p. 151-170.
780. Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985b: “The tree and the canoe: roots and mobility in Vanuatu societies”,
In: Chapman M. (ed.), Morrison P.S. (ed.) Mobility and identity in the island Pacific, Pacific
Viewpoint, 26 (1), Pacific Science Congress Symposium on Mobility and Identity in the
Island Pacific, 15, Dunedin (NZL), p. 30-62.
781. Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985c: “Un certain refus de l’Etat: autopsie d’une tentative de sécession
en Mélanésie”, in International Political Science Review, 6 (2), p. 230-247.
2009
CEHA 45
782. Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985d: Les fondements d’une identité: territoire, histoire et société dans
l’archipel de Vanuatu (Mélanésie): essai de géographie culturelle, 1. L’arbre et la pirogue,
Paris: ORSTOM, 1/2, 533 p. multigr. Th. 3e cycle: Lett. et Sci. Hum. : Paris 4.
783. Bonnemaison, Joël, 1985e: Vanuatu: La coutume et l’indépendance, Hérodote, 37 (38), p.
145-162.
784. Bonnemaison, J., 1986: La Dernière Île, Paris, Arka/Orstom, Oceania, vol.60, 1.
785. Bonnemaison, J., 1990: “L’espace réticulé”, in Tropiques, lieux et liens, Paris, ORSTOM, p.
500-510.
786. Bonnemaison, J., 1991: “Vivre dans l’île: une approche de l’ïléité océanienne”, L’Espace
géographique, nº2, p. 119-125.
787. Bonnemaison, Joùl, 1996: Gens de pirogue et gens de la terre: les fondements géographiques
d’une identité - l’Archipel du Vanuatu - Essai de géographie culturelle - Livre 1., Paris:
ORSTOM.
788. Bonnemaison, J., 1996 et 1997: Les fondements géographiques d’une identité, l’archipel
du Vanuatu. Tome I: Gens de la pirogue et gens de la terre, Tome II: Les gens des lieux,
histoire et géosymboles d’une société enracinée: Tanna, Paris, Éditions de l’ORSTOM.
789. Bonnemaison, J., 1997a: “La sagesse des îles”, in Sanguin, A.-L. (dir.), Vivre dans une île.
Paris, l’Harmattan, p. 121-129.
790. Bonnemaison, J. e Freyss, J., dir., 1997b: Le Pacifique insulaire, Revue Tiers-Monde, n°149.
791. Bonnemaison, Joùl; Waddell, Eric, 1997c: L’extrême Orient dans l’oeil du cyclone. Les
nouvelles frontières économiques et politiques du Pacifique insulaire, Revue Tiers
Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 13-34.
792. Bonniol, J. L. - 1987 “Micro-insularité et particularisme: approche comparée à partir de cas
antillais et seychellois”, In: Doumenge, J. F. et alii Insularité, insularisme, Bourdeaux,
Cret. (Collection Iles et Archipels).
793. Bonvallot, Jacques; Laboute, Pierre; Rougerie, Francis; Vigneron, Emmanuel, 1994: Les
atolls des Tuamotu, Paris: ORSTOM.
794. Bonvillain, Nancy, 1994: The Haidas: people of the Northwest Coast, Brookfield, Conn.:
Millbrook Press.
795. Boomert, Arie, 2000: Trinidad, Tobago and the Lower Orinoco Interaction Sphere: An
archaeological/ethnohistorical study. Alkmaar: Cairi Publications.
796. Boomgaard, Peter, 2003: In the shadow of rice: Roots and tubers in Indonesian history,
1500-1950 = Dans l’ombre du riz: racines et tubercules dans l’histoire indonésienne,
1500-1950, Agricultural history, vol. 77, no4, pp. 582-610.
797. Booth, Rosemary, 1987: “The army and navy and Governor Hatton”, in Société Guernesiaise
Report and Transactions, 22 (1987 for 1986), 62-70, ISSN 01441973.
798. Borca, F., 2000: Terra mari cincta. Insularità e cultura romana, Rome, Carocci.
799. Bordallo, Oliver W.S., 2007: Texts and Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography,
The Historian, Vol. 69.
800. Bordoni, Benedetto, 1983: Libro di Benedetto Bordone Isolario, introduzione di Massimo
Donattini, Modena: Edizioni Aldine.
801. Bordoni, Benedetto (14..-1539), 2000 : Isolario, Les Belles Lettres: N. Aragno / impr.
802. Borel, Gildas, 1990: la conquete de l’espace maritime en polynesie francaise; sous la
2009
direction de jean chaussade, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat:

Géographie: Nantes.
803. Borel, Vincent, 1997: Porquerolles et les îles de Hyères vers 1900, Marly-le-Roi, Editions
Champflour pour La Rosalba, Giens.
804. Borgatti, Lisa, 2007: “Pacific Islands’ Bilateral Trade: The Role of Remoteness and of
Transport Costs”, in No UNU-WIDER Research Paper RP2007/21, Working Papers from
World Institute for Development Economic Research (UNU-WIDER).
805. Borofsky, Robert, 1987: Making history: Pukapukan and anthropological constructions of
knowledge, Cambridge [Cambridgeshire], New York: Cambridge University Press.
806. Borofsky, R. & A. Howard (eds), 1989: Developments in Polynesian Ethnology, Honolulu,
University of Hawaii Press.
807. Borofsky, R., 1999: Cook, Lono, Obeyesekere and Sahlins, in Remembrance of Pacific
pasts; an invitation to remake history, Honolulu, UH Press, pp.420-42.
808. Borofsky, R., ed. 1999, 2000: Remembrance of Pacific pasts; an invitation to remake history,
Honolulu, UH Press.
809. Borrero Navia, José M. (José María), 1994: Estrategia de conservación y sostenibilidad
en las islas San Andrés, Old Providence y Santa Catalina (Caribe occidental), Cali:
Fundación para la Investigación y Protección del Medio Ambiente, FIPMA.
810. Borsboom, AD., 1988: The savage in European social thought; a prelude to the
conceptualization of the divergent peoples and cultures of Australia and Oceania,
Bijdragentot de Taal-land-en Volkenkunde, Vol 144, pp.419-32.
811. Borthwick, M., 1992: Pacific century; the emergence of modern Asia-Pacific, Westview
Press 1992.
812. Bosa, Miguel Suárez, 2004: “The Role of the Canary Islands in the Atlantic Coal Route from
the End of the Nineteenth Century to the Beginning of the Twentieth Century: Corporate
Strategies” (Commodities of Empire Working Paper, 4), in International Journal of Maritime
History [St John’s, Newfoundland], 16:1 (2004), 95-124.
813. Bosch Fiol, Esperança, Victòria A. Ferrer Pérez, 1997: El model de dona proposat per
la secció femenina: implantació a les Illes Balears (1939-1975), Palma de Mallorca,
Universitat Illes Balears.
814. Bosseur-Salini Dominique, Nicoli, Marie-Jeanne, Lantieri Francesca, 1987: “L’ile, figure-
paradoxe”, Peuples Méditerranéens, Janvier-juin, n° 38-39, pp. 123-129.
815. Bostock, Frances, 1994: A bank of dual nationality. The origins and strategy of the Ionian
Bank before 1914, Bankhistorisches Archiv [Frankfurt], 20 (1994), 3-25.
816. Boswell, T.D., 1986: The characteristics of internal migration to and from New Providence
Island (Greater Nassau), Bahamas: 1960-1970, Social and economic studies, vol. vol.
35, no 1, p. p. 111-150.
817. Boucher, Philip P., 2008: France and the American tropics to 1700: tropics of discontent?,
Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.
818. Bouchindomme, Marie Camille, 2003: Visages de l’île dans les films d’Ingmar Bergman;
sous la dir. de Murielle Gagnebin, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Mémoire DEA :
Etudes Cinématographiques et audiovisuelles: Paris III.
819. Boudet, C., 1997: Les îles de l’Union européenne, Saint-Denis de la Réunion, Observatoire
du développement de la Réunion, n°20.
2009
CEHA 47
820. Boughton, G., and Leary, P., eds 1994: A time of change; relations between the US and
American Samoa, Guam, the Northern Marianas, Puetro Rico and the US Virgin Islands,
University of Guam 1994.
821. Boulder, Colo, Lynne Rienner, 2007: Security and development in the Pacific Islands: social
resilience in emerging states, Berkeley: University of California Press.
822. Boulder, Colo.: Lynne Rienner, 2007a: Historical dictionary of the discovery and exploration
of the Pacific Islands, Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press.
823. Bouloux, Nathalie, Antoine Franzini, 2004: «Îles du Moyen Âge», Bulletin du Centre d’études
médiévales d’Auxerre, 8. Disponível online em URL: http://cem.revues.org/document909.
html. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009.
824. Boultbee, Paul G, David F. Raine, compilers, Bermuda, Oxford, England, Santa Barbara,
Calif., Clio Press, (bibliografia).
825. Boultbee, Paul G. (comp.), Cayman Islands (World Bibliographical Series, 187), Oxford:
Clio, 1996.
826. Boultbee, Paul G. Compiler by. 1991: Turks and Caicos Islands, Oxford, England ; Santa
Barbara, Calif. : Clio Press,(bibliografia).
827. Bound, Graham, 2006: Falkland Islanders at war, Barnsley: Pen & Sword.
828. Bound, Graham, 2007: Invasion 1982: the Falkland Islanders’ story, Barnsley [England]:
Pen & Sword Military.
829. Bouquet, Christian, 1984: Insulaires et riverains du lac Tchad: Etude géographique,
Bordeaux: Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3, Th. Doct.: Géographie: Unviersité
Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3.
830. Boura, Olivier (éd.), 1993: Les Atlantides: Généalogie d’un Mythe, Paris.
831. Bourke, Marie, 1988: “The Aran fisherman’s drowned child”, in Irish Arts Review Yearbook,
190-196.
832. Bourke, R. M., [et al.], 1996: “West New Britain Province: Text Summaries, Maps, Code
Lists and Village Identification”, in Agricultural Systems of Papua New Guinea Working
Paper No. 13. Canberra, Department of Human Geography, Research School of Pacific
and Asian Studies, Australian National University.
833. Bourke, R. M. and Betitis, T., 2003: Sustainability of Agriculture in Bougainville Province,
Papua New Guinea: Report of a Study Conducted in September-October 2002 of Village
Agriculture in Bougainville Province, Papua New Guinea, for the Bougainville Provincial
Government and PNG Department of National Planning and Monitoring and Funded
by the Australian Agency for International Development. Canberra: Land Management
Group, RSPAS, The Australian National University.
834. Boutilier, J., Hughes, D.; Tiffany, S., Eds. 1978: Mission, Church and Sect in Oceania, ASAO
Monograph No. 6. Lanham, University Press of America.
835. Boutilier, James A., 1981: The Nature, Scope, and Impact of the Tourist Industry in the
Solomon Islands, In Persistence and Exchange: A Symposium. Roland W. Force and
Brenda Bishop, eds. Honolulu: Pacific Science Association. Pp. 37-50.
836. Boutilier, James A., 1984: European Women in the Solomon Islands, 1900-1942:
Accomodation and Change on the Pacific Frontier, In Rethinking Womens’ Roles:
Perspectives from the Pacific, eds. O’Brien, Denise; Tiffany, Sharon W. (Berkeley and
Los Angeles, CA), 173-200.
837. Boutillier, J.A., 1984: Hungry sharks: Japanese economic activity in Melanesia, 1960-1980,
2009
PS, vol. 8 (1), 71-94.

838. Boutillier Jean-Louis; Brossier J.; Funel, J.M., 1985: Recherche-Développement: Haïti,
Paris: MRE CODEV.
839. Bóveda, Jorge Rafael, 2007: Malvinas: la odisea del submarino Santa Fe, Buenos Aires:
Instituto de Publicaciones Navales.
840. Bovis, Edmond de, 1980: État de la société tahitienne à l’arrivée des Européens. English
Tahitian society before the arrival of the Europeans, translation and introduction by Robert
D. Craig, Laie, Hawaii: Institute for Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University-Hawaii
Campus.
841. Bowden, Thomas N., 2004: A century of motor vehicle registration marks in the British Isles:
including Channel islands, Ireland and Isle of Man, Ivybridge: ATM.
842. Bower, Jeff, 1995: A passion for the primitive: a volunteer’s experiences in Papua New
Guinea and the Solomon Islands, Taree: Tarara.
843. Bowley, R. L., 1990: The fortunate islands: the history of the Isles of Scilly, St. Mary’s, Isles
of Scilly: Bowley.
844. Bowman, J. E., 1986: “The Highlands and Islands: a nineteenth century tour”, Gloucester.
845. Bowman, L.W., 1991: Mauritius – Democracy and Development in the Indian Ocean,
Dartmouth: Westview Press.
846. Boxill, Ian, 1997: “Fiji: the limits of ethnic political mobilisation”,in Race & Class, Oct 1997;
vol. 39: pp. 37 - 49.
847. Boyce, David George, 2005: The Falklands War (Twentieth-century wars), New York:
Palgrave Macmillan.
848. Boyd, M., 1980: Coping with Samoan resistance after the 1918 influenza epidemic: Colonel
Tate’sproblems and perplexities, JJournal of Pacific history, vol. 15(3), 155-174.
849. Boyer, Alain-Michel, 1995: Logoden et autres îles, Rezé: Éd. Séquences.
850. Boyer, publ. sous la dir. de Philippe, 1997: La mer: espace, perception et imaginaire dans le
Pacifique Sud: actes du neuvième Colloque CORAIL, Papeete: Université française du
Pacifique; Nouméa (BP 2448): CORAIL; Paris: l’Harmattan.
851. Boyer, William W., 1982: Civil liberties in the U.S. Virgin Islands, 1917-1949, St. Croix,
U.S.V.I. (Box 6932, St. Croix 00820): Antilles Graphic Arts.
852. Boyer, William W., 1983: America’s Virgin Islands: a history of human rights and wrongs,
Durham, N.C.: Carolina Academic Press, c1983.
853. Boyle, Stephen A., 1983: Economy and society of the Aran Islands, county Galway in the
early 19th century, Irish Geography, 16, 36-54.
854. Bradley, Charles C., 1994: Aleutian echoes, introduction by Pat Roppel, [Fairbanks, AK]:
University of Alaska Press.
855. Bradshaw, J., 1995: Children of Kilibob: Creation, cosmos, and culture in Northeast New
Guinea, Alice Pomponio, Review article, David R. Counts, Thomas G. Harding (guest
eds.) 1994. Pacific Studies Special Issue, vol. 17, no. 4. Laie: The institute for Polynesian
Studies, Brigham Young University - Hawai’i. Oceanic Linguistics 34(2): 472-474.
856. Bradt, H., 2002: Madagascar: the Bradt Travel Guide, Seventh edition, London.
857. Bradt, Hilary, 1989: Madagascar, Cincinnati: Seven Hills.
858. Braga, Isabel M. R. Mendes Drumond, 1999: Bigamia e insularidade: o caso da Madeira
2009
CEHA 49
na época moderna, Françoise Massa, Ed., Les Iles Atlantiques: Réalités et imaginaire.
Actes du coloque, Rennes: Université Haute Bretagne Rennes 2, equipe de Recherches
interdisciplinaires en Langues romanes, pp.189-197, republicado em Islenha, 28 (2001),
pp69-73.
859. Braga, Isabel M.R. Mendes Drumond, 2001: «A Inquisição e a Sociedade Madeirense
na Época Moderna: Elementos para o seu Estudo», pp. 183-255, Avelino de Freitas
de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de
Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999,
vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos
Descobrimentos Portugueses.
860. Braga, Isabel M. R. Mendes Drumond, 2004, «Historiografia universitária sobre temáticas
regionais insulares (1974-2000)», in Islenha, n.º 34, pp. 4-20.
861. Bragard, Véronique, 2008: Transoceanic dialogues: coolitude in Caribbean and Indian
Ocean literatures, Bruxelles, Belgium; New York: P.I.E. Peter Lang.
862. Braith Waite; C.J.R.; Stoddart, D.R., (ed.), 1984: Biogeography and ecology of the Seychelles
Islands, In Geology of the Seychelles, La haye; Boston; Lancaster: Junk.
863. Brana-Shute, Rosemary, 1983: A Bibliography of Caribbean Migration and Caribbean
Immigrant Communities. Gainesville: Center for Latin American Studies, University of
Florida.
864. Brandao, Jose Antonio, 2000: Your Fyre Shall Burn No More: Iroquois Policy Toward New
France and its Native Allies to 1701, Bison Books Corporation.
865. Braunstein, Florence; François Pépin, Jean, 1994: Les civilisations oubliées, Paris:
Marketing.
866. Bray, M. & Packer, S., 1994: Education in Small States: Concepts, Challenges & Strategies,
Oxford, Pergamon.
867. Bray, M. and Fergus, H., 1986: ‘The implications of size for educational development in
small countries: Montserrat, a Carribean case study’, Compare, 16(1), 91-143.
868. Bray, M., 1987: ‘Small countries in international development’, Journal of Development
Studies, 23(2), 295-300.
869. Bray, M., 1991: ‘Education in small states: Growth of interest and emergence of theory.’
Prospects, 21(4), 503-516.
870. Bray, M., Charles, H. et al., 1991: Making Small Practical: Organisation and Management of
Ministries of Education in Small States, London: Commonwealth Secretariat.
871. Braybrooke, J. C., 1968: Geological investigation of Lake Hargy hydro-electric scheme,
west New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Geological Survey.
872. Breen, Eamonn, 1990: The three islands: international agreements in Northern Ireland,
Cyprus, and Sri Lanka, [Belfast: Dept. of Politics], Queen’s University of Belfast.
873. Brenner, T.; Fornahl, D. (eds), 2003: Cooperation, networks and institutions in regional
innovation systems, Cheltenham, Edward Elgar publishing.
874. Breslin, S., 2002: New regionalism in the global political economy, Londres, Routledge.
875. Breton, Jean-Marie (dir.); et all…, 2001: L’écotourisme, un nouveau défi pour la Caraïbe ?,
Paris; Pointe-à-Pitre: Karthala; CREJETA.
876. Breton, Jean-Marie (Directeur scientifique); Portecop, Jacques (Préfacier), 2006:
Développement viable et valorisation environnementale Caraïbe - Amérique latine
2009
(Enjeux, menaces et perspectives), Paris; Pointe-à-Pitre: Karthala; CREJETA.

877. Breure, C. J., 1982: “Factors affecting yield and growth of oil palm tenera in West New-
Britain”, in Oleagineux, 37(5): 213-227.
878. Breure, C. J., J. Konimor and E. A. Rosenquist, 1982a: Oil palm selection and seed production
at Dami Oil Palm Research Station, Papua New Guinea, Oil Palm News, No. 26: 2-17.
879. Breure, C. J., 1982b: “Factors affecting yield and growth of oil palm trees teneras in West
New Britain [Papua New Guinea], in Proceedings of the International Conference on Oil
Palm in Agriculture in the Eighties, Kuala Lumpur (Malaysia), Institut Penyelidikan Minyak
Kelapa Sawit Malaysia; Pergabongan Persatuan Peladang, Kuala Lumpur (Malaysia).
PpP (ISP).
880. Breure, C. J., 1985: “Relevant factors associated with crown expansion in oil palm (Elaeis
guineensis Jacq.)” in Euphytica 34 (1): 161-175.
881. Breure, C. J., [et al.], 1986: “Oil palm introductions to Papua New Guinea and the formulation
of selection methods at Dami Oil Palm Research Station”, in Proceedings of International
Workshop on Oil Palm Germplasm and Utilisation, Workshop Proceedings of the Palm Oil
Research Institute of Malaysia, Bangi, Selangor (Malaysia), Institut Penyelidikan Minyak
Kelapa Sawit Malaysia, Bangi, Selangor.
882. Breure, C. J., 1986a: “Parent selection for yield and bunch index in the oil palm in West New
Britain”, in Euphytica, 35(1): 65-72.
883. Brewin, Christopher, 2000: European Union and Cyprus, Eothen Press.
884. Brézet, François-Emmanuel, 2002: La bataille du cap Coronel et des Falklands: croisière
sans retour, l’escadre de croiseurs du vice-amiral Graf von Spee [The battle of Cape
Coronel and the Falklands: a cruise without a return journey: vice-admiral Graf von Spee’s
cruiser fleet], Nantes: Marines.
885. Briceno Ruiz, J., 2001: “Remaking of the triangular relation between the USA, the European
Union and Latin America”, Journal of European integration, n°2, p. 199-215.
886. Briceño Ruíz, José, 2007: La integración regional en América Latina y el Caribe: procesos
históricos y realidades comparadas, Mérida, Venezuela: Publicaciones Vicerrectorado
Académico CODEPRE.
887. Brigand, Louis, 1983: Les Iles Bretonnes: Aspects Geographiques De L’insularite; Sous
La Direction De Annik Moign, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine),Thèse de 3e cycle:
Géographie: Brest.
888. Brigand Louis, en coll., 1991: « Les îles en Méditerranée: enjeux et perspectives», Paris:
Economica, brigand Louis, en coll., Territoires et sociétés insulaires, actes du Colloque
international (Brest et Ouessant, 15-17 novembre 1989), Brest: Université de Bretagne
occidentale, Institut de géoarchitecture.
889. Brigand, L., Edited by F. Gourmelon and, 1991: Territoires et sociétés insulaires – Actes
du colloque international de Brest. 15-17 Novembre 1989. Université de Bretagne
occidentale, Brest.
890. Brigand Louis, 1995, 2002: Les îles du Ponant: histoires et géographie des îles et archipels
de la Manche et de l’Atlantique, Quimper: Éd. Palantines.
891. Brigand, L., 1995: “D’île en île, l’archipel du Conservatoire du littoral”, Les Cahiers du
Conservatoire du littoral, no. 3.
892. Brigand, Louis, 2000: Iles, Ilots et Archipels du Ponant: de L’abandon a la Surfrequentation
?: Essai sur la Question Des Usages, de la Gestion et de la Conversation Depuis 1950;
2009
CEHA 51
Sous La Direction De Fernand Verger, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université

Panthéon-Sorbonne (Paris). Université de soutenance, Thèse de doctorat : Géographie:
Paris 1.
893. Brigand, L., 2002: “Les frontières géographiques de l’île ou l’île dans le temps et dans
l’espace”. in Regards pratiques et savoir, le littoral. Études offertes à Fernand Verger,
Paris, Édition de l’ENS, p. 169-190.
894. Brigand, L., 2006: Que serais-je sans elles? Relation d’un Voyage d’un Quart de Siécle d’île
en île, in J.-P.Castelain(ed.), Îles Réelles, Îles Rêvées, Ethnologie Française, nº2006/3,
475-483.
895. Brigand, Louis, 2009: Besoin D’Iles, Paris, Stock.
896. Briggs, Asa, 1995: The Channel Islands occupation and liberation, 1940-1945, London:
Batsford in association with the Imperial War Museum.
897. Briguglio, L., 1992: Preliminary Study on the Construction of an Index for Ranking Countries
According to their Economic Vulnerability, UNCTAD/LDC/Misc.4.
898. Briguglio, L., 1993: The Economic Vulnerabilities of Small Island Developing States, study
commissioned by CARICOM for the Regional Technical Meeting of the Global Conference
on the Sustainable Development of Small Island Developing States, Port of Spain,
Trinidad and Tobago, July.
899. Briguglio, L. and Kaminarides, J. (eds), 1993a: ‘Islands and small states: issues and policies’,
World Development, 21(2), February (SpecialIssue).
900. Briguglio, L., 1995: “Small Island States and their Economic Vulnerabilities,” World
Development, Vol. 23, 1615-1632.
901. Briguglio, L., Archer, B. Jafari, J. & Wall, G. eds., 1996: Sustainable Tourism in Islands and
Small States – Vol. 1: Issues and Policies, 2 vols, London, Pinter.Briguglio, L. & Kisanga,
E.J. (eds.), 2004: Economic Vulnerability and Resilience of Small States, Islands and
Small States Institute of the University of Malta and the Commonwealth Secretariat,
Malta, Formatek.
902. Briguglio, L., Archer, B., Jafari, J. and Wall.G. (eds), 1996: Sustainable Tourism in Islands &
Small States: Issues and Policies. London: Pinter.
903. Briguglio, L, 1997: Alternative Economic Vulnerability Indices for Developing Countries.
Report prepared for the Expert Group on Vulnerability Index. UN (DESA), 17-19 December.
904. Briguglio, L., 1998: The Global Involvement of Small Island Developing States, Mauritius,
Paper Presented at the International Small Islands Studies Association Conference.
905. Briguglio, edited by = edité par Lino, 1999: Sustainable development of small island
developing states in the Indian Ocean, Mediterranean and Atlantic regions (IMA-SIDS):
report = Le developpement durable des petits etats insulaires en voie de developpement
des regions de L’ocean indien, de la mediterranee et de l’atlantique (PEID-OIMA) : report
= rapport, Malta: Islands and Small States Institute, Foundation for International Studies,
University of Malta in collaboration with the Multilateral Affairs Dept. of the Ministry of
Foreign Affairs, Malta and the United Nations Environment Programme.
906. Briguglio, L., Cordina, G. & Kisanga, E.J. (eds.), 2006: Building the Economic Resilience
of Small States, Islands and Small States Institute of the University of Malta and the
Commonwealth Secretariat, Malta, Formatek.
907. Brinklow, edited by Laurie, Ledwell, Frank, Ledwell, and Jane, 2000: Message in a bottle: the
literature of small islands: proceedings from an international conference, Charlottetown,
2009
Prince Edward Island, Canada, June 28 to 30, 1998, Charlottetown, P.E.I.: Institute of
Island Studies.
908. Britain Oil Palm Development Ltd., 1983: Research at Dami Oil Palm Research Station, the
first 15 years 1968-1982, Lae, Papua New Guinea.
909. British Museum (Natural History), 1984- 1987: Catalogue of the natural history drawings
commissioned by Joseph Banks on the Endeavour voyage 1768-1771, held in the British
Museum (Natural History). British Museum (Natural History), London: The Museum,
1984-1987 (Dorchester: Dorset Press).
910. Brito González, Alexis, 1997: D. Extranjeros en Lanzarote, 1640-1700, [Arrecife], Servicio
de Publicaciones del Cabildo de Lanzarote.
911. Brito, Oswaldo, 1989: La encrucijada internacional: historia contemporánea: Canarias,
1876-193, [Santa Cruz de Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
912. Britsch, R. Lanier, 1986: Unto the islands of the sea: a history of the Latter-day Saints in the
Pacific Salt Lake City, UT, Deseret Book.
913. Brittain-Catlin, William, 2005: Offshore: the dark side of the global economy, Farrar, Strauss
and Giroux, New York.
914. Brizan, George, 1984: Grenada Island of Conflict: From Amerindians to People’s Revolution
1498–1979. London, Zed Books Ltd., publisher; Copyright, George Brizan.
915. Broadhead, John, 1995: Gwaii Haanas transitions study: social & economic trends in
communities on Haida Gwaii (the Queen Charlotte Islands) affected by the creation
of a Haida Heritage Site & National Park Reserve in Gwaii Haanas (South Moresby),
[Skidegate, B.C.]: Queen Charlotte Islands Museum Press.
916. Broch, H.B., 1981: Cultural variation on the islands in the sea of Flores, Archipel, 1981/00,
no 22, pp. 43-53.
917. Bronfman, Alejandra, On the move: the Caribbean since 1989, Halifax, N.S.: Fernwood
Publishing; London; New York: Zed Books.
918. Broodbank, Cyprian, 2000: An island archaeology of the early Cyclades, Cambridge
University Press.
919. Brooke, W. Michael, co-ordinator and editor, 1980?: Blacks in Bermuda: historical
perspectives, Hamilton?: Bermuda College.
920. Brower, Kenneth; Harri Peccinotti, 1981: Micronesia: The Land, the People, and the Sea,
Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.
921. Brown, Alice, McCrone, David and Paterson, Lindsay, 1996: Politics and Society in Scotland,
McMillan Press Ltd Houndmillis, Basingstoke, Hampshire and London.
922. Brown, Cedric C., 1998: ‘”This Islands watchful Centinel”: anti-Catholicism and proto-
Whiggery’, In Zwicker, Steven N. (ed.), The Cambridge companion to English literature
1650-1740, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 165-8.
923. Brown, edited by M. Anne, 2007: Security and development in the Pacific Islands: social
resilience in emerging states, Boulder, Colo.: Lynne Rienner.
924. Brown, George, 1905: Pioneer, Missionary and Explorer: an autobiography, London: Hodder
and Stroughton.
925. Brown, James, William P. Snyder, 1985: The Regionalization of warfare: the Falkland/
Malvinas Islands, Lebanon, and the Iran-Iraq conflict, New Brunswick, N.J., Transaction
Books.
2009
CEHA 53
926. Brown, M., 1995: A History of Madagascar, Damien Tunnicliffe, UK.

927. Brown, Prepared for online presentation by the Right Reverend Dr. Terry, 2007: J.W. Beattie
Journal of a Voyage to the Western Pacific in the Melanesian Mission Yacht Southern
Cross 25 August-10 November 1906. Disponível online em url: http://anglicanhistory.org/
oceania/beattie_journal1906.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
928. Brown, Stewart and John Wickham, eds. 1999: The Oxford Book of Caribbean Short Stories.
Introduction by Stewart Brown, New York: Oxford UP.
929. Brown, Susan, 1981: Victorian Frederiksted: details of 19th century Caribbean architecture
of Frederiksted, St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands, [S.l.: St. Croix Landmarks Society].
930. Browne, Christopher, 2006: Pacific island economies, Washington, D.C.: International
Monetary Fund.
931. Browne, Frank, 1998: Images of Aran: photographs by Father Browne 1925-1938; compiled
by E. E. O’Donnell. Dublin: Wolfhound Press, 1998.
932. Browne, Zoë; Donnelly, Sue, 2005: Ionian Bank Limited: retroconversion and digitisation
project, Business Archives, 91, 16-27.
933. Brugge, David M., 1999: The Navajo-Hopi Land Dispute: An American Tragedy, university
of New Mexico Press.
934. Brun, Jean-Pierre, 1997: Les îles d’Hyères: fragments d’histoire, en collaboration avec
Jean-Marie Guillon ... [et al.], Arles: Actes sud.
935. Bruner, Edward M., 1995: The Ethnographer/Tourist in Indonesia. In International Tourism:
Identity and Change. Marie-Françoise Lanfant, John B. Allcock, and Edward M. Bruner,
eds. London: Sage. pp. 224-241.
936. Brunet, edited by M.A., and Davies, J.E., 1994: The Cayman Islands: natural history and
biogeography/, Dordrecht, The Netherlands; Boston: Kluwer Academic.
937. Brunet, Roger (dir.), et all..., 1995: Asie du Sud-Est, Oceanie. In L’angle de l’Asie:
continentalite et insularite, Paris; Montpellier: Belin; Reclus.
938. Brunet, R., 1997: “Quelle est la plus grande île du monde ?”, Mappe Monde, n° 4, p. 40-41.
939. Brunt, M.A.; Davies, J.E., edited by. 1994: The Cayman Islands: natural history and
biogeography, Dordrecht, The Netherlands; Boston: Kluwer Academic.
940. Bruton, Henry J., 1992: Sri Lanka and Malaysia, New York: Oxford University Press.
941. Bryan, A., 1997: “The New Clinton Administration and the Caribbean: Trade, Security and
Regional Politics”, Journal of Interamerican Studies and World Affairs, nº1, p. 101-120.
942. Bryan, A.; Bryan, R., 1999: “The new face of regionalism in the Caribbean”, The North-
South Agenda, nº 35.
943. Bryden, John, 1981: Appraising a Regional Development Programme - The Case of the
Scottish Highlands and Islands. European Review of Agricultural Economics, 18, pp.
475-497.
944. Buchanan, Meg, (ed.). 1995: St. Kilda: the continuing story of the islands, Edinburgh: HMSO.
945. Buchholz, H.J., 1987: Sudpazifik-Inseln. Kleinheit als entwicklungsproblem, Geographische
rundschau, no 1, pp. 14-21.
946. Buck, E., 1993: Paradise remade; the politics of culture and history in Hawaii, Temple
University Press.
947. Buckley K. and Klugman K, 1983: The Australian presence in the Pacific; Burns Philp 1914-
2009
1946, Sydney, Allen and Unwin.

948. Buckley K. and Klugman K, 1986: South Pacific Focus; Burns Philp’s trading viewed through
photographs early this century, Sydney, Allen and Unwin.
949. Buhagiar, Mario, 1986: Late Roman and Byzantine catacombs and related burial places in
the Maltese Islands, Oxford, England, B.A.R..
950. Buhagiar, Mario, 1987: The iconography of the Maltese Islands, 1400-1900: painting,
Valletta, Malta: Progress Press.
951. Buhalis, D. and Diamantis, D., 1999: Tourism development and sustainability on the Greek
archipelagos. In: Apostolopoulos, Y. (ed), Mediterranean Islands and Sustainable Tourism
Development, London: Cassel, pp. 143-170.
952. Buissonnières, 1995: D’île en île: l’archipel du Conservatoire du littoral, Paris: Conservatoire
du littoral.
953. Bulbeck C., 1992: Australian women in Papua New Guinea, Melbourne, CUP.
954. Bulmer-Thomas, V., 2001: Regional integration in Latin America and the Caribbean: the
political economy of open regionalism, Londres, University of London, Institute of Latin
American Studies.
955. Bumsted, J.M., 1980: The Only Island there is The Writings of PEI History in Smitheram,
Verner, Milne, David and Dasgupta, Satadal, The Garden Transformed Prince
EdwardIsland 1945-1980. Ragweed Press, Charlottetown, pp. 11-38.
956. Bunce, P., 1988: The Cocos (Keeling) Islands: Australian atolls in the Indian Ocean. Milton:
Jacaranda Press, 1988.
957. Bunge, F.M., 1985: American Samoa, in Oceania: a regional study, (pp. 353-62), F.M.
958. Bunge, Frederica M. edited by. 1983: Indian Ocean, five island countries, Foreign Area
Studies, The American University; Washington, D.C.: The Studies: For sale by the Supt.
of Docs., U.S. G.P.O..
959. Bunge, Frederica M., Melinda W. Cooke, 1984: Oceania, a regional study - Foreign Area
Studies, the American University,Washington, D.C. , U.S. G.P.O..
960. Bunkabu hen, Ryūkyū Shinpō, 1983: Okinawa-gaku no gunzō, Tōkyō: Honpō Shoseki.
961. Bunting, Madeleine, 1995: The model occupation: the Channel Islands under German rule,
1940-1945, London: HarperCollins.
962. Buondelmonti, C., 2005: Liber insularum archipelagi: Universitäts- und Landesbibliothek
Düsseldorf Ms. G 13, I. Siebert & M. Plassmann, eds., Wiesbaden, Reichert. (A facsimile
edition of a manuscript of Buondelmonti’s work.).
963. Buondelmonti, Cristoforo, 2007: Liber insularum archipelagi, Transkription des Exemplars
Universitäts- und Landesbibliothek Düsseldorf Ms. G 13, Übersetzung und Kommentar
von Karl Bayer, Wiesbaden: Reichert Verlag.
964. Burac, Maurice, Olivier Chapuis, Alain Huetz de Lemps, Jean-René Vanney, 1986:
Contribution française à la connaissance géographique des Antilles et de l’Atlantique au
sud des Açores, Iles et archipels n° 15, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
965. Burac, Pierre, 1989: Les Petites Antilles: etude geographique des disparites regionales de
developpement, Bordeaux: presses universitaires de Bordeaux, 1989, 3 vols.
966. Burac, M., 1991: “Approche géographique du problème de l’unité politique dans les Etats et
pays multi-insulaires de la Caraïbe, in: Etudes Caribéennes. Société et Politique, Sous
la direction de Yacou, A et Martin, M., Toulouse, CERC, Presses de l’Institut d’Etudes
2009
CEHA 55
Politiques de Toulouse, p. 147-158.

967. Burac, Maurice, 1993: La Barbade. Les mutations récentes d’une île sucrière, Iles et
archipels n° 17, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
968. Burac, M. (dir.), 1994: Guadeloupe, Martinique et Guyane dans le monde américain, Paris,
Karthala.
969. Burden, Rodney A., 1986: Falklands: the air war, [s.l.]: British Aviation Research Group.
970. Burenhult, Göran, 2002: The archaeology of the Trobriand Islands, Milne Bay Province,
Papua New Guinea: excavation season 1999, Oxford : Archaeopress.
971. Burgarella Mattei, Marie-Noelle, 1995: Contribution A L’etude Du Fonctionnement Des
Petites Economies Insulaires, Sous La Direction De Bernard Fustier, Mémoire Ou Thèse
(Version D’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Sciences économiques: Corte.
972. Burgarella-Mattei M. N., 1997: «Conséquences socio-économiques de l’insularité: de
l’isolement à la coopération». Colloque de l’Université de Corse. 19 au 21 juin Ajaccio,
Editions Alain Piazzola. îles principales de la Méditerranée orientale”. Travaux de la Maison
de l’Orient méditerranéen, °25, p. 29-52.
973. Burgess, Douglas R., 2008: The pirates’ pact: the secret alliances between history’s most
notorious buccaneers and colonial America, Chicago: McGraw-Hill.
974. Burgess, Glenn, 2008: From the Common Law Mind to The Discovery of Islands: J.G.A.
Pocock’s Journey, History of Political Thought, 29:3 (2008), 543-61.
975. Burmester H, 1983: Outposts of Australia in the Pacific Ocean, Australian Journal of Politics
and History, Vol 29, pp.14-25.
976. Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2001: Foreign In a Domestic Sense: Puerto Rico, American
Expansion, and the Constitution, Durham, NC: Duke University Press, Co-edited the
volume and co-authored the introduction (with Burke Marshall).
977. Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2001a: The Case for Puerto Rican Decolonization, Orbis: A
Journal Of World Affairs, 433(Summer).
978. Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2002: The Status of Puerto Rico: Political, Social, and
Economic Dimensions (with Howard Hills), Working Paper No. 9, Center for International
Development, Heller School forSocial Policy and Management, Brandeis University.
979. Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2005: The Edges of Empire and the Limits of Sovereignty:
American Guano Islands,” in Mary Dudziak and Leti Volpp, eds., Legal Borderlands: Law
and the Construction of American Borders, 57:3 American Quarterly, 779 (Special Issue,
2005) (also published as a book by Johns Hopkins University Press, 2006).
980. Burnett, Christina Duffy-Ponsa, 2007: None of the Above Means More of the Same: The
Elusive Quest for Puerto Rican Self-Determination,” in Frances Negrón Muntaner, ed.,
None of the Above: Puerto Ricans in the Global Era, New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
981. Burnett, John, 2001: “The Highlands and Islands of Scotland as a “cultural museum”, 1900-
2000: a century of migration”, in Immigrants & Minorities, 20:1, 35-70.
982. Burnett, Kathryn and Burnett, Andrew, 1999: Europe and the Mediation of Regional Identity,
A View from Scotland’s Margins. Paper presented at the Regional Studies Association
European Conference, 18-21 September, (1999), University of the Basque Country
Bilbao, Spain.
983. Burns, Sir Alan 1965: History of the British West Indies, George Allen and Unwin Ltd, London
England.
2009
984. Burt, Ben, 1998: Writing local history in Solomon Islands, In Pacific Answers to Western
Hegemony: Cultural Practices of Indentity Construction (Explorations in Anthropology),
Jürg Wassman, ed. Oxford: Berg.
985. Burt, edited by Ben and Christian Clerk,1997: Environment and development in the Pacific
Islands, Canberra: National Centre for Development Studies, Research School of Pacific
and Asian Studies, The Australian National University; Port Moresby: University of Papua
New Guinea Press.
986. Burton-Bradley, B. G., 1990: “Traditional medicine”, in B. G. Burton-Bradley, Ed. A History
of Medicine in Papua New Guinea: Vignettes of an Earlier Period, Kingsgrove, NSW,
Australasian Medical Publishing Company Limited, pp. 1-13.
987. Burton-Bradley, B. G., 1990: Traditional medicine, A History of Medicine in Papua New
Guinea: Vignettes of an Earlier Period, Kingsgrove, NSW, Australasian Medical Publishing
Company Limited, pp. 1-13.
988. Burton-Bradley, B. G., ed.1990: Traditional medicine, in A History of Medicine in Papua
New Guinea: Vignettes of an Earlier Period, Kingsgrove, NSW, Australasian Medical
Publishing Company Limited, pp. 1-13.
989. Bushnell, O. A., 1993: The Gifts of Civilization: Germs and Genocide in Hawaii, University
of Hawaii Press.
990. Busoni, Jaurès, 1980: Confinati a Lipari, Milano: Vangelista.
991. Busteed, Mervyn, 2000: Little islands of Erin: Irish settlement and identity in mid-nineteenth
century Manchester, in MacRaild, Donald M. (ed.), The Great Famine and beyond: Irish
migrants in Britain in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, Dublin: Irish Academic
Press, 94-127.
992. Busto Duthurburu, José Antonio del, 2000: Túpac Yupanqui: descubridor de Oceanía, Lima:
Editorial Brasa.
993. Butel, Paul, 2002: Histoire des Antilles Françaises XVIIe - XXe siècle, Perrin.
994. Butel, V., 1982: Contribution a une etude comparee de la canne a sucre dans les petites iles
tropicales, Bibliographie analytique et commentee, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3,
Institut de Geographie.
995. Butler, / Roger, 2001: Islands in the sun: prints by indigenous artists of Australia and the
Australasian region, Canberra, Australia: National Gallery of Australia.
996. Butler, R.W., 1993: Tourism development in small islands: past influences and future
directions. In: Lockhart, D., Drakakis-Smith, D. and Schembri, J. (eds) The Development
Process in Small Islands States. London: Routledge, pp.71-91.
997. Butler, R.W., 1996: Problems and possibilities of sustainable tourism: The case of the
Shetland Islands. In: Briguglio, L., Butler, R., Harrison, D. and Filho, W.L. (eds) Sustainable
Tourism in Islands and Small States: Case Studies. London: Pinter, pp.11-31.
998. Buttimer, A. & Seamon, D., eds., 1980: The Human Experience of Space and Place,
NewYork, St. Martin’s Press.
999. Buxton, Anne; McEwan, Jacqueline, 1992: The Orkney chronicles, 1900 & 1989, Newmill,
Penzance, Cornwall: Jamieson Library.
1000. Byrn, John D., 1989: Crime and punishment in the Royal Navy: discipline on the Leeward
Islands station, 1784-1812, Aldershot, Hants, England: Scolar Press; Brookfield, Vt.,
USA: Gower.
1001. Byrne, Seán, “Power politics as usual in Cyprus and Northern Ireland: Divided islands and
2009
CEHA 57
the role of external ethno-guarantors”, in Nationalism & Ethnic Politics, 6:1, 1-23.
1002. Caballero Mujica, Francisco, 1992: Canarias hacia Castilla: datos de un proceso histórico
/ Francisco Caballero Mujica, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Caja Insular de Ahorros de
Canarias.
1003. Cabasset, Christiane, 1995: Tourisme culturel et tourisme de masse a Bali, In: Iles
tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 319-346.
1004. Cabaussel, G., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples,
In Les mecanismes climatiques des iles intertropicales a travers l’exemple de l’archipel
guadeloupeen, Bordeaux: CEGET; CRET, p. 25-50.
1005. Cabral, Nelson Eurico, 1980: Le Moulin et le Pilon: les Iles du Cap-Vert, Paris: L’Harmattan;
ACCT.
1006. Cachey, T. J. (Theodore J.), 1995: Le Isole Fortunate: appunti di storia letteraria italiana,
Roma: “L’Erma” di Bretschneider.
1007. Cadet, Jean-Robert, 1998: Restavec: From Haitian Slave Child to Middle Class American,
Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.
1008. Cahen, Michel, 1994: “De Timor à Letícia, géopolitiques des mondes lusophones”, in
1009. Cahen, Michel, 2001: “Loro Sa’e, «soleil levant» archaïsant, ou signe de modernité à l’ère
de la mondialisation ?”, in Lusotopie, pp. 125-133.
1010. Cahill P., 1997: A prodigy of wastefulness, corruption, ignorance and indolence; the
Expropriation Board in New Guinea 1920-1927, Journal of Pacific history, Vol 32, 1, pp.2-
28.
1011. Calder A, Lamb J., and Orr B, eds, 1999: Introduction; postcoloniality and the Pacific, in
Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-1840, UH Press, Honolulu, p.1-24.
1012. Calder, Alex, 1996: The temptations of William Pascoe Crook: an experience of cultural
difference in the Marquesas, 1797-1798, Journal of Pacific History, 31:2,144-61.
1013. Caldwell, Bill, 1981: Islands of Maine: where America really began, Portland, Me.: G.
Gannett Pub. Co..
1014. Caldwell, J.C., G.E. Harrison, and P. Quiggin, 1980: Demography of Micro, in World
Development, Vol. 8, No 12 (pp. 953-967).
1015. Calixte, directeurs Fritz, Edelyn Dorismond, 2007: Vaudou, santéria, candomblé: les
pratiques religieuses dans la Caraïbe, Paris: L’Harmattan.
1016. Calleya, S., 2000: Regionalism in the post-cold war world, Aldershot, Ashgate.
1017. Callick, R., 1993: Pacific 2010; A doomsday scenario, in Cole R., ed, Pacific 2010;
Challenging the future, Canberra, NCDC, ANU, 1-11.
1018. Calligas, Eleni, 1994: “Lord Seaton’s Reforms in the Ionian Islands, 1843-8: A Race With
Time”, in European History Quarterly, Jan; vol. 24: pp. 7 - 29.
1019. Callow, P. and J.M. Cornford, 1986: La Cotte de St. Brelade 1961-1978: excavations by
C.B.M. McBurney, Norwich [Norfolk], Geo Books.
1020. Callus, Ivan, 2009: Maltese literature in the language of the other: a case study in minority
literatures’ pursuit of ‘majority’, in Acta Scientiarum Language and Culture Maringá, v. 31,
n. 1, p. 31-40.
1021. Calmont, Andre, et all..., 1999: des espaces tropicaux entre insularité et continentalité, In:
2009
Les outre-mers français, Mappemonde, no 54, p. p. 10-14.

1022. Calvo, Andrea, 1985: Nove de le isole & terraferma novamente trovate in India English &
Italian News of the islands and the mainland newly discovered in India by the captain of
His Imperial Majesty’s fleet, translated and with notes by Edward F. Tuttle, Culver City,
Calif.: Labyrinthos.
1023. Camacho, Maria Graziela Fernandes, 1999: A insularidade no romance de Horácio Bento
de Gouveia [Texto policopiado]: uma introdução à sua obra, Tese mestr. Literatura
Portuguesa - Moderna e Contemporânea, Univ. Cat. Portuguesa.
1024. Camberoque, Charles, 1985: Els mallorquins, els eivissencs: chiens de chasse des
Baléares, textes de Miguel Elena Rosselló, [Vinça, France], Chiendent.
1025. Cameron, A. D., 1986: Go listen to the crofters: the Napier Commission and crofting a
century ago, Stornoway, Isle of Lewis, Acair.
1026. Cameron, Ewen A., 2005: communication or Separation? Reactions to Irish Land Agitation
and Legislation in the Highlands of Scotland, c.1870-1910, English Historical Review,
120:487633-66.
1027. Cameron, J., 1991: Economic development options for the FSM at independence, PS, 14,
4, 35-70.
1028. Cameron, J., ed., 2003: Changing Places: Re-imagining Australia, Double Bay NSW,
Longueville.
1029. Camhis, M. and Coccossis, H., 1983: Environment and tourism in island regions, Planning
and Administration, 10(1), pp.16-23.
1030. Campbell, David G., 1981: The ephemeral islands: a natural history of the Bahamas,
London: Macmillan.
1031. Campbell, Ewan; Lane, Alan, 1989: Llangorse: a 10th-century royal crannog in Wales,
Antiquity, 63, 675-81.
1032. Campbell, Gwyn, 2005: An economic history of Imperial Madagascar, 1750-1895: the rise
and fall of an island empire, Cambridge University Press.
1033. Campbell, I. C. (Ian Christopher),, 1980: Savages noble and ignoble; the preconceptions
of early European voyagers in Polynesia, Pacific Studies, Vol 4/1 pp.45-59.
1034. Campbell, I. C., 1982: Polynesian perceptions of Europeans in the 18th and 19th centuries,
Pacific Studies, Vol 5, No 2, pp.64-80.
1035. Campbell, I. C., 1985: Race relations in the pre-colonial Pacific Islands; a case of prejudice
and pragmatism, Pacific Studies, Vol 8, No 2, Pp.61-80.
1036. Campbell, I.C., 1998a: Gone native in Polynesia, Westport, Greenwood Press.
1037. Campbell, I. C., 1989: A History of the Pacific Islands, St Lucia (Qld), Berkeley and Los
Angeles (CA).
1038. Campbell, I. C., 1989: A History of the Pacific Islands, University of Canterbury Press.
Place of Publication: Christchurch, N.Z. Publication Year.
1039. Campbell, I.C., 1990: The alleged imperialism of George Tupou 1, Journal of Pacific history,
vol. 23(2), 159-175.
1040. Campbell, I.C., 1990a: Culture contact and Polynesian identity in the European Age, in
Journal of World History, Vol 8, pp.29-55.
1041. Campbell, I.C., 1990b: A history of the Pacific Islands, Brisbane, University of Queensland
2009
CEHA 59
Press.
1042. Campbell, I.C., 1994: European-Polynesian encounters; a critique of the Pearson thesis,
Journal of Pacific History, Vol 29/2, pp.222-31.
1043. Campbell, I.C., 1998: Anthropology and the professionalism of colonial administration in
Papua and new Guinea, Journal of Pacific history, 33, 1, pp.69-90.
1044. Campbell, I.C., 2000: The ASOPA controversy; a pivot of Australian policy for Papua and
New Guinea 1945-49, Journal of Pacific history,, 25,1, 83-99.
1045. Campbell, Ian C., Latouche, J.-P., 2001 : Les insulaires du Pacifique: histoire et situation
politique, Presses universitaires de France.
1046. Campbell, I. C., 2003: The Culture of Culture Contact: Refractions from Polynesia, Journal
of World History, Volume 14, Number 1, March.
1047. Campbell, John Gregorson, 2005: The Gaelic otherworld: John Gregorson Campbell’s
Superstitions of the highlands & islands of Scotland and Wtchcraft & second sight in the
highlands & islands; edited with commentary by Ronald Black. Edinburgh: Birlinn.
1048. Campbell, John Lorne, 1984: Canna: the story of a Hebridean island, Oxford.
1049. Campbell, M., 2002: “History in prehistory: the oral traditions of the Rarotongan land court
records”, in Journal of Pacific History, 37:2, 221-38.
1050. Campbell, R. J. (ed.), 2000: The discovery of the South Shetland Islands: the voyages of
the brig Williams 1819-1820 as recorded in contemporary documents and the journal of
Midshipman C.W. Poynter (Hakluyt Society, 3rd ser., 4). London: Hakluyt Society.
1051. Campey, Lucille H., 2001: A very fine class of immigrants: Prince Edward Island’s Scottish
pioneers, 1770-1850, Toronto: Natural Heritage/Natural History.
1052. Campling, Liam, 2006: “A Critical Political Economy of the Small Island Developing States
Concept: South–South Cooperation for Island Citizens?”, in Journal of Developing
Societies, vol. 22: pp. 235 - 285.
1053. Canclini, Arnoldo, 2007: Malvinas 1833: antes y después de la agresión inglesa: un estudio
documental, Buenos Aires: Claridad.
1054. Cann, Kathleen; Gunson, Walter Niel, 1988: “Pacific material in the archives of the British
and Foreign Bible Society”, in Journal of Pacific History, 23:2, 223-225.
1055. Cannan, Edward, 1992: Churches of the South Atlantic Islands, 1502-1991, Oswestry,
Shropshire, England: Anthony Nelson.
1056. Canoro, Elisabetta, 2003: Ireland: the land of heart’s desire, Dublin: Gill & Macmillan.
1057. Cantet, Christèle, 2005: Mythes et figures de la belle créole dans la littérature de langue
française: France, Mascareignes, Antilles française; sous la direction de Jean-Claude
Carpanin Marimoutou, Université de la Réunion. Université de soutenance.
1058. Capdevila, Ricardo, 1998: Islario: crónicas del descubrimiento de las Islas San Pedro
(Georgias del Sur) y del Aurora (Rocas Cormorán y Negra), Buenos Aires: Instituto de
Investigaciones Históricas Tierra del Fuego.
1059. Capecchi, Bernard, 1995: Les consequences de l’instabilite tectonique a Wallis et Futuna,
In: Iles tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 381-400.
1060. Carayol, M.; Chaudenson, R. Barat, C., 1984: Atlas linguistique et ethnographique de la
Réunion, vol. 1. Paris, CNRS.
1061. Carballo Armas, Pedro, 2001: Canarias y su diferenciación: balance y perspectivas del
2009
hecho diferencial canario, Las Palmas: Universidad de las Palmas de Gran Canaria.
1062. Carbone, Maurizio, 2003: Les Iles Cook, Courrier (Le), Afrique-Caraïbes-Pacifique-Union
européenne, no 200, p. 36-48.
1063. Carbonero Gamundí, Maria Antònia, 1994: Padrins i repadrins a les Balears: una societat
de quatre generacions davant el 2000, presentació: Miquel Munar Cardell, Palma,
Mallorca: L. Muntaner.
1064. Cardell, Kerry; Cumming, Cliff, 1992: Scotland’s three tongues in Australia: colonial
Hamilton in the 1860s, Scottish Studies, 31 (1992-3), 40-62.
1065. Carew, Jan, 1996: “Caribbean culture and development”, in Race & Class, Oct 1996; vol.
38: pp. 71 - 76.
1066. Caré, Jean-Marc, 1997: Îles, Centre international d’études pédagogiques.
1067. Carey, Peter, 2001: “Challenging Tradition, Changing Society: the Role of Women in East
Timor’s Transition to Independence”, in Lusotopie, pp. 255- 267.
1068. Carile, Paolo, 1995: Sulla via delle Indie orientali: aspetti della francofonia nell’Oceano
indiano /Sur la route des Indes orientales: aspects de la francophonie dans l’océan
Indien, Fasano: Schena; Paris: Nizet.
1069. Carita, Rui, 1997: “O Padre António Vieira e os colégios das Ilhas”, in Oceanos, nº 30/31,
pp. 66 – 80.
1070. Carita, Rui, 2001: «A Expansão Atlântica no Século XVI: A Provedoria das Obras de Álvaro
Pires e as Ilhas Atlânticas», pp. 391-414, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas
do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal,
Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.I, s.l., Universidade dos
1071. Carleton, Jones, 2004: The Burren and the Aran Islands: an archaeological guide, Cork:
Collins Press, 2004.
1072. Carneiro de Sousa, Ivo, 2001: “The Portuguese Colonization and the Problem of the East
Timorese Nationalism”, in Lusotopie, pp.183-194.
1073. Carneiro de Sousa, Ivo, 2001: “Timor dos Malai Sira?”, in Lusotopie, pp.135-140.
1074. Carolyn Cartier and Alan A. Lew, 2005: Seductions of place: geographical perspectives on
globalization and touristed landscapes, London; New York: Routledge.
1075. Carpenter, Kevin, 1984: Desert isles & pirate islands: the island theme in nineteenth-century
English juvenile fiction, a survey and bibliography, Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang.
1076. Carr, Tony, 2004: “From Castlebellingham to the Bay of Islands: Lully Mathews, New
Zealand’s first brick maker”, in Journal of the County Louth Archaeological (& Historical)
Society, 25: 4 (2004), 471-474.
1077. Carreira, António, 1982: Migrąções nas Ilhas de Caba Verde, London: C. Hurst; Hamden,
Conn.: Archon Books.
1078. Carreira, António, 1982: The people of the Cape Verde Islands: exploitation and emigration,
translated from the Portuguese and edited by Christopher Fyfe, London: C. Hurst;
Hamden, Conn.: Archon Books.
1079. Carrier, James G.; Carrier, Achsah H., 1989: Wage, trade, and exchange, in Melanesia: a
Manus society in the modern state, Berkeley: University of California Press.
1080. Carrington, Lois, 1981: Twenty years of Pacific linguistics: an index of contributions to
Pacific linguistic studies, 1961-1981, Canberra, A.C.T., Australia: Dept. of Linguistics,
2009
CEHA 61
Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University.

1081. Carrington, Lois, 2003: A Linguistic Bibliography of the New Guinea Area, Australia,
Australian National University’s Research School of Pacific & Asian Studies.
1082. Carrington, Sean, 2007: A~Z of Barbados Heritage, Macmillan Caribbean Publishers
Limited.
1083. Carrington, Selwyn H.H., 2003: Capitalism & Slavery and Caribbean Historiography: An
Evaluation, The Journal of African American History, Vol. 88.
1084. Carter, Lee D., Ed. 1997: Guam History: Perspectives, University of Guam.
1085. Carucci, Laurence Marshall, 1997: Nuclear nativit: rituals of renewal and empowerment in
the Marshall Islands, DeKalb, Northern Illinois University Press.
1086. Carucci, lm, 1987: Jekero: Symbolizing the transition to manhood in the Marshall Islands,
Micronesica, vol. vol. 20, no 1-2, p. p. 1-17.
1087. Carvalho, Alberto, 1995: Evasionismo, configuração existencial da insularidade caboverdiana,
In: Coscienza nazionale nelle letterature africane di lingua portoghese, org. Piero Ceccucci.
- Roma: Bulzoni, p. 9-23.
1088. Carvalho, Isabel Maria Boavida, 1995: “Vida e Morte Florentina – A Sociedade da Ilha das
Flores nos Séculos XVII – XVIII”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 73–80.
1089. CAS, 2003: Madagascar Bibliography, California Academy of Sciences Library. Disponível
online em url: http://research.calacademy.org/research/library/biodiv/biblio/mad2000.htm.
Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
1090. Casa de Colon, 1955-2006: Anuário de Estúdios Atlânticos. Índice analítico de autores y
Matérias (1955-2006), Madrid-Las Palmas, nº1-52.
1091. Casabianca, F., 1998: Suds et îles de la Méditerranée, Paris, Publisud.
1092. Casals, Lluís, 1990: Mediterranean houses: Balearic Islands, introduction, Martí Lucena,
Salvador Roig, Barcelona: G. Gili.
1093. Casanova y Todolí, Ubaldo de, 2004: Aproximación a la historia mallorquina del siglo XVII:
política financiera y crisis de subsistencia, Salamanca: Amarú Ediciones.
1094. Cass, Deborah, 1988: “A playground for imperialists”, in Pacific Islands Monthly, 59:10, 58.
1095. Cassar, C., 1988: Everyday life in Malta in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries in The
British colonial experience 1800-1964. The impact on Maltese society, Malta, Mireva
Publications.
1096. Cassar, C., 2000: Society, culture and identity in early modern Malta, Malta, Mireva
Publications.
1097. Castagnino Berlinghieri, Elena Flavia, 2003: The Aeolian Islands crossroads of the
Mediterranean maritime routes: a survey on their maritime archaeology and topography
from the prehistoric to the Roman periods, Oxford, England: Archaeopress.
1098. Castel, Antoni, 1999:”Timor Este, al fin emancipado ? Breve apunte de las negociaciones
sobre el futuro del territorio ocupado por Indonesia”, in Lusotopie, pp. 241-246.
1099. Castelain, Jean-Pierre (Editeur scientifique); Meistersheim, Anne (Postface), 2006: Iles
réelles, îles rêvées, Ethnologie Française, Juillet, vol. XXXVI, no 3, p. 389-508.
1100. Castellani, Michel, 1999: Entre insularité et ouverture: une nouvelle géographie de la Corse:
contribution à l’étude de la géographie humaine de la Corse: habilitation à diriger des
recherches; mémoire placé sous la direction du Professeur Jean Robert Pitte, Mémoire
2009
ou thèse (version d’origine), Habilitation à diriger des recherches: Géographie: Paris 4.

1101. Castellano Gil, José M. director de la colección; Martín, Francisco J. Macías, 1993: Historia
de Canarias, [Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
1102. Castilla, Juan Carlos, 1987: Islas oceánicas chilenas: conocimiento científico y necesidades
de investigaciones, Santiago, Chile: Ediciones Universidad Católica de Chile.
1103. Castelli, Antoine, 1995: L’insularité, la desserte aérienne entre le continent, le système de
continuité territoriale, Mém. DESS : Transp. aér.: Aix-Marseille 3.
1104. Castillo, Dennis A., 2006: The Maltese Cross: a strategic history of Malta, Westport, Conn.:
Praeger Security International.
1105. Castro Morales, Federico, 1992: La imagen de Canarias en la vanguardia regional: historia
de las ideas artísticas, 1898-1930, prólogo, Alberto Darias Príncipe, La Laguna, Santa
Cruz de Tenerife: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
1106. Castro, Aníbal Pinto de, 1993: “De Montemor–O-Velho às Ilhas do Japão: A Peregrinação
de Fernão Mendes Pinto e o Encontro de Culturas”, in Oceanos, nº 15, pp. 35 – 42.
1107. Catalão, P.M., 1992: O motivo da ilha mítica na literatura medieval portuguesa, Tese de
mestrado, Lisboa, Universidade Nova de Lisboa.
1108. Cateura Bennàsser, Pau, 1997: Mallorca en el segle XIII, [Palma de Mallorca]; El Tall.
1109. Cateura Bennàsser, Pau, 1998: El regne esvaït: desenvolupament econòmic, subordinació
política, expansió fiscal (Mallorca 1300-1335), Mallorca, El Tall Editorial.
1110. Cateura Bennàsser, Pau, editor, 2006: Comprar, vendre i pagar al rei: els impostos
indirectes al Regne de Mallorca (segles XIV-XV): Palma de Mallorca, 10-11 d’octubre de
2005, Palma de Mallorca: El Tall Editorial.
1111. Cathcart, Michael; Griffiths, Tom; Watts, Lee; Anceschi, Vivian; Houghton, Greg; Goodman,
David, 1990: Mission to the South Seas: The Voyage of the Duff, 1796-1799, Parkville,
Vic.
1112. Caudwell, R. W., 2000: “A sustainable IPM system for oil palm in Papua New Guinea”,
Brighton Crop Protection Conference Pests and Diseases, 1: 215-220.
1113. Caudwell, R. W., 2000a: “Integrated Management of Insect Pests (Orthoptera: Tettigoniidae)
of Oil Palm in Papua New Guinea”, Planter, 76(892): 393-408.
1114. Caudwell, R. W., 2000b: “The successful development and implementation of an integrated
pest management system for oil palm in Papua New Guinea” in Integrated Pest
Management Reviews 5(4): 297-301.
1115. Caudwell, R., 2001: “More IPM ‘tools’ for oil palm growers in Papua New Guinea”, in
Appropriate Technology 28(1): 43-45.
1116. Cauna, Alexandra de, 2006: Le multiculturalisme à l’Ile Maurice. Pour une lecture
géographique, Géographie et cultures, no 58, p. 67-82.
1117. Cawley, David and Frederick Sharpe, 2007: The church bells of the Channel Islands;
Hampshire: Insigne Press.
1118. Cazes Duvat, Virginie; Paskoff, Roland (pref.), 1999: Les Littoraux des Iles Seychelles,
Paris: L’Harmattan.
1119. Cazes-Duvat, Virginie; Robert, René, 2001: Atlas de l’environnement côtier des îles
granitiques de l’archipel des Seychelles, Saint Denis; Montpellier: Conseil Régional de
La Réunion; Université de La Réunion; CIRAD-Emvt.
2009
CEHA 63
1120. Cazes, Georges (dir.); Courade, Georges (dir.), 2004: Les masques du tourisme, Revue
Tiers Monde, vol. 45, no 178, p. 247-386.
1121. Cazes-Duvat, Virginie; Magnan, Alexandre, 2004: Les îles-hôtels, terrain d’application
privilégié des préceptes du développement durable: l’exemple des Seychelles et
des Maldives (Océan Indien), In Maillard, Jean-Claude (coord.). Insularité, société et
développement, Les Cahiers d’Outre Mer, vol. 57, no 225, pp. 75-100.
1122. Cazes-Duvat, Virginie; Magnan, Alexandre, 2004a: L’île de Bird aux Seychelles: une
exemple de développement durable? Saint-Denis; Paris: Université de La Réuinion;
L’Harmattan.
1123. CEA, 1997: La Caraïbe: des îles au continent, Cahiers d’Études Africaines, n°148, p. 759-
1022.
1124. CEGET, 1987: “Actes du colloque de Bordeaux-Talence, Iles tropicales: insularité,
insularisme “ in Iles et archipels, CEGET.
1125. CEGET, 1989: Iles et tourisme en milieux tropical et subtropical, Universite de Bordeaux
3 – Talence, France; CEGET: Centre d’Etude de Géographie Tropicale; CRET: Centre de
Recherches sur les Espaces Tropicaux.
1126. CEHA, 1993: III Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira. Actas, Funchal, Secretaria
Regional do Turismo e Cultura- Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico.
1127. CEHA, 2005: As ilhas e a história da ciência, Funchal, CEHA.
1128. Céitinn, Seosamh, 1992: Tomás Oileánach: fear idir dhá thraidisiún, Baile Átha Cliath
[Dublin]: An Clóchomhar Tta.
1129. Celimène, F. ; Watson, P., 1991: Économie politique caribéenne, Paris, Economica.
1130. Celimène, F.; Lacour, C. (dir.), 1997: L’intégration régionale des espaces, Paris, Economica.
1131. Centeno, coordenação de Yvette Kace e Lima de Freitas, 1991: A simbólica do espaço:
cidades, ilhas, jardins / [colóquio organização pelo o Gabinete de estudos de simbologia
da Universidade nova de Lisboa em colab. com o Cine-Forum de Funchal, 21 a 23 de
abril 1987]; Lisboa: Editorial Estampa.
1132. Cervantes-Rodríguez, edited by Margarita, Ramón Grosfoguel, and Eric Mielants, 2009:
Caribbean migration to Western Europe and the United States: essays on incorporation,
identity, and citizenship, Philadelphia: Temple University Press.
1133. Cerveau, Marie Pierre, 1998: L’horticulture commerciale dans les iles du Vent, archipel de
la Societe, Polynesie francaise: une activite d’avenir. Les Cahiers d’Outre Mer, 1998/06,
vol. vol. 51, no 202, p. p. 141-156.
1134. Cerveau, Marie-Pierre, 2001: Les Îles Marquises: insularité et développement, [publ.] par
le Centre de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux de l’Université Michel de Montaigne,
Bordeaux 3; UMR 5064, DYMSET, Dynamique des milieux et des sociétés dans les
espaces tropicaux, [Pessac]: CRET.
1135. Cerveau Marie-Pierre, 2002: Les îles Marquises.Insularité et développement, Iles et
1136. Chacourou Abal Anrabe, Abdou, 1992: Le contrôle des finances publiques aux Comores,
1137. Chagnoux, Herve; Haribou, Ali, 1980, 1990: Les Comores, 2. ed., Paris: PUF, 1990.
1138. Chakraborty, Dilip Kumar, 1990: The Great Andamanese, struggling for survival, Calcutta:
Seagull Books on behalf of the Anthropological Survey of India.
2009
1139. Chakravarty, I., 2001: Tourism development in small islands: A case study of Elephanta
Island, Maharashtra, India, Tourism Recreation Research, 26(3), pp. 15-24.
1140. Chaminade, Agnès, 1992: Tourisme et environnement dans les petits états insulaires
tropicaux, Bordeaux: Universite Michel de Montaigne 3, Institut de Geographie Louis
Papy, 1992.
1141. Chand, edited by Satish, 1998: Productivity performance in the South Pacific islands,
Canberra: Asia Pacific Press, National Centre for Development Studies, Asia Pacific
School of Economics and Management, Australian National University.
1142. Chand, Satish ed., 2005: Pacific Islands regional integration and governance, Canberra:
Asia Pacific Press at the Australian National Unuiversity.
1143. Chandonnet, Fern, edited by. 1995: Alaska at war, 1941-1945: the forgotten war
remembered: papers from the Alaska at War Symposium, Anchorage, Alaska, November
11-13, 1993, Alaska at War Symposium (1993: Anchorage, Alaska) Anchorage, Alaska:
Alaska at War Committee.
1144. Chandra, R.; Ward, G., 1997: “Fidji, un nouveau départ: développement et problème
ethnique”, Tiers-Monde, n°149, p.157-176.
1145. Chandra, Satish; Arunachalam, B.; Suryanarayan, V. edited by. 1993: The Indian Ocean
and its islands: strategic, scientific, and historical perspectives, New Delhi; Newbury
Park: Sage Publications.
1146. Chane Kune, Sonia, 1991: Identite Reunionaise, Analyse Geopolitique; Sous La Direction
De Yves Lacoste, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Géographie:
Paris 8.
1147. Chanel-Tisseau des Escotais, Josette, 2004: Culture et mythologies des îles Canaries,
Paris, Harmattan.
1148. Chaney, Edward, 2000: “British and American Travellers in Sicily from the eighth to the
twentieth century”, The Evolution of the Grand Tour, Routledge.
1149. Chang, T. C., 1998: “Regionalism and Tourism Exploring Integral Links in Singapore”, Asia
Pacific Viewpoint, n°1, p. 73-94.
1150. Chanteraud, Annabel R., 2001: La Saga du Kava. Du Vanuatu à la Nouvelle-Calédonie,
Pessac, Cret, Dymset.
1151. Chanudet, C.; Rakotoarisoa, J.-A., 2000: Mohéli: Une île des Comores à la recherche de
son identité, Paris, L’Harmattan.
1152. Chapin, John C., 1994: Breaching the Marianas: the battle for Saipan, Washington, D.C.:
History and Museums Division, Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps.
1153. Chapin, John C., 1994: Breaking the outer ring: Marine landings in the Marshall Islands,
Washington, D.C.: History and Museums Division, Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps.
1154. Chapman, Murray; Prothero, Mansell, ed. 1985: Circulation in population movement:
substance and concepts from the Melanesian case, cartography by Alan G. Hodgkiss.
1155. Chapman, William, 1986: Historic churches of the Virgin Islands, foreword by Frederik
Gjessing, [Christiansted?], Saint Croix Landmarks Society.
1156. Chappell, D., 1992: Shipboard relations between Pacific Island women and Euroamerican
men,1767-1887, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 27, No 2, pp.131-149.
1157. Chappell, D., 1994: Secret sharers; indigenous beachcombers in the Pacific Islands, PS,
Vol 17/2, pp.1-22.
2009
CEHA 65
1158. Chappell, D., 1995: Active agents versus passive victims; decolonised historiography or
problematic paradigm, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 7, No 2, pp.302-326.
1159. Chappell, D., 1997: Double Ghosts - Oceanian Voyagers on Euroamerican Ships,New
York, ME Sharpe.
1160. Chappell, D., 2000: The forgotten Mau; anti-Navy protest in American Samoa 1920-1935,
Pacific Historical Review, 69, 2, 217-60.
1161. Chappell, David, 2007: Texts and Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography,
Oceania, Vol. 77.
1162. Chardon, J. P.; Girault, C. (ed.). 1983: Les Antilles aujourd’hui, économie et géographie
In les transports aeriens et maritimes, miroir de l’extraversion economique: resume,
Bordeaux: CEGET.
1163. Chardon, Jean-Pierre, 1987: L’avion dans les Antilles. Géographie des transports aériens
des îles de la Caraïbe, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
1164. Chardon, Jean Pierre; Hartog, Thierry, 1995: Saint-Barthelemy: un choix et ses limites, In:
Iles tropicales, Les Cahiers d’Outre Mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, pp. 261-276.
1165. Chardon, J-P., 1998: “L’avion et les îles” in Géode Caraïbe. Quels transports dans les
petites îles caraïbes ?, Paris, Karthala, p. 54-60.
1166. Charles, Bertram L., 2004: Alien in paradise: time for healing in the U.S. Virgin islands,
Eugene, Or., ACW Press.
1167. Charles, E. (ed.), 1997: A future for small states. Overcoming vulnerability, Londres,
Commonwealth Secretariat.
1168. Charlton, Michael, 1989: The long struggle for the Falklands, Oxford.
1169. Chasek, (P.), 2005: «Margins of Power: Coalition Building and Coalition Maintenance of
the South Pacific Island States and the Alliance of Small Island States», RECIEL, 14(2),
p. 125-137.
1170. Chatan, Robbin, 2003: ‘The Governor’s vale levu Architecture and Hybridity at Nasova
House, Levuka, Fiji Islands’, International Journal of Historical Archaeology, 7:4, 267-92.
1171. Chaudenson, Robert, 1992: Des iles, des hommes, des langues: essai sur la creolisation
linguistique et culturelle, Paris: l’Harmattan.
1172. Chauris, Louis, 1992: Problèmes d’insularité: origine des pierres de construction à Ouessant
(Finistère, France), Norois, no153, p. 45-55.
1173. Chauvet, Lisa, Paul Collier and Anke Hoeffler, Paradise Lost: The Costs of State Failure in
the Pacific, No UNU-WIDER Research Paper RP2007/16, Working Papers from World
Institute for Development Economic Research (UNU-WIDER). Disponível online em url:
http://ideas.repec.org/p/unu/wpaper/rp2007-16.html. Consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009.
1174. Chauvet, Stéphen, 1935, 2005: Easter Island and its Mysteries, Disponível online em url:
http://www.chauvet-translation.com/. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
1175. Chauvin, Michael E., 1993: Astronomy in the Sandwich Islands: the 1874 transit of Venus,
Hawaiian Journal of History, 27, 185-225.
1176. Chavigny, B. de, 1988: Le tourisme dans la Caraibe insulaire, Bordeaux: Universite de
Bordeaux 3, Mem. Dea: Geogr.: Bordeaux 3.
1177. Chawla, Sumedha, Pandit, T. N., 1981: Bibliography on Andaman and Nicobar Islands:
covering anthropology, biology, geography, geology, history, statistics, etc. T.N., Calcutta:
Anthropological Survey of India, Govt. of India.
2009
1178. Chazan-Gillig, Suzanne, 2004: Insularité et mondialisation: Diasporas et créolisation de la

société mauricienne contemporaine, in Journal des anthropologues, no 96-97, pp. 321-
339.
1179. CHEAM: Centre des Hautes Etudes sur l’Afrique et l’Asie Modernes, 1986: La Reunion
dans l’Ocean Indien, Paris, France.
1180. Cheape, Hugh, 1993: The “straight spade” of the Highlands and Islands, In Cheape, Hugh
(ed.), Tools and traditions: studies in European ethnology, presented to Alexander Fenton,
Edinburgh: National Museums of Scotland, 76-84.
1181. Chen Henry C. L.; Hay, Pete, 2006: “Defending Island Ecologies: Environmental Campaigns
in Tasmania and Taiwan”, in Journal of Developing Societies, vol. 22: pp. 303 - 326.
1182. Chen, Xinxiong, 1985: Penghu Song Yuan tao ci = Shards of the Sung and Yüan period
found in the Pescadores Islands, [Magong zhen?], Penghu xian li wen hua zhong xin,
min guo 74.
1183. Chenoweth, Michael, Thomas Thistlewood, 2003: The 18th Century Climate of Jamaica:
Derived from the Journals of Thomas Thistlewood, 1750-1786, DIANE Publishing.
1184. Chen-Young, P., 1982: Tourism in the economic development of small states: Jamaica’s
experience. In: Jalan, B. (ed) Problems and Policies in Small Economies. London: St.
Martin’s, pp. 221-229.
1185. Chernichovsky, D.; Meesook, O.A., 1981: Regional aspects of family planning and fertility
behavior in Indonesia, World Bank staff working paper, no 462, p. p. 1-62.
1186. Chernichovsky, D.; Meesook, O.A., 1984: Poverty in Indonesia, World Bank staff working
paper, no 671, p. p. 1-56.
1187. Cherry, John F.; Davis, J.L.; Mantzourani, E., 1991: Landscape archaeology as long-term
history: northern Keos in the Cycladic Islands from earliest settlement until modern times,
with contributions by J. Bennet ... [et al.], Los Angeles: UCLA Institute of Archaeology.
1188. Chérubini, Bernard (Directeur de publication), [et al], 2004: Le territoire littoral: Tourisme,
pêche et environnement dans l’océan Indien, Université de la Réunion, Faculté des lettres
et des Sciences Humaines, CREGUR, Centre de Recherches et d’Etudes en Géographie
de l’Université de la Réunion (Saint-Denis), Paris; L’Harmattan.
1189. Chesneaux, Jean, 1987: Transpacifiques: observations et considérations diverses sur les
terres et archipels du grand ocean, Paris: La Découverte.
1190. Chesneaux, Jean; Maclellan, Nic, 1992: La France dans le Pacifique: de Bougainville a
Moruroa, Paris: La Decouverte.
1191. Cheung, Catherine and DeVantier, Lyndon, 2006: Socotora: a natural history of the islands
and their people, Hong Kong: Odyssey.
1192. Cheuvel, Richard, 1990: Nationalists, Soldiers, and Separatists: the Ambonese Islands
from Colonialism to Revolt, 1880-1950, Leiden, Netherlands: KITLV Press.
1193. Chewings, Hannah, 1900: Mongst tropical islands, or, notes and observations made during
a visit ... in 1899 to New Guinea, New Britain and the Solomon Islands, Adelaide, Australia.
1194. Chiang, Hung-Min, 2006: Chinese Islanders: Making a Home in the New World.
Charlottetown: Island Studies Press.
1195. Chin Chin Yoon, 2003: Potential For Conflict In The Spratly Islands, Master Of Arts In
Security Studies (Security Building In Post-Conflict Environments), From The Naval
Postgraduate School. Disponível online em url: http://www.ccc.nps.navy.mil/research/
theses/Chin03.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
2009
CEHA 67
1196. Chinnery, S. 1998: Malaguna Road; the Papua and New Guinea Diaries of Sarah Chinnery,
Canberra, National Library of Australia.
1197. Chiōtēs, Panagiōtēs, 1980: Historia tou Ioniou Kratous apo systaseōs autou mechri
henōseōs, etē 1815-1864, Athēna: Vivliopōleio D.N. Karavia.
1198. Chiōtēs, Panagiōtēs, 1980a: Historika apomnēmoneumata Heptanēsou, Athēna:
Vivliopōleio D.N. Karavia.
1199. Chittick, N.,... [et al.], 1983: Relaciones históricas a través del océano Índico; informe y
documentos de trabajo de la reunión de expertos sobre “Los contactos históricos entre
África oriental por una parte y el sureste asiático por otra, a través del océano Índico,”
Mauricio, 15-19 de julio de 1974 / Barcelona: Serbal; Paris: Unesco.
1200. Chiu, Hungdah, 1999: analysis of the Sino-Japanese dispute over the T’iaoyutai Islets
(Senkaku Gunto), Baltimore, Md., University of Maryland School of Law.
1201. Chomsky, Noam, 1999: “La tragédie au Timor oriental et l’attitude des États-Unis”, in
1202. Chon, K.C. and Oppermann, M., 1996: Tourism development and planning in Philippines,
Tourism Recreation Research, 21(1), pp.35-43.
1203. Chowning, Ann, 1980 Culture and biology among the Sengseng of New Britain,The Journal
of the Polynesian Society, 89(1):7-31.
1204. Chowning, Ann, 1980: Self-Esteem and drinking in Kove, West New Britain, in Mac
Marshall, ed. Through a Glass Darkly: Beer and Modernization in Papua New Guinea.
Boroko, PNG: Institute of Social and Economic Research, Pp. 365-378.
1205. Chowning, A., 1981: Report on research in Sengseng, West New Britain, Papua New
Guinea November 1980-February 1981, Victoria University of Wellington, NZ (mimeo).
1206. Chowning, Ann with Pamela Swadling 1981. Shellfish gathering at Nukakau Island, West
New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, Journal de la Societe des Oceanistes. L37
(No 72-73)d:159-67.
1207. in Mac Marshall, ed. Through a Glass Darkly: Beer and Modernization in Papua New
Guinea. Boroko, PNG: Institute of Social and Economic Research.
1208. Chowning, A., 1983: “Interaction between Pidgin and three West New Britain languages”,
in Pacific Linguistics A-65: 191-206.
1209. Chowning, A., 1984: “Culture and biology among the Sengseng of New Britain” in Journal
of the Polynesian Society, 89(1): 7-31.
1210. Chowning, Ann, 1983: Inspiration and conventionalization in Lakalai painting. Pp. 91-
104 in S.M. Mead & B. Kernot, eds. Art and Artists in the Pacific. Palmerston North:The
Dunmore Press.
1211. Chowning, Ann, 1984: Culture and biology among the Sengseng of New Britain, Journal of
the Polynesian Society, 89(1): 7-31.
1212. Chowning, A.1985: Rapid lexical change and aberrant Melanesian languages: Sengseng
and its neighbours Pacific Linguistics C-88: 169-198. New York: Gordon and breach.
1213. Chowning, A., 1985a: Kove women and violence: the context of wife-beating in a West
New Britain society. S. Toft, Ed. Domestic Violence in Papua New Guinea, Papua New
Guinea Law Reform Commission Monograph No. 3. Port Moresby, PNG Law Reform
Commission, pp. 72-91.
1214. Chowning, A., 1985b: Patterns of infant feeding in Kove (West New Britain, Papua New
2009
Guinea), 1966-1983, L. B. Marshall, Ed. Infant Care and Feeding in the South Pacific.
London, Gordon and Breach, pp. 171-188.
1215. Chowning, A., 1986: The development of ethnic identity and ethnic stereotypes on Papua
New Guinea plantations, Journal de la Société des Océanistes, 42(82-3): 153-162.
1216. Chowning, Ann, 1986a: Refugees, traders, and other wanderers: the linguistic effects
of population mixing in Melanesia, in P. Geraghty, L. Carrington, and S.A. Wurm, eds.
FOCAL II: Papers from the Fourth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics.
Pacific Linguistics C-94. Canberra: Australian National University, pp. 407-434.
1217. Chowning, A., 1987: A note on underestimating female age in lowland Papua New Guinea,
T. McDevitt, Ed., The Survey Under Difficult Conditions: Population Data Collection and
Analysis in Papua New Guinea. New Haven, HRAFlex, pp. 239-242.
1218. Chowning, A., 1987a: “Sorcery and the social order in Kove”, in Michele Stephen, ed.
Sorcerer and Witch in Melanesia. Melbourne: Melbourne University Press, Pp. 149-182.
1219. Chowning, Ann, 1987b: “Women are our business”: women, exchange and prestige in
Kove. in Marilyn Strathern, Ed., Dealing with Inequality. Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press. pp. 130-149.
1220. Chowning, A., 1988: Family fertility decisions among the Kove. In Nancy McDowell, Ed.
Reproductive Decision-making and the Value of Children in Rural Papua New Guinea,
Monograph 27. Port Moresby, IASER.
1221. Chowning, A., 1989: The doctor and the curer: medical theory and practice in Kove, in S.
Frankel and G. Lewis, Eds. A continuing trial of treatment, Dordrecht, Kluwer Academic
Publ., pp 217-247.
1222. Chowning, Ann, 1989a: Sex, shit, and shame: changing gender relations among the Lakalai.
Pp. 17-32 In Mac Marshall and John L. Caughey, eds., Culture, Kin and Cognition: Essays
in Honor of Ward H. Goodenough. Special Publication No. 25. American Anthropological
Association.
1223. Chowning, Ann, 1990: “God and ghosts in Kove”, Pp. 33-59 in John Barker, Ed. Christianity
in the Pacific, Association for Social Anthropology in Oceania, Lanham, MD: University
Press of America.
1224. Chowning, Ann, 1991: Lakalai and Sengsentp in Encyclopedia of World Cultures, Vol 2:
Oceania. Boston: G.K. Hall, pp. 139-43; 295-98.
1225. Chowning, Ann, 1996: “Relations among languages of West New Britain: an assessment
of recent theories and evidence” in M.D. Ross, ed. Studies in Languages of New Britain
and New Ireland, 1: Austronesian Languages of the North New Guinea Cluster, In
Northwestern New Britain. Pacific Linguistics, C-135, pp. 7-62.
1226. Chowning, Ann, 1997: Changes in Housing and Residence Patterns in Galilo, New Britain,
1918-1992, In Jan Rensel and Margaret Rodman, Home in the Islands: Housing and
Social Change in the Pacific. Honolulu; University of Hawaii Press, pp. 79-102.
1227. Choy, Dexter J. L.. 1984: Tourism and Development: The Case of American Samoa, Annals
of Tourism Research, 11:573-590.
1228. Choy, D. J. L., 1991: National tourism planning in the Philippines, Tourism Management,
12(3), pp.245-252.
1229. Choy, D.J.L., 1992: Life cycle models for Pacific island destinations, Journal of Travel
Research, 30(3), pp.26-31.
1230. Christensen, J. and D. R. J. Densley (n.d.), 1986: Oil palm, D. R. J. Densley, Ed. Agriculture
2009
CEHA 69
in the Economy: A Series of Review Papers, Volume 2. Port Moresby, Department of

Primary Industry.
1231. Christensen, J., 1986: “The development of the oil palm industry in Papua New Guinea:
past, present and future”, in Harvest, 11(4): 136-141.
1232. Christenson, A. E., 1984: Boats and boatbuilding in western Norway and the Islands, In
Fenton, Alexander; Pálsson, Hermann (ed.), The Northern and Western Isles in the Viking
world: survival, continuity and change (Edinburgh), 85-95.
1233. Christmann, Helmut; Hempenstall, Peter; Ballendorf, Dirk Anthony, 1991: Die Karolinen-
Inseln in deutscher Zeit: eine kolonialgeschichtliche Fallstudie, Münster: Lit.
1234. Chubrétovich A., Carlos (Chubrétovich Alvarez), 1986: Las islas Falkland o Malvinas: su
historia, la controversia argentino-británica y la guerra consiguiente, [Santiago, Chile?]:
Editorial La Noria.
1235. Chung, Margaret, 1993: Population and sustainable development in Pacific Island
countries, Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West Center, Pacific Islands Development Program.
1236. Churchill, Ward, 1998: A Little Matter of Genocide: Holocaust and Denial in the Americas
1492 to the Present, City Light Books.
1237. Chytērēs, Ger., 1982: Hē politikē tōn endoseōn: mia phasē tēs historias tou Ionikou
Kratous, Kerkyra: Hetaireia Kerkyraikōn.
1238. Ciaccio, Cândida, 1984: Turismo e microinsularità: Le isole minori della Sicília, Bologna:
Pàtron.
1239. Cichon, D., 1989: British Dependencies: British Virgin Islands, Anguilla, and Montserrat in
Islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean: a regional study, The Division (Washington,
D.C.).
1240. Cichon, D., 1989a: British Dependencies: The Cayman Islands and the Turks and Caicos
Islands in Islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean: a regional study (pp. 561-582), S.W.
Meditz, D.M. Hanratty (eds.). Washington DC: GPO.
1241. Cichowski, Catherine, 1987: Archeologie Et Histoire De Siphnos A Travers Les Temoignages
Litteraires, Epigraphiques, Les Recits Des Voyageurs Et Une Enquete Sur Le Terrain;
Sous La Direction De Andre Laronde, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de 3e
cycle: HISTOIRE: Paris 4.
1242. Cidolit, S. (these), 1986: Les industries et l’industrialisation aux Antilles, Universite de
Bordeaux 3, 1986.
1243. Cilento, R. W., 1928: The causes of the depopulation of the Western Islands of the Territory
of New Guinea, Canberra, Government Printer.
1244. Cillaurren, Espérance, Gilbert David, René Grandperrin; préf. du Pr François Doumenge,
2001: Atlas des pêcheries côtières de Vanuatu: un bilan décennal pour le développement
=Coastal fisheries atlas of Vanuatu: a 10-year development assessment, Paris: IRD éd..
1245. Ciolek, T. Matthew, 2000-2006: The AnthroGlobe Bibliographies, Asian Studies WWW
VL/ Pacific Studies WWW VL. Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/
Biblio/biblio_fiji1.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. Obs.: lista bibliográfica sobre
Antropologia nas ilhas Fidji, que faz parte de AnthroGlobe (url: http://coombs.anu.edu.
au/Biblio/biblio_index.html). [Obs.: Faz parte de Coombsweb: The Asian Studies Server,
a scholarly information system of the Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies,
The Australian National University, Canberra, Australia. Informação bibliográfica sobre a
área de Antropologia sobre as ilhas: Cook Islands, East Timor, Fiji, Madura (Indonesia),
2009
Polynesian Outlier, Tonga.].

1246. Ciolino, Caterina, 1995: Atlante dei beni storico-artistici delle Isole Eolie, Messina: Edizioni
Dr. Antonio Seameni.
1247. Cirer i Costa, Joan-Carles, 2006: El turisme a les Balears (1900-1950), Palma: Edicions
Documenta Balear.
1248. Clair, Sylvie, Marie-Pascale Mallé, 2001: Les îles du Salut: Guyane, [French Guiana], Ibis
rouge éditions, 2001.
1249. Clark, Byron, 2000: Gleanings on the Magdalen Islands, [Magdalen Islands, Quebec], B.
Clark.
1250. Clark, E., 2004: ‘The Ballad Dance of the Faeroese: Island Biocultural Geography in an
Age of Globalization’, Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, Vol. 95, No. 3,
pp. 284-297.
1251. Clark, E., Johnson, K., Lundholm, E. & Malmberg, G., 2007: Island Gentrification and
Space Wars, in G. Baldacchino (ed.), A World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader,
Charlottetown & Malta, Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island &
Agenda Publishers, pp. 483-512.
1252. Clark, Eric, 2004: “The Ballad Dance Of The Faeroese: Island Biocultural Geography In
An Age Of Globalisation”, in Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, vol. 95,
issue 3, pages 284-297.
1253. Clark, G. 2005: A 3000-year culture sequence from Palau, western Micronesia, Asian
Perspectives, 44: 349-380.
1254. Clark, G. and Anderson, A. 2001: The pattern of Lapita settlement in Fiji, Archaeology in
Oceania, 36: 77-88.
1255. Clark, G. R., Anderson, A.J. and Vunidilo, T. (eds.) 2001: The Archaeology of the Lapita
Dispersal in Oceania, Pandanus Press, Australian National University.
1256. Clark, G. R. (ed.) 2003: Dumont d’Urville’s divisions of Oceania: Fundamental Precincts or
Arbitrary Constructs?, Journal of Pacific History, 38(2).
1257. Clark, Geoffrey, 2003: Shards of Meaning: Archaeology and the Melanesia-Polynesia
Divide, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 38, No. 2, Dumont d’Urville’s Divisions of
Oceania: Fundamental Precincts or Arbitrary Constructs? (Sep., 2003), pp. 197-215.
1258. Clark, G. and Murray, T. 2006: Decay characteristics of the eastern Lapita design system,
Archaeology in Oceania, 41: 107-117.
1259. Clark, G. and Martinsson-Wallin, H., 2007: Monumental architecture in Western Polynesia:
Origins, chiefs and archaeological approaches, Archaeology in Oceania, 42: 28-40.
1260. Clark, Geoffrey, 2007: “Culture contact in the Palau Islands, 1783”, in Journal of Pacific
History, 42:1, 89-97.
1261. Clark, G., Burley, D. and Murray, T. 2008: Monumentality in the development of the Tongan
maritime chiefdom, Antiquity, 82(318): 994-1004.
1262. Clark, G.R., Leach, F. and O’Connor, S. (eds.) 2008a: Islands of Inquiry: Colonisation,
seafaring and the archaeology of maritime landscapes, Terra Australis, 29. Canberra,
ANU E Press.
1263. Clark, R., 1994: Moriori and Māori: The Linguistic Evidence. In Sutton, Douglas G. (Ed.)
Sutton, Douglas G., 1994: The Origins of the First New Zealanders. Auckland: Auckland
University Press.
2009
CEHA 71
1264. Clark, Wallace, 1988, 1993: Rathlin: its island story, 2nd edition. Limavady: North-West
Books.
1265. Clarke C. (dir.); Ley, D. (ed.); Peach, C. (ed.); 1984: Geography and ethnic pluralism, In
Pluralism and plural societies: Carribean perspectives, Londres: Allen and Unwin.
1266. Clarke C. (dir.); Payne, T. (dir.), 1987: Politics, security and development in small states,
Londres: Allen and Unwin.
1267. Clarke, C. and Payne, T., 1987: Introduction in Clarke, C. and T. Payne (eds), Politics,
Security and Development in Small States, UK, Allen and Unwin Clarke, C. (ed.), 1991:
Society and politics in the Caribbean, Basingstoke: Macmillan in association with St
Antony’s College Oxford.
1268. Clarke, C. G. and Payne, A., (eds.), 1987: Politics, Security and Development in Small
States, London: Allen & Unwin.
1269. Clarke, C., 1990: Europe in the Caribbean: from Colonial Hegemony to Geopolitical
Marginality in Peace, development and Security in the Caribbean.
1270. Clarke, A. R., S. Balagawi, B. Clifford, R. A. I. Drew, L. Leblanc, A. Mararuai, D. McGuire,
D. Putulan, S. A. Sar and D. Tenakanai, 2002: “Evidence of orchid visitation by Bactrocera
species (Diptera: Tephritidae) in Papua New Guinea”, Journal of Tropical Ecology, 18:
441-448.
1271. Clarke, Nicholas, Bertrand Lettsome, 1989: Natural resources of the British Virgin Islands,
[Road Town, Tortola, British Virgin Islands, W.I.]: Laurel Publications International.
1272. Clarke, T., 2001: Searching for Crusoe: A Journey among the Last Real Islands, London,
Little Brown.
1273. Clarke, W.C. and Thaman, R.R. 1993: Agroforestry in the Pacific Islands: Systems for
sustainability, United Nations University Press, Tokyo.
1274. Clarke, Wallace. Harvey. Ros, 2005: slands of Connaught: paintings and stories from
sailing the islands, Donaghadee, Co. Down: Cottage Publications.
1275. Claval, Paul, cultural geography perspectives on islands and indigenous peoples.
Disponível online em URL: http://sgo.pccu.edu.tw/GEOG/CHI/B/B1/chapters-culture-
geog/A.pdf. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009.
1276. Clayton, Daniel Wright, 2000: Islands of truth: the imperial fashioning of Vancouver Island
, Vancouver : UBC Press.
1277. Cleland, R., 1999: Across the decades, in Carrying the banner, Nedlands, UWA, pp.45-55
1278. Clement, B.G., [compiled] by, 1989: Through Caribbean eyes: reflections on an era of
independence, London, New York: ECA Associates.
1279. Clement, Russell T., 1980: A bibliography of Mormonism in the Pacific: holdings in the
BYU-HC Library Laie, Hawaii: Institute for Polynesian Studies.
1280. Clementi, Sir Cecil, 1937: A Constitutional History of British Guiana, London: Macmillan.
1281. Cliff, A.D., Haggett, P. & Smallman-Raynor, M. R., 2000: Island Epidemics, Oxford, Oxford
University Press.
1282. Clifford, James, 1982: Person and myth: Maurice Leenhardt in the Melanesian world,
Berkeley: University of California Press.
1283. Clifford, J., 1997: The mahu goes native. Sexist or subversive? Gauguin’s South Seas
visions and renegade hybrid style, Times Literary Supplement, November 7.
2009
1284. Clifford, J., 1997a: Travelling cultures, in Routes; travel and translation in the late twentieth
century, Harvard Uni Press, Cambridge, pp.17-46.
1285. Cling, J.-P., 1997: “De la coopération régionale à l’intégration économique”, Afrique
contemporaine, n°184, p. 126-132.
1286. Cluer, O., 1990: Working Paper J: Women-in-development. In: P. I. M. S. etc, Ed. Kandrian
Gloucester Integrated Development Project (Volume 3), Primary Industry Management
Services Pty Ltd.
1287. Clune, F., 1951: Somewhere in New Guinea, Sydney, Angus and Robertson.
1288. CMF, 1998: Livro de Comunicações do Colóquio. As Ilhas e a Mitologia, Funchal,
Departamento de Cultura da Câmara Municipal do Funchal.
1289. CMF, 1999: Livro de Comunicações do Colóquio. Cultura de Periferias. Insularidades,
Funchal, Departamento de Cultura da Câmara Municipal do Funchal.
1290. CNDP, 1989: Actas do II Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, Funchal, Setembro
de, Funchal, Comissão Nacional para a Comemoração dos Descobrimentos Portugueses.
1291. CNDP, 2001: Ilhas Fantásticas, in Oceanos, nº.46, (Abril/Junho), Lisboa, CNDP.
1292. CNRS PRODIG (Paris); IRD (Paris), Guillaud, Dominique (dir.); Huetz de Lemps, Christian
(dir.); Sevin, Olivier (dir.); et all...2000: Iles rêvées: Territoires et identités en crise dans le
Pacifique insulaire, Paris Paris: Prodig; Presses de l’Université de Paris-Sorbonne.
1293. CNRS, 1980: “Actes du colloque du groupement d’intérêt scientifique sciences humaines
sur l’aire méditerranéenne”, Iles de la Méditerranée, Aix-en-Provence: Ed. CNRS.
1294. CNRS; 1987: “Actes du colloque de Bordeaux-Talence, Iles tropicales: insularité, insularisme
“ in Iles et archipels, CEGET.
1295. Coates, Richard, 1991: The ancient and modern names of the Channel Islands: a linguistic
history, Stamford, 1991.
1296. Cobb, S. C., 2001: ‘Globalization in a small island context: Creating and marketing
competitive advantage for offshore financial centres’, Geografiska Annaler, vol. 83 B,
161-174.
1297. Coccossis, H. and Parpairis, A., 1992: Assessing the interactions between environment
and tourism: case study of the island of Mykonos. Paper presented in the IV World
Congress of Regional Science International, University of Balearic Islands, Palma de
Mallorca, pp.26-29.
1298. Coccossis, H. and Parpairis, A., 1995: Assessing the interaction between heritage,
environment and tourism: Mykonos, In: Coccossis, H. and Nijkamp, P. (eds) Sustainable
Tourism Development. London: Avebury.
1299. Coccossis, H. and Parpairis, A., 1996: Tourism and carrying capacity in coastal areas:
Mykonos, Greece. In: Priestley, G.K., Edwards, J.A. and Coccossis, H. (eds) Sustainable
Tourism? European Experiences, pp.153-175. Oxon: CAB.
1300. Cochrane, James, 2007: Dewees: the island and its people, Charleston, SC: History Press.
1301. Coconi, Luciana, 2007: ¿Islas Malvinas o Falkland Islands?: la cuestión de la soberanía
sobre las islas del Atlántico Sur, Barcelona: Asociación para las Naciones Unidas en
España.
1302. Codrington, H. W., 1994: A Short History of Ceylon, New Delhi (Reprint. Asian Educational
Services).
1303. Cody, Martin L., 2006: Plants on islands: diversity and dynamics on a continental, Berkeley,
2009
CEHA 73
Calif.: University of California Press.

1304. Coëffé, Vincent, 2005: Les Hawai’i saisies par la géo-graphie: l’espace utopique de Mark
Twain, Cahiers de géographie du Québec, vol. 49, no 137, p. 225-240.
1305. Coëffé, Vincent, 2005: Touristicité idéale. Hawaï, un parcours utopique, L’information
géographique, vol. 69, no 4, p. 100-104.
1306. Cohen, Anthony P. (Anthony Paul), 1987: Whalsay: symbol, segment, and boundary in
a Shetland island community, Manchester [Greater Manchester], Wolfeboro, N.H.:
Manchester University Press.
1307. Cohen, Arlene compiled and edited, 1993: Directory of libraries, archives, and museums
in Micronesia, Mangilao, Guam: University of Guam, Micronesian Area Research Center.
1308. Cohen, Frederick E., 1998: The Jews in the Channel Islands during the German occupation
1940-1945, [London]: Institute of Contemporary History and Wiener Library in association
with the Jersey Jewish Congregation.
1309. Cohen, Getzel M., 1995: The Hellenistic settlements in Europe, the Islands, and Asia
Minor, Berkeley: University of California Press.
1310. Cohen, Robin, editor. 1983: African islands and enclaves, Beverly Hills: Sage Publications.
1311. Colbert, Evelyn S., 1997: The Pacific Islands: paths to the present, Boulder, Colo.: Westview
Press.
1312. Colchester, Marcus, 1997: “Guyana: fragile frontier”, in Race & Class, Apr 1997; vol. 38:
pp. 33 - 56.
1313. Cole R.V. and T.G. Parry, 1986: Selected issues in Pacific Island development: papers
from the Island - Australia Project, Canberra, Australia, National Centre for Development
Studies, Australian National University.
1314. Cole, B., 2006: Taiwan’s Security: History and Prospects, Routledge.
1315. Cole, eds., Rodney V. & Somsak Tambunlertchai 1993: The Future of Asia-Pacific
economies: Pacific Islands at the crossroads?, Kuala Lumpur: Asian and Pacific
Development Centre; [Canberra]: National Centre for Development Studies.
1316. Coleman, Carol, Steven C. Smith, 1986: Life as a Peace Corps volunteer in the Republic
of the Marshall Islands, Columbia, MD, Development through Self-Reliance, Inc..
1317. Coleman, D.; Underhill, G., 2002: Regionalism and global economic integration: Europe,
Asia, and the Americas, Londres, Routledge.
1318. Coleman, Deirdre, 2003: ‘Bulama and Sierra Leone: Utopian islands and visionary
interiors’. In Edmond, Rod; Smith, Vanessa (ed.), Islands in history and representation,
London: Routledge, 63-80.
1319. Coleman, Tessa, 1995: Threads of history: the Jersey occupation tapestry, St Hellier: V. M.
Promotions.
1320. Conlin, V., Michael; Baum, Tom, eds, 1995: “Island Tourism: Management Principles and
Practice”, in Journal of Travel Research, Vol. 34, No. 2, 70.
1321. Collard, Sneed B., 2000: Lizard Island: science and scientists on Australia’s Great Barrier
Reef, New York: Franklin Watts.
1322. Collectif, 2001: “Regionalismo, comercio internacional y OMC”. Foro internacional, n°2, p.
237-392.
1323. Colletta, Nat J., 1980: American schools for the natives of Ponape: a study of education
2009
and culture change in Micronesia, Honolulu: Published for the East-West Center by the
University Press of Hawaii.
1324. Colley, Ann C., 2004: Robert Louis Stevenson and the colonial imagination, Aldershot,
England; Burlington, VT: Ashgate.
1325. Colley, Linda, The ordeal of Elizabeth Marsh: a woman in world history, New York: Anchor
Books.
1326. Colli, Claudia; B.V.I. Tourist Board, 1983: Our British Virgin Islands: a cultural and historical
tour of the British Virgin Islands, [S.l.]: British Virgin Islands Tourist Board.
1327. Collins, Timothy, 1993: Praeger in the west: naturalists and the antiquarians in Connemara
and the islands, 1894-1914, Journal of the Galway Archaeological and Historical Society,
45, 124-154.
1328. Comeau, Paul, 1987: Economic Development and Cultural Survival in Coffey, William J.
and Runte, Roseann, Local Development The Future of Isolated Cultural Communities
and Small Economic Regions, Presse de L’Universite Saite-Anne, pp. 57-62.
1329. Comissão para os direitos do povo Maubere, 2001: “Les réfugiés de Timor oriental en
Indonésie : l’affaire du « recensement » de mai-juin 2001”, in Lusotopie, pp. 243-253.
1330. Commissaire général du plan, 2000: L’intégration régionale: une nouvelle voie pour
l’organisation de l’économie mondiale ?, Bruxelles, De Boeck Université.
1331. COMMISSION DES ILES, 1994: Pour une politique européenne des îles, Rennes, CRPM
1332. Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands capital improvement strategy, fiscal years
1986-1992, [Saipan, Mariana Islands], The Commonwealth.
1333. Commonwealth Secretariat, 2000: Small states: economic review. Londres, Commonwealth
Secretariat.
1334. Conan, coordination de la rédaction, Alain et Camilla, Stéphane 2008: Le mystère
Lapérouse, ou le rêve inachevé d’un roi / Association Salomón, [avec le précieuse
participation de Stéphane Camille], Paris: Conti.
1335. Condominas, Georges, et all...1995: L’etranger intime. Melanges offerts a Paul Ottino:
Madagascar, Tahiti, Insulinde, Monde Swahili, Comores, Reunion, saint andre la reunion:
universite de la reunion, faculte des lettres et des sciences humaines.
1336. Conférence des Nations Unies sur le commerce et le développement. Conseil du commerce
et du développementk, 1983: Les Conséquences des catastrophes naturelles dans les
pays en développement insulaires: étude établie par le Secrétariat de la C.N.U.C.E.D.;
en collab. avec le Bureau du coordonnateur des Nations Unies pour le secours en cas
de catastrophes. Conférence des Nations Unies sur le commerce et le développement,
Conseil du commerce et du développement, New York: Nations Unies.
1337. Conference Des Regions Peripheriques Maritimes, 1995: L’Europe des îles, Rennes,
CRPM.
1338. Congrés Internacional d’Estudis Històrics, 1992: Les Illes Balears i Amèrica, Palma de
Mallorca, Spain, [Palma]: Institut d’Estudis Baleàrics.
1339. Conkling, Philip W., 1981: Islands in time: a natural and human history of the islands of
Maine, drawings by Katherine Hall Fitzgerald; photographs by George Putz, Jim Kosinski,
and Rick Perry, Camden, Me. : Down East Books.
1340. Conlin, M. & Baum, T.G., 1995: Island Tourism: Management Principles and Practice,
Chichester, John Wiley & Sons.
2009
CEHA 75
1341. Connell, John, 1983: Migration, employment, and development in the South Pacific: country
report, Noumea, New Caledonia: South Pacific Commission.
1342. Connell, J., 1987: Trouble in paradise; the perception of New Caledonia in the Australian
Press, Australian Geographical Studies, Vol 25, 2, pp.54-65.
1343. Connell, J., 1987a: New Caledonia or Kanaky? The political history of a French colony,
Canberra.
1344. Connell, John, 1988: Sovereignty & survival: island microstates in the third world, [Sydney]:
Dept. of Geography, University of Sydney.
1345. Connell, J., 1991: The new Micronesia: pitfalls and problems of dependent development,
PS, vol.14 (2): 87-120.
1346. Connell, John, Aldrich, Robert, 1991a: The Last Colonies: Failures of Decolonisation?,
In Colonialism and Development in the Contemporary World, eds. DIXON, Christopher
John; Heffernan, Michael J. (London and New York, 1991), 183-203.
1347. Connell, John, 2000: “Migration and remittances in island microstates: a comparative
perspective on the South Pacific and the Caribbean”, in International Journal of Urban
and Regional Research, vol. 24, issue 1, pages 52-78.
1348. Connell, John, 2002: Urbanisation in the Island Pacific: Towards Sustainable Development,
John Lea; Routledge.
1349. Connell, J., 2003: Island dreaming: The contemplation of Polynesian paradise, Journal of
Historical Geography, 29 (4), 554–81.
1350. Conolly, edited by James, Matthew Campbell, 2008: Comparative island archaeologies,
Oxford: Archaeopress.
1351. Conroy, John, 1987: Shelter for the homeless: Asian-Pacific needs and Australian
responses, Canberra, Australian Council for Overseas Aid.
1352. Constant, F., 1990: “Le fait insulaire et la C.E.E.”, Revue de Science Administrative de la
Méditerranée Occidentale, nº spécial, p. 9-18.
1353. Constant, F., 1992: “Alternative forms of decolonisation in the Eastern Caribbean: the
comparative politics of the non-sovereign islands”, in The Political Economy of Small
Tropical Islands, Hintjens, H.; Newitt, M., Exeter, University of Exeter Press, p. 51-63.
1354. Constant, F.; Daniel, J., 1999: Politique et développement dans les Caraïbes, Paris,
L’fharmattan.
1355. Conte, Eric, 1988: Les Techniques De Peche Pre-Europeennes Et Leurs Survivances En
Polynesie Francaise. L’exploitation Traditionnelle Des Ressources Marines A Napuka
(Tuamotu-Polynesie Francaise); Sous La Direction De Jose Garanger, Mémoire ou thèse
(version d’origine),Thèse de doctorat: Histoire: Paris 1.
1356. Conte, Eric, 1992: Tereraa: voyages et peuplement des iles du Pacifique, Papeete:
Polymages Scoop.
1357. Conte, Eric, 1997: La differenciation culturelle en Polynesie orientale. Propositions pour
une interpretation alternative, journal de la societe des oceanistes, 1997, vol. vol. 105,
no 2, p. p. 157-171.
1358. Conte, Eric and Patrick Vinton Kirch, 2004: Archaeological investigations in the Mangareva
Islands (Gambier Archipelago), French, Berkeley, CA: Archaeological Research Facility,
University of California, Berkeley.
1359. Convegno internazionale di studi (2000; Calasetta, Italie), 2001: Insularità linguistica e
2009
culturale: il caso dei Tabarchini di Sardegna: documenti del Convegno internazionale

di studi, Calasetta, 23-24 settembre 2000 / a cura di Vincenzo Orioles e Fiorenzo Toso;
premessa di Tullio De Mauro ; real. del comune di Calasetta con la collab. scientifica del
Centro internazionale sul plurilinguismo, Università degli studi di Udine, Recco: le Mani.
1360. Cook, Andrew S., 1989: Survey of the shores and islands of the Persian Gulf, 1820-1829,
[Farnham Common]: Archive Editions.
1361. Cook, Jonathan, 1990: Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project: Working
Paper A. Economic Situation, Primary Industry Management Services,Tropical Rural
Development Group (ANU) CARE Australia.
1362. Cook, Linda A., 1991: World War II in the Aleutians [electronic resource]: alternatives for
preservation and interpretation of historic resources at Dutch Harbor Naval Operating
Base and Fort Mears, U.S. Army, national historic landmark, Unalaska, Alaska, Anchorage,
Alaska: U.S. Dept. of the Interior, National Park Service, Alaska Regional Office.
1363. Cooke, Steven; McLean, Fiona, 2002: “Picturing the nation: the Celtic periphery as
discursive other in the archaeological displays of the Museum of Scotland”, in Scottish
Geographical Journal, 118:4 (2002), 283-98
1364. Cookson, Michael B. 2009: Overview of key reference resources related to the
Indonesian province of Papua. Disponível online em url: http://www.papuaweb.org/bib/
papuabibs-090226.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
1365. Cooley. Alexander. 2006: The Political Economy of Okinawa’s Antimilitarism, Armed
Forces & Society, Vol. 32, No. 4, 566-583.
1366. Coomans, Fr. Peter, 1997: History of the mission in the Mariana Islands, 1667-1673;
translated and edited by Rodrigue Levesque, Northern Mariana Islands: Division of
Historic Preservation, Dept. of Community and Cultural Affairs, Commonwealth of
Mariana Islands.
1367. Coombe, Jack D., 1991: Derailing the Tokyo Express: the naval battles for the Solomon
Islands that sealed Japan’s fate, Harrisburg, PA: Stackpole Books.
1368. Coombes, James, 2004: “The Margaret Hughes and the maritime traditions of Sherkin
Island; from an article by Rev. James Coombes”, in Mizen Journal: [Mizen Peninsula
Historical and Archaeological Society], 12, 60-62.
1369. Cooneratne, W.; Obudho, R. (eds), 1997: Comptemporary issues in regional development
policy, Aldershot, Asghate.
1370. Cooper, C. and Jackson, S., 1989: Destination life cycle. The Isle of Man case study,
Annals of Tourism Research, 16(2), pp.377-398.
1371. Cooper, C., 1995: Strategic planning for sustainable tourism: The case of the Offshore
islands of the UK, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 3(4), pp.191-209.
1372. Cooper, Derek, 1991: Road to the isle: travellers in the Hebrides, 1770-1914, New edn.
Edinburgh.
1373. Coppell, W. G., 1983: A bibliography of Pacific Island theses and dissertations,[Canberra?]:
Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University, in conjunction with the
Institute for Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University, Hawaii Campus: Distributed
by University of Hawaii Press.
1374. Copper, John F., 1990: Taiwan: Nation-State or Province, London: Westview Press.
1375. Copper, John F., 2000: Historical Dictionary of Taiwan (Republic of China), 2d ed. Lanham,
Md.: Scarecrow Press.
2009
CEHA 77
1376. Coppet, D.; Iteanu, A., 1995: Cosmos and society in Oceania, Oxford, Berg.
1377. Corbett, Ben, 2004: This Is Cuba: An Outlaw Culture Survives. Westview Press.
1378. Cordeiro Carlos, 1992: Insularidade e continentalidade: os Açores e as contradições da
regeneração, 1851-1870, Livraria Minerva.
1379. Cordeiro, Carlos; Madeira, Artur Boavida, 2004: Nos primórdios da emigração açoriana
para o Canadá: Leituras e contextos, Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 12, No. 2, 2004.
1380. Cordy, Ross H., 1981: A study of prehistoric social change: the development of complex
societies in the Hawaiian Islands, New York: Academic Press.
1381. Cormerais, Jean-Pierre, 1988: Les îles infortunées, Paris.
1382. Cornell, S. E., 2002: Autonomy and Conflict: Ethnoterritoriality and Separatism in the South
Caucasus – Cases in Georgia, Uppsala: Department of Peace and Conflict research.
1383. Cornu, Henri, 1980: Paris et Bourbon, la politique française dans l’océan Indien de 1664 à
1815: réflexions sur l’histoire de la Réunion; préface de Jean-François Sam Long, [Saint-
Denis]: Union pour la diffusion du livre réunionnais.
1384. Coronato, Fernando R., 2004: “Connections between the Welsh colony in Patagonia and
the Falkland Islands - the loss of the schooner Denby”, in Maritime Wales, 25, 100-103.
1385. Coronese, Stefano, 1980: Una religione che muore: la cultura delle isole Mentawai
nell’impatto con il mondo moderno, Bologna: Editrice missionaria italiana.
1386. Corris, P., 1970: Pacific Island labour migrants in Queensland, Journal of Pacific history,
vol. 5, 1970:43-64.
1387. Cortazar, L. and Martin, C., 1999: Tourism and sustainable development from theory to
practice: The island experience. Disponível online em url: http://www.insula.org/. Consulta
1388. Cosaert, Patrice (dir.); Bart, François (dir.). 2003: Patrimoines et développement dans les
pays tropicaux, Pessac: DYMSET, pp. 135-148.
1389. COSTA, João Paulo Oliveira e, 2001: Um oceano a explorar. A doação de ilhas
desconhecidas pela coroa portuguesa no século XV, in in Oceanos, nº.46, (Abril/Junho),
Lisboa, CNDP, pp.44-55.
1390. Costa, Susana Goulart, 2001: «Para uma Outra Leitura das Escalas Insulares: A
Religiosidade Micaelense no Decurso do Século XVII», pp. 161-182, Avelino de Freitas
de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de
Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999,
vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos
Descobrimentos Portugueses.
1391. Côté, Serge. 1996: Identité de développement des milieux insulaires, Groupe de recherche
interdisciplinaire sur le développement régional, de l’Este du Québec, Université du
Québec, Rimouski.
1392. Cottrell, Philip Leonard, 2002:’Founding a multinational financial enterprise: Ionian Bank,
1833-1849’. In Kostis, Kostas P. (ed.), The creators and the creation of banking enterprises
in Europe from the 18th to the 20th century, Athens: Alpha Bank Historical Archives.
1393. Couillot, M.F.; Darlu, P.; Belaid, H., 1983: Evolution de l’alimentation aux iles marquises
de la colonisation a nos jours, jatba, journal d’agriculture traditionnelle et de botanique
appliquee, no 2, p. p. 111-126.
1394. Coulcher, Patrick, 1999: The sun islands: a natural history of the Isles of Scilly, Sussex,
2009
England: Book Guild.

1395. Coull, James R. (ed.), 1985: The county of Shetland (Third statistical account of Scotland,
22B). Edinburgh.
1396. Coulter, Hugh, 1992: Commodity marketing institutions in the Pacific Islands: a case study
of Papua New Guinea, Port Moresby, Papua New Guinea: Institute of National Affairs.
1397. Counihan, C. Food, 1981: Culture and political economy: an investigation of changing
lifestyles in the Sardinian town of Bosa, Thèse de Philosophie: Massachusetts.
1398. Counts, David R. and Dorothy Ayers Counts, 1982: Kandrian-Gloucester development
study, West New Britain. Crown Agents, Consultants Report, National Planning Office,
Port Moresby, PNG.
1399. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1983: “1977 Independence and the rule of money
in Kaliai” in Oceania 48:30-39.
1400. Counts, David R. and Dorothy E. Counts, 1983-84: Aspects of dying in Northwest New
Britain. In Special Section: Dying in Cross-Cultural Perspective. Peter H. Stephenson,
ed. Omega 14:101-112.
1401. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1983: Near-Death and out-of-body experiences in a
Melanesian society, Anabiosis 3:115-135.
1402. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1983-84: Aspects of dying in Northwest New Britain,
In Special Section: Dying in Cross-Cultural Perspective. Peter H. Stephenson, ed. Omega
14:101-112.
1403. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1983: Father’s water equals mother’s milk: the
conception of parentage in Kaliai, West New Britain, In Concepts of Conception:
Procreation Ideologies in Papua New Guinea. Dan Jorgenson, ed. Special Issue of
Mankind 14:46-56.
1404. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1985: “The cultural construction of aging and dying
in a Melanesian community”,in International Journal of Aging and Human Development,
20:231-242.
1405. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1985: I’m not dead yet! Aging and death, process
and experience in Kaliai, in Aging and Its Transformations, Dorothy Ayers Counts and
David R. Counts, eds. A.S.A.O. Monograph No. 10. Lanham, Md.: University Press of
America. Reprinted 1992 by the University of Pittsburgh Press, Pittsburgh, Pp. 131-156.
1406. Counts, David R. and Dorothy Ayers Counts, 1989: Complementarity in medical treatment
in a West New Britain society, in A Continuing Trial of Treatment: Medical Pluralism
in Papua New Guinea, Stephen Frankel and Gilbert Lewis, eds., Kluwer Academic
Publishers. Dordrecht, pp. 277-294.
1407. Counts, David R., 1989: “Shadows of war: changing remembrance through twenty years
in New Britain”, in The Pacific Theater: Island Representation of World War II. White
Geoffrey, and Lamont Lindstrom, eds. University of Hawaii Press, Honolulu HI, pp. 187
- 204.
1408. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1989: Complementarity in medical treatment in a
West New Britain society, in A Continuing Trial of Treatment: Medical Pluralism in Papua
New Guinea, Stephen Frankel and Gilbert Lewis, eds., Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Dordrecht, pp. 277-294.
1409. Counts, David R., 1990: “Too Many Bananas, not enough pineapple, and no watermelon at
all” in The Humbled Anthropologist: Tales from the Pacific, Philip R. DeVita, ed. Wadsworth
2009
CEHA 79
Publishing, Belmont, CA, pp. 18-24.

1410. Counts, C., Dorothy Ayers and David R. Counts, 1991: Loss and anger: death and the
expression of grief in Kaliai, in Coping with the Final Tragedy: Cultural Variation in Dying
and Grieving, David R. Counts and Dorothy A. Counts, eds. Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood
Press. pp. 191-212.
1411. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1991: ‘People Who Act LikeDogs’ adultery and
deviance in a Melanesian community, In Deviance in Cross-cultural Perspective, special
issue of Anthropologica, 33 (1-2):99-110, Richard A. Brymer and David Counts, eds.
1412. Counts, David R. and Dorothy A. Counts, 1992: Exaggeration and reversal: clowning
among the Lusi- Kaliai, in Clowning as Critical Practice: Performance Humor in the South
Pacific, William Mitchell, ed. ASAO Monograph 13. Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh
Press, pp. 88-103.
1413. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1994: When Women Win: male-female disputing
in Kaliai, West New Britain, In Law and Anthropology, International Yearbook for Legal
Anthropology, Volume 7. Eds. René Kuppe and Richard Potz. Dordrecht: Martinus Nijhoff.
To read this essay click on the blue words, pp. 331-352.
1414. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 1998: Fictive Families in the Field, in Fieldwork
and Families: Constructing New Models for Ethnographic Research. Juliana Flinn, Leslie
Marshall and Jocelyn Armstrong eds. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, Pp 142-153.
1415. Counts, David R.; Counts, Dorothy A., 2000: Review of Cultures of Secrecy: Reinventing
Race in Bush Kaliai Cargo Cults, Andrew Lattas.. Paideuma: Mitteilungen zur Kulturkunde
46:323-328.
1416. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1980: Akro and Gagandewa: a Melanesian myth, Journal of the
Polynesian Society, 89(1):33-65.
1417. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1980a: Fighting Back is Not theWay: suicide and the women of
Kaliai, American Ethnologist, 7(2):332-351.
1418. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1982: The Tales of Laupu: Stories from Kaliai, West New Britain.
Told by Jakob Mua Laupu, Benedik Solou Laupu, and Maria Sapanga. Translated,
transcribed, and with an Introduction by Dorothy Ayers Counts. Boroko: Institute of Papua
New Guinea Studies.
1419. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1982a: A question of legitimacy: middlemen and change in West
New Britain, in Middlemen and Brokers in Oceania, William Rodman and Dorothy Ayers
Counts, eds. A.S.A.O. Monograph No. 9. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press,
Reprinted 1983 by University Press of America, Lanham, Md. Pp. 117-148.
1420. Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David R. Counts, 1983: Father’s water equals mother’s milk:
the conception of parentage in Kaliai, West New Britain. In Concepts of Conception:
Procreation Ideologies in Papua New Guinea. Dan Jorgenson, ed. Special Issue of
Mankind 14:46-56.
1421. Counts, Dorothy E. Ayers, 1983a: Near-Death and out-of-body experiences in a Melanesian
society, Anabiosis, 3:115-135.
1422. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1984: Revenge suicide by Lusi women: an expression of power,
in Rethinking Women’s Roles: Perspectives from the Pacific, Denise O’Brien and Sharon
Tiffany, eds. Berkeley: University of California Press, pp. 71-93.
1423. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1985: “Sweeping men and harmless women: responsibility and
gender identity in later life”, in Aging in the Third World: Part II, Publication No. 23. Jay
Sokolovsky, ed. Studies in Third World Societies, Williamsburg, VA: College of William
2009
and Mary, Pp. 1-26.

1424. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1985a: Infant care and feeding in West New Britain, in Infant Care
and Feeding in the South Pacific, Leslie B. Marshall. New York: Gordon and Breach. Pp.
155-170, Also in Food and Nutrition in History and Anthropology, 3:155-170.
1425. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1985b: Tamparonga: The ‘big women’ of Kaliai (Papua New
Guinea), In Her Prime, Judith K. Brown and Virginia Kerns, eds. Bergin and Garvey,
Pp.49-64.
1426. Counts, Dorothy A, and David R. Counts, 1985c: The cultural construction of aging and
dying in a Melanesian community, International Journal of Aging and Human Development,
20:231-242.
1427. Counts, Dorothy A. and David R. Counts, 1985d: I’m not dead yet! Aging and death, process
and experience in Kaliai, in Aging and Its Transformations, Dorothy Ayers Counts and
America. Reprinted 1992 by the University of Pittsburgh Press, Pittsburgh. Pp. 131-156.
1428. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1987: Female Suicide and Wife Abuse in cross cultural perspective.
Suicide and Life Threatening Behavior 17(3):194-204.
1429. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1988: Ambiguity in the interpretation of suicide: female death in
Papua New Guinea, in Why Women Kill Themselve s. David Lester, ed. Springfield IL:
Charles Thomas, pp. 87-110.
1430. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1988a: Kaliai children: changes in family planning in a West New
Britain society, In Reproductive Decision Making and the Value of Children in Rural Papua
New Guinea, Nancy McDowell, ed. Boroko, Papua New Guinea: Institute of Applied
Social and Economic Research, pp. 163-178.
1431. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1990: Abused women and revenge suicide: anthropological
contributions for understanding suicide, In Current Concepts of Suicide, Philadelphia:
The Charles Press, David Lester, ed. pp. 95-106.
1432. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1990a: Beaten wife, suicidal woman: domestic violence in Kaliai,
West New Britain. In Special Issue: Domestic Violence in Oceania. Dorothy Ayers Counts,
ed. Pacific Studies 13: 151-169.
1433. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1991: Aging Health and Women in West New Britain, J. of Cross-
Cultural Gerontology, 6:277-285.
1434. Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David R. Counts, 1991a: Loss and anger: death and the
expression of grief in Kaliai. in Coping with the Final Tragedy: Cultural Variation in Dying
and Grieving. David R. Counts and Dorothy A. Counts, eds. Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood
Press. pp. 191-212.
1435. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1991b: Suicide in Different Ages from a cross-cultural perspective.
Pp. 215-230 in Life Perspectives of Suicide: Time-Lines in the Suicide Process, Antoon
Leenaars, ed. New York: Plenum Press.
1436. Counts, Dorothy E. and David R. Counts, 1991c: ‘People Who Act LikeDogs’ adultery and
deviance in a Melanesian community, In Deviance in Cross-cultural Perspective, special
issue of Anthropologica, 33 (1-2):99-110, Richard A. Brymer and David Counts, eds.
1437. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1992: All men do it: wife beating in Kaliai, Papua New Guinea, in
Sanctions and Sanctuary: Cross-Cultural Perspectives on the Beating of Wives, Boulder,
Colorado: Westview press, pp. 63-76.
1438. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1992a: Tamparonga: the ‘big women’ of Kaliai (Papua New Guinea).
2009
CEHA 81
In In Her Prime: New Views of Middle-Aged Women. Judith K. Brown and Virginia Kerns,
eds., pp. 61-74. Second edition. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.
1439. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1992b: The fist, the stick and the bottle of bleach: wife bashing
and female suicide in a Papua New Guinea Society, in Contemporary Pacific Societies:
Studies in Development and Change, V. Lockwood, T. Harding, B. Wallace, eds. N.Y.:
Prentice Hall, pp. 249-259.
1440. Counts, Dorothy Ayers, 1994: Snakes, adulterers, and the loss of paradise in Kaliai, In
Children of Kilibob, special issue of Pacific Studies, Alice Pomponio, David R. Counts and
Thomas G. Harding guest editors, Pacific Studies, 17: 109-151.
1441. Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David R. Counts, 1994a: When Women Win: male-female
disputing in Kaliai, West New Britain, In Law and Anthropology, International Yearbook for
Legal Anthropology, Volume 7. Eds. René Kuppe and Richard Potz. Dordrecht: Martinus
Nijhoff. pp. 331-352.
1442. Counts, Dorothy E. Ayers and David R. Counts, 2000: Review of Cultures of Secrecy:
Reinventing Race in Bush Kaliai Cargo Cults. Andrew Lattas. Paideuma: Mitteilungen zur
Kulturkunde 46:323-328.
1443. Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David Counts, 2004: The good, the bad, and the unresolved
death in Kaliai, In Social Science & Medicine, 58: 887-897.
1444. Couper, A.D., edited by, 1989: Development and social change in the Pacific islands,
London; New York: Routledge.
1445. Couraud, P., 1985: Origine et transformation de l’agriculture en Polynesie francaise:
analyse economique du secteur agricole, Paris, Th. Doct. Ing.: Agron., INA - Institut
National Agronomique, Paris, France.
1446. Courtman, Sandra, 2004: Beyond the blood, the beach & the banana: new perspectives in
Caribbean studies, Kingston, Jamaica: Ian Randle.
1447. Covarrubias, Miguel, 1938: Island of Bali, New York: Knopf.
1448. Covell, Maureen, 1987: Madagascar: Politics, Economics, and Society, New York: Covell,
Maureen, 1995: Historical Dictionary of Madagascar, Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press.
1449. Covington, Paula H., ed., 1992: Latin America and the Caribbean: A Critical Guide to
Research Sources. Bibliographies and Indexes in Latin American and Caribbean Studies,
no. 2. New York: Greenwood Press.
1450. Cox, edited by Paul Alan and Sandra Anne Banack, 1991: Islands, plants, and Polynesians:
an introduction to Polynesian ethnobotany: proceedings of a symposium sponsored by
the Institute of Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University--Hawaii Campus, Laie,
Hawaii, Portland, Or.: Dioscorides Press.
1451. Cox, G. Stevens, St Peter Port, 1680-1830: the history of an international entrepôt,
Woodbridge, Rochester, NY, Boydell Press.
1452. Coyne, T.; Badcock, J. (ed.); Taylor, R. (ed.). 1984: The effect of urbanisation and western
diet on the health of Pacific Island populations, Noumea: Cps.
1453. CPIS, 1989: The Contemporary Pacific, Honolulu, Hawaii: Center for Pacific Islands
Studies & University of Hawaii Press.
1454. CPIS, 2005: Pacific studies initiative. Syllabus and bibliography collection, the University
of Hawaiì Center for Pacific Islands Studies and the East-West Center Pacific Islands
Development Program (PIDP).UHM, Center for Pacific Island Studies. Disponível online
em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
2009
1455. Craddock, C. N., 1985: Rotuma: A Changing Mobility: 1978-1983, M. A. Thesis in

Geography, Massey University, Palmerston North, New Zealand.
1456. Craig, E. W. G., 1985: Destiny well sown: a biography of Lt.-Col. W.E. Gudgeon ...,
Whakatane, N.Z.,Whakatane & District Historical Society.
1457. Craig, Robert D., 2002: Historical dictionary of Polynesia, Lanham, Mass.: Scarerow Press,
2nd. Asian/Oceanian Historical Dictionaries, no.39.
1458. Crain, Edward E., 1994: Historic architecture in the Caribbean Islands, Gainesville:
1459. Craton, Michael and Saunders, Gail, 1992: Islanders in the Stream: A History of the
Bahamian People. Volume One: From Aboriginal Times to the End of Slavery, Athens,
GA: University of Georgia Press.
1460. Craton, Michael and the New History Committee, 2003: Founded upon the Seas: A History
of the Cayman Islands and Their People, Ian Randle Publishers, Kingston, Jamaica.
1461. Craton, Michael, 1988-9: “Seeking a Life of Their Own: Aspects of Slave Resistance in the
Bahamas”, in Indian Historical Review, 15:1-2, 96-115.
1462. Craton, Michael; Saunders, D. Gail, 1990: “Seeking a Life of Their Own: Aspects of Slave
Resistance in the Bahamas”, in Journal of Caribbean History, 24:1, 1-27.
1463. Craton, Michael, 1996: The ambivalencies of independency: the transition out of slavery
in the Bahamas, c.1800-1850, In McDonald, Roderick Alexander (ed.), West Indies
accounts: essays on the history of the British Caribbean and the Atlantic economy in
honour of Richard Sheridan (Kingston (Jamaica): The Press, University of the West
Indies, 1996), 274-96.
1464. Craton, Michael, 2002: ‘Loyalists mainly to themselves: the “Black Loyalist” diaspora to
the Bahamas, 1783-c.1820’. In Shepherd, Verene A. (ed.), Working Slavery, Pricing
Freedom : Perspectives from the Caribbean, Africa and the African Diaspora, Oxford:
James Currey, 44-68.
1465. Craton, Michael, 2002a: Pindling: the life and times of Lynden Oscar Pindling first Prime
Minister of the Bahamas, 1930-2000, Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean.
1466. Creel, Margaret Washington, 1988: A peculiar people: slave religion and community-culture
among the Gullahs, New York: New York University Press.
1467. Crenshaw, Russell Sydnor, 1995: The Battle of Tassafaronga, [Baltimore, MD]: Nautical &
Aviation Pub. Co. of America.
1468. Crenshaw, Russell Sydnor, 1998: South Pacific destroyer: the battle for the Solomons from
Savo Island to Vella Gulf, Annapolis, Md.,Naval Institute Press.
1469. CRET, 1984: Nature et hommes dans les îles tropicales, Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “îles et
archipels”, n°3.
1470. CRET, 1987: Îles tropicales: insularité, insularisme: actes du colloque organisé à Bordeaux-
Talence du 23 au 25 octobre 1986 / Groupe de recherche sur la viabilité des pays
insulaires, Talence: Centre de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux.
1471. CRET, 1989: Îles et tourisme, Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “îles et archipels”, n°10.
1472. CRET, 2004: Les aires protégées insulaires et littorales tropicales, [organisé] par le Centre
de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux de l’Université Michel de Montaigne, Bordeaux
3 (CRET, Iles et archipels 32, 2004).
1473. Cribb, Robert, 2000: Historical Atlas of Indonesia, London and Honolulu: Routledge Curzon
2009
CEHA 83
Press, University of Hawaii Press.

1474. Crocombe, R. and Rajotte, F. (eds), 1980: Pacific Tourism as Islanders See it, Suva:
Institute of Pacific Studies.
1475. Crocombe, Rex, 1994: The Continuing Creation of Identities in the Pacific Islands: Blood,
Behaviour and Belief, In: Hooson, David, Geography and National Identity, Blackwell,
Oxford.
1476. Crocombe, Ron; Ali, Ahmed, editors, 1982: Politics in Melanesia, contributors, Ahmed Ali
... [et al.], [Suva, Fiji]: Institute of Pacific Studies of the University of the South Pacific.
1477. Crocombe, Ronald, & A. Ali (eds.) 1983: Foreign forces in Pacific politics, Suva.
1478. Crocombe, Ronald, 1968, 1975, 1977, 1980: Improving Land Tenure, sole author, South
Pacific Commission, Noumea. In 3 editions: complete in English (122 pp) & French (La
Reforme des Regimes Fonciers).
1479. Crocombe, Ronald, 1968, 1985, 1992, 1994: The Works of Ta’unga, joint author with
Marjorie Tuainekore Crocombe, Australian National University Press & University Press
of Hawaii.
1480. Crocombe, Ronald, 1971, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1998: Land Tenure in the Pacific, Ed. & joint
author, Oxford University Press.
1481. Crocombe, Ronald, 1973, 1978, 1983, 1987, 1989, 1994: The South Pacific, sole author,
Reed, Wellington & Australian National University Press, Canberra.
1482. Crocombe, Ronald, 1975, 1977, 1980, 1982: The Pacific Way - Social Issues in Development,
joint ed. & author with S.Tupouniua & C. Slatter, South Pacific Social Sciences Association,
Suva.
1483. Crocombe, Ronald, 1975, 1993: Holy Torture in Fiji, co-authored with 4 others, Pacific
Publications, Sydney, Reprint 1993 by University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1484. Crocombe, Ronald, 1976, 1978, 1980, 1982: The Pacific Way - An Emerging Identity, Lotu
Pasifika, Suva.
1485. Crocombe, Ronald, 1977, 1978, 1981, 1983, 1984: Pacific Courts & Justice, joint ed. &
author, University of the South Pacific, Suva & Commonwealth Magistrates Association,
London.
1486. Crocombe, Ronald, 1977, 1984: Education for Rural Development: the Tutu Experiment &
its Relevance in the Pacific, joint author, University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1487. Crocombe, Ronald, 1978, 1980, 1995, 1996: Land Tenure in Niue, ed. & joint author,
University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1488. Crocombe, Ronald, 1980 - 1983: Land Tenure: Supplementary Readings, ed. with Howard
Van Trease, University of the South Pacific Extension Services, Suva, 2 vols.
1489. Crocombe, Ronald, 1980: Land tenure & land reform in the 1980s, in The Role of CASLE
Professions in Rural Development in the South Pacific, Commonwealth Association of
Surveying & Land Economy, London, pp. 62-69.
1490. Crocombe, Ronald, 1980a: Bases for Pacific Cooperation: the Islands & the Rim, La
Communidad del Pacifico en Perspectiva, pp 320-30, Institute of International Relations,
University of Chile, Santiago. Reprint in Directions, 5:53-61.
1491. Crocombe, Ronald, 1980b: Challenges of the 80s, in Papauta: South Pacific Consultation
on Theological Education, Lotu Pasifika, Suva, pp 83-9, Reprint 1981 in Report of the
Fourth Assembly, Pacific Conference of Churches, Suva.
2009
1492. Crocombe, Ronald, 1980c: Conquest by creating dependency: is the American victory in
Micronesia moving south?, South Pacific Business News, May, pp. 5-8.
1493. Crocombe, Ronald, 1980d: Cultural Policies in the Pacific Islands, Pacific Perspective
9(1):6473, Revised reprint 1994 in Culture, Custom, Tradition: Developing Cultural Policy
in Melanesia, G. White & L. Lindstrom (eds), East-West Center, Honolulu.
1494. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981, 1983: Land, People & Government: Public Lands Policy in the
South Pacific, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific.
1495. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981a, 1984: Pacific Tourism, ed. & author, University of the South
Pacific.
1496. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981b: CANA: A Caribbean Model for Pacific News Distribution”,
Pacific Perspective, 10(1):43-4.
1497. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981c: Dependence by Extension, in Dimensions of Distance: Distance
Education in a Pacific Setting, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 129-32.
1498. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981d: Inter-country Institutional Arrangements for Economic &
Technical Cooperation among Developing Asian & Pacific Nations, sole author, vol 3,
Pacific Institutions, United Nations Economic & Social Commission for Asia & the Pacific,
Bangkok, & University of the South Pacific.
1499. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981e: Options for the Pacific’s largest ethnic group, Pacific Indians,
University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 183-216.
1500. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981f: Pacific Indians: Profiles from 20 Countries, ed. & author.
1501. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981g: Patterns of Dependence in the Pacific Islands, Pacific Concerns
Research Centre, Honolulu, Resource Report No. 187, pp 31.
1502. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981h: Politics, power & rural people, in The Road Out: Rural
Development in Solomon Islands, University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1503. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981i: Super powers in the Pacific, Pacific Islands Monthly, April, pp
11-14.
1504. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981j: The Future of Islam in the Pacific, Al-Qalam, Suva.
1505. Crocombe, Ronald, 1981l: Trends in Tenure & Training, in Surveys for Resource
Development in the Pacific Region, Fiji Institute of Surveyors, Suva, pp. 74-85.
1506. Crocombe, Ronald, 1982, 1989: Regional Cooperation, Foreign Forces in Pacific Politics,
University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 178-203.
1507. Crocombe, Ronald, 1982a, 1994: Polynesian Missions in Melanesia, joint ed. & author,
University of the South Pacific.
1508. Crocombe, Ronald, 1982b, 1983: Politics in Melanesia, ed. University of the South Pacific.
1509. Crocombe, Ronald, 1983 - 1985: Foreign Forces in Pacific Politics, ed. & contributing
author, University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1510. Crocombe, Ronald, 1983a - 1989: Religious Cooperation in the South Pacific, joint ed. &
author, University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1511. Crocombe, Ronald, 1983b - 1989: The Associations of Theological Schools, Religious
Cooperation in the Pacific, University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1512. Crocombe, Ronald, 1983c: Land Tenure & Agriculture Development in the Pacific Islands,
being Extension Bulletin No. 187, Asian-Pacific Council Food & Fertilizer Technology
2009
CEHA 85
Centre, Taiwan, Reprint 1983 in Land Tenure & the Small Farmer in Asia, Taipei.
1513. Crocombe, Ronald, 1983d: Nauru: the politics of phosphate, in Politics in Micronesia,
University of the South Pacific, Suva, Revised reprint 1988 in Micronesian Politics,
1514. Crocombe, Ronald, 1983e: The South Pacific: an introduction, Suva.
1515. Crocombe, Ronald, 1983f: Wantok rules: the five Melanesias, Islands Business, 9(7):51-5.
1516. Crocombe, Ronald, 1984 - 1989: Land Tenure & Rural Productivity, ed. & author. University
of the South Pacific, Suva.
1517. Crocombe, Ronald, 1984a: Options in University education for the Pacific Islands, Pacific
Perspective, 12(1):8-17.
1518. Crocombe, Ronald, 1984b: Pacific History: Perceptions from within, Pacific History
Newsletter, No 12, Newcastle. Reprint 1985 in Tok Tok Bilong Haus Book, Papua New
Guinea Library Association, Port Moresby.
1519. Crocombe, Ronald, 1984c: Registration in the Pacific Islands: Experiences & Potentials, in
Land Tenure & Rural Development, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 26-46.
1520. Crocombe, Ronald, 1984d: Soft Sciences & Hard Realities in Land Management,
Proceedings of the PNG Survey Conference, Port Moresby.
1521. Crocombe, Ronald, 1984e: The Pan-Pacific Person, in Pacific Perspective, 12(2):51-60.
1522. Crocombe, Ronald, 1985: Education, Enjoyment & Integrity in Tourism, Contours, 1(8):10-
14 Bangkok.
1523. Crocombe, Ronald, 1986: Book Distribution in the Pacific Islands, Pacific Islands
Communication Journal, 14(1):28-42, University of the South Pacific, Suva, Reprint 1993
in Readings in Pacific Literature, Paul Sharrad (ed), University of Wollongong.
1524. Crocombe, Ronald, 1986: Intellectual Life at USP, Unispac, December.
1525. Crocombe, Ronald, 1986a: Land Rights of Pacific Women, ed. University of the South
Pacific, Suva.
1526. Crocombe, Ronald, 1987, 1989, 1991: Class & Culture in the South Pacific, joint ed. &
author, University of Auckland.
1527. Crocombe, Ronald, 1987a, 1989, 1991: Studying the Pacific: Past experiences & future
potentials, Class & Culture in the South Pacific, University of the South Pacific & University
of Auckland, pp 115-39.
1528. Crocombe, Ronald, 1987b, 1991, 1995, 1997: Land Tenure in the Atolls, ed. & joint author,
1529. Crocombe, Ronald, 1987c: Distance Education & Scientific Cooperation in the Pacific,
Agricultural Science, 21(4):14-17.
1530. Crocombe, Ronald, 1987d: Ethics for the Pacific in the 21st Century, in The Ethics of
Development, University of Papua New Guinea, Port Moresby, pp 9-39.
1531. Crocombe, Ronald, 1987e: Productive Potentials for the Pacific Islands, Journal of the
Pacific Society, Tokyo, 10(1):21-40.
1532. Crocombe, Ronald, 1987f: Studying the Pacific: Past experiences & future potentials, Class
& Culture in the South Pacific, University of the South Pacific & University of Auckland, pp
115-39, Reprint 1989.
1533. Crocombe, Ronald, 1987g: The South Pacific & East Asia: Patterns of Interaction in
2009
Education, Research & Information, Internationalizing Higher Education, Kinokuniya

Publishing Co, Tokyo.
1534. Crocombe, Ronald, 1988, 1995: Land Courts, in Pacific Courts & Legal Systems, University
of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 112-26.
1535. Crocombe, Ronald, 1988a: Constraints & Opportunities for Small Farmers in the South
Pacific, Transfer of Technology to Small Farms, ASPAC Food & Fertilizer Center, Taipei.
1536. Crocombe, Ronald, 1988b: Micronesian Politics, joint ed. & author, University of the South
Pacific, Suva.
1537. Crocombe, Ronald, 1988c: Pacific Universities, joint ed. & author, University of the South
Pacific, Suva.
1538. Crocombe, Ronald, 1988d: The Development of Higher Education in the South Pacific,
Islanders in Pacific Rim Universities & The Future of University Education in the South
Pacific, being chapters in Pacific Universities, University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp
20-34, 253-70, 341-87.
1539. Crocombe, Ronald, 1988e: The Tenure & Management of Land in the Pacific Islands,
Proceedings of the Commonwealth Planners Association, Honiara.
1540. Crocombe, Ronald, 1989: French Polynesia: Selected Readings, joint ed, University of the
South Pacific, Suva.
1541. Crocombe, Ronald, with Malama Meleisea, 1989a: Higher Education in the Pacific Islands:
Spheres of Influence, Trends & Developments, International Journal of Educational
Development, 9(3):163-73. Reprint 1990 O’o: Journal of Solomon Islands Studies, 2(4).
1542. Crocombe, Ronald, 1989a: NGOs: The Voluntary Contribution to Pacific Development (sole
author), typescript report to USAID (USA), AIDAB (Australia) and the Commonwealth
Foundation (London).
1543. Crocombe, Ronald, 1989b: Some problems facing Pacific Island countries, Pacific
Perspective, 14(1):1-7, Japanese translation in Island States of Oceania & the Industrialised
Countries, edited by Kimitada Miwa, Keiryu-sha, Tokyo.
1544. Crocombe, Ronald, 1989c: The South Pacific: An Introduction, Institute of Pacific Studies,
The University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp. 38-39.
1545. Crocombe, Ronald, 1989d: Tomorrow’s customary tenures in relation to conservation,
Customary Tenures, Traditional Resource Management & Nature Conservation, SPREP,
South Pacific Commission, Noumea.
1546. Crocombe, Ronald, 1990: Cook Islands Society, in Encyclopaedia of World Cultures,
Human Relations Area Files, Yale University, New Haven.
1547. Crocombe, Ronald, 1990a: Land Reform in the Third World, in Land is Life: Sharing of Land
in the Third World, LWF Publication 27, Geneva, pp 4-14.
1548. Crocombe, Ronald, 1990b: Latin America & the Pacific Islands, The Contemporary Pacific
3(1):115-44.
1549. Crocombe, Ronald, 1990c: South Pacific Regionalism, Public Administration & Management
in Small States, Yash Ghai (ed), University of the South Pacific, Suva, pp 227-50.
1550. Crocombe, Ronald, 1990d: The Cook Islands & Niue, 1989, Journal of Pacific History,
25(3):35-8.
1551. Crocombe, Ronald, 1990e: Voluntary Service & Development in the Cook Islands, sole
author, University of the South Pacific, Rarotonga.
2009
CEHA 87
1552. Crocombe, Ronald, 1991: American Influences on Pacific Island Cultures, Association for
Social Anthropology in Oceania, Chicago.
1553. Crocombe, Ronald, 1991b: Naming & claiming in the South Pacific, Proceedings of the
South Pacific Place Names Conference, The Geographical Society, Wellington, pp.1-27.
1554. Crocombe, Ronald, 1991c: The Cook Islands (with Marjorie Crocombe), Te Manu Rere,
Wellington.
1555. Crocombe, Ronald, 1991d: The Cook Islands, Encyclopaedia Brittanica, Chicago.
1556. Crocombe, Ronald, 1991e: The Cook Islands: July 1989-June 90, The Contemporary
Pacific, 3(1):192-5.
1557. Crocombe, Ronald, 1991f: The Pacific Islands in the 21st Century, Studies for the 21st
Century, ed. Gerald O. Barney et al, Institute for 21st Century Studies, Washington, pp
429-47, Reprint by UNESCO, Paris. Extended version 1992 Journal of the Pacific Society,
15(2):120-54 & reprint 1993 as Special Bulletin No. 50 of Deutch Pazifische Gesselschaft,
1993, 36 pages, Serialised reprint Tonga Chronicle June-Oct 1994, Tongan translation
in Kalonikali Tonga, June-October 1994, Japanese translation 1993-4 Overseas Fishery
Cooperation Journal, 48:38-59, & 50:33-60.
1558. Crocombe, Ronald, 1992, 2001: Te Rau Maire: Poems & Stories of the South Pacific, joint
ed., University of Auckland & University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1559. Crocombe, Ronald, 1992a: Culture & Democracy in the South Pacific, joint ed. & author,
1560. Crocombe, Ronald, 1992b: Education & Training for Adults with Little of Either, Partners in
Educational Leadership: Schools & Communities Prepare for the Future, University of the
Northern Territory, Darwin, pp 26-43.
1561. Crocombe, Ronald, 1992c: Improving Long-term Prospects: Some Issues for Small Island
States, Mauritius 2020, Port Louis.
1562. Crocombe, Ronald, 1992d: New Zealand & the Other Pacific Islands: Changing Social,
Economic & Political Relations, Pacific History, Don Rubinstein (ed.), University of Guam
Press, pp 293-312.
1563. Crocombe, Ronald, 1992e: Pacific neighbours: New Zealand’s relations with other Pacific
Islands: Aotearoa me Nga Moutera o te Moana Nui a Kiwa, Christchurch, N.Z.: Centre for
Pacific Studies, University of Canterbury; Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies, University
of the South Pacific.
1564. Crocombe, Ronald, 1992f: The Cook Islands: July 1990-June 1991, The Contemporary
Pacific, 4(1):193-6.
1565. Crocombe, Ronald, 1992g: The Future of Democracy in Pacific Islands, & Achievements
& Directions (the latter jointly) in Culture & Democracy in the South Pacific, University of
the South Pacific, Suva, pp 9-27 & 239-61.
1566. Crocombe, Ronald, 1993: Sources for the Continuing Creation of Identities in the Pacific
Islands: Blood, Boundaries, Behaviour & Belief, in National Identity & Geography, David
Hooson, editor, Blackwells, London. pp 311-30.
1567. Crocombe, Ronald, 1993a: Ethnicity, Identity & Power in Oceania, in Islands & Enclaves:
Nationalism & Separatism in Island & Littoral Contexts, Gary Trompf (ed), Sterling
Publishers, New Delhi. pp 195-223.
1568. Crocombe, Ronald, 1993b: Independence, Dependence & Interdependence: The First Ten
Years of Solomon Islands Independence, joint ed. & author, University of the South Pacific
2009
& Solomon Islands College of Higher Education.

1569. Crocombe, Ronald, 1993c: Scale, Sovereignty, Wealth & Enterprise: Comparisons in
Education between the Cook Islands & Solomon Islands, Comparative Education,
29(3):307-319.
1570. Crocombe, Ronald, 1993d: The Cook Islands July 1991-June 1992, The Contemporary
Pacific, 5(1):152-6.
1571. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994, 1995, 2001: Pacific Science in the 21st Century, Science of
Pacific Island Peoples, John Morrison et al (eds), University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1572. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994, 1997: Potentials for the World’s Smallest Microcultures -
Directions of the Expressive Arts in the Pacific Islands, Coherence & Chaos in our
Uncommon Futures: Visions, Means, Action, World Future Studies Federation, Turku.
1573. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994: Pacific Science in the 21st Century, Science of Pacific Island
Peoples, John Morrison et al (eds), University of the South Pacific, Suva. Reprint 2001.
Reprint 1994 in Futures, 25(8):894-901. 1995 reprint in Viewpoint, 1(1):2-9.
1574. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994a: Environmental Education in the South Pacific, in Environmental
Education in Small Island States, Commonwealth of Learning, Vancouver pp.35-63.
1575. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994a: Post-Secondary Education in the South Pacific, jointly with
Marjorie Tuainekore Crocombe, Commonwealth Secretariat, London.
1576. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994b: Land Issues in the Pacific, senior editor & author, University of
Canterbury, Christchurch.
1577. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994b: Potentials for the World’s Smallest Microcultures - Directions of
the Expressive Arts in the Pacific Islands, Coherence & Chaos in our Uncommon Futures:
Visions, Means, Action, World Future Studies Federation, Turku.
1578. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994c: Overview, Traditional Marine Tenure & Sustainable Management
of Marine Resources in Asia & the Pacific, Robin South et al (eds), International Ocean
Institute, Suva pp.291-300.
1579. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994c: Trends & Issues in Pacific Land Tenures, Land Tenure in the
Pacific, University of Canterbury, Christchurch.
1580. Crocombe, Ronald, 1994d: Welche Zukunft fur die Pazifischen Inseln?, being the lead
chapter of Jahrbook Mission, Missionschilfe Verlag, Hamburg pp.1-11. Reprinted 1994 in
Deutsch Pazifische Gesellschaft Bulletin, no. S-51 pp.8-17.
1581. Crocombe, Ronald, 1995: Customary Land Tenure & Sustainable Development in the South
Pacific, ed. & joint author, South Pacific Commission, Noumea.
1582. Crocombe, Ronald, 1995: The Pacific Islands and the USA, Suva, [Fiji]: Institute of Pacific
Studies, University of the South Pacific; Honolulu: Pacific Islands Development Program,
East-West Center.
1583. Crocombe, Ronald, 1995a: Customary Land Tenure Systems in Papua New Guinea, joint
author, AUSAID, Canberra.
1584. Crocombe, Ronald, 1995b: Customary Land Tenure: It’s Impact on Economic Development
& Policy Alternatives, United Nations Secretariat Report on Opportunity & Participation,
New York.
1585. Crocombe, Ronald, 1995c: New Politics in the South Pacific, senior editor, University of the
1586. Crocombe, Ronald, 1995d: The Cook Islands 1992-94, The Contemporary Pacific, 7(1):138-
2009
CEHA 89
44.
1587. Crocombe, Ronald, 1996: Geopolitical Change in the Pacific Islands, Global Geopolitical
Change and the Asia-Pacific, Dennis Rumley et al (eds), Ashgate Publishing, Vermont pp
282-300.
1588. Crocombe, Ronald, 1996a: Learning to Live with the Reality of Land Tenures in Melanesia
in the 21st Century, Papua New Guinea Journal of Land Studies, 2(1).
1589. Crocombe, Ronald, 1996b: Political Economy in Paradise, in Merian, 12:74-6.
1590. Crocombe, Ronald, 1996c: The Cook Islands 1994-95, The Contemporary Pacific, 8(1):174-
82.
1591. Crocombe, Ronald, 1996d: The LMS and Culture: Impacts on and from Pacific Cultures,
South Pacific Journal of Mission Studies, 17:4-11.
1592. Crocombe, Ronald, 1996e: The Pacific Islands & the USA, sole author, East-West Center,
Hawaii & University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1593. Crocombe, Ronald, 1996f: We are all Futurists imbedded in the Past, Futures, 28(6-7):546-
9. Updated reprint in Futurists: Visions, Methods & Stories, Ross Cowie & Rick Slaughter
(eds), DDM Publishers & the Future Studies Centre, Melbourne. Reprinted 2005 in
Knowledge Base of Future Studies, Richard Slaughter & Sohail Inayatullah (eds), World
Future Society & Foresight International, Brisbane.
1594. Crocombe, Ronald, 1997: Asia and the Pacific Islands, Occasional Papers no. 31, Research
Center for the South Pacific, University of Kagoshima, Also translated in Japanese in the
same series.
1595. Crocombe, Ronald, 1997a: The Cook Islands 1995-96, The Contemporary Pacific, 9(1):218-
27.
1596. Crocombe, Ronald, 1998: Hugh Fraser Ayson, Dictionary of New Zealand Biography, vol
4. Disponível online em url: http://www.dnzb.govt.nz. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
1597. Crocombe, Ronald, 1998a: Pacific Studies, editor & senior author, Commonwealth Youth
Programme, Honiara, and University of Huddersfield.
1598. Crocombe, Ronald, 1998b: Prospects & Possibilities (with Ueantabo Neemia-Mackenzie),
Pacific Studies, Commonwealth Youth Programme, Honiara & Huddersfield.
1599. Crocombe, Ronald, 1998c: Reforming the Political System of the Cook Islands, joint author
with Iaveta Short & John Herrmann, Government Printer, Rarotonga.
1600. Crocombe, Ronald, 1998d: The Cook Islands 1996-97, The Contemporary Pacific,
10(1):192-7.
1601. Crocombe, Ronald, 1999: Akatereanga Taokotai: Partnership in Management: A Report to
the Ministry of Outer Islands Development & the United Nations Development Programme,
joint author, Rarotonga.
1602. Crocombe, Ronald, 1999a: Austronesian Heritage in the 21st Century: A Basis for Relations
between Taiwan & the Pacific Islands, Festival of Austronesian Cultures: Proceedings,
Taitung.
1603. Crocombe, Ronald, 1999b: Tenures, Pacific Islands Environment and Society, sole author
(Moshe Rapaport, ed), Bess Press, Honolulu.
1604. Crocombe, Ronald, 2000: Partnerships in Education (a review of Cook Islands education),
joint author, Victoria University, Wellington. 2 volumes, Rarotonga.
1605. Crocombe, Ronald, 2000a: Asia in the Pacific Islands: Expanding Interactions, Indeterminate
2009
Consequences, (keynote address to the European Society for Oceanists), Journal of the
Pacific Society, 23(1):1-8.
1606. Crocombe, Ronald, 2000b: Bases for Belonging in Polynesia, Anthropological Journal
on European Cultures 8(1):31-60 special issue edited by Regina Roemhild & Ina-Maria
Greverus, Johan Wolfgang Goethe University, Frankfurt.
1607. Crocombe, Ronald, 2000c: Enhancing Pacific Security, South Pacific Forum, Suva.
Reprinted in Japanese in Pacific Way, Spring issue, Japan Institute for Pacific Studies,
Tokyo.
1608. Crocombe, Ronald, 2000d: Pan Pacific Person, New Zealand & the Pacific Islands, Latin
America & the Pacific Islands etc, in The Pacific Islands: An Encyclopaedia, Australian
National University, Camberra.
1609. Crocombe, Ronald, 2000e: Twelve Thoughts on the Future, Islands Business, 26(1):24-6.
1610. Crocombe, Ronald, 2001: The South Pacific, Suva, IPS.
1611. Crocombe, Ronald, 2001a: Security in Melanesia (Fiji, Papua New Guinea, Solomon
Islands and Vanuatu), joint author, Pacific Islands Forum, Suva.
1612. Crocombe, Ronald, 2002: Cook Islands Culture (editor with Marjorie Crocombe), University
1613. Crocombe, Ronald, 2002a: Customary Land: Some Lessons for the Future from Past &
Present Experiences in the Pacific Region, Customary Land Issues in Papua New Guinea,
Papua New Guinea Institute of Valuers and Land Administrators, Lae www.ivla.pg, And in
Melanesian Land Studies, vol.1, November.
1614. Crocombe, Ronald, 2002b: Pacific Regional Security Report: Samoa (with Asofou So’o),
Pacific Islands Forum, Suva.
1615. Crocombe, Ronald, 2002c: Pacific Regional Security Report: Tonga, Pacific Islands Forum,
Suva.
1616. Crocombe, Ronald, 2002d: Perceptions of Mission, South Pacific Journal of Mission
Studies, No. 26, April, pp. 14-20.
1617. Crocombe, Ronald, 2003: Law, Practice & Culture in Economic & Political Relations
between the Pacific Islands & Europe, in Terres & Territoires: Défis & Evolutions dans les
Pays du Pacifique, Maryvonne Nedeljkovic (ed), L’Harmattan, Paris. pp 9-31.
1618. Crocombe, Ronald, 2003: Security in Small Polynesian States, Cook Islands, Niue, Tuvalu,
Pacific Islands Forum, Suva.
1619. Crocombe, Ronald, 2003a: New Zealand & the (Other?) Pacific Islands: Prospects,
Potentials & Possibilities, Futures Times, 3:3-5.
1620. Crocombe, Ronald, 2003b: Responding to Threats to the Pacific Islands Region, Security
in Oceania in the 21st Century, eds. Eric Shibuya & Jim Rolfe, Asia Pacific Center for
Security Studies, Honolulu. pp. 219-230. Also on, http://www.apcss.org/publications/
monographs/SecurityinOceania.pdf.
1621. Crocombe, Ronald, 2003c: The Notion of Sovereignty & Money Havens in the South
Pacific, in Terres & Territoires: Défis & Evolutions dans les Pays du Pacifique, Maryvonne
Nedeljkovic (ed), L’Harmattan, Paris. pp 87-107.
1622. Crocombe, Ronald, 2004: India & the Pacific Islands, in India & Australasia: History, Culture
& Society, N.N. Vohra (ed), India International Centre, Delhi.
1623. Crocombe, Ronald, 2005: Political Culture, Representation, & the Electoral System in
2009
CEHA 91
the Cook Islands, Proceedings of the Conference on Political Culture, Representation

& Electoral Systems in the Pacific Islands, Pacific Institute of Advanced Studies –
Development & Governance, University of the South Pacific, Vila, Vanuatu 1-12 July.
1624. Crocombe, Ronald, 2005b: Regionalism & the Reduction of Conflict, in Securing a Peaceful
Pacific, John Henderson & Greg Watson (eds), pp. 153-160, Canterbury University Press,
Christchurch.
1625. Crocombe, Ronald, 2005c: Trends in Pacific Thought: The Last 50,000 Years & the Next
100, in Polynesian Paradox: Essays in Honour of Futa Helu, Ian Campbell & Eve Coxon
(eds), pp. 243-62, University of the South Pacific, Suva.
1626. Crocombe, Ronald, 2006: Elite Communication between the Pacific Islands & Asia, Asian
Media Information & Communication Centre Conference Proceedings, Penang, 17-20 July,
Published on CD and on Website: www.amic.org.sg, and in print in 2007 in South Pacific
Islands Communication: Regional Perspectives, Local Issues, Evangelia Papoutsaki &
Usah Sundar Harris (eds), AMIC Singapore & Pacific Media Centre, Auckland.
1627. Crocombe, Ronald, 2007: Asia in the Pacific Islands: Replacing the West, sole author,
1628. Crocombe, Ronald, 2007a: Chinese Migration to the Pacific Islands, Taiheiyojo Shokokuken
no Dokuji Bunka narabini Sogoteki Shigen Kaihatsu-riyo ni kansuru Chosa-Kenkyu
(Cultures of Island States of the Pacific & Development & Utilization of Resources of the
Region), Hiroshi Nakajima (ed), Shigen Kyokai, Tokyo.
1629. Crocombe, Ronald, 2007b: From the Pacific to the Asia-Pacific: The Shifting Focus of
Regional Organizations, 10th Pacific Islands Political Studies Association Conference,
Vila, 7-8 December.
1630. Crocombe, Ronald, 2007c: The Fourth Wave: Chinese in the Pacific Islands in the 21st
Century, Symposium on Chinese in the Pacific, Electronic Journal of the Centre for the
Southern Chinese Diaspora, ANU, Canberra.
1631. Crocombe, Ronald, 2007d: Asia in the Pacific Islands: Replacing the West, Suva.
1632. Crocombe, Ronald, 2008: The South Pacific, sole author, University of the South Pacific,
Suva.
1633. Crocombe, Ronald, 2008a: “Tenure” and “Education”, chapters in The Pacific Islands:
Environment & Society, Moshe Rapaport (ed), UHP, Honolulu.
1634. Crofton, Edward, 2000: ‘Keeping the Peace (1945-2000)’ [Second to none: the Coldstream
Guards, 1650-2000]. In Paget, Julian (ed.), Second to none: the Coldstream Guards,
1650-2000, London: Leo Cooper, 228-60.
1635. Cronin, William B., 2005: The disappearing islands of the Chesapeake Baltimore, Md.: Johns
Hopkins University Press in association with the Calvert Marine Museum, Chesapeake
Bay Maritime Museum, Mariner’s Museum, [and the] Maryland Historical Society.
1636. Crooks, Paul, 2008: A tree without roots: the guide to tracing British, African and Asian
Caribbean ancestry, London: Arcadia.
1637. Cross, J. P.; Gurung, Buddhiman (ed.), 2002: Gurkhas at war: in their own words: the
Gurkha experience, 1939 to the present, London: Greenhill Books.
1638. Cross, M. and Nutley, S., 1999: Insularity and accessibility: the small island communities
of Western Ireland, Journal of Rural Studies, 15(3), pp.317-330.
1639. Crossan, Rose-Marie, 2007: Guernsey, 1814-1914: migration and modernisation,
Woodbridge, UK; Rochester.
2009
1640. Crowards, T and Coulter, W., 1998: Economic Vulnerability in the Developing World with
Special reference to the Caribbean, Caribbean Development Bank.
1641. Crowards, T., 1999: An Economic Vulnerability Index for Developing Countries, with Special
Reference to the Caribbean, Bridgetown, Caribbean Development Bank.
1642. Crown Agents, 1982: Kandrian-Gloucester Development Study, West New Britain. Port
Moresby, PNG National Planning Office.
1643. Croyden, R., 1983: Horticulture extension and development. Annual Report for 1982
Lowland Agrigultural Experiment Station, Kervat. Department of Primary Industry Port
Moresby.
1644. Crumley, J., 1994: Among Islands, Edinburgh, Mainstream.
1645. Crusol, J. (dir.), et alii., 1988: L’enjeu des Petites Économies Insulaire, Paris, Economica.
1646. Crusol, J.; Crusol, L.; Dommen, E. (ed.).1980: Islands, In A programme for agriculture in
island plantation economies, Oxford; New York; Paris: Pergamon.
1647. Crusol, Jean (dir.); Hein, Philippe (dir.); Vellas, Francois (dir.). 1988: L’enjeu des petites
economies insulaires. Paris: Economica.
1648. Crusol, Jean, 2007: Les îles à sucre: de la colonisation à la mondialisation, Bécherel: Les
Perséides.
1649. Crusol, Jean; Vellas, Francois, 1996: Le tourisme et la Caraibe, Paris: L’Harmattan.
1650. Crusz, Noel, 2001: The Cocos Islands mutiny, Freemantle (WA): Freemantle Arts Centre
Press.
1651. Cruz Domínguez, Antonio, 2005: Canarias y su proceso autonómico, 1975-198 : la
transformación del archipiélago en la región política a través del periódico “La Provincia”,
Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Anroart Ediciones.
1652. Cruz, Maria Augusta Lima, 2001: «A Lenda dos Dois Bons Irmãos, Paulo e Vasco da
Gama», pp. 483-500, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso
Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira
e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/
Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses.
1653. Cuerda Barceló, Juan, 1989: Los tiempos cuaternarios en Baleares, Palma de Mallorca:
Conselleria de Cultura, Educació i Esports, Dirreció General de Cultura, Govern Balear,
1989.
1654. Cuisenier, Jean, 2003: Le périple d’Ulysse, Paris: Fayard.
1655. Cukier-Snow, J. and Wall, G., 1993: Tourism employment: perspectives from Bali, Tourism
Management, 14(3), pp.357-365.
1656. Cukier, J. and Wall, G., 1995: Tourism employment in Bali, Tourism Economics, 1(4),
pp.389-401.
1657. Cukier, J., Norris, J. and Wall, G., 1996: The involvement of women in the tourism industry
of Bali, Indonesia, Journal of Development Studies, 33(2), pp.248-270.
1658. Cukier, J., 1996: Tourism employment in Bali: trends and implications. In: Butler, R. and
Hinch, T. (eds.) Tourism and Indigenous Peoples. London: Thompson.
1659. Cukier, J., 1999: Tourism employment and shifts in the determination of social status in Bali:
The case of the guide. In: Ringer, G. (ed) Destination. Cultural Landscapes of Tourism.
London and New York: Routledge, pp.63-79.
2009
CEHA 93
1660. Culliney, John L., 1988: Islands in a far sea: nature and man in Hawaii, San Francisco:
Sierra Club Books.
1661. Cuñado, Juncal and Luis A. Gil-Alaña, Tourism in the Canary Islands: Forecasting Using
Several Seasonal Time Series Models, No 02/07, Faculty Working Papers from School
of Economics and Business Administration, University of Navarra. Disponível online em
url: http://www.unav.es/econom/files/workingpapersmodul ... 171283617_wp0207.pdf.
1662. Cunha, Fernando Whitaker Tavares da, 1980: Sentimento e tempo: Estudos, Carioca de
Letras.
1663. Cunqueiro, A., 1983: Fábulas y Leyendas de la Mar, Barcelona.
1664. Curran, H. Allen; White, Brian, edited by. 1995: Terrestrial and shallow marine geology of
the Bahamas and Bermuda, Boulder, Colo.: Geological Society of America.
1665. Currie, Alex S., 1986: Historico-Contextual Overview of Adventist Theological Education in
South Pacific Islands, 1800-1918, Mission Studies, 3:1, 25-42.
1666. Curry, G. and G. Koczberski, 1998: Migration and circulation as a way of life for the Wosera
Abelam of Papua New Guinea, in Asia Pacific Viewpoint, 39(1): 29-52.
1667. Curry, G. and G. Koczberski, 1999: “The risks and uncertainties of migration: an exploration
of recent trends amongst the Wosera Abelam of Papua New Guinea”, Oceania, 70(2):
130-145.
1668. Curry, G. N., 2001: Market and non-market exchange in Papua New Guinea: facilitating
indigenous alternatives for “development, The Joint Conference of the Institute of
Australian Geographers and New Zealand Geographical Society.
1669. Curry, Jimmy, 1985: To The Rescue/First Bahamian Rap/Hip Hop Song, Royal Crown
Records.
1670. Curry, Jimmy, 1996: Filthy Rich Gangster/First Bahamian Movie, Movie Mogul Pictures.
1671. Cushnahan, G., 2001: Resource use and tourism on a small Indonesian Island, Tourism
Recreation Research, 26(3), pp 25-32.
1672. D’Arcy, Paul, 1984: The role of the tuna fishery in the economy of Federated States of DA
Moreland, The quest that failed; Jack London’s last tales of the South Seas”, PS, 8, 1,
48-70.
1673. D’Arcy, Paul, 2001: Connected by the sea: towards a regional history of the Western
Caroline Islands, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 36(2), 163-182.
1674. D’Arcy, Paul, 2003: Warfare and State Formation in Hawaii: The Limits on Violence as a
Means of Political Consolidation, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 38, No. 1 (Jun.), pp.
29-52.
1675. D’Arcy, Paul, 2006: The people of the sea: environment, identity and history in Oceania,
Honolulu: University of Hawaií Press D’Arcy, Paul (ed.), 2008: Peoples of the Pacific:
The History of Oceania to 1870, Aldershot.
1676. DaBreo, D. Sinclair, 1988: Will insularity and political opportunism defeat Caribbean
integration?, Castries, St. Lucia: Commonwealth Publishers International.
1677. Dadzie, Stella, 1990: Searching for the invisible woman: slavery and resistance in Jamaica,
Race & Class, Jan 1990; vol. 32: pp. 21 - 38.
1678. Dagar, J. C., H.S., 1999: Ethnobotany of aborigines of Andaman-Nicobar Islands, Dehra
Dun: Surya International Publications.
2009
1679. D’Agostino, T.; Hillman, R., 2003: Understanding contemporary Caribbean, Boulder, Lynne
Rienner Publishers.
1680. Dahl, A.L. & Depraetere, C., 2007: ‘Island Locations and Classifications’, in G. Baldacchino
(ed.) A World of Islands: An Island Studies Reader, Canada and Malta, Institute of Island
Studies and Agenda, pp. 57-106.
1681. Dahl, Ø., 1999: Meanings in Madagascar: Cases of Intercultural Communication, Bergin &
Hervey, Westport Connecticut and London.
1682. Daipu, R., 1995: A brief report on Bialla smallholder oil palm scheme and Opic - extension
services.
1683. Dalama, Marie-Gisèle, 2005: L’île de la Réunion et le tourisme: d’une île de la désunion
à la Réunion des Hauts et des Bas, Espace géographique (Paris), octobre-décembre
2005, vol. 34, no 4, p. 342-349
1684. Dale, Iain (ed.), 2002: Memories of the Falklands, London: Politico’s.
1685. Dalleo, Peter D., 1981: “Pirates and Plunderers: Rethinking Bahamanian History”, in
Africana Journal, 12:4, 293-320, Africana Publishing Co.
1686. D’Alleva, Anne, 2005: ‘Christian skins: Tatau and the evangelization of the Society Islands
and Samoa’. In Thomas, Nicholas, Cole, Anna; Douglas, Bronwen (ed.), Tattoo: bodies,
art and exchange in the Pacific and Europe, London: Reaktion, 90-108.
1687. D’Alleva, Anne, 2005: Christian skins: Tatau and the evangelization of the Society Islands
and Samoa, In Thomas, Nicholas; Cole, Anna; Douglas, Bronwen (ed.), Tattoo: bodies,
art and exchange in the Pacific and Europe, London: Reaktion, 90-108.
1688. D’Alleva, Anne, Arts of the Pacific islands, New York: H.N. Abrams.
1689. Dalton, J., 1992: An anlaysis of the Solarz report, in Rubinstein, D., ed, Pacific History,
University of Guam, 323-30.
1690. Daly, Eugene, 2000: “Heir Island”, in Mizen Journal: [Mizen Peninsula Historical and Archaeological
Society], 8, 34-55.
1691. Daly, Eugene, 2002: ‘John Daly and the ‘Thomas Joseph’’. Mizen Journal: [Mizen Peninsula
Historical and Archaeological Society], 10, 100-108.
1692. Daly, Eugene, 2004: Heir Island: its history and people, Curraheen Leap, Co. Cork: Heron’s
Way Press.
1693. Damas, David, 1994: Bountiful island: a study of land tenure on a Micronesian atoll,
Waterloo, Ont.: Wilfrid Laurier University Press.
1694. Damon, Frederick H., 1990: From Muyuw to the Trobriands: transformations along the
northern side of the Kula Ring, Tucson: University of Arizona Press.
1695. Danchev, Alexy, 2002: Economic Benefits of Biodiversity Conservation (Case Study of the
Bulgarian Danube Islands), Economic Thought journal, issue 7, pages 129-151.
1696. Daniel, Justin, 1996: Les Iles Caraibes. Modeles politiques et strategies de developpement,
Paris: Karthala.
1697. Danielsson, Bengt; Marie-Thérèse Danielsson, 1986: Poisoned Reign: French Nuclear
Colonialism in the Pacific, New York:
1698. Danson, M, Lloyd, M.G and Newlands, D., 1992: Scotland, in Townroe, Peter (ed.), Regional
Development in the 1990s: The British Isles in Transition, Regional Studies Association.
Jessica Kingsley Publishers, London and Philadelphia, pp. 105-139.
2009
CEHA 95
1699. Darias Príncipe, Alberto, 1991: Arquitectura en Canarias, 1777-1931, [Santa Cruz de
Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria; [Madrid]: CEPSA
1700. Dark, P. J. C., 1983: Among the Kilenge art is something which is well done. S. Mead and
B. Kermot, Eds., Art and Artists of Oceania, Palmerston North, NZ, Dunmore Press, pp.
25-44.
1701. Dark, Philip J. C. and Roger G. Rose (eds) 1993: Artistic Heritage in a Changing Pacific.
University of Hawai’i Press, Honolulu. Esp.
1702. Dark, P., 1997: “Some observations on water transport in the Pacific”, In: M. Schindlbeck,
Ed. Gestern und Heute -Traditionen in der Südsee, Festschrift zum 75 Geburtstag von
Gerd Koch, Baessler-Archiv Beiträge zur Völkerkunde, pp. 291-314.
1703. Dark, P., 1999: “Of Old Models and New in Pacific Art: real or spurious?”, In: B. Craig,
B. Kernot and C. Anderson, Eds. Art and Performance in Oceania. Bathurst, N.S.W.,
Crawford House Publishing, pp. 266-288.
1704. Darling, David, [1790-1867], 2000: ‘Tapu and conceit in the Marquesas’ [Exploration &
exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and
Thomas Nicholas, In Lamb, Jonathan; Smith, Vanessa; Thomas, Nicholas, Exploration
& exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900, Chicago (IL) and London: Chicago
University Press, 233-43.
1705. Darrach, Brad; David Doubilet, 1995: “Treasured Islands”, Life, (August 1995): 46–53.
1706. Darrah, Allan C., Crain, Jay B., 2000: Trobriand Massim Bibliography, The DEPTH Project:
Department of Anthropology CSUS. Disponível online em url: http://www.csus.edu/anth/
trobriand/depth/trobibed.pdf. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
1707. Das, Shiva Tosh, 1982: India Lakshadweep Islands: from tradition to modernity, New Delhi:
Sagar Publications.
1708. Das, Shiva Tosh, 1982a: The Andaman & Nicobar Islands: a study of habitat, economy &
society, from tradition to modernity, New Delhi: Sagar Publications.
1709. Das, Shiva Tosh, 1986: The Indian islands: a study of habitat, economy, and society, New
Delhi: Cosmo.
1710. Das, Shiva Tosh, 1990: Nomads, a study of the Bay Islanders, Delhi, India: Penman
Publishers.
1711. Dāsa, Hari Hara; Rath, Rabindranath, 1991: The tribals of Andaman and Nicobar Islands,
New Delhi, Ashish Pub. House.
1712. Dāsa, Harihara, Rabindranath Rath, 1988: The land of the coral beds: Andaman and
Nicobar Islands, Berhampur, Orissa, India: Shantilata Das.
1713. Dasgupta, Jayant, 2004: Japanese in Andaman & Nicobar Islands: red sun over black
water, New Delhi: Manas Publications.
1714. Dasgupta, Satadal, 1982: The Garden Transformed Prince Edward Island 1945-1980,
Ragweed Press, Charlottetown, pp. 155-176.
1715. Dash, J Michael, 2003: Anxious Insularity: Identity Politics and Creolization in the Caribbean,
Matatu - Journal for African Culture and Society, A Pepper-Pot of Cultures: Aspects of
Creolization in the Caribbean. Edited by Gordon Collier and Ulrich Fleischmann, pp. 287-
299(13)
1716. Dathorne, OR, 1995: Paradise conquered, in Asian voyages; Two thousand years of
constructing the other, Westport Ct, Bergin and Garvey.
2009
1717. Dauphiné, catalogue rédigé par Joël, Claude Cornet, Nicole Célestin, et al., 2005: Île
d’exil, terre d’asile: les déportations politiques et les expulsions en temps de guerre en
Nouvelle-Calédonie: [exposition, Musée de la ville de Nouméa, mai 2005] / [Nouméa:
Ville de Nouméa.
1718. Davenport, Trevor, 2003: Festung Alderney: the German defences of Alderney, Jersey:
Barnes Publications in association with Alderney Society and Guernsey Branch of the
Channel Islands Occupation Society.
1719. Davenport, William, H., 1986, 1988: Two Kinds of Value in the Eastern Solomon Islands, in
The Social Life of Things, edited by Arjun Appadurai, Cambridge, Cambridge University
Press.
1720. Davenport-Hines, Richard, 1991: The End of Insularity: Essays in Comparative Business
History, Routledge
1721. David, Andrew, 1995: The voyage of HMS Herald to Australia and the South-west Pacific,
1852-1861, under the command of Captain Henry Mangles Denham, Carlton, Vic.:
Miegunyah Press.
1722. David, C.-P., 1997: “La paix par l’intégration? Régionalisme et perspectives de sécurité”,
Études internationales (québec), n°2, p. 221-355
1723. David, G., 1999: Du village à la construction de l’État: l’agrandissement de la territorialité
dans le Pacifique insulaire. In Bonnemaison, J. et alii – Le territoire, lien ou frontière ?,
Paris, L’Harmattan, tome II, p. 235-251.
1724. Davidson, Art, 1993: Endangered Peoples, Sierra Club Books.
1725. Davidson, Basil, 1981: No fist is big enough to hide the sky: building Guinea- Bissau and
Cape Verde, Race & Class, Jan 1981; vol. 23: pp. 43 - 64.
1726. Davidson, J. M., [et al.], 1996: “Oceanic Culture History: Essays in Honour of Roger Green”,
Dunedin, in New Zealand Journal of Archaeology Special Publication.
1727. Davidson, J. M., G. Irwin, B. F. Leach, A. Pawley and D. Brown, Eds., 1996: Oceanic
Culture History: Essays in Honour of Roger Green, Dunedin, New Zealand Journal of
Archaeology Special Publication.
1728. Davies, Elizabeth W., 1995: The legal status of British dependent territories: the West
Indies and North Atlantic region, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press.
1729. Davies, M., 1992: Colonial discourses, representations and the construction of otherness;
case studies from Papua, in Rubinstein, D. (ed), Pacific History; Papers from the 8th PHA
conference, Guam PHA/MARC, pp.49-59.
1730. Davies, M., 1992: Public health and colonialism: the case of German New Guinea, 1884 –
1914, MA thesis. The Australian National University, Canberra.
1731. Davies, N, 1999: The Isles: a history, London: Macmillan.
1732. Davis Sonny B., 2004: Salazar, Timor, and Portuguese Neutrality in WorldWar II, Portuguese
Studies Review, Vol. 13, Nos. 1 and 2, pp. 449-476.
1733. Davis, D. and Goodwin R.C., 1990: “Island Carib Origins: Evidence and non-evidence”,
American Antiquity, vol.55 no.1.
1734. Davis, David Brion, 2006: Inhuman Bondage: The Rise and Fall of Slavery in the New
World, New York: Oxford University Press.
1735. Davis, Derrin, 1993: Sustainable development and natural resources in Pacific Island
countries, Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West Center, Pacific Islands Development Program.
2009
CEHA 97
1736. Davis, edited by Darién J., 2007: Beyond slavery: the multilayered legacy of Africans in
Latin America and the Caribbean, Lanham, Md.: Rowman & Littlefield.
1737. Davis, Karen, 1991: Vivinei Ruruhu pa Hoava / Custom Stories from Hoava, Gizo, Western
Province, Solomon Islands: Western Province Government.
1738. Davis, Mella, 1998: African trickster tales in diaspora: resistance in the Creole-speaking
South Carolina sea islands and Guadeloupe, French West Indies.
1739. Davis, Mella, 1998: islands and Guadeloupe, French West Indies, Thesis (Ph. D.),
Northwestern University.
1740. Davis, Wade, 1985: The Serpent and The Rainbow, New York: Simon and Schuster.
1741. Daws, Gavan, 1980: A Dream of Islands: Voyages of Self-Discovery in the South Seas:
John Williams, Herman Melville, Walter Murray Gibson, Robert Louis Stevenson, Paul
Gauguin, New York.
1742. Daws, Gavan, 1988: Hawaii, the islands of life: the Nature Conservancy of Hawaii, Honolulu:
Published by Signature Publishing.
1743. Daws, Gavan, 1989: Shoal of Time, a History of the Hawaiian Islands, University of Hawai’i
Press.
1744. Daws, Gavan and Fujita, Marty, 1999: Archipelago: the islands of Indonesia: from the
nineteenth-century discoveries of Alfred Russel Wallace to the fate of forests and reefs in
the twenty-first century, Gavan Daws; prologue by Edward O. Wilson; epilogue by John
C. Sawhill, Berkeley: University of California Press.
1745. Day, Alan Edwin, 1997: St. Helena, Ascension, and Tristan da Cunha, Oxford, Santa
Barbara, Calif., Clio Press.
1746. Day, Alan, 1996: A Russian army in Jersey and Guernsey, Army Quarterly & Defence
Journal, 126, 261-66.
1747. Day, Alan, 1997: A Russian army on Guernsey and Jersey (1799), Guernsey Society
Review, 53:2, 40-45.
1748. Daya and C R de Silva, 1992: Sri Lanka since Independence: A Reference Guide to the
Literature, New Delhi, Navrang.
1749. d’Ayala, P. G.; Cavallaro, C.; Moropoulou, A., 1999: Islands 2000. The world of islands:
what development on the eve of the year 2000?, Paris, International Council for Island
Development.
1750. de Albuquerque, K. and McElroy, J., 1992: Caribbean small-island tourism styles and
sustainable strategies, Environmental Management, 16, pp.619-632.
1751. de Albuquerque, K. and McElroy, J., 1999: Tourism and Crime in the Caribbean, Annals of
Tourism Research, 26 (4), pp.968-984.
1752. Decoudras, Pierre-Marie, 2005: Géographie et Recherche aujourd’hui à l’Université de la
Polynésie Française (UPF), Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 230, Avril-Juin. Disponível online
em url: http://com.revues.org/index247.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
1753. Decoudras, Pierre-Marie, 2005a: Polynésie, dynamique contemporaine et enjeux d’avenir,
Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 229, Janvier-Mars. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.
org/index249.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
1754. Decoudras, Pierre-Marie, Danièle Laplace et Frédéric Tesson, 2005: Makatea, atoll oublié
des Tuamotu (Polynésie française): de la friche industrielle au développement local par le
tourisme, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 230, Avril-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.
2009
revues.org/index239.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.

1755. De Deckker, P., 1997: Évolutions statutaires dans le Pacifique insulaire: la manière anglo-
saxonne, Notes et études documentaires, n° 5053-54, p. 82-98.
1756. De Haan; Leo J., 1993: Window on the Netherlands: small islands in the Caribbean, the last
remains of the tropical netherlands: the netherlands Antilles and Aruba, Tesg:Tijdschrift
voor economische en sociale geografie, 1993/05, vol. vol. 84, no 5, p p. 378-385
1757. De la Mare, Walter, 1988: Desert islands and Robinson Crusoe, with decorations by Rex
Whistler, London, Boston, Faber and Faber.
1758. De La Pedraja, René, 2006: ‘The Argentine Air Force versus Britain in the Falkland Islands,
1982’, In Higham, Robin D. S.; Harris, Stephen John (ed.), Why air forces fail: the anatomy
of defeat, Lexington, Ky.: University Press of Kentucky, 227-60
1759. de Silva, Chandra Richard, 1987: Sri Lanka: A History, New Delhi: Vikas
1760. De Val, Seamus (intr.), 2004: ‘’Saoirse - Irisleabhar Oileáin Spice’’ in The Spike Island
journal, 1921, The Past, 25, 86-102.
1761. De Vorsey, Louis, Jr., John Parker, 1985: In the wake of Columbus: islands and controversy,
Detroit, Wayne State University Press.
1762. Del Piano, L., 1987: Gioacchino Volpe e la Corsica ed altri saggi, Istituto di storia moderna
dell’Università di Cagliari, Cagliari.
1763. Deacon, Harriet Jane, 1996: “Madness, race and moral treatment: Robben Island Lunatic
Asylum, Cape Colony, 1846-1890”, in History of Psychiatry, Jun; vol. 7: pp. 287 - 297.
1764. Deakin, R., 2000: Waterlog, London, Vintage.
1765. Dean, Susan, 1982: A complete bibliography of materials pertaining to the United States
Virgin Islands available in the Research Institute for the Study of Man, compiled by Susan
Dean, New York, NY: Metro Center, New York University.
1766. Deane, Paul, 1989: ”Paul Henry on Achill Island: paintings and drawings”, in Éire-Ireland,
24:1, 59-65.
1767. Dearden, P. N. and D. F. Freyne, 1981: Pre-feasibility Study of Potential Areas for Rice
Production, Port Moresby, Dept of Primary Industry.
1768. Debbage, K.G., 1990: Oligopoly and the resort cycle in the Bahamas, Annals of Tourism
Research, 17(5), pp.513-527.
1769. Debes, Hans Jacob, 1993: Problems concerning the earliest settlement in the Faroe
Islands, In Batey, Colleen E.; Jesch, Judith; Morris, Christopher D. (ed.), The viking age
in Caithness, Orkney and the north Atlantic, Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 454-
64.
1770. Debidour, Philippe, 1994: L’île chez Jules Verne, Université Jean Moulin (Lyon). Université
de soutenance.
1771. deBoer, A. J., 1996: “Mirabilopsaltria, a new cicada genus from New Guinea, its taxonomy
and biogeography (Homoptera Tibicinidae)”, in Tropical Zoology, 9(2): 349-379.
1772. Decker, K. and A. Keener, 2001: A Report on the English Based Creole of San Andres and
Providencia Islands, Colombia. SIL International.
1773. Deckker (de), P.; Kuntz, L., 1998: La bataille de la coutume et ses enjeux pour le Pacifique
Sud, Paris, L’Harmattan.
1774. Deckker (de), P.; Tryon, D., 1999: Identités en mutation dans le Pacifique à l’aube du
2009
CEHA 99
troisième millénaire, Bordeaux, CRET, “Îles et archipels”, n°26.

1775. Deena, Seodial F. H., 2009: Situating Caribbean literature and criticism in multicultural and
postcolonial studies, New York: Peter Lang.
1776. Defert, Pierre, 1988: Problématique du tourisme insulaire, Aix-en-Provence: Université de
droit, d’économie et des sciences, Centre des hautes études touristiques.
1777. Defoe, Daniel (1661?-1731), 1997: The life and strange, surprising adventures of Robinson
Crusoe, of York, marines [sic], as related by himself, Tyndale House.
1778. Defranceschi, Ean, 1986: Recherches sur la nature et répartition de la propriété foncière
en Corse de la fin de l’Ancien Régime jusqu’au milieu de XIXe siècle, Ajaccio.
1779. Dehoorne, Olivier (Directeur scientifique) et all..., 2008: Mondes insulaires: Géopolitique,
économie et développement durable, Paris: Ellipses.
1780. Deia International Conference of Prehistory, 2002: World islands in prehistory: international
insular investigations, Deia International Conference of Prehistory (5; 2001; Deia,
Majorque, Espagne), Archaeopress.
1781. Deibert, Michael, 2005: Notes from the Last Testament: The Struggle for Haiti, Seven
Stories Press, New York.
1782. Delépine, Gracie, 1998: L’amiral de Kerguelen et les mythes de son temps, cartographie
par Sylvie Rimbert, Paris, France, L’Harmattan.
1783. Delépine, Gracie; 1995: Les îles australes françaises: Kerguelen, Crozet, Amsterdam,
Saint-Paul, préface de Christian Dors; cartographie par Sylvie Rimbert, Rennes: Ouest-
France.
1784. Deleuze, G., 2004: Desert Islands and Other Texts: 1953-1974, edited by D. Lapoujade.
1785. Deleuze, Gilles, 2002: L’île déserte et autres textes [textes et entretiens 1953-1974], éd.
préparée par David Lapoujade. - Paris: Éd. De Minuit.
1786. Delgado Aguiar, Gerardo[et al.], 2007: Puertos y sistemas portuarios de las islas atlánticas
europeas (Canarias, Azores y Madeira), Santa Cruz de Tenerife; Las Palmas de Gran
Canaria: Idea.
1787. Delgado Perez, M. M., 2003: Lo Real y lo Maravilloso en la ecumene del siglo XIII. Las
islas en el Atar al-Bilad de Al-Qazwini, Spain, Ediciones Alfar of Seville.
1788. Delgado Pérez, María Mercedes, 2005: La Corse: histoire d’une insularité / [textes
sélectionnés et présentés par Jean-Louis Andreani et Yves Marc Ajchenbaum], Paris:
EJL: “Le Monde”.
1789. Delgado, James, 1987: Alcatraz Island: The Story Behind the Scenery, Las Vegas: KC
Publications.
1790. Delmas, Marie-Charlotte, 1995: Les aventures de Robinson Crusoé: parcours éditorial
d’une œuvre littéraire, Issy-les-Moulineaux: Association d’animation de la médiathèque
d’Issy-les-Moulineaux.
1791. Delorme, Robert L., 1988: Latin America, 1983-1987: Social Science Bibliography,
Bibliographies and Indexes in Sociology, no. 14. New York: Greenwood Press.
1792. DeLoughrey, E., 2001: ‘“The Litany of Islands, The Rosary of Archipelagoes”: Caribbean
and Pacific Archipelagraphy’, ARIEL (A Review of International English Literature), 32,
21-52.
1793. DeLoughrey, E., 2004: Island Ecologies and Caribbean Literatures, Tijdschrift voor
Economische en Sociale Geografie, Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 298-310.
2009
1794. DeLoughrey, E.M., 2007: Routes and Roots: Navigating Caribbean and Pacific Island
Literatures, Honolulu HI, University of Hawaii Press.
1795. Demas, W., 1965: The economics of development in small countries with special references
to the Caribbean, Montreal, Mc. Gill University Press.
1796. Demaze, Moïse Tsayem, Jean-Marie Fotsing et Frédéric Huynh, 2002: La déforestation
dans la région de Saint-Georges de l’Oyapock (Guyane française), Les Cahiers d’Outre-
Mer, 218, Avril-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index1096.html.
Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
1797. Demaze, Moïse Tsayem et Sandrine Manusset, 2005: L’agriculture itinérante sur brûlis
en Guyane française: la fin des durabilités écologique et socioculturelle?, Les Cahiers
d’Outre-Mer, 241-242, Janvier-Juin. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/
index3173.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
1798. Demmke, Andreas; Haberkorn, Gerald; Rakaseta, Vilimaina L.; Lepers, Christelle, 1997:
Federated states of Micronesia population profile, Noumea: South Pacific Commission,
1997.
1799. Denfeld, D. Colt, 1997: Hold the Marianas: the Japanese defense of the Mariana Islands,
Shippensburg, PA, White Mane.
1800. Dening, G., 1980: Islands and Beaches: Discourse on a Silent Land, Marquesas 1774-
1880, Melbourne, Melbourne University Press.
1801. Dening G, 1986: Possessing Tahiti, Archaeology, in Oceania, Vol 21, pp.103-18
1802. Dening, G., 1989: History in the Pacific, The Contemporary Pacific, vol. 1(1 & 2), 134-139
1803. Dening G, 1992: Mr Bligh’s bad language, Melbourne, CUP.
1804. Dening G, 1996: Performances, Melbourne, MUP.
1805. Dennon, D. et al, 1997, 2004: The Cambridge History of the Pacific Islands, Cambridge,
Cambridge University Press.
1806. Dennon, D. et al, 2000: A History of Australia, New Zealand and the Pacific Islands – the
formations of identities, Londres, Blackwell.
1807. Denoon, D. & R. Lacey (eds). 1980: Oral tradition in Melanesia, Port Moresby.
1808. Denoon D., ed, 1996: The Cambridge history of the Pacific Islanders, CUP, Melbourne
1809. Denoon, Donald, 1996a: Pacific Island History at the Australian National University: The
Place and the People, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 31, No. 2 (Dec.), pp. 202-214.
1810. Denoon, D., ed, 1997: Emerging from empire; decolonisation in the Pacific, Canberra ANU
1811. Denoon, D.B.H., Brams (S. J.), 1997a: «Fair Division: A New Approach to the Spratly
Islands Controversy», International Negotiation, 2(2), pp. 303-329.
1812. Denoon D., 2000a: Getting under the skin; the Bougainville Copper Agreement and the
creation of the Panguna mine, Melbourne, MUP
1813. Denoon, Donald, Malama Meleisea, Stewart Firth, Jocelyn Linnekin, Karen Nero, 2004:
The Cambridge History of the Pacific Islanders, Cambridge University Press.
1814. Dentinho, Tomaz Ponce e RIVERA, Jorge Croce, 2001: «As Experiências Insulares na
Construção dos Mundos Moderno e Pós-Moderno: A Importância das Tecnologias da
Comunicação», pp. 353-370, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso
e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.I, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/
2009
CEHA 101
Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses, pp. 353-

370.
1815. Dentinho, Tomaz Ponce, Pedro Ferreira e Vasco Silva, Input Output Tables for the
Management of Water Resources in Islands. The Case of Terceira Island, ERSA
conference papers from European Regional Science Association, Disponível online em
url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/ersa/ersaconfs/ersa06/papers/124.pdf. Consulta em 29
de Julho de 2009.
1816. Dentinho, Tomaz Ponce, Vanda Serpa, Paulo Silveira e Joana Goncalves, Land Use
Change and Socio-Economic Evaluation in São Jorge Island (Between 15th and 20th
Century), ERSA conference papers from European Regional Science Association,
Disponível online em url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/ersa/ersaconfs/ersa06/papers/91.
pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
1817. D’Entrecasteaux, B., 2001: Voyage to Australia and the Pacific, 1791-1793, Carlton, Vic,
Melbourne University Press.
1818. Department of Agriculture and Livestock, 1987: “Oil Palm Review”, in Rural Development
Series Handbook No. 13. Port Moresby, Department of Agriculture and Livestock.
1819. Department of Agriculture and Livestock, 1990: “Didimag Newsletter”, Volume 22, 5. Port
Moresby, Department of Agriculture and Livestock. 22.
1820. Department of Agriculture and Livestock, 1993: “Didimag Newsletter”, Volume 25, 8. Port
Moresby, Department of Agriculture and Livestock. 25.
1821. Depraetere, C., 1990-1991: «Le phénomène insulaire à l’échelle du globe: tailles,
hiérarchies et formes des îles océanes », L’Espace géographique, vol 20, n°2, p. 126-134
1822. Depraetere, C., 2007: Locations & Concentrations, in A World of Islands: An Island Studies
Reader, Malta & Canada Agenda Academic & Institute of Island Studies
1823. Depreatere, C., 2008: The Chalenge of Nissology: A Global Outlook on the World
Archipelago Part I: Scene Setting the World Archipelago, in Island Studies Journal, vol.3,
nº1, 3-16.
1824. Desalle, R. & G. Amato, 2004: The expansion of conservation genetics, Nature, (5): 702-
712.
1825. Desantes Fernández, bajo la dirección y tutoría de Blanca, 1993: Inventario de fondos
masónicos de Cataluña y Baleares, realizado por las alumnas Natividad Ortiz Albear,
Mercedes Casado Vázquez; Madrid: Dirección de Archivos Estatales.
1826. Descantes, Christophe, 2005: Integrating archaeology and ethnohistory: the development
of exchange between Yap and Ulithi, Western Caroline Islands, Oxford: Archaeopress.
1827. Descottes, J. 1930: La question de l’insularité du Mont-Saint-Michel: les divagations du
Couesnon et ses irruptions dens les terres avant son endiguement, Imprimeries Oberthur.
1828. Desmond, Jane C., 1999: Staging Tourism: Bodies on Display from Waikiki to Sea World,
Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
1829. Desse, Michel, 2002: Pression anthropique et dégradation des littoraux haïtiens : l’exemple
du golfe de la Gônave, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 219, Juillet-Septembre. Disponível
online em url: http://com.revues.org/index1018.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
1830. Destefani, Laurio H., 1981: Las Malvinas en la época hispana (1600-1811), Buenos Aires:
Corregidor.
1831. Destéfani, Laurio Hedelvio, 1982: Síntesis de la geografía y la historia de las Islas
Malvinas, Georgias y Sandwich del Sur, Buenos Aires, República Argentina: Ministerio
2009
de Educacíon, Centro Nacional de Documentación e Información Educativa,

1832. Destéfani, Laurio Hedelvio, 1982: The Malvinas, the South Georgias and the South
Sandwich Islands: the conflict with Britain, translated from the Spanish by Martha Heath
and Ruth James, Buenos Aires: Edipress.
1833. Develtere, Patrick. 1994: Co-operation and development: With special reference to the
experience of the Commonwealth Caribbean, ACCO.
1834. Devendra, T. and D. Gunasena, 1996: Sri Lanka: The Emerald Island, New Delhi, Roli
Books.
1835. Devine, Thomas Martin, 1989: The emergence of the new élite in the Western Highlands and
Islands, 1800-1860, In Devine, Thomas Martin (ed.), Improvement and Enlightenment:
proceedings of the Scottish Historical Studies Seminar, University of Strathclyde, 1987-
1988 (Edinburgh: Donald), 108-42.
1836. Dévoué, E., 2000: Les Antilles françaises: les activités informelles, Paris, Publisud.
1837. Dewar, Robert E., 1997: Does It Matter That Madagascar Is an Island?, Human Ecology,
Volume 25, Number 3 / September, pp.481-489.
1838. Deyts, Pierre, 2000: Le trésor dans l’île, thème de ficion narrative: Alexandre Dumas «Le
comte de Monte-Cristo», Robert Louis Stevenson «L’île au trésor», Hergé «Le secret de
la licorne» et «Le trésor de Rackham le Rouge », Bordeaux : Bordeaux 3.
1839. Dhillon, Mohindar Singh, 1994: A Titan in the Andamans, Dr. Diwan Singh Kalepani: a
biography, Chandigarh: Angad Publishers.
1840. Dho’gaḍe, Rameśa, S.R. Sharma, Krupa Kulkarni, 1989: Minority language communities-
-islands or icebergs?, Pune: Deccan College.
1841. Di Castri, F. & Balaji, V. eds., 2002: Tourism, Biodiversity and Information, Leiden, Backhuys.
1842. Di Piazza, Anne, 2004: Sailing routes of old Polynesia: the prehistoric discovery, settlement
and abandonment of the Phoenix Islands, Honolulu: Bishop Museum Press.
1843. Diamond, J. M., 1971: “Bird records from West New Britain”, in Condor 73(4): 481-483.
1844. Diamond, Jared and Ernst Mayr, 2001: The Birds of Northern Melanesia: Speciation,
Ecology, and Biogeography, N.Y.:
1845. Diamond, Jared, 2005: Collapse: How Societies Choose to Fail or Succeed, New York:
Viking.
1846. Diamond, Judith, 1995: Solomon Islands, Chicago: Childrens Press.
1847. Dianoux, H. J. de., 1980: La Guinee-Gissau et les iles du Cap-Vert, Afrique Contemporaine,
vol. vol. 19, no 107, pp. 1-16.
1848. Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1993: Uma estratégia de sucesso numa economia periférica: a
casa Bensaúde e os Açores, 1800-1873, Ponta Delgada.
1849. Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1993: “Os empresários micaelenses no século XIX: o exemplo de
sucesso de Elias Bensaúde (1807-1868)”, Análise Social, vol. XXXI, n.sº 136/137.
1850. Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1995: A Fábrica de Tabaco Micaelense: 1866-1995, Ponta Delgada,
Fábrica de Tabaco Micaelense.
1851. Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1995: Escritos sobre a história das mulheres, Ponta Delgada,
Jornal de Cultura.
1852. Dias, Fátima Sequeira Dias, 1997: Diário de Navegação: 50º aniversário do 1º voo
comercial da SATA, Ed. Sata Air Açores.
2009
CEHA 103
1853. Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 1999: Uma estratégia de sucesso numa economia periférica. A
Casa Bensaúde e os Açores, 1800-1870, (1996), Ponta Delgada, Ribeiro e Caravana
Editores, 2.ª ed.
1854. Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 2002: Em defesa dos interesses empresariais desde 1835. Ed.
Câmara do Comércio e Indústria de Ponta Delgada.
1855. Dias, Fátima Sequeira, 2007: Indiferentes à Diferença. Os judeus nos Açores séculos XIX
e XX, Ponta Delgada, CEEplA.
1856. Dias, Fátima Sequeira Dias, 2008: Os Açores na História de Portugal, Lisboa, Livros
Horizonte.
1857. Díaz Lorenzo, Juan Carlos, 1992: Los trasatlánticos de la emigración, 1946-1974: líneas
regulares, Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Viceconsejería de Cultura y Deportes, Gobierno de
Canarias.
1858. Diaz, V., 1994: Simply Chamorro; telling tales of demise and survival in Guam, TCP, 6, 1,
29-58, 1994.
1859. Diaz, Vicente M., 2001: Fight Boys, Pacific Diaspora: Island Peoples, in the United States
and across the Pacific, Paul Spickard, Joanne Rondilla and Deborah Hippolite-Wright,
eds. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, pp. 169-195.
1860. Diaz, Vicente M., 2004: To ‘P’ or Not to ‘P’?”: Marking the Territory Between Pacific Islander
and Asian American Studies, Journal of Asian American Studies, Volume 7, Number 3,
October pp. 183-208
1861. Dibb, P, 1989: One strategic entity; An Australian defence perspective on the South Pacific,
in Hegarty D and Polomka P, eds, The security of Oceania in the 1990s, Canberra, ANU,
pp. 66-70
1862. Dibblin, Jane, 1988: Day of two suns: US nuclear testing and the Pacific Islanders, London:
Virago.
1863. Dick, H.W., 1985: Interisland shipping: progress, problems and prospects, Bulletin of
indonesian economic studies, no 2, pp. 95-114
1864. Dickason, Renée, 2003 : ‘La BBC, imperméable à la propagande? De la Guerre des
Malouines aux Guerres du Moyen-orient’, Vingtième Siècle, 80, 71-82
1865. Dickinson, A. B. 2007: Seal fisheries of the Falkland Islands and dependencies: an
historical review, (Research in Maritime History, 34). St John’s (Nfld): International
Maritime Economic History Association.
1866. Dickinson, A. B., 2001: “Controlled sealing in the Falkland Islands during the twentieth
century”, in International Journal of Maritime History [St John’s, Newfoundland], 13:2,
119-36.
1867. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, (org.), 1989: “Ciências Sociais e o Mar no Brasil”, In:
Coletânea do III Encontro de Ciências Sociais e o Mar no Brasil. São Paulo, NUPAUB-
USP.
1868. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, (org.), 1997a: Ilhas e sociedades insulares, São Paulo:
NUPAUB-USP.
1869. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1995: Povos e Mares: por uma sócio-antropologia
marítima, NUPAUB-USP, São Paulo.
1870. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1996: O mundo insular; simbolismo e imaginário. Tese
de livre docência apresentada na Universidade de S.Paulo.
2009
1871. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1997: Les îles tropicales au Bresil. In: Colloque de
lÚniversité de Corse: L´île laboratoire, 1999, Ajjacio. Annales du Colloque lÍle Laboratoire.
Ajjacio: Editions Allain Piazola, v. 1. p. 332-344.
1872. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1998: Ilhas e Mares, Simbolismo e Imaginário, Ed.
Hucitec, São Paulo.
1873. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 1999: Sociedades Insulares e Biodiversidade.
Disponível online em url: http://www.usp.br/nupaub/Marajo.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho
de 2009.
1874. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 2003: A Ilha de Búzios, São Paulo, (Prefácio, Pósfacio/
Prefácio).
1875. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 2003a: Povos e Mares: Uma Retrospectiva de - Sócio-
Antropologia Marítima, in A pesca construindo sociedades. Disponível em http://www.
usp.br/nupaub/Cap2.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2008.
1876. Diegues, Antonio Carlos Sant’ana, 2006: A Interdisciplinaridade no Estudo do Mar: O
papel das Ciências Sociais, In: 2da Reunión Ciencia Tecnología y Sociedade, 2006,
Buenos Aires. Los Océanos y sus recursos Pesqueros, Buenos Aires: Museo Argentino
de Ciencias Naturales Bernardino Rivadavia, v. 01. p. 3-77.
1877. Díez Torre, Alejandro R.; Mallo, Tomás y Pacheco Fernández, Daniel, coordinadores: 1995:
De la ciencia ilustrada a la ciencia romántica: actas de las II Jornadas sobre España
y las Expediciones Científicas en América y Filipinas, Jornadas sobre “España y las
Expediciones Científicas en América y Filipinas” (2nd: 1993: Ateneo de Madrid), Madrid:
Doce Calles: Ateneo Científico, Literario y Artístico.
1878. Diggines, C. E., 1984: ‘The problems of smaller states’, The Round Table, 295.
1879. Diment, Judith A., 1984-87: Catalogue of the natural history drawings commissioned by
Joseph Banks on the Endeavour voyage 1768-1771, held in the British Museum (Natural
History), 1: Botany: Australia; 2: Botany: Brazil, Java, Madeira, New Zealand, Society
Islands and Tierra del Fuego, 2 vols. (Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History),
Historical series, 11-12).
1880. Dimou, Michel, Industrial development in small islands economies. A comparative study of
Mauritius and La Reunion growth performances, ERSA conference papers from European
Regional Science Association. Disponível online em url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/
ersa/ersaconfs/ersa04/PDF/190.pdf. consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
1881. Din, Gilbert C., 1988: The Canary Islanders of Louisiana, Baton Rouge: Louisiana State
University Press.
1882. Dinnen, S., 2002: ‘Winners and losers: politics and disorder in the Solomon Islands 2000-
2002’, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol.37, No.3, pp.285–98.
1883. Dinnen, Sinclair, 2001: Law and order in a weak state: crime and politics in Papua New
Guinea, Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, School of Hawaiian, Asian, and
Pacific Studies, University of Hawai’i Press.
1884. Dipla, H.; Caflish, L. (pref.).1984: Le regime juridique des Iles dans le droit International de
la mer, Paris: PUF.
1885. Dirrane, Bridget, 1997: A woman of Aran: the life and times of Bridget Dirrane, Dublin,
Blackwater Press, c1997.
1886. Disney, Anthony R., 1995: Historiography of Europeans in Africa and Asia, 1450-1800:
1450-1800, Edição de Variorum.
2009
CEHA 105
1887. Disney, Anthony, 2001: «The Portuguese and Saint Helena», in Portos, Escalas e Ilhéus
no Relacionamento entre o Ocidente e o Oriente, vol. 1, coord. Avelino de Freitas de
Meneses, Lisboa, Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos
Portugueses – Univerdidade dos Açores, pp. 213-238.
1888. Dissanayaka, T. D. S. A., 1994: The Politics of Sri Lanka, Colombo, Sri Lanka: Swastikha
(Private) Ltd..
1889. Dixon, R., 1996: Playing Tarzan; Australian photography and travel writing about Melanesia
1920-1945, Australian Journal of Art, 13, 133-42.
1890. Dixon, R., 2001: Prosthetic Gods; travel, representation and colonial governance, St Lucia,
UQP.
1891. DOAJ, 2009: Directory of Open Access Journals, Disponível online em url: http://www.doaj.
org/. Consulta em 29 de Agosto de 2009.
1892. Doak, D. F. & L. S. Mills, 1994: A useful role for theory in conservation, Ecology, 75(3):615-
626.
1893. Dobson, David, 2004: Transatlantic voyages, 1600-1699, Baltimore, Md., Clearfield.
1894. Dobson, David, 2005: Scots-Scandinavian links in Europe and America, 1550-1850,
Baltimore, Md.: Clearfield.
1895. Dobyns, H.F., 1994: The clash of cultures in Burenhult G, ed, New world and Pacific
Civilizations, Harper, San Francisco, pp.209-70.
1896. Dockrill, Michael Lawrence, 1989: Britain and the first Chinese offshore islands crisis,
1945-1955, In British foreign policy, 1945-1956, eds. Dockrill, M.L.; Young, J.W., 173-96.
1897. Dodds, Klaus, 1998: Enframing the Falklands: identity, landscape, and the 1982 South
Atlantic War’, Environment and Planning D: Society and Space, 16, 733-56.
1898. Dodds, K., 2000: “Putting maps in their place: the demise of the Falkland Islands Dependency
Survey and the mapping of Antarctica, 1945-1962”, in Ecumene, 7:2, 176-210.
1899. Dodds, Klaus; Manóvil, Laura, 2001: “Back to the Future? Implementing the Anglo-
Argentine 14th July 1999 Joint Statement”, in Journal of Latin American Studies, 33,
777-806.
1900. Dodds, Klaus; Manóvil, Laura, 2001a: ‘A shared space? The Falklands/Malvinas and the
geopolitics of Anglo-Argentine relations in the South Atlantic’, Geopolitics, 6, 103-30.
1901. Dodds, Klaus, 2002: Pink ice: Britain and the South Atlantic empire (International library of
human geography, 6), London: I.B. Tauris.
1902. Dodds, Klaus, 2002a: ‘Screening Antarctica: Britain, the Falkland Islands Dependencies
Survey, and Scott of the Antarctic (1948)’. Polar Record, 204, 1-10
1903. Dodds, Klaus, 2003: ‘God save the Falklands: postcolonial geographies of the Falklands/
Malvinas’. In Edmond, Rod; Smith, Vanessa (ed.), Islands in history and representation,
London: Routledge, 177-89.
1904. Dodds, Klaus, 2005: ‘Contesting war: British media reporting and the 1982 South
Atlantic War’. In Connelly, Mark; Welch, David (ed.), War and the media: reportage and
propaganda, 1900-2003, London: I.B. Tauris, 218-35
1905. Dodge, Steve, 1983: Abaco: The History of an Out Island and its Cays, North Miami: Tropic
Isle Publications.
1906. Dodgshon, R. A., 1998: From chiefs to landlord: social and economic change in the Western
Highlands and Islands, c1493-1820, Edinburgh, Edinburgh University Press.
2009
1907. Dodgshon, Robert A., 1992: Farming practice in the western Highlands and Islands before
crofting: a study in cultural inertia or opportunity costs?, Rural History, 3, 173-89.
1908. Dodgshon, Robert A., 1993: Strategies of farming in the western Highlands and Islands
of Scotland prior to crofting and the clearances, Economic History Review, 2nd ser., 46,
679-701.
1909. Dodgshon, Robert A., 2004: “Coping with Risk: Subsistence Crises in the Scottish Highlands
and Islands, 1600-1800” in Rural History, 15:1, 1-26.
1910. Dodgshon, Robert A., 2005: “The Little Ice Age in the Scottish Highlands and Islands:
Documenting its Human Impact” in Scottish Geographical Journal, 121:4, 321-37.
1911. Dodille, Norbert, Oceán indien, Disponível online em url: http://www.culturesfrance.com/
adpf-publi/folio/mondes_francophones/10.pdf. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
1912. Dodille, Norbert, 2009: Idees et Representations Coloniales dans L’ocean Indien, Presses
de l’Université de Paris-Sorbonne (PUPS).
1913. Dods, Clement (ed.), 1999: Cyprus: The Need for New Perspectives, The Eothen Press.
1914. Dodson, Jualynne E., in collaboration with José Millet Batista, 2008: Sacred spaces and
religious traditions in Oriente Cuba, Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press.
1915. Dolley, Jacques, 1987: L’Indonesie: 13 000 Iles et cinq principles, croissance des jeunes
nations, no 290, pp. 19-26
1916. Dollfus, O., 1995: “L’émergence des régions planétaires”, Sciences Humaines, hors série,
n° 8, pp. 24-30.
1917. Dolman, (A.), 1985: «Paradise Lost? The Past Performance and Future Prospects of Small
Island Developing Countries», in DOMMEN (E.), HEIN (P.) (eds), States, Microstates and
Islands, Londres, Croom Helm, pp. 40-69.
1918. Domashnev, A. D, T.N. Drozdova, 1985: Severnoe chudo--Solove t ska i a krepost, Moskva:
Stroĭizdat.
1919. Dommen, E., (ed.). 1980: Islands, Oxford; New York; Paris: Pergamon.
1920. Dommen, (E.), 1985: «What is a Microstate?», in Dommen (E.), Hein (P.)(eds), States,
Microstates and Islands, Londres, Croom Helm, pp. 1-15.
1921. Dommen, E. and Hein, I. (eds), 1985: States, Microstates and Islands, Kent: Croom Helm
Ltd.
1922. Donahue, David M., 2002: Rhode Island’s Last Holdout: Tenure and Married Women
Teachers at the Brink of the Women’s Movement, History of Education Quarterly, Vol. 42,
No. 1 (Spring), pp. 50-74
1923. Donaldson, Roderick N., 1981: A guide to the laws of the Cayman Islands Hialeah, Fla.:
Peninsular Productions.
1924. Donatos, G. and Zairis, P., 1991: Seasonality of foreign tourism in the Greek island of
Crete, Annals of Tourism Research, 18(3), pp. 515-519.
1925. Donawerth, Jane L.; Kolmerten, Carol A., edited by, 1994: Lee Cullen Khanna -- Islands
of Felicity: women seeing utopia in seventeenth-century France, in Utopian and science
fiction by women: worlds of difference, foreword by Susan Gubar, Syracuse, N.Y.:
Syracuse University Press.
1926. Donegan, compiled and edited by Terence, 1982: The Companies Ordinance, 1981, for
and on behalf of the Government of the Turks and Caicos Islands, [S.l.]: Govt. of the
Turks and Caicos Islands.
2009
CEHA 107
1927. Donkin, R. A., 1997: Between East and West: The Moluccas and the Traffic in Spices Up
to the Arrival of Europeans, American Philosophical Society.
1928. Donnell, Alison, 2006: Twentieth-Century Caribbean Literature: Critical Moments in
Anglophone Literary History, London: Routledge.
1929. Donoghue, Eddie, 2002: Black women/white men: the sexual exploitation of female slaves
in the Danish West Indies, Trenton, NJ: Africa World Press,.
1930. Donovan, Kenneth, 1985: Cape Breton at 200: historical essays in honour of the island’s
bicentennial, 1785-1985, Sydney, N.S., University College of Cape Breton Press.
1931. Dookhan, Isaac, 1994: A History of the Virgin Islands of the United States, University of
the West Indies Press.
1932. Doran, Adelaide LeMert, 1980: Pieces of eight Channel Islands: a bibliographical guide
and source book, Glendale, Calif.: A.H. Clark Co..
1933. Doran, S., 2001: Toeing the line; Australia’s abandonment of traditional West New Guinea
policy, The journal of Pacific History, 36, 1, pp.5-18
1934. Dornan, Brian, 2000: Mayo’s lost islands: the Inishkeas, Dublin: Four Courts.
1935. Dorney, S., 1990: Papua New Guinea: people, politics and history since 1975, Milsons
Point, NSW: Random House Australia.
1936. Dorney, S., 1995: Reporting from Port Moresby, Lal, B.V. and Nelson, H., eds, Lines across
the sea; colonial inheritance in the post-colonial Pacific, Brisbane, PHA, pp225-29
1937. Dorrance, J.C., 1989: The Pacific Islands and U.S. security interests. A new era poses new
challenges, Asian survey, vol. vol. 29, no 7, pp. 698-715
1938. Dorrance, John C., 1992: The United States and the Pacific Islands, foreword by William
J. Crowe, Jr., Westport, Conn.: Praeger.
1939. Dorras, Jo, Peter Walker, 1998: The old stories: a play about the history of Vanuatu, [Port
Vila, Vanuatu: Wan Smolbag Theatre.
1940. D’Orso, Michael, 2002: Plundering paradise: the hand of man on the Galápagos islands,
New York: HarperCollins Publishers.
1941. Doster Edited by Stephen, 2008: Voices from St. Simons: personal narratives of an island’s
past, John F. Blair, Publisher
1942. Douaire-Marsaudon, F. & C. Zheng, 2005: Dynamiques identitaires en Asie et dans le
Pacifique, vol. 1: Enjeux sociaux, économiques et politiques, vol. 2: Pratiques symboliques
en transition, Aix-en-Provence: Publications de l’Université de Provence.
1943. Douaire-Marsaudon, F.; Tcherkézoff, S., 1997: Le Pacifique Sud aujourd’hui: identités et
transformations culturelles, Paris, CNRS éditions.
1944. Douaire-Marsaudon, Françoise, 1998: Les premiers fruits: parenté, identité sexuelle et
pouvoirs en Polynésie occidentale (Tonga, Wallis et Futuna), Paris, CNRS editions,
Editions de la Maison des sciences de l’homme.
1945. Dougherty, Michael, 1992: To Steal a Kingdom, Island Style Press.
1946. Douglas, B., 1999: Art as ethno-historical text; science, representation and indigenous
presence in 18th and 19th century oceanic voyaging literature, in Thomas, N. and Losche
D, 1999, eds, Double vision; art histories and colonial histories in the Pacific, CUP,
Melbourne pp.65-102
1947. Douglas, N., 1996: The allocentrics, Lismore, Southern Cross University Press
2009
1948. Douglas, N., 1997: Applying the life cycle model to Melanesia, Annals of Tourism Research,
24(1), pp.1-22.
1949. Douglas, Ngaire, 1996: They came for savages: 100 years of tourism in Melanesia,
[Lismore, N.S.W.]: Southern Cross University Press.
1950. Doumanis, Nicholas, Pappas, Nicholas G., 1997: Grand History in Small Places: Social
Protest on Castellorizo (1934), Journal of Modern Greek Studies, Volume 15, Number 1,
May pp. 103-123
1951. Doumenge, Jean-Pierre, 1980: Les mélanésiens et leur espace en Nouvelle-Calédonie:
thèse de doctorat d’état, Thèse de doctorat: Géographie: Bordeaux 3, 5 vols.
1952. Doumenge, François, 1983: Aspects de la viabilite des petits pays insulaires: etude
descriptive, Geneve: Cnuced.
1953. Doumenge, François, 1983a: Unite et diversite des caracteres naturels des iles tropicales,
(conference du 8eme colloque de la sepanrit, bordeaux 2-3 novembre 1981), bulletin de
liaison - sepanrit, no 12, pp. 11-18
1954. Doumenge, François, 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et
exemples, In Unite et diversite des caracteres naturels des iles tropicales, Universite de
Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France; CEGET; CRET, pp. 9-24.
1955. Doumenge, J.P., 1984a: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples,
In Enjeu geopolitique et interet scientifique des espaces insulaires, Universite de Bordeaux
3 – Talence, France; CEGET; CRET, pp. 1-6.
1956. Doumenge, J.P., 1984b: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples,
In Controle de l’espace et utilisation du sol en Oceanie insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux
3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, pp. 135-140.
1957. Doumenge, François, 1984c: Unité et diversité des caractères naturels des îles tropicales».
In Nature et hommes dans les îles tropicales, Bordeaux: CRET, coll. « îles et archipels,
nº 3, pp. 9-24.
1958. Doumenge, J. P., 1985: Les mélanésiens et la société pluriethnique en Nouvelle-Calédonie,
In: Ces îles ou l’on parle français, Herodote, no 37-38, pp. 98-128.
1959. Doumenge, J. P., E. Métais, A. Saussol, 1986: La Nouvelle Calédonie: occupation de
l’espace et peuplement, Talence: Centre de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux.
1960. Doumenge, J. P., 1986: La nouvelle-caledonie, a la recherche de son equilibre economique
et de son unite sociale, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 39, no 155, p p. 221-248
1961. Doumenge, Jean-Pierre, Villenave, D., Chapuis, Odile.,1988: Agriculture, food and nutrition
in four South Pacific archipelagos: New Caledonia, Vanuatu, French Polynesia, Wallis
and Futuna, Bogor (Indonésie) : CGPRT
1962. Doumenge, J. P., 1988: Demographic, economic, socio-cultural and political facts
nowadays in the French Pacific Territories, GeoJournal, Vol. 16, No. 2, Mar, 143-56
pp. Dordrecht, Netherlands. Disponível online em url : http://www.springerlink.com/
content/028u1u2r6826k134/fulltext.pdf?page=1. consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009.
1963. Doumenge, François, 1985: Les îles et les micro-Etats insulaires, In: Ces îles où l’on parle
français, Herodote, no 37-38, pp. 297-327.
1964. Doumenge, François, Eliane Métais, Alain Saussol, 1986: La Nouvelle-Calédonie.
Occupation de l’espace et peuplement, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
1965. Doumenge, J. P., et all…, 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Amenagements
2009
CEHA 109
touristiques et bouleversements ecologiques dans les petites iles: l’exemple de Saint-

Martin, Bordeaux: Cret, pp. 16-34.
1966. Doumenge, J. P., 1987: Les Iles Seychelles, Annales de Geographie, no 533, pp. 78-102
1967. Doumenge, J. P., 1987: Realites et perspectives geopolitiques de l’oceanie insulaire,
bulletin de l’association de geographes Francais, vol. vol. 64, no 2, pp. 119-138
1968. Doumenge, J. P.; Perrin, M.F. ; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou, ... ; Huetz De Lemps, C. ;
Poirier, J. ; Clapier Valladon, S., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Essai
sur une problematique de la mythologie et de la psychologie insulaires, BORDEAUX:
CRET, pp. 44-56.
1969. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C., 1987: Iles
tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le geographe et les iles, Universite de Bordeaux
3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 1-6.
1970. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Doumenge,
F., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Quelques contraintes du milieu
insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 8-15.
1971. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Monnier,
Y., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Amenagements touristiques et
bouleversements ecologiques dans les petites iles: l’exemple de Saint-Martin, Universite
de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 16-34.
1972. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C., 1987:
Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’insularite comme dimension du fait social,
Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 37-43.
1973. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Poirier,
J.; Clapier Valladon, S., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Essai sur une
problematique de la mythologie et de la psychologie insulaires, Universite de Bordeaux
3 – Talence, France, CRET p. 44-56.
1974. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Fleischmann,
U., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Insularite et creolisation: approches
theoriques, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET pp. 57-66.
1975. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Bonniol,
J.L., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Micro-insularite et particularisme:
approche comparee a partir de cas antillais et seychellois, Universite de Bordeaux 3 –
Talence, France, CRET, pp. 67-86.
1976. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Jardel,
J.P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le processus de creolisation et
leur approche en milieu insulaire (Antilles-Mascareignes), Universite de Bordeaux 3 –
1977. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lesourd, M.;
Reaud Thomas, G., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le fait creole dans
la formation de l’identite nationale en Republique du Cap Vert, Universite de Bordeaux
1978. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Gerbeau,
H.;1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Approche historique du fait creole a la
Reunion, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 125-156.
1979. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Saussol,
A., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Peut-on parler de creolite en
2009
Nouvelle-Caledonie? Reflexions autour d’une identite insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux

1980. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Giacottino,
J.C.; 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Problematique et perspectives du
developpement des petits pays insulaires tropicaux de moins de 1 million d’habitants,
1981. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lowenthal,
D., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In A propos du developpement insulaire:
besoins, incertitudes, resistances, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET,
pp. 193-207.
1982. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Dommen,
E.; Lebale, N., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Caracteristiques des
exportations de services des pays insulaires, BORDEAUX Universite de Bordeaux 3 –
E., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme», In Les zones franches industrielles
d’exportation (ZFIE) dans les iles, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET,
pp. 229-239.
1984. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lefevre, D.,
1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Les structures spatiales reunionnaises,
1985. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Rochoux,
J.Y., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Du sucre aux services ou du
developpement economique a La Reunion, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France,
CRET, pp. 261-272.
1986. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Squarzoni,
R., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’emploi a La Reunion: quelques
reflexions et propositions, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET,. pp. 273-
294.
1987. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Berron,
H., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Les petites activites dans le
developpement des Hauts de La Reunion: le cas des chambres d’hotes, Universite de
Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 295-303.
1988. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Saddul,
P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Disparites dans le developpement
regional de l’ile Maurice: une approche geographique et economique, Universite de
Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, pp. 305-318.
1989. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; 1987: Iles
tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Tentatives de diversification d’une economie de
plantation: le cas de l’ile Maurice, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET,
pp. 319-330.
1990. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; 1987:
Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Mutations economiques et saturation du tissu
urbain dans l’ile de Mahe (Seychelles), Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France,
CRET, pp. 351-360.
tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In De la primaute des plantations a l’economie de
2009
CEHA 111
services: l’exemple des Hawaii, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p.

360-398.
1992. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Miras,
C. De., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’economie martiniquaise:
developpement sans croissance, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p.
399-420.
1993. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Verin,
P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’archipel ecartele: problemes de
la gestion de l’etat multi-insulaire des Comores, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence,
France, CRET, p. 436-442.
1994. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Houbert,
J., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme” In L’Independance de Maurice et ses
dependances, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 443-457.
1995. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Castel, A.
Du., Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Insularisme et desordre politique: autour
du cas Sri Lanka, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 459-467.
1996. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; De Deckker,
P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Statut constitutionnel insulaire et
espace autonome dans le Pacifique, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET,
p. 469-483.
1997. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Huetz de
Lemps, A., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Rapport de synthese: iles,
insularite, «insularisme, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 487-499.
1998. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Roca, P.J.,
1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Haiti en quete d’avenir, Universite de
Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 421-434.
1999. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lassere,
G., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le geographe et les iles, Universite
de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET.
F., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Quelques contraintes du milieu
insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET.
F., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In L’insularite comme dimension du fait
social, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET.
2002. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Poirier,
J.; Clapier Valladon, S., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Essai sur une
problematique de la mythologie et de la psychologie insulaires, Universite de Bordeaux
3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 44-56.
2003. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Fleischmann,
U., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Insularite et creolisation: approches
theoriques, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET.
2004. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Bonniol,
J.L., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Micro-insularite et particularisme:
approche comparee a partir de cas antillais et seychellois, Universite de Bordeaux 3 –
Talence, France, CRET.
2009
2005. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Jardel,
J.P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le processus de creolisation et
leur approche en milieu insulaire (Antilles-Mascareignes), Universite de Bordeaux 3 –
Talence, France, CRET, p. 87-106.
2006. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lesourd, M.;
Reaud Thomas, G., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Le fait creole dans
la formation de l’identite nationale en Republique du Cap Vert, Universite de Bordeaux
2007. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Gerbeau,
H., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Approche historique du fait creole a
la Reunion, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 125-156.
2008. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Saussol,
A., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Peut-on parler de creolite en
Nouvelle-Caledonie? Reflexions autour d’une identite insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux
2009. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Giacottino,
J.C., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Problematique et perspectives du
developpement des petits pays insulaires tropicaux de moins de 1 million d’habitants,
Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 167-191.
2010. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lowenthal,
D., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In A propos du developpement insulaire:
besoins, incertitudes, resistances, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET,
p. 193-207.
E.; Lebale, N., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Caracteristiques des
exportations de services des pays insulaires, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France,
CRET, p. 209-228.
E., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Les zones franches industrielles
d’exportation (ZFIE) dans les iles, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET,
p. 229-239.
2013. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Lefevre, D.,
1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Les structures spatiales reunionnaises,
Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 241-260.
2014. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Rochoux,
J.Y., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Du sucre aux services ou du
developpement economique a La Reunion, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France,
CRET, p. 261-272.
2015. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Squarzoni,
R., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In L’emploi a La Reunion: quelques
reflexions et propositions, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 273-
294.
2016. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Berron,
H., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Les petites activites dans le
developpement des Hauts de La Reunion: le cas des chambres d’hotes, Universite de
Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 295-303
2017. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Saddul,
2009
CEHA 113
P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Disparites dans le developpement

regional de l’ile Maurice: une approche geographique et economique, Universite de
2018. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Singaravelou,
1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Tentatives de diversification d’une
economie de plantation: le cas de l’ile Maurice, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence,
2019. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Hein, C.,
1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Les zones franches industrielles dans
les etats insulaires: le cas de Maurice, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France,
CRET, p. 331-350.
2020. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; 1987:
Iles tropicales: insularite, “insularisme”, In Mutations economiques et saturation du tissu
urbain dans l’ile de Mahe (Seychelles), Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France,
CRET, p. 351-360.
tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», l’exemple des Hawaii, Universite de Bordeaux 3 –
Talence, France, CRET, p. 360-398.
2022. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Miras,
C.De., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In L’economie martiniquaise:
developpement sans croissance, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p.
399-420.
2023. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Verin,
P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In L’archipel ecartele: problemes de
la gestion de l’etat multi-insulaire des Comores, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence,
2024. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Houbert,
J., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In L’Independance de Maurice et ses
dependances, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 443-457.
2025. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Castel, A.
Du. 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite,»insularisme», In Insularisme et desordre politique:
autour du cas Sri Lanka, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 459-467.
2026. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; De Deckker,
P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite,»insularisme», In Statut constitutionnel insulaire et
espace autonome dans le Pacifique, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET,
p. 469-483.
2027. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Huetz de
Lemps, A., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite,»insularisme», In Rapport de synthese: iles,
insularite, “insularisme”, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p. 487-499.
2028. Doumenge, J.P.; Perrin, M.F.; Benoist, J.P.; Singaravelou; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Roca, P.J.,
1987: Iles tropicales: insularite,»insularisme», In Haiti en quete d’avenir, Universite de
2029. Doumenge, François (1926-2008), Huetz de lemps, A.; Chapuis, O., 1988: Contribution
française à la connaissance géographique des mers du Sud: bibliographie des principaux
travaux scientifiques français traitant des océans Pacifique et Indien, des mers Australes
et de leurs îles = French contribution to the scientific research on the Southern seas :
bibliography of the main scientific French works on the tropical Pacific ocean, Indian
2009
ocean, Austral ocean and their islands, Centre de recherches sur les espaces tropicaux:
Centre d’études de géographie tropicale.
2030. Doumenge, François, 1988: Critères de base pour une estimation de viabilité des petits
états insulaires, In CEGET-CNRS, Centre d’Etudes de Géographie Tropicale (Talence);
Comité Franco-Japonais de Géographie (Paris); CRET, Centre de Recherches sur les
Espaces Tropicaux, Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3, Géographie et écologie
des milieux tropicaux: Problèmes d’analyse, et d’aménagement et de développement:
IVe Colloque Franco-Japonais de Géographie, Talence, 1-4 Octobre 1985, Talence:
CEGET-CNRS.
2031. Doumenge, François, 1989: “Les îles tropicales: un monde de priviligiés ou un monde
de laissés-pour-compte ?”, in Pauvreté et développement dans les pays tropicaux,
Hommage à Guy Lasserre. Bordeaux, CEGET, p. 73-84.
2032. Doumenge, François, 1989-a: “Basic criteria for estimating the viability of small island
states” in L. (ed.) et alii., The economic development of small countries. Problems,
strategies and policies, Delft, Eburon Publishers, p. 39-56.
2033. Doumenge, François, Yves Monnier, 1989-b: Les Antilles Francaises, Presses universitaires
de France.
2034. Doumenge, François, 1990: “La dynamique géopolitique du Pacifique Sud”, Les Cahiers
d’foutremer, nº170, p. 113-188.
2035. Doumenge, François, Peter-John Perry, Alain Huetz de Lemps, 1990: Géopolitique du
Pacifique Sud, Tiré à part des Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, n° 170/avr.-juin 1990, Iles et archipels
n° 11, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
2036. Doumenge François, 1991: Le Pacifique, L’océan, ses rivages et ses îles/The Pacific.
The Ocean, its Shores and Islands. Colloque organisé par la Fondation Singer-Polignac
«Trente ans de recherche scientifique française dans le Pacifique (1960-1990)», 6 nov.
1990, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
2037. Doumenge, J. P., 1991: “Rapport de synthèse. Traits de permanence et diversité du devenir
des pays insulaires», In UNESCO (ed), Culture des îles et développement. Islands’
culture and development. Etudes prospectives/Future-oriented studies, Paris, UNESCO
& Fondation pour la coopération culturelle ACP-CEE/Foundation for ACP-EEC Cultural
Cooperation, pp. 223-236.
2038. Doumenge, J. P., 1995: L’urbanisation a Guam, In: Iles tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer,
vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 347-380.
2039. Doumenge, J. P., Frederic Angleviel, Michel Charleux, William G. Coppell ed., 1991 : Le
Pacifique Sud: bibliographie des theses et memoires recents = The South Pacific: a
bibliography of the recent theses and dissertations, Talence [France]: Centre de recherche
sur les espaces tropicaux-CRET, Institut de geographie, Universite de Bordeaux III:
Centre d’etudes de geographie tropicale-CEGET-CNRS.
2040. Dovert, Stéphane, 2001: “Timor Loro Sa’e, un nouvel État à l’heure du village global ? :
réflexions sur nos mythes et nos modes” , in Lusotopie, pp. 327-345.
2041. Dowdeswell, J. A.; Hambrey, Michael, 2002: Islands of the Artic, New York: Cambridge
University Press.
2042. Downs, I., 1980: The Australian Trusteeship; Papua New Guinea 1945-75, Canberra,
AGPS.
2043. Doyle, Neville, 1991: From Sea-eagle to Flamingo: Channel Island airlines, 1923-1939,
2009
CEHA 115
Upton-upon-Severn: Self Publishing Association.

2044. DRAC, 1986: Actas do I Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, 2 vols, Funchal,
Secretaria Regional do Turismo Cultura e Emigração, Direcção Regional dos Assuntos
Culturais.
2045. Drakakis-Smith, D.; Lockhart, D.; Schemberi, J. (eds)., 1998: The development process in
small islands states, Londres, Routledge.
2046. Drakard, Jane, 1999: A Kingdom of Words: Language and Power in Sumatra, Oxford
University Press.
2047. Drake, D. R.; Mulder C.P.H.; Towns D.R.; Daugherty C.H., 2002: The biology of insularity:
an introduction, Journal of Biogeography, Volume 29, Numbers 5-6, May/June, pp. 563-
569(7).
2048. Dransfield, J.; Beentje, H., 1995: The Palms of Madagascar, Kew: Royal Botanical Gardens
and International Palm Society.
2049. Driessen, H. A. H., 1982: “Outriggerless canoes and glorious beings: pre-contact prophecies
in the Society Islands”, in Journal of Pacific History, 17:1, 3-28.
2050. Driver, Marjory, 1989: Fray Juan Pobre in the Marianas, 1602, Mangilao, Guam: Micronesian
Area Research Center, University of Guam.
2051. Drouin, Jean-Marc, 1991: “Quelques figures de l’insularité - Réflexions sur la biogéographie”,
Maîtres et protecteurs de la nature, Alain Roger et François Guéry dir., Paris, Champ
Vallon, 338, pp. 197-216.
2052. Drower, G. M. F., 1992: Britain’s dependent territories: a fistful of islands, Aldershot, Hants,
England; Brookfield, Vt.: Dartmouth.
2053. Druett, Joan, 2007: Island of the lost: shipwrecked at the edge of the world, Chapel Hill,
N.C.: Algonquin Books of Chapel Hill.
2054. DT Hughes and SK Laughlin, 1982: Key elements in the evolving political culture of the
FSM, PS, 6, 1, 71-84, 1982.
2055. Du Puy, D.; [et al.], 1999: The Orchids of Madagascar, Kew: Royal Botanical Gardens.
2056. Dubesset, Eric., 1991: La Caraibe precolombienne: le cas de Cuba, Santo Domingo et
Puerto Rico, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3, ufr d’Espagnol.
2057. Dubois, Laurent, and John D. Garrigus, 2006: Slave revolution in the Caribbean, 1789-
1804: a brief history with documents, Boston, MA; New York, NY: Palgrave.
2058. Dubon, Ferran Dídac Lluch I, 1997: Geografia de les Illes Balears, presentació, Gaspar
Valero i Martí, pròleg, Joana Maria Petrus Bey, Lluch i Dubon, Ferran Dídac.
2059. Dudley, Michael Kioni and Keoni Kealoha Agard, 1993: Call for Hawaiian Sovereignty, Na
Kane O Ka Malo Press.
2060. Duenas Jollard, P., 2001: Le traitement de l’insularité en Europe, Palma de Mallorca,
Publications du Gouvernement des Baleares
2061. Duféal, Marina, 2005: L’inscription spatiale de l’insularité: la Corse séparée de la France-
sur le web, Annales de géographie, septembre-octobre, vol. 114, no 645, p. 496-509
2062. Duhaut-Cilly, Auguste, 1999: Voyage autour du monde, principalement à la Californie et
aux îles Sandwich, pendant les années 1826, 1827, 1828, et 1829. A voyage to California,
the Sandwich Islands & around the world in the years, 1826-1829; translated and edited
by August Frugé and Neal Harlow, Berkeley: University of California Press.
2009
2063. Dumond, Don E., 2001: Archaeology in the Aleut zone of Alaska: some recent research,
Dept. of Anthropology and Museum of Natural History, University of Oregon.
2064. Dumotier-Sigwalt, E., 2002: ‘Le Grand insulaire et pilotage d’André Thevet: une oeuvre
iconographique du XVIe siècle, magistrale et “naufragée”,’ in M. Pelletier, ed., Les îles,
du mythe à la réalité, Paris, CTHS, pp. 101-121.
2065. Dun, G. S., 1954: “Annual report of the Senior Entomologist, Department of Agriculture,
Stock and Fisheries 1952-1953.” In New Guinea Agricultural Gazette 8(3): 18-27, DTCA
Provincial Rural Transport Study - WNB Report. TP O’Sullivan and Partners, Gitec
Consult GMBH, and Gardno and Devies PNG Pty Ltd. Port Moresby, DTCA.
2066. Dun, James Alexander 2005: “What Avenues of Commerce, Will You, Americans, Not
Explore!”: Commercial Philadelphia’s Vantage onto the Early Haitian Revolution, William
And Mary Quarterly, Vol 62; Numb 3, pp 473-504.
2067. Dunlop, P., 1982: Samoan Parents and the Primary School, New Zealand Education
Department.
2068. Dunlop, P., 1983: Às Others See Us’, National Education, New Zealand Education Institute,
November
2069. Dunmore, S., 1982: “The castle in the Isle of Lundy”, in Proceedings of the Devon
Archaeological Society, 40, 153-62, Publisher: Devon Archaeological Society.
2070. Dunn, Charles. W., 1991: Highland Settler A Portrait of the Scottish Gael, in Cape Breton
and Eastern Nova Scotia. Breton Books Wreck Cove, Cape Breton Island.
2071. Dunn, Michael, Angela Terrill, Ger Reesink, Robert A. Foley, Stephen C. Levinson, 2005:
“Structural Phylogenetics and the Reconstruction of Ancient Language History”, Science,
309: 2072–2075.
2072. Dunn, Richard S., 2000: “The English sugar islands and the founding of South Carolina”,
in South Carolina Historical Magazine, 101:2, 142-54.
2073. Dupon, J.-F. (dir.), 1993: Atlas de la Polynésie française, Paris, ORSTOM.
2074. Dupon, Jean Francois, 1985: “Les Seychelles du rêve à la réalité”, In: Ces îles où l’on parle
français, Hérodote, (37-38), p. 237-248.
2075. Dupuy, Alex, 1982: Class formation and underdevelopment in nineteenth-century Haiti,
Race & Class, Jan; vol. 24: pp. 17 - 31.
2076. Duquette, M., Van Eeuwen, D., 2005: La périphéricité: du concept au lobby politique,
L’Espace Politique, 2 | 2007-2
2077. Durán Bernal, Carlos Andrés, 2007: ¿Es nuestra isla para dos?: conflicto por el desarrollo
y la conservación en Islas del Rosario, Cartagena, Bogotá D.C., Colombia: Universidad
de Los Andes, Facultad de Ciencias Sociales-Ceso, Departamento de Antropología.
2078. Durand, Frédéric, 2001: “Timor Loro Sa’e: la déstructuration d’un territoire”, in Lusotopie,
pp.215- 232.
2079. Durand, Frédéric, 2004: Catholicisme et protestantisme dans l’île de Timor: 1556-2003:
Construction d’une identité chrétienne et engagement politique contemporain, Toulouse;
Bangkok: Arkuiris; IRASEC,
2080. Durand, Frédéric et Romain Pirard, 2008: Quarante ans de politiques forestières en
Indonésie, 1967-2007: la tentation de la capture par les élites, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer,
244, Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index5384.html. Consulta em 20 de
Agosto de 2009.
2009
CEHA 117
2081. Durand, Olivier, 2003: La lingua còrsa, Paideia Editrice, Brescia.

2082. Dureau, Christine, 1998: Decreed affinities: nationhood and the Western Solomon Islands,
Journal of Pacific History, 33:2, 197-220.
2083. Dureau, Christine, 1998: From sisters to wives: changing contexts of maternity on Simbo,
western Solomon Islands’, In Ram, Kalpana; Jolly, Margaret Anne (ed.), Maternities and
modernities: colonial and postcolonial experiences in Asia and the Pacific, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 239-74.
2084. Duriez, C., 1987: Les termes du régionalisme dans l’évolution historique du Pacifique Sud
de 1945 à 1985, Paris, Université de Paris VII, mémoire de DEA.
2085. Duriez-Toutain, Caroline, 1996: Présence et perceptions maristes à Tonga, 1840-1900,
Iles et archipels n° 22, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
2086. Durix, Jean-Pierre, 1998: Literary archipelagos, Dijon, Editions universitaires de Dijon.
2087. Durrell, G., 1994: Aye-Aye and I: Rescue Expedition in Madagascar, Vifiko Africa:
Publication Tag for Madagascar.
2088. d’Urville, Jules-Sébastien-César Dumont (dir.), 1988: Voyage pittoresque autour du monde:
îles Marquises, île de Pâques, Tuamotu, îles de la Société, îles Australes, Papeete.
2089. Dutra, Francis A., 2001: «The Order of Santiago and the Portuguese Atlantic Islands,
1492-1777», pp. 257-277, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso
e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/
2090. Dutson, G., 1999: “Notes on the Melanesian megapode Megapodius eremita and Vanuatu
megapode Megapodius layardi,” in Megapode Newsletter, 13(1): 5.
2091. Dutton, T., Ed. 1992: Culture change, language change: case studies from Melanesia,
Canberra, Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian
National University.
2092. Duursmaa, J. C., 1996: Self determination, statehood and international relations of micro
states: the cases of Liechtenstein, San Marino, Monaco, Andorra and the Vatican city,
Leyden: Leyden University.
2093. Duvat, Virginie, 2006: Mondialisation touristique et environnement dans les petites îles
tropicales, Cahiers (Les) d’Outre-mer, vol. 59, no 236, p. 513-539. Disponível online em
url: http://com.revues.org/index616.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
2094. Duyker, Edward (ed.), 1992: The Discovery of Tasmania: Journal Extracts from the
Expeditions of Abel Janszoon Tasman and Marc-Joseph Marion Dufresne 1642 & 1772,
St David’s Park Publishing/Tasmanian Government Printing Office, Hobart.
2095. Dworkin, G., 1988: The theory and practice of autonomy, Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press.
2096. Dwyer, R. E. P., 1953: “Diseases of coconuts (Cocos nucifera) in Papua and New Guinea,”
in New Guinea Agricultural Gazette, 8(1): 24-40.
2097. Dyde, Brian, 2005: Out of the crowded vagueness: a history of the islands of St. Kitts,
Nevis & Anguilla, Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean.
2098. Dye, Alan and Richard Sicotte, 2004: The U.S. Sugar Program and the Cuban Revolution,
The Journal of Economic History, vol. 64, issue 03, pages 673-704.
2099. Dyson, Stephen L. and Robert J. Rowland, Jr., 2008: Archaeology and History in Sardinia
2009
from the Stone Age to the Middle Ages. Shepherds, Sailors, and Conquerors, (Philadelphia:
The University of Pennsylvania Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology).
2100. Easter, C., 1999: “Small states development: a Commonwealth vulnerability index”, The
Round Table, n°351, p. 403-422.
2101. Easterly, W.; Kraay, A., 2000: “Small States, small problems?”, World development, n°11,
p. 2013-2027.
2102. Easton, M., 1985: Papua New Guinea in Oceania: a regional study F.M. Bunge, M.W.
Cooke (eds.). Washington DC: US Print. Off., pp. 137-206.
2103. Eaton, P., 1986: Grassroots conservation: wildlife management areas in Papua New
Guinea, Land Studies Centre Report 86/1, University of Papua New Guinea.
2104. Ebanks, S. O., 1983: Cayman emerges: a human history of long ago Cayman, [Cayman
Islands?]: Northwester Co..
2105. Echeverri Gent, E., 1995: The Society and Its Environment in Honduras: a country study
(pp. 63 106). Washington DC: GPO.
2106. Eckhaus, R., 1997: “Is it Beautiful to be Small, or is it a Burden?”, Journal of Eastern
Caribbean Studies, n°4,p. 1-30.
2107. Economides, B., 1987: Réflexions sur la défense d’îles et d’archipels, Athènes.
2108. Edinval, Eryc (dir.); Maurin, Alain (dir.); Montauban, Jean Gabriel (dir.); Abraham Frois,
Gilbert (pref.). 1997: Strategies de developpement comparees dans la Caraibe, S.L.:
L’HERMES.
2109. Edmond, edited by Rod and Vanessa Smith, 2003: Islands in history and representation,
2110. Edmond, Rod, 2003: ‘Abject bodies/abject sites: leper islands in the high imperial era’.
In Edmond, Rod; Smith, Vanessa (ed.), Islands in history and representation, London:
Routledge,, 133-45
2111. Edmunds, J.E., 1983: Recherche et developpement du plantain dans les windward islands,
Fruits, vol. vol. 38, no 4, p. p. 333-337
2112. Edridge, S., 1985: Solomon Islands Bibliography to 1980, Honiara: Institute of Pacific
Studies, The University of the South Pacific, Suva, Fiji, The Alexander Turnbull Library,
Wellington, New Zealand and the Solomon Islands National Library, Honiara.
2113. Edwards, Elizabeth (eds), 1992: Anthropology and Photography, 1860-1920, New Haven:
Yale University Press.
2114. Edwards, Kevin J., 2005: “On the Windy Edge of Nothing”, A Historical Human Ecology of
the Faroe Islands, Human Ecology, 33: 585-596
2115. Eeuwen (van), D. (dir.), 1997: “Nouvelles intégrations latino-américaines et Caraïbes.
Régionalisme ouvert et mondialisation”, Annales d’Amérique latine et des Caraïbes, nº
14-15, p. 255-296.
2116. Efstratiou, Nicholas, 1985: Agios Petros: a neolithic site in the northern Sporades: Aegean
relationships during the Neolithic of the 5th millennium, Oxford [Oxfordshire], England,
B.A.R..
2117. Eilenburg, M., 1981: American policy in Micronesia, Journal of Pacific History, 17, 62-64.
2118. Eisenlohr, Patrick, 2006: Little India: Diaspora, Time, and Ethnolinguistic Belonging in
Hindu Mauritius, Berkeley: University of California Press
2009
CEHA 119
2119. Eisenman, Stephen F. 1997: Gauguin’s Skirt. London: Thames and Hudson.
2120. Eisler, W., 1995: The furthest shore; Images of Terra Australis from the Middle Ages to
Captain Cook, CUP, Melbourne
2121. Eiusler, W., and Smith B., 1988: Terra Australis; the furthest shore, Sydney, Art Gallery of
New South Wales
2122. El-Agraa, A., 1999: Regional integration: experience, theory and measurement, Lanham,
Barnes & Noble.
2123. Elder, P., 2001: The winds of change: E.W.P. Chinnery (1887-1972) and F. G. G. Rose
(1915-1991) in the Australian Territories, The South Pacific Journal of Philosophy and
Culture, 5: 50-93.
2124. Eldridge, Robert D., 2001: The Origins of the Bilateral Okinawa Problem: Okinawa in
Postwar, Garland Publishing
2125. Eldridge, Robert D., 2004: The return of the Amami Islands: the reversion movement and
U.S.-Japan relations, Lanham, Md.; Oxford: Lexington Books.
2126. Electronic Journals Library, 1997-2009: The Elektronische Zeitschriftenbibliothek EZB
(Electronic Journals Library), University Library of Regensburg. Disponível online em
url: http://rzblx1.uni-regensburg.de/ezeit/index.phtml?bibid=AAAAA&colors=7&lang=en.
2127. Elferink, (A.G.O.), 2001: «The Islands in the South China Sea: How Does Their Presence
Limit the Extent of the High Seas and the Area and the Maritime Zones of the Mainland
Coasts?», Ocean Development and International Law, 32(2), p. 169-190.
2128. Elías de Zevallos, Hilda, 1995: El entorno de Isabel Barreto Castro de Mendaña y su viaje
hacia las Islas Salomon, 1595-1596, Lima, Perú: Asociación Nacional Pro-Marina del
Perú
2129. Eliis, William, 2005: The American mission in the Sandwich islands: a vindication and an
appeal, in relation to the proceedings of the Reformed Catholic Mission at Honolulu, Ann
Arbor, Michigan: University of Michigan Library. Disponível online em url: http://quod.lib.
umich.edu/cgi/t/text/text-idx?c=moa;idno=AGA4516. Consulta em 22 de julho de 2009.
2130. Elizalde, Ma. Dolores; Fradera, Josep M.; Alonso, Luis, eds. 2001: Imperios y naciones en
el Pacífico, Madrid: Asociación Española de Estudios del Pacífico: Consejo Superior de
Investigaciones Científicas.
2131. Ellada, Kriti, 1994: Portrait of the Islands, Luxembourg, European Commission. Eurostat.
2132. Elliot, L. and Ryan, C., 1993: The impact of crime on Corsican tourism - a descriptive
assessment, World Travel and Tourism Review, 3, pp.287-293.
2133. Elliott, Jacqueline D., 1988: Pacific law bibliography, London: Commonwealth Legal
Education Association,
2134. Elliott, Jacqueline D., 1990: Pacific law bibliography, 2nd ed. Hobart, Tas. : Pacific Law
Press.
2135. Ellis, J., 1998: ‘Literary Cartographies in Oceania’ in L. Brinklow, F. Ledwell & J.Ledwell,
eds., Message in a Bottle: The Literature of Small Islands, Charlottetown PEI, Institute of
Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island, pp. 51-64.
2136. Ellis, W.S.; Blair, J. P., 1986: A way of life lost; Bikini, National Geographic, 169, 6, 813-34.
2137. Ellison, George T. H., 2005: ‘Growth of Jersey Schoolchildren During the 1940-1945
2009
German Occupation: Comparison with Schoolchildren on Mainland Britain’, Human

Biology, 77:6, 761-72.
2138. Ellison, J. C., 1997: Mangrove ecosystems of the Western and Gulf Provinces of Papua
New Guinea, a review, Science in New Guinea, 23(1): 3-16.
2139. Ellul, A., 1998: Sustainable Tourism Development in Small Island Developing States: with
Special Reference to the Indian Ocean, Mediterranean, Atlantic Small Island Developing
States. Malte, Paper Presented at the Conference on the Sustainable Development of
Small Island Developing States.
2140. Ellwood, Robert S., 1993: Islands of the dawn: the story of alternative spirituality in New
Zealand, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press.
2141. Emmer, Pieter C., 1999: New societies: the Caribbean in the long sixteenth century,
co-editor, German Carrera Damas, London: published jointly by UNESCO Publishing/
Macmillan Education Ltd..
2142. Enenkio Atoll Consulate General, 1996: The Kingdom of Enenkio Atoll- A Pacific Island
Sanctuary. August, Disponível online em url: http://www.mail-archive.com/cpunks@
einstein.ssz.com/msg00979.html. Visita a 29 de julho de 2009.
2143. Engélibert, Jean-Paul, 2003: Problèmes de l’insularité: la clôture et la fente dans Le Château
des Carpathes, L’Île du docteur Moreau et L’Invention de Morel, Revue de littérature
comparée, nº 305/1, p. 23-34.
2144. English, Christopher John Basil, (ed.), 2005: Two islands: Newfoundland and Prince
Edward Island (Essays in the history of Canadian law, 9). Toronto: University of Toronto
Press for the Osgoode Society for Canadian Legal History.
2145. Enright, Tim, 1988: George Thomson, a memoir, Dingle, Co. Kerry, Ireland; Wolfeboro,
N.H.: Brandon.
2146. Ensenyat Pujol, Gabriel, La literatura catalana medieval a Mallorca, [Palma de Mallorca]:
El Tall Editorial.
2147. Environnement et patrimoine culturel de la région de Fort-Liberté, Port-au-Prince/Nantes.
Projet “Route 2004”. Ministère de la Culture (Haïti)/PNUD.
2148. Épailly, Eugène, 1986: Les Anciens pénitenciers insulaires de Guyane, les îles du Salut,
l’îlet la Mère, [Cayenne], Impr. les Amandiers.
2149. Epstein, A. L., 1984: The experience of shame in Melanesia: an essay in the anthropology
of affect, London: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland.
2150. Erb, Maribeth, 1997: Contested Time and Place: Constructions of History in Todo,
Manggarai (Western Flores, Indonesia), Journal of Southeast Asian Studies, Vol. 28.
2151. Eric, Solsten, ed., 1991: Cyprus: A Country Study, Washington: GPO for the Library of
Congress.
2152. Erickson, Brice, 2005:Archaeology of Empire: Athens and Crete in the Fifth Century B.C.
Archaeology of Empire: Athens and Crete in the Fifth Century B.C., American Journal of
Archaeology, 109, Issue: 4, October, pp: 619-663. Disponível online em url: http://www.
atypon-link.com/AIA/doi/abs/10.3764/AJA.109.4.619. consulta a 21 de Agosto de 2009.
2153. Erisman, M., 1983: Tourism and cultural dependency in the West Indies, Annals of Tourism
Research, 10(3), pp.337-362.
2154. Ernst, Manfred, 1994: Winds of change: rapidly growing religious groups in the Pacific
Islands, Suva, Fiji: Pacific Conference of Churches.
2009
CEHA 121
2155. Erotokritakis, K. and Andriotis, K., 2007: Residents’ perceptions towards tourism in a rural
Cretan community, Paper presented at the International Conference of Trends, Impacts
and Policies on Tourism Development, 15-18 June 2007, Heraklion, Greece. Disponível
online em url: http://tourism-conference.eap.gr/pdf%20files/Erotokritakis%20K.%20&%20
Andriotis%20K.pdf.
2156. Escallier, directeur de publication Robert, 2004: Modernité et insularité en Méditérranée,
Nice: CMMC, UFR lettres, arts et sciences humaines.
2157. Escandell Bonet, Bartolomé, 1992: Baleares y América, Madrid: Editorial MAPFRE.
2158. Escobar, A., 2001: ‘Culture Sits in Places: Reflections on Globalism and Subaltern
Strategies of Localization’, Political Geography, Vol. 20, No. 2, pp. 139-174.
2159. Espach, R. ; Tulchin, J. (eds), 2000: Security in the Caribbean basin: the challenge of
regional cooperation, Boulder, Lynne Rienner Publishers.
2160. Essig, F. B., 1992: “A new species of Heterospathe (Palmae) from New Britain”, Principes,
36(1): 4-6.
2161. Essig, F. B., 1995: “A Checklist and Analysis of the Palms of the Bismarck Archipelago”,
Principes, 39(3).
2162. Estensen, M., 2006: Terra Australis Incognita: The Spanish Quest for the mysterious Great
South Land, Allen & Unwin, Australia.
2163. Ette, Tomar, 2005: Una literatura sin residencia fija. Insularidad, historia y dinámica
sociocultural en la Cuba del siglo XX, Revista de Indias, vol. LXV, núm. 235, Págs. 729-
754.
2164. EURISLES, 1997: Indicateurs statistiques des disparités régionales engendrées par
l’insularité et l’ultrapériphéricité, Rennes, Eurisles
2165. EURISLES, 1999: Les régions insulaires et le prix du transport de marchandises
intracommunautaire, Rennes, Eurisles
2166. EURISLES, 2002: Au large de l’Europe. La construction européenne et la problématique
des îles, Rennes, Eurisles
2167. EURISLES, 2003: Les transports insulaires et l’UE, Rennes, Eurisles
2168. Eurisles; 1981: Iles de Méditerranée, CNRS-Paris.
2169. Eustis, Nelson, [1979] 1980: Aggie Grey of Samoa. Adelaide, South Australia: Hobby
Investments.
2170. Evans, B. R., 1994: Kandrian-Gloucester Development Study West New Britain. Canberra
and Kimbe, Project Design and Management and Kandrian and Gloucester Integrated
Development Project.
2171. Evans, B. R., 1994: Marketing galip nut (Canarium spp.) in Kandrian and Gloucester
Districts, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Canberra and Kimbe, PO Box 507.
2172. Evans, Dorothy, 1994: Schooling in the South Atlantic Islands, 1661-1992, Oswestry:
Anthony Nelson.
2173. Evans, G, 1989: Australia in the South Pacific, World Review, Vol 28/2
2174. Evans, G., and Brant, B, 1991: Australia’s foreign relations in the world of the 1980’s,
Melbourne, OUP
2175. Evans, J., 1973: “Islands as laboratories for the study of culture process” in The explanation
of culture change: models in prehistory, Londres, Duckworth, p. 517-520
2009
2176. Evans, R.; Moore, C; Saunders K and B Jamison, eds, 1997: 1901 Our Future’s past;
documenting Australia’s federation, Sydney, Macmillan.
2177. Evans, T. R., 1993: Residents Perceptions of Tourism in Selected New Zealand
Communities: A Segmentation Study, MPhil thesis. Otago: Otago University.
2178. Evelyn, Wareham, 2002: From Explorers to Evangelists: Archivists.
2179. Everard, Judith, 2007 : ‘Les îles normandes en 1204: le rôle décisif de l’aristocratie
normande’, In Flambard Héricher, Anne-Marie; Gazeau, Véronique (ed.), 1204: la
Normandie entre Plantagenêts et Capétiens (Caen: Publications du CRAHM,), 215-25
2180. Everard, Judith; Holt, James Clarke, 2004: Jersey 1204: the forging of an island community,
London: Thames & Hudson.
2181. Ewins, Rory, 1998: Changing their minds: tradition and politics in contemporary Fiji and
Tonga, Macmillan Brown Centre for Pacific Studies.
2182. Ewitt, M.,1983: The Comoro Islands in Indian Ocean trade before the 19th century, Cahiers
d’etudes africaines, no 89-90, p. p. 139-165.
2183. Eyley, Claudia Pond and Robin White, 1987: Twenty-Eight days in Kiribati. Auckland: New
Women’s Press.
2184. Faaniu, S., 1983: Travellers and workers. In Tuvalu: A History, Institute of Pacific Studies,
Suva.
2185. Faatau, Luc., 1985: Les Iles sous le Vent: etude de geographie humaine, Bordeaux:
Universite de Bordeaux 3.
2186. Faberon, Jean-Yves, 1992: La Nouvelle-Calédonie, laboratoire du statut de territoire
d’outre-mer, Nouméa.
2187. Fadda, Antonio Franco, 2002: Isole alla specchio: Sadergna e Corsica tra identità,
tradizione e innovazione, Roma: Carocci.
2188. Fagan, B.M., 1996, Clash of cultures, London, Altamira Press.
2188. Fagan, G. Honor, 2002: “Globalization and Culture: Placing Ireland”, in The ANNALS of the
American Academy of Political and Social Science, Jan; vol. 581: pp. 133 - 143.
2189. Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1984: The Cook Islands: domestic stabilisation of international trade
instability, note, Pacific viewpoint, vol. vol. 25, no 1, p. p. 57-76.
2190. Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1985: Island economies. Studies from the South Pacific, Suva: Institute
of Pacific Studies University of the South Pacific.
2191. Fairbairn, Te’O, Thomas T. Parry, 1986: Multinational Enterprises in the Developing South
Pacific Region, Univ of Hawaii Pr.
2192. Fairbairn, T. I. J., edited by, 1988: Island entrepreneurs: problems and performances in the
Pacific, Honolulu, HI: East-West Center, Pacific Islands Development Program.
2193. Fairbairn, T. I. J., e outros, 1991: The Pacific Islands: politics, economics, and international
relations, Honolulu, Hawaii: East-West Center, International Relations Program.
2194. Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1994: “Pacific Island Economies: Structure, Current Developments and
Prospects”, In N. and N. Douglas (eds), Pacific Islands Yearbook (17th Edition), Fiji Times
Ltd., pp. 11-24.
2195. Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1994a: The case for and against an independent currency for small
Pacific island countries, with special reference to Kiribati, the Cook Islands and Tuvalu,
[Kensington, N.S.W.] : Centre for South Pacific Studies.
2009
CEHA 123
2196. Fairbairn, T. I. J., Worrell, D., 1996: South Pacific and Caribbean island economies. A
comparative study, Brisbane, The foundation for development cooperation.
2197. Fairbairn, Te’o, 1997: The economic impact of natural disasters in the South Pacific: with
special reference to Fiji, Western Samoa, Niue, and Papua New Guinea. Fiji? : s.n..
2198. Fairbairn, T. I. J., 1999: “Pacific island economies: performance, groxth prospects and the
impact of the Asian economic crisis”, Asian-Pacific economic literature, nº 2, p. 43-56.
2199. Fairbairn, T. I. J., 2007: Economic Vulnerability and Resilience of Small Island States,
Island Studies Journal, Vol. 2, No. 1, pp. 133-140.
2200. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, (ed), Translations by Noumea Simi: Tamaitai Samoa: Their
Stories (Samoan translation), IPS, USP Suva.
2201. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1981: `Samoan Parents and the Primary School’, Unpublished
M.A. Thesis, Victoria University, Wellington.
2202. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1984: `Factors Affecting Language Maintenance: The Samoan
in New Zealand ‘, New Zealand Journal of Educational Studies , Vol. 19, No.22. pp.99-
113.
2203. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1985: Àspects of Samoan Personality’, Pacific Perspectives,
Suva, Vol.12, 2.
2204. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1986: `Samoan Parents and Pre-School Education: New
Zealand ‘, Australian Journal of Early Childhood Education, Vol 11, no. 1, February.
2205. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1987: `Searching for the Written Fagogo: Samoan Writing’. in
Pacific Writing and Publishing, IPS USP Suva , pp 41-69.
2206. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1987a: Counterpart Training: Western Samoa, USP School of
Agriculture.
2207. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1988: `Culture and Communication at Alafua’, in Pacific
Universities, R.Crocombe and M Meleisea (ed) IPS USP Suva, pp. 155-166.
2208. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1988a: `Pule Oe: It’s up to You. Women’s Career Patterns in
Western Samoa ‘, in Women and Education in PNG and the South Pacific. E.Wormald
and A.Crossley (ed) UPNG Press, pp. 217-238.
2209. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1990: `Strengthening NGO Structures: Western Samoa ‘, in
Sydney Talk: Australia in the South Pacific, McCall, G.(ed), Pacific Studies Monograph
No. 1, UNSW.pp.
2210. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1990: The Household and Agriculture: Western Samoa, Working
Paper, International Gender Study Group: University of Newcastle-on-Tyne.
2211. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1991: È au le inailau a tamaitai: Women, Education and
Development Western Samoa ‘, unpublished Ph D thesis, Macquarie University.
2212. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1992: À positive response to migration constraints: Western
Samoa , 1989’ in McCall G(ed) A World Perspective on Pacific Islander Migration , UNSW,
Pacific Studies Monograph no 6.
2213. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1993: `Decentralisation, Centralisation: Education in Western
Samoa ‘, Access, Jan 1993, University of Auckland.
2214. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1993a: Status of Women and Pacific Platform paper for Beijing,
SPC August.
2215. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1993b: Women’s Status in the South Pacific , ESCAP.
2009
2216. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1993c: `Women and Agriculture in Western Samoa’, in Momsen,

J. and V. Kinnaird (ed), different places, difference voices, gender and development,
Routledge, UK.
2217. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1994: Ìf I plant a tree will my children be here to see it grow’, in A.
Emberson-Bain (ed), Sustainable Development or Malignant Growth, Marama Press, Fiji.
2218. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1994a: `Mother, farmer, trader, weaver: Juggling Roles in Pacific
Agriculture’, in A. Emberson-Bain (ed), Sustainable Development or Malignant Growth,
Marama Press, Fiji.
2219. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1994b: `Samoan Writing: The Search for the Written Fagogo’,
reprinted in P. Sharrad (ed), Reading in Pacific Literature, New Literatures Research
Centre, University of Wollongong.
2220. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1994c: `Tourism impacts on traditional culture and female
enterprise in Western Samoa ‘, in Kinnaird, V. and Hall, D., Tourism Development: the
gender dimension, Routledge, UK.
2221. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy(ed), 1995: Pacific Women and Agriculture, Report of the Women
and Agriculture Regional Workshop, Port Vila 1993
2222. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1995a: `Women’s Education: Pacific Overview’ 1994, Directions,
30 Vol 16 no 1, USP, Suva.
2223. Fairbairn-Dunlop, P., 1996a: Tamaitai Samoa: Their Stories, IPS, USP/ and Kin Publications,
California (women’s oral history).
2224. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1997: Pacific Women’s Triple Agricultural Role: food security,
informal trade and cash cropping, in Journal of South Pacific Agriculture, vol 4 Jan-Dec.
2225. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2000: `Gender, Culture and Sustainable Development - the
Pacific Way ‘, in Hooper, A. (ed), Culture and Sustainable Development in the Pacific,
National Centre for Development Studies, Canberra.
2226. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2000a: `Pacific Women and Lifelong Education’, Directions, 42,
Volume 22 No 1.
2227. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2000b: `To hit or not to hit: Is there room for a third space’, In
A. Jones (ed), Touchy Subject: Teachers Touching Children, University of Otago Press.
2228. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2001: `Women and the Privatisation of the coconut oil mill,
Samoa ‘, Pacific Economic Bulletin, ANU, Vol 16, no 1.
2229. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2001a: Tetee Atu le sasa ma le upu malosi: hold back your hands
and your harsh words, Pacific Health Dialogue, Vol 8, No 1, March.
2230. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2001b: Tetee Atu: Using a self-report strategy to explore
disciplining behaviours in Tu Mau, Social Work Review, Massey University, Spring, Vol
XIII, Number 3.
2231. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2002: What Samoans want today is a quarter acre section of
freehold’ in Flowers, Fale, Fanua and faa Polynesia, Working Paper No 8, Asia Pacific
Migration Research Network, R Bedford, R Longhurst and Y Underhill-Sem (ed) UNESCO,
Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 2002a: Emele Moa Teo Fairbairn, in Shifting Centres; Women
and Migration in New Zealand History, Lyndon Fraser & Katie Pickles (ed) University of
Otago Press.
2232. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, (ed), 2003: Samoan Women: Widening Choices, IPS, USP.
2233. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, G Makisi, (ed), 2003: Making our place: Growing Up PI in New
Zealand, Dunmore Press, Palmerston North.
2009
CEHA 125
2234. Fajardo Spínola, Francisco, 1992: Hechicería y brujería en Canarias en la Edad Moderna,
Las Palmas: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
2235. Faleomavaega, E.F.H, 1990: Some perspectives on American Samoa’s political relationship
with the United States, PS, 13, 2, 119-24.
2236. Faleomavaega, E.F.H., 1994: American Samoa; a unique relationship in the South Pacific,
in vom Busch W, et.al., eds, New politics in the South Pacific, IPS/USP, 113-22.
2237. Faleomavaega, Eni, 1995: Navigating the future: a Samoan perspective on U.S.-Pacific
relations, Suva, Fiji: KIN Publications in association with the Institute of Pacific Studies,
University of the South Pacific and the Pacific Islands Development Program.
2238. Falgout, Suzanne, 1987: Master Part of Heaven: the ethnohistory and archaeology of Wene,
Pohnpei, Eastern Caroline Islands, Saipan, CM: Micronesian Archaeological Survey,
Division of Historic Preservation, Dept. of Community and Cultural Affairs ; Detroit, Mich.,
U.S.A.: Distributed by Cellar Book Shop.
2239. Falgout, Suzanne, 1995: “Americans in Paradise: Anthropologists, Custom, and Democracy
in Postwar Micronesia”, Ethnology, 34 (Spring): 99–111.
2240. Falgout, Suzanne; Poyer, Lin; Carucci, Laurence M., 2008: Memories of war: Micronesians
in the Pacific War,Honolulu : University of Hawai’i Press.
2241. Fanciullo, Franco, 1983: Dialetto e cultura materiale alle isole Eolie: due inchieste a
confronto, 1928-29 H. Coray, 1979, Palermo: Centro di studi filologici e linguistici siciliani.
2242. Fanning, Edmund, 1989: Voyages and discoveries in the South Seas 1792-1832, New York.
2243. Faria, Miguel A., 2002: Cuba in Revolution--Escape from a Lost Paradise, Hacienda
Publishing, Macon, Georgia.
2244. Faris, R.W., 1999: ‘Unto Themselves: Insularity and Democracy’, Masters thesis, ChapelHill
NC, Department of Sociology, University of North Carolina.
2245. Farjon, I., 1980: Madura nd surrounding islands: an annotated bibliography, 1860-1942,
The Hague: M. Nijhoff.
2246. Farmer, Paul, 2003, 2005: Pathologies of Power: Health, Human Rights, and the New War
on the Poor. Berkeley: University of California Press, edition.
2247. Farmer, Paul, 2003: The uses of Haiti, Monroe, Maine: Common Courage Press.
2248. Farnsworth, edited by Paul, 2001: Island lives: historical archaeologies of the Caribbean,
Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press.
2249. Farrell, Byran H. 1992. Tourism as an Element in Sustainable Development: Hana, Maui.
In Tourism Alternatives: Potentials and Problems in the Development of Tourism. Valene
L. Smith and William R. Eadington, eds. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Pp. 115-134.
2250. Farrell, D., 1984-91: The pictorial history of Guam, (4 vols) Micronesian Productions.
2251. Farrell, Don A., 1990: Saipan, translations by Ikuo Itakura, Saipan, MP: Micronesian
Productions, CNMI.
2252. Farrujia de la Rosa, A. José, 2005: Imperialist archaeology in the Canary Islands: French
and German studies on prehistoric colonization at the end of the 19th century. Oxford:
John and Erica Hedges.
2253. Fatemi, K., 2001: International public policy and regionalism at the return of the century,
Londres, Elsevier.
2009
2254. Fatnowna, N., 1988: Fragments of a lost heritage, Sydney, Angus and Robertson.
2255. Fatome, Henri, 2002: La perte des îles anglo-normandes et de la Normandie, Cherbourg:
H. Fatome.
2256. Fatome, Henri, 2002: La perte des îles anglo-normandes et de la Normandie. Cherbourg:
H. Fatome.
2257. Faulkner, B., 1998: Tourism development options in Indonesia and the case of agro-
tourism in central Java. In: Laws, E., Faulkner, B. and Moscardo, G. (eds) Embracing and
Managing Change in Tourism: International Case Studies. London: Routledge, pp.202-
221.
2258. Fausett, D., 1993: Writing the New World; imaginary voyages and Utopias of the great
southern land, Uni of Syracruse Press, Syracruse
2259. Faustmann, Hubert and Nicos Peristianis, 2006: Britain and Cyprus: Colonialism and Post-
Colonialism, 1878-2006, Bibliopolis.
2260. Fauvel, A.A., 1980: Unpublished documents on the history of the Seychelles Islands
anterior to 1810, [Victoria?: s.n.].
2261. Favole, Adriano, 2000: La palma del potere: i capi e la costruzione della società a Futuna
(Polinesia occidentale), Torino: Il segnalibro.
2262. Fawcett, James T. and Benjamin V. Cariño, 1987: Pacific bridges: the new immigration
from Asia and the Pacific islands, Staten Island, N.Y., Center for Migration Studies.
2263. Fawcett, L.; Hurrell, A. (eds), 1995: Regionalism in World politics, Oxford, Oxford University
Press.
2264. Fay, Marianne, Morrison, Mary, 2007: Infrastructure in Latin America and the Caribbean:
recent developments and key challenges, Washington, DC: World Bank.
2265. Feehan, John, 1994: The book of Aran: the Aran Islands Co, Galway; ed. John Waddell.
Kinvara, County Galway: Tir Eolas.
2266. Feinberg, Richard, 1980: History and Structure: A Case of Polynesian Dualism, Journal of
Anthropological Research, 36(3):331-378.
2267. Feinberg, Richard, 1980a: Supernatural Sanctions and the Social Order on a Polynesian
Outlier, Anthropological Forum, 4(3):331-351.
2268. Feinberg, Richard, 1980b: Introduction: breast-feeding in America. In Tempest in a Tea
House: American Attitudes toward Breast-feeding, edited by Richard Feinberg. Kent,
Ohio: Kent Popular Press. Pp. 1-9.
2269. Feinberg, Richard, 1981: Anuta: Social Structure of a Polynesian Island, with foreword
by Sir Raymond Firth. Lā’ie and Copenhagen: Institute for Polynesian Studies in co-
operation with the National Museum of Denmark, Second Printing.
2270. Feinberg, Richard, 1981a: The Meaning of ‘Sibling’ on Anuta Island, In Siblingship
in Oceania: Studies in the Meaning of Kin Relations, edited by Mac Marshall. ASAO
Monograph Number 8, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press. Pp. 105-148.
2271. Feinberg, Richard, 1981b: What is Polynesian Kinship all About?, Ethnology, 29(2):115-
131.
2272. Feinberg, Richard, 1981c: Symbolic dimensions of breast-feeding in America. Case
Analysis, 1(4):329-335.
2273. Feinberg, Richard, 1981d: Competition and cooperation: human nature in cross-cultural
perspective. The Journal of Anthropology, 2(2):147-153.
2009
CEHA 127
2274. Feinberg, Richard, 1981e: Structural dimensions of sociopolitical change on Anuta. Pacific
Studies, 5(2).
2275. Feinberg, Richard, 1982: Some Observations on a Polynesian Naming System: Personal
Names and Naming on Anuta, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 91(4):581-588.
2276. Feinberg, Richard, 1982a: Structural Dimensions of Sociopolitical Change on Anuta,
Proceedings of Conference on Evolving Political Cultures in the Pacific Islands, edited by
Gloria Cronin. Lā‘ie: Institute for Polynesian Studies Reprinted from Pacific Studies 5(2),
124-142.
2277. Feinberg, Richard, 1983: Melanesian Winds in Polynesian Sails, Pacific Magazine, (May-
June):25-27.
2278. Feinberg, Richard, 1983a: Polynesian Music in the Old Style, Resound: A Quarterly of the
Archives of Traditional Music, 2(2):2.
2279. Feinberg, Richard, 1983b: What’s in a Name? Personal Identity and Naming on Anuta,
Central Issues in Anthropology, 5(1):27-42.
2280. Feinberg, Richard, 1983c: The meaning of ‘sibling’ on Anuta Island. In Siblingship
in Oceania: Studies in the Meaning of Kin Relations, edited by Mac Marshall. ASAO
Monograph Number 8. Pp. 105-148. Lanham, Maryland: University Press of America.
Second Printing.
2281. Feinberg, Richard, 1984: On individual and culture in American anthropology: reply to
Herve Varenne. Current Anthropology, 25(4):534-535.
2282. Feinberg, Richard, 1985: A Note on Data Presentation in Ethnographic Reports, American
Anthropologist, 87(3):666-668.
2283. Feinberg, Richard, 1985a: CA comment on “Structural patterns of sibling classification in
Island Oceania”, by Mac Marshall, Current Anthropology, 26(5):660.
2284. Feinberg, Richard, 1986: Introduction to Translation of ìEthnography of Ontong Java
and Tasman Islands, with remarks re. the Marqueen and Abgarris Islandsî by Richard
Parkinson, translated by Rose S. Hartmann, Pacific Studies 9(3):1-31.
2285. Feinberg, Richard, 1986a: On Anomalous Westerlies, El Niño, and the Colonization of
Polynesia, by Ben R. Finney, American Anthropologist, 88(2):454-455.
2286. Feinberg, Richard, 1986b: The “Anuta Problem”: Local Sovereignty and National Integration
in the Solomon Islands, Man, 21(3):438-452.
2287. Feinberg, Richard, 1986c: Market economy and changing sex-roles on a Polynesian atoll.
Ethnology, 25(4):271-282.
2288. Feinberg, Richard, 1988, 2003: Polynesian Seafaring and Navigation: Ocean Travel in
Anutan Culture and Society, Kent, Ohio: Kent State University Press.
2289. Feinberg, Richard, 1988: Margaret Mead and Samoa: Coming of Age in fact and fiction.
American Anthropologist, 90(3):656-663.
2290. Feinberg, Richard, 1988a: Socio-spatial Symbolism and the Logic of Rank on Two
Polynesian Outliers, Ethnology, 27(3):291-310.
2291. Feinberg, Richard, 1989: Possible Prehistoric Contacts between Tonga and Anuta, Journal
of the Polynesian Society, 98(3):303-317.
2292. Feinberg, Richard, 1989a: What’s so Funny about That? Fieldwork and Laughter in
Polynesia, In The Humbled Anthropologist: Tales from the Pacific, edited by Philip DeVita.
Belmont, CA: Wadsworth Publishing Company, pp. 53-60.
2009
2293. Feinberg, Richard, 1989b: Symbolic Structures and Social Space: Reflections on the Logic
of Rank in Polynesia, Geographia Religionum, 7:11-27.
2294. Feinberg, Richard, 1990: New Guinea Models on a Polynesian Outlier? Ethnology 29(1):83-
96.
2295. Feinberg, Richard, 1990a: The Solomon Islands Tenth Anniversary of Independence:
Problems of National Symbolism and National Integration, Pacific Studies 13(2): 19-40.
2296. Feinberg, R., 1990b: Oral Traditions of Anuta: A Polynesian Outlier in the Solomon Islands,
Oxford Studies in Anthropological Linguistics 15, New York: Oxford University Press.
2297. Feinberg, Richard, 1991: A Long-distance Voyage in Contemporary Polynesia, Journal of
the Polynesian Society, 100(1):25-44.
2298. Feinberg, Richard, 1991a: Anuta, In Encyclopedia of World Cultures, Volume II: Oceania,
Terence E. Hays, volume editor. Boston: G. K. Hall, pp. 13-16.
2299. Feinberg, Richard, 1992: Margaret Mead and Samoa: Coming of Age in fact and fiction.
In Critical Thinking and Writing in the Disciplines, edited by Mary McGann. Allyn and
Bacon, Publishers. Pp. 206-216. Reprinted from American Anthropologist (1988).
2300. Feinberg, Richard, 1994: Illness as an Index of Social Stress and Acculturation,
Etnograficheskoe Obozrenie, Ethnological Review, 1(1):24-32.
2301. Feinberg, Richard, 1994: Contested worlds: politics of culture and the politics of anthro
pology. The Place of Humanism in Anthropology Today, edited by Ivan Brady and Edith
Turner. Special issue, Anthropology and Humanism, 19(1):20-35.
2302. Feinberg, R., 1995: Introduction: Theme and Variation in Pacific Island Seafaring, in the
Contemporary Pacific Islands, Dekalb: Northern Illinois University, pp. 3-13.
2303. Feinberg, Richard, 1995a: Politics of Culture in the Pacific Islands (edited by R. Feinberg
and L. Zimmer-Tamakoshi), Ethnology, 34(2-3):89-209. Special Issue.
2304. Feinberg, Richard, 1995b: Christian Polynesians and Pagan Spirits: Anuta, Solomon
Islands, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 104(3):267-301.
2305. Feinberg, Richard, edited by, 1995c: Harry A. Powell -- Maritime travel, present and past,
in Marovo, western Solomon Islands, in Seafaring in the contemporary Pacific islands:
studies in continuity and change, DeKalb, Ill.: Northern Illinois University Press.
2306. Feinberg, Richard, 1995d: Seafaring in the Contemporary Pacific Islands, edited by R.
Feinberg. DeKalb, Illinois. Northern Illinois University Press.
2307. Feinberg, Richard, 1995e: Introduction: theme and variation in Pacific Island seafaring.
In Seafaring in Contemporary Oceania: Studies in Continuity and Change, edited by
Richard Feinberg. DeKalb, IL: Northern Illinois University Press. pp. 3-15.
1. Feinberg, Richard, 1995f: Continuity and change in Nukumanu maritime technology and prac
tice. In Seafaring in Contemporary Oceania: Studies in Continuity and Change, edited by
Richard Feinberg. DeKalb, IL: Northern Illinois University Press. Pp. 159-195.
2308. Epilogue (by Ward H. Goodenough and Richard Feinberg). In Seafaring in Contemporary
Feinberg, Richard, 1995g: Oceania: Studies in Continuity and Change, edited by Richard
Feinberg. DeKalb, IL: Northern Illinois University Press. pp. 219-230.
2309. Feinberg, Richard, 1996: Spirit encounters on Anuta, Solomon Islands. In Spirits in Culture,
History, and Mind, edited by Jeanette Marie Mageo and Alan Howard. New York and Lon
don: Routledge. pp. 99-120.
2310. Feinberg, Richard, 1996a: Preface (by Richard Feinberg and Karen Ann Watson-Gegeo)
2009
CEHA 129
to Leadership and Change in the Western Pacific: Essays in Honor of Sir Raymond Firth,
edited by Richard Feinberg and Karen Ann Watson-Gegeo. London School of Economics
Monographs on Social Anthropology, Number 66. London: Athlone. pp. viii-xiv.
2311. Feinberg, R. & K. Watson-Gegeo, eds. 1996b: Leadership and Change in the Western
Pacific: Essays Presented to Sir Raymond Firth on Occasion of his 90th Birthday, Berg
Publishers
2312. Feinberg, Richard, 1996c: Leadership and change in the Western Pacific (by Karen Ann
Watson-Gegeo and Richard Feinberg). Introduction to Leadership and Change in the
Western Pacific: Essays in Honor of Sir Raymond Firth, edited by Richard Feinberg and
Karen Ann Watson-Gegeo. London School of Economics Monographs on Social An
thropology.
2313. Feinberg, Richard, 1996d: Outer Islanders and Urban Resettlement in the Solomon
Islands: The Case of Anutans on Guadalcanal, Journal de la Société des Océanistes,
103(2):207-217.
2314. Feinberg, Richard, 1996-2005: Polynesian Outlier Bibliography, The World-Wide
Web Virtual Library. Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_
polynesian_outlier.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
2315. Feinberg, Richard, 1997: Polynesian navigation. In Encyclopedia of the History of Sci
ence, Technology, and Medicine in Non-Western Cultures, Helaine Selin, ed. Amsterdam:
Kluwer Academic Publishers. Pp. 773-776.
2316. Feinberg, Richard, 1998: Oral Traditions of Anuta: A Polynesian Outlier in the Solomon
Islands, Oxford Studies in Anthropological Linguistics, Volume 15. New York and Oxford:
Oxford University Press.
2317. Feinberg, Richard, 1998a: Righting Wrongs on Anuta, Pacific Studies, 21(3):29-49.
2318. Feinberg, Richard, 1998b: Anuta. In The Garland Encyclopedia of World Music: Australia
and the Pacific Islands, edited by Adrienne Kaeppler and Jacob W. Love. New York:
Garland. Pp. 856-861.
2319. Feinberg, Richard, 1998c: Sanctity and Power on Anuta: Polynesian Chieftainship Revisited,
In Leadership and Change in the Western Pacific: Essays in Honor of Sir Raymond Firth,
edited by Richard Feinberg and Karen Ann Watson-Gegeo, London School of Economics
Monographs on Social Anthropology, Number 66. London: Athlone. Pp. 56-92.
2320. Feinberg, Richard, 1998d: Righting Wrongs on Anuta, Pacific Studies, 21(3):29-49.
2321. Feinberg, Richard, 2000: Staying afloat in the Western Pacific, Keel Hauler’s KaNews,
November, Feinberg, Richard and Marianne George, pp. 1-3
2322. Feinberg, Richard, 2001: Cruising the South Pacific, Daily Kent Stater, February 9, p A12.
2323. Feinberg, Richard, 2001a: Hauling keel in the Pacific, Keel Hauler’s KaNews, January. Pp.
2-4.
2324. Feinberg, edited by R. and M. Ottenheimer, 2001b: The Cultural Analysis of Kinship: The
Legacy of David M. Schneider, Urbana: University of Illinois Press.
2325. Feinberg, Richard, 2001c: The Anuta Islanders. In Endangered Peoples of Oceania:
Struggles to Survive and Thrive, edited by Judith M. Fitzpatrick. Westport, CT: Greenwood
Press. Pp. 17-32.
2326. Feinberg, Richard, 2001d: Danger in paradise: Euphoria and near-tragedy on Guadalcanal,
Solomon Islands. In Incidents, edited by Terry Stocker. Tempe, AZ: Franklin Publishing.
Pp. 76-88.
2009
2327. Feinberg, Richard, 2001e: Introduction: Schneider’s cultural analysis of kinship and its
implications for anthropological relativism. In The Cultural Analysis of Kinship: The Legacy
of David M. Schneider, edited by Richard Feinberg and Martin Ottenheimer. Urbana, IL:
University of Illinois Press. pp. 1-31.
2328. Feinberg, Richard, 2002: Elements of Leadership in Oceania, Anthropological Forum,
12(1): 9-44.
2329. Feinberg, Richard, Andrew J. Strathern, Pamela Stewart, Laurence M. Carucci, Lin Poyer,
and Cluny Macpherson, 2002a: Oceania: An Introduction to the Cultures and Identities of
Pacific Islanders. Durham, NC: Carolina Academic Press.
2330. Feinberg, Richard, 2002d: A Polynesian people’s struggle to maintain community in the
Solomon Islands. In Constructing Moral Communities: Pacific Islander Strategies for
Settling in New Places, edited by Judith Modell. Special issue, Pacific Studies 25(1/2):
45-70.
2331. Feinberg, Richard, 2003: Polynesian Seafaring and Navigation: Ocean Travel in Anutan
Culture and Society, Kent, Ohio: Kent State University Press, Second (paperback) edition.
2332. Feinberg, Richard, 2003a: Storm damage and reconstruction on Anuta and Tikopia
(Solomon Islands), Keel Haulers Kanews, February, pp. 2-3.
2333. Feinberg, Richard, 2003b: Reply to Warren Shapiro’s review of The Cultural Analysis of
Kinship: The Legacy of David M. Schneider. American Anthropologist, 105(4):881.
2334. Feinberg, Richard, 2003c: Overstatements in “The Fall of Kinship”, Journal of Cognition
and Culture, 3(4):318-322.
2335. Feinberg, Richard, 2003d:‘Drawing the coral heads’: mental mapping and its physical
representation in a Polynesian community, By R. Feinberg, U. J. Dymon, Pu Paiaki, Pu
Rangituteki, Pu Nukuriaki, and M. Rollins, The Cartographic Journal, 40(3):243-253.
2336. Feinberg, Richard, 2004: Anuta: Polynesian Lifeways for the 21 st Century, Prospect
Heights, IL: Waveland Press.
2337. Feinberg, Richard, 2005: Pacific Voyaging and Navigation, In Encyclopedia of Anthropology,
edited by James Brix. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
2338. Feinberg, Richard, 2005a: Polynesian Navigation, In Encyclopedia of the History of
Science, Technology, and Medicine in Non-Western Cultures (second edition), edited by
Helaine Selin, Amsterdam: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
2339. Feinberg, Richard, 2005b: A Polynesian Outlier Bibliography, compiled and edited by Richard
Feinberg. Canberra: Australian National University AnthroGlobe online Bibliographies.
Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_polynesian_outlier.html.
2340. Feinberg, Richard, 2005d: ASAO Bibliography: Publications Resulting from Sessions at
Annual Meetings of the Association for Social Anthropology in Oceania, complied and
edited by Richard Feinberg, Susan Win, Lynette Furuhashi, Karen Peacock, and Joy St.
James. Honolulu: Association for Social Anthropology in Oceania. Disponível online em
url: http://www.soc.hawaii.edu/asao/pacific/hawaiki.html. (Orig.: 1991; 1st update: 1996).
2341. Feinberg, Richard, 2005e: Reflections on the value of ethnography, Anthropological Forum,
15(3):297-306.
2342. Feinberg, Richard, 2006: Pacific Seafaring. In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited by
James Birx. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Pp. 1798-1799.
2009
CEHA 131
2343. Feinberg, Richard, 2006a: Schneider, David M. In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited

by James Birx. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Pp. 2060-2061.
2344. Feinberg, Richard, 2006b: Tikopia. In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited by James
Birx. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Pp. 2191-2196.
2345. Feinberg, Richard, 2006c: Early European–Polynesian contact reenacted: Anutan
“handling” of a foreign fishing vessel. American Ethnologist, 33(1):114-125.
2346. Feinberg, Richard, 2006d: The changing role of music in a Polynesian Outlier Community:
Anuta, Solomon Islands. Anthroglobe Journal, Disponível online em url: http://www.
anthroglobe.ca/docs/changing_music_anuta.htm. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
Feinberg, Richard, 2007: Seafaring in the Polynesian Outliers In Encyclopedia of the
History of Science, Technology, and Medicine in Non-Western Cultures, edited by Helaine
Selin, Amsterdam: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
2347. Feinberg, Richard, 2007a: Polynesian navigation, In Encyclopedia of the History of Sci
ence, Technology, and Medicine in Non-Western Cultures (second edition), edited by
Helaine Selin. Amsterdam: Kluwer Academic Publishers.
2348. Fellows Jensen, Gillian, 2001: Some new thoughts on personal names in the Viking
colonies, In Mortensen, Andras; Arge, Símun V. (ed.), Viking and Norse in the North
Atlantic: selected papers from the proceedings of the fourteenth Viking Congress,
Tórshavn, 19-30 July 2001 (Annales Societatis Scientiarum Faeroensis, 44) (Tórshavn:
Føroya Fróðskaparfelag), 152-59.
2349. Felt, L.F., 2003: Small, Isolated and Successful: Lessons from Small, Isolated Societies
of the North Atlantic, Report presented to the Royal Commission on Renewing and
Strengthening Our Place in Canada. Disponível online em URL: http://www.gov.nl.ca/
publicat/royalcomm/research/Felt.pdf. Consulta a 11 de Julho de 2009.
2350. Fenech, Katrin, 2007: Human-induced changes in the environment and landscape of the
Maltese Islands from the Neolithic to the 15th century AD: as inferred from a scientific
study of sediments from Marsa, Malta, Oxford, England: Archaeopress.
2351. Fenton, Alexander; Pálsson, Hermann edited by, 1984: The Northern and western isles
in the Viking world: survival, continuity, and change, for the Bicentenary of the National
Museum of Antiquities of Scotland, 1781-1981, Edinburgh: J. Donald Publishers; Atlantic
Highlands, N.J.: Distributed in the U.S.A. by Humanities Press.
2352. Ferdon, Edwin N., 1993: Early observations of Marquesan culture, 1595-1813, Tucson:
University of Arizona Press.
2353. Fergus, Howard A., 2003: A history of education in the British Leeward Islands, 1838-1945,
Kingston, Jamaica: University of the West Indies Press.
2354. Ferguson, James, 1992: Jamaica: stories of poverty, Race & Class, Jan 1992; vol. 34: pp.
61 - 72.
2355. Ferguson, James, 2008: A traveller’s history of the Caribbean, Northampton, Mass.:
Interlink.
2356. Fernandez Martin, F., 1999: Iles et régions ultraphériphériques de l’Union européenne.
Marseille, Éditions de l’Aube.
2357. Fernandez, C., 2000: Regionalisering och regionalism: idé, ideologi och politisk verklighet.
Lund: Statsvetenskapliga institutionen, Univ.
2358. Fernández-Armesto, Felipe, 1982: The Canary Islands after the conquest: the making of
a colonial society in the early sixteenth century, Oxford [Oxfordshire]: Clarendon Press;
2009
New York: Oxford University Press.

2359. Fernández-Armesto, Felipe, 1997: Las Islas Canarias después de la conquista: la creación
de una Sociedad Colonial a principios del siglo XVI, traducción de Gina Louse Oxbrow
e Iñaqui Iriondo Sáez. Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
2360. Fernando, Tissa, and Robert N. Kearney, 1986: Sri Lanka: Profile of an Island Republic,
Boulder, Colo.: Westview.
2361. Ferrà i Martorell, M. (Miquel), 2000: La cuina de la Revolució Francesa i les illes Balears,
Palma, Mallorca: Edicions Documenta Balear.
2362. Ferrà i Martorell, M., 1994-1995: Llegendes i tradicions de les Balears, Palma: Documenta
Balear.
2363. Ferrandini, Marie-Hélène, 2005: L’insularité dans l’œuvre de Michel Déon, in Trabelsi,
Mustapha (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand.
2364. Ferrari, Sylvie (dir.); Point, Patrick (dir.); Boyer, Michel (préf.), 2003: Eau et littoral.
Préservation et valorisation de la ressource dans les espaces insulaires, Paris; Saint-
Denis: Karthala; Université de La Réunion.
2365. Ferraro, a cura di Alessandra (textes réunis et présentés par), 2005: Altérité et insularité
: relations croisées dans les cultures francophones = Alterità e insularità: relazioni
incrociate nelle culture francophone, Udine: Forum.
2366. FERREIRA, José Medeiros, 1995: A Autonomia dos Açores na percepção espacial da
comunidade portuguesa, Ponta Delgada, Jornal de Cultura.
2367. Ferreira, Mário Olímpio Clemente, 1995: “Alguns Aspectos das Relações Comerciais entre
os Açores e o Brasil no Século XVII”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 235–245.
2368. Ferrer Vieyra, Enrique, 2007: Las islas Malvinas y el derecho internacional, Córdoba,
Argentina: Lerner Editora.
2369. Feuer, A.B. edited by. 1992: Coast watching in the Solomon Islands: the Bougainville
reports, December 1941-July 1943, foreword by Walter Lord, New York: Praeger.
2370. Feyrer, James and Bruce Sacerdote, 2009: Colonialism and Modern Income: Islands as
Natural Experiments, The Review of Economics and Statistics, vol. 91, issue 2, pages
245-262
2371. Fiannachta, Pádraig Ó. 1995: Oileáin agus oileánaigh, An Daingean: An Sagart.
2372. Ficat, C., 2000: Histoires d’îles. Paris, Sortilèges.
2373. Fick, Carolyn E., 1990: The Making of Haiti: The Saint Domingue Revolution from Below.
Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press. first ed edition (1 February).
2374. Fiehrer, Thomas, 1990: Political violence in the periphery: the Haitian massacre of 1937,
Race & Class, Jan 1990; vol. 32: pp. 1 - 20.
2375. Field, M.J., 1984: Mau: Samoa’s struggle against New Zealand oppression, Wellington.
2376. Field, Michael, 2006: Black Saturday: New Zealand’s tragic blunders in Samoa, Auckland,
N.Z.: Reed Publishing (NZ).
2377. Fieldhouse, D.K., 1981: Colonialism 1870-1945: an introduction, London.
2378. Fierro Benítez, Rodrigo, Jorge Revelo Rosero, Flor María Hidalgo, 1997: Bibliografía
científica ecuatoriana sobre las Islas Galápagos, Quito, Ecuador, Casa de la Cultura
Ecuatoriana “Benjamín Carrión”, Centro Nacional de Documentos Científicos
Ecuatorianos.
2009
CEHA 133
2379. FIF., Sunia, 1983: American Samoa; Fa’a Amerika?, in Afeaki E, et. Al..., Politics in
Polynesia, IPS/USP, 115-30.
2380. Fife, W., 1996: Education and society in PNG; towards independence 1945-1975, Man and
Culture in Oceania, 14, 61-79.
2381. Fife, Wayne, 1992: A Certain Kind of Education: Education, Culture and Society in West
New Britain, Ph.dissertation, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario, Canada.
2382. Fife, Wayne, 1992a: Crossing boundaries: dissolution as a secondary message of education
in Papua New Guinea, Journal of Educational Development, 12(3):213-221.
2383. Fife, Wayne, 1995: “The look of rationality and the bureaucratization of consciousness in
Papua New Guinea”, in Ethnology, 34(2): 129-141.
2384. Figueroa Colon, edited by Julio C., 1996: The scientific survey of Puerto Rico and the
Virgin Islands: an eighty-year reassessment of the islands’ natural history, New York:
New York Academy of Sciences.
2385. Filer, C., Ed., 1997: The Political Economy of Forest Mangement in Papua New Guinea,
Monograph 32. Port Moresby and London, National Research Institute & IIED.
2386. Filho, João Lopes, 2001:“Cabo Verde, as Ilhas Hesperitanas”, in Oceanos, nº 46, pp. 84
– 96.
2387. Filliot Jean-Michel, 1985: Bibliographie de l’histoire des Seychelles, Paris: ORSTOM, 53 p.
2388. Filliot Jean-Michel, 1985: Le livre du Maître de l’Histoire des Seychelles, sl: ORSTOM.
2389. Finazzi-Agrò, Ettore, 1993: A invenção da ilha: tópica literária e topologia imaginária na
descoberta do Brasil, Rio de Janeiro, RJ: PUC-Rio Historia.
2390. Finlan, Alastair, 2002: “British Special Forces and the Falklands conflict: Twenty years on”,
in Defense and Security Analysis, 18:4, 319-32.
2391. Finlan, Alastair, 2002a: “British Special Forces and the Falklands War of 1982”, in Small
Wars and Insurgencies, 13:3,75-96.
2392. Finlan, Alastair, 2004: The Royal Navy in the Falklands Conflict and the Gulf War: culture
and strategy (British politics and society). London: Cass.
2393. Finlan, Alastair, 2005: War culture: The Royal Navy and the Falklands Conflict, In Badsey,
Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons
for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London ; New York: Cass, 193-212.
2394. Finnegan, Ruth; Orbell, Margaret, edited by. 1995: South Pacific oral traditions, Bloomington:
Indiana University Press.
2395. Finney, B. R., et. al., 1989: Wait for the west wind, JPS, vol. 98(3), 261-302.
2396. Finney, Ben, 1992: From Sea to Space, Palmerston North, NZ: Massey University.
2397. Finney, B., 1994: The other one-third of the globe, Journal of World History, Vol 5/2, pp.273-
98.
2398. Finney, Ben R., 2003: Sailing in the Wake of the Ancestors, Honolulu: Bishop Museum
Press.
2399. Fiquet, testi riuniti da Françoise, 2000: Bonali Marguerite Yourcenar dall’Isola di Creta
all’île heureuse: [giornata di Studi sull’opera di Marguerite Yourcenar (Pontremoli, Salone
Comunale 28 febbraio 1998)], Cremona: Fantigrafica.
2400. Firth S., 1989: Sovereignty and independence in the contemporary Pacific, TCP, 1, 1, 75-
96, 1989.
2009
2401. Firth S., 1997: The war in the Pacific, in Denoon D, ed, 1997, The Cambridge history of the
Pacific Islanders, Melbourne, CUP pp.291-323.
2402. Firth, R., 1936/1983: We, The Tikopia: A Sociological Study of Kinship in Primitive Polynesia,
Stanford CA, Stanford University Press.
2403. Firth, Raymond William, [1939] 2004: Primitive Polynesian Economy, London: Routledge.
2404. Firth, Raymond William, [1951] 2000: Elements of Social Organization, Beacon Press.
2405. Firth, Raymond William, [1959] 2004a: Social Change in Tikopia. Routledge.
2406. Firth, Raymond William, 1984: ‘Roles of Women and Men in a Sea Fishing Economy:
Tikopia Compared with Kelantan’ in The Fishing Culture of the World: Studies in Ethnology,
Cultural Ecology and Folklore, Béla Gunda (ed), Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadó 1145-1170.
2407. Firth, Raymond William, 1985: Taranga Fakatikopia ma Taranga Fakainglisi: Tikopia-
English Dictionary.
2408. Firth, Raymond William, 1990: Tikopia Songs: Poetic and Musical Art of a Polynesian
People of the Solomon Islands, Cambridge university Press.
2409. Firth, Raymond William; McLean, Mervyn, 1990a: Tikopia songs: poetic and musical
art of a Polynesian people of the Solomon Islands, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge
University Press.
2410. Firth, Raymond William, [1996] 2005: Religion: A Humanist Interpretation, Taylor & Francis.
2411. Firth, Raymond William, 2001. “The Creative Contribution of Indigenous people to Their
Ethnography. Journal of the Polynesian Society, Vol. 110, No. 3, 241–245.
2412. Firth, Raymond William, 2001a: ‘Tikopia Dreams: Personal Images of Social Reality’,
Journal of the Polynesian Society, 110(1):7–29.
2413. Firth, S., 1982: The Germans in New Guinea, in R.J. May & H. Nelson (eds.), Melanesia
beyonddiversity, vol. 1, Canberra.
2414. Firth, S., 1987: Nuclear playground, Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press.
2415. Firth, S., 1987a: The nuclear issue in the Pacific Islands, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 21
(4), 1986: 202-216.
2416. Firth, S., 1989: Labour in German New Guinea. S. Latukefu, Ed. Papua New Guinea: A
Century of Colonial Impact 1884-1984. Port Moresby, National Research Institute and
University of Papua New Guinea, pp. 179-202.
2417. Firth, S., 1989a: Sovereignty and independence in the contemporary Pacific, The
Contemporary Pacific, vol. 1 (1-2),: 75-96.
2418. Firth, S., 1989b: Review article: the contemporary history of Fiji”, Journal of Pacific history,
vol. 24 (2), 242-246.
2419. Firth, S., 1993: The calling of the HMS Seringapatam at Rapanui..., Pacific Studies, Vol 16,
No 1, pp.67-84.
2420. Firth, S., 1994: “Strategic and nuclear issues”, in Howe KR, Kiste RC and Lal BV, eds,
Tides of History, Allen and Unwin, 300-24.
2421. Firth, S., 1997: “The war in the Pacific”, in D Denoon, ed, The Cambridge History of the
Pacific Islanders, CUP, 291-23.
2422. Firth, S.; von Strokirch, K., 1997: “A nuclear Pacific”, in D. Denoon, ed, The Cambridge
History of the Pacific Islanders, CUP, 324-58.
2009
CEHA 135
2423. Firth, S., 1999: Vancouver’s vision of native peoples; the northwest coast and Hawaii,
in A Frost and J Samson, eds, Pacific empires; essays in honour of Glyndwr Williams,
Melbourne, MUP, pp.147-64.
2424. Firth, S. (ed.), 2006: Globalisation and Governance in the Pacific Islands, Canberra Firth,
S., 1989: Review article: the contemporary history of Fiji”, Journal of Pacific history, vol.
24 (2), 1989: 242-246.
2425. Firth, S., 2000: The Pacific islands and the globalization agenda. The contemporary Pacific,
n°1, p.178-192.
2426. Firth, Stewart, 1983: New Guinea Under the Germans. Carlton, Australia: Melbourne
University Press.
2427. Fischer, Gerard and Encontre, 1998: The Economic Disadvantages of Island Developing
Countries: Problems of Smallness, remoteness and Economies of Scale in Baldacchino,
G. and Greenwood, R (eds.), Competing Strategies of Socio-Economic Development
for Small Islands. The Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island
Charlottetown Prince Edward Island, Canada, pp. 69-87.
2428. Fischer, Steven Roger, 1995: Preliminary Evidence for Cosmogonic Texts in Rapanui’s
Rongorongo Inscriptions, Journal of the Polynesian Society, 104. 303-21.
2429. Fischer, Steven Roger, 1997: Rongo Rongo, the Easter Island Script: History, Traditions,
Texts, Oxford and N.Y.: Oxford University Press.
2430. Fischer, Steven R., 2002: A history of the Pacific Islands, New York: Palgrave.
2431. Fisher, Ian, 2001: Early Medieval sculpture in the West Highlands and Islands, The Royal
commission on the ancient and historical monuments of Scotland: and the Society of
antiquaries of Scotland.
2432. Fisher, Jon, 1983: Uninhabited and deserted islands, Port Townsend, WA: Loompanics
Unlimited.
2433. Fisher, Robin, 1999: Vancouver’s vision of native peoples; the northwest coast and Hawaii,
in A Frost and J Samson, eds, Pacific empires; essays in honour of Glyndwr Williams,
Melbourne, MUP, pp.147-64.
2434. Fitzgerald, Maureen H., 2001: Whisper of the mother: from menarche to menopause among
women in Pohnpei, in collaboration with Eugenia Samuel and Linda Phillip; foreword by
Mac Marshall, Westport, Conn.; London: Bergin & Garvey.
2435. Fitz-Gibbon, Spencer, Not mentioned in despatches: the history and mythology of the
Battle of Goose Green, Cambridge: Lutterworth Press.
2436. Fitzhugh, William W.; Chaussonnet, Valérie edited by. 1994: Ann Fienup-Riordan -- Aleut
in the Kurile Islands: 1820-1870, in Anthropology of the North Pacific Rim, Washington:
Smithsonian Institution Press.
2437. Fitzpatrick, edited by Judith M., 2001: The Anuta Islanders, In Endangered Peoples of
Oceania, Westport, CT: Greenwood Press. Pp. 17-32.
2438. Fitzpatrick, M., [et al.], 2001: Madagascar: tradewinds, taboos and traditions, Fourth
edition, Lonely Planet.
2439. Fitzpatrick, Scott M. Westport, 2004: Voyages of discovery: the archaeology of islands,
Conn., London, Praeger.
2440. Fitzpatrick, S., 2007: ‘Archaeology’s Contribution to Island Studies’, Island Studies Journal.
2441. Fitzpatrick, S.M., Nelson, G.C. and Clark, G. 2008: Small scattered fragments do not a
2009
dwarf make: Biological and archaeological data indicate that prehistoric inhabitants of
Palau were normal sized. PLoS ONE, 3(8): e3015 (1-12).
2442. Flacourt, Étienne de, 1991: Histoire de la Grande Isle Madagascar (1658), Saint Denis.
2443. Flambart, Marie-Madeleine, 2000 : Îles du Ponant: de Chausey à l’île d’Aix, Éd. «Ouest-
France.
2444. Flannery, Tim (ed. & intr.), 2001: The life and adventures of John Nicol, mariner, Edinburgh:
Canongate.
2445. Fleming, Euan and Pauline Fleming, 2006: A Reappraisal of the Role of Agriculture in
Economic Growth in Melanesian Countries, No 25715, Annual Meeting, August 12-18,
2006, Queensland, Australia from International Association of Agricultural Economists.
Disponível online em url: http://ideas.repec.org/p/ags/iaae06/25715.html. Consulta a 15
de Agosto de 2009.
2446. Fletcher, C.B., 1917: The new Pacific; British policy and German aims, London.
2447. Fletcher, Shirley E. A. 1984: Enhancing the Positive Socio-Cultural Impacts of Tourism in
the Caribbean, Vol. 2. Reference Guidelines for Enhancing the Positive Socio-Cultural
and Environmental Impacts of Tourism Washington, D.C.:International Trade and Tourism
Division, Department of Economic Affairs,Executive Secretariat for Economic and Social
Affairs, Organization of American States.
2448. Fleury, Christian, 2006: Discontinuité et systèmes spatiaux: la combinaison île / frontière
à travers les exemples de Jersey, de Saint-Pierre-et-Miquelon et de Trinidad; sous la
direction de Pascal Buléon, Université de Caen. Université de soutenance.
2449. Flinn, Derek, 1994: Geology of Yell and some neighbouring islands in Shetland London:
H.M.S.O..
2450. Floch, Daniel, 1993: Les oubliés de l’île Saint-Paul: des Crozet et des Kerguelen, Rennes:
Ouest-France.
2451. FLOHIC, 1998: Le patrimoine des communes de la Guadeloupe, [collaboration
rédactionnelle et photographie, Catherine Debedde-Georgel... et al.], Charenton-le-Pont,
Editions FLOHIC.
2452. Flood, Bo, Beret E. Strong, William Flood, 1999: Pacific Island legends: tales from
Micronesia, Melanesia, Polynesia, and Australia, illustrations by Connie J. Adams,
Honolulu, Hawai’i : Bess Press.
2453. Flood, Bo, 2001: Marianas island legends: myth and magic, Honolulu, Hawai’i: Bess Press.
2454. Flores, Jorge Manuel, 2001: A Ilha de Ceilão e o Império Asiático Português, in Oceanos,
nº.46, (Abril/Junho), Lisboa, CNDP, pp.98-113.
2455. Florido Castro, Amara, 1998: Panaderías, molinerías y otras industrias derivadas en Las
Palmas de Gran Canaria durante la Restauración: estudio de arqueología industrial, Las
Palmas de Gran Canaria, Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
2456. Floyd, A. G., 1954: Final report on ethnobotanical expedition, West Nakanai, New Britain,
July-August 1954, Unpublished report, Lae, Division of Botany, Department of Forests.
2457. Foighel, I., 1978: A Framework for Local Autonomy: The Greenland Case, in Models of
Autonomy (pp. 31 52), Y. Dinstein (ed.), New Brunswick: Transaction Books.
2458. Foner, Nancy, 1984:“Jamaicans in New York City.” Migration Today, 12: 6-12.
2459. Foner, Nancy, 1983: “Jamaican Migrants: A Comparative Analysis of the New York and
London Experience.” Occasional Paper No. 36. New York Research Program in Inter-
2009
CEHA 137
American Affairs, New York University.

2460. Foner, Nancy, 1985: “Race and Color: Jamaican Migrants in London and New York City.”
International Migration Review 19: 708-727.
2461. Foner, Nancy, 1986: “Sex Roles and Sensibilities: Jamaican Women in New York and
London.” International Migration: The Female Experience, edited by Rita Simon and
Caroline Brettell. Totowa, N.J.: Rowman and Allanheld, pp. 133-151.
2462. Foner, Nancy, 1987: “The Jamaicans: Race and Ethnicity among Migrants in New York.”
New Immigrants in New York, edited by Nancy Foner. New York: Columbia University
Press, pp. 195-217.
2463. Foner, Nancy, 1987a: “Jamaicans in London and New York: A Comparative Note,” New
Community 14: 182-185. Special issue on Racial and Ethnic Relations in Britain: Past,
Present and Future.
2464. Foner, Nancy, 1997: “Jamaicans.” American Immigrant Cultures. New York: Macmillan
Reference, pp. 491-496.
2465. Foner, Nancy, 2000: From Ellis Island to JFK: New York’s Two Great Waves of Immigration.
New Haven and New York: Yale University Press and Russell Sage Foundation.
2466. Foner, Nancy, 2001: “From Ellis Island to JFK: Education in New York’s Two Great Waves
of Immigration.” Brandeis Review, 21: 32-37.
2467. Foner, edited by Nancy, 2001a: Islands in the city: West Indian migration to New York,
2468. Foner, Nancy, 2008: “A (Sheltered) Island of Acceptance,” Contexts, 7 (Fall): 64-66.
2469. Foner, Nancy, 2009: “Gender and Migration: West Indians in Comparative Perspective,”
International Migration, 47: 3-29.
2470. Fonseca, G.A.B. da., 1981: Biogeografia Insular aplicada a conservação, Revista Brasileira
de geografia, no 3, pp. 383-398.
2471. Fonseca, Luís Adão da, 1999: «O Horizonte Insular na Experiência Cultural da Primeira
Expansão Portuguesa», Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.) Actas do Congresso
Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama a Portugal, Ilhas Terceira
e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, 2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos Açores/
93.
2472. Fonseca, Vilma Lurdes da, 2001: A presença dos elementos naturais na construção de
identidades, memória e história dos lugares: o caso da insularidade e sua abordagem
pela literatura. Revista Virtual de História, São Paulo, v. 08; Fonseca, Vilma. L. 1998:
A Insularidade na obra do cubano José Lezama Lima. In: VIII Semana de Pedagogia -
Trajetórias e perspectivas, 1998, Maringá. Anais VIII Semana de Pedagogia - Trajetórias
e perspectivas. Maringá: Universidade Estadual de Maringá - Departamento de teoria e
prática da educação, v. 01. p. 92-92.
2473. Fonseca, Vilma. L. 2000: Insularidade: os horizontes do processo criativo. In: XV Encontro
Regional de História - História no ano 2000: Perspectivas, São Paulo - SP. Programa e
Resumos do XV Encontro Regional de História - História no ano 2000: Perspectivas. São
Paulo: Editora da Universidade do Sagrado Coração, v. 01. p. 141-142.
2474. Fonseca, Vilma. L. 2001: José Lezama Lima e a busca da Identidade Insular: Uma reflexão
sobre a Fronteira Imaginária, Diálogos Revista Electrónica de História, Universidad de
Costa Rica.
2009
2475. Fonseca, Vilma. L. 2004: Fronteiras Imaginárias, fronteiras Insulares: José Lezama Lima
e a expressão poética cubana. Revista Brasileira do Caribe, Goias - Brasil, v. IV, n. 8, p.
207-235.
2476. Fontaine, Jannick, 2003: Le monde du travail à la Réunion: archaïsmes et mutations d’une
société post-coloniale en quête d’intégration; sous la direction de Jean-Louis Guébourg,
Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université de la Réunion. Université de soutenance
2477. Forbes, Annabella Keith, 1987: Unbeaten tracks in islands of the Far East : experiences of
a naturalist’s wife in the 1880’s, Singapore: Oxford University Press, xii, 305 p.
2478. Ford, Douglas, 1989: The Pacific islanders, New York: Chelsea House.
2479. Ford, E., 1938: “Artificial cranial deformation in New Britain”, in The Medical Journal of
Australia 2:729-735.
2480. Forde, Brendan, 1989-90: “Inishkea: a glimpse of island life and customs in the last
century”, in North Mayo Historic Journal, 2:3, 34-38.
2481. Forestier Hubert, Guillaud D., Meyers K., Simanjuntak T., 2008: Mentawai. L’île des
Hommes Fleurs, IRD, Romain Pages Éd..
2482. Forman, Charles W., 1982: The island churches of the South Pacific: emergence in the
twentieth century, Maryknoll, NY: Orbis Books.
2483. Forster, John Reinold 1996: Observations Made During a Voyage Round the World, on
Physical Geography, Natural History and Ethic Philosophy, New Edition: Eds. Nicholas.
2484. Forsyth, David J. C., 1996: Mobilising human resources for development and growth in the
Pacific Islands, Suva: University of the South Pacific.
2485. Forte, edited by Maximilian C., 2006: Indigenous resurgence in the contemporary
Caribbean: Amerindian survival and revival, New York: Peter Lang.
2486. Forth, Gregory L., 1991: Space and place in Eastern Indonesia, Canterbury: University of
Kent, Centre of South-East Asian Studies.
2487. Fortune, Félix-Hilaire, 2000: Les îles françaises d’Amérique, De la vision géopolitique de
Richelieu à l’Union européenne, Paris: L’Harmattan.
2488. Fortune, Félix-Hilaire, 2002: Antilles Françaises: De la Nature et des Hommes: Traits
Géophysiques. De la Dynamique du Globe aux Antilles, L’Occupation humaine des îles,
Environnement et Protection, Paris: L’Harmattan.
2489. Forty, George, 1999: Channel Islands at war: a German perspective, Shepperton, Ian Allan.
2490. Fossen, Anthony van, 1995: “Corporate Power in the Pacific Islands”, in Current Sociology,
vol. 43: pp. 115 - 133.
2491. Fossier, Arnaud e Gardella, Édouard, 2003: «Insularités théoriques. De la circulation
conceptuelle à la communication langagière entre chercheurs», Tracés. Revue de
Sciences humaines, n° 3, L’île, juillet. Disponível online em URL: http://traces.revues.org/
index3583.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
2492. Foster, Kevin, 1999: Fighting fictions: war, narrative and national identity, London, Sterling,
Va., Pluto Press.
2493. Foster, Robert J., 1995: Nation making: emergent identities in postcolonial Melanesia, Ann
Arbor: University of Michigan Press, c1995.
2494. Foster, Robert John, 2002: Materializing the nation: commodities, consumption, and media
in Papua New Guinea, Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
2009
CEHA 139
2495. Foster, Robert L., 1993: Disaster in paradise, St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands: Trebor Retsof
Publications.
2496. Foster, Simon, 1995: Hit the beach! amphibious warfare from the Plains of Abraham to
San Carlos Water, London: Arms and Armour; New York, NY: Distributed in the USA by
Sterling Pub. Co..
2497. Foucher, Michel, 1984: Les Antilles, Iles de la Mediterranee d’Amerique: presentation
geopolitique, Problemes d’amerique latine, no 71, p. p. 32-65
2498. Fougère, Eric, 1981: Iles de Méditerranée, CNRS-Paris.
2499. Fougère, Eric, 1994: Les Voyages Et L’ancrage. Representation De L’espace Insulaire
A L’age Classique Et Aux Lumieres (1615-1797); Sous La Direction De Yves Chevrel,
Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Litterature Civil.COMP: Paris 4:
2500. Fougère, Eric, 1995: Les voyages et l’ancrage: représentation de l’espace insulaire à l’Age
classique et aux Lumières (1615-1797), Paris: L’Harmattan.
2501. Fougère, Eric, 1997: Îles, autres terres (carnets de route), Nouméa: Grain de sable.
2502. Fougère, Eric, 2001: La peine en littérature et la prison dans son histoire: solitude et
servitude, Paris.
2503. Fougère, Eric, 2002: Île-prison, bagne et déportation, Paris: L’Harmattan.
2504. Fougère, Eric, 2002a: Le grand livre du bagne: en Guyane et Nouvelle-Calédonie, Ste
Clotilde.
2505. Fougère, Eric, 2004: Escales en littérature insulaire: îles et balises, Paris: Harmattan.
2506. Fougère, Eric, 2004a: «Le malheur insulaire: une géographie de la peine», in Îles funestes,
îles bienheureuses, textes réunis et présentés par…, Paris: Transboréal.
2507. Fougère, Eric, 2005: «Insularité politique et politique insulaire: le cas des voyages imaginaires
et des utopies», in L’insularité, études rassemblées par Mustapha Trabelsi, Clermont-
Ferrand: Presses universitaires Blaise Pascal.
2508. Fougère, Eric, 2008: Des indésirables à la Désirade, Matoury (Guyane).
2509. Fouquin, M.; Siroën, J.-M., 1998: “Régionalisme et multilatéralisme sont-ils antinomiques?”,
Économie internationale, n°74, p. 3-156
2510. Fournet-Guérin, Catherine, 2006: Une géographie musicale et cinématographique de
Madagascar: regards géographiques sur le film Mahaleo, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 233,
Janvier-Mars. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index195.html. Consulta
2511. Fournier, Pierre, 1998: Une zone frontière franco-anglaise: conflits autour des îles anglo-
normandes, Revue de la Manche, 40:159, 7-48.
2512. Fourtina, Hervé, 1987: Îles tropicales: insularité, insularisme, Bordeaux, CRET, coll..
2513. Fourtina, sous la direction de Hervé, Nathalie Jaëck, Joël Richard, 2008: Insularités [publié
par le] Groupe d’études et de recherches britanniques, Université Michel de Montaigne-
Bordeaux 3; Pessac: Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
2514. Fowler, R. M. (Richard Murray), 1980: The Furneaux group, Bass Strait: a history, Canberra,
A.C.T. : Roebuck.
2515. Fox, James J., edited by. 1980: The Flow of life: essays on eastern Indonesia, contributors,
Marie Jeanne Adams ... [et al.], Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press.
2516. Fox, James J.; Sather, Clifford, ed. 1996: Origins, ancestry and alliance: explorations
2009
in Austronesian ethnography, Canberra: Dept. of Anthropology, Australian National

University, 1996.
2517. Fox, Robert, 1985: Antarctica and the South Atlantic: discovery, development and dispute,
London: British Broadcasting Corporation.
2518. Fox, Robin, 1982: “Principles and pragmatics on Tory Island”, In Cohen, Anthony P.
(ed.), Belonging: identity and social organisation in British rural cultures, Manchester:
Manchester University Press, 50-71.
2519. Frace, Ryan, K., 2008: Religious Toleration in the Wake of Revolution: Scotland on the Eve
of Enlightenment (1688-1710s), History, Volume 93, Number 311, July, pp. 355-375(21)
2520. Fraenkel, Ed. Jon, Stewart Firth & Brij V. Lal, 2009: The 2006 military takeover in Fiji.
Disponível online em url: http://epress.anu.edu.au/coup_coup_citation.html. Consulta em
2521. Fraenkel, Jon, 2002: Strategic Registration from Metropolis to Periphery in the Republic
of the Marshall Islands, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 37, No. 3 (Dec.), pp. 299-312
2522. Fraenkel, Jon and Stewart Firth (eds), 2007: From election to coup in Fiji The 2006
campaign and its aftermath, Australian National university- Epress, Co-published with
Asia Pacific Press.
2523. France, L., 1991: An application of the tourism destination area life cycle to Barbados,
Tourist Review, 46(3), pp. 25-31.
2524. Franco, José Eduardo (coordenação), 2008: Cultura madeirense: temas e problemas,
Porto, Campo das Letras.
2525. François, Genièvre, 1999: La quête insulaire: Approche physique, culturelle, et symbolique
de l’île; sous la dir. de Robert Hérin, Caen: [s.n].
2526. Franda, Marcus F., 1982: The Seychelles: unquiet islands, Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press.
2527. Franklin W. Knight, 1994: The New Caribbean and the United States, Annals of the
American Academy of Political and Social Science, Vol. 533, Trends in U. S.-Caribbean
Relations (May), pp. 33-47.
2528. Franklin, Cynthia, Ruth Hsu, Suzanne Kosanke, 2000: Navigating islands and continents:
conversations and contestations in and around the Pacific: selected essays, Honolulu:
College of Languages, Linguistics and Literature, University of Hawai’i and the East-West
Center: Distributed by University of Hawai’i Press.
2529. Franks, Jill, 2006: Islands and the modernists: the allure of isolation in art, literature, and
science, Jefferson, N.C.: McFarland & Co.
2530. Frankson, A. S., 2008: A Caribbean identity: memoirs of the colonial service / A.S.
Frankson,London; New York: Radcliffe Press.
2531. Fraser, David, 2000: The Jews of the Channel Islands and the rule of law, 1940-1945: quite
contrary to the principles of British justice, Brighton, Portland, OR, Sussex Academic
Press.
2532. Fraser, David, 2007: Un antisémitisme très britannique: l’application des lois anti-juives sur
les îles anglo-normandes (1940-1945), In Prum, Michel (ed.), Changements d’aire: de la
“race” dans l’aire anglophone (Racisme et eugénisme), Paris: L’Harmattan, 19-38.
2533. Fraser, edited by Lyndon and Katie Pickle, 2002: Shifting Centres: Women and Migration
in New Zealand History, Otago University press.
2534. Fraser, Lyndon, 2002: To Tara via Holyhead: The Emergence of Irish Catholic Ethnicity in
2009
CEHA 141
Nineteenth-Century Christchurch, New Zealand, Journal of Social History, Volume 36,

Number 2, Winter, pp. 431-458.
2535. Frawley-Holler, Janis, 2003: Island wise: lessons in living from the islands of the world,
New York: Broadway Books.
2536. Freedman, Lawrence, 2005, 2007: The official history of the Falklands Campaign (Whitehall
histories: government official history series), Rev. and updated, 2 vols., edn. London:
Routledge.
2537. Freedman, Lawrence, 2005: The impact of the Falklands Conflict on international affairs,
9-22.
2538. Freedman, Lawrence; Gamba-Stonehouse, Virginia, 1990: Signals of war, the Falklands
conflict of 1982, London: Faber.
2539. Freeman, Bill, 1999: A magical place: Toronto Islands and its people, contemporary
photography by David Laurence, Toronto: James Lorimer.
2540. Freeman, Derek, 1983: Margaret Mead and Samoa: the making and unmaking of an
anthropological myth, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press.
2541. Freeman, John Derek, 1999: The Fateful Hoaxing of Margaret Mead: A Historical Analysis
of her Samoan Research, Basic Books.
2542. Freeman, Julian, edited by, 1989: Landscapes from a high latitude: Icelandic art 1909-
1989, in a collaboration between Listasafn Islands (The National Gallery of Iceland) and
Brighton Polytechnic Gallery; foreword by Magnus Magnusson. London: Published for
the Govt. of Iceland and the City of Reykjavík by Lund Humphries.
2543. Freire Guevara, Enrique, 1999: Archipielago del llanto, Quito, Ecuador, Casa de la Cultura
Ecuatoriana Benjamín Carrión.
2544. Freitas, António Aragão Figueira de e Gilda Vieira, 1981-1984: Madeira-Investigação
bibliográfica, Funchal, DRAC, 3 vols.
2545. Frere, Sheppard Sunderland, 1987: “Roman Britain in 1986, 1: Sites Explored”, in Britannia,
18, 301-59, Publisher: Society for the Promotion of Roman Studies.
2546. Freud, Claude; Richard, Jacques; Papazian, Vatche, 1986: Dynamique des systems
agraires: l’exercice du developpement, In L’Ile de San Nicolau (Republique du Cap Vert):
un type de detournement de l’aide, ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et
Technique Outre Mer, Paris, France, p. 227-276.
2547. Freud, C., 2000: “Different paths to free trade: the gains from regionalism”, The Quaterly
Journal of Economics, n°4, p. 1317-1341.
2548. Freyss, Jean (dir.), Bonnemaison, Joùl (dir.), 1997: Le Pacifique insulaire. Nations, aides,
espaces, Revue tiers monde, 01/04/1997, vol. vol. 38, no 149.
2549. Friedman, Hal M., 1993: “The Beast in Paradise: The United States Navy in Micronesia,
1943–1947”, Pacific Historical Review, 62 (May 1993): 173–195.
2550. Friedman, H.M., 1994: Arguing over empire; American interservice and interdepartmental
rivalry over Micronesia 1943-47, Journal of Pacific History, 29, 1, 36-48.
2551. Friedman, H.M., 1997: Races undesirable from a military point of view; United States
security in the Pacific Islands 1945-47, Journal of Pacific History, 32, 1, 49-70.
2552. Friedman, H.M., 1997: The open door in paradise? United States strategic security and
2009
economic policy in the Pacific Islands 1945-47, PS, 20, 1, 63-88.

2553. Friedman, Hal M., 2001: Creating an American lake: United States imperialism and strategic
security in the Pacific Basin, 1945-1947, Westport, Conn., Greenwood Press.
2554. Friedman, Jonathan, and Edvard Hviding, 2001 Islands Connected: Making PacificWorlds.
In Migrations and Exchange in Historical Perspective, edited by Paul Wallin, 4–9. No
Barriers Seminar Papers, Vol 3. Oslo: The Kon-Tiki Museum, Institute for Pacific
Archaeology and Cultural History.
2555. Friedman, Hal M., Governing the American Lake: the US defense and administration of the
Pacific, 1945-1947, East Lansing: Michigan State University Press.
2556. Friedman, J., 1985: Captain Cook and the world system, Journal of Pacific History, vol.
20(4), 1985: 191-208.
2557. Friedman, Jonathan, 1988: “A Review Essay: No History Is an Island: An Exchange
Between Jonathan Friedman and Marshall Sahlins”, in Critique of Anthropology, Dec
1988; vol. 8: pp. 7 - 39.
2558. Friedman, Jonathan; Carrier, James G., ed. 1996: Melanesian modernities, Lund, Sweden:
Lund University Press, 1996.
2559. Friend, T., 2003: Indonesian Destinies, Harvard University Press.
2560. Friends of Denmark Danish Information Service, 1945: A Brief Bibliography of Denmark
and Greenland, Friends of Denmark Danish Information Service.
2561. Frimigacci, Daniel ... [et al.], Ko le fonu tu’a limulimua = La tortue au dos moussu: textes
de tradition orale de Futuna, Paris: Peeters.
2562. Fritz, Georg., 1986: The Chamorro: A History and Ethnography of the Mariana,. Translated by
Elfriede Craddock, Edited by Scott Russel, Saipan, CM: Division of Historic Preservation.
2563. Fröhlich, Anne Marie, 1988: Inseln in der Weltliteratur, Nachwort von Federico Hindermann,
Zürich: Manesse.
2564. From Rio to Rai: Environment and Development in Papua New Guinea up to 2000 and
beyond Volume 2: Voices Unheard and Unheeded, Port Moresby, University of Papua
New Guinea Press.
2565. Frost, A. and Samson J., eds, 1999: Pacific empires; essays in honour of Glyndwr Williams,
Melbourne, MUP.
2566. Frustier, sous la direction de Pierre, 2007: Les identités insulaires face au tourisme: actes
du colloque organisé par le CREC, Centre de recherche éducation-culture, Université de
Nantes, La Roche-sur-Yon, 1er et 2 juin 2006, La Roche-sur-Yon: Siloë.
2567. Fry, G., 1981: Regionalism and international politics of the South Pacific, Pacific Affairs,
Vol 54, 3, pp.458-60 and 476-84.
2568. Fry, G., 1982: Melanesian and South Pacific regional politics, in May R. and Nelson H, eds,
Melanesia beyond diversity, Canberra, RSPacS, ANU, pp.651-73.
2569. Fry, G., 1983: A nuclear free zone for the Southwest Pacific; prospects and significance,
Working Paper, No 75, Canberra, SDSC, ANU.
2570. Fry, G., 1987: Regional arms control in the South Pacific. in Ball, D. and Mack, A., eds, The
future of arms control, Canberra, ANU pp.137-56.
2571. Fry, Gerald, Rufino Mauricio, 1987a: Pacific Basin and Oceania, Oxford, England, Santa
Barbara, Calif., Clio Press.
2009
CEHA 143
2572. Fry, G., 1993: At the margin; the South Pacific and the changing world order, in Richardson
JL and Leaver R, eds, The post-cold war order; diagnoses and prognoses, Sydney, Allen
and Unwin.
2573. Fry, G., 1994: Climbing back on the map? The South Pacific Forum and the new development
orthodoxy, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 29,3, pp.64-72.
2574. Fry, G., 1996: Framing the Islands; knowledge and power in changing Australian images of
the South Pacific, Canberra, Working Paper, Dept of International Relations ANU.
2575. Fry, G., 1997: Australia and the South Pacific; the rationalist ascendancy, in Cotton, J.
and Ravenhill, J, eds, Seeking Asian engagement; Australia in world affairs 1991-95,
Melbourne, OUP, p.291-308.
2576. Fry, G., 1997: Framing the Islands; knowledge and power in changing Australian images
of the South Pacific, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 9, 2, 305-344.
2577. Fry, G., 1997a: The South Pacific experiment; reflections on the origins of regional identity,
Journal of Pacific History, Vol 32, 2, pp.180-202.
2578. Fry, G., Ed. 1991: Australia’s regional security, Sydney, Allen and Unwin.
2579. Fry, G., Ed. 1991: The region in review, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 3/2, pp.384-8.
2580. Fry, G., Ed. 1991a: Australia’s South Pacific policy; from strategic denial to constructive
commitment, Working Paper No 8, Canberra, RSPacS, ANU.
2581. Fry, G., Ed. 1991b: Constructive commitment with the South pacific; Munroe doctrine or
new partnership, in, Australia’s regional security, Sydney, Allen and Unwin.
2582. Fry, G., Ed. 1991c: The region in review, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 3/2, pp.384-8.
2583. Fry, G., Ed. 1992: Australia and the South Pacific, in Boyce RJ and Angel JR, eds, Diplomacy
in the marketplace; Australia in world affairs 1981-90.
2584. Fry, G., Ed. 1992a: Peace keeping in the South Pacific; some questions and prior
considerations, Dept of International relations, Canberra ANU.
2585. Fry, G., Ed. 1992b: The region in review; international issues and events 1991, The
Contemporary Pacific, Vol 4/2, pp.379-86.
2586. Fry, G., Ed. 1993: The region in review; international issues and events 1992, The
Contemporary Pacific, Vol 5/2, pp.390-402.
2587. Frye, Galliard; Demeritt, Carolyn and Deloria, Vine, 1998: As Long as the Waters Flow:
Native Americans in the South and the East, John F. Blair Pub..
2588. Frynas, J.G.; Wood, G.; Oliveira, R.M.S. Soares de, 2003: Business and Politics in São
Tomé e Príncipe: From Cocoa Monoculture to Petro-State, LUSOTOPIE, 2003, no 2003,
p. 33-58, bibliogr. notes, 1 tabl.. (Version mise à jour de l’article publié dans African Affairs,
CII (1), January 2003.)
2589. Fuchs, L.H., 1961: Hawaii Pono; a social history, Harvest/HBJ, 1961.
2590. Fujii, Reiichi, 1987: Nantō bungaku joron, Ōsaka-shi: Kaifūsha.
2591. Fujii, Sadakazu, 1990: “Omoimatsugane” wa utau uta ka: Ko Nihon bungaku hasseiron,
zoku, Tōkyō: Shintensha.
2592. Fuligni, Bruno, 2003: L’île à éclipses: histoire des apparitions et disparitions d’une terre
française en Méditerranée, Paris: Les Editions de Paris.
2593. Fullagar, R. L. and et al..., 1991: Obsidian sources at Mopir, West New Britain Province,
Papua New Guinea, Archaeology in Oceania, 26(3): 11O-14.
2009
2594. Fullagar, R. L.; [et al.], 1991: “Research report: obsidian sources at Mopir, West New Britain
Province, Papua New Guinea”, in Archaeology in Oceania 26: 111-114.
2595. Funk, FLS Matt, On the Problem of Dependent People: hyperbolic discounting in Atlantic
Canadian island jurisdictions, MPRA Paper from University Library of Munich, Germany.
Disponível online em url: http://mpra.ub.uni-muenchen.de/14522/. Consulta em 29 de
Julho de 2009.
2596. Fursdon, Edward, 1988: The Falklands aftermath: picking up the pieces, 1988.
2597. Furt, Jean-Marie (Directeur scientifique); Michel, Frank (Directeur scientifique), 2006:
Tourismes & identities, Paris: L’Harmattan.
2598. Furuki, Toshiaki (ed.), 2006: Self-Governance of Islands in the Era of Regions: A
Comparative Study of the Åland Islands in the Baltic Sea and the Ryukyu Islands in the
East China Sea, Japan, Institute of Social Sciences, Chuo University.
2599. Fusimalohi, T. and J. Crossland, 1980: Report on the South Pacific Commission Deep Sea
Fisheries Development Project in the West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, 5 Sept.-14
Dec., 1979, Noumea, South Pacific Commission.
2600. Fuson, Robert Henderson, 1995: Legendary islands of the Ocean Sea, Sarasota, Fla.:
Pineapple Press, c1995.
2601. Fustier, B., 1995: “Position économique des régions insulaires par rapport à la norme
européenne: le poids de l’isolement”, Revue d’économie régionale et urbaine, n°1, p.
87-102.
2602. Futatsuka, M., T. Inaoka, R. Ohtsuka, T. Sakurai, K. Moji and T. Igarashi, 1996: Life and
health of chain saw operation in tropical rain forests: changes in work conditions and
health due to the mechanization of forestry, Environmental Sciences 4 (Sup.): S135-S145.
Pacifique, vol. 1: Enjeux sociaux, économiques et politiques, vol. 2: Pratiques symboliques
en transition, Aix-en-Provence: Publications de l’Université de Provence.
2603. Gabert, P. 1981: «L’évolution démographique des îles de Sicile et de Sardaigne et les
problèmes économiques de l’Italie.» Iles de Méditerranée. Actes de la table ronde du
groupement d’intérêt scientifique sciences humaines sur l’aire méditerranéenne –Cahier
n° Aix-en-Provence Octobre 1980, Paris, Editions du CNRS.
2604. Gabilondo, P., 1998: “A Second Creation”: in Search of the Island of the Colourblind’ in
L. Brinklow, F. Ledwell & J. Ledwell, eds., Message in a Bottle: The Literature of Small
Islands, Charlottetown PEI, Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island,
pp. 85-100.
2605. Gaffaney, T.J., 1995: Linking colonization and decolonisation; the case of Micronesia, PS,
18, 1, 23-60.
2606. Gaffney, Ellie, 1989: Somebody now: the autobiography of Ellie Gaffney, a woman of Torres
Strait, Canberra: Aboriginal Studies Press.
2607. Gaffney, Vincent... [et al.], 1997: The Adriatic Islands Project: contact, commerce and
colonialism, 6000 BC-AD 600, with a commentary on the classical sources for the island
by Slobodan Čače, Oxford, Tempvs Reparatvm.
2608. Gage, Catherine, 1995: A history of the island of Rathlin, Northern Ireland: J. Margaret
Dickson, 1995.
2609. Gailey, Christine Ward, 1987: Kinship to kingship: gender hierarchy and state formation in
the Tongan Islands, Austin, Tex.: University of Texas Press.
2610. Gailey, Harry A., 1986: Howlin’ Mad vs the army: conflict in command, Saipan, 1945,
2009
CEHA 145
Novato, CA: Presidio Press.

2611. Gailey, Harry A., 2003: Bougainville: the forgotten campaign, 1943-1945, Lexington (KY):
University of Kentucky Press.
2612. Gaillard, Olivier, 1996, Insularité: babil avec un insulaire de fortune: Babil avec un insulaire
de fortune, O. Gaillard.
2613. Gajdusek, D. Carleton, 1989: Melanesian journal: expedition to New Hebrides, Solomon
Islands, Manus, New Britain, and New Guinea, 23 January 1965 to 7 April 1965, [Bethesda,
Md.: Study of Child Growth and Development and Disease Patterns in Primitive Cultures,
Laboratory of Central Nervous System Studies, National Institute of Neurological Disease
and Stroke, U.S. Dept. of Health and Human Services, National Institutes of Health]
2614. Galani-Moutafi, V., 1993: From agriculture to tourism: Property, labor, gender, and kinship
in a Greek island village (Part one), Journal of Modern Greek Studies, 11, pp. 241-270.
2615. Galibert, Charlie, 2004: La Corse, une île et le monde: essai ethno-historique sur l’insularité,
Presses universitaires de France.
2616. Galipaud, Jean Christophe, Ian Liley, 1999: Le Pacifique de 5000 à 2000 avant le présent.
Supplément a l’Histoire dune Colonisation, Actes du Colloque, Vanuatu, 1996, Paris,
Éditions de IRD. Disponível online em http://arts.anu.edu.au/arcworld/resources/papers/
Spriggs/1999/Spriggs1999f.pdf. consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
2617. Gallagher, Steve and Carol Jean Gallagher, 2000: Sociolinguistic and Literacy Studies:
Bariai, In John Brownie ed., Data Papers on Papua New Guinea Languages, volume 45.
Summer Institute of Linguistics, Ukarumpa, Papua New Guinea.
2618. Gallant, Thomas W., 2002: Experiencing dominion: culture, identity, and power in the
British Mediterranean, Notre Dame, Ind., University of Notre Dame Press.
2619. Gallay, Gretel, 1988: Die mittel- und spätbronze- sowie ältereisenzeitlichen Bronzedolche
in Frankreich und auf den britischen Kanalinseln, München: C.H. Beck.
2620. Gallet, Dominique, 2001: São Tomé et Principe. Les îles du milieu du monde, Paris:
Karthala, 2001.
2621. Gallienne, Matthew, edited by John Waller, 1989: A Methodist pilgrimage in France:
the journal of Matthew Gallienne, 1877, Loughborough, Leicestershire Loughborough
University of Technology.
2622. Galván Guijo, Javier, 1998: Islas del Pacífico: el legado español, Barcelona: Mininsterio de
Educación y Cultura, Dirección General de Cooperación y Comunicación Cultural.
2623. Galván Rodríguez, Eduardo, 1998: Hecho insular y Unón Europea: un aporte histórico-
jurídico, Madrid, Centro de Estudios Políticos y Constitucionales.
2624. Galván Tudela, Alberto, 1987: Las fiestas populares Canárias, prologo de William A.
Christian, [Spain], Interinsular, Santa Cruz de Tenerife, Ediciones Canarias.
2625. Galván Tudela, Alberto, 1997: La identidad herreña, [La Laguna, Tenerife], Centro de la
Cultura Popular Canaria.
2626. Gambín García, Mariano, 2006: En nombre del rey: los primeros gobernadores de Canarias
y América, 1480-1526, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
2627. Gamble, A.; Payne, A. (eds), 1996: Regionalism & World order, Basingstoke, Macmillan.
2628. Gammage, B., 1996: Police and power in the pre-war PNG Highlands, Journal of Pacific
History, 31, 2, 62-77.
2629. Gammage, B., 1999: The sky travellers; journeys in New Guinea 1938-1939, Melbourne,
2009
MUP.
2630. Gammeltoft, Peder, 2005: ‘Islands great and small: a brief suvey of the names of islands
and skerries in Shetland’, In Gammeltoft, Peder; Hough, Carole; Waugh, Doreen J. (ed.),
Cultural contacts in the North Atlantic region: the evidence of names (Scotland: NORNA:
Scottish Place-Name Society: Society for Name Studies in Britain and Ireland), 119-126
2631. Gandelot, Ludovic, 2008: Contribution à L’étude des Sentiments Identitaires des Indiens de
Madagascar, Lusotopie, Volume 15, Number 1, pp. 175-182 (8).
2632. Gandía, Enrique de, 1986: Primitivos navegantes vascos y las Malvinas, Buenos Aires:
Editorial Vasca Ekin.
2633. Gannier, Odile, Cécile Picquoin, 2003: Le voyage du capitaine Marchand, [1791]: les
Marquises et les îles de la révolution, Pirae, Tahiti: Au Vent des îles.
2634. Ganter, Regina, The pearl-shellers of Torres Strait: resource use, development and decline,
1860s-1960s, Carlton, Vic.: Melbourne University Press.
2635. Garanger, J.; Robineau, C., 1980: Bora-Bora, Paris: Nouvelles Editions Latines.
2636. Garbutt, N., 1999: Mammals of Madagascar, Pica Press.
2637. García Cantús, Dolores, 2006: Fernando Poo: una aventura colonial española,[Vic
(Barcelona)]: CEIBA, Centros Culturales Españoles de Guinea Ecuatorial.
2638. García-Passalacqua, Juan M., 1994: The Grand Dilemma: Viability and Sovereignty for
Puerto Rico, Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, Vol. 533,
Trends in U. S.-Caribbean Relations (May), pp. 151-164.
2639. Gardiner, By J. Stanley, B.A. 1898. The natives of Rotuma, Journal of the Royal
Anthropological Institute, 27:396-435, 457-524, Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge.
(Communicated by Professor Alexander Macalister, M.A., F.R.S.) Disponível online em
url: http://www.rotuma.net/os/Gardiner/GdrContents.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de
2009.
2640. Gardiner, Mark; McDowell, Jacqueline (ed.), 2005: The Channel Islands: report and
proceedings of the 150th summer meeting of the Royal Archaeological Institute in 2004
(Archaeological Journal. Supplement, 161). London: Royal Archaeological Institute.
2641. Gardiner, Vince, 1996: The same but different: nineteenth century tourism in the Channel
Islands and the visit of Sir David Wedderburn, 1873, Société Guernesiaise Report and
Transactions, 24 (1996), 110-26.
2642. Gardiner, W., 1992: Te mura o te ahi; The story of the Maori batallion, Reed.
2643. Garí-Montllor Hayek, Domingo, 1992: Historia del nacionalismo canario: historia de
las ideas y de la estrategia política del nacionalismo canario en el siglo XX, Editorial
Benchomo, La Laguna (Tenerife) .
2644. Garnier, Val, 2002: Medical history of the Jersey hospitals and nursing homes during the
occupation 1940-1945, London: Channel Islands Occupation Birth Cohort Study, Social
Science Research Unit, Institute of Education, University of London.
2645. Garrett, J., 1982: To live among the stars, Suva.
2646. Garrido Torres, Carlos, 1998: Arqueoguía de Cataluña y Baleares: una guía práctica para
visitar el pasado, dibujos de Vicenç Sastre, Barcelona, Planeta.
2647. Garrigues-Belot, Fabienne, 1995: Contraintes de gestion des ressources en eau, dans
les petites îles montagneuses de la zone intertropicale, Bordeaux: Universite Michel de
Montaigne Bordeaux 3, 1.
2009
CEHA 147
2648. Garrioch, Véronique, 1992: Insularité et quête du sens dans le roman d’aventures du XIXe
siècle, Mém. de maîtrise: Lett. mod.: Réunion.
2649. Garrison, Ervan G. ... [et al.], 1989: An Eighteenth-century ballast pile site, Chandeleur
Islands, Louisiana: an instrumental and archaeological study, New Orleans: U.S. Dept. of
the Interior, Minerals Management Service, Gulf of Mexico OCS Regional Office.
2650. Garry W. Trompf, ed. 1987: The Gospel is not Western: Black theologies from the Southwest
Pacific, Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis Books.
2651. Garuba, H., 2001: The Island Writes Back: Discourse/Power and Marginality in Wole
Soyinka’s “The Swamp Dwellers,” Derek Walcott’s “The Sea at Dauphin,” and Athol
Fugard’s “The Island”, Research in African Literatures, Vol. 32, No. 4 (Winter), pp. 61-76.
2652. Gary Y. Okihiro, 2001: The Columbia Guide to Asian American History, Columbia University
Press.
2653. Gasparini, Graziano, 1995: La arquitectura de las Islas Canarias, 1420-1788, fotografías
del autor, [Caracas]: Armitano Editores.
2654. Gaspart, C.; Cohen, R. (ed.), 1983: African Islands and enclaves, In, les survivances
coloniales aux Comoros, Beverly hills; Londres; New Delhi: sage publications, 1983. p.
217-248.
2655. Gathorne-Hardy, F.J., [et al.], 2007: “The Chironomidae of Gróthúsvatn, Sandoy, Faroe
Islands: climatic and lake-phosphorus reconstructions, and the impact of human
settlement”, in The Holocene, vol. 17: pp. 1259 - 1264.
2656. Gatrell J.D.; Spiker J.S., 2002: “The regional concept and régional development: Policy
networks in action and in place”, Professional Paper of the Indiana State University, n°22,
p. 3-12.
2657. Gatty, Harold, 1999: Finding Your Ways Without Map or Compass, Dover Publications, Inc.
2658. Gaulme, François, 2000: “São Tomé dix ans après la démocratisation, ou les apories d’un
libéralisme systématique”, in Lusotopie, pp.47-58.
2659. Gaunder, Padmini, 1999: Education & race relations in Fiji 1835-1998, Universal Printing.
2660. Gawin, Izabella, 1995: Insula Fortunata: vom Nutzen einer Atlantikinsel: Gran Canaria vom
Spätmittelalter bis zur Gegenwart, Bremen: Edition Temmen.
2661. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1990-1991: «La distance et la promotion d’un produit touristique
insulaire: le cas de Tahiti et ses îles», L’Espace géographique, n° 2, p. 149-157.
2662. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1994: «Le tourisme en Polynésie française», Annales de géographie,
n° 577, p. 276-292.
2663. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1995: «Le tourisme en Nouvelle-Calédonie», Cahiers d’Outre-Mer,
n° 189, p. 55-70.
2664. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1998: “La dynamique touristique de l’île Rodrigues (Maurice)”.
Actes des VIIe Journées de Géographie Tropicale de Brest, Nantes, Ouest éditions/
Presses académiques, p. 205-212.
2665. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1998: «Les Hauts de la Réunion conquis par les loisirs»,
Mappemonde, n° 51, p. 31-37 (en collaboration avec P. Bouchet).
2666. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1999: «Le tourisme dans les Outre-mers de l’océan Pacifique»,
Mappemonde, n° 54, p. 26-29.
2667. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1999a: «Les balbutiements du tourisme mahorais», Travaux et
documents (revue de la faculté des lettres et des sciences humaines de l’université de la
2009
Réunion), n° 11 (Propos géographiques sur le sud-ouest de l’océan Indien), p. 137-152.

2668. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 1999b: Recherches sur les discontinuités spatiales et le tourisme,
Université de Paris VII, Habilitation à diriger des recherches.
2669. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2000: “Deux figures du retranchement touristique: l’île-hôtel et la
zone franche”. Mappemonde, nº 59, p. 2-8.
2670. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2000a: “La mise en tourisme des îles intertropicales”, Mappemonde,
nº58, p. 17-22.
2671. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2000b: “Le tourisme dans un espace non touristique: le cas de la
République fédérale islamique des Comores”. L’information géographique, nº4, p. 300-
313.
2672. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2001: La diffusion du tourisme dans l’archipel comorien,
Mappemonde, no 64, p. p. 15-18.
2673. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2001a: L’île-Hôtel, symbole du tourisme maldivien, In Aspects du
développement dans l’Océan Indien, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. 54, no 213, p. p. 27-52.
2674. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2003: «Discontinuités et aires protégées» in Lebigre J.-M. et
Decoudras P.-M. (dir.), Les Aires protégées insulaires et littorales tropicales (Actes du
colloque Dymset, Transcultures, Sepanrit, Nouméa (Nouvelle-Calédonie), 30 et 31
octobre 2001), Pessac, CRET, Université Bordeaux-III, coll. «Îles et archipels» n° 32, p.
17-28.
2675. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2003: L’outre-mer français en mouvement, Paris, La documentation
française, «Documentation pohotographique», nº ‹8031.
2676. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2004: «Tourisme, politique et développement aux Seychelles»,
Revue Tiers-Monde, n° 178, p. 319-339.
2677. Gay, Jean-Christophe, 2008:«Les territoires français du Pacifique» in Arias, S. et Chaudron,
E., dir., Belin histoire-géographie terminal ST2S, p. 232-239 et 252-253.
2678. Geary, Christraud M. and Virginia-Lee Webb, 1998: Delivering views: distant cultures in
early postcards, Washington [D.C.], Smithsonian Institution Press.
2679. Geddes, John, 2007: Spearhead assault: blood, guts and glory on the Falklands frontline,
London: Century.
2680. Gegeo, D. W., & Watson-Gegeo, K. A., 2002: Whose knowledge? Epistemological
collisions in Solomon Islands community development, The Contemporary Pacific, 14(2),
pp. 377–409.
2681. Geiger, Wilhelm, 1999: Maldivian Linguistic Studies, Reprint 1919 edn. Asian Educational
Services. Delhi.
2682. Gell, Alfred, 1996: Wrapping in Images: Tattooing in Polynesia, Oxford: Clarendon Press.
2683. Gendre, Annick, 2007: La Representation de soi à travers la textualisation de l’espace
insulaire réunionnais: Etude de l’oeuvre de Jean Lods, Bourdeaux, Université Bourdeaux,
III.
2684. Geoffrey, C. Gunn, 2000: The 500-Year Timorese Funu, Bulletin of Concerned Asian
Scholars, Vol. 32.
2685. Geoffroy, Edouard, 2007: Dynamique entrepreneuriale et insularité: le cas des entreprises
de la caraïbe francophone; sous la direction de Emmanuel Okamba, Mémoire ou thèse
(version d’origine), Université de Marne-la-Vallée. Université de soutenance, Thèse de
doctorat: Comptabilité, Contrôle de gestion, Finance: Marne-la-Vallée.
2009
CEHA 149
2686. Geoffroy-Schneiter, Bérénice, 2000: Primal arts: Africa, Oceania and the southeast Asian
islands, London: Thames & Hudson.
2687. George, K. M., 1994: Socio-economic survey of smallholder oil palm growers in Papua
New Guinea, August 1994, Draft final report.
2688. George, Marianne, 1986: Review of Tikopia: The Prehistory and Ecology of a Polynesian
Outlier by Patrick V. Kirch and D. E. Yen, Pacific Studies, 9(1):185- 190.
2689. George, Marianne, 1998: The Return of Lata: Building An Authentic Polynesian Voyaging
Canoe, Sea History, Spring, Pp. 40-42.
2690. George, Marianne, 2001: Sir Raymond Firth: Honorary Fellow, ASAO Newsletter 109:21-
22.
2691. George, Marianne, 2002: In Memoriam: Sir Raymond Firth, ASAO Newsletter 112:23.
2692. George, Marianne, 2005: Tikopia, In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited by James Brix.
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
2693. Geraghty, Paul, 1993: Pulotu, Polynesian homeland, JPS, vol. 102(4), 1993, 343-384.
2694. Gershator, Phillis, 1994: Tukama tootles the flut: a tale from the Antilles, paintings by
Synthia Saint James, New York: Orchard Books.
2695. Gestur Guđmundsson,1990: Rokksaga Íslands: frá Sigga Johnnie til Sykurmolanna,
Reykjavík : Forlagið.
2696. Getz, D., 1986: Tourism and population change: long term impacts of tourism on in the
Badenoch and Strathspey district of the Scottish Highlands, Scottish Geographical
Magazine,102(2), pp.113-126.
2697. Ghina (F.), 2003: «Sustainable Development In Small Island Developing States: The Case
Of The Maldives Environment», Development And Sustainability, 5, p. 139-165.
2698. Ghisoni, D. (dir.); Iopue, W. (dir.); Rabin, C. (dir.); Tjibaou, J.M. (pref.), 1988: Ces iles que
l’on dit francaises, Université de Lyon, Paris; L’Harmattan.
2699. Giacottino, J.-C., 1982: “Les pays caraïbes anglophones. Passé colonial et transformation
contemporaines”, Hérodote, nº 27, p. 101-118.
2700. Giacottino, J.-C., 1987: “Problématique et perspectives du développement des petits pays
insulaires tropicaux”, in Îles tropicales: insularité, insularisme. Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “îles
et archipels”, n°8, p. 167-192.
2701. Giacottino, J.-C., 1993: “Les Départements d’Outre-Mer des Antilles: crise ou mutation”,
Annales des Pays d’Amérique Latine et des Caraïbes, nº 11 et 12, p. 191-223.
2702. Giacottino, J.-C., 1995: Les Guyanes, Paris, PUF, coll. “Que sais-je ?”.
2703. Giaoutzi, Maria; Nijkamp, Peter, 1993: Decision support models for regional sustainable
development: an application of geographic information systems and evaluation models
to the Greek Sporades Islands, in association with Jeroen van den Bergh ... [et al.],
Aldershot, Hants, England: Avebury; Brookfield, Vt.: Ashgate Pub. Co..
2704. Gibbons, Henry K., 1997: The Myth and Mystery of John Cabot: The Discoverer of North
America, Marten Cat Publishers, Port Aux Basques, Newfoundland.
2705. Gibbons, J. D.; Fish, M., 1987: World tourism forecasts and the outlook for the US Virgin
Islands, Social and economic studies, vol. vol. 36, no 4, p. p. 193-207.
2706. Giblin-Delvallet, Béatrice, 1985: “Et pourquoi pas un front de libération des îles franco-
normandes ? “, Hérodote, n° 37-38.
2009
2707. Gibran, Daniel K., 1998: The Falklands War: Britain versus the past in the South Atlantic,
Jefferson (NC): McFarland.
2708. Gibson, J. S. Wycherley; Hampson, Elizabeth, 2000: Marriage and census indexes for
family historians, 8th edn. Bury: Federation of Family History Societies.
2709. Gibson, Jeremy Sumner Wycherley; Medlycott, Mervyn T., 1997: Local census listings,
1522-1930: holdings in the British Isles, 3rd edn. Birmingham: Federation of Family
History Societies, 1997.
2710. Gibson, Sally, 1984: More than an island: a history of the Toronto island, Toronto, Canada:
Irwin Pub..
2711. Gideon, Hieromonk, edited by Richard A. Pierce, 1989: The round the world voyage
of Hieromonk Gideon, 1803-1809, with an introduction and notes, by Lydia T. Black,
Kingston, Ont. ; Fairbanks, Alaska: Limestone Press.
2712. Gifford, John, 1992: Highland and islands, London: Penguin Books in association with the
Buildings of Scotland Trust.
2713. Gifford, John.1992: The buildings of Scotland: Highland and Islands (The Buildings of
Scotland, 5). London: Lane.
2714. Gil, David; Vickers, Michael, 1995: Antiquities from the Lipari islands in the Ashmolean
Museum, Oxford, in, Giustolisi, Vittorio, Vulcano: introduzione alla storia e all’archeologia
dell’antica Hiera, [Palermo]: Centro di documentazione e ricerca per la Sicilia antica
“Paolo Orsi”: Regione siciliana, Assessorato dei beni culturali ed ambientali.
2715. GIL, Juan, 1995: Las Islas de la Índia, in Los Universos Insualres, Cuadernos del Cemyr,
III, La Laguna.
2716. GIL, Juan, 2001: As Ilhas Imaginárias, in Oceanos, nº.46, (Abril/Junho), Lisboa, CNDP,
pp.11-27
2717. Gil-Alana, Luis A., Juncal Cuñado and Fernando Perez de Gracia, 2008: Tourism in
the Canary Islands: forecasting using several seasonal time series models, Journal of
Forecasting, 2008, vol. 27, issue 7, pages 621-636
2718. Gildas, Bernier, 1989: Ships, harbours and navigation between the Continent and the
Celtic Islands during the early middle ages, In Ireland, John de Courcy, Sheehy, David C.
(ed.), Atlantic visions (Dun Laoghaire: Boole Press), 155-57.
2719. Gill, J. B.; Morris, J. D. and R. W. Johnson 1993: Timescale For Producing the Geochemical
Signature of Island-Arc Magmas - U-Th-Po and Be-B Systematics in Recent Papua New
Guinea Lavas, Geochimica Et Cosmochimica Acta, 57(17): 4269-4283.
2720. Gillett, R. D., 1987: Traditional tuna fishing: a study at Satawal, central Caroline Islands,
Honolulu: Bishop Museum Press.
2721. Gilliard, E. T., 1961: “Exploring New Britain’s land of fire”, in National Geographic, 119(2):
261-292.
2722. Gilliard, E. T.; LeCroy, M., 1967: “Results of the 1958-59 Gilliard New Britain Expedition.
4: Annotated list of the birds of the Whiteman Mountains, New Britain”, in Bulletin of the
American Museum of Natural History, 135: 173-266.
2723. Gillis, J., 2001: ‘Places Remote and Islanded’, Michigan Quarterly Review, v40 nº1: 39-58
2724. Gillis, J., 2003: Taking History Offshore: Atlantic Islands in European Minds, 1400-1800’, in
Edmond, R and Smith, V(eds), Islands in History and Representation, London: Routledge.
2725. Gillis, J., 2004: Islands of the Mind: How the Human Imagination Created the Atlantic
2009
CEHA 151
World, New York, Palgrave Macmillan.

2726. Gillis, John R., 2007: Island sojourns. (Report), The Geographical Review. Disponível
online em URL: http://www.accessmylibrary.com/coms2/summary_0286-33344774_ITM.
Consulta em 11 de julho de 2009.
2727. Gilson, Richard Phillip, 1980: The Cook Islands, 1820-1950, edited by Ron Crocombe,
[Wellington, N. Z.]: Victoria University Press in association with the Institute of Pacific
Studies of the University of the South Pacific.
2728. Ginard i Féron, David, 1994: L’esquerra mallorquina i el franquisme pròleg de Josep Benet,
Palma : Edicions Documenta Balear.
2729. Ginard i Féron, David, 1997: L’oposició al franquisme a les Balears, 1936-1975, Documenta
Balear, S.A.
2730. Ginns, Michael, 1994: The Organisation Todt and the fortress engineers in the Channel
Islands (Archive book, 8), Jersey: Channel Islands Occupation Society.
2731. Ginzburg, Carlo, 2000: No island is an island: four glances at English literature in a world
perspective, Columbia University Press.
2732. Giot, Pierre-Roland, 1989: The Attraction for Coasts and Islands, from later Prehistory to
the Dark Ages, In Ireland, John de Courcy, Sheehy, David C. (ed.), Atlantic visions (Dun
Laoghaire: Boole Press), 125-31.
2733. Girault, C. (ed.). 1983: Les Antilles aujourd’hui, économie et géographie, Bordeaux:
CEGET.
2734. Girault, Christian, 1981: La genese des Nations haitienne et Dominicaine (1492-1900),
Paris: CNRS.
2735. Gistitin, C., 1995: Quite a colony; South Sea Islanders in central Queensland 1867-1993,
AEBIS Publishing
2736. Githire, Njeri, 2006: Voices from ex/isle: Caribbean and indian ocean women writers break
geographical confines, Pennsylvania State university. Université de soutenance, Ann
Arbor (Mich.): UMI dissertation services, impr.
2737. Gittins, Anne, 1991: Tales of the Fiji Islands, by the wife of a District Commissioner, Anne
Gittins, Fleet, Hants: J.A. Gittins.
2738. Glaser, Horst Albert, 1996: Utopische Inseln: Beiträge zu ihrer Geschichte und Theorie,
Frankfurt a. M; Bern: P. Lang.
2739. Glasscoe, Marion Exeter, 1999: The medieval mystical tradition: England, Ireland, and
Wales: Exeter Symposium VI: papers read at Charney Manor, July 1999, Symposium
(6th: 1999: Charney Manor) ,Cambridge [U.K.]; Rochester, NY: D.S. Brewer.
2740. Glassow, Michael A. edited by. 1993: Archaeology on the northern Channel Islands of
California: studies of subsistence, economics, and social organization, contributions by
Brenda Bowser ... [et al.], Salinas, CA: Coyote Press.
2741. Glaw, F.; Vences, M., 1992: A Field Guide to the Amphibians and Reptiles of Madagascar,
Vences & Glaw, Cologne.
2742. Glazier, Stephen D., 1982: An Annotated Ethnographic Bibliography of Trinidad, Cross-
Cultural Research, Jan; vol. 17: pp. 31 - 58.
2743. Glazier, Stephen, 1985: Caribbean ethnicity revisited: a special issue of ethnic groups,
international periodical of ethnic studies, New York: Gordon and Breach Science
Publishers.
2009
2744. Glogović, Dunja, 1989: Prilozi poznavanju željeznog doba na sjevernom Jadranu: Hrvatsko
primorje i Kvarnerski otoci = Studies in the Iron Age of the Northern Adriatic: Hrvatsko
Primorje and Kvarner Islands, Zagreb: Jugoslavenska akademija znanosti i umjetnosti u
Zagrebu.
2745. Glytsos, N.P., 1999: The impact of demographic deterioration on labour balances in Greece,
Journal of Economic Studies, 26(2), pp.130-158.
2746. Gøbel, Erik, 2002: A guide to sources for the history of the Danish West Indies (U. S. Virgin
Islands), 1671-1917, Odense, University Press of Southern Denmark; [Copenhagen]:
Danish National Archives; Portland, OR: [Distributed in U.S. by] International Specialized
Book Services.
2747. Godard, H. (dir.), 1998: Les outre-mers, Atlas de France, n°13. Paris, Reclus/La
documentation Française.
2748. Goddard, M., 1995: The rascal road; crime, prestige and development in Papua New
Guinea, The Contemporary Pacific, 7, 1995, 55-80
2749. Godelier, M., 1986: The Making of Great Men: Male Society, Language and Ritual, London:
Athlone Press
2750. Godelier, Maurice; Strathern, Marilyn, ed. 1991: Big men and great men: personifications
of power in Melanesia, Cambridge [England]; New York: Cambridge University Press;
Paris: Editions de la Maison des Sciences de l’Homme.
2751. Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães, 1990, «As Historiografias Insulares; Presente e Futuro»,
in Actas do I Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, II vol., Funchal, SRTCE –
DRAC, pp. 1389-1398.
2752. Goebel, Julius, 1982: The struggle for the Falkland Islands: a study in legal and diplomatic
history, with a preface and an introduction by J.C.J. Metford, New Haven: Yale University
Press.
2753. Goetzfridt, Nicholas J., 1992: Indigenous navigation and voyaging in the Pacific: a reference
guide, New York: Greenwood Press,
2754. Goetzfridt, Nicholas J., 1995: Indigenous Literature of Oceania: A Survey of Criticism and
Interpretation. Foreword by Vilsoni Hereniko. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press.
2755. Goetzfridt, Nicholas J.; Wuerch, William L., compiled. 1989: Micronesia, 1975-1987: a
social science bibliography, New York : Greenwood Press.
2756. Goetzfridt, Nicholas J., 2002: Micronesian histories: an analytical bibliography and guide
to interpretations, Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press.
2757. Goiffon, Marie, 2008: Pression foncière et littoralisation à la Martinique, Les Cahiers
d’Outre-Mer, 223, Juillet-Septembre. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/
2758. Golden, Graeme A., 1993: The early European settlers of the Solomon Islands, Melbourne:
G. Golden.
2759. Golder, William E., 1989: Long Island’s first inhabitants: Paleo, Archaic, Transitional,
Woodland: a 9000 year history of the Indian occupation of Long Island, Southold, N.Y.
(P.O. Box 248, Southold 11971): Southold Indian Museum.
2760. Goldman, D.E., 2003: the Demarcation of Hispanic Caribbean Cultural Spaces in the
Diaspora, Latino Studies, Volume 1, Number 3, November, pp. 403-423(21)
2761. Goldstein, Donald M., Dillon, Katherine V., 1992: The Williwaw War: the Arkansas National
Guard in the Aleutians in World War II, Fayetteville: University of Arkansas Press.
2009
CEHA 153
2762. Golski, K., 1998: Watched by ancestors; an Australian family, in PNG, Sydney, Hodder
Headline Australia
2763. Gombaud, Stéphane, 2007: Iles, insularité et îléité: le relativisme dans l’étude des espaces
archipélagiques, Université de la Réunion. Université de soutenance, Mémire de Thése.
2764. Gonçalves, Marco Antonio, 2000: Firth e os Tikopia: Da etnografia como experiência,
Novos Estudos Cebrap. São Paulo.
2765. Gonick, Gloria, 1995: Splendor of the Dragon: costumes of the Ryukyu kingdom: published
on the occasion of an exhibition organized in cooperation with the Okinawa Prefectural
Museum, with an essay by Ichiko Yonamine, Los Angeles: Craft and Folk Art Museum.
2766. Gonsalves, Ralph E., 1994: History and the Future: A Caribbean Perspective. Quik-Print,
Kingstown, St. Vincent.
2767. González Lemus, Nicolás, 1995: Las islas de la ilusión: británicos en Tenerife, 1850-1900,
Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
2768. González Lemus, Nicolás, 1997: Comunidad británica y sociedad en Canarias: la cultura
inglesa y su impacto sociocultural en la sociedad isleña, Güímar, Tenerife, Islas Canarias,
Edén Ediciones.
2769. González Lemus, Nicolás, 1998: Viajeros victorianos en Canarias: imágenes de la sociedad
isleña en la prosa de viaje, prólogo, Raymond Carr, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Cabildo
Insular de Gran Canaria.
2770. González Morales, Alejandro; Aguiar, Gerardo Delgado, 1995: La vivienda en Las Palmas
de Gran Canaria, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
2771. González Rolán, Tomás; González, Fremiot Hernández; Suárez-Somonte, Pilar Saquero,
1994: Diplomacia y humanismo en el siglo XV: edición crítica, traducción y notas de las
Allegationes super conquesta Insularum Canariae contra portugalenses de Alfonso de
Cartagena, Madrid: Universidad Nacional de Educación a Distancia.
2772. Gonzalez, Horacio Mir, 2005: ‘An Argentinian airman in the South Atlantic’ [Falklands
Conflict]. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict
twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New
York: Cass, 5-80.
2773. González, José Manuel, 1993: La sabiduría popular: técnicas y conocimientos científicos
tradicionales en Canarias, [La Laguna, Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular de Canaria.
2774. Goodale, Jane C., 1966: “Blowgun hunters of the South Pacific”, in National geographic
7933: 817.
2775. Goodale, Jane C., 1980: “Siblings as spouse: the reproduction and replacement of Kaulong
society”, in Mac Marshall, ed., Siblingship in Oceania, ASAO Monograph no. 8. Ann Arbor:
University of Michigan Press Pp. 275-306.
2776. Goodale, Jane C., 1983: Gender, sexuality and marriage: a Kaulong model of nature and
culture. in C. MacCormack and Marilyn Strathern eds., Nature, Culture and Gender,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 119-142
2777. Goodale, Jane C., 1985: “Pigs’ teeth and skull cycles: both sides of the face of humanity”,
in American Ethnologist, 12 (2):228-244.
2778. Goodale, Jane C., 1995: To Sing With Pigs is Human, Seattle: University of Washington
Press.
2779. Goodale, Jane C., with Ann Chowning, 1996: Two-Party Line, Lanham, MD: Rowan and
2009
Littlefield.
2780. Goodall, John, 1987: Goodbye to Empire: A Doctor Remembers, Edinburgh.
2781. Goodenough, Ward and Richard Feinberg, 1995: Epilogue, Seafaring in the Contemporary
Pacific Islands, Richard Feinberg, ed. Dekalb: Northern Illinois University, pp. 219-228.
2782. Goodlad, J.H., 1987: ‘The Faroese Road to Autonomy: An Analysis of the Faroese Political
System’, Reprinted from Shetland Life, pp. 1-26.
2783. Goodman, James, 1987: The Navajo Atlas: Environments, Resources, Peoples and
History of the Dine Bekeyah, University of Oklahoma Press.
2784. Goodman, S. M.; Benstead, J. P., 2004: The Natural History of Madagascar, University of
Chicago Press.
2785. Goodman, S. M.; Patterson, B. D., 1997: Natural Change and Human Impact in Madagascar,
Smithsonian Institution Press.
2786. Goonetileke, H A I., 1970-1983: A Bibliography of Ceylon: A Systematic Guide to the Literature
on the Land, People, History and Culture Published in the Western Languages from the
Sixteenth Century to the Present Day, 5 Volumes, Zug, Switzerland, Inter Documentation
Co..
2787. Gordon, R. J.; Waiko, K. 1980: “Intensive ethnographic and sociological studies in Papua
New Guinea”, In Oral History, 8(7): 75-90.
2788. Gordon, Rosemary compiled and edited by. 1990: Tokelau: a collection of documents and
references relating to constitutional development, Apia: Tokelau Administration.
2789. Gordon, Suzanne, Hersh, Anne, 2005: Searching for sugar mills: an architectural guide to
the Caribbean, Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean.
2790. Gordon, Walter, 1979-1980: Walter Gordon, athlete, officer in law enforcement and
administration, Governor of the Virgin Islands: interviews, conducted by Anne Brower
... [et al.]; with an introd. by John D. Holstrom, Berkeley: University of California, The
Bancroft Library, Regional Oral History Office.
2791. Gorenflo, L J, 1990: Regional discontinuities of planning objectives in the Republic of the
Marshall Islands, Environment and Planning C: Government and Policy, vol. 8, issue 3,
pages 297-314.
2792. Gorenflo, L.J., 1996: Demographic change in the republic of Palau, Pacific Studies, 1996,
vol. vol. 19, no 3, p. p. 37-106.
2793. Gorenflo, LJ; Levin, M. J., 1994: “The evolution of regional demography in the Marshall
Islands”, in PS, 17, 1, 93-59.
2794. Gosden, C., 1989: Prehistoric social landscapes of the Arawe islands, West New Britain
Province, Papua New Guinea, Archaeology, in Oceania, 24(2): 45-58.
2795. Gosden, C., J. Allen, W. Ambrose, D. Anson, J. Golson, R. Green, P. Kirch, I. Lilley, J.
Specht and M. Spriggs, 1989: Lapita sites of the Bismarck archipelago, Antiquity, 63(240):
561-586.
2796. Gosden, C., 1990: “Archaeological work in the Arawe Islands, West New Britain province,
Papua New Guinea, December 1989 - February 1990”, Australian archaeology, (30): 37.
2797. Gosden, C., 1993: Understanding the settlement of Pacific islands in the Pleistocene. M.
A. Smith, M. Spriggs and B. Fankhauser, Eds. Sahul in Review: Pleistocene Archaeology
in Australia, New Guinea and Island Melanesia, Canberra, Department of Prehistory,
Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, pp. 131-143.
2009
CEHA 155
2798. Gosden, C.; Pavlides, C., 1994: “Are islands insular?”, in Archaeology in Oceania, 29:
162-171.
2799. Gosden, C.; Webb, J., 1994: “The creation of a Papua New Guinean landscape:
archaeological and geomorphological evidence”, in Journal of Field Archaeology, 21(1):
29-51.
2800. Gosden, C. and et al, 1994: Lolmo Cave: a mid- to late Holocene site, the Arawe islands,
West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, Asian Perspectives, 33(1): 97-119.
2801. Gosden, C., 1994: Social Being and Time, Oxford, Blackwell.
2802. Gosden, C. and L. Head, 1999: Different histories: a common inheritance for Papua New
Guinea and Australia? In: C. Gosden and J. G. Hather, Eds., The Prehistory of Food:
Appetites for Change, London, Routledge, pp. 232-251.
2803. Gosden, C., 2000: “On His Todd: Material Culture and Colonialism”, In: R. Welsch and M.
O’Hanlon, Eds. Hunting the Gatherers: ethnographic collectors, agents and agency in
Melanesia, 1870-1930s. Oxford, Berghahn Press, pp. 320-352.
2804. Gosden, C., 2000a: Varieties of colonial experience: material culture and colonialism in
West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea. In: A. Anderson and T. Murray, Eds.
Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra
Academic Publishing, The Australian National University, pp. 161-170.
2805. Gosden, C. and C. Knowles, 2001: “Material culture and colonialism in West New Britain
Province, Papua New Guinea”, Bar International Series, 955: 113-120.
2806. Gosden, C. and C. Knowles, 2001a: Collecting Colonialism: Material Culture and Colonial
Change, Oxford, Berg.
2807. Gosling, Paul, 1993: Archaeological inventory of county Galway, 1: West Galway (including
Connemara and the Aran Islands), Dublin: The Stationery Office.
2808. Gössling, edited by Stefan, 2003: Tourism and development in tropical islands: political
ecology perspectives, Cheltham; Northhampton, MA: Edward Elgar Pub..
2809. Götherström, Anders; Stenbäck, Niklas; StorÅ, Jan, 2002: “The Jettböle Middle Neolithic
Site on the Åland Islands — Human Remains, Ancient dna and Pottery”, in European
Journal of Archaeology, vol. 5: pp. 42 - 68.
2810. Gottlieb, Matthew, 2008: Is It Nationalism? History.s Impact on Okinawan Identity, thesis,
faculty of Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State Universit. Disponível online em url:
http://scholar.lib.vt.edu/theses/available/etd-11122008-230632/unrestricted/GottliebDoc7.
2811. Gottmann, J. (dir.), 1980: Centre and Periphery. Spatial Variations in Politics, Beverly Hills,
Sage Publications
2812. Gough, Barry M., 1990: “The British reoccupation and colonization of the Falkland Islands,
or Malvinas, 1832-1843” in Albion, 22, 261-87.
2813. Gough, Barry M., 1992: The Falkland Islands/Malvinas: the conquest for empire in the
South Atlantic, London; Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Athlone Press.
2814. Goulden, Rick J., 1982: A Comparative Study of Lusi and Bariai, Two Austronesian
Languages of West New Britain, M.A. thesis, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario,
Canada.
2815. Goulden, Rick J., 1987: The Melanesian content in Tok Pisin, Unpublished PhD dissertation,
Department of Anthropology, University of Toronto.
2009
2816. Goutier, Hégel, 1996: “Madagascar: une histoire de l’inconnu”, in le courrier Afrique
Caraibes Pacifique Union Europeenne, no 156, p. p. 14-32.
2817. Goüy de Bellocq, Joëlle, 2003 : Insularité et parasitisme: impacts sur l’investissement dans
la réponse immune et la diversité génétique du CMH chez le mulot sylvestre, Apodemus
sylvaticus, dans le bassin méditerranéen, sous la dir. de] Carlos Feliu, Serge Morand,
Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), thèse doctorat: Biologie, parasitologie: Perpignan.
2818. Goveia, Elsa V., 1956: A Study on the Historiography of the British West Indies to the End
of the Nineteenth Century, Edição de Instituto Panamericano de Geografía e Historia.
2819. Goveia, Elsa V., 1980: Slave society in the British Leeward Islands at the end of the
eighteenth century Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press.
2820. Government of Faroes, 1999: Hvitabok, The White Book, Torshavn, Foroya Landsstyri.
2821. Government of Papua New Guinea, Office of National Planning, 1999: Papua New Guinea
Human Development Report 1998 (eds. K. McKay, K. Lepani, W. Wagner), New York,
UNDP (United Nations Development Programme.
2822. Gowricharn, Ruben S., 2006: Caribbean transnationalism: migration, pluralization, and
social cohesion, Lanham, MD: Lexington Books.
2823. Goyette, P.; Mayer-Renaud, M., 1991: Isolement et insularité: une revue de la littérature
sur l’isolement social des familles, Montréal, Centre de services sociaux du Montréal
métropolitain.
2824. Graham, edited by Penelope, 2008: Horizons of home: nation, gender and migrancy in
island Southeast Asia, Clayton: Monash Asia Institute.
2825. Graham, Ross, 1997: Bay Islands English: linguistic contact and convergence in the
Western Caribbean, Thesis (Ph. D.), University of Florida.
2826. Granberry, Julian, 2004: Languages of the pre-Columbian Antilles, Tuscaloosa, University
of Alabama Press.
2827. Grandidier, A., 1875: Histoire physique, naturelle et politique de Madagascar, Imprimerie
Nationale, Paris.
2828. Grandidier, A., 1903: Collection des Ouvrages Anciens Concernant Madagascar, Paris.
2829. Granger, Orman E., 1985: Caribbean climates, Progress in Physical Geography, Mar
1985; vol. 9: pp. 16 - 43.
2830. Granjon, Laurent, 1992: Évolution allopatrique chez les Muridés: mécanismes éco-
éthologiques liés au syndrome d’insularité chez Mastomys et Rattus, Mémoire ou thèse
(version d’origine), Th. ND: Biol. des populations et des écosyst.: Montpellier 2.
2831. Grannum, Karen; Taylor, Nigel, 2004: Wills and other probate records: a practical guide to
researching your ancestor’s last documents, Kew: National Archives.
2832. Grant, Jill and Martin, Zelenietz, 1980: Changing patterns of wage labour migration in the
Kilenge area of Papua New Guinea, International Migration Review, 14(2): 215-234.
2833. Grant, Jill, 1980: Struggling with Development: Planning Problems and Strategies in
Melanesia, M.A. thesis, University of Waterloo, Waterloo, Ontario, Canada Grant, Jill
and Martin Zelenietz, 1982: Horticulture in the Kilenge area: potential for development.
Appendix A, in George Murray, Proposed Kaliai Cattle Project Report, West New Britain
Province. Kimbe: Department of Primary Industries, pp. 11-15,Grant, Jill and Martin
Zelenietz, 1982: Kilenge kinship terminology, Research in Melanesia, 6:54- 90.
2834. Grant, Jill; Zelenietz, Martin, 1983: “Naming practices in Kilenge”, in Names, 31:179-190.
2009
CEHA 157
2835. Grant, Jill; Zelenietz, Martin; Saito, H., 1986: “Where development never comes: business
activities In Kilenge, Papua New Guinea”, in Journal of the Polynesian Society, 95(2):195-
219.
2836. Grant, Jill, 1987: The impacts of dependent development on community and resources in
Kilenge, Papua New Guinea, Human Ecology, 15(2): 243-26.
2837. Grant, J., 1988: “The effects of new land use patterns on resources and food production in
Kilenge, West New Britain”, in Food and Foodways (Special Issue on Pacific Foodways):
59-77.
2838. Grant. edited by Peter R., 1998: Evolution on islands, Oxford; New York: Oxford University
Press.
2839. Grant, T., 2000: “States newly admitted to the United Nations: some implications”, Columbia
journal of transnational law, n°1, p. 177-192.
2840. Grasmuck, Sherri; Pessar, Patricia R., 1991: Between two islands: Dominican international
migration, Berkeley: University of California Press.
2841. Grassie, James, 1983: Highland experiment, photographs by Oscar Marzaroli, Aberdeen:
Aberdeen University Press.
2842. Graves, Tomás, 1997: Un hogar en Mallorca: guía práctica de la casa y la vida rural, José
J. de Olañeta, Editor.
2843. Gravil, Roger, 1985: The Anglo-Argentine connection, 1900-1939, Boulder and London.
2844. Gray, G., 1996: The next focus of power to fall under the spell of this little gang; anthropology
and Australia’s post war policy in PNG, War and Society, 14, 2, 101-17.
2845. Gray, G., 2000: Managing the impact of war; Australian anthropology and the Southwest
Pacific, in McLeod R, ed, Science and the Pacific war; science and survival in the Pacific
1939-1945, Dordrecht, Kluwer, 187-210.
2846. Gray, Hannah, 2001: The historical development of the health system in the Bahamas;
edited by Mary Hadley, Anne Mills (PHP departmental publication, 33; Health care reform:
policy content and process in the Caribbean, 1). [London]: London School of Hygiene and
Tropical Medicine.
2847. Gray, Peter W., 2005: ‘Air power: Strategic lessons from an idiosyncratic operation’. In
Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years
253-64.
2848. Gray, William, 1993: Coral reefs & islands: the natural history of a threatened paradise,
Newton Abbot, Devon [Eng.]: David & Charles.
2849. Green, Cecilia Anne, 1998: Laboring women: a historical, sociological, and comparative
analysis of Afro-Caribbean women’s economic roles in three islands, Ottawa, ON, National
Library of Canada, Acquisitions and Bibliographic Services.
2850. Green, Eugene; Sachse, William L., 1983: Names of the land: Cape Cod, Nantucket,
Martha’s Vineyard, and the Elizabeth Islands, Chester, Conn.: Globe Pequot Press.
2851. Green, Martin Burgess, 1990: The Robinson Crusoe story, University Park: Pennsylvania
State University Press.
2852. Greenblatt, S., 1991: Marvellous possessions; the wonder of the new world, Clarendon,
OUP.
2853. Greene, M., 2001: Ruling an island without a navy. A comparative view of Venetian and
2009
Ottoman Crete, Oriente moderno, 20(81), 193-207.

2854. Greengrass, Mark; Ogier, D. M. (Darryl Mark), 1995: 1962 - A French Reformation on
English soi: religious change in the Channel Islands, Proceedings of the Huguenot
Society of Great Britain and Ireland, 26, 173-85.
2855. Greg, Dening, 1980: Names and places, in Islands and beaches; discourse on a silent land
Marquesas 1774-1880, Honolulu, UH Press, pp.9-34.
2856. Greg, Dening, 1999: The hegemony of laughter; Purea’s theatre, in A Frost and J Samson,
eds, Pacific empires; essays in honour of Glyndwr Williams, Melbourne, MUP, pp.127-46.
2857. Gregor, Thomas A., Tuzin, Donald, 2001: Gender in Amazonia and Melanesia: an
exploration of the comparative method, Berkeley: University of California Press.
2858. Gregory, Desmond, 1985: The ungovernable rock: a history of the Anglo-Corsican Kingdom
and its role in Britain’s Mediterranean strategy during the Revolutionary War, 1793-1797,
London: Fairleigh Dickinson University Press.
2859. Gregory, Desmond, 1986: “A Defence Policy for the Ionian Islands - some wrong conclusions
drawn by Soldiers and Statesmen”, in Journal of the Society for Army Historical Research,
64:257, 24-33.
2860. Gregory, Desmond, 1988: The beneficent usurpers: a history of the British in Madeira,
Rutherford, [N.J.]: Fairleigh Dickinson University Press; London: Associated University
Presses.
2861. Gregory, Desmond, 1990: Minorca, the Illusory Prize: A History of the British Occupations
of Minorca between 1708 and 1802, Cranbury, NJ, Toronto, Ont and London.
2862. Gregory, M., 1995: More Custom Stories from Choiseul, Gizo, Solomon Islands: Western
Province Office.
2863. Greig, Malcolm and Ronald W. McQuaid, The Impact of Ferry Services on an Island
Economy, ERSA conference papers from European Regional Science Association,
Disponível online em url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/ersa/ersaconfs/ersa05/papers/740.
2864. Grenand, Pierre; Grenand, Françoise; Menget, P., 1985: La question amérindienne en
Guyane française: éléments de synthèse, Ethnies, 1 (1/2), p. 54-58.
2865. Grenier, C., 1994: De l’espace marginal a l’espace pionnier frontalier: ouverture et attraction
des Galapagos, l’espace geographique, no 3, p. p. 250-262.
2866. Grenier, C., 2000: Conservation contre nature, Les îles Galápagos, Paris: IRD.
2867. Gressitt, J. L., 1959: “The coconut leaf-mining beetle Promecotheca papuana”, in The
Papua and New Guinea Agricultural Journal, 12(2/3): 119-148.
2868. Grey, Winifred, 1994: Winifred Grey: a gentlewoman’s remembrances of life in England
and the Gulf Islands of British Columbia, 1871-1910, edited by Marie Elliott, Victoria, B.C.
: Gulf Islands Press.
2869. Grieb, Kenneth, 1988: Central America in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries: An
Annotated Bibliography, Boston: G.K. Hall.
2870. Grieve, R., 1986: “The oil palm industry of Papua New Guinea”, in Australian Geographer,
17(1): 72-76.
2871. Griffin, C., 1997: Democracy and neoliberalism in the developing word. Lessons from the
anglophone Caribbean, Aldershot, Asghate.
2872. Griffin, Eric R., 2000: “Daniel Brevint: French preacher to the king in exile, in Anglican and
2009
CEHA 159
Episcopal History, 69:3, 295-314

2873. Griffith, I., 1996: Caribbean security on the eve of the 21st century, National Defense
University. Mcnair, paper 54.
2874. Griffith, I., 1997: Drugs and security in the Caribbean, PA, Penn State University Press.
2875. Grimble, Arthur Francis, Sir, 1989: Tungaru traditions: writings on the Atoll culture of the
Gilbert Islands, Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, School of Hawaiian, Asian,
and Pacific Studies, University of Hawaii: University of Hawaii Press.
2876. Grimshaw, Beatrice, 1931: Isles of adventures: from Java to New Caledonia, but principally
Papua, Boston.
2877. Grimshaw, P., 1989: Paths of duty: American missionary wives in 19th century Hawaii,
Honolulu.
2878. Grimsley, Eric J., 1998: The historical development of the Martello tower in the Channel
Islands, St Peter Port: Sarnian.
2879. Grinager, Patricia, 1999: Uncommon lives: my lifelong friendship with Margaret Mead,
Lanham, Md.; Oxford: Rowman & Littlefield.
2880. Groningen, D. v., 1980: “Migration of the Kilenge: a village study”, in Yagl-Ambu 7(2): 33-
46.
2881. Grossman, Zoltan, 1986: Inside the Philippine resistance, Race & Class, Jan 1986; vol.
28: pp. 1 - 29.
2882. Grove, Eric J., 2002: “The Falklands War and British defense policy”, in Defense and
Security Analysis, 18:4, 307-17
2883. Grove, Philip D., 2005: ‘Falklands Conflict 1982 - the air war: A new appraisal’. In Badsey,
for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 2005, 265-81
2884. Grow, Michael, 1992: Scholars’ Guide to Washington, D.C. for Latin American and
Caribbean Studies, 2nd rev. ed. Washington, D.C.: Woodrow Wilson Center Press.
2885. Grubb, F., 2001: Social science versus social rhetoric; methodology and the Pacific Island
Labour trade to Queensland, Australia, Historical Methods, Vol 34, No 1, pp.5-36
2886. Guanche, Jesús, 1992: Significación canaria en el poblamiento hispánico de Cuba:
los archivos parroquiales, 1690-1898, prólogo, Sergio Valdés Bernal, La Laguna:
Ayuntamiento de La Laguna, Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
2887. Guarnizo, Luis E., 1994: Los Dominicanyorks: The Making of a Binational Society, Annals
of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, Vol. 533, Trends in U. S.-
Caribbean Relations (May), pp. 70-86
2888. Guay, Lorraine, 2003: À la découverte des Îles du Saint-Laurent: de Cataracoui à Anticosti,
Sillery, Québec: Septentrion.
2889. Guébourg, Jean Louis, 1995: Migrants et clandestins de la Grande Comore, In: Iles
tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 295-318
2890. Guébourg, Jean-Louis, 1999: Petites îles et archipels de l’océan Indien, préface de Roger
Brunet, Paris: Karthala.
2891. Guébourg, Jean-Louis, 2004: Les Seychelles, Paris: Karthala.
2892. Guébourg, J-L., 1998: Socotra, une île hors du temps, Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “Îles et
archipels”, nº25.
2009
2893. Guerreiro, Inácio, Tradição e Modernidade nos Isolarios ou «Livros de Ilhas» dos Séculos
XV e XVI, in Oceanos, nº.46, (Abril/Junho), Lisboa, CNDP, pp.28-43.
2894. Guerrero Ayuso, Víctor M., 1997: El pensamiento científico en la prehistoria balear;
Fuentes bibliográficas para el estudio de la prehistoria balear, prólogo, Camilo J. Cela
Conde, Palma (Mallorca), Lleonard Muntaner.
2895. Guerrero, coordinador y editor, Víctor M., 2007: Prehistoria de las Islas Baleares: registro
arqueológico y evolución social antes de la Edad de Hierro, Oxford: Archaeopress.
2896. Guest, Harriet, 1989: The Great Distinction: Figures of the Exotic in the Work of William
Hodges, Oxford Art Journal, 12:36-58.
2897. Guest, Harriet, 1992: Curiously Marked: Tattooing, Masculinity, and Nationality in Eighteenth
Century British Perceptions of the South Pacific, In John Barrell (ed.) Painting and the
Politics of Culture: New Essays on British Art, 1700-1850, Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 101-134.
2898. Guevara, Gisela Medina, As relações luso-alemães antes da Primeira Guerra Mundial: a
questão da concessão dos sanatórios da Ilha da Madeira, Lisboa, Edições Colibri.
2899. Guiart, Jean 2004: Découverte de l’Océanie (tome 2) Connaissance des hommes, Nouméa
& Papeete.
2900. Guiart, Jean, 1992: Structure de la chefferie en Mélanésie du Sud, Paris: Institut
d’Ethnologie.
2901. Guiart, Jean, 2003: Les Mélanésiens devant l’économie de marché, du milieu du XIXe siècle
à la fin du millénaire, Nouméa.
2902. Guidieri, Remo, 1980: La route des morts, Paris: Seuil.
2903. Guidieri, Remo, 2005: Ombre: sul culto dei morti a Malekula, Melanesia orientale, Milano:
Medusa.
2904. Guiking, F. C. T., 1984: Problems in the uptake of potash by the oil palm (E. [Elaeis]
guineensis) in Papua New Guinea, Kimbe, West New Britain (Papua New Guinea), Kuala
Lumpur (Malaysia), Papua New Guinea Oil Palm Research Association, Guinea”, Journal
of Pacific History, vol. 21 (3-4), 183-201.
2905. Guiking, F. C. T., 1984: Problems in the uptake of potash by the oil palm (E. [Elaeis]
guineensis) in Papua New Guinea, Kimbe, West New Britain (Papua New Guinea), Kuala
Lumpur (Malaysia), Papua New Guinea Oil Palm Research Association.
2906. Guilaine, J.; Briois F.; Vigne J.-D.; Carrere I., 2000: New discovery of an early Cyprus
preceramic Neolithic (late 9th, early 8th<space>millennia cal. BC), related to the Early/
Middle PpNB of the northern Levant, Comptes Rendus de l’Academie des Sciences
Series IIA Earth and Planetary Science, Volume 330, Number 1, 15 January, pp. 75-82(8)
2907. Guilcher, A. (dir.), 1991: “Îles et sociétés insulaires”, Norois, numéros spéciaux, n°145 et
146.
2908. Guild, R., 2003: Pacific Islands. In Chin Saik Yoon (Ed.) Digitial Review of Asia Pacific,
2003–2004, Orbicom, pp. 306–318.
2909. Guillaud, D., Seysset, M., Walter, A. (dir.), 1998: Le voyage inachevé..., Paris; Orstom/
Prodig.
2910. Guillaud, David, G., D., Pillon, P. (dir.), 1999: La Nouvelle-Calédonie à la croisée
deschemins: 1989-1997, Société des Océanistes, Paris, IRD.
2911. Guillaud, D.; Huetz de Lemps, C.; Sevin, O., 2002: îles rêvées. Territoires et identités en
2009
CEHA 161
crise dans le Pacifique insulaire, Paris, Presses universitaires de la Sorbonne.

2912. Guillaumin, P., 1999: La dimension ultrapériphérique de l’Union européenne. Disponível
online em url: htttp://www.eurisles.com/Textes/statut/ ULTRAPERIPHERI QUEFR.htm.
2913. Guillemet, Dominique, 1987: Insularité et archaïsmes, paysans et seigneurs à Belle-Ile-en-
mer, vers 1660-1760; sous la dir. de Jean Tarrade, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine),
Thès doct. (nouv. régime): Histoire moderne: Poitiers.
2914. Guillemet, Dominique, 2007: Les îles de l’Ouest: de Bréhat à Oléron, du Moyen âge à la
Révolution, La Crèche: Geste poche.
2915. Guillemot, Julie, “Governance and territorial development in an insular environment: the
case of Isle-aux-Coudres /Gouvernance et developpement territorial en milieu insulaire:
le cas de l’Isle-aux-Coudres”. Canadian Journal of Regional Science. Disponível online
em url: http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb6565/is_3_31/ai_n31591127/. Consulta em
2916. Guimerá Ravina, Agustín, 1985: Burguesía extranjera y comercio atlántico: la empresa
comercial irlandesa en Canarias, 1703-1771, Santa Cruz de Tenerife, Islas Canarias,
Consejería de Cultura y Deportes, Gobierno Canarias; Madrid: Consejo Superior de
Investigaciones Científicas.
2917. Guimerá Ravina, Agustín, 1989: La Casa Hamilton: una empresa británica en Canarias
(1837-1987), Santa Cruz de Tenerife: [s.n.].
2918. Guinness, Patrick, 1973: Bush and Village: An analysis of Maututu Nakanai Mythology,
Master’s Thesis, University of Sydney.
2919. Guinness, W.E., 1936: Walkabout: a journey in lands between the Pacific and Indians
Oceans, London:William Heinimann, Ltd.
2920. Guinot, D., 1986: “Description of a Troglobitic Blind Crab From New Britain (Papua
New Guinea), Trogloplax-Joliveti Gen-Nov Sp-Nov, and Definition of a New Subfamily,
Trogloplacinae Subfam Nov”, Comptes Rendus De L Academie Des Sciences Serie Iii-
Sciences De La Vie-Life Sciences, 303(8): 307-312.
2921. Guirty, Geraldo, 1989: Harlem’s Danish-American West Indians, 1899-1964, New York,
Vantage Press, Guitar, Lynne, 2000:Criollos: The Birth of a Dynamic New Indo - Afro -
European People and Culture on Hispaniola”, KACIKE: Journal of Caribbean Amerindian
History and Anthropology, 1:1, pop.1-17. Disponível em url: in http://www.kacike.org/
LynneGuitar.html. consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
2922. Gumbs, Wycherley, 1997: Islands in the sun: the Virgin Islands: “the history and culture of
the Virgin Islands in poetry”, [S.l.: s.n.], U.S. Virgin Islands, Supreme Printing.
2923. Gumerman, George J., David Snyder, W. Bruce Masse., 1981: An archaeological
reconnaissance in the Palau archipelago, Western Caroline Islands, Micronesia,
Carbondale, Ill: Center for Archaeological Investigations, Southern Illinois University.
2924. Gunke, Shin’ichi, 1985: Uminari no Gotō shi, Tōkyō, Kokusho Kankōkai, Shōwa 60
2925. Gunn, Geoffrey C.; Huang, Reyko, 2004: “Reconciliation as State-building in East Timor”,
in Lusotopie, pp.19-38.
2926. Gunson, N., 1987: Sacred women chiefs and female headmen, in Polynesian history,
Journal of Pacific history, vol 22(3- 4), 139-172.
2927. Gunson, N., 1990: The Tonga-Samoan connection 1777-1845, Journal of Pacific history,
vol. 25(2), 176-187.
2009
2928. Gunson, N., 1993: Understanding Polynesian traditional history, Journal of Pacific history,
vol. 28(2), 139-158.
2929. Gunson, Walter Niel, 1994: British missionaries and their contribution to science in the
Pacific islands, In MacLeod, Roy M.; Rehbock, Philip F. (ed.), Darwin’s laboratory:
evolutionary theory and natural history in the Pacific, Honolulu (HI): University of Hawai’i
Press, 283-316.
2930. Gurney, David, 1993: The post office in the smaller Channel Islands, Ilford: Channel Islands
Specialists, Soc..
2931. Gurney, David, 2001: The postal history of the Jersey sub-post offices, Poole: Channel
Islands Specialists’ Society.
2932. Gurr, Andrew, 2001: A little piece of England: my adventures as Chief Executive of the
Falkland Islands, London: John Blake Publishing.
2933. Gustafson, Lowell S., 1988: The Sovereignty Dispute over the Falkland (Malvinas) Islands,
New York and Oxford.
2934. Guterres, Justino, 2001: “Para uma antropologia do sistema de alianças em Timor: o caso
dos Makasae”, in Lusotopie, pp.173-181.
2935. Gutsche, Andrea, Cindy Bisaillon, 1999: Mysterious islands: forgotten tales of the Great
Lakes, Toronto: Lynx Images.
2936. Guven-Lisaniler, F.; Warner, J., 1998: “Cyprus-Bridge or bunker? The Cyprus problem and
prospects for its resolution”, Perceptions, March-May, p. 86-103
2937. Guy, Jacques B.M., 1985: On a fragment of the “Tahua”. Tablet. Journal of the Polynesian
Society, 94. 367-87.
2938. Guy, Jacques B.M., 1988: Rjabchikov’s Decipherments Examined, Journal of the
Polynesian Society, 97, pp. 321-3.
2939. Guy, Jacques B.M., 1990: On the Lunar Calendar of Tablet Mamari, Journal de la Société
des Océanistes, 91:2.135-49.
2940. Haberkorn, Gerald, 1997: A sea of islands - a myriad of indicators: on the interface between
demography and planning in the Pacific Islands, Asia Pacific Viewpoint, vol. 38, no 3, p.
p. 219-236.
2941. Haberle, Simon, 1996: “Explanations for palaeoecological changes on the northern plains
of Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands: the last 3200 years”, in The Holocene, vol. 6: pp. 333
- 338.
2942. Hache, Jean-Didier (editor): 2000: Quel statut pour les îles d’Europe ? =What status for
Europe’s islands ?, L’Harmattan.
2943. Haddon, A. C.; Hornell, J., 1975: Canoes of Oceania, Honolulu, Hawaii, Bishop Museum
Press.
2944. Haddon, A.C., 1937: “New Britain” (Neu Pommern), in Canoes of Oceania, Vol II The
Canoes of Melanesia, Queensland and New Guinea Honolulu: Bishop Museum Special
Publication 28, Pp. 148-154.
2945. Haitlinger, R., 1989: “New canestriniid mites (Acari, Astigmata, Canestriniidae) connected
with beetles of the subfamilies Dynastinae and Cetoniinae (Insecta, Coleoptera,
Scarabaeidae)”, in Wiadomosci Parazytologiczne 35(1): 43-60.
2946. Hale, P. R., 1975: “An index for the identification of locations in the New Guinea islands
with suitable rainfall for upland rice production”, in Science in New Guinea, 3(3): 199-210.
2009
CEHA 163
2947. Halstead, B., 1996: The Dive Sites of Papua New Guinea, London, New Holland (Publishers)
Ltd.
2948. Halstead, P. J., 1982: “A district medical office in West New Britain, Papua New Guinea”,
in Papua New Guinea Medical Journal, 25(4): 273-7.
2949. Hamel-Green, 1991: Regional arms control in the South Pacific; Island state responses to
Australia’s nuclear free zone initiative, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol 3/1
2950. Hamilton, David, 1987: The Highlands and Islands medical services, In Improving the
common weal, Aspects of Scottish Health Services 1900-1984, ed. MCLACHLAN,
Gordon (Edinburgh), 481-90.
2951. Hammond, Jane 1986: Tifaifai and Quilts of Polynesia, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i
Press.
2952. Hancock, David, 2000: “A world of business to do”: William Freeman and the foundations
of England’s commercial empire, 1645-1707, William and Mary Quarterly, 3rd ser., 57:1
2953. Hanlon, David L., 1981: From Mesenieng to Kolonia: An Archaeological Survey of Historic
Kolonia. Micronesian Archaeological Survey Report 5. Saipan: Trust Territory Government
Press
2954. Hanlon, David L., 1982: Myths, Strategies and Guilt in Micronesia, Perspectives [East-
West Center, Honolulu] Summer, pp. 24–27.
2955. Hanlon, David L., 1983: Introduction to Recent Soviet Works on the Pacific, Soviet Studies
in History, 21 (4), pp.5–13.
2956. Hanlon, David L., 1983: The Federated States of Micronesia: Unifying the Remnants (with
William Eperiam). In Politics in Micronesia, vol 3, Politics in the Pacific Islands, edited by
Ron Crocombe and Ahmed Ali, Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the
South Pacific, pp. 81–99.
2957. Hanlon, David L., 1984: God vs. Gods: The First Years of the Micronesian Mission on
Ponape, 1852 to 1859, Journal of Pacific History, 19 (1), pp.41–59.
2958. Hanlon, David L., 1984: Upon a stone altar; a history of the island of Pohnpei, UH Press,
Honolulu.
2959. Hanlon, David L., 1988: Another Side of Henry Nanpei, Journal of Pacific History, 23 (1),
pp.36–51.
2960. Hanlon, David L., 1988: The Federated States of Micronesia: Unifying the Remnants (with
William Eperiam). In Politics in Micronesia, vol 3, Politics of the Pacific Islands, edited by
Ron Crocombe and Ahmed Ali, Revised edition. Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies,
University of the South Pacific, pp.85–106.
2961. Hanlon, David L., 1989: Micronesia: Writing and Rewriting the Histories of a Nonentity,
Pacific Studies, 12 (2), pp. 1–21.
2962. Hanlon, David L., 1990:“The Pleasure of Speculation and Conjecture”: Early Euro-
American Visions of Nan Madol and Their Relevance to Post-Modern Archaeological
Investigations. In Recent Advances in Micronesian Archaeology: Proceedings of the
Micronesian Archaeology Conference held on Guam from September 1987, edited
by Rosalind L Hunter-Anderson, 99–116. Special issue of Micronesica, Supplement 2
(October). Mangilao, Guam: University of Guam Press, pp. 9–12.
2963. Hanlon, David L., 1992: The Path Back to Pohnsakar: Luelen Bernart, His Book, and the
Practice of History on Pohnpei, Isla: A Journal of Micronesian Studies 1 (1) , pp.13–36
2964. Hanlon, David L., 1993: Sorcery, “Savage Memories,” and the Edge of Commensurability
2009
for History in the Pacific. In Pacific Islands History: Journeys and Transformations, edited
by Brij V Lal, Canberra: The Journal of Pacific History, pp. 107–128.
2965. Hanlon, David L., 1994: Remaking Micronesia: A Reflection on the Cultural and Strategic
Politics of Economic Development in American Micronesia, 1945–1968. In Dangerous
Liaisons: A Festschrift for Greg Dening, edited by Donna Merwick, Melbourne: Melbourne
University Press, pp. 135–156.
2966. Hanlon, David L., 1994: Patterns of Colonialism in Micronesia to 1942. In The History of the
Pacific Islands in the Twentieth Century, edited by Kerry R Howe, Brij V Lal, and Robert C
Kiste, Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press; Auckland: Allen & Unwin, pp. 93–118.
2967. Hanlon, David L., 1995: The End of History for the Edge of Paradise: Economic Development
and the Compacts of Free Association in American Micronesia. In Colonial Inheritance:
The Pacific Islands Since Independence, edited by Brij V Lal and Hank Nelson, Brisbane:
Pacific History Association, pp. 83–93.
2968. Hanlon, David L., 1998: Remaking Micronesia: discourses over development in a Pacific
territory, 1944-1982, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.
2969. Hanlon, David L., 1999: Magellan’s Chroniclers? American Anthropology’s History in
Micronesia. In American Anthropology and Micronesia, edited by Robert C Kiste and
Mac Marshall, Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press, pp.53–79.
2970. Hanlon, David L., 1999: The Chill of History: The Experience, Emotion and Changing
Politics of Archival Research in the Pacific. Archives and Manuscripts, The Journal of the
Australian Society of Archivists, 27 (1) , pp. 8–21.
2971. Hanlon, David L., 2000: Introduction (with Geoffrey M White). In Voyaging Through the
Contemporary Pacific, edited by David Hanlon and Geoffrey M White, 1–22. Lanham,
MD: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers
2972. Hanlon, David L., 2001: Converting Pasts and Presents: Reflections on Histories
of Missionary Enterprises in the Pacific. In Pacific Lives, Pacific Places: Changing
Boundaries in Pacific History, edited by Brij V Lal and Peter Hempenstall, 143–154.
Canberra: Coombs Academic Publishing. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.
edu/cpis/files/Hanlon-Converting_Pasts.pdf. Consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009.
2973. Hanlon, David L., 2003: Beyond “the English Method of Tattooing”: Decentering the Practice
of History in Oceania. In Back to the Future: Decolonizing Pacific Studies, edited by
Vilsoni Hereniko and Terence Wesley-Smith. Special issue of The Contemporary Pacific
15:19–40.Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/files/Hanlon-Beyond_the_
English.pdf. Consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009.
2974. Hanlon, David L., 2004: Wone Sohte Lohdi: History and Place on Pohnpei. In Pacific
Places, Pacific Histories: Essays in Honor of Robert C. Kiste, edited by Brij V Lal, 195–
215. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.
edu/cpis/files/Hanlon-Wone_Sohte.pdf. Consulta a 15 de Agosto de 2009.
2975. Hanlon, David L., 2005: On Francis X. Hezel’s The First Taint of Civilization. In Texts and
Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography, edited by Doug Munro and Brij V
Lal, Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press pp. 202-212.
2976. Hanlon, David L., 2008: “’You Did What, Mr. President!” Trying to Write a Life History of
Tosiwo Nakayama,” in Telling Pacific Lives: Prisms of Process, Brij V. Lal and Vicki Luker,
eds., Canberra: Australian National University E-Press, pp. 165-176.
2977. Hannell, David, 1987: A Case of Bad Publicity: Britain and the Ionian Islands, 1848-51,
European History Quarterly, Apr 1987; vol. 17: pp. 131 - 143.
2009
CEHA 165
2978. Hannell, David, 1989: “Lord Palmerston and the “Don Pacifico affair” of 1850: the Ionian
connection”, in European History Quarterly, 19, 495-507.
2979. Hannell, David, 1989: “The Ionian Islands under the British Protectorate: Social and
Economic Problems”, in Journal of Modern Greek Studies, 7,105–132.
2980. Hansen, Steffen Stummann, 1992: Cultural contacts in the Faroe islands in the viking age,
In Hall, R. A.; Hodges, R. M.; Clarke, Helen (ed.), 1992: Medieval Europe, 5: exchange
and trade, York, 13-18.
2981. Hansen, Steffen Stummann, 1993: Viking-age Faroe Islands and their southern links in
the light of recent finds at Toftanes, Leirvik, In Batey, Colleen E.; Jesch, Judith; Morris,
Christopher D. (ed.), The viking age in Caithness, Orkney and the north Atlantic,
Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 473-86.
2982. Hansen, Steffen Stummann, 1996: Aspects of Viking society in Shetland and the Faroe
Islands, In Waugh, Doreen J.; Smith, Brendan, Shetland’s northern links: language and
history, Edinburgh: Scottish Society for Northern Studies, 117-35.
2983. Hansen, Steffen Stummann, 2007: Governor on Antiquarian Mission: Christian Pløyen -
a Faroese Link between Copenhagen and Shetland, In Smith, Beverley Ballin; Taylor,
Simon, Williams, Gareth (ed.), West over sea: studies in Scandinavian sea-borne
expansion and settlement before 1300; a festschrift in honour of Dr. Barbara E. Crawford
(The Northern world, 31), Leiden: Brill, 431-42.
2984. Hanson, A., 1982: Female pollution in Polynesia, JPS, vol. 91, pp. 333-381.
2985. Hanson, L. W., B. J. Allen, R. M. Bourke and T. J. McCarthy, 2001: Papua New Guinea
Rural Development Handbook, Canberra, The Australian National University.
2986. Hanson, L. W., R. M. Bourke and D. S. Yinil, 1998: Cocoa and Coconut Growing
Environments in Papua New Guinea: A Guide for Research and Extension, Canberra,
Australian Agency for International Development.
2987. Hardy, J., and Frost, A., eds, 1989: Studies from Terra Australis to Australia, Canberra,
Highland Press/AAH.
2988. Hardy, J., and Frost, A., eds, 1990: European voyaging towards Australia Canberra,
Highland Press/AAH.
2989. Hargesheimer, Fred, 2002: The School That Fell From the Sky: The Autobiography of Fred
Hargesheimer, published through eBookstand Books.
2990. Harmon, Alexandra, 1998: Indians in the Making: Ethnic Relations and Indian Identities,
Around Puget Sound, University of California Press.
2991. Harpet, C., 2000: Le Lémurien: du sacré et de la malédiction, L’Harmattan, Paris.
2992. Harris, R. E., 1980: Islanders deported, part 1: the complete history of the British subjects
who were deported from the Channel Islands during the German occupation of 1940-45
and imprisoned in Europe, Ilford.
2993. Harris, Richard, 2005: ‘Making Leeway in the Leewards, 1929-51: The Negotiation of
Colonial Development’, Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History, 33:3, 393-418.
2994. Harrison, D., 2001: Islands, image and tourism, Tourism Recreation Research, 26(3), pp.
9-14.
2995. Harrison, D., 2001: Tourism in small islands and microstates, Tourism Recreation Research,
26(3), pp. 3-8.
2996. Harrison, Simon, 1993: The mask of war: violence, ritual, and the self in Melanesia,
2009
Manchester, UK; New York, NY: Manchester University Press: Distributed exclusively in
the USA and Canada by St. Martin’s Press.
2997. Hart, Ian B., 2006: Whaling in the Falkland Islands dependencies 1904-1931: a history of
the shore and bay-based whaling in the Antarctic, Newton St Margarets: Pequena.
2998. Harvey, Brian, 1991: Changing fortunes on the Aran Islands in the 1890s, Irish Historical
Studies, 27, 237-49.
2999. Hasager, U., Friedman, J., 1994: Hawaii; return to nationhood, IWGIA, Copenhagen.
3000. Hatanaka, S., 1991:The dilemme of the South Pacific Islands: states, traditions, ethnicity,
Journal de la societe des oceanistes, no 92-93.
3001. Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1981: Mekeo: inequality and ambivalence in a village society, Canberra:
Australian National University Press; Miami, Fla.: Books Australia.
3002. Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1986. The Implications of Being Very Small. Paper delivered to the Tokai
University/Friedrich Ebert-Stiftung Seminar on Cooperation in Development. Tokyo.
3003. Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1987: Kisses in the Nederends, Auckland, N.Z.: New York, N.Y., U.S.A.:
Penguin Books.
3004. Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1987: Tales of the Tikongs, Auckland, N.Z.: Longman Paul.
3005. Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1990: “Oral Traditions and Writing.” Landfall: A New Zealand Quarterly,
44:402-11.
3006. Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1993. “Our Sea of Islands”. In. E. Waddell, V. Naidu e E. Hau’ofa (eds.), A
New Oceania: Rediscovering Our Sea of Islands. Suva: School of Social and Economic
Development, University of the South Pacific/ Book House. pp 2-19.
3007. Hau’ofa, Epeli, et al., 1993: A New Oceania: rediscovering our sea of islands / [Suva, Fiji:
School of Social and Economic Development, The University of the South Pacific, in
association with Beake House.
3008. Hau’ofa, Epeli, 1994: ‘Our Sea of Islands’, The Contemporary Pacific, Vol. 6, No. 1, pp.
148-160.
3009. Hauptman, Laurence M., 1999: Conspiracy of Interests: Iroquois Dispossession and the
Rise of New York State, Syracuse University Press.
3010. Hauser-Schäublin, Brigitta, Marquesas - plagued by misfortune, In Hauser-Schäublin,
Brigitta; Krüger, Gundolf (ed.), James Cook: gifts and treasures from the South Seas:
Gaben und Schätze aus der Südsee, München and New York: Prestel, 221-33.
3011. Haussmann, Eberhard, 1994: Vogel in der Kultur der Mbirao: Ergebnisse
ethnoornithologischerund ethnotaxonomischer Untersuchungen in einer Ethnie der
Salomonen, Bonn: Holos Verlag.
3012. Hawke, Siobhán, 2004: A social and economic history of Bere Island, 1900-1920,
Castletownbere: The Shell.
3013. Hawkins, Richard A., 1997: An English entrepreneur in the Hawaiian Islands: the life and
times of John Kidwell, 1849-1922, Hawaiian Journal of History, 31, 127-42.
3014. Hayami, Y.; Kawagoe, T., 1989: Farmers and middlemen in a transmigration area in
Indonesia, Bulletin of Indonesian Economic Studies, vol. vol. 25, no 3, p. p. 73-97
3015. Hayes, L. T., 1992: Plant Macroremains from Archaeological Sites in the Arawe Islands,
Papua New Guinea: a study of Tree exploitation and the interpretation of archaeobotanical
remains in Melanesian Prehistory, BA Honours thesis, La Trobe University, Bundoora.
2009
CEHA 167
3016. Haynes, Douglas E.; Wuerch, William L., 1995: Micronesian religion and lore: a guide to
sources, 1526-1990, introduction by Francis X. Hezel, S. J., Westport, Conn.: Greenwood
Press.
3017. Hayward, Philip, 1998: Music at the borders; Not Drowning Waving and their engagement
with Papua New Guinea culture (1986-96), Sydney, John Libby.
3018. Hayward, Philip, 1998: ‘The Papua New Guinea music industry and the world music market’
in Mitsui, T (ed) Popular Music: Intercultural Interpretations (IASPM Sixth International
Conference Proceedings), Kanazawa (Japan): Kanazawa University Graduate program
in Music, pp. 442-447.
3019. Hayward, Philip, 2001:Tide Lines: Music, Tourism and Cultural Transition in the Whitsunday
Islands, Lismore: Music Archive for The Pacific Press.
3020. Hayward, Philip, 2003: Hearing The Call – A Music History of Lord Howe Island, Lord Howe
Island Arts Council.
3021. Hayward, Philip, 2004: ‘Tourism, contact and cultural commodification: a case study of
local musical entertainment on the Whitsunday Islands, Queensland, Australia from the
1930s to 1990s’ in Harrison, D (ed) Pacific Islands Tourism, New York, Sydney and Tokyo:
Cognizant, pp.125-139.
3022. Hayward, P., Fitzgerald, J. 2004: ‘Alternative Mixes: A comparative discussion of
Contemporary Music programs at Macquarie and Southern Cross Universities’, in
unattributed (ed) Proceedings of the XXVIth Annual Conference of the Australian
Association for Research in Music Education, Melbourne AARME, pp152-162.
3023. Hayward, Philip, 2005: ‘Hauntings: Soundtrack representations of Papua New Guinea’ in
Coyle, R (ed) Reel Tracks: Australian Feature Film Music and Cultural Identities, Eastleigh
(UK): John Libbey and Co (2005) pp48-58.
3024. Hayward, Philip, 2005: ‘Culturally Engaged Research and Facilitation’, in Evans, M (ed)
Refereed Proceedings of the First International Conference on Small Island Cultures,
Sydney: Small Island Cultures Research Initiative.
3025. Hayward, Philip, 2005: ‘Country Music in Norfolk Island’, in Evans, M and Walden, G (eds)
At the Crossroads: Australian Country Music Volume 3, Gympie: Australian Institute of
Country Music Press, pp143-160.
3026. Hayward, Philip, 2006: ‘Dancing to a Pacific Beat: Music Video in Papua New Guinea’, in
Beebe, R (ed) Music Video/Television, Durham: Duke University Press.
3027. Hayward, Philip, 2006: Bounty Chords: Music, Culture and Cultural Heritage on Norfolk
and Pitcairn Islands, Eastleigh (UK): John Libbey and Co.
3028. Hayward, Philip, ed., 2008: The Dynamics of Small Island Cultures, Bristol (UK): Intellect
Books.
3029. Healey, C., 1993: “Responding to environmental perturbations in Papua New Guinea”,
N. M. Williams and G. Baines, Eds. Traditional Ecological Knowledge: Wisdom for
Sustainable Development, Canberra, Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies,
Australian National University, pp. 162-165.
3030. Healy, A., 1987: Monocultural administration in a multicultural environment; the Australians
in Papua New Guinea, in Eddy, J.J. and Nethercote, J.J., eds, From colony to coloniser;
studies in Australian administrative history, Sydney, Hale and Ironmonger, pp.207-24.
3031. Healy, AM. 1997: Colonial law as metropolitan defence; the curious case of Australia in
New Guinea, in Hiery H and MacKenzie JM, eds, European impact and Pacific influence;
2009
British and German policy in the Pacific Islands and the indigenous response, London,
Tauris Academic Studies, pp.214-30.
3032. Heaney, Seamus, 1980: ”A tale of two islands: reflections on the Irish literary revival”, in
Irish Studies, 1, 1-20.
3033. Heath, Robert, 2004: Ancient curiosities of Cornwall & the Scillies, Monmouth: Oakmagic.
3034. Hedges, J. W., 1987: Bu, Gurness and the Brochs of Orkney, with the collaboration of
Bernard Bell and Beverley Smith, 3 vols. in 2 (BAR, British ser., 163), Oxford.
3035. Hellberg, I. J., 2005: ‘An experience with the commando logistic regiment Royal Marines’.
109-30.
3036. Hempenstall, P., 1999: Releasing the voices; historicising colonial encounters in the
Pacific, in Borofsky, R, ed, Remembrance of Pacific pasts; an invitation to remake history,
Honolulu, UH Press, pp.43-61.
3037. Hempenstall, P.J., & N. Rutherford, 1984: Protest and dissent in the colonial Pacific, Suva.
3038. Henderson, J.C., 2001: Developing and managing small islands as tourist attractions,
Tourism and Hospitality Research, 3(2), pp.120-131.
3039. Henkel, F-W., [et al.], 2000: Amphibians and Reptiles of Madagascar, the Mascarenes, the
Seychelles, and the Comoro Islands, Krieger Publishing Co. Florida.
3040. Hennessy, Peter, 2005: “War cabinetry” : The political direction of the Falklands Conflict,
In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), 2005: The Falklands conflict twenty
years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York:
Cass.
3041. Hennessy, Peter, 2005: ‘”War cabinetry”: The political direction of the Falklands Conflict’.
York: Cass, pp.131-46.
3042. Henningham, S., 1989: Keeping the tricolour flying: The French Pacific into the 1990s.
3043. Henningham, S., 1992: Australia and the South Pacific in Mediansky, F.A., ed, Australia in
a changing world, Sydney, Macmillan.
3044. Henningham, S., 1992: France and the South Pacific: a contemporary history, Sydney.
3045. Henningham, S., 1994: The best specimens in all our colonial domains; New Caledonian
Melanesians in Europe 1931-32, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 29/2, pp.172-87.
3046. Henningham, S., 1995: “Decolonisation, indigenous rights and internal conflicts”, in his The
Pacific Island States; security and sovereignty in the post-Cold War Pacific, Macmillan,
52-70.
3047. Henningham, S., 1995: The limits of power; Australia and New Zealand and the region, in
The Pacific Island States; security and sovereignty in the post-cold war World, London,
Macmillan, pp.114-36.
3048. Henry, Paget, 1981: De-colonization, Tourism and Class/Race Structure in Antigua. In
Contemporary Caribbean: A Sociological Reader, Vol. 1. Susan Craig, ed. Pp. 243-263.
Maracas, Trinidad and Tobago: College.
3049. Henry, Ralph, and Kim Johnson, 1985: Linking Tourism and Agriculture to Create Jobs and
Reduce Migration in the Caribbean, In Migration and Development in the Caribbean: The
2009
CEHA 169
Unexplored Connection, Robert A. Pastor, ed. Pp.289-300. Boulder, Colorado: Westview.

3050. Henshall, Brian D., and Rae Roberts, 1985: Comparative Assessment of Tourist Generating
Markets for New Zealand, Annals of Tourism Research, 12:219-238.
3051. Herber, Mark D., 2000: Ancestral trails: the complete guide to British genealogy and family
history. 2nd edn. Stroud: Sutton.
3052. Hercock, Marion, 2003: “Masters and Servants: The Contrasting Rôles of Scientists in
Island Management”, in Social Studies of Science, Feb 2003; vol. 33: pp. 117 - 136.
3053. Hereniko, V., 1987: South Pacific Islanders, Rourke Publications.
3054. Hereniko, Vilsoni, 1995: Woven Gods: Female Clowning and Power in Rotuma, Pacific
Islands Monograph Series 12. Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies and University
of Hawai‘i Press.
3055. Hereniko, V., 1996: Representations of cultural identities, in Howe K, Kiste RC and Lal BV,
(eds), Tides of history, pp.406-34.
3056. Herity, Michael, 1989: “Cathair na Naomh and its cross-slabs”, in Cathair na Mart (Westport
Historical Society), 9, 91-100.
3057. Herman, D., 1999: Race, identity and representation, in Rapaport M, ed, The Pacific
islands; Society and environment, Honolulu, Bess Press, pp.156-65
3058. Herman, R. D. K., 1997: Hawaï, à la croisée des chemins: la renaissance d’une identité
pacifique, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut d’Etude du
Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, France, Revue Tiers Monde,
vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 177-196.
3059. Hernon, Ian, 1998: Massacre and retribution: forgotten wars of the nineteenth century,
Stroud: Sutton.
3060. Herr, Richard A., 2006: ‘Australia, security and the Pacific Islands: From Empire to
Commonwealth’, Round Table, 95:387, 705-16.
3061. Hexel, Francis X., 1983: The first taint of civilization: a history of the Caroline and Marshall
islands in pre-colonial days, 1521-1885, University of Hawaii press.
3062. Heying, H. E., 2002: Antipode: Seasons with the Extraordinary Wildlife and Culture of
Madagascar, St. Martin’s Press, New York.
3063. Hezel, F., 1982: From conversion to conquest: The early Spanish mission in the Marianas,
Journal of Pacific History, vol. 17(3), 115-137.
3064. Hezel, F., 1988: New directions in Pacific History: a practitioner’s critical view, PS, vol.
11(3), 1988: 101-110.
3065. Hezel, F., and Driver, M., 1988: From conquest to colonisation; Spain in the Marianas
Islands 1690-1740, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 4, No 1, pp.45-59.
3066. Hezel, F.X., 1989: Suicide and the Micronesian family, TCP, 1,1, 43-74, Hezel, Francis X.,
2001: The new shape of old island cultures: a half century of social change in Micronesia,
Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.
3067. Hezel, Francis X., Is That the Best You Can Do? A Tale of Two Micronesian Economies,
East-West Center Pacific Islands Policy Series. Disponível online em url: http://www.
eastwestcenter.org/fileadmin/stored/pdfs/pip001.pdf. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
3068. Hicks, Dan, 2008: ‘”Material Improvements”: the Archaeology of Estate Landscapes in
the British Leeward Islands, 1713-1838’. In Finch, Jonathan; Giles, Kate (ed.), Estate
landscapes : design, improvement and power in the post-medieval landscape (Society
2009
for Post-Medieval Archaeology monograph, 4), Woodbridge: Boydell and Brewer, 205-28
3069. Hide, R. L., 1990: Working Paper K: Issues in community participation in development.
Primary Industry Management Services Pty Ltd, Tropical Rural Development Group
(ANU) and CARE Australia, Eds. Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project
Final Draft Volume 3 Working Papers F-K: Social and Other Sectors, Sydney, Primary
Industry Management Services Pty Ltd in association with Tropical Rural Development
Group (ANU) & CARE Australia.
3070. Hide, R. L., A. Cochrane and (compiled) 1990: A bibliography of the Kandrian and Gloucester
Districts of West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, Primary Industry Management
Services Pty Ltd and e. al, Eds. Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project
Final Draft Volume 1 Main Report. Sydney, Primary Industry Management Services Pty
Ltd in association with Tropical Rural Development Group (ANU) & CARE Australia, pp.
49-57.
3071. Hiery, Hermann Joseph; MacKenzie, John MacDonald, 1997: Introduction, [British and
German colonial policy in the Pacific Islands and the indigenous response], In Hiery,
Hermann Joseph; MacKenzie, John MacDonald (ed.), European impact and Pacific
influence: British and German colonial policy in the Pacific Islands and the indigenous
response (Library of international relations; International library of historical studies, 7),
London and New York: Tauris Academic and the German Historical Institute, 1-8.
3072. Hiery, Hermann, 2005: Bilder aus der deutschen Südsee: Fotografien 1884-1914; mit
einem Beitrag von Antje Kelm, Paderborn: Schöningh.
3073. Higgitt, Mark, 2001: Through fire and water: Ardent: the forgotten frigate of the Falklands,
Edinburgh: Mainstream.
3074. Higman, Barry William Caldwell, 1995: Small islands, large questions: post-emancipation
historiography of the Leeward Islands, In Olwig, Karen Fog (ed.), Small islands, large
questions: society, culture and resistance in the post-emancipation Caribbean, London &
Portland (OR): Cass, 8-28
3075. Hill, H., 1984: Superpower of the Pacific; Australia and its island neighbours, in Eastwood
J, et. al., (eds), Labour essays, Melbourne.
3076. Hionidou, Violetta, 1995: “Nuptiality Patterns and Household Structure On the Greek Island
of Mykonos, 1849-1959”, in Journal of Family History, Jan 1995; vol. 20: pp. 67 - 102.
3077. Hirashima, Y., 1986: “Biological studies on insect species diversities and productivities in
the highland agricultural ecosystems of Papua New Guinea: a progress report for the
year 1984”, in Esakia No. 24: 1-4.
3078. Hirst, David, 2007: ‘Lunacy and the “Islands in the British Seas”’, History of Psychiatry,
18:4, 411-33.
3079. Hoare, Kieran, 2001: “A guide to the archival holdings of the James Hardiman Library,
National University of Ireland, Galway”, in Journal of the Galway Archaeological and
Historical Society, 53, 84-104
3080. Hobsbawn, Patricia e Stuckings, Natalie, 1998, 2006: Papua New Guinea Agricultural
Bibliography, Land Management Group, Department of Human Geography. Disponível
online em url: http://database.anu.edu.au/rspas/hug/pngagbib/. Consulta em 5 de Agosto
de 2009.
3081. Hocart, R. ‘Guernsey: 1991: Local history in an insular context, Local Historian, 21 (1991),
20-26.
3082. Hocart, Richard, 1992: The building of the New Town, Société Guernesiaise Report and
2009
CEHA 171
Transactions, 23:2 (1993 for 1992), 342-77.

3083. Hohepa, P., 1999: My musket, My missionary and my mana, in Calder A, Lamb J and
Orr B, eds, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-1840, UH Press, Honolulu
pp.180-201.
3084. Holland, James, 2003: Fortress Malta: an island under siege 1940-1943, London: Orion.
3085. Holland, Robert Featherstone, 2008: ‘Patterns of Anglo-Hellenism: A ‘Colonial’ Connection?’,
Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History, 36:3, 383-96.
3086. Holland, Robert Featherstone; Markides, Diana Weston, 2006: The British and the
Hellenes: struggles for mastery in the eastern Mediterranean, 1850-1960, Oxford: Oxford
University Press.
3087. Holzknecht, P. W., 1980: “An Annotated Bibliography of German-language material held by
the New Guinea collection of the University of Papua New Guinea”, in Oral History 8(6):
1-63.
3088. Hope, Kempe R., 1980: The Caribbean Tourism Sector: Recent Performance and Trends,
International Journal of Tourism Management, 1:175-183.
3089. Hopkins, J, 1995: The place of foreign Pacific Islanders in Torres Strait and Papua 1863-
1878, Journal of the RHSQ, Vol 15, No 12, pp.571-78.
3090. Hore, Peter, 2005: ‘The ‘logistics miracle’ of Ascension Island’ [Falklands conflict]. In
213-25.
3091. Horn, Walter; Marshall, Jenny White; Rourke, Grellan D., 1990: The forgotten hermitage
of Skellig Michael (California studies in the history of art, 2), Berkeley: Oxford University
of California Press.
3092. Howard, Alan, and E. Kjellgren, 1994: Martyrs, progress and political ambitions: reexamining
Rotuma’s “religious wars”, Journal of Pacific History, 29(2): 131-152.
3093. Howard, Alan, 1981: Rotuma, In R. D. Craig and F. P. King, eds., Historical Dictionary of
Oceania, Greenwood Press, Westport Connecticut. pp. 253-254.
3094. Howard, Alan, 1985: History, myth and Polynesian chieftainship: the case of Rotuman
kings, In Hooper, A. and J. Huntsman, eds., Transformations of Polynesian Culture,
essays based on contributions to a symposium at the 15th Pacific Science Congress, pp.
39-77, Memoir N°45. The Polynesian Society, Auckland.
3095. Howard, Alan, 1989: Developments in Polynesian Ethnology (co-editor with R. Borofsky).
University Press of Hawaii.
3096. Howard, Alan, 1993: Reflections on history in Polynesia, In T. Otto, ed., Pacific Island
Trajectories: Five Personal Views. Occasional Paper of the Department of anthropology,
Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian National University, Canberra in
association with the Centre for Pacific Studies, University of Nijmegen, The Netherlands.
3097. Howard, Alan, 1994: History in Polynesia: changing perspectives and current issues, In
P. van der Grijp and T. van Meijl, eds., Politics, Tradition and Change in the Pacific,
Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde 149: 646-660.
3098. Howard, Alan, 2001: Where Has Rotuman Culture Gone? And What is it Doing There?
(with Jan Rensel) Pacific Studies, 24 (1/2):63-88.
3099. Howard, Alan, 2002: www.repatriating_ethnography.edu/rotuma, in Handle with Care:
2009
Ownership and Control of Ethnographic Materials, edited by Sjoerd R. Jaarsma. University

of Pittsburg Press. ASAO Monograph No. 20.
3100. Howard, Alan, 2004: Contextualizing Histories: Our Rotuman Experience (with Jan Rensel),
Pacific Studies, 27 (3/4):11-36.
3101. Howard, Alan, 2004: Introduction: Back in the Field Again: Long Term Fieldwork in Oceanic
Anthropology (with John Barker), Pacific Studies, 27 (3/4):1-10.
3102. Howard, Alan, 2004: Restraint and Ritual Apology: The Rotumans of the South Pacific, in
Keeping the Peace, edited by Graham Kemp and Douglas P. Fry. New York: Routledge.
pp. 35-52.
3103. Howard, Alan, 2004: Rotuman Identity in the Electronic Age (with Jan Rensel), in Shifting
Images of Identity in the Pacific, edited by Toon van Meijl and Jelle Miedema. Leiden:
KITLV Press.
3104. Howard, Alan, 2007: Island Legacy: A History of the Rotuman People (with Jan Rensel).
Victoria B.C. Trafford Publishing.
3105. Howard, Alan, 2006: Presenting Rotuma to the World: The Making of The Land Has Eyes,
Visual Anthropology Review, 22(1):73-95.
3106. Howard, Chris Perez, 2000: Mariquita: A tragedy of Guam. Hagatna, Guam: Cyfred, Lt.
Gill-Perez House.
3107. Howarth, J., 1990: Lemurs of the Lost World: Exploring the Forests and Crocodile Caves
of Madagascar.
3108. Howe, K. R., 1984: considering the new historiography, in Where the waves fall, Sydney,
Allen and Unwin
3109. Howe, K. R., 1984: Where the Waves Fall: a New South Sea Islands History from First
Settlement to Colonial Rule, Pacific Islands Studies Program, Center for Pacific and
Asian Studies, Honolulu: University of Hawaiëi Press.
3110. Howe, K. R., 1992: The intellectual discovery and exploration of Polynesia, in Fisher R and
Johnston H (eds), From maps to metaphors, University of British Columbia Press.
3111. Howe, K. R., 1996: The making of Cook’s death, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 31(1), 108-
118.
3112. Howe, K. R.; Kiste, Robert & Lal, Brij (eds.), 1994: Tides of history: the Pacific Islands in
the twentieth century, st. leonards, nsw.
3113. Howells, Roscoe. ‘The Pembrokeshire islands’, In Howell, David W. (ed.), Pembrokeshire
county history, vol. IV: modern Pembrokeshire, 1815-1974, Haverfordwest: Pembrokeshire
Historical Soc., 208-23; 490-92.
3114. Howitt, Richard; Connell, John; Hirsch, Philip, ed. 1996: Resources, nations and indigenous
peoples: case studies from Australasia, Melanesia and Southeast Asia, Melbourne; New
York: Oxford University Press.
3115. Howkins, Adrian, 2006: ‘Icy relations: the emergence of South American Antarctica during
the Second World War’, Polar Record, 42:2, 153-65.
3116. H–skuldsson, L., 1980: A Directory of Scandinavian Scholars in Asian Studies, Copenhagen:
Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies.
3117. Huetz de Lemps, C., 1981: Plantations sucrieres et protection de l’environnement aux Iles
2009
CEHA 173
Hawaii, Bulletin de Liaison - Sepanrit, no 11, p. p. 73-77

3118. Huetz de Lemps, Alain, 1983: Le Monde des Atolls et des Iles Basses (conference du
8eme colloque de la sepanrit, Bordeaux 2-3 nov. 1981), bulletin de liaison - sepanrit, no
12, pp. 63-76.
3119. Huetz de Lemps, A., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et
exemples, In Le monde des atolls et des iles basses, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence,
France; Bordeaux: CEGET; CRET, p. 93-106.
3120. Huetz de Lemps, C., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et
exemples, In Activites et demographie des populations insulaires du monde tropical,
Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, p. 109-119.
3121. Huetz de Lemps, C., 1984: Un jeune Etat melanesien: les iles Salomon. Bordeaux: CEGET.
3122. Huffer, E., 1991: Les iles dans le monde ou le monde vu des iles, Une approche comparee
de la politique exterieure de trois micro-Etats Oceaniens: Fidji, Tonga et Vanuatu, Journal
de la Societe des Oceanistes, no 92-93, pp. 7-19.
3123. Huffer, E., 1993: Grands Hommes et Petites Îles, La Politique Extérieure de Fidji, de Tonga
et du Vanuatu, Paris IRD, Études et Thèses.
3124. Huffer, E.; Bonnemaison, Joel (pref.). 1993: Grands hommes et petites iles: la politique
exterieure de Fidji, de Tonga et du Vanuatu, Paris: ORSTOM.
3125. Huffer, Elise, 1997: Pirogues et porte-avions: les relations internationales dans le Pacifique
sud, In Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut d’Etude du
Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. vol.
38, no 149, pp.35-55.
3126. Huffman, Kirk W., 1996: The “Decorated Cloth” from the “Island of Good Yams”: Barkcloth
in Vanuatu, with Special Reference to Erromango, In Arts of Vanuatu, edited by Joël
Bonnemaison, Christian Kaufmann, Kirk Huffman and Darrell Tryon. Bathurst: Crawford
House Publishing, 129–140.
3127. Hughes, D.E., 1986: The prahu and unrecorded inter-island trade, Bulletin of Indonesian
Economic Studies, no 2, p. p. 103-113.
3128. Hulme, D., 1983: “An economic appraisal of the Hoskins oil palm scheme”, in Australian
Geographer 15: 330-334.
3129. Hulme, D., 1984: Land settlement schemes and rural development in Papua New Guinea,
PhD thesis, James Cook University, Townsville.
3130. Humble, Richard, 1986: The rise and fall of the British navy, Macdonald Queen Anne
Press.
3131. Hunt, D. J.; Moore, D., 1999: “Rhigonematida from New Britain diplopods. 2. The genera
Rhigonema Cobb, 1898 and Zalophora Hunt, 1994 (Rhigonematoidea: Rhigonematidae)
with descriptions of three new species”, in Nematology, 1: 225-242.
3132. Hunt, Peter, 1998: A brief history of Jersey, Jersey: Société Jersiaise.
3133. Hunt, Rex, 2002: My Falkland days, Revised & updated edn. London: Politico’s.
3134. Hunter Anderson, R.L., 1990: Recent advances in Micronesian archaeology, Selected
papers from the Micronesian Archeology Conference Septembre 9-12, 1987, Micronesica,
no 2, p. p. 1-434.
3135. Hunter, James, 1991: The claim of crofting: the Scottish highlands and islands, 1930-1990,
Edinburgh : Mainstream.
2009
3136. Hunter, Jim, 1996: Tory island - habitat, economy and society, Ulster Folklife, 42, 38-78.
3137. Hunter, Jim, 2003: Tory Island and its artists, Coleraine: University of Ulster.
3138. Hunter-Anderson, Rosalind L., 1983: Yapese settlement patterns: an ethnoarchaeological
approach, Agana, Guam: Pacific Studies Institute; Detroit, Mich: Cellar Book Shop
[distributor].
3139. Huntsman, A. C., 1984: “Health and nutrition of labourers’ families in Papua New Guinea”,
in Papua New Guinea Medical Journal, 27(2): 73-81.
3140. Huntsman, A. C., 1984: Health and nutrition of labourers’ families in Papua New Guinea,
Papua New Guinea Medical Journal, 27(2): 73-81.
3141. Huria, I. and G. R. Tyrie, 1982: Airagilpua Survey, Cape Gloucester, West New Britain,
Department of Primary Industry Land Utilisation Section, Unpublished Report, Port
Moresby.
3142. Hurley, Jim, 1988-89: “The Keeragh Islands: a review”, in Journal of the Wexford Historical
Society, 12, 86-91.
3143. Huser, K.; Reinl, T., 1987: Landnutzung Tropischer Inseln: La Reunion und Mauritius im
Sudindischen Ozean, Geographische Rundschau, no 1, p. p. 44-51.
3144. Hviding, Edvard, 1995: Kiladi oro vivineidi tongania tingitonga pu ko pa idere oro goana pa
Marovo / Of Reef and Rainforest: A Dictionary of Environment and Resources in Marovo
Lagoon. Bergen: Centre for Development Studies, University of Bergen, in cooperation
with Western Province Division of Culture, Gizo, Solomon Islands.
3145. Hviding, Edvard, 1995a: Vivinei tuari pa Ulusaghe / Custom Stories of the Marovo Area.
Recorded, edited and translated by Edvard Hviding. Bergen: Centre for Development
Studies, University of Bergen, in collaboration with Western Province Division of Culture,
Gizo, Solomon Islands.
3146. Hviding, E. and Baines, G.,1996: Custom and complexity; marine tenure, fisheries
management and conservation in Morovo lagoon, Solomon Islands, in Howitt R, Connell
J and Hirsch P, eds, Resources nations and indigenous peoples, Oxford University Press,
66-89.
3147. Hviding, Edvard, 1996a: Guardians of Marovo Lagoon: Practice, Place, and Politics in
Maritime Melanesia. Pacific Islands Monograph Series 14. Honolulu: Center for Pacific
Islands Studies and University of Hawai‘i Press.
3148. Hviding, Edvard, 1996b: Nature, Culture, Magic, Science: On Meta-Languages for
Comparison in Cultural Ecology, In Nature and Society: Anthropological Perspectives,
edited by P Descola and G Pálsson, 165–184. London: Routledge.
3149. Hviding, Edvard, 1998: Western Movements in Non-WesternWorlds: Toward an
Anthropology of Uncertain Encounters. Journal of the Finnish Anthropological Society 23
(3): 30–51.
3150. Hylan, Ken, 1989: Cargo and Christianity in Kaliai, Health and nutritional status within the
Talasea, Koskins, Kapiura, Ania Fulleborn Timber areas. UNITECH Development and
Consultancy Pty Ltd, Ed. Scientific Reports for the Environmental Plan: Talasea, Hoskins,
Kapiura and Ania-Fulleborn Timber Areas. Lae, UNITECH.
3151. Hylan, Ken, 1990: “Cargo and Christianity in Kaliai”, in Catalyst, 20(2): 167-188.
3152. Hylan, Ken, 1990: “The New Tribes in Kaliai: a response” in Catalyst, 20(3):261- 266.
3153. Hyland, K., 1989: “Health and nutritional status within the Talasea, Koskins, Kapiura, Ania
Fulleborn Timber areas”, UNITECH Development and Consultancy Pty Ltd, Ed. Scientific
2009
CEHA 175
Reports for the Environmental Plan: Talasea, Hoskins, Kapiura and Ania-Fulleborn Timber
Areas. Lae, UNITECH, International, [International Geological Congress], pp. 506.
3154. Hyndman, D., 2001: Academic responsibilities and representation of the Ok Tedi crisis in
postcolonial Papua New Guinea, TCP, 13, 1, pp.33-54.
3155. IAC, 1985: A Autonomia como fenómeno Cultural e Político. Comunicações apresentadas
na VIII Semana de Estudos dos Açores, Angra do Heroísmo, Instituto Açoriano de Cultura.
3156. IBI, 2002: Islands business,, Suva, Fiji: Islands Business International.
3157. Ibrahime, Mahmoud, 1997: Etat français et colons aux Comores, 1912-1946, Paris,
CEROI-INALCO, Editions L’Harmattan, Montréal, Qc., Canada, L’Harmattan Inc., c1997.
3158. ICES, 1992: bliography: Ethnicity and Conflict - Sri Lanka, The International Centre for
Ethnic Studies (ICES), Sri Lanka. Disponível online em url: http://www.ices.lk/sl_database/
ethnic_conflict/bibliography.shtml. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
3159. ICG, 1997: Il Mare per le grandi isole del Mediterraneo nord-occidentale: atti del Convegno,
Bastia, 11-13 giugno 1996, Genova, [Istituto di scienze geografiche]
3160. IGLP, 2004: Insularité, société et développement, Institut de Géographie Louis Papy,
Université Michel-de Montaigne - Bordeaux III.
3161. Ihimaera, Witi; (ed) Adsett, Sandy and Whiting, Cliff (general editors), 1996: Mataora: The
Living Face, Contemporary Maori Art. Auckland: David Bateman/Creative New Zealand.
3162. Illouz, Charles; Tréfeu, Thérèse, 2003: Sources du Pacifique insulaire: Lieux de recherche
et d’information scientifique, Paris: Karthala.
3163. Imada, Adria Lyn, 2004: Hawaiians on Tour: Hula Circuits Through the American Empire,
American Quarterly, Volume 56, Number 1, March, pp. 111-149.
3164. Imperial College – London, 2009: Electronic Journals - A to Z. Disponível online em url:
http://www3.imperial.ac.uk/library/digitallibrary/electronicjournals. Consulta em 29 de
Agosto de 2009.
3165. Inbar, E.; Sheffer, G., 1997: The national security of small states in a changing world,
Londres, Frank Cass.
3166. Indenrigsministeriet, 1981: Ø-kommunernes økonomiske og servicemæssige problemer:
betænkning, afgivet af Indenrigsministeriets udvalg af 25. april 1979. København:
Direktoratet for statens indkøb.
3167. Inglis, A., 1997: re-reading the White Women’s Protection ordinance, in Hiery H and
MacKenzie JM, eds, European impact and Pacific influence; British and German policy
in the Pacific Islands and the indigenous response, London, Tauris Academic Studies,
pp.324-37.
3168. Ingoldby, Grace, 1990: Out of call or cry: the Island of Sark, London: Heinemann.
3169. Inkson, K., 2004: “The New Zealand Brain Drain: Expatriate views”, University of Auckland
Business Review, 6 (2): 29–39.
3170. Inoue, Kazuo, [et al.], 2000: “A Comparative Study of Rural Clinics in Remote Islands and
Inland Areas”, in Asia Pacific Journal of Public Health, vol. 12: pp. 22 -.
3171. Inskip, Ian, 2002: Ordeal by Exocet: HMS Glamorgan and the Falkl, Thomson, William P.
L. ‘Ouncelands and Pennylands in the West Highlands and Islands’, Northern Scotland,
22, 27-43.
3172. Intoh, Michiko, Foss Leach, 1985: Archaeological investigations in the Yap Islands,
Micronesia: first millennium B.C. to the present day, Cambridge, England, B.A.R..
2009
3173. Ioannides, D., 1992: Tourism development agents: the Cypriot resort cycle, Annals of
Tourism Research, 19(4), pp.711-731.
3174. Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y. & Sonmez, S. (eds.), 2001: Mediterranean Islands and
Sustainable Tourism Development, London, Continuum.
3175. Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y. and Sonmez, S.F., 2001: Searching for sustainable
tourism development in the insular Mediterranean, In: Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y.
and Sonmez, S.F. (eds), Mediterranean Islands and Sustainable Tourism Development:
Practices, Management and Policies, London: Pinter, pp. 3-22.
3176. Irei, Takashi, 1982: Okinawajin ni totte no sengo, Tōkyō: Asahi Shinbunsha.
3177. IRF, 1985: The Uses of historic resources in Eastern Caribbean Island development: report
of a workshop held at Brimstone Hill, St. Kitts, October 21-23, 1983, sponsored by Island
Resources Foundation, Society for the Restoration of Brimstone Hill [and] Government of
St. Kitts-Nevis with the support of the Rockefeller Brothers Fund, [St. Thomas, U.S. V.I.],
Island Resources Foundation.
3178. Irisipau ... [et al.], textes de. 1995: Ecoute le bambou qui pleure: récits de quatre musiciens
mélanésiens (‘Aré’aré, Îles Salomon), recueillis et présentés par Hugo Zemp, [Paris]:
Gallimard.
3179. Irwin, G., 1989: Against, across and down the wind: a case for the systematic exploration
of theremote Pacific Islands, JPS, Vol. 98(2), 1989: 167-206.
3180. Irwin, G., 1992: The prehistoric exploration and colonisation of the Pacific, Cambridge,
1992.
3181. Isaguirre, Ramón R., Charles G. Gerke, Cookie Rocklin, 2003: History of the Bay Islands,
1858-1895: through the eyes of diplomats: United States diplomatic correspondence,
[Honduras?: s.n.], (Comayagüela, M.D.C., Honduras, C.A.: Multigráficos Flores).
3182. Isert, Paul Erdmann, 1992: Letters on West Africa and the Slave Trade: Paul Erdmann
Isert’s Journey to Guinea and the Caribbean Islands in Columbia (1788), translated from
the German and edited by Selena Axelrod Winsnes, Oxford; New York: Published for the
British Academy by Oxford Univ. Press.
3183. Ishikawa, Noriko; Fukushige, Mototsugu, 2009: “Impacts of tourism and fiscal expenditure
on remote islands in Japan: a panel data analysis”, in Applied Economics, vol. 41, issue
7, pages 921-928.
3184. Ishtar, Zohl dé., 1994: Daughters of the Pacific, North Melbourne, Vic., Australia: Spinifex
Press.
3185. Islands Book Trust (Scotland), 2006: The decline and fall of St. Kilda: proceedings of an
international conference organised by The Islands Book Trust in August 2005 to mark the
75th anniversary of the evacuation of St. Kilda. Port Ness: Islands Book Trust.
3186. Islands Book Trust (Scotland), 2008: Whaling and the Hebrides: the history of island
whalers in the south Atlantic and whaling in and around the Hebrides, Kershader, Isle of
Lewis: Islands Book Trust.
3187. Islands Protection Society, 1984: Islands at the edge: preserving the Queen Charlotte
Islands wilderness, Vancouver: Douglas & McIntyre; Seattle: University of Washington.
3188. Issur, sous la dir. de Kumari R. et Vinesh Y. Hookoomsing, 1998: L’océan Indien dans
les littératures francophones: pays réels, pays rêvés, pays révélés: [actes du colloque,
Université de Maurice, juillet 1997] / [organisé par l’Université de Maurice], Paris: Éd.
Karthala; Réduit: Presses de l’Université de Maurice.
2009
CEHA 177
3189. Ivanov, Vºiºacheslav Vsevolodovich, 1997: The Russian Orthodox Church of Alaska
and the Aleutian Islands and its relation to Native American traditions: an attempt at a
multicultural society, 1794-1912,Washington, DC, Library of Congress, For sale by the
U.S. G.P.O..
3190. Ives, Edward D., 1999: Drive Dull Care Away: Folksongs from Prince Edward Island,
Charlottetown: Institute of Island Studies. Disponível online em URL: http://books.google.
com/books?id=WNNwgB4d7PgC. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
3191. Ives, Vernon A. edited by. 1984: The Rich papers: letters from Bermuda, 1615-1646:
eyewitness accounts sent by the early colonists to Sir Nathaniel Rich, transcribed by Mrs.
Ambrose Gosling, Sister Jean Kennedy, and John Adams, Toronto; Buffalo: Published for
the Bermuda National Trust by the University of Toronto Press.
3192. Iyechad, G., and Quimby, F., 1983: Belau; super-port, fortress or identity, in R Teiwaki,
et.al., eds Politics in Micronesia, Institute of Pacific Studies/USP, 100-30.
3193. Izuka, Scot K., 2006: Effects of irrigation, drought, and ground-water withdrawals on ground-
water levels in the southern Lihue basin, Kauai, Hawaii, Reston, Va: U.S. Geological
Survey.
3194. Jaarsma, S. R. Marta Rohatynskyj, 2000: Ethnographic Artifacts: Challenges to a Reflexive
Anthropology, University of Hawaii Press
3195. Jack Claude Nezat, 2007: The Nezat And Allied Families 1630-2007, Lulu.
3196. Jackling, Roger, 2005: ‘The impact of the Falklands Conflict on defence policy’. In Badsey,
for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 239-52
3197. Jackson R.T., 1988: The Australian colonial experience in Papua New Guinea, in Heathcote
RL (ed) The Australian experience, Melbourne, Longman Cheshire
3198. Jackson, Miles M., 1986: Pacific Island studies: a survey of the literature, New York:
Greenwood Press.
3199. Jackson, P., et all..., 1994: Volcanic disasters and cultural discontinuities in the Holocene of
West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Anonymous, Ed. Geological Society of America,
1994 annual meeting. Boulder, CO, United States, Geological Society of America (GSA),
pp. 263.
3200. Jacobs, Judy, 1990: Indonesia, a nation of islands, Minneapolis, Minn.: Dillon Press.
3201. Jahoda, Gloria, 1995: The Trail of Tears, Wings Press.
3202. Jairazbhoy, R. A., 1990: Ancient Egyptian survivals in the Pacific, London: Karnak House.
3203. Jalabert, Laurent, 2007: La colonisation sans nom: la Martinique de 1960 à nos jours,
Paris: Indes savantes.
3204. James Gonzalez, Gertrude M., 2000: Sediments and shadows: identity and colonialism
in the United States Virgin Islands, Thesis (Ph.D.)--State University of New York at
Binghamton.
3205. James, Brian,2007: ‘The Falklands X-Factor’, History Today, 57:5, 32-33.
3206. James, Cynthia, 2007: “You’ll Soon Get Used to Our Language” Language, Parody and
West Indian Identity in Andrea Levy’s Small Island, Anthurium- A Caribbean Studies
Journal , Vol 5, Issue 1 (Spring).
3207. James, Lawrence Edwin, 1988: Imperial Rearguard: Wars of Empire, 1909-1985, London
and McLean, VT.
2009
3208. James, Winston, 2002: Explaining Afro-Caribbean Social Mobility in the United States:
Beyond the Sowell Thesis, Comparative Studies in Society and History, Vol. 44, No. 2
(Apr.), pp. 218-262.
3209. Jamieson, A. G. (ed.), 1986: A people of the sea: the maritime history of the Channel
Islands, N. York, Methuen.
3210. Janssen, H., 1974: “The story cult of Kaliai”, in Point, 1: 4-28.
3211. Janssen, H., Kiers, M. and Nijkamp, P., 1995, Private and public development strategies
for sustainable tourism development of island economies, In: Coccossis, H. and Nijkamp,
P. (eds), Sustainable Tourism Development, London: Avebury, pp.65-83.
3212. Japon 1979-1999: l’éclatement de l’insularité, Karoline Postel-Vinay, Politique étrangère,
Année 1999, Volume 64, Numéro 3 p. 545 – 555
3213. Jardim, Alberto João, 1995:Tribuna livre, Ponta Delgada: Jornal da Cultura, 1o v.: 1974-75,
2o v.: 1976, 3o v.: 1977-1978.
3214. Jardim, Alberto João, 1998: Autonomia. A Experiência da Madeira, Funchal, Edicarte.
3215. Jauze, Jean-Michel (Editeur scientifique); Guébourg, Jean-Louis (Editeur scientifique),
2005: Inégalités et spatialité dans l’océan Indien: actes du colloque de Saint-Denis de
La Réunion, 24-26 novembre 2004, Université de la Réunion, Faculté des lettres et des
Sciences Humaines, CREGUR, Centre de Recherches et d’Etudes en Géographie de
l’Université de la Réunion (Saint-Denis), Paris: L’Harmattan.
3216. Jauze, Jean-Michel, 2004: La pluriethnicité dans les villes mauriciennes, In Maillard, Jean-
Claude (coord.), Insularité, société et développement, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. 57, no
225, p. p. 7-32. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index678.html. Consulta
3217. Jayaraman, K., 1982: Legal regime of islands, New Delhi: Marwah Publications.
3218. Jayaraman, T. K., 1994: Fiscal and current account imbalances of the Solomon Islands:
1981-1991, Kensington, NSW: Centre for South Pacific Studies, The University of New
South Wales.
3219. Jayawardena, Chandana, with a foreward by Rex V. Nettleford, 2002: Tourism and
hospitality education and training in the Caribbean, Kingston, Jamaica: University of the
West Indies Press.
3220. Jayawardena, Chandana. 2005: Caribbean tourism: visions, mission and challenges,
Kingston, Jamaica: Ian Randle.
3221. Jayewardene, Hiran Wasantha, 1990: The regime of islands in international law, Martinus
Nijhoff Publishers.
3222. Jebens, Holger, 1997: “Störenfriede und falsche Christen: Zur Konstruktion und
Instrumentalisierung von kastom in der Southern Highlands Province von Papua-
Neuguinea: Melanesien”, in Baessler-Archiv, vol. 45 (610 p.) (2 p.1/2), pp. 481-496
3223. Jebens, Holder, 2000: “Signs of the Second Coming. On Eschatological Expectation and
Disappointment in Highland and Seaboard Papua New Guinea”, in Ethnohistory, 1:171—
204.
3224. Jebens, Holger, 2001: “Valuku. Maskentänze in West New Britain (Papua-Neuginea) als
Aneignung des Eigenen” In: K.H. Kohl und N. Schafhausen (Hrsg.), New Heimat, pp. 78-
89. New York: Lukas and Sternberg.
3225. Jebens, Holger, 2002: “Trickery or Secrecy? On Andrew Lattas’s Interpretation of “Bush
Kaliai Cargo Cults””, in Anthropos, 79:181-191.
2009
CEHA 179
3226. Jebens, Holder, 2003: Starting with the Law of the tumbuan. Masked Dances in West New
Britain (Papua New Guinea) as an Appropriation of One’s Own Cultural Self, Anthropos,
98:115-126.
3227. Jebens, Holger, 2004: Introduction: Cargo, cult and culture critique. In Cargo, cult and
culture critique, edited by. H. Jebens, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press, pp.1-13.
3228. Jebens, Holder, 2004a: Talking about cargo cults in Koimumu (West New Britain Province,
Papua New Guinea), In Cargo, cult and culture critque, edited by H. Jebens, Honolulu:
University of Hawai’i Press, pp.157-169.
3229. Jebens, Holder, 2004b: ‘Vali Did That Too’: On Western and Indigenous Cargo Discourses
in West New Britain (Papua New Guinea), Anthropological Forum, 14 (2):117-139.
3230. Jebens, Holder, 2004c: Valuku. Maskentänze in West New Britain (Papua-Neuginea) als
Aneignung des Eigenen, In: K.H. Kohl und N. Schafhausen (Hrsg.), New Heimat, New
York: Lukas and Sternberg, pp. 78-89.
3231. Jedrusik, M., 1980: Historyczne uwarunkowania obecnego Rozmieszczenia i struktury
upraw na Maskarenach, Komorach i Seszelach, Afryka Azia America Lacinska: Studi i
Materialy, no 62, p. p. 75-113.
3232. Jedrusik, M., 1980a: wplyw wybranych elementow srodowiska przyrodniczego na
rozmieszczenie i strukture upraw na maskarenach, seszelach i komorach, Afryka Azia
America Lacinska: Studi i Materialy, no 60, p. p. 23-52.
3233. Jedrusik, M., 2003: Les îles avec et sans passé: le cas de South Ari Atoll (Iles Maldives), In
DYMSET, CNRS Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3 (Pessac); Université de la
Rochelle; Poitou-Charentes, Conseil Régional Cosaert, Patrice (dir.); Bart, François (dir.),
Patrimoines et développement dans les pays tropicaux, Pessac: DYMSET, pp. 641-48.
3234. Jeffreys, Max, 1997: Wreck of the Sydney Cove, Frenchs Forest, N.S.W., New Holland.
3235. Jenkins, C., 1996 or 1997: Poverty, nutrition and health care in Papua New Guinea: a case
study in four communities. Report submitted to World Bank, Goroka, Papua New Guinea
Institute of Medical Research.
3236. Jenner, P. and Smith, C., 1993: Tourism in the Mediterranean, London: Economist
Intelligence Unit.
3237. Jensen, J.A., 2003: ‘The Position of Greenland and the Faroe Islands within the Danish
Realm’, European Public Law, Vol. 9, No. 2, pp. 170-178.
3238. Jensen, Peter Hoxcer, 1998: From serfdom to Fireburn and strike: the history of Black labor
in the Danish West Indies, 1848-1916, Christiamsted, St. Croix, [V.I.], Antilles Press.
3239. Jersey, Stanley Coleman, 2008: Hell’s islands: the untold story of Guadalcanal, College
Station: Texas A&M University Press.
3240. Jézéquel, Hervé (dir.), 2002: L’île Carn: rencontres en bordure du temps, Paris: Créaphis.
3241. Jiménez González, José Juan, 1992: Gran Canaria y los canarios, [Tenerife]: Centro de la
3242. Jiménez González, José Juan. 2005: Canarii: la génesis de los canarios desde el Mundo
Antiguo, [La Laguna]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
3243. Joannon, Pierre, 2006: Histoire de l’Irlande et des Irlandais, Paris.
3244. João, Maria Isabel, 1991: Os Açores no Século XIX. Economia, Sociedade e Movimentos
Autonomistas, Lisboa, Edições Cosmos.
3245. João, Isabel, 1992: “Reflexões sobre a insularidade e integração. O caso do arquipélago
2009
dos Açores”, in Mare Liberum, 4, 299-306.

3246. Joaquin, Nick. 1988: Culture and History: Occasional Notes on the Process of Philippine
Becoming. Solar Publishing, Metro Manila.
3247. Jochelson, Waldemar, 2002: Archaeological investigations in the Aleutian Islands, foreword
by Herbert D.G. Maschner and Katherine L. Reedy-Maschner, Salt Lake City, University
of Utah Press.
3248. Jochelson, Waldemar, 2002a: History, ethnology, and anthropology of the Aleut, foreword
by Katherine L. Reedy-Maschner and Herbert D.G. Maschner, Salt Lake City, University
of Utah Press.
3249. Jodice, Mimmo, 2000: Isolario mediterrâneo, Milano: F. Motta.
3250. Johannes, R. E. (Robert Earle), 1981: Words of the lagoon: fishing and marine lore in the
Palau District of Micronesia, Berkeley: University of California Press.
3251. Jóhansen, J., 1985: Studies in the vegetational history of the Faroe and Shetland Islands.
Thorshavn: Føroya Frôdskaparfelag.
3252. John Waddell ... [et al.], editors. 1994: The Book of Aran: the Aran Islands, Co. Galway / by
John Feehan ... [et al.]; Kinvara, Co. Galway: Tír Eolas,.
3253. Johnson, David Newman, 2003: Cerncastle: a fortified islet on the north-east coast of Co.
Antrim, In Kenyon, John R.; O’Conor, Kieran (ed.), The medieval castle in Ireland and
Wales, Dublin: Four Courts, 217-238.
3254. Johnson, Donald S., 1994, 1996: Phantom islands of the Atlantic: the legends of seven
lands that never were, New York: Walker and Co..
3255. Johnson, Howard, 1991: The Bahamas in Slavery and Freedom, Kingston: Ian Randle
Publishing.
3256. Johnson, Howard, 1996: 1945 - The Bahamas from slavery to servitude, 1783-1933,
Gainesville (FL): University Press of Florida.
3257. Johnson, J., 1983: USA; the big umbrella, in R Crocombe and A Ali, eds, Foreign forces in
Pacific politics, Institute of Pacific Studies/USP, p.68-86.
3258. Johnson, R. W., 1981: Cooke-Ravian Volume of Vulcanological Papers, Port Moresby,
Department of Minerals and Energy.
3259. Johnson, Samuel et James Boswell, 1991: Voyage dans les Hébrides, Paris.
3260. Johnson, Samuel, 1709-1784, Johnson and Boswell in Scotland: a journey to the Hebrides;
ed. Pat Rogers, New Haven (CT); London: Yale University Press.
3261. Johnson, Samuel, James Boswell 2002: A journey to the Western Islands of Scotland;
with, The journal of a tour to the Hebrides, with an introduction by Allan Massie, New
York: Knopf.
3262. Johnson, Sherry, 2005: El Niño, Environmental Crisis, and the Emergence of Alternative
Markets in the Hispanic Caribbean, 1760s-70s, William & Mary Quart., LXII, pp. 365-410.
Disponível online em url: http://www.librarycompany.org/Economics/2003Conference/
papers/SJohnson.pdf, consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
3263. Johnson, Terry Lee, 2003: The Bering Sea and Aleutian Islands: region of wonders, edited
by Kurt Byers, Fairbanks, Alaska: Alaska Sea Grant College Program, University of
Alaska Fairbanks.
3264. Johnson, Vassel, Sir, 2001: As I see it: how Cayman became a leading financial centre,
Lewes, Sussex, Book Guild.
2009
CEHA 181
3265. Johnson, W. B., 1959: The Cook Islands: land use in an island group of the south-west
pacific, The journal of tropical geography, no 13, p. p. 38-5
3266. Johnson, Whittington B., 2006: Post-emancipation race relations in the Bahamas,
3267. Johnson, Wittington B., 2000: Race Relations in the Bahamas, 1784–1834: The Nonviolent
Transformation from a Slave to a Free Society. Fayetteville: University of Arkansas.
3268. Johnston R., 1971: Distribution and relationship of the Arawe and Whiteman language
families, West New Britain, Ukarumpa, PNG, Summer Institute of Linguistics.
3269. Johnston R., 1980: Language, Communication and Development in New Britain, Ukarumpa:
SIL.
3270. Johnston, translated by George, 1994: Thrand of Gotu: two Icelandic sagas from the Flat
Island book, Erin, Ont.: Porcupine’s Quill.
3271. Jolivet Marie-José, 1985: “Migrations et histoire dans la “Caraïbe Française” “, In:
Anthropologie et histoire, Cahiers ORSTOM, Série Sciences Humaines, 21 (1), p. 99-113.
3272. Jolivet, Marie Jose (dir.). et all..., 1997: La Caraibe: des iles au continent, Cahiers d’Etudes
Africaines, vol. vol. 37, no 148, pp. 759-1022
3273. Jolly, A., 2004: Lords and Lemurs: Mad Scientists, Kings with Spears and the survival of
biodiversity in Madagascar, Houghton Mifflin.
3274. Jolly, Margaret, 1987: The forgotten women: a history of migrant labour and gender
relations in Vanuatu, Oceania, 58(2):119-139
3275. Jolly, Margaret, 1992: Banana Leaf Bundles and Skirts: A Pacific Penelope’s Web? In
Tradition and History in Melanesian Anthropology, edited by James Carrier, Berkeley:
University of California Press, 38–63.
3276. Jolly, Margaret, 1992: Specters of inauthenticity, The Contemporary Pacific, 4 (1), 49-72.
3277. Jolly, Margaret, 2000: Fraying Gauguin’s Skirt: Gender, Race and Liminality in Polynesia,
In Pacific Studies, 23(1-2):86-103.
3278. Jolly, M. & L. Manderson (eds.), 1997: Sites of desire, economies of pleasure: sexualities
in Asiaand the Pacific, Chicago.
3279. Jolly, Margaret, 2001: On the Edge: Deserts, Oceans, Islands, In Vicente Diaz and J.
Kehaulani Kauanui (eds), Native Pacific Cultural Studies on the Edge, Special Issue, The
Contemporary Pacific, Fall, 417-466.
3280. Jolly, Margaret; Macintyre, Martha, 1989: Family and Gender in the Pacific: domestic
contradictions and the colonial impact, Cambridge.
3281. Jonas, W., 1985: “The commercial timber industry in colonial Papua New Guinea”, in
Pacific Studies 8(2): 45-60.
3282. Jonas, W., 1979: Commercial forestry production in Papua New Guinea: an economic
geography, PhD thesis, University of Papua New Guinea, Port Moresby.
3283. Jones, Carleton, 2004: The Burren and the Aran Islands: an archaeological guide, Carleton
Jones. Cork: Collins.
3284. Jones, Dorothy Knee, 1980: A century of servitude: Pribilof Aleuts under U.S. rule, Lanham,
MD: University Press of America.
3285. Jones, Kenneth D., 1995: Native trees for community forests: a guide to landscaping with
the native trees of St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands, [St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands]: Virgin
2009
Islands Dept. of Agriculture, Urban and Community Forestry Assistance Program: St.
George Village Botanical Garden of St. Croix.
3286. Jones, M., 2001: “The rise of the regional state in economic governance: “partnerships for
prosperity” or new scales of state power?”, Environment and planning A, n°7, p. 1185-
1211
3287. Jones, P. D., 1988: From Bikini to Belau; the nuclear colonisation of the Pacific, WRI.
3288. Jones, V. J.; Hodgson, D. A.; Chepstow-Lusty, A., 2000: “Palaeolimnological evidence for
marked Holocene environmental changes on Signy Island, Antarctica”, in The Holocene,
vol. 10: pp. 43 - 60.
3289. Jones-Davies, sous la direction de M.T., 1994: Shakespeare: cosmopolitisme et insularité:
actes du congrès 1993, Société Française Shakespeare; Société française Shakespeare.
Congrès (1993: Luxembourg) Paris: Les Belles Lettres.
3290. Jones-Jackson, Patricia, 1987: When roots die: endangered traditions on the Sea Islands,
Athens, University of Georgia Press.
3291. Jonge, Nico de, 1995: Forgotten islands of Indonesia: the art & culture of the Southeast
Moluccas, [Hong Kong]: Periplus Editions.
3292. Johnson, Whittington B., 2006: Post-emancipation race relations in the Bahamas;
3293. Jordan, Laylon Wayne, Elizabeth H. Stringfellow, 1997: A place called St. John’s: the
story of John’s, Edisto, Wadmalaw, Kiawah, and Seabrook Islands of South Carolina,
Spartanburg, S.C. Reprint Co..
3294. Jørgensen, Gunni, Jóannes Rasmussen, 1986: Glacial striae, roches moutonnées, and
ice movements in the Faeroe Islands, København, Geological Survey of Denmark.
3295. Jorgensen, Tove H., Henriette N. Buttenschön, August G. Wang, Thomas D. Als, Anders
D. Børglum and Henrik Ewald1, 2004: The origin of the isolated population of the Faroe
Islands investigated using Y chromosomal markers, Biomedical and Life Sciences,
Volume 115, Number 1 / June. Disponível online em url: http://www.springerlink.com/
content/4yuhf5m7a22gc4qm/, Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
3296. Jos, E.; Perrot, D. (dir.), 1999: La Caraïbe face au défi de la mondialisation. Marchés et
nations dans l’aire Caraïbe/Amérique, Paris, Montchrestien.
3297. Jośī, Rāmaśaraṇa, 1984: Tribals, islands of deprivation, Delhi: National Book Shop.
3298. Jost, Christian, 2001: Système de support à la décision pour une gestion concertée de
l’eau, Une approche intégrée du comportement social et des risques aux Iles Loyauté
(Nouvelle-Calédonie), Revue Internationale de Geomatique, vol. 11, no 3-4, p. P. 443-467
3299. Jost, Christian, 2006: Risques et enjeux environnementaux et changements sociétaux à
Futuna (Pacifique français), Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 233, Janvier-Mars. Disponível
online em url: http://com.revues.org/index174.html. Consulté le 19 août 2009. Consulta
3300. Joubert, Jean-Louis, 1991-93: Recherches sur les littératures francophones: les îles de
l’Océan Indien occidental, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine).
3301. Jourdan, C., 1987: Des Plantations a la Ville, Journal de la Societe des Oceanistes, no 85,
pp. 243-251
3302. Jouve, sous la direction de Dominique. 1988: Ecrire à la croisée des îles, des langues:
Otherness in island writing--meeting the other, understanding the others: actes du huitième
[i.e.: onzième] Colloque C.O.R.A.I.L., Colloque C.O.R.A.I.L. (11th: 1998: Nouméa, New
2009
CEHA 183
Caledonia), Paris: Harmattan; Nouméa: Université de la Nouvelle-Calédonie: C.O.R.A.I.L..

3303. Jouve, Edmond, 1999: Le thème de l’insularité dans l’œuvre de Pierre Benoit, in Meistersheim,
A. (dir.), L’île laboratoire, Corte, Éditions Alain Piazzola.
3304. Jouveau du Breuil, Yvain, 2000: Le peuplement des Saintes au XVIIème siècle: suivi d’un
dictionnaire des familles saintoieses, [Ezy-sur-Eure?] La Berrantille.
3305. Jowitt, Glenn, Peter Shaw, 1999: Pacific island style, London, Thames & Hudson.
3306. JPH, 1981-1987: Pacific History Bibliography And Comment, Canberra: Journal Of Pacific
History, Australian National University.
3307. Juan Vidal, Josep, 1990: El cens de Floridablanca a les Illes Balears, 1786-1787, Mallorca:
M Font.
3308. Juan, E. San, 1980: “US imperialism in the Philippines”, in Race & Class, Jan; vol. 22: pp.
182 - 189.
3309. Juillerat, B., 1997: “Book review: To sing with pigs is human. The concept of person in
Papua New Guinea - Goodale, JC.”, in Homme, 37(141): 195-196.
3310. Julia E. Sweig, 2004: Inside the Cuban Revolution, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University
Press.
3311. Julius, Marie-José, 1998: Les flux touristiques aériens entre la France et les Antilles
françaises, Bordeaux: 1988, Mém. Maîtrise: Géographie: Université Michel de Montaigne
Bordeaux 3
3312. Jumeau, M.-A. 1997: Bibliographie de l’Ile de Pâques, Paris, Société des Océanistes.
3313. Jupp, J., (ed), 1988: The Australian people, Sydney, Angus and Robertson.
3314. Justin, Anstice, 1990: The Nicobarese, Calcutta: Seagull Books on behalf of the
Anthropological Survey of India.
3315. Justin, Daniel, 1984: «Pouvoir central, Pouvoir local: essai de sociologie de l’administration
à la Martinique», in Revue française d’administration publique, n° 31, juillet-septembre,
pp. 72-88.
3316. Justin, Daniel, 1987: «Contestations nationalitaires, régionalisme et décentralisation en
Espagne », in Pouvoirs, 40, pp. 135-155.
3317. Justin, Daniel, 1989: « L’articulation des politiques publiques étatiques et régionales: le
cas de la formation professionnelle à la Martinique » (en collaboration), in Annuaire des
Collectivités Locales 1989, Paris, Litec, G.R.A.L., pp. 47-60.
3318. Justin, Daniel, 1989a: « L’assemblée nationale et son devenir » (en collaboration), in
Revue du Droit Public et de la Science Politique, pp. 1245-1272.
3319. Justin, Daniel, 1989b: « L’imbrication du personnel politique et de la fonction publique
outre-mer » in Questions sur l’Administration des D.O.M., ouvrage publié sous la direction
de Jean-Claude Fortier, Paris, Economica, pp. 189-200.
3320. Justin, Daniel, 1989c: « Régionalisation et décentralisation à la Martinique: Ajustements à
la marge et intégration politique », in Les Temps modernes, mai-juin, pp. 223-242.
3321. Justin, Daniel, 1990: « La science politique antillaise entre holisme, individualisme
méthodologique et hétérodoxie », in Cahiers d’administration d’outre mer, 3, pp. 77-83.
3322. Justin, Daniel, 1991: « L’image du général de Gaulle et son utilisation dans la vie politique
à la Martinique » (en collaboration avec E. Jos et F. Réno) in De Gaulle en son siècle,
Vol. 1, Dans la mémoire des hommes et des peuples, Paris, la Documentation française,
2009
pp. 348-358.
3323. Justin, Daniel, 1991a: « L’Etat libre associé de Porto Rico et le référendum du 8 décembre
1991: l’ambiguïté assumée » in Cahiers d’Administration Outre Mer, décembre 1991.
3324. Justin, Daniel, 1991b: « Système politique et comportements électoraux à Porto Rico », in
Problèmes d’Amérique latine, n° 99, janvier-mars, pp. 32-39.
3325. Justin, Daniel, 1992: «Les démocraties pluralistes face aux scandales politiques: l’Irangate,
les “affaires” Flick et Carrefour du Développement», in Revue française de science
politique, 42(6), décembre, pp. 981-1007.
3326. Justin, Daniel, 1993: « Political constraints of Economic dependency: the case of
Guadeloupe and Martinique », in Caribbean studies, vol. 26, juillet-décembre 1993, pp.
311-334.
3327. Justin, Daniel, 1994a: « Les attitudes socio-politiques antillo-guyanaises face à “1993” »
(en collaboration) in L’outre-mer et l’Europe communautaire (sous la direction de E. Jos
et D. Perrot), Paris, Economica, pp. 123-148.
3328. Justin, Daniel, 1994b: «Quelques dilemmes de la vie politique insulaire: Porto Rico et la
Martinique» in Maurice Burac (éd.), La Guadeloupe, la Martinique et la Guyane dans le
monde américain, Paris: Karthala.
3329. Justin, Daniel, 1995: «Les régions ultrapériphériques face à l’Union européenne: Les
difficultés de l’harmonisation dans la différence», in Annuaire des collectivités locales,
Paris: Litec, pp. 23-50.
3330. Justin, Daniel, 1996: Développement et compétition politique: vers une mutation du modèle
portoricain?, in Justin Daniel (sous la direction de), Les îles caraïbes: modèles politiques
et stratégies de développement, Paris Karthala, pp. 185-223.
3331. Justin, Daniel, 1996a: «Dynamique migratoire et recomposition identitaire: le cas
portoricain» in Fred Réno (sous la direction de), Identités et politique de la Caraïbe et de
l’Europe multiculturelles, Paris: Economica, 1995, pp. 95-118).
3332. Justin, Daniel, 1996b: «Pour une réévaluation des rapports entre l’économique et le
politique» in Justin Daniel (sous la direction de), Les îles caraïbes: modèles politiques et
stratégies de développement, Paris: Karthala, pp. 11-44.
3333. Justin, Daniel, 1996c: «Social sciences in the Francophone Caribbean: An evaluation », in
Journal of social sciences, III(1-2), juin-décembre, pp. 108-119.
3334. Justin, Daniel, 1996d: Les îles caraïbes: modèles politiques et stratégies de développement,
Paris Karthala.
3335. Justin, Daniel, 1997: « Introduction » in Fred Constant et Justin Daniel (sous la direction
de), 1946-1996: Cinquante ans de départementalisation outre mer, Paris, L’Harmattan,
pp. 11-22.
3336. Justin, Daniel, 1997a: L’espace politique martiniquais à l’épreuve de la départementalisation,
in Fred Constant et Justin Daniel (sous la direction de), 1946-1996: Cinquante ans de
départementalisation outre mer, Paris, L’Harmattan, pp. 223-259.
3337. Justin, sous la direction de Daniel, Fred Constant, 1997: 1946-1996: Cinquante ans de
départementalisation outre mer, Paris, l’Harmattan.
3338. Justin, Daniel, 1998: «En terre de mission» in Enseigner la science politique (sous la
direction de Pierre Favre et Jean-Baptiste Legavre), Paris, L’Harmattan, pp. 261-269.
3339. Justin, Daniel, 1999: «Crise ou mutations des institutions: la quête de nouveaux modèles
» in Politique et Développement dans la Caraïbe (sous la direction de Fred Constant et
2009
CEHA 185
Justin Daniel), Paris l’Harmattan, 1999, pp. 99-153.

3340. Justin, Daniel, 1999a: « Idendidad cultural e identidad política en Martinica y Puerto Rico:
mitos y realidades», in Revista de ciencias sociales, juin, pp. 33-65.
3341. Justin, Daniel, 1999b: «Les Départements Français d’Amérique (DFA): Une plate-forme
pour le capital français ou une vitrine de la France dans la Caraïbe» in La Caraïbe face au
défi de la mondialisation, Marchés et nations dans l’aire Caraïbe/Amérique, Emmanuel
Jos et Danielle Perrot (sous la direction), Paris, Montchrestien, pp. 167-191.
3342. Justin, Daniel, 1999: 1946-1996: Cinquante ans de départementalisation outre mer, Paris,
l’Harmattan, 1997 (sous la direction de Fred Constant et Justin Daniel).
3343. Justin, Daniel, 1999: Politique et Développement dans la Caraïbe (sous la direction de
Fred Constant et Justin Daniel), Paris l’Harmattan.
3344. Justin, Daniel, 2000: “El independentismo puertorriqueño frente al desafío de la
globalización” in Felix Ojeda Reyes, El independentismo puertorriqueño, de Betances a
nuestros días, Editorial de la Univesidad de Puerto Rico. 15 p.
3345. Justin, Daniel, 2000a: «Conflits sociaux et construction identitaire à la Martinique» in Jean
Bernabé, Jean-Luc Bonniol, Raphael Confiant, Gerry L’Etang, Au Visiteur Lumineux, Des
îles créoles aux sociétés plurielles, Mélanges offerts à Jean Benoist, Petit-Bourg, Ibis
Rouge Editions/Presses Universitaires Créoles, pp. 339-351.
3346. Justin, Daniel, 2000b: «Les limites de la démocratie locale en outre mer », in Gérard
Gabriel Marion, Mélanges en Hommage à Bernard Vonglis, Paris, L’Harmattan, pp. 85-
102.
3347. Justin, Daniel, 2000c: «Migration and the Reconstruction of Identity: The Puerto Rican
Example» in Robert Hudson and Fred Réno, Politics and Identity: Migrants and Minorities
in Multcultural States, London and New York, Macmilan Press/St. Martin Press, pp ; 3-23.
3348. Justin, Daniel, 2001: “Economic Performance Stimulated by Public Transfers: The
Experience of Martinique”, in Integration & Trade, 5, no. 15, 2001, pp. 223-239.
3349. Justin, Daniel, 2001a: “The construction of dependency: Economy and Politics in the
French Antilles” in Aarón Gamaliel Ramos & Angel Israel Rivera Ortiz (eds), Islands at
the crossroads: politics in the non-independent Caribbean, Kingston, Jamaica; Boulder,
Co.: Ian Randle Publishers, Lynne Rienner Publishers, pp. 61-79.
3350. Justin, Daniel, 2001b: «La Caraïbe entre mondialisation et régionalisation », in Pierre
Guillaume (direction), Identités caraïbes, Paris: Editions du CTHS, pp. 227-245.
3351. Justin, Daniel, 2001c: « Préface » in Renuga Devi-Voisset, Common Law et commowealth
Caraïbe, Royaume-Uni, Etats-Unis, Commowealth Caraïbe, Martinique: Ibis Rouge.
3352. Justin, Daniel, 2002: “Decentralisation of planning and management responsibilities
between centre en periphery: historical distribution of responsibilities and recent reform
trends in four Caribbean territories”, en collaboration avec Anne Mills; Haqq, Eddison, [et
al.], in Health Policy, no. 61, pp. 11-30.
3353. Justin, Daniel, 2002a: “Development policies in the French Caribbean: from State centrality
to competitive polycentrism” in, Bissessar, Ann Marie (ed.), Policy Transfer, New Public
Management and Globalization, Mexico and the Caribbean, Lanham: University Press of
America, pp. 97-113.
3354. Justin, Daniel, 2002b: « L’action locale et internationale des collectivités territoriales dans
les DOM », in La revue parlementaire, Novembre.
3355. Justin, Daniel, 2002c: « L’espace politique aux Antilles françaises », in Ethnologie française,
2009
XXXII, no. 4, pp. 589-600.

3356. Justin, Daniel, 2002d: «Los departamentos franceses de América: Plataformas económicas
o vitrinas de Francia en el Caribe» in Gerardo Gonzales Nunez & Emilio Pantojas García
(eds), El Caribe en la era de la globalización, Hato Rey: Centro de Investigaciones
Sociales; Publicaciones Puertorriqueñas Editores, pp. 216-240.
3357. Justin, Daniel, 2003: «Coopération et culture dans les départements d’Outre-mer», in
Observatoire des politiques culturelles, n° 24, pp. 20-22.
3358. Justin, Daniel, 2003a: « Guyane, Guadeloupe, Martinique. Entre malaise social et
nouvelles perspectives institutionnelles » in Serge Cordellier & Sarah Netter (eds), L’Etat
des régions françaises 2003, Paris, La Découverte, pp. 244-249.
3359. Justin, Daniel, 2003b: «Les Caraïbes à l’épreuve du capitalisme mondialisé: convergences
idéologiques et résistance populaire » in Georges Voisset (ed.), L’imaginaire de l’archipel,
Paris, Karthala, pp. 179-209.
3360. Justin, Daniel, 2004: «L’articulation des politiques publiques de développement aux
Antilles françaises: du tropisme étatique au polycentrisme concurrentiel», in Annales de
la Faculté de droit et d’économie de la Martinique, Paris, L’harmattan.
3361. Justin, Daniel, 2004a: «Le mouvement indépendantiste portoricain face au défi de la
mondialisation» in Alain Yacou (ed.), La Caraïbe au tournant de deux siècles, Paris:
CERC-Karthala, pp. 215-234.
3362. Justin, Daniel, 2004b: «The Cotonou Agreement and the ACP-EU partnership: Towards a
re-evaluation of politics?» in Ann Marie Bissessar (ed.), Globalization and Governance,
Essays on the Challenges for Small States, Jefferson, N.C. McFarland Publishers.
3363. Justin, Daniel, 2005: «Cadre institutionnel et vie politique outre mer », in Pouvoirs, no. 113,
pp. 127-139.
3364. Justin, Daniel, 2005a: « L’Union européenne et la construction des identités dans la région
caraïbe » in Lionel Arnaud dir., Les minorités ethniques et l’Union européenne, Politiques,
mobilisations, identités, Paris, La Découverte, pp. 113-135.
3365. Justin, Daniel, 2005b: « Signification et portée de l’impératif régionaliste dans la Caraïbe » in
Christian Lera (ed.), Le monde caraïbe: défis et dynamiques, 2 vols, Vol. 2, Géopolitique,
intégration régionale, enjeux économiques, Pessac: Maison des Sciences de l’Homme
d’Aquitaine, pp. 117-136.
3366. Justin, Daniel, 2005c: «The French Départements d’outre mer. Guadeloupe and Martinique
» in Lammert de Jong & Dirk Kruijt (eds), Extended Statehood in the Caribbean, Paradoxes
of quasi colonialism, local autonomy and extended statehoood in the USA, French, Dutch
and British Caribbean, Amsterdam: Rozenberg Publishers, pp. 59-84.
3367. Justin, Daniel, 2006: «La consultation populaire de décembre 2003, les élections cantonales
et régionales de mars 2004: analyse de quelques paradoxes martiniquais», in Pouvoirs
dans la Caraïbe, 15.
3368. Justin, Daniel, 2006a: «Les élus face à la réforme institutionnelle et à l’acte II de la
décentralisation: la difficile conciliation d’aspirations contradictoires» in Thierry Michalon
(ed.), Entre assimilation et émancipation: l’outre-mer français dans l’impasse, Paris,
Editions les Perséides.
3369. Justin, Daniel, 2006b: «Les formes d’expression politique dans la Caraïbe: ambivalence
et paradoxes de la construction de l’ordre politique » in William Berthomière & Christine
Chivallon (eds), Diasporas: après quinze années de ferveur, Paris, Editions Karthala, en
co-édition avec la Maison des Sciences de l’Homme d’Aquitaine, Pessac.
2009
CEHA 187
3370. Justin, Daniel, 2006c: «Synthèse: le point de vue du politiste», in Jean-Yves Faberon
(dir.), Quel avenir institutionnel pour les collectivités françaises d’Amérique? In Actes
du colloque organisé par l’Institut de droit d’outre mer (IDOM), Cayenne, 7-9 décembre
2005, Paris, La Documentation française, 343-351.
3371. Justin, Daniel, 2006d: «Vie politique outre-mer et influence métropolitaine?», Regards sur
l’actualité (n° consacré à la France et son outre-mer), pp. 31-41.
3372. Justin, Daniel, 2007: « Le cadre institutionnel et le dialogue sur les politiques: l’Accord
de Cotonou à l’épreuve d’une réhabilitation du politique » in Danielle Perrrot (ed.), Les
relations ACP/UE après le modèle de Lomé: Quel partenariat ?, Bruxelles, Bruylant, pp.
261-285.
3373. Justin, Daniel, 2007a: « Les départements français d’Amérique et la Caraïbe: les trois âges
de la coopération régionale » in Une Méditerranée Caraïbe: Clovis Beauregard, 60 ans
de coopération régionale, Fort-de-France, Conseil général, Archives départementales de
la Martinique, pp. 9-13.
3374. Justin, Daniel, 2007b: L’outre-mer a l’épreuve de la décentralisation: Nouveaux cadres
institutionnels et difficultés d’adaptation, Paris, L’Harmattan.
3375. Justin, Daniel; [et al.], 2007c: « La décentralisation du RMI-RMA aux Antilles-Guyane
» in Hervé Rihal & Martine Long (eds), La décentralisation du revenu minimum
d’insertion, Rapport d’études de l’observatoire de la décentralisation (GRALE), Paris: La
Documentation française (Ministère de l’intérieur: Les travaux du centre d’études et de
prospective).
3376. Justin, Daniel; Cantacuzène, Roger, 2007d: «Pluralisme institutionnel et transfert de la
gestion des routes “nationales” aux départements/régions d’outre-mer » in Justin Daniel
(ed.), L’Outre-mer à l’épreuve de la décentralisation: nouveaux cadres institutionnels et
difficultés.
3377. Kaeppler, A., 1994: Paradise regained; the role of Pacific Museums in forging national
identity, in Kaplan FES, (ed), Museums and the making of ‘ourselves”; the role of objects
in national identity, Leicester University Press, pp.19-44.
3378. Kaeppler, edited by Adrienne and Jacob W. Love. 1998: Anuta. In The Garland Encyclopedia
of World Music: Australia and the Pacific Islands, New York: Garland. Pp. 856-861.
3379. Kahn, M., 1983: Sunday christians, Monday sorcerers, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 18(2),
96-112.
3380. Kakazu, Hiroshi, 1994: Sustainable development of small island economies, Boulder:
Westview Press.
3381. Kalyanasundaram, K., Bibliography of books on Tamil History, Ethnicity, Culture, Sri
lankan Tamils and Tamilnadu Politics, Webpages of Tamil Electronic Library. Disponível
online em url: http://tamilelibrary.org/teli/tnbks.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
3382. Kami, Saia, 1995: Complex demographic effects on demand behavior: micro-data evidence
from a Pacific Islands economy, Honolulu, HI: East-West Center, .
3383. Kamm, Jürgen and Gerold Sedlmayr (eds.), 2007: Insular mentalities: mental maps of
Britain: essays in honour of Bernd Lenz, Passau: Stutz.
3384. Kane, Herb Kawainui, et al., 1980: “Steering by Stars and Seas” in Polynesian Seafaring
Heritage, ed. by Cecilia Kapua Lindo and Nancy Alpert Mower. Honolulu: Kamehameha
Schools.
3385. Kanesalingam, V., 1995: Economic Liberalisation in Sri Lanka, Colombo, Sri Lanka:
2009
Friederich Ebert Stiftung.

3386. Kang, S. K., [et al.], 1983: “Studies on the end-use development of lesser-known tropical
timbers. (II) Studies on five species amberoi (Pterocymbium beccarii K. Schum.), celtis
(Celtis nymanii K. Schum.), dillenia (Dillenia papuana Mart.), malas (Homalium foetidum
Benth.), spondias (Spondias dulcis Forst.), grown in Kapuluk district, New Britain, Papua
New Guinea”, Research Reports of the Forest Research Institute, in Korea Republic, No.
30: 191-212.
3387. Kaplan, Martha, 2007: Fijian Water in Fiji and New York: Local Politics and a Global
Commodity, Cultural Anthropology, Vol. 22, No. 4 (Nov.), pp. 685-706.
3388. Kapua, editors, Cecilia, Lindo, Nancy Alpert Mower, 1980: Polynesian seafaring heritage,
[Honolulu]: Kamehameha Schools and the Polynesian Voyaging Society.
3389. Kardol, Rene. 1999: Proposed Inhabited Artificial Islands in International Waters:
International Law Analysis in Regards to Resource Use, Law of the Sea and Norms of
Self-Determination and State Recognition. MA thesis: University of Amsterdam.
3390. Kardulias, P. Nick, edited by. 1994: Beyond the site: regional studies in the Aegean area,
Lanham, Md.: University Press of America.
3391. Karen, Nero, 1997: The End of Insularity, in Donald Denoon, S. Firth, J. Linnekin, M. Meleisa
and K. Nero (eds.), Cambridge History of the Pacific Islanders, Cambridge, 439-67.
3392. Karlsson, Gunnar, 2000: Iceland’s 1100 years: the history of a marginal society, London:
C. Hurst & Co.
3393. Karp, Ivan and Steven D. Levine, (eds). 1991: Exhibiting Cultures: the Poetics and Politics
of Museum Display, Washington and London: Smithsonian Institution Press.
3394. Kasarherou, C., 1991: Contribution à l’étude de démographie historique de la Nouvelle
Calédonie, Nouméa.
3395. Käser, Lothar, 1990: Die Besiedlung Mikronesiens: eine ethnologisch-linguistische
Untersuchung, Berlin: Reimer.
3396. Kate Barclay, Wayne Peake, 2005: Globalization, regionalization and social change in the
Pacific Rim, Guadalajara, Jalisco, México: Universidad de Guadalajara; Sydney, Australia
: University of Technology Sydney.
3397. Kathirithamby, J., [et al.], 1998: “Strepsiptera parasites - novel biocontrol tools for oil palm
integrated pest management in Papua New Guinea”, in International Journal of Pest
Management, 44(3): 127-133.
3398. Katsouris, P., 1993: Tourism taxation in Cyprus. Seminar on ‘Tourism Development and the
Responsibility of the State, Budapest 15 February. Madrid: World Tourism Organisation,
pp.97-102.
3399. Katzenstein, P., 1985: Small states in world market, Ithata, Cornell University Press.
3400. Kauffmann, Jean-Paul, 2000: The arch of Kerguelen: voyage to the Islands of Desolation,
New York, Four Walls Eight Windows.
3401. Kaufman, Scott, 2004: “Operation Oracle: The United States, Great Britain, New Zealand,
and the Offshore Islands Crisis of 1954-55”, in Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth
History, 32:3 (2004), 106-24.
3402. Kawaley, I., 1999: “Implications of exclusive economic zone management and regional
cooperation between South Pacific small midocean island Commonwealth territories”,
Ocean Development and International Law, n°4, p. 333-377.
2009
CEHA 189
3403. Kay, E. Alison, 1994: Darwin’s biogeography and the oceanic islands of the central
Pacific, 1859-1909, In MacLeod, Roy M.; Rehbock, Philip F. (ed.), Darwin’s laboratory:
evolutionary theory and natural history in the Pacific (Honolulu (HI): University of Hawai’i
Press, 1994), 49-69.
3404. Kay, E. Alison, edited by. 1994: A Natural history of the Hawaiian Islands: selected readings
II, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press.
3405. Kaye, K.J., 1990: Use of the Countryside by the Urban State, Scotland’s North-West
Seaboard and Islands, Scottish Geographical Magazine, 106(2), pp. 89-97.
3406. Kayser, M., Brauer, S., Cordaux, R., Casto, A., Lao, O., Zhivotovsky, L. A., Moyse-Faurie,
C., Rutledge, R. B., Schiefenhoevel, W., Gil, D., Lin, A. A., Underhill, P. A., Oefner, P. J.,
Trent, R. J., Stoneking, M., 2006: Melanesian and Asian origins of Polynesians: mtDNA
and Y chromosome gradients across the Pacific, Molecular Biology and Evolution, Vol.
23. No. 11. Pp. 2234-2244.
3407. Kayser, M., Brauer, S., Weiss, G., Underhill, P. A., Roewer, L., Schiefenhšfel, W., and
Stoneking, M., 2000: Melanesian Origin of Polynesian Y Chromosomes, Current Biology,
volume 10, pp.1237-1246.
3407. Kazuo, Inoue, [et al.], 2000: “A comparative study of rural clinics in remote islands and
inland areas”, in Asia Pacific Journal of Public Health, 12 (1). pp. 22-26.
3408. Kean, P., 1998: Power and development: A Foucauldian analysis of the history of economic
development on the Gazelle Peninsula and in the Siki Resettlement Schemes, New
Britain, Papua New Guinea, PhD thesis. Monash University, Melbourne.
3409. Kean, P., 2000: “Economic Development in the Siki Settlement Scheme, West New Britain”,
Critique of Anthropology, 20(2): 153-172.
3410. Keane, Maureen, 1991: The Inishkeas: a look at life there before the islands were
abandoned in 1937, Cathair na Mart (Westport Historical Society), 11, 67-73.
3411. Keate, George[1729-1797], 2000: ‘Benevolence on the beach’ [Exploration & exchange:
a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and Thomas
Nicholas. Keate, George, 2000: Benevolence on the beach [Exploration & exchange: a
South Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and Thomas
Nicholas. In Lamb, (Chicago (IL) and London: Chicago University Press, 2000), 112-16.
3412. Keate, George, 2002: An account of the Pelew Islands, edited by Karen L. Nero and Nicholas
Thomas; assistant editor, Jennifer Newell, London; New York: Leicester University Press.
3413. Keating, Barbara H.... [et al.], 1987: Seamounts, islands, and atolls, Washington, D.C.
American Geophysical Union.
3414. Keays, S., 1996: A case for Carpentaria; Queensland and the eastern New Guinea colonies
to 1900, Journal of the RHSQ, 16, 1, pp.1-13.
3415. Kebs, Chull, D., 1989: Transmigrasi: the indonesian resettlement programme, Economics,
no 39, p. p. 112-125.
3416. Keegan, William F., and Lisabeth A. Carlson, 2008: Talking Taino: essays on Caribbean
natural history from a native perspective, Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press.
3417. Keehan, Ruth, 2004: ‘A life on Lambay (the story of my grandfather, Michael O’Connell)’,
Dublin Historical Record, 57, 50-59.
3418. Keesing, Roger M., Peter Corris, 1980: Lightning meets the west wind: the Malaita
massacre, Melbourne; New York: Oxford University Press.
3419. Keesing, Roger M., 1982: Kwaio religion: the living and the dead in a Solomon Island
2009
society, New York: Columbia University Press.

3420. Keesing, R., 1989: Creating the past, Contemporary Pacific, Vol 1/1 p.19-42.
3421. Keesing, Roger M., 1992: Custom and confrontation: the Kwaio struggle for cultural
autonomy, Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
3422. Kehoe-Forutan, Sardi, 1987: A bibliography of the Torres Strait Islands, [St. Lucia], Dept.
of Geographical Sciences, University of Queensland.
3423. Keiller, Frank, 2000: Prison without bars: living in Jersey under the German occupation,
1940-45, Bradford on Avon, Wiltshire, Seaflower Books.
3424. Keith, Gordon, 1982: Voices from the islands: true stories about Washington State’s
fabulous San Juan Islands and those who inhabit them, Portland, Ore.: Binford & Mort.
3425. Keket, S. and W. Ivara, 1982: A Checklist of the Islands of Papua New Guinea, Port
Moresby, National Library Service of PNG.
3426. Kelleher, John D., 1994: The triumph of the country: the rural community in nineteenth-
century Jersey, St Ouen: John Appleby, 1994.
3427. Kelly-Dewitt, Susan, The Fortunate Islands, Grosse Pointe Farms, Mich.: Marick Press.
3428. Kemf, Elizabeth, Ed. 1993: The Law of the Mother: Protecting Indigenous Peoples
in Protected Areas, Sierra Club Books,
3429. Kemp, C., 1976: “Trial work with introduced vegetables in West New Britain”, K. Willson
and R. M. Bourke, Eds. 1975 Papua New Guinea Food Crops Conference Proceedings,
Port Moresby, Department of Primary Industry, pp. 187-204.
3430. Kemp, Herman C., 1990: Annotated Bibliography of Bibliographies on Indonesia, Leiden:
KITLV.
3431. Kemper Hitch, Thomas, 1992: Islands in transition: the past, present, and future of Hawaii’s
economy, edited by Robert M. Kamins, Honolulu: First Hawaiian Bank: Distributed by
University of Hawaii Press.
3432. Kemper, Steven, 1991: The Presence of the Past: Chronicles, Politics, and Culture in
Sinhala Life, Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press.
3433. Kennedy, Cynthia M. ‘The Other White Gold: Salt, Slaves, the Turks and Caicos Islands,
and British Colonialism’, The Historian [Albuquerque, NM etc.], 69:2, 215-30.
3434. Kennedy, E. and Deegan, J., 2001: Seasonality in Irish tourism, 1973–1995. In: T. Baum
and S. Lundtorp, Editors, Seasonality in tourism, Pergamon, Amsterdam, pp. 51–74.
3435. Kennes, W., 1997: “Les PVD et l’intégration régionale”, Le courrier ACP-UE, n°165, p. 64-
67.
3436. Kent, Martin, 1987: “Island biogeography and habitat conservation”, in Progress in Physical
Geography, Mar 1987; vol. 11: pp. 91 - 102.
3437. Kent, Noel J., 1983: Hawaii, islands under the influence, New York: Monthly Review Press.
3438. Kenyon, John R., 1990: Castles town defences and artillery fortifications in Britain
and Ireland: a bibliography, 3 (CBA research report, 72), London: Council for British
Archaeology.
3439. Keown, Michelle, 2007: Pacific Islands writing: the postcolonial literatures of Aotearoa/New
Zealand and Oceania, Oxford University Press US.
3440. Kephallēniadēs, N. A, 1985: Romantikes histories sto Aigaio, 16os-19os aiōnas, Athēna,
Ekdoseis Philippotē.
2009
CEHA 191
3441. Keppel, Sylvia, 1984: Primaire textiele technieken van de Mentawai-Eilanden: systematiek
van het lus- en vlechtwerk, Amsterdam: VU Uitgeverij.
3442. Ker-Lindsay, James and Hubert Faustmann, 2009: The Government and Politics of Cyprus,
Peter Lang.
3443. Ker-Lindsay, James, 2005: EU Accession and UN Peacemaking in Cyprus, Palgrave
Macmillan.
3444. Kermel-Torrès, Doryane, 1985: “Coton, sisal, tabac”, In: Atlas d’Haïti, Talence: ORSTOM,
planche 17.
3445. Kermel-Torrès, Doryane, 1985: “Energie”, In: Atlas d’Haïti, Talence: CEGET.
3446. Kernahan, Mel, 1995: White savages in the South Seas, London; New York: Verso.
3447. Kerr (S.), 2005: «What is Small Island Sustainable Development About?», Ocean and
Coastal Management, n° 48, p. 503-524.
3448. Kerr, George H., 2000: Okinawa, the history of an island people, with an afterword by
Mitsugu Sakihara, Boston: Tuttle Pub..
3449. Kersell, John E., 1989: Developing the British Virgin Islands: the first Crown Colony, Public
Administration and Development, 9, 97-109.
3450. Kesler, Ben, 1980: Priceless heritage: history and lore of Estate St. George, home of the
St. George Village Botanical Garden of St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands, [Frederiksted, St.
Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands: B.R. Kesler].
3451. Kesler, Ben, 1981: American paradise?: Frederiksted, St. Croix, Freedom City St. Croix,
U.S. Virgin Islands: B. Kesler.
3452. Kessy, Emanuel T., 2003: Iron Age settlement patterns and economic change on Zanzibar
and Pemba Islands, Kusimba, Chapurukha Makokha, ed. East African archaeology:
foragers, potters, smiths, and traders, Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Museum
of Archaeology and Anthropology, pp. 117-131.
3453. Ketcham, Diane E., 1988: Long Island, shores of plenty: an economic celebration, “Long
Island’s enterprises” by Leila Zoogby, Chatsworth Calif., Windsor Publications.
3454. Kettenis, F. N. W., 1980: The Kilenge - people of PNG, PNG, National Cultural Council.
3455. Keyso, Ruth Ann, 2000: Women of Okinawa. Ithaca, New York: Cornell University Press.
3456. Khal Torabully with Marina Carter, 2002: Coolitude: An Anthology of the Indian Labour
Diaspora, Anthem Press, London.
3457. Kiely, Richard, Bechhofer, Frank, Stewart, Robert and McCrone, David, 2001: The Markers
and Rules of Scottish National Identity. The Sociological Review, 49(1), pp.33-55.
3458. Kieran, Brian L., 1992: The lawless Caymanas: a story of slavery and freedom: the West
India Regiment connection, Grand Cayman: B.L. Kieran.
3459. Kikuyama, Masaaki, 1993: Meiji kokka no keisei to shihō seido, Tōkyō: Ochanomizu Shobō.
3460. Kilberd, D., 1995: Inventing Ireland: the Literature of the Modern Nation. Cape, London.
3461. King James III, of Majorca, 1994: Leges Palatinae, prefaced of Joan Domenge i Mesquida,
[preface translated from the Catalan by L. Ford], Majorca (Kingdom), Sovereign,
[Bloomington, Ind.]: Indiana University Press in association with J.J. de Olañeta.
3462. King, B., 1989: “Does wildlife management by the people work? A case study of the Pokili
Wildlife Management Area, Papua New Guinea”, in Science in New Guinea, 15(2): 111-
2009
118.
3463. King, B., 1990: Does wildlife management by the people work? A case study, Pokili Wildlife
Management Area, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea. Tigerpaper, 17(1):
1-7.
3464. King, B. 1994. Australian Attitudes to Domestic and International Resort Holidays: A
Comparison of Fiji and Queensland, In Tourism: The State of the Art, A. V. Seaton, ed.
Pp. 347-358. Chichester, England: Wiley.
3465. King, B., 1994a: Tourism higher education in island microstates, Tourism Management,
15(4), pp. 267-272.
3466. King, B.E.M., 1997: Creating Island Resorts, London: Routledge.
3467. King, D. W., 1980:”A British officer in the eastern Adriatic, 1812-1815: the story of Captain
Pearce Lowen of Korcula”, in Journal of the Society for Army Historical Research, 58,
27-39.
3468. King, David et al., 1982: Papua New Guinea Atlas: A Nation in Transition. Bathurst,
Australia: R. Brown and the University of Papua New Guinea.
3469. King, David James Cathcart, 1983: Castellarium Anglicanum: an index and bibliography of
the castles in England, Wales, and the islands, Millwood, N.Y.: Kraus International.
3470. King, ed. by Russell and John Connell, 1999: Small worlds, global lives. Islands and
migration, London; New York: Pinter.
3471. King, Marie, 1992: A most noble anchorage: a story of Russell and the Bay of Islands /
by Marie King; edited and published by the Northland Historical Publications Society,
Incorporated, Kerikeri, N.Z.: NHPS.
3472. King, Michael, 1989: Moriori: a people discovered, Auckland (NZ).
3473. King, Michael, 1990: A land apart: the Chatham Islands of New Zealand, photographs,
Robin Morrison, Auckland, New Zealand: Random Century.
3474. King, Michael, 2003: The Penguin History of New Zealand, New Zealand: Penguin Books.
3475. King, Peter, 1991: The Channel Islands war 1939-1945, London: Robert Hale.
3476. King, R. J., 1986: “Ports of shelter and refreshment...” Botany Bay and Norfolk Islands in
British naval strategy, 1786-1808”, in Historical Studies (University of Melbourne), 22:87,
199-213.
3477. King, R., 1993: ‘The Geographical Fascination of Islands’ in D.G. Lockhart, D. Drakakis-
Smith & J.A. Schembri, eds., The Development Process in Small Island States, London,
Routledge, pp. 13-37.
3478. King, Russell; Connell, J. (eds), 1999: Small worlds, global lives: islands and migration,
Londres, Pinter.
3479. King, Thomas F.; Parker, Patricia L., 1984: Pisekin nóómw nóón Tonaachaw = Archeology
in the Tonaachaw historic district, Moen Island, with contributions by Francis Buekea,
James Carucci, and Carl C. Christensen, [Carbondale]: Center for Archaeological
Investigations, Southern Illinois University at Carbondale.
3480. Kingston, Bob, 1990: Achill Island: the deserted village at Slievemore: a study, Achill, Co.
Mayo: Bob Kingston, 1990.
3481. Kinnes, Ian, James Hibbs, 1988: The dolmens of Jersey: a guide, La Haule, Jersey: La
Haule Books; St. Helier, Jersey: Channel Television.
2009
CEHA 193
3482. Kinvig, R.H., 1993: The Isle of Man: a social, cultural, and political history, Liverpool:
Liverpool University Press.
3483. Kinzer, Stephen, 2007: Overthrow: America’s Century of Regime Change from Hawaii to
Iraq, Times Books.
3484. Kirby, Michael, 2003: Skelligs calling, Dublin: Lilliput.
3485. Kirch, Patrick Viinton, 1982: Tikopia; The History and Ecology of a Polynesian Outlier,
Bishop Museum Press, Honolulu.
3486. Kirch, Patrick Vinton and Douglas E. Yen, 1982: Tikopia: The Prehistory and Ecology of a
Polynesian Outlier, Bernice P., Bishop Museum Bulletin Number 238, Honolulu: Bishop
Museum Press.
3487. Kirch, Patrick V., 1983: Mangaasi-style Ceramics from Tikopia and Vanikoro and their
Implications for East Melanesian prehistory, Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association Bulletin,
3:67-76.
3488. Kirch, P. V., 1984: The Evolution of the Polynesian Chiefdoms, Cambridge, Cambridge
University Press.
3489. Kirch, P. V., 1984: The Polynesian outliers: continuity, change and replacement, Journal of
Pacific history, vol. 19(4): 224-238
3490. Kirch, Patrick V., 1985: On the Genetic and Cultural Relationships of Certain Outlier
Populations, American Journal of Physical Anthropology, 66:381-382.
3491. Kirch, ed. by Patrick Vinton, 1986: Island societies: archaeological approaches to evolution
and transformation, London: Cambridge university press.
3492. Kirch, Patrick V., 1986a: Exchange Systems and Inter-island Contact in the Transformation
of an Island Society: The Tikopia Case, In Island Societies: Archaeological Approaches
to Evolution and Transformation, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Pp. 33-41.
3493. Kirch, P.V., 1986b: ‘Introduction: The Archaeology of Island Societies’, in P.V. Kirch, ed.,
Island Societies: Archaeological Approaches to Evolution and Transformation, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, pp. 1-5.
3494. Kirch, Patrick Vinton, 1987: Feathered Gods and Fishhooks: An Introduction to Hawaiian
Archaeology and Prehistory, Honolulu: UH Press.
3495. Kirch, Patrick Vinton; Colin Renfrew, Clive Gamble, 1989: The Evolution of the Polynesian
Chiefdoms, Cambridge University Press
3496. Kirch, P. V.; Hunt, T.L. editors. 1993: The To’aga site: three millennia of Polynesian
occupation in the Manu’a Islands, American Samoa, Berkeley: Archaeological Research
Facility, University of California, Berkeley.
3497. Kirch, Patrick Vinton, 1994: The wet and the dry: irrigation and agricultural intensification
in Polynesia, Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
3498. Kirch, Patrick V., 1996: Tikopia Social Space Revisited, In Oceanic Culture History: Essays
in Honour of Roger Green, edited by J. Davidson, G. Irwin, F. Leach, A. Pawley, and D.
Brown, Dunedin: New Zealand Journal of Archaeology Special Publication. Pp. 257-274.
3499. Kirch, Patrick V., 1997: Mocrocosmic Histories: Island Perspectives on Globalí Change,
American Anthropologist, 99:30-42.
3500. Kirch, P. V., 1997a: The Lapita Peoples: Ancestors of the Oceanic World, Cambridge,
Mass., Blackwell Publishers.
3501. Kirch, edited by Patrick V. and Hunt, Terry L., 1997: Historical ecology in the Pacific Islands:
2009
prehistoric environmental and landscape change, New Haven: Yale University Press.
3502. Kirch, P. V., 1999: The Lapita Peoples, Oxford: Blackwell.
3503. Kirch, P. V., 2000, 2002: On the Road of the Winds: archaeological history of Pacific Islands
before European Contact, Berkeley, University of California Press.
3504. Kirch, P. V., 2000a: Historical Ecology in the Pacific Islands, Yale University Press.
3505. Kirch, Patrick V. and Jean-Louis Rallu, editors, 2007: The growth and collapse of Pacific
island societies: archaeological and demographic perspectives, Honolulu: University of
Hawai’i Press.
3506. Kirch, Patrick V., 2000b: Temples as ëHoly Housesí: The transformation of Ritual Architecture
in Traditional Polynesian Societies, In Beyond Kinship: Opening Up the House, edited by
J. Gillespie and R. Joyce, Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press. Pp. 103-114.
3507. Kirch, Patrick V., 2001: Pigs, Humans, and Tropic Competition on Small Oceanic Oslands,
In Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, edited by M. Dietler
and B. Hayden. Canberra: Australian National University, Centre for Archaeological
Research and Department of Archaeology and Natural History. Pp. 427-439.
3508. Kirch, Patrick V., 2001a: Polynesian Feasting in Ethnohistoric, Ethnographic, and
Archaeological Contexts: A Comparison of Three Societies, In Feasts: Archaeological
and Ethnographic Perspectives on Food, Politics, and Power, edited by M. Dietler and B.
Hayden. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution Press.
3509. Kirch, Patrick V., 2001b: Hawaiki: Ancestral Polynesia: An Essay in Historical Anthropology,
3510. Kirch, Patrick Vinton, contributions by Nick Araho...[et al.]. 2001b: Lapita and its
transformations in near Oceania: archaeological investigations in the Mussau Islands,
Papua New Guinea, 1985-88, [Berkeley, Calif.], Archaeological Research Facility,
University of California.
3511. Kirch, Patrick Vinton, Jean-Louis Rallu, 2007: The Growth and Collapse of Pacific Island
Societies: Archaeological and Demographic Perspectives (Anthropology), University of
Hawaii Press.
3512. Kirk, Robert W., 2008: Pitcairn Island, the Bounty mutineers, and their descendants: a
history, Jefferson, N.C.: McFarland & Co.
3513. Kirkpatrick, John, 1983: The Marquesan notion of the person, Ann Arbor, Mich.: UMI
Research Press.
3514. Kirtland, John C., David F. Coffin, 1981: The relocation and internment of the Aleuts during
World War II, Anchorage, Alaska, Aleutian/Pribilof Islands Association.
3515. Kiste, R.C.,1985: Identity and relocation; the Bikini case, in M Chapman, ed, Mobility and
identity in the Island Pacific, special issue of Pacific Viewpoint, 26, 1.
3516. Kiste, R., 1986: Termination of the US trusteeship in Micronesia, JPH, 21 (3), 1986: 127-
138.
3517. Kiste, R.C., 1994: United States in Howe KR, Kiste RC and Lal Bv, eds, Tides of History,
Allen and Unwin, 227-56.
3518. Kiste, edited by Robert C. and Marshall, Mac, 1999: American anthropology in Micronesia:
an assessment, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.
3519. Kiszely, John P., 2005: ‘The land campaign: A company commander’s perspective’. In
2009
CEHA 195
99-108.
3520. Kitano, Norio, 1987: Amakusa Kirishitan shi: maboroshi no paraizo, Fukuoka-shi: Ashi
Shobō, Shōwa 62
3521. Kituai, August Ibrum K., 1998: My gun, my brother: the world of the Papua New Guinea
colonial police, 1920-1960 (Pacific Islands Monograph, 15), Honolulu (HI): University of
Hawai’i Press.
3522. Kituai, A., 1999: Deaths on the mountain; an account of police violence in the highlands of
PNG, in Borofsky R., 1999, ed, Remembrance of Pacific pasts; an invitation to remake
history, Honolulu, UH Press, pp.212-30.
3523. Kiyoshi, Matsuda, 1981: Kodai chūsei Amami shiryō, Tōkyō: JCA Shuppan.
3524. Kjartan G. Ottósson, 1983: Fróðárundur í Eyrbyggju, Reykjavík: Bókaútgáfa Menningarsjóðs.
3525. Kjellgren, Eric, IVORY, Carol S. 2005: Adorning the world: art of the Marquesas Islands,
New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art; New Haven: Yale University Press.
3526. Klarreich, Kathie, 2005: Madame Dread: A Tale of Love, Vodou and Civil Strife in Haiti,
New York: Nation Books.
3527. Klein, Herbert S. and Ben Vinson, 2007: African slavery in Latin America and the Caribbean,
Oxford; New York: Oxford University Press.
3528. Klein, Laura and Lillian Ackerman, Eds. 2000: Women and Power in Native North America,
University of Oklahoma Press.
3529. Kluge, P. F., 1991: The Edge of Paradise: America in Micronesia, New York: Random
House.
3530. Klüppelholz, Heinz, 2005: Les connotations de l’insularité dans “ Mercure “ d’Amélie Nothomb,
in Trabelsi, Mustapha (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand.
3531. Knafou, R., 1988: Le tourisme a la Reunion et a Maurice, Mappemonde, no 3, p. p. 9-11.
3532. Knapman, B., 1986: Aid and the dependent development of Pacific Island States, JPH, vol.
21 (3-4): 139-152.
3533. Knapman, B., 1986: Merchant capital in the extreme periphery; Burns Philp (South Sea
Coy Ltd) in Fiji 1920-1939”, Historical Studies, Vol 22, No 86, pp.93-115.
3534. Knapman, C. & Ralston, C., 1989: Historical patchwork: a reply to John Young, Journal of
Pacific History, vol. 23(2): 221-224.
3535. Knapman, C., 1986: White women in Fiji 1835-1930: the ruin of empire?, Sydney.
3536. Knapman, C., 1993: Reproducing empire; Exploring ideologies of gender and race on
Australia’s Pacific frontier, in Magarey S, Rowley S and Susan S (Eds), Debutante nation:
Feminism contests the 1890’s, Sydney, Allen and Unwin.
3537. Knapp, A. Bernard, 2008: Prehistoric and Protohistoric Cyprus: Identity, Insularity, Oxford
University Press.
3538. Knapp, Bettina Liebowitz, 1985: Ceremonies and rituals on the Trobriand Islands of Papua,
New Guinea. Part I-II, in Arabesque, New York. v. 11, no 4, Nov-Dec, p. 4-7.
3539. Knapp, R., 1980: China’s Island Frontier: Studies in the Historical Geography of Taiwan,
University of Hawaiì Press.
3540. Knauft, Bruce M., 1999: From primitive to postcolonial in Melanesia and anthropology, Ann
Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
2009
3541. Knight, David W., 1998: The 1688 census of the Danish West Indies: (portrait of a colony
in crisis), St. Thomas, U.S. Virgin Islands, Little Nordside Press.
3542. Knight, Franklin W., 1989: The Modern Caribbean, The University of North Carolina Press.
3543. Knox, Bruce Arthur, 1984: “British Policy and the Ionian Islands, 1847-1864: Nationalism
and Imperial Administration”, in English Historical Review, 99, 503-529, Publisher: Oxford
University Press.
3544. Knox, Robert, 2004: An Historical Relation of the Island of Ceylon in the East Indies, New
Delhi (Reprint. Asian Educational Services).
3545. Knox, S. A., 1985: The making of the Shetland landscape, Edinburgh.
3546. Knox, W., 2004: Ilheidade: estudo sobre a idéia de ilheidade no imaginário social
de dois filmes. In: XIII Ciclo de Estudos sobre o Imaginário: Espaço maginários e
Transculturalidade, Recife. Caderno de Resumos. Recife: UFPE.
3547. Kobata, Sunao, 1985: Kirishitan nōmin no seikatsu, Fukuoka-shi, Ashi Shobō, (1986
printing).
3548. Kober, Pascal (Editeur scientifique), 2008: Îles: Ces étranges objets de désir, La
GéoGraphie. Terre des hommes, Hiver, vol. 1528, no 1, p 3-113.
3549. Koburger, Charles W., 1995: Pacific turning point: the Solomons campaign, 1942-1943,
Westport, Conn.: Praeger.
3550. Koburger, Charles W., 1999: Wine-dark, blood red sea: naval warfare in the Aegean, 1941-
1946, foreword by G.W. Searle, Westport, Conn.: Praeger.
3551. Koczberski, G., 2002: “Pots, Plates and Tinpis: New income flows and the strengthening
of women’s gendered identities in Papua New Guinea”, in Development, 45(1): 88-92.
3552. Koczberski, G., Curry, G.; Connell, J., 2000: “Full Circle or Spiralling Out of Control? State
Violence and the Control of Urbanisation in Papua New Guinea”, in Urban Studies, 38
(11): 2017-2036.
3553. Koczberski, G., G. Curry and K. Gibson, 2001: Improving productivity of the smallholder oil
palm sector in Papua New Guinea: a socio-economic study of the Hoskins and Popondetta
schemes, OPRA Annual Report Supplement.
3554. Koechlin, J.; Boye, M., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et
exemples, In Mayotte: bilan ecologique, possibilites de developpement, programme
d’etudes, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, p. 147-161.
3555. Koechlin, Bernard, 1995: Les Seychelles et l’ócean indien, Paris l’Hamarttan.
3556. Kohler, Jean-Marie, 1985: Profil sociologique de l’église catholique de Wallis et Futuna
(compte rendu de la mission effectuée du 9 au 24 octobre 1985): document de travail, sl:
ORSTOM.
3557. Kohler, Jean-Marie; Pillon, Patrick, 1985: Adapt the school or revise the social objective
? The question of appropriate education for melanesians in New Caledonia, Bundoora:
Research centre for Southwest Pacific studies, La Trobe university, (3), 80 p.
3558. Kohler, Jean-Marie; Pillon, Patrick; Wacquant, Loïc, 1985: “Jeunesse, ordre coutumier et
identité canaque en Nouvelle Calédonie”, In: Jeunesse, développement et changements
sociaux: année internationale de la Jeunesse, Cahiers ORSTOM, Série Sciences
Humaines, 21 (2-3), p. 203-228.
3559. Kohler, Jean-Marie; Pillon, Patrick; Wacquant, Loïc, 1985: Jeunesse canaque et coutume,
Nouméa: Institut Culturel Mélanésien, ORSTOM, 71 p. (Sillon d’Ignames).
2009
CEHA 197
3560. Kohler, Jean-Marie; Wacquant, Loïc, 1985: “La question scolaire en Nouvelle Calédonie:
idéologies et sociologie”, In: Nouvelle-Calédonie: pour l’indépendance, Les Temps
Modernes, (464), p. 1654-1685.
3561. Kohlhoff, Dean, 1995: When the wind was a river: Aleut evacuation in World War II, Seattle:
University of Washington Press in association with Aleutian, Pribilof Islands Association,
Anchorage.
3562. Kolig Erich, Hermann Mückler, (eds.), 2002: Politics of Indigeneity in the South Pacific, LIT
Verlag, Hamburg .
3563. Kolkolo, U. M., 1992: A review and assessment of seaweed species of present and potential
value to Papua New Guinea, MSc thesis, Simon Fraser University.
3564. Kolodny, E. et alii., 1996: “Chypre et la Crète: similitudes et contrastes d’évolution des
deux îles principales de la Méditerranée orientale”, Travaux de la Maison de l’Orient
méditerranéen, n°25, p. 29-52.
3565. Kondakov, Georgi Ivanovitch, 1991: The Island of dread in the channel: the story of Georgi
Ivanovitch Kondakov, edited with notes and illustrations by Brian Bonnard, Russian letters
translated by Galina Chernakova, Stroud; Wolfeboro Falls, NH: A. Sutton.
3566. Kono, H. et alii., 2000: Regional cohesion and competition in the age of globalization,
Cheltenham, Edward Elgar publishing.
3567. Konrad, Monica, 2005: Nameless relations: anonymity, Melanesia and reproductive gift
exchange between British ova donors and recipients, New York: Berghahn Books.
3568. Konstadakopulos, D., 1998: The Regionalisation of Innovation Policy in Southern Europe,
in Contemporary Political Studies, A. Dobson and J. Stanyer (eds.).
3569. Koo, J. O., [et al.], 1983: “Pulping and sheet forming test of mixed tropical hardwoods from
Kapuluk forest in Papua New Guinea”, in Journal of the Technical Association of Pulp and
Paper Industry of Korea 15(1): 3-9.
3570. Koot, Christian J., 2007: ‘A “Dangerous Principle”: Free Trade Discourses in Barbados and
the English Leeward Islands, 1650-1689’, Early American Studies: an interdisciplinary
journal, 5:1, 132-63.
3571. Koot, Christian J., 2007: ‘Constructing the Empire: English Governors, Imperial Policy, and
Inter-imperial Trade in New York City and the Leeward Islands, 1650-1689’, Itinerario,
31:1, 35-60.
3572. Koppel, Tom, 1995: Kanaka: the Untold Story of Hawaiian Pioneers in British Columbia
and the Pacific Northwest, Whitecap Books.
3573. Kornfeld, Marcel and Alan J. Osborn, 2003: Islands on the Plains: ecological, social, and
ritual use of landscapes, Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press.
3574. Koroseta To’o, F., 2000: “Globalisation: impact on small islands state economies”,
Indigenous affairs, n°1, p. 46-47.
3575. Korotky, A. M., [et al.], 2000: “Middle-and late-Holocene environments and vegetation
history of Kunashir Island, Kurile Islands, northwestern Pacific”, in The Holocene, vol. 10:
pp. 311 - 331.
3576. Korst, Mogens, 1987: Industrial life in Denmark: the Faroe Islands and Greenland: a survey
of economic development and production, preface by Poul Schlüter Korst, Copenhagen:
Foundation for International Understanding.
3577. Korstanje, Maximiliano, 2008: Ideología y utopía. La idealización de las islas Malvinas en
el pensamiento colectivo argentino, Gazeta de Antropología, Nº 24, pp. 24-09
2009
3578. Koten to Minzokugaku no Kai, 1981: Okinawa-ken Kudakajima no matsuri, Tōkyō:

hatsubaimoto Hakuteisha, Shōwa 56.
3579. Kottak, Conrad P., 1986: Madagascar: Society and History, Durham: Carolina Academic
Press.
3580. Koukkou, Helenē E., 1983: Historia tōn Heptanēsōn apo to 1797 mechri tēn Anglokratia,
Athēna: Dēm. N. Papadēma.
3581. Kousis, M., 2001: Tourism and the Environment in Corsica, Sardinia, Sicily and Crete. In:
Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y. and Sonmez, S.F. (eds), Mediterranean Islands and
Sustainable Tourism Development: Practices, Management and Policies, London: Pinter,
pp. 214-233.
3582. Kovats-Bernat, J. Christopher, 2006: Sleeping Rough in Port-au-Prince: An Ethnography
of Violence and Street Children in Haiti, University Press of Florida.
3583. Krämer, Augustin, 1994: Samoa Inseln, translated by Theodore Verhaaren, Honolulu:
University of Hawaii Pres.
3584. Krämer, Augustin, 1994: The Samoa Islands: an outline of a monograph with particular
consideration of German Samoa, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Pres.
3585. Kramer, Augustin, Theodore Verthaaren (Translator), 2000: The Samoan Islands:
an Outline of a Monograph with Particular Consideration of German Samoa: Constitution,
Pedigrees and Traditions, University of Hawai’i Press.
3586. Krauss, N. L. H., 1980: Bibliography of the Vitu or Witu Islands, New Guinea, Honolulu:
The Author.
3587. Kreiner, edited by Josef, 2006: Japaneseness versus Ryukyuanism: papers read at the
Fourth International Conference on Okinawan Studies, Bonn Venue, March 2002, Bonn:
Bier’sche Verlagsanstalt.
3588. Kremezi, Aglaia, 2000: The foods of the Greek islands: cooking and culture at the crossroads
of the Mediterranean, Boston, Mass.: Houghton Mifflin.
3589. Krise, Thomas W., 1999: Caribbeana: an anthology of English literature of the West Indies,
1657-1777, Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
3590. Kristinsson, G.H., 2000: ‘From Home Rule to Sovereignty: The Case of Iceland’ in G.
Baldacchino & D. Milne (eds.) Lessons from the Political Economy of Small Islands: The
Resourcefulness of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp. 141-155.
3591. Kritzler, Edward, 2008: Jewish pirates of the Caribbean: how a generation of swashbuckling
Jews carved out an empire in the new world in their quest for treasure, religious freedom-
-and revenge, New York: Doubleday.
3592. Krogstrup, Hanne; Barnholdt Lund, Yvonne, Færøernes erhvervspolitik, Aalborg: Aalborg
Universitetsforlag.
3593. Krüger, Gundolf, 1998: Tahiti and the Society Islands - an archipelago as seen in the
light of European yearnings, In Hauser-Schäublin, Brigitta; Krüger, Gundolf (ed.), James
Cook: gifts and treasures from the South Seas: Gaben und Schätze aus der Südsee,
München and New York: Prestel, 141-71.
3594. Krull, Kathleen, 1995: Bridges to change: how kids live on a South Carolina Sea Island,
photographs by David Hautzig, New York: Lodestar Books.
3595. Kuipers, J.C., 1993: The Society and Its Environment in Indonesia: a country study, W.H.
Frederick and R.L. Worden (eds.). Washington DC: GPO
2009
CEHA 199
3596. Kull, C. A., 2004: Isle of Fire: The Political Ecology of Landscaping Burning in Madagascar.
3597. Kulturbüro, Katalanischen, 1992: Katalanische Ortsnamen: Führer des amtlichen
Sprachgebrauchs auf den Balearen, in Katalonien und im Land València, herausgegeben
vom; Herausgeber, Hans-Ingo Radatz, Axel Schönberger, Tilbert Dídac Stegmann.
Frankfurt am Main: Domus Editoria Europaea.
3598. Kurlansky, Mark, 1992: A continent of islands: searching for the Caribbean destiny,
Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley Pub. Co..
3599. Kury. Lorelai; Brilhante, Lorelai, 2001: Histoire naturelle et voyages scientifiques, 1780-
1830, Paris, France: L’Harmattan.
3600. Kuschel, Rolf, 1981: Personal Names, In Dictionary of the Language of Rennell and Bellona,
English to Rennellese and Bellonese, edited by S.H. Elbert, R. Kuschel, and T. Taupongi,
Language and Culture of Rennell and Bellona Islands, Vol. III, Part 2. Copenhagen: The
National Museum of Denmark. pp. 111-133.
3601. Kuschel, Rolf, 1985: BlodhÊvn pÂ Bellona Island, Nordisk Psykologi, 1:51-2.
3602. Kuschel, Rolf, 1987: Twenty-Four Generations of Intergroup Conflicts on Bellona Island
(Solomon Islands), In Ethnic Conflict. International Perspectives, edited by J. Boucher, D.
Landis, and K. A. Clark, Newbury Park: Sage Publications. pp. 280-296.
3603. Kuschel, Rolf, 1988: Vengeance is Their Reply: Blood Feuds and Homicides on Bellona
Island. Part 1: Conditions Underlying Generations of Bloodshed. Language and Culture
of Rennell and Bellona Islands, Vol. VII: Part 1. Copenhagen: Dansk Psykologisk Forlag.
3604. Kuschel, Rolf, 1988a: ÿje for ¯je, Tand for Tand - og en Lavine af Mord, Humaniora nr.
1:28-30.
3605. Kuschel, Rolf, 1990: Jante in Polynesia, In The Master Said: To Study and...edited by B.
Arendrup, S.B. Heilesen, and J.ÿ. Petersen, East Asian Institute, East Asian Institute
Occasional Papers 6, University of Copenhagen. pp. 116-126.
3606. Kuschel, Rolf and Torben Monberg, 1990a: Bibliography of Rennell and Bellona Islands,
Copenhagen, The University of Copenhagen, 1st. edition.
3607. Kuschel, Rolf, 1991: Socialpsykologisk Skibbrud pÂ en Polynesisk, In Vrede-Konflikt-Kultur,
edited by P. Berliner, B. Karpatchof, and R. Kuschel, 2. Symposium om Kulturpsykologi,
K¯benhavn, Dansk psykologisk Forlag. pp. 111-133.
3608. Kuschel, Rolf, 1992: Women are Women and Men are Mení: How Bellonese Women get
Even, In Of Mice and Women: Aspects of Female Aggression, edited by K. Bj–rkvist and
P. Niemel”, Festschrift for Kersti Lagerspetz. San Diego, Academic Press, 1992:173-185.
3609. Kuschel, Rolf, 1993: Gteskabelige Konfliktl¯sninger i et Polynesisk¯-samfund, Nordisk
Psykologi, 45(4):274-294.
3610. Kuschel, Rolf, 1993a: Killing Begets Killing: Homicides and Blood Feuds on a Polynesian
Outlier, Bijdragen Tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde (Journal of the Royal Institute of
Linguistics and Anthropology) 149(4):690-717.
3611. Kuschel, Rolf, 1993b: The Bellonese Attitude Toward Nature, In The Invention of Nature,
edited by T. Bargatzky and R. Kuschel, Frankfurt am Main, Peter Lang. Pp. 83-101.
3612. Kuschel, Rolf, Torben Monberg and Torben Wolff, 2000: Bibliography of Rennell and Bellona
Islands, Second Revised Edition, Copenhagen: Institute of Psychology, University of
Copenhagen.
3613. Kushner, Ervan F., 1984: Bogged down in Bora Bora: a history of the 198th Coast Artillery
Regiment (Antiaircraft) on Bora Bora Island, 1942-1943, E.F. Kushner Books (Paterson,
2009
N.J.).
3614. Kuziakina, Natalia 1995: Theatre in the Solovki prison camp, translated from the Russian
by Boris M. Meerovich, Luxembourg; [Newark, N.J.], United States: Harwood Academic
Publishers.
3615. Kwa’ioloa, Michael, 1997: Living tradition: a changing life in Solomon Islands, London,
Published for the Trustees of the British Museum by British Museum Press.
3616. Kwapena, N., 1986: “Wildlife in Papua New Guinea: wildlife management by the people”,
a case study presented at Session IIIC (Oceanian realm) during World National Parks
Conference 13th October, 1982. Boroko, Papua New Guinea:, Division of Wildlife, Dept.
of Environment & Conservation.
3617. Kyrieleis, H., 1981: Führer durch das Heraion von Samos, Athen.
3618. Kyselka, Will, 1987: An Ocean in Mind. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press.
3619. La Brosse, Gaële de (textes réunis et présentés par), 2004: Îles funestes, îles bienheureuses,
Paris: Transboréal, (Chemins d’étoiles, 12).
3620. La Croix, Robert de, 2000: Mystères des îles, Saint Malo.
3621. La Far, André de, 1966: Ces îles oubliées où s’écrivit l’histoire, Paris.
3622. Labat, R.P. Jean-Baptiste, 2001: Voyage aux Caraïbes, Saint Malo.
3623. Labouisse, Jean-Pierre, , 2004: Systèmes agraires et économie du cocotier au Vanuatu:
historique et perspectives, Journal de la Société des océanistes, no 118, p. 11-33.
3624. Lacoste, Y.; et all…, 1985: Ces Iles ou l’on Parle Francais, Herodote, no 37-38, p. p. 1-327.
3625. Lacour, P.; Poher, A. (pref.), 1987: De l’Oceanie au Pacifique: histoire et enjeux, Paris:
France Empire.
3626. Ladefoged, T. N., 1993: Evolutionary Process in an Oceanic Chiefdom: Intergroup
Aggression and Political Integration in Traditional Rotuman Society, Ph. D. Thesis,
University of Hawai’i.
3627. Laenui, P., 1997: Repression and renaissance in Hawaii, in D. Denoon, ed, The Cambridge
History of the Pacific islanders, CUP, 403-7.
3628. LaFrance, David G. and Errol D. Jones, eds., 1992: Latin American Military History: An
Annotated Bibliography, Military History Bibliographies, vol. 12. New York: Garland
Publishing.
3629. LaFranchi, Christopher, and Greenpeace Pacific, 1999: Islands Adrift? Comparing Industrial
and Small-Scale Economic Options for Marovo Lagoon Region of the Solomon Islands.
Suva:Greenpeace Pacific.
3630. Lajić, Ivan, 1992: Stanovništvo dalmatinskih otoka: povijesne i suvremene značajke
depopulacije, Zagreb: Consilium: Institut za migracije i narodnosti Sveučilišta u Zagrebu.
3631. Lal, Brij V. 1985: Veil of dishonour: sexual jealousy and suicide on Fiji plantations, JPH,
vol. 20(3), 135-155.
3632. Lal, Brij V., 1988: Power and prejudice: the making of the Fiji crisis, Wellington.
3633. Lal, Brij v. 1997: Towards a United Future: Report of the Fiji Constitution, The Journal of
Pacific History, 31, p. 80.
3634. Lal, Brij V. ed. 1992: Pacific Islands History: journeys and transformations, Canberra.
3635. Lal, Brij V., 1992a: Broken waves: a history of the Fiji Islands in the twentieth century,
2009
CEHA 201
Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press.

3636. Lal, B., 2000: Fiji before the storm. Sydney, Asia Pacific Press.
3637. Lal, Brij V.; Fortune, Kate edited by. 2000: The Pacific Islands: An Encyclopedia, Honolulu:
University of Hawai’i Press.
3638. Lal, edited by Brij V., 2004: Pacific places, Pacific histories: essays in honor of Robert C.
Kiste, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.
3639. Lal, Brij V., 2008: A Time Bomb Lies Buried: Fiji’s Road to Independence, 1960-1970,
Australian National university- Epress, SSGM Monograph, No. 1.
3640. Lalanda, Maria Margarida de Sá Nogueira, «O Mar na Organização das Populações
Açorianas nos Séculos XV a XVII», pp. 415-430. Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.) Actas
do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso de Vasco da Gama a Portugal,
Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, 2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos
3641. Lamb, J. et al, 2001: Exploration and Exchange: a south seas anthology 1680-1900,
Chicago, University of Chicago Press.
3642. Lambek, Michael, 1981: Human spirits: a cultural account of trance in Mayotte Cambridge;
New York: Cambridge University Press.
3643. Lambek, Michael; Strathern, Andrew, ed. 1998: Bodies and persons: comparative
perspectives from Africa and Melanesia, Cambridge, U.K.; New York, NY: Cambridge
University Press.
3644. Lambourdière, sous la direction de Eric, 2007: Les Caraïbes dans la géopolitique mondiale,
Collection: Carrefours, Paris, Ellipses.
3645. Lamont, E.H. 1994: Wild life among the Pacific islanders, Rarotonga; Suva: Institute of
Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific.
3646. Lamour, P., 1997: Corruption and governance in the South Pacific, Pacific Studies, Vol 20,
3, pp.1-18.
3647. Lamusse, R.; Dommen, E. (ed.), 1980: Islands, In Labour policy in the plantation islands,
Oxford; New York; Paris: Pergamon.
3648. Lancioni, T., 1991: Viaggio tra gli Isolari, Milan, Edizioni Rovello, Almanacco del Bibliofilo.
3649. Landell, Mills, 1991: Smallholder oil palm productivity study, ADB TA No.790-PNG, Bath,
United Kingdom, Landell Mills/Department of Agriculture and Livestock.
3650. Landgridge, Marta, trans. 1988: Von den Steinem’s Marquesan Myths, Canberra, Australia:
Target Oceania/The Journal of Pacific History, 1988.
3651. Landowne, Youme, 2004: Selavi, That is Life: A Haitian Story of Hope, El Paso, TX: Cinco
Puntos Press.
3652. Lane, Andrew, 2000: Royal Marines Commandos in the Falklands War. Tiverton: Halsgrove
in association with the Royal Marines Museum.
3653. Lane, Dorothy Freda, 1995: The island as site of resistance: an examination of Caribbean
and New Zealand texts, Paris: P. Lang, cop.
3654. Lane, J. E. and J. Engberg, 1980: Internationalisering och autonomi, in Statsvetenskaplig
tidskrift, 4, pp. 207-215.
3655. Laney, Rheyna M., 2002: Disaggregating Induced Intensification for Land-Change Analysis:
A Case Study from Madagascar, Annals of the Association of American Geographers,
2009
Volume 92, Number 4, December, pp. 702-726(25)

3656. Langdon, Robert edited by. 1984: Where the whalers went: an index to the Pacific ports
and islands visited by American whalers (and some other ships) in the 19th century,
Canberra: Pacific Manuscripts Bureau, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian
National University.
3657. Langdon, R., 1992: Sixteenth century Spanish castaways in the Caroline and Marshall
Islands, in Rubinstein, D. (ed) Pacific History; Papers from the 8th PHA conference,
Guam PHA/MARC pp.7-16.
3658. Lange, David, 1990: Nuclear Free: The New Zealand Way, New Zealand: Penguin Books.
3659. Lange, Elsbeth, 1986: Die Landschaftsgeschichte der Insel Rügen seit dem Spätglazial,
Akademie-Verlag.
3660. Lange, Michael A., 2007: The Norwegian Scots: an anthropological interpretation of Viking-
Scottish identity in the Orkney Islands; with a foreword by Barbara E. Crawford. Lewiston
(NY); Lampeter: Edwin Mellen Press.
3661. Langley, Lester D. 1989: The United States and the Caribbean in the Twentieth Century.
London: University of Georgia Press.
3662. Langmore, Diane, 1989: Missionary lives: Papua, 1874-1914, Honolulu: University of
Hawaii Press.
3663. LANIC, Academic Journals, Disponível online em url: http://lanic.utexas.edu/la/region/
journals/. Consulta em 29 de Agosto de 2009.
3664. Lape, Peter V., 2003: A Highway and a Crossroads: Island Southeast Asia and Culture
Contact Archaeology, Archaeology in Oceania, Vol. 38.
3665. Lape, Peter V., 2002: On the Use of Archaeology and History in Island Southeast Asia,
Journal of the Economic and Social History of the Orient, Vol. 45, No. 4, Excavating the
Relations between Archaeology and History in the Study of Pre-Modern Asia [Part 1], pp.
468-491.
3666. Lapian, Adrian B., 2003: Laut Sulawesi: The Celebes Sea, from Center to Peripheries,
Moussons, juillet, no 7, p. 3-16.
3667. Lapidoth, R., 1997: Autonomy: Flexible Solutions to Ethnic Conflicts, Washington, DC:
United States Institute of Peace Press.
3668. Lapouge, Gilles, 2002: Pirates, boucaniers, flibustier, Paris: Éd.du Chêne.
3669. Laracy, H., 1994: World War 11, in Howe KR, Kiste RC and Lal BV, eds, Tides of history,
Allen and Unwin, 149-69.
3670. Laracy, Hugh, 2000: ‘Saint-making: the case of Pierre Chanel of Futuna’, New Zealand
Journal of History, 34:1, 145-61.
3671. Larmour, P., 1990: Ethnicity and decentralisation in Melanesia: a review of the 1980s, In:
Ethnic nationalism, Pacific Viewpoint, vol. vol. 31, no 2, p. p. 10-27.
3672. Larmour, Peter, 2005: Foreign flowers: institutional transfer and good governance in the
Pacific Islands, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.
3673. Larn, Richard; Larn, Bridget, 1995: Shipwreck index of the British Isles, London: Lloyd’s
Register of Shipping.
3674. Larner, W.; Walters, W., 2002: “The political rationality of “new regionalism”: Toward a
genealogy of the region”, Theory and society, n°33, p. 391-433.
2009
CEHA 203
3675. Laroche, Maximilien, 2002: La littérature haïtienne: identité, langue, réalité, Port-au-Prince.
3676. Larsen, A. C., Stummann Hansen S, 2001: Viking Ireland and the Scandinavian communities
in the North Atlantic; in: Larsen AC (ed): The Vikings in Ireland. Roskilde: The Viking Ship
Museum.
3677. Larsen, Curtis E., 1983: Life and land use on the Bahrain Islands: the geoarcheology of an
ancient society, Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
3678. Larsen, Lief Calundann, 1986: The Danish colonization of St. John, 1718-1733, St. Thomas:
Virgin Islands Resource Management Cooperative.
3679. Larson, Pier, 2000: History and Memory in the Age of Enslavement. Becoming Merina in
Highland Madagascar, 1770–1822, Oxford: James Currey, Portsmouth, NH: Heinemann;
and Cape Town: David Philip.
3680. Larson, Pier Martin, 2009: Ocean of letters: language and creolization in an Indian Ocean
diaspora, Cambridge, UK; New York: Cambridge University Press.
3681. Lasaqa, I. Q., 1984: The Fijian people before and after independence, Australian National
University Press.
3682. Lasserre, G., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In
Economies et societes de plantation en milieu insulaire tropical, Universite de Bordeaux
3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, p. 119-125.
3683. Lasserre, G., 1987: Conférence d’ouverture du colloque « Le géographe et les îles » in Iles
tropicales: insularité, ‘insularisme’, Actes du colloque organisé à Bordeaux-Talence du 23
au 25 Octobre 1986, Collection Iles et Archipels. n°8. Bordeaux, CRET-CEGET.
3684. Lassithiotakis, Michel, 2004 : L’Isola di Candia, piu d’ogn’altra lontana: aspects matériels
et culturels de l’insularité en Crète à la fin de la période vénitienne (1570 env. – 1669,
Paris: Maisonneuve et Larose; [Istanbul]: Institut français d’études anatoliennes.
3685. Latapi, Escobar, A., 1997: Emigration Dynamics in Mexico, Central America and the
Caribbean. Discussion paper, Costa Rica, International Organisation for Migration.
3686. Latawski, Paul Chester, 2005: ‘Invoking Munich, expiating Suez: British leadership,
historical analogy and the Falklands Crisis’, In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove,
Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst
conference series, 5), London ; New York: Cass, 226-38
3687. Latham, L., 1982: The French in New Caledonia, in R.J. May & H. Nelson (eds.), Melanesia
beyond diversity, vol. 1, Canberra.
3688. Latham, M.; Brookfield, H.C., 1983: Iles Fidji orientales: étude du milieu naturel, de son
utilisation et de son évolution sous l’influence humaine, Paris: ORSTOM.
3689. Latham, M.; Brookfield, H.C., 1983a: The Eastern islands of Fiji: a study of the natural
environment, its use, and man’s influence on its evolution, Paris: ORSTOM.
3690. Latimer, H., 1985: Developing - island economies - tourism v agriculture, Tourism
3691. Latorre, Octavio, 1991: Manuel J. Cobos emperador de Galápagos, Quito, Ecuador:
Fundación Charles Darwin para las Islas Galápagos.
3692. Latorre, Octavio, 1992: La maldición de la Tortuga: historias trágicas de las Islas Galápagos,
Quito: [s.n.], (Quito, Ecuador: Artes Gráficas Señal Impreseñal).
3693. Latorre, Octavio, 1999: El hombre en las Islas Encantadas: la historia humana de
Galápagos, Quito,[O. Latorre].
2009
3694. Lätsch, Frauke, 2005: Insularität und Gesellschaft in der Antike: Untersuchungen zur
Auswirkung der Insellage auf die Gesellschaftsentwicklung, Stuttgart: Steiner.
3695. Lattas, Andrew, 1989: Trickery and sacrifice: Tambarans and the appropriation of female
reproductive powers in male initiation ceremonies in West New Britain, Man, 24(3):451-
469.
3696. Lattas, Andrew, 1990: Poetics of space and sexual economies of power: gender and the
politics of male identity in West New Britain, Ethos, 18(1):71-102.
3697. Lattas, Andrew, 1991: Sexuality and cargo cults: the politics of gender and procreation in
West New Britain, Cultural Anthropology, 6(2):230-256.
3698. Lattas, Andrew, 1992: Hysteria, anthropological disclosure and the concept of the
unconscious: Cargo cults and the scientisation of race and colonial power, Oceania, 63
(1): 1-14.
3699. Lattas, Andrew, 1992a: The punishment of masks: Cargo cults and ideologies of
representation in West New Britain, Canberra Anthropology, 15(2): 69-88.
3700. Lattas, Andrew, 1992b: Skin, personhood and redemption: the doubled self in West New
Britain cargo cults, Oceania, 63(1):27-54.
3701. Lattas, Andrew, 1993: Gifts, commodities and the problem of alienation, Social Analysis
(Adelaide), 34:102-118.
3702. Lattas, Andrew, 1993a: Sorcery and colonialism: illness, dreams and death as political
languages in West New Britain, Man (NS), 28(1): 51-77.
3703. Lattas, Andrew, 1996. Memory, forgetting and the New Tribes Mission in West New Britain,
Oceania, 66 (4): 286-304.
3704. Lattas, Andrew, 1998: Cultures of Secrecy: Reinventing Race in Bush Kaliai Cargo Cults,
University of Wisconsin Press.
3705. Lattas, Andrew, 1999: “Neither cargo nor cult ...”, Anthropological Forum, 9/1: 107-112.
3706. Lattas, Andrew, 2001: The underground life of capitalism. Space, persons, and money
in Bali (West New Britain), In A. Rumsey and J. Weiner (eds.), Emplaced Myth, Space,
Narrative and Knowledge in Aboriginal Australia and Papua New Guinea, Honolulu:
University of Hawai’i Press, Pp. 161-270.
3707. Lattas, Andrew, 2005: ‘Capitalizing on Complicity: Cargo Cults and the Spirit of Modernity
on Bali Island (West New Britain)’, Ethnohistory, 52 (1): 47-80.
3708. Lattas, Andrew, 2006: ‘The utopian promise of government’, Journal of the Royal
Anthropological Institute (NS), 12 (1): 129-150.
3709. Latukefu, S., 1992: Papua New Guinea; a century of colonial impact, Port Moresby, UPNG
Press.
3710. Lau Thi Keng, J-C., 1991: Inter-ethnicité et politique à l’île Maurice, Paris, L’Harmattan.
3711. Lavery, Jason, 2006: The History of Finland (The Greenwood Histories of the Modern
Nations), Greenwood Press.
3712. Lavondes, Anne, 1990: Un modele d’identite: le tatouage aux iles de la Societe (Polynesie
francaise), ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer,
cahiers des sciences humaines, Paris, France, 1990, vol. vol. 26, no 4, p. p. 605-621.
3713. Lawaetz, Erik J., 1998: Emancipation: the Virgin Islands of the United States celebrates its
150 year anniversary 1848. July 3, [Herning, Denmark], Edition Poul Kristensen.
2009
CEHA 205
3714. Lawaetz, Eva, 1980: Black education in the Danish West Indies from 1732 to 1853: the
pioneering efforts of the Moravian Brethren, St. Croix, U.S. V.I.: Published under the
auspices of the American Revolution Bicentennial Commission of the Virgin Islands by
St. Croix Friends of Denmark Society.
3715. Lawson, Stephanie, 1996: Tradition versus democracy in the South Pacific, Fiji, Tonga,
and Western Samoa, Cambridge University Press.
3716. Lawton, Ralph; Ezard, Janet edited, 1993: Topics in the description of Kiriwina, Canberra:
Dept. of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University.
3717. Layman, C. H.; Cameron, Jane, 1995: The Falklands and the Dwarf: the cruise of H.M.S.
Dwarf in the Falkland Islands, 1881-1882, Chippenham: Picton.
3718. Lazell, James D. 2005: Island: fact and theory in nature, Berkeley: University of California
Press.
3719. Le Bouëdec, Gérard, François Ploux, Christophe Cérino et Aliette Geistdoerfer (dir.), 2004:
Entre terre et mer: sociétés littorales et pluriactivités (XVe-XXe siècle), Rennes.
3720. Le Bourdiec, F.; Le Bourdiec, P., 1987: Problemes socio-economiques de la facade
Orientale Africaine et des Iles du Sud-Ouest de l’Ocean Indien, Annales de geographie,
no 533, p. p. 1-32.
3721. Le Bras, M.; Dupont, A.; Bouchez, P.; Soopramanien, A., 1983: Les Iles et les grandes
Endemies Tropicales (conference du 8eme colloque de la sepanrit, bordeaux 2-3 nov.
1981), bulletin de liaison - sepanrit, no 12, p. p. 83-85.
3722. Le Bras, M.; Dupont, A.; Bouchez, P.; Soopramanien, A., 1984: Nature et hommes dans
les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Les iles et les grandes endemies tropicales,
Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, 1984/00. p. 125-128.
3723. Le Galès, P.; Lequesne, C. (dir.), 1997: Les paradoxes des régions en Europe, Paris, La
Découverte.
3724. Le Guat, François, 1995: Les naufragés de Dieu: aventures d’un protestant et de ses
compagnons exilés en deux îles désertes de l’océan Indien, 1690-1698, Paris: Phébus.
3725. Le Guat, François, 1995: Voyage et aventures de François Leguat et de ses compagnons
en deux îles désertes des Indes orientales (1690-1698), introduction et notes de Jean-
Michel Racault. Suivi de Recueil de quelques mémoires servant d’instruction pour
l’établissement de l’île d’Eden, par Henri Duquesne (1689), introduction et notes de Paolo
Carile, Paris: Editions de Paris: Diffusion Harmonia Mundi.
3726. Le Guillou, Philippe, 1999, Îles, Terre de brume.
3727. Le Lannou, M., 1941: Pâtres et paysans de la Sardaigne, Tours, Arrault et Cie.
3728. Le Pourhiet-Salat, Nicole, 1983: La Défense des îles bretonnes de l’Atlantique, des origines
à 1860, Vincennes: Service historique de la Marine.
3729. Le Quesne, W. J., 1995?: The Le Quesnes of Jersey, Jersey: Channel Islands Family
History Society.
3730. Le Quesne, Walter J., 1991: The de Gruchys of Jersey: including their history from Norman
times and comprehensive trees from the fourteenth century to 1881, St. Helier, Jersey,
Channel Islands: Channel Islands Family History Society.
3731. Leach, Henry, Sir, 2005: ‘Crisis management and the assembly of the Task Force’ [Falklands
twenty years on : lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5) (London ; New
York: Cass), 64-74.
2009
3732. Leal, João, 1997: Açorianidade: literatura, política, etnografia (1880-1940), Celta Editora.
3733. Lean, G. A., 1991: Counting systems of Papua New Guinea: Volume 4. The New Britain
provinces. Lae, Papua New Guinea, Department of Mathematics and Statistics, Papua
New Guinea University of Technology.
3734. Leary, edited by Paul M.,1981: Proceedings / Conference on Recent Developments
in United States-Offshore Areas Relations at the College of the Virgin Islands, St.
Thomas Campus, U.S. Virgin Islands, March 27 and 28, 1981. Conference on Recent
Developments in United States-Offshore Areas Relations (College of the Virgin Islands)
[St. Thomas, V.I.]: College of the Virgin Islands.
3735. Leary, Paul M. edited by, 1992: Major political & constitutional documents of the United
States Virgin Islands, 1671-1991, St. Thomas, VI: University of the Virgin Islands.
3736. Leary, Paul M. St, 1988: Taking bearings: the United States Virgin Islands, 1917-1987,
United States Virgin Islands: Bureau of Public Administration, University of the Virgin
Islands.
3737. Lebarbenchon, Roger Jean, 1988: La grève de Lecq: Guernesey et Jersey,Cherbourg
[France]: Isoète.
3738. Lebigre, J.-M. (dir.), 1997.- Milieux et sociétés dans le Sud-Ouest de Madagascar. Talence,
CRET et DyMSET, Collection «Iles et archipels» n° 23.
3739. Lebigre, J.-M., 1999: Les marais à mangroves : les enjeux de la domestication d’un
écosystème tropical. In “Littoral, frontières marines”, Hérodote, 93 : 42-65.
3740. Lebigre, Jean-Michel (dir.); Decoudras, Pierre-Marie (dir.); Grenier, Christophe (dir.),
2001: Colloque «aires protégées» insulaires et littorales tropicales: Gestion, enjeux,
perspectives, comparaisons. Nouméa (Nouvelle-Calédonie), Salle de Conférences du
Secrétariat de la Commission du Pacifique, Anse Vata. 30-31 octobre.
3741. Lebigre, Jean-Michel, Guilène Réaud-Thomas, 2001: Androka (extrême sud de
Madagascar), Cartes d’évolution des milieux, Iles et archipels n° 30, Presses universitaires
de Bordeaux.
3742. Lebigre, J.-M., 2003: L’obó de São Tomé (République de São Tomé e Príncipe): un exemple
d’hinterland forestier insulaire, Les Cahiers d’Outre-mer, 224 : 379-400. Disponível online
em url:http://com.revues.org/index729.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
3743. Lebigre, J.-M., Portillo, P. & Thompson, W., 2003: Quel avenir pour les mangroves de
l’archipel de la Bahía (Honduras) ? In: Hequette, A. (resp. sc.) : Actes du Colloque «
Espace littoraux en mutation » Commission de Géographie de la Mer et des Littoraux -
Dunkerque (1e, 2 et 3 juin 2000), Université du Littoral, Côte d’Opale, 63-71.
3744. Lebigre, J.-M. & Decoudras, P.M. (dir.), 2004: Les aires protégées insulaires et littorales
tropicales, Bordeaux, Université Michel de Montaigne, CRET, Coll. Iles et Archipels, 33.
3745. Lebigre, J.-M., 2004: Les marais à mangrove de Nouvelle-Calédonie, un exemple de milieu
« naturel » lagonaire, Nouméa, Centre de Documentation Pédagogique, Scérén, Sce 44.
3746. Lebigre, J.-M., d’Aquino, P., 2004: La Géographie au service du développement et de
l’environnement ? Bilan de 50 ans de Géographie francophone en Océanie, Assises de
la Recherche Française dans le Pacifique (24 - 27 août 2004) Nouméa.
3747. Lebigre, J.-M., 2005: Les îles basses océaniennes face à l’élévation du niveau marin. In
: Fillol, V. & Vernaudon, J. - Stéréotypes et représentations en Océanie. Actes du 17e
Colloque Corail (1-3 décembre 2004), Nouméa, 341-357.
3748. Lebigre, J.M., 2006: Les maquis miniers calédoniens: caractères, fonctions et conservation.
2009
CEHA 207
In: J.L. Klein et F. Lasserre, Le Monde dans tous ses Etats, Québec, Presses de l’Université
du Québec, 452-455.
3749. Lebigre, J.M., Dumas, P., Lefebvre, J.P., Munzinger, J., 2006: The mangrove swamps of
New Caledonia : a wide diversity. Poster n°12. Les marais à mangrove de Nouvelle-
Calédonie : une grande diversité. In : Forum Biodiversité des Ecosystèmes coralliens.
Nouméa, IRD et CPS, Nouvelle-Calédonie, 30-octobre-4 novembre 2006, Livre des
Résumés: 100-101.
3750. Lebigre, Jean-Michel, 2004: Le “Coeur de Voh” (Nouvelle-Calédonie): Photo-interprétations
d’une forme végétale dynamique, In Maillard, Jean-Claude (coord.). Insularité, société et
développement, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. 57, no 225, p. p. 109-112.
3751. LeBlanc, Yves, 1980: Les îles de la Madeleine face à leur destin, [Montréal]: Leméac.
3752. Leblic, Isabelle, 2008: Vivre de la mer, vivre avec la terre…en pays kanak. Savoirs et
techniques des pêcheurs kanak du sud de la Nouvelle-Calédonie, Paris, Société des
Océanistes, Travaux et documentsocéanistes.
3753. Leblond, Jean-Baptiste, 2000: Voyage aux Antilles: d’île en île, de la Martinique à Trinidad
(1767-1773), Paris: Editions Karthala.
3754. Leckie, Jacqueline, 2006: Texts and Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography,
Pacific Affairs, Vol. 79.
3755. Lecoq, 1997: “Îles du dedans, îles du dehors. Les îles médiévales entre le réel et l’imaginaire
(VIIe-XIIIe siècle)”, dans Les îles, du mythe à la réalité, M. Pelletier, (éd.), Paris, p. 17-51
3756. Lecoq, 1998: “L’île aux confins des mondes dans les mappemondes médiévales”, dans Île
des merveilles. Mirage, miroir, mythe, D. Reig et G. Chandes (éd.), Paris.
3757. Lee, Georgia, 1992: The Rock Art of Easter Island. Symbols of Power, Prayers to the
Gods, Los Angeles: The Institute of Archaeology Publications (UCLA).
3758. Lee, Helen H., 1996-2009: Tonga Bibliographies, The World-Wide Web Virtual Library.
Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_tonga1.html // http://
coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_tonga2.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
3759. Lee, Jacques, 2005: Mauritius: Its Creole Language - The Ultimate Creole Phrase Book
and Dictionary, Paperback (August 15), Publisher: Nautilus.
3760. Lee, Joann Faung Jean, 1991: Asian American experiences in the United States: oral
histories of first to fourth generation Americans from China, the Philippines, Japan, India,
the Pacific islands, Vietnam, and Cambodia, Jefferson, N.C.: McFarland.
3761. Lee, Joann Faung Jean compiled. 1992: Asian Americans: oral histories of first to fourth
generation Americans from China, the Philippines, Japan, India, the Pacific islands,
Vietnam and Cambodia, New York: New Press: Distributed by Norton.
3762. Leenhardt, Maurice, 1985: Do kamo: la personne et le mythe dans le monde mélanésien,
préface de Maria Isaura Pereira de Queiroz, [Paris]: Gallimard.
3763. Leenhardt, Raymond Henri, 1980: Au vent de la Grande Terre. Histoire des Iles Loyalty de
1840 a 1895, Paris: S.N..
3764. Lefevre, Daniel, 1986: L’organisation De L’espace A Maurice Et A La Reunion : Etude De
Geographie Comparee; Sous La Direction De Francoise Le Bourdiec, Mémoire ou thèse
(version d’origine), Doctorat D’etat: Géographie: Nice.
3765. Lefroy, compiled from the colonial records and other original sources by J.H., 1981:
Memorials of the discovery and early settlement of the Bermudas or Somers Islands,
1515-1685 [i.e. 1511-1687], [Hamilton]: Bermuda Historical Society: Bermuda National
2009
Trust.
3766. Leitch, Wright J.; Merrell,James, 1999: The Only Land They Knew: American Indians, U
of Nebraska Press.
3767. Leite, Ana Mafalda 2000: Os Temas do Mar em Algumas Narrativas Africanas de Língua
Portuguesa, in Insularidades e Viagem La Lusophonie: Voix Oceaniques, Org. Anne
Quataert e Maria Fernanda Afonso, Lidel, 251-256.
3768. Lelièvre, Olivier, 1992: Mentawaï, la forêt des esprits, Xonrupt-Longemer, Anako éditions;
Paris: Editions Peuples du monde.
3769. Lemonnier, Pierre, 1990: Guerres et festins: paix, échanges et compétition dans les
Highlands de Nouvelle-Guinée, avant-propos, Maurice Godelier, Paris: Editions de la
Maison des sciences de l’homme.
3770. Len, Bell, 1999: Augustus Earle’s The meeting of the artists …., In Calder A, Lamb J and
Orr B, eds, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters 1769-1840, Honolulu, UH Press,
pp. 241-64.
3771. Len, Bell, 1999: Looking at Goldie; face to face with ‘All ’e Same T’e Pakeha, in N. Thomas
and D. Losche, eds, Double Vision, Cambridge, CUP, pp.163-192.
3772. Lenfestey, Gillian, 2005 for 2004: ‘Nineteenth century sunbonnets in the Channel Islands’,
Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 25:4, 689-98.
3773. Lenfestey, Hugh, 2005 for 2004: ‘Homage and suit-of-court in the Channel Islands denoting
allegiance to the English Crown’, Société Guernesiaise Report and Transactions, 25:4,
674-88.
3774. Leng, A. S. 1992. A review of methods for maintaining soil fertility in Papua New Guinea, M.
P. Levett, J. Earland and P. Heywood, Eds., Proceedings of the First Papua New Guinea
Food and Nutrition Conference: Changes in Food and Nutrition in Papua New Guinea,
Port Moresby, University of Papua New Guinea Press and Department of Agriculture and
Livestock, pp. 54-69.
3775. Lentfer, C., 1995: Ethnobotanical research in West New Britain and the Forestry Research
Institute Herbarium, Lae, PNG. June-July 1995, Report submitted to West New Britain
Provincial Government. Faculty of Resource Science and Management, Southern Cross
University, Lismore NSW.
3776. Lentfer, C.; M. Therin and R. Torrence 2002: Starch Grains and Environmental
Reconstruction: a Modern Test Case from West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Journal
of Archaeological Science, 29(7): 687-698.
3777. Leopoldie, M.A., 1986: Etude bibliographique de l’evolution de l’agriculture commerciale
dans quelques iles antillaises: Martinique, Porto-Rico, Haiti, Trinidad et Tobago, Bordeaux:
Universite de Bordeaux 3, Institut de Geographie, (these).
3778. Lepelley, René, 1999: Noms de lieux de Normandie et des îles anglo-normandes, Paris,
Bonneton.
3779. Lepthien, Emilie U., 1986: The Philippines, Chicago, Childrens Press.
3780. Lerat, S., 1983: L’exploitation miniere dans les Iles du Monde Intertropical, (conference du
8eme colloque de la sepanrit, bordeaux 2-3 nov. 1981), bulletin de liaison - sepanrit, no
12, p. p. 61-62.
3781. Lerat, S., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In
L’exploitation miniere dans les iles du monde intertropical, Universite de Bordeaux 3 –
Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, 1984/00. p. 145-146.
2009
CEHA 209
3782. Lerat, sous la direction de Christian, 2008: Élites et intelligentsias dans le monde caraïbe,
3783. Lesley, J., L. A. Manning and G. D. Ogle, 2001: “A survey of diabetes services in hospitals
in Papua New Guinea”, Papua New Guinea Medical Journal, 44(3-4): 88-95.
3784. Lesourd, M., 1986: Permanence de la secheresse aux Iles du Cap Vert: l’amenagement
rural ou la lutte contre l’irreversible, In: Etudes saheliennes, cahiers geographiques de
rouen, no No special, p. p. 109-128.
3785. Lesourd, M., 1996: Etat et societe aux iles du Cap Vert. Alternatives pour un petit Etat
insulaire, Paris: Karthala.
3786. Lessa, William Armand, 1980: More tales from Ulithi Atol: a content analysis Berkley:
University of California Press.
3787. Lessard, G., 2000: “Les économies de petite taille et la zone de libre-échange dans les
Amériques”, Cahier de recherché, 00-05, Montréal, Groupe de recherche sur l’intégration
régionale.
3788. Lestrade, S., 1987: “Les problèmes économiques des petits Etats insulaires d’après
l’exemple des Caraïbes”, Le Courrier ACP-UE, n° 104, p. 78-84.
3789. Lestringant, Frank, 2002: Le livre des îles: atlas et récits insulaires de la Genèse à Jules
Verne, Genève: Droz.
3790. Lestringant, Frank, 2006: La littérature en archipel ou le retour de l’Insulaire: Saint-Exupéry,
Michaux, Calvino, French Cultural Studies, Oct; vol. 17: pp. 303 – 317.
3791. Létoublon F. (dir.), 1996: Impressions d’îles, Toulouse: Presses universitaires du Mirail.
3792. Leventis, Yiorghos, 2002: Cyprus: The Struggle for Self-Determination in the 1940s, Peter
Lang.
3793. Leventis, Yiorghos, Murata Sawayanagi Nanako, Hazama Yasushi, 2008: Crossing Over
Cyprus. Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, (ILCAA) Tokyo
University of Foreign Studies (TUFS).
3794. Levitt, Ian, 2000: ‘”Taking a gamble”: the Scottish Office, Whitehall and the Highlands and
Islands Development Board, 1965-67’, Northern Scotland, 20, 87-112
3795. Levitt, Ian, 2001: ‘The Scottish Emergencies Organisation, the Scottish Islands and the
Seamen’s strike, 1966’, Scottish Archives, 7, 45-58
3796. Levratto, Nadine, 2001 : Economie de la Corse: y a-t-il une vie après la rente ?, Albiana.
l’Harmattan.
Levy, Andrea, 2004: Small Island, New York: Picador.
3797. Lewis, (J.), 1990: «The Vulnerability of Small Island States to Sea Level Rise: The Need
for Holistic Strategies», Disasters, 14(3), p. 241-248.
3798. Lewis, A. B., (1910) 1988: New Britain notebook, The Field Museum of Natural History
Bulletin, 59(8):6-28.
3799. Lewis, D., 1981: Some perspectives on natural disaster vulnerability in Tonga, Pacific
Viewpoint, vol. vol. 22, no 2, p. p. 145-162.
3800. Lewis, D., 1994: We, the Navigators: The Ancient Art of Landfinding in the Pacific, Second
Edition, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.
3801. Lewis, D., 1996: The plantation dream; developing British New Guinea and Papua 1884-
1942, Canberra, ANU.
2009
3802. Lewis, Gordon K., 2004: The growth of the modern West Indies, Kingston, Jamaica; Miami:
Ian Randle.
3803. Lewis, Patsy, 2002: Surviving small size: regional integration in Caribbean ministates,
Kingston, Jamaica: University of the West Indies Press.
3804. Lewis, Shireen K., 2006: Race, culture, and identity: francophone West African and
Caribbean literature and theory from négritude to créolité, Lanham, MD: Lexington Books.
3805. Lewis, Winston B., 1994: Battle of Savo Island, The battles of Savo Island, 9 August 1942
and the eastern Solomons, 23-25 August 1942, Washington [D.C.]: Naval Historical
Center, Department of the Navy.
3806. Lewis-Hughes, J. H., 1992: Whales! Launch the boats!: the story of Norfolk Island whaling
and the American connection, Killara, N.S.W.: [J.H. Lewis-Hughes?.
3807. Lezcano, Víctor Morales coordinación e introducción. 1993: III Aula Canarias y el Noroeste
de Africa (1988), Aula Canarias y el Noroeste de Africa (3rd: 1988: Las Palmas, Canary
Islands), Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
3808. Liconln, David, 2006: Beyond the Plantation: Mauritius in the Global Division of Labour,
The Journal of Modern African Studies, 44:1:59-78, Cambridge University Press.
3809. Lidegaard, M., 2001: Grönlands historia, Stockholm: Boviggen.
3810. Liedtke, Wolfgang, 1999: Samoa 1880 - 1914: bibliographie deutschsprachiger kolonialer
Literatur zu Quellen der Ethnographie und Geschichte, annotiert, Dresden: Staatliches
Museum für Völkerkunde Dresden, Forschungsstelle.
3811. Liennard, Alain, 2003: Analyse de la durabilité socio-économique d»un processus de
développement insulaire, la Nouvelle-Calédonie; sous la dir. de Michel Garrabé, Mémoire
ou thèse (version d’origine), Université de Montpellier I. Université de soutenance
3812. Ligabue, Giancarlo, un’idea di, 1995: La terra dei Moai: dalla Polinesia all’Isola di Pasqua,
a cura di Giuseppe Orefici, Venezia: Erizzo Editrice, 1995.
3813. Ligges, Wulf, Klaus Viedebantt, 1985: Inseln und Halligen Nordfrieslands: Amrum, Föhr,
die Halligen, Nordstrand, Pellworm, Sylt, Köln: DuMont.
3814. Liliu’okalani, 1898, 1991: Hawai’i’s Story by Hawai’i’s Queen, Charles E. Tuttle, (reissue).
3815. Lillard, Charles, [edited by], 1989: The Ghostland people: a documentary history of the
Queen Charlotte Islands, 1859-1906, Victoria, B.C.: Sono Nis Press.
3816. Lillard, Charles, 1995: Just east of sundown: the Queen Charlotte Islands Victoria, B.C.:
Horsdal & Schubart.
3817. Lilley, Ian, 1987: Prehistoric exchange in the Vitiaz Strait, Papua New Guinea, PhD thesis,
Australian National University, Canberra.
3818. Lilley, Ian, 1988: Prehistoric exchange across the Vitiaz Strait, Current Anthropology, 29:
513-516.
3819. Lilley, Ian, 1988: Type X: Description and discussion of a prehistoric ceramic ware from
northeastern Papua New Guinea, Bulletin of the Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association,
8:90-100.
3820. Lilley, Ian, 1990: Final report: Prehistoric settlement and trade in northwest New Britain,
Papua New Guinea, Department of Archaeology, University of Western Australia.
3821. Lilley, Ian, 1991: Lapita and Post-Lapita developments in the Vitiaz Straits-West New
Britain Area. P. S. Bellwood, Ed., Indo-Pacific Prehistory 1990, Canberra and Jakarta,
Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association and Asosiasi Prehistorisis Indonesia, pp. 313-322.
2009
CEHA 211
3822. Lilley, Ian, 2000: Jim Allen and the archaeology of coastal Papua New Guinea, in: A.
Anderson and T. Murray, Eds., Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of
Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, The Australian National University,
pp. 249-267.
3823. Lilley, Ian, 2000: Migration and ethnicity in the evolution of Lapita and post-Lapita maritime
societies in northwest Melanesia, In: S. O’Connor and P. Veth, Eds., East of Wallace’s
Line: studies of past and present maritime cultures of the Indo-Pacific region, Rotterdam;
Brookfield, VT, A.A. Balkema, pp. 177-196.
3824. Lilley, edited by Ian, 2006: Archaeology of Oceania: Australia and the Pacific Islands,
Malden, MA: Blackwell. Disponível online em url: http://www3.interscience.wiley.com/cgi-
bin/bookhome/117903439/. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
3825. Lim, T. K. (Tong Kwee), 1998?: Food and other crops in Fiji : an annotated bibliography,
Canberra: Australian Centre for International Agricultural Research.
3826. Lima Dantas, E. de, 1987: Historical Setting in Cuba: a country study (p. 1-62) J.D. Rudolph
(ed.). Washington DC: GPO
3827. Lima Lalanda Gonçalves, Rolando, 1984 : Eutopie Insularite et Migrations Contribution
a L’analyse des Processus Socio Culturels Dans Un Environnement Insulaire. ‘Archipel
des Açores; Sous La Direction De Alex Mucchielli, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine),
[S.l.] : [s.n.], 1984 Thèse de 3e cycle: Sociologie: Montpellier 3.
3828. Lindley, R., 1986: Autonomy, Basingstock: Macmillan.
3829. Lindo, Cecilia Kapua and Nancy Alpert Mower, 1980: Polynesian Seafaring Heritage,
Honolulu: Kamehameha Schools.
3830. Lindsay, C.W., 1993: The Economy in Philippines: a country study, R.E. Dolan (ed.).
Washington DC: GPO. (pp. 117 188).
3831. Lindsay, Charles, 1992: Mentawai shaman: keeper of the rain forest: man, nature, and
spirits in remote Indonesia, historical essay by Reimar Schefold, New York, N.Y.: Aperture.
3832. Lindsey, Terence; Morris, Rod, 2000: Collins Field Guide to New Zealand Wildlife,
HarperCollins (New Zealand) Limited
3833. Lindstrom, Lamont, 1993: Cargo cult: strange stories of desire from Melanesia and beyond,
Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, School of Hawaiin, Asian, and Pacific
Studies, University of Hawaii: University of Hawaii Press.
3834. Linford, Pat., 1994?: The Coconut revolution: a personal account, Red Hill, A.C.T..
3835. Lini, W., 1982: Australia and the south Pacific; a Vanuatu perspective, Australian Outlook,
Vol 36/2
3836. Linnekin, J., 1988: Who made the feather cloaks? A problem in Hawaiian gender relations,
JPS, vol. 97(3), 265-280
3837. Linnekin, J., 1991: Ignoble savages and other European visions - the La Perouse affair in
Samoan history, Journal of Pacific history, vol. 26(1), 3-26.
3838. Linnekin, Jocelyn, 1990: Sacred queens and women of consequence: rank, gender, and
colonialism in the Hawaiian Islands, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
3839. Linnikin, J., and Poyer, L., eds, 1990: Cultural identity and ethnicity in the Pacific, University
of Hawaii Press.
3840. Lippmann, Harry, 2008: Militärmuseen auf den Kanalinseln, Köln: Lippmann.
3841. LiPuma, Edward, 2000: Encompassing others: the magic of modernity in Melanesia, Ann
2009
Arbor: University of Michigan Press.

3842. Little, Carl, 1997: Art of the Maine islands, picture editor, Arnold Skolnick, Camden, ME :
Down East Books.
3843. Little, S., Holmes, L. & Grieco, M., 2000: ‘Island Histories, Open Cultures? The Electronic
Transformation of Adjacency’, Southern African Business Review, Vol. 4, No.2, pp. 21-25.
3844. Little, Stephen, Peter Ruthenberg, editors, 2006: Life in the Pacific of the 1700s: the Cook/
Forster Collection of the Georg August University of Gottingen: an exhibition held at the
Honolulu Academy of Arts, Hawaii February 23-May 16, 2006, the National Museum of
Australia, Canberra, June 22-September 10, 2006, organized by the Honolulu Academy
of Arts in cooperation with the Institute of Cultural and Social Anthropology of the Georg
August University of Gottingen, [Honolulu]: Honolulu Academy of Arts.
3845. Liu, J., and T. Var, 1986: Resident Attitudes Toward Tourism Impacts in Hawaii, Annals of
Tourism Research, 13, pp.193-214.
3846. Live, Y.-S. (Editeur scientifique), et all..., 2005: L’identité et la construction de l’identité
dans les îles du Sud-Ouest de l’Océan Indien, Kabaro (Paris).
3847. Liverpool, Hollis, 2001: Rituals of power and rebellion: the carnival tradition in Trinidad and
Tobago, 1763-1962, Chicago, IL.,; Trinidad and Tobago: Research Associates School
Times; Frontline Distribution.
3848. Livingston, William S., William Roger Louis, 1979: Australia, New Zealand, and the Pacific
Islands since the First World War, University of Texas press.
3849. Llabrés Ramis, Joan, Jordi Vallespir Soler, 1980: Els nostres arts i oficis d’antany, Ciutat
de Mallorca : Museu Arqueològic La Porciúncula.
3850. Lloyd, Greg and Black, Stuart, 1993: Highlands and Islands Enterprise: Strategies for
Economic and Social Development, Local Economy, 8(1), pp. 69-81.
3851. Lo Bao, Phil; Hutchison, Iain, 2002: BEAline to the islands: the story of air services to
offshore communities of the British Isles by British European Airways, its predecessors
and successors, Erskine: Kea.
3852. Lo. Chi-Kin, 1989: China’s Policy towards Territorial Disputes: The Case of the South China
Sea Islands, Routledge.
3853. Lobban jr., R.A., 1995: Cape Verde: Crioulo Colony to Independent Nation, Boulder:
Westview Press.
3854. Lobban, C.S. and Schefter, M. 1997: Tropical Pacific Island Environments, University of
Guam Press.
3855. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1993: El comercio del vino entre Gran Canaria y las Indias en el
siglo XVI, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Abildo. Insular de Gran Canaria.
3856. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel; Caneda, Ramón López; Santana, Elisa Torres, 1993: La “otra”
población: expósitos, ilegítimos, esclavos: Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, siglo XVIII, Las
Palmas G.C.: Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones.
3857. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1982: La esclavitud en las Canarias Orientales en el siglo XVI
(negros, moros y moriscos), Santa Cruz de Tenerife.
3858. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1983: Los libertos en la sociedad canaria del siglo XVI, Madrid-
Tenerife.
3859. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1988: El comercio canario-europeo bajo Felipe II, Funchal, CEHA.
3860. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1989: Monedas, pesas y medidas en Canarias en el siglo XVI, Las
2009
CEHA 213
Palmas de Gran Canaria.

3861. LOBO CABRERA, Manuel, 1990, «La historia de las islas: Canarias y Madeira», in Actas
do II Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, s.l., Comissão Nacional para as
Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses, pp. 531-546.
3862. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1993: El comercio del vino entre Gran Canaria y las Indias, Las
Palmas de Gran Canaria.
3863. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1993: La “otra población”: expósitos, ilegítimos y esclavos. Las
Palmas en el siglo XVIII, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria.
3864. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, revisión, ordenación e índices por. 1995: Libro rojo de Gran
Canaria, o, Gran libro de provisiones y reales cédulas, introducción por Pedro Cullén
del Castillo, presentación por Francisco Morales Padrón, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria:
Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
3865. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, [et al.], 1994: Textos para la historia de Canarias, Las Palmas de
Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
3866. Lobo Cabrera, Manuel, 1995: Don Agustín de Herrera y Rojas, primer marqués de
Lanzarote, Madrid. (En colaboración con Fernando Bruquetas de Castro).
3867. Lockhart, D., Drakakis-Smith, D. and Schembri, J. (eds), 1993: The Development Process
in Small Islands States, London and New York: Routledge.
3868. Lockhart, D. & Drakakis-Smith, D., 1996: Island Tourism: Problems and Perspectives,
London, Mansell.
3869. Lockhart ed. by Douglas G. and David Drakakis-Smith, 1997: Island tourism: trends and
prospects, London; New York: Pinter.
3870. Lockhart, D.G., 1997: Islands and Tourism: An Overview in D.G. Lockhart & D. Drakakis-
Smith (eds.) Island Tourism: Trends and Prospects, Pinter, pp. 3-20.
3871. Lockwood, V. S., 2004: Globalization and culture change in the Pacific Islands, Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education.
3872. Lockwood, V.S., 1988: Development French Neocolonialism, and the structure of the
Tubuai economy, Oceania, vol. vol. 58, no 3, p. p. 176-192.
3873. Löffler, C.M., 1983: The Voyage to the Otherworld Island in Early Irish Literature, Salzburg,
Institut für Anglistik und Amerikanistik, Universität Salzburg.
3874. Lofgren, Stephen J., 1993: Northern Solomons, Washington, DC: U.S. Army Center of
Military History.
3875. Logan, F. Donald, 2005: The Vikings in history, Taylor & Francis.
3876. Lomas, P., 1981: The early contact period in Northern New Ireland (PNG); from wild frontier
to plantation economy, Ethnohistory, Vol 28/1, pp.1-21.
3877. London, (J.), 2004: «Implications of climate change on small island developing states:
experience in the Caribbean region», Journal of Environmental Planning and Management,
47(4), p. 491-501.
3878. Longhurst, A. R. and Pauly, D., 1987: Ecology of Tropical Oceans, Academic Press.
3879. Longhurst, R., and Grano SA, eds, 2001: Embarquement pour le Queensland; Des
Loyaltiens en terre australienne, (Across the Coral Sea; Loyalty Islanders in Australia),
Noumea, Australian Consulate (catalogue for an exhibition).
3880. Loomis, Terrence, 1990: Pacific migrant labour, class, and racism in New Zealand: fresh
2009
off the boat, Aldershot, Hants, England: Avebury; Brookfield, Vt., USA: Gower Pub. Co..
3881. Loper, Christen E., Danielle M. Tesch, Kevin Goldstein, Isabel Torres de Noronha, 2005:
Global multilateral environmental agreements and small island developing states, Paper
Series No. 2004-2, Sponsored by: UNEP/GPA and the Global Forum on Oceans, Coasts,
and Islands.
3882. Lopes de Melo Borges, Joao Carlos, 1997: A diaspora caboverdeana e a sua influencia
na evolucao socioeconomica do Arquipelago, Lisboa: Universidade Tecnica de Lisboa.
3883. López Aguilar, Juan Fernando, 1998: Estado autonómico y hechos diferenciales: una
aproximación al hecho diferencial en el Estado compuesto de la Constitución de 1978: el
caso de la autonomía canaria, Madrid, Centro de Estudios Constitucionales.
3884. López Valdés, Rafael L., 2007: Pardos y morenos esclavos y libres en Cuba y sus
instituciones en el Caribe hispano, San Juan, Puerto Rico: Centro de Estudios Avanzados
de Puerto Rico y el Caribe.
3885. Lorelli, John A., 1984: The battle of the Komandorski, Islands, March 1943, Annapolis, Md.:
Naval Institute Press.
3886. Loroña, Lionel V., ed., 1987: A Bibliography of Latin American Bibliographies, 1980-1984:
Social Sciences and Humanities (Supplement No. 4 to Arthur E. Gropp’s A Bibliography
of Latin American Bibliographies), Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press.
3887. Loughlin, John, 1989: Regionalism and Ethnic Nationalism in France: A Case-study of
Corsica, Thesis. San Domenico, Italy: European University Institute.
3888. Loughlin, J., 1992: Le développement des îles de la Méditerranée, Revue d’économie
Régionale et Urbaine, n°4.
3889. Loughlin, John, and Claude Olivesi (eds.), 1999: Autonomies insulaires: vers une politique
de différence pour la Corse. Ajaccio: Editions Albiana.
3890. Loughlin, J., Alain Delcamp (Edited with), 2003: La décentralisation dans les Etats de
l’Union Européenne, Coll. Les Etudes, Paris: La Documentation Française, 2ième édition
3891. Loughlin, J., With M. Keating and K. Deschouwer, 2003: Culture, Institutions and Regional
Development: a Study of Eight European Regions, Cheltenham: Edward Elgar.
3892. Lougnon, Albert (éd.), 2006: Sous le signe de la tortue: voyages anciens à l’île Bourbon
(1611-1725), Ste Clotilde (La Réunion).
3893. Louis, Diana Farr; Marinos, June, 1995: Prospero’s kitchen: Mediterranean cooking of the
Ionian Islands from Corfu to Kythera, illustrated by Judith Ann Lawrence, New York: M.
Evans.
3894. Louman, B., Ed., 1995: Proceedings of the Huon Seminar ‘94: held in Lae, Papua New
Guinea, 20-23 June, 1994. Volume 13: Workshop on Forestry Management. Lae, Papua
New Guinea University of Technology.
3895. Lourie, Peter, 2002: Tierra del Fuego: a journey to the end of the earth, Honesdale, PA,
Boyds Mills Press.
3896. Lowe, Celia, 2006: Wild profusion: biodiversity conservation in an Indonesian archipelago,
Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press.
3897. Lowell, S. Gustafson, 1988: The Sovereignty Dispute over the Falkland (Malvinas) Islands,
3898. Lowenthal, D., 1988: ‘Island Self-Reliance or Expert Delusion?’ in Islands 88: Proceedings
of the 2nd Conference of Islands of the World, University of Tasmania, Hobart (TAS).
2009
CEHA 215
3899. Loxley, Diana, 1990: Problematic shores: the literature of islands, Basingstoke, GB:
Macmillan.
3900. Loxton, Bruce; Coulthard-Clark, Chris, 1994: The shame of Savo: anatomy of a naval
disaster, Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press.
3901. Lucas, Raoul (dir.), 2003: Sociétés plurielles dans l’océan Indien: Enjeux culturels et
scientifiques, Paris; Saint Denis: Karthala; Université de la Réunion, 2003.
3902. Ludema, R., 2002: “Increasing returns, multinationals and geography of preferential trade
agreements”, Journal on international economics, n°2, p. 329-358.
3903. Ludlow, Barbara, 2000: ‘The Enderby Settlement in the Auckland Islands’, Woolwich and
District Family History Society Journal, 79 (Autumn), 23-28.
3904. Ludra, Kuldip S., 1999: The defence of Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Chandigarh, Thakur
Kuldip S. Ludra.
3905. Ludtke, Jean, 1989: Atlantic peeks: an ethnographic guide to the Portuguese-speaking
Atlantic islands, Hanover, Mass.: Christopher Pub. House.
3906. Lugo, Ariel E., 1990: Mangroves of the Pacific Islands: research opportunities, Berkeley,
Calif. (P.O. Box 245, Berkeley 94701): U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, Forest Service, Pacific
Southwest Research Station.
3907. Lugo-Ortiz, C. R. and W. P. McCafferty, 1999: “A new genus of small Minnow Mayflies
(Insecta: Ephemeroptera: Baetidae) with six new species from New Guinea and New
Britain”, Annales de Limnologie-International Journal of Limnology, 35(1): 57-70.
3908. Luis Yanes, María Jesús; Sánchez Hernández, José María, 1995: La historia de Santa
Cruz de Tenerife, [Santa Cruz de Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria:
Ayuntamiento de Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Cabildo de Tenerife.
3909. Luke, L.B., 2001: Identity and Autonomy in Tobago: from Union to Self Government, 1889-
1980, Washington DC.
3910. Lull, Vicente... [et. al], 2001, Son Fornés: la prehistòria de les Illes Balears i el jaciment
arqueològic de Son Fornés, Montuïri, Mallorca = la prehistoria de las Islas Baleares y el
yacimiento arqueológico de Son Fornés, Montuïri, Mallorca, Montuïri, Mallorca: Fundació
Son Fornés.
3911. Lumb, Rosemary, 1980: Migration in the highlands and islands of Scotland[Aberdeen]:
Institute for the Study of Sparsely Populated Areas, University of Aberdeen.
3912. Luna Tobar, Alfredo, 1997: Historia politica internacional de la Islas Galápagos, Quito,
Ediciones Abya-Yala.
3913. Lundstrom, John B., 1994: The first team and the Guadalcanal campaign: naval fighter
combat from August to November 1942, Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press.
3914. Luomala, K., 1981: Eels in Gilbert Islands culture: traditional beliefs, rituals and narratives,
Journal de la societe des oceanistes, vol. vol. 37, no 72-73, p. p. 227-237.
3915. Lutkehaus, Nancy C.; Roscoe, Paul B., ed. 1995: Gender rituals: female initiation in
Melanesia, New York: Routledge.
3916. Lütkes, Christiana, 1990: The good gardener: horticulture, work, and work ethic in traditional
Melanesian societies, Münster; New York: Waxmann.
3917. Lutz, Catherine, 1988: Unnatural emotions: everyday sentiments on a Micronesian atoll &
their challenge to western theory, Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
3918. Luxán Meléndez, Santiago de., 1994: La industria tipográfica en Canarias, 1750-1900:
2009
balance de la producción impresa, [Las Palmas, Canary Islands]: Ediciones del Cabildo
3919. Lvesque, Rodrigue compiled and edited. 1992: History of Micronesia: a collection of source
documents, Gatineau, Québec: Éditions Lévesque = Lévesque Publications.
3920. Lyck, L., 1996: ‘The Faroese Home Rule Act as a Framework for the Faroese Economy’
in L. Lyck (ed.) Constitutional and Economic Space of the Small Nordic Jurisdictions,
NordREFO, 6, pp. 137-147.
3921. Lynch, C.J., 1980: The achievement of independence in Papua New Guinea: the legal
aspect, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 15(3-4), 175-193.
3922. Lynch, John, 1994: An annotated bibliography of Vanuatu languages, Suva, Fiji: Pacific
Information Centre and University of the South Pacific Library.
3923. Lynch, John, 1998: Pacific Languages: A History, Honolulu: University of Hawaiëi Press.
3924. Lynch, John, Crowley, Terry, 2001: Languages of Vanuatu: A new survey and bibliography,
Authored Research Books.
3925. Lyon Dahl, A., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In
Gestion traditionnelle et moderne de l’environnement insulaire oceanien, Universite de
Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, p. 141-144.
3926. Lyovin, Anatole V., 1997: An Introduction to the Languages of the World, New York: Oxford
University Press, Inc.
3927. Lysaght, Patricia, 2001: ‘Food provision strategies on the Great Blasket Island’, In Ó
Catháin, Séamus, Northern lights: following folklore in north-western Europe, Dublin:
University College Press, 127-140.
3928. Lytle, Clifford M. and Vine Deloria, Jr. 1998: The Nation Within: the Past and Future of
American Indian Sovereignty, University of Texas Press.
3929. Ma, Yingjiu, 1986: Cong xin hai yang fa lun Diaoyutai lie yu yu Donghai hua jie wen ti,
Zhonghua min guo Taiwan Taibei Shi: Zheng zhong shu ju; Meiguo zong jing xiao Hua
qiang tu shu gong si, min guo 75
3930. Mabire, Jean, 1994: Jersey sous l’Occupation, Saint-Malo, France: Ancre de marine.
3931. Mabuchi, Toichi, 1980: Space and Time in Ryukyuan Cosmology, Asian Folkore Studies,
39.
3932. Mac Cárthaigh, Críostóir; O’Reilly, Barry, 2001: ‘Ó bhun go barr an bhaile’ [Recent
settlement on the Great Blasket Island], In Ó Catháin, Séamus, Northern lights: following
folklore in north-western Europe, Dublin: University College Press, pp.148-164.
3933. Mac Conghail, Muiris, 1987: The Blaskets: a Kerry island library, 1988 reprint. Dublin:
Country House.
3934. Mac Conghail, Muiris, 1991: The literature of the Blasket Islands: an additional bibliographical
note, Journal of the Kerry Archaeological & Historical Society, 24 (1991), 69-71.
3935. Mac Conghail, Muiris, 1994: The Blaskets: people and literature, 2nd edition. Dublin: [s.n.].
3936. Mac Giolla Easpaig, Dónall, 1989-90: The place-names of Rathlin Island, Ainm, (Ulster
Place-Name Society), 4, 3-89.
3937. Mac Laughlin, Jim, 1996: “The evolution of anti-Traveller racism in Ireland”, in Race &
Class, Jan 1996; vol. 37: pp. 47 - 63.
3938. Macadam, R. D., 2000: “From pushing production inputs to empowering the community:
2009
CEHA 217
a case study in the transformation of an extension agency”, in Australian Journal of

Experimental Agriculture 40: 585-594.
3939. MacArthur, E. Mairi, 1990: Iona: the living memory of a crofting community, 1750-1914,
Edinburgh, vii, Edinburgh University Press.
3940. MacClancy, J., 1981: From New Hebrides to Vanuatu, 1979-1980, Journal of Pacific
History, vol. 16 (1), 1981, 92-104.
3941. MacCormick, Donald Neil, 2000: ‘Stands Scotland still where she did? New unions for old
in the islands’, Irish Jurist, 35, 1-16.
3942. Macdonald B, 1988: In pursuit of the sacred trust; Trusteeship and independence in Nauru,
Wellington, NZIIA.
3943. MacDonald, B., 1986: Decolonization and beyond: the framework for post-colonial
relationships in Oceania, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 21(3-4), 115-126.
3944. MacDonald, Colin M., 1999: Life in the Highlands and Islands of Scotland - Echoes of the
Glen & Highland Journey, Edinburgh: Mercat Press.
3945. Macdonald, Fiona A., 2005, 2006: Missions to Gaels: reformation and counter-reformation
in Ulster and the Highlands and islands of Scotland, Edinburgh: John Donald.
3946. Macdonald, Fiona, 2001: Marshall Cavendish Corporation, Elizabeth Paren, Kevin
Shillington, Gillian Stacey, Philip Steele, “Mauritius”, Peoples of Africa, US: Marshall
Cavendish.
3947. Macdonald, Heather B., 1997: “The Century of the Pacific... Maintaining Health During
Economic Development in the Pacific Islands”, in Promotion & Education, Sep 1997; vol.
4: pp. 33 - 36.
3948. Macgregor, by J.D., 2006: Colonial window: a view from the past: being the diary of a
doctor in HM Colonial Medical Service 1951 to 1975, Stanhope: Memoir Club.
3949. Machida, H., [et al.], 1992: “Holocene explosive eruptions of Witori and Dakataua
volcanoes in West New Britain, Papua New Guinea and their possible impact on human
environment”, in International Geological Congress, Abstracts--Congres Geologique
Internationale, vol. 29, pag. 506.
3950. Machida, H., R. Blong, H. Moriwaki, Y. Hayakawa, B. Talai, D. Lolock, J. Specht, R. Torrence
and C. Pain, 1992: Holocene explosive eruptions of Witori and Dakataua volcanoes in
West New Britain, Papua New Guinea.
3951. MacIntyre, Jean, 2005: “Enchanted Islands Floating on the Foam of Perilous Seas”,in
Quidditas: The Journal of the Rocky Mountain Medieval and Renaissance Association,
26-27, 78-89.
3952. Macintyre, Martha, 1983: The kula: a bibliography, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge
University Press.
3953. Maciej, Jędrusik, 2006: Emerging Islands” – A New Role Of Tropical Islands In The World,
Asia&Pacifik_3_2006.qxd 2007-01-20 23:20 Page 51-74. Disponível online em url: http://
www.wgsr.uw.edu.pl/pub/uploads/File/Jedrusik.pdf. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009.
3954. Mack Kim, D., 1992: The Administrative System of the Islands: Western Isles in The
Political Administrative Systems of the European Island Regions Ponta Delgada: Regional
Secretariat for Internal Administration, (pp. 119 -36).
3955. Mack, J., 1986: Madagascar: Island of the Ancestors, British Museum, London.
3956. Mackay, D., 1986: The Search For The Southern Land. In Fraser, B. (Ed.), The New
2009
Zealand Book Of Events. Auckland: Reed Methuen.

3957. MacKay, L., 1987: Tourism and changing attitudes to land in Negril, Jamaica, In: Besson,
J. and Momsen, J. (eds), Land and Development in the Caribbean, London: Macmillan
Caribbean.
3958. Mackie, Erin Skye, 2009: Rakes, highwaymen, and pirates: the making of the modern
gentleman in the eighteenth century, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.
3959. MacKillop, Donald, 1991: “Rocks, skerries, shoals and islands in the Sounds of Harris
and Uist and around the island of Berneray”, in Transactions of the Gaelic Society of
Inverness, 56 (1991 for 1988-90), 428-502.
3960. MacLaine, Brent, Island Literature - An Annotated Bibliography - compiled by MA (Island
Studies) students at the University of Prince Edward Island, as part of their course
requirements (Course Professor: Brent MacLaine). Disponível online em url: http://www.
islandstudies.ca/sites/islandstudies.ca/files/4/Island_Literature_Annotated_Bibliography.
3961. Maclellan, Nic, 2007: “Fiji, Iraq and Pacific island security”, in Race & Class, vol. 48: pp.
47 - 62.
3962. MacLeod, G., 2001: “New regionalism reconsidered: globalization and the remaking of
political economic space”, International journal of urban and regional research, n°4, p.
804-829
3963. MacLeod, Roy M.; Lewis, Milton J. (ed.). 1988: Disease, medicine and Empire: perspectives
on Western medicine and the experience of European expansion.
3964. Macnaught, T.J., 1982: The Fijian colonial experience, Canberra.
3965. MacPhee, Ross D.E., 1999: Extinctions in near time: causes, contexts, and consequences,
New York, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers.
3966. MacPherson, Stewart, 1996: “Social work and economic development in Papua New
Guinea”, in International Social Work, Jan 1996; vol. 39: pp. 55 - 67.
3967. MacQueen, N. 1989: Sharpening the spearhead: Sub-regionalism in Melanesia, PS, vol.
12 (2), 33-52.
3968. Madden, Albert Frederick McCulloch (ed.), 2000: Select Documents on the Constitutional
History of the British Empire and Commonwealth, 8: The end of empire : dependencies
since 1948, part 1 : the West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar,
and the Falklands. Westport (CT) and London: Greenwood.
3969. Madden, Albert Frederick McCulloch (ed.), 2000a: The end of empire: dependencies since
1948 : Part 1 : The West Indies, British Honduras, Hong Kong, Fiji, Cyprus, Gibraltar, and
the Falklands (Documents in Imperial History, 8; Select documents on the constitutional
history of the British Empire and Commonwealth, 8). Westport (CT): Greenwood Press.
3970. Maddern, Jo Frances, 2008: Spectres of migration and the ghosts of Ellis Island, Cultural
Geographies, Jul; vol. 15: pp. 359 - 381.
3971. Maddison, A. (dir.), 1986: L’Amerique Latine, la region des Caraibes et l’OCDE: dialogue
sur la realite economique et les politiques posibles,OCDE: Organisation de Coopération
et de Développement Economique - Paris: France.
3972. Maestri, Edmond, 1994: Les iles du sud-ouest de l’océan Indien et la France de 1815 a
nous jhours, Paris, L’harmattan et Saint-Denis, Uné de la Réunion.
3973. Maestri, Edmond, 2002: Esclavage et abolitions dans l’océan Indien (1723-1860): actes
du colloque de Saint-Denis de la Réunion / organisé par l’Université de la Réunion
2009
CEHA 219
en collaboration avec le Conseil général et le Conseil régional de la Réunion, 4 au 8

décembre 1998, Paris: L’Harmattan; Saint-Denis: Université de la Réunion.
3974. Maffei, Macrina Marilena, 1995: Capelli di serpe: cunti e credenze delle isole Eolie, Roma:
Meltemi, c1995.
3975. Maga, T., 1985: Democracy and defence; the case of Guam, USA 1918-41, JPH, 156-72.
3976. Maga, Timothy P., 2001: ‘”Away from Tokyo”: the Pacific Islands war crimes trials, 1945-
1949’, Journal of Pacific History, 36:1, 37-50.
3977. Mageo, Jeannette Marie, 1998: Theorizing self in Samoa: emotions, genders, and
sexualities, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
3978. Maggio, Laura, 2004: Bibliografia archeologica del Gargano e delle isole Tremiti: 1557-
1970, Laura Maggio; progetto scientifico a cura di Marina Mazzei, Foggia, C. Grenzi.
3979. Magnan, Alexandre, 2006: Autour d’empreintes de la mondialisation sur les dynamiques
territoriales des petites îles tropicales, Cahiers (Les) d’Outre-mer, 2006, vol. 59, no 236,
p. 499-511. Disponível online em url:http://com.revues.org/index606.html. Consulta em
3980. Magnan, Alexandre, 2006a: L’épidémie de Chikungunya à la Réunion : une occasion
de réfléchir au(x) paradoxe(s) insulaire(s), Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 234, Avril-Juin.
Disponível online em url:http://com.revues.org/index396.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto
de 2009.
3981. Magnan, Alexandre, 2007: Tourisme et réserves d’espaces pour les pratiques locales sur les
littoraux de l’île Maurice, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 240, Octobre-Décembre. Disponível
online em url: http://com.revues.org/index2528.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
3982. Magnusen, Karl O.; Rodríguez, Leonardo, 1998: “Cuba, Labor, and Change”, in Labor
Studies Journal, Jun 1998; vol. 23: pp. 21 - 40.
3983. Mahajani, Usha, 1971: Philippine Nationalism: External Challenge and Filipino Response,
1565-1946, St. Lucia, Queensland, Australia: University of Queensland Press.
3984. Mahina, O., 1992: The Tongan Traditional History Tala-e-Fonua: A Vernacular Ecology-
Centered Historico-Cultural Concept, Ph.D. Thesis Australian National University.
3985. Mahina, O., 1993: The poetics of Tongan traditional history, tala-e-fonua: an ecology-
centred concept of culture and history, Journal of Pacifi history, vol. 28 (1).
3986. Mahirta, 2009: Prehistoric human occupation on Rote and Sawu Islands, Nusa Tenggara
Timur, Indonesia, Oxford: John and Erica Hedges Ltd..
3987. Mahler, Ditlev L. D., 1993: Shielings and their role in the viking-age economy: new evidence
from the Faroe Islands, In Batey, Colleen E.; Jesch, Judith; Morris, Christopher D. (ed.),
The viking age in Caithness, Orkney and the north Atlantic, Edinburgh: Edinburgh
University Press, 487-505.
3988. Maiava, Susan, 2001: A clash of paradigms: intervention, response and development in
the South Pacific, Aldershot; Burlington, VT: Ashgate.
3989. Maillard, Jean-Claude (coord.). 2004: Insularité, société et développement, les cahiers
d’outre mer, vol. 57, no 225, p. p. 3-100. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/
3990. Maillard, Jean-Claude, 2006: «Economie maritime et insularité: le cas des îles tropicales»,
Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 234, Avril-Juin, online, URL: http://com.revues.org/index30.html.
Consultado em 11 de Julho de 2009.
2009
3991. Mainet, G. (ed.); David, Gilbert, 1998: Iles et littoraux tropicaux: actes des 7èmes journées
de géographie tropicale du comité national de géographes français, In Acteurs, espaces-
resources, échelles: premiers éléments pour une gestion durable de la pêche artisanale
en Mélanésie, Nantes: Ouest Editions, Universite de Bretagne Occidentale, Departement
de Geographie; Institut Universitaire Europeen de La Mer; CNRS, Laboratoire de
Geographie de la Mer, Geolittomer; UGI; Comite National dês Geographes Francais,
Commission Espaces Tropicaux et Leur Developpement
3992. Maingot, Anthony P. 1994: The United States and the Caribbean: Challenges of an
Asymmetrical Relationship. Westview P.
3993. Maisch, Christian J., 2000: “The Falkland/Malvinas Islands clash of 1831-32: U.S. and
British diplomacy in the South Atlantic”, in Diplomatic History, 24, 185-209.
3994. Major, Kevin, 2002: As Near to Heaven by Sea: A History of Newfoundland and Labrador,
Penguin Books.
3995. Makara, L., 1976: “West New Britain Province”, in Harvest, 3(4): 140-148.
3996. Makini, Jully, ed., 1991: Na Buka Vivinei Malivi pa Zinama Roviana / Roviana Custom
Stories Book, Solomon Islands: Western Province Government, 86 pp., illustrated.
“These stories were collected by Sister Lina Jones and by the Rev. E.C. Leadley in the
1930s and 1940s at Kokeqolo, Roviana Lagoon.” Introduction in Roviana and English,
text in Roviana.
3997. Malamut, E., 1989: Les îles de l’empire byzantin, Publications de la Sorbonne, Paris.
Malclès, Fabien, 2005 : Offre documentaire et insularité: réflexion autour des collections
de droit et des publics de la Bibliothèque Universitaire de la Nouvelle-Calédonie; sous la
direction de Françoise Gaudet,... École nationale supérieure des sciences de l’information
et des bibliothèques (Villeurbanne, Rhône). Université de soutenance, Mémoire d’étude
diplôme de conservateur des bibliothèques: Bibliothéconomie: Villeurbanne, ENSSIB.
Disponiverl online em url: http://www.enssib.fr/bibliotheque/documents/dcb/malcles-vol1.
pdf // http://www.enssib.fr/bibliotheque/documents/dcb/malcles-vol2.pdf. Consulta em 15
de Agosto de 2009.
3998. Malcomson, S. L., 1989: “Stranger than Paradise”, Mother Jones, 14 (January): 19–25.
3999. Malcomson, S.L., 1990: Palau in his Tuturani; a political journey in the Pacific Islands,
Simon & Schuster, 27-46, 1990.
4000. Malcomson, Scott L., 1990: Tuturani: a political journey in the Pacific Islands, New York:
Poseidon Press.
4001. Malhotra, O. P., 1986: Tribal education in Andaman and Nicobar Islands New Delhi, S.
Chand & Co., 1986.
4002. Malhotra, R. (Rikshesh), 1989: The Indian islanders: an anthropological perspective, New
Delhi, India: Mittal Publications.
4003. Maliarevsky, Michel, 2006: Îles d’Europe, Paris: Acanthe.
4004. Malik, Jamal, 2006: ‘Letters, prison sketches and autobiographical literature: The case
of Fadl-e Haqq Khairabadi in the Andaman Penal Colony’, Indian Economic and Social
History Review, 43:1, 77-100.
4005. Malinowski, Bronislaw, 1987: The sexual life of savages in North-western Melanesia: an
ethnographic account of courtship, marriage, and family life among the natives of the
Trobriand Islands, British New Guinea, introduction by Annette B. Weiner, with a preface
by Havelock Ellis, Boston, Beacon Press.
2009
CEHA 221
4006. Malo, Paul, 2004: A floating world: more people, places, and pastimes of the Thousand
Islands, Fulton, N.Y.: Laurentian Press.
4007. Maloney, Clarence, 1980: People of the Maldive Islands, Bombay: Orient Longman.
4008. Malten, Thomas, 1983: Malediven und Lakkadiven. Materialien zur Bibliographie der Atolle
im Indischen Ozean, Beiträge zur Südasien-Forschung Südasien-Institut Universität
Heidelberg, Nr. 87. Franz Steiner Verlag. Wiesbaden.
4009. Maluf, Sônia Weidner, 1992: “Witches and witchcraft: a study about representations of
female power on Santa Catarina Island”, in International Sociology, Jun 1992; vol. 7: pp.
225 - 234.
4010. Manchester City Art Gallery, 1988: The Falklands factor: representations of a conflict
[Exhibition catalogue], Manchester: Manchester City Art Galleries.
4011. Manera, Carles (director), Miquel Angel Casasnovas, Miguel José Deyá, Joana Maria
Escartín; pròleg, Pere Sampol i Mas, Las islas del calzado: historia económica del sector
en Baleares (1200-2000), Palma de Mallorca: L. Muntaner.
4012. Manfredi, Valerio Massimo, 1996: Le isole fortunate: topografia di un mito, “L’Erma” di
Bretschneider.
4013. Mangenot, G., 1981: Les flores des iles et les problemes qu’elles posent, Mondes et
Cultures, no 3, p. p. 545-550; p. 553-555
4014. Mangilao, 2003: Directory of libraries and archives in the Pacific Islands, Guam: University
of Guam.
4015. Manila, Gabriel Janer, 1986: Els Escriptors Balears i la seva producció en català: els autors
i els seus llibres, apèndix bibliogràfic de Lluís Villalonga, [Palma, Mallorca?] Conselleria
d’Educació i Cultura del Govern Balear, Direcció General de Cultura.
4016. Manning, Conleth, 1985: “Archaeological excavations at two church sites on Inishmore,
Aran Islands”, in Journal of the Royal Society of Antiquaries of Ireland, 115, 96-120.
4017. Manoharan, S., 2007: Linguistic identity of an endangered tribe: present Great Andamanese,
Andaman and Nicobar Islands, India, Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.
4018. Manor, James (ed.), 1984: Sri Lanka in Change and Crisis, New York: St. Martin’s.
4019. Mansfield, E.; Milner, H., 1999: “The new wave of regionalism”, International Organization,
n°3, p. 589-627.
4020. Mansion, J., 1912: Bibliographie scientifique de la Corse des origines à 1910, in Bulletin de
la Société des sciences historiques et naturelles de la Corse’.
4021. Mantovani, E., 1996: “Book review: To sing with pigs is human. The concept of person in
Papua New Guinea - Goodale,JC”, in Anthropos 91(4-6): 597-599.
4022. Maragos, J. E. (1991). Research demands of the coastal marine environment of Papua
New Guinea. In: M. Pearl, B. Beehler, A. Allison and M. Taylor, Eds., Conservation and
environment in Papua New Guinea: establishing research priorities. Proceedings of
a symposium held June 3, 1991, Honolulu, Hawaii. New York/ Washington, D.C., The
Government of Papua New Guinea, through the Embassy, Washington D.C. and Wildlife
Conservation International, pp. 11-25.
4023. Marcille, J.; Bour, W., 1981: La peche des thons a la senne et a la canne dans l’Ocean
Pacifique tropical: situation actuelle et perspectives de developpement, ORSTOM: Office
de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer, Paris, France, 1981
4024. Marck, J.C. 1986: Micronesian dialects and the overnight voyage, JPS, vol. 95(1), 1986:
2009
253-258.
4025. Margaret Washington, 1998: A peculiar people: slave religion and community-culture
among the Gullahs Creel, New York: New York University Press.
4026. Margarido, Alfredo, 1994: “Pour une histoire des géopolitiques culturelles des îles du Cap-
Vert”, in Lusotopie, pp. 103-112.
4027. Margolin, Jean-Claude, 1989: Sur l’insularité d’Utopia: entre l’érudition et la rêverie, Angers.
4028. Margolis, Susanna, 1988: Adventuring in the Pacific: the Sierra Club travel guide to the
Islands of Polynesia, Melanesia, and Micronesia, San Francisco: Sierra Club Books.
4029. Mari, S., 1997: “Coûts et bénéfices de l’insularité du point de vue économique, le cas de
Minorque” in Sanguin, A.-L. (dir.), Vivre dans une île. Une géopolitique des Insularités,
Paris, L’Harmattan, Collection “Géographie et Cultures”, p. 211-219
4030. Mariano, Gabrel, 1959: Inquietação e serenidade: aspecto da insularidade na poesia de
Cabo-Verde, In: Estudos Ultramarinos, nº 3, p. 55-79.
4031. Marimon i Riutort, Antoni, 1997: La crisi de 1898 a les Illes Balears: repercussions
polítiques i ideològiques de les Guerres de Cuba i de les Filipines, pròleg de Sebastià
Serra Busquets, Palma de Mallorca, El Tall.
4032. Marimoutou, Jean-Claude; Racault, Jean-Michel, textes réunis par. 1995: L’insularité
thématique et représentations: actes du Colloque international de Saint-Denis de la
Réunion, avril 1992: Colloque international de Saint-Denis de La Réunion (1992) Paris:
L’Harmattan.
4033. Maríñez, Pablo A., 2007: El Gran Caribe ante los cambios internacionales y la política
exterior dominicana, Santo Domingo: FUNGLODE, Centro de Documentación & Gestión
del Conocimiento.
4034. Mariño Gomes, Primitivo, 1997: “L’Espagne et l’Orient au début du XVIème siècle. Un
autre droit que dans l’Amérique”, in Mare Liberum, nº 13, Junho, pp. 83–93.
4035. Marinos, P., 1983: Small islands tourism: the case of Zakynthos, Greece, Tourism
4036. Marjavaara, Roger, 2007: Route to Destruction? Second Home Tourism in Small Island
Communities, Island Studies Journal, Vol. 2, No. 1 pp. 27-46.
4037. Mark, Joan T., 1999: Margaret Mead: coming of age in America, New York: Oxford University
Press.
4038. Marksbury, R.A., 1982: Legislating Social Order: an example from the yap Islands, Oceania,
1982, no 1, p. p. 19-28
4039. Markusen, A., 2002: “Two frontiers for regional science: regional policy and interdisplinary
reach”, Papers in regional science, n°81, p. 279-290
4040. Marlay, R., 1993: Government and Politics in Philippines: a country study (pp. 189-240),
R.E. Dolan (ed.). Washington DC: GPO.
4041. Marquer, Armel, 1994: Monseigneur David Le Cadre: 1875-1952, évèque de Démétriade,
vicaire apostolique des Iles Marquises: notice biographique [Questenbert]: A. Marquer,
1994.
4042. Marques Guedes, Armando, 2001: “Thinking East Timor, Indonesia and Southeast Asia”,
in Lusotopie, pp. 315-325.
4043. Marques Silva, Lurdes, 2000: “Descolonização, nacionalismo e separatismo no Sudeste
Asiático. Os casos da Indonésia e Timor Leste”, in Lusotopie, pp.359-376.
2009
CEHA 223
4044. Marr, L. J.; Cox, J. S., 1987: Guernsey bailiwick harbours and landing-places, c.2000 BC
to 1987, Guernsey.
4045. Marr, L. James, 1984: Guernsey people, with an introduction by Le Seigneur de Sausmarez
and a supplement on early Bailiwick names by S.K. Kellett-Smith; illustrations arranged
by Carel Toms, Chichester, Sussex: Phillimore.
4046. Marr, L. James, 1987: Guernsey Bailiwick harbours and landing-places, c. 2000 B.C. to
1987, Guernsey: Toucan.
4047. Marras, Margherita, 1998: L’insularité dans la littérature narrative sarde du XXe siècle,
Toulouse: Éd. universitaires du Sud.
4048. Marras, Margherita, 2005: L’insularité entre imaginaire et réalité chez les romanciers sardes
et siciliens contemporains, Mustapha Trabelsi (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand.
4049. Marschall, Wolfgang edited by. 1994: Texts from the islands: oral and written traditions
of Indonesia and the Malay world: proceedings of the 7th European Colloquium on
Indonesian and Malay Studies, Berne, June 1989, European Colloquium on Indonesian
and Malay Studies (7th: 1989: Bern, Switzerland), Berne: University of Berne, Institute of
Ethnology.
4050. Marsella, Anthony J., Austin, Ayda Aukahi, Grant. Bruce A., 2005: Social change and
psychosocial adaptation in the Pacific Islands, New York: Springer.
4051. Marshall Sahlins, M., (sd): Poor man, rich man, big-man, chief, Political types
4052. Marshall, Bernard, 1982: “Religion as an Agent of Social Control and Social Stability on
the Slave Plantations in the British Windward Islands”, in Journal of Ethnic Studies, 10:1,
61-82.
4053. Marshall, Bernard, 1982: “Slave Resistance and White Reaction in the British Windward
Islands 1763-1833”, in Caribbean Quarterly, 28:3, 33-46.
4054. Marshall, Jenny White; Rourke, Grellan D., 2000: High Island: an Irish monastery in the
Atlantic. Dublin: Town House & Country House.
4055. Marshall, K.G., 1993: The Economy in Philippines: a country study, W.H. Frederick and
R.L. Worden (eds.). Washington DC: GPO, pp. 137-206.
4056. Marshall, S. L. A., 2001: Island victory: the battle of Kwajalein Atoll, Lincoln, University of
Nebraska Press.
4057. Marshall, W. K., 1980: Metayage in the sugar industry of the British Windward Islands,
1838-1865: Social and economic problems in the Windward Islands, 1838-1865[Mona,
Jamaica]: University of the West Indies, Dept. of History.
4058. Marshall, W. K., 1985: Apprenticeship and labour relations in four Windward Islands, In
Abolition and its aftermath: the historical context, 1790-1916, ed. Richardson, D. (1985),
203-24.
4059. Marshall, Woodville K., 1989: “St Lucia in the Economic History of the Windward Islands:
The 19th Century Experience”, in Caribbean Quarterly, 35:3, 25-33.
4060. Marshall, Woodville K., 1995: Provision ground and plantation labour in four Windward
Islands: competition for resources during slavery, In Berlin, Ira; Morgan, Philip D. (ed.),
The slaves’ economy: independent production by slaves in the Americas, London &
Portland (OR): Cass, 48-67.
4061. Marshall, Y., 1985: Who made the Lapita pots? a case study in gender, JPS, vol. 94, 205-
233.
2009
4062. Marston, Geoffrey, 1986: “Abandonment of Territorial Claims: the Cases of Bouvet and
Spratly Islands”, in British Year Book of International Law, 57, Publisher: Oxford University
Press. 337-56.
4063. Marston, Geoffrey, 1998: The British acquisition of the Nicobar Islands, 1869: a possible
example of abandonment of territorial sovereignty, British Year Book of International Law,
69, 245-65.
4064. Martens, Conrad, 1994: Journal of a voyage from England to Australia 1833-35: via South
America and the Pacific Islands aboard HMS Hyacinth, Indus, HMS Beagle, Peruvian
and Black Warrior, transcript by Michael Organ, Sydney: State Library of NSW Press.
4065. Martín Martín, Víctor, 1991: Agua y agricultura en Canarias: el sur de Tenerife, Las Palmas
[de Gran Canaria]: Benchomo.
4066. Martin, A. March, 1999: Scotland in Europe Scotland, European Commission
Representation. United Kingdom.
4067. Martin, A., 1989: “Dominica”, in Islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean. A regional study,
Meditz, S., et M., Hanratty, Federal Research Division, Washington, Library of Congress,
p. 286-287.
4068. Martín, Carmelo, 1991: Canarias, siete claves políticas, prólogo de Juan Cruz Ruiz, [Santa
Cruz de Tenerife: Ediciones IDEA]
4069. Martin, Denis-Constant, 1996: “Popular Culture, Identity and Politics in the Context of the
Trinidad Carnival: ‘I is another,1 All of We is One”, in Studies in History, Aug; vol. 12: pp.
153 - 170.
4070. Martin, H, et alia, Bibliographies of Taiwan Studies, Ruhr-Universität Bochum. Disponível
online em url: http://www.ruhr-uni-bochum.de/slc/taiwan/biblio1.html. Consulta em 11 de
Julho de 2009.
4071. Martin, Henry Byam, Sir, 1981: The Polynesian journal of Captain Henry Byam Martin,
R.N.: in command of H.M.S. Grampus-50 guns at Hawaii and on station in Tahiti and the
Society Islands, August 1846 to August 1847, illustrated with water colours ... from the
originals by Captain Martin, Canberra: Australian National University Press.
4072. Martin, Jean Comores, 1983: Quatre iles entre pirates et planteurs, Paris: L’Harmattan,
1983 2 vols.
4073. Martin, Jean, 1983: Comores, quatre îles entre pirates et planteurs, Paris: L’Harmattan.
4074. Martin, John Angus, 2007: A–Z of Grenada Heritage, Macmillan Caribbean.
4075. Martin, M.; Yacou, A. (dir.)., 1991: Études Caribéennes. Société et Politique, Toulouse,
Presses de l’Institut d’Etudes Politiques de Toulouse.
4076. Martin, Martin(1655-1719), 1999: A description of the Western Islands of Scotland, ca.
1695; and, A late voyage to St. Kilda, Edinburgh, Birlinn.
4077. Martin, Ron. Regional Development in the 1990’s The British Isles in Transition, Regional
Policy and Development Series 4, Jessica Kinsley Publishers. London and Philadelphia,
pp. 108-116.
4078. Martin, Tony, 2003: “Eric Williams and the Anglo-American Caribbean Commission:
Trinidad’s Future Nationalist Leader as Aspiring Imperial Bureaucrat, 1942-1944”, Journal
of African American History, 88, no.3 (Summer): 274-290.
4079. Martinelli, Maria Clara, 2000: Nuovi studi di archeologia eoliana / a cura di Umberto Spigo,
Palermo: Regione siciliana, Assessorato dei beni culturali, ambientali e della pubblica
istruzione.
2009
CEHA 225
4080. Martinetti, Joseph, 1986: La Corse: Etude De Geographie Politique, Sous La Direction De
Andre Dauphine, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de 3e cycle: Géographie:
Nice.
4081. Martinetti, J., 1987: Réalités et mythifications géographiques d’un espace marginal en
mutation: la Corse. Etude de géopolitique, ANRT, Lille.
4082. Martinetti, Joseph, 1989: Insularité et marginalité en Méditerranée occidentale: l’exemple
corse, Ajaccio: Le Signet.
4083. Martínez Cruzado, Juan C., 2002: The Use of Mitochondrial DNA to Discover Pre-
Columbian Migrations to the Caribbean: Results for Puerto Rico and Expectations for
the Dominican Republic. KACIKE: The Journal of Caribbean Amerindian History and
Anthropology. Disponível online url: http://www.kacike.org/MartinezEnglish.pdf. Consulta
em 29 de Julho de 2009.
4084. Martínez Ferrando, Jesús Ernesto, 1993: La tragica storia dei re di Maiorca, introduzione,
traduzione, note ed appendici a cura di Michele De Cesare, Cagliari: Consiglio nazionale
delle ricerche, Istituto sui rapporti italo-Iberici.
4085. Martínez Gálvez, Inmaculada; Rodríguez, Valentín Medina, 1992: Nuevas aportaciones al
estudio de la emigración clandestina de las Islas Canarias a América Latina: 1948-1955,
Las Palmas: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
4086. Martínez Hernández, Marcos, 2002: Las Islas Canarias en la antigüedad clásica: mito,
historia e imaginario, [La Laguna]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
4087. Martinez, Marcos, 1994: Islas Escatológicas em Plutarco, in García Valdés, M.(ed.),
Estudios sobre Plutarco: Ideas Religiosas, Madrid, pp.81-107.
4088. Martinez, Marcos, 1994: Ls Islas Poéticas en la Literatura Grecolatina antigua y Medieval,
in Aguilar, R. m., López Slvá, M., Alfageme, I.R., (editores), Homenaje a Luis Gil, Madrid,
pp.431-449.
4089. Martinez, Marcos, 1996: Las Islas Canarias dela Antiguidad al Renascimiento. Nuevos
Aspectos, Santa Cruz de Tenerife, CPpC.
4090. Martinez, Marcos, 1998: El mito de la Isla Perdida y su Tradición en la Historia, Cartografia,
Literatura y Arte, in Revista de Filología de la universidad de La Laguna, nº.16, pp.143-
144.
4091. Martinez, Paul François; Giblin, Béatrice (préf.); Lacoste, Yves (préf.), 2001: Géopolitique
de la Réunion. Tome I: Approches géohistoriques, Saint-André (Ile de la Réunion):
OCEAN Editions.
4092. Martins, Ana Claudia Aymoré, 2007: Morus, Moreau, Morel: a ilha como espaço da utopia,
Brasília: Editora UnB.
4093. Martouzet, Denis, 2001: Fort-de-France.Ville fragile?, Paris: Anthropos.
4094. Marujo, Manuela, 2003: Carnival and Easter Dances: From the Islands to the New World,
Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 11, No. 2, pp. 143-152.
4095. Marum, A., 1984: Report on advisory visit to Bali/Vitu Islands for period 30 April - 4 May
1984, Unpublished Report, Rural Development Division, Kimbe, West New Britain
Province.
4096. Marwick, Robert C., 1999: Rousay roots: family histories in Rousay, Egilsay, and Wyre,
Orkney Islands, Kilwinning, Ayrshire, Scotland, R. Marwick.
4097. Marx, M.; Peters-Berries, C., 1998: “SADC: les difficultés de l’intégration régionale”,
Développement et coopération, n°2, p. 16-23.
2009
4098. Masao, Fidelis Taliwawa, 1988: The East African coast and the Comoro Islands, General
history of Africa, edited by M. El Fasi, Berkeley: University of California Press, Volume 3,
pp. 586-615.
4099. Maschio, T., 1998: The narrative and counter-narrative of the gift: emotional dimensions
of ceremonial exchange in southwestern New Britian, The Journal of the Royal
Anthropological Institute (incorporating Man): 4(1):83-100.
4100. Maschio, T., 1989: Metaphor, Ritual and Expression: The Person in Rauto Discourse and
Ritual Practice, Ph.D. dissertation, McMaster University, Hamilton, Ontario, Canada.
4101. Maschio, T., 1992: To remember the faces of the dead: mourning and the full sadness of
memory in southwestern New Britain, Ethos, 20(4): 387-420.
4102. Maschio, T., 1994: To Remember the Faces of the Dead: The Plenitude of Memory in
Southwestern New Britain, Madison, WI: The University of Wisconsin Press.
4103. Maschio, T., 1995: Mythic images and objects of myth in Rauto female puberty ritual, in
Gender Rituals: Female Initiation in Melanesia, Eds Nancy Lutkehaus and Paul Roscoe:
Routledge Press, pp. 131-161.
4104. Maschio, T., 1995a: Narrative, memory, and the self in southwestern New Britain,
Anthropology and Humanism, 20(2):98-116.
4105. Maschio, Thomas, 1995b: “Mythic images and objects of myth in Rauto female puberty
ritual”, in Gender Rituals: Female Initiation in Melanesia, Eds Nancy Lutkehaus and Paul
Roscoe: Routledge Press, pp. 131-161.
4106. Maschio, T., 1996: “Book Review: To sing with pigs is human: The concept of person in
Papua New Guinea - Goodale, JC”, in Journal Of the Royal Anthropological Institute,
2(4): 756-757.
4107. Maschio, Thomas, 1998: “The narrative and counter-narrative of the gift: emotional
dimensions of ceremonial exchange in southwestern New Britian”, in The Journal of the
Royal Anthropological Institute (incorporating Man): 4(1):83-100.
4108. Mason, B.; Dixon, N., 2002: “Pago poised to blow its top”, in New Scientist, 176.
4109. Mason, Keith, 1993: The world an absentee planter and his slaves made: Sir William
Stapleton and his Nevis sugar estate, 1722-1740’, Bulletin of the John Rylands University
Library of Manchester, 75:1, 103-31.
4110. Mason, L., 1989: A Marshallese nation emerges from the political fragmentation of American
Micronesia, PS, 13, 1, 1-46.
4111. Massa, Françoise, Ed., 1999: Les Iles Atlantiques: Réalités et imaginaire. Actes du coloque,
Rennes: Université Haute Bretagne Rennes 2, Equipe de Recherches interdisciplinaires
en Langues romanes(ERILAR), [Rennes, France]: Université Rennes 2.
4112. Massa, Jean-Michel, 1997: “Heurs et malheurs de Gilberto Freyre en Guinée portugaise
et au Cap-Vert”, in Lusotopie, pp. 227-236.
4113. Massey, Eithne, 2004: Legendary Ireland: a journey through Celtic places and myths,
Madison : University of Wisconsin Press.
4114. Massieu, Antonio de Béthencourt, 2002: Felipe V y el atlántico: III centenario del
advenimiento de los Borbones: XIV Coloquio de Historia Canario-Americana, 2000 /
coordinación de Coloquio de Historia Canario-Americana (14th: 2000: Las Palmas,
Canary Islands), Las Palmas: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
4115. Masson, Emile, 1984: Utopie des îles bienheureuses dans le Pacifique en l’an 1980
[précédé d’un discours inédit de 1917], Quimper & Le Guilvinec.
2009
CEHA 227
4116. Massot i Muntaner, Josep, 1990: Els escriptors i la Guerra Civil a les Illes Balears,
Barcelona: Publicacions de l’Abadia de Montserrat, 1990.
4117. Massot i Muntaner, Josep, 1995: El cònsol Alan Hillgarth i les Illes Balears (1936-1939),
Barcelona: Publicacions de l’Abadia de Montserrat.
4118. Massot i Muntaner, Josep, 2002: Aspectes de la guerra civil a les Illes Balears, Barcelona,
Publicacions de l’Abadia de Montserrat.
4119. Mata Olmo, Rafael, 2006: Desarrollo sostenibles, insularidad y gobierno del territorio: la
experiencia del PTI de Menoría, Boletín de la Asociación de Geógrafos Españoles, Nº.
41.
4120. Mata, Inocência, 1991: Insularidade e literatura, o mar e a originalidade da literatura
santomense, RILP - Revista Internacional de Língua Portuguesa, nº 4, pp.119-124.
4121. Mata, Inocência, 1993, Emergência e existência de uma literatura. O caso santomense,
Lisboa, ALAC.
4122. Mata, Inocência, 1998: Diálogo com as ilhas: sobre cultura e literatura de São Tome e
Príncipe, Lisboa: Edições Colibri.
4123. Mata, Inocência, 2004, A suave pátria. Reflexões politico-culturais sobre a sociedade são-
tomense, Lisboa, Edições Colibri.
4124. Mather, Alexander S., R. J. Ardern, 1981: An annotated bibliography of rural land use in the
highlands and islands of Scotland, [Aberdeen, Grampian]: Dept. of Geography, University
of Aberdeen, 1981.
4125. Mathieu-Job, Martine, 2005: L’imaginaire de l’île dans l’œuvre romanesque de Loys Masson,
Mustapha Trabelsi (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand.
4126. Mathur, L. P., 1985: Kala pani: history of Andaman & Nicobar Islands, with a study of India’s
freedom struggle, Delhi, India: Eastern Book Corp..
4127. Matibag, Eugenio, 2003: Haitian-Dominican Counterpoint: Insularity and Difference,
Palgrave Macmillan.
4128. Matos Rodríguez, FéLix V., 1999: “Spatial and Demographic Change in Nine Teenthcentury
San Juan, Puerto Rico, 1800-1868”, in Journal of Urban History, May; vol. 25: pp. 477 –
513.
4129. Matos, Artur Teodoro de, 1980:Transportes e comunicações em Portugal, Açores e
Madeira, 1750-1850, Universidade dos Açores.
4130. Matos, Artur Teodoro de, 1993: “Os donos do poder e a economia de S. Tomé e Príncipe
no inicio de seiscentos”, in Mare Liberum, nº 6, Dezembro, pp. 179–187.
4131. Matos, Artur Teodoro de, 2001: “Um importante relato sobre a situação política e social da
ilha de Timor em finais do século XVII”, in Mare Liberum, nº 21–22, Janeiro–Dezembro,
pp. 409–436.
4132. Matos, Artur Teodoro de; Pinheiro, Luís da Cunha, 2001: «Os Moradores do Conselho
da Praia da Ilha Terceira em Meados do Século XVII: Uma Estimativa dos Seus
Rendimentos», pp. 371-389, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso
e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de 1999, vol.I, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/
4133. MATOS, Artur Teodoro de, Avelino de Freitas de Meneses e José Guilherme Reis Leite
(Dir.), 2008: História dos Açores, dos descobrimentos ao século XX, Instituto Açoriano
de Cultura, 2 vols.
2009
4134. Matos, Manuel Cadafaz de, 1995: “Dos Primórdios da Imprensa Cristã nas Filipinas e
a sua Relação com a Cultura Portuguesa no Oriente (1593-1640). Para uma História
da Leitura dos Portugueses nas Molucas entre 1523 e 1530”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10,
Dezembro, pp. 463–485.
4135. Matos, Rafael, 1996: Les iles Canaries: relais pour l’invention et la conquete du Nouveau
Monde, Geographie et Cultures, no 18, p. p. 75-91.
4136. Matsumoto, Masaaki,1986: Ryūkyūko ni okeru kokka no keisei, Tōkyō: Kōsei Shorin,
Shōwa 61.
4137. Matteaccioli, A., 1981: Diversité régionale et cohérence nationale: l’exemple des régions
Méditerranéennes, Economica, Paris.
4138. Mattei Burgarella, M.N., 1995: L’économie insulaire, thèse d’état, Paris.
4139. Matthews, Elizabeth, edited by. 1995: Fishing for answers: women and fisheries in the
Pacific islands, Suva, Fili: Women and Fisheries Network.
4140. Matthews, Gelien, 2006: Caribbean slave revolts and the British abolitionist movement,
Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.
4141. Matthews, P. J. and C. Gosden, 1997: Plant Remains from Waterlogged Sites in the Arawe
Islands, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea: Implications for the History of
Plant Use and Domestication, Economic botany, 51(2): 121.
4142. Matthías Viðar Sæmundsson, 1982: Mynd nútímamannsins: um tilvistarleg viđhorf í sögum
Gunnars Gunnarssonar, Reykjavík: Bókaútgáfa Menningarsjóđs.
4143. Maude, H. E., 1968: Of islands and men: studies in Pacific History, Melbourne.
4144. Maude, H. E., 1981: Slavers in Paradise. The Peruvian Labour Trade in Polynesia, 1862-
1864, Australian National University Press, Canberra.
4145. Maul, George A. (ed.), 1996: Small islands: marine science and sustainable development,
Washington, DC: American Geophysical Union.
4146. Maurer, Bill, 1997: Recharting the Caribbean: land, law, and citizenship in the British Virgin
Islands, Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press.
4147. Maurer, Bill, 2001: Islands in the Net: Rewiring Technological and Financial Circuits in the
“Offshore” Caribbean, Comparative Studies in Society and History, Vol. 43, No. 3 (Jul.),
pp. 467-501
4148. Maurice, éd. par Pierre [et] Mathias Chauchat, 2002: Régime politique, développement
et insularité dans l’hémisphère sud /; sous l’égide de l’Observatoire des relations
internationales dans l’hémisphère sud, ORIHS -Observatoire des relations internationales
dans l’hémisphère sud (Saint-Denis). Éditeur scientifique, Université Pierre Mendès-
France.
4149. Mauro, F., 1986: “Sur la complémentarité des sociétés insulaires dans l’Atlantique” I
Colóquio Internacional de História da Madeira, Funchal, T. II, 1363-1366.
4150. Mäusbacher, Roland, 1991: Die jungquartäre Relief- und Klimageschichte im Bereich
der Fildeshalbinsel Süd-Shetland Inseln, Antarktis, Heidelberg: Im Selbstverlag des
Geographischen Instituts der Universität Heidelberg.
4151. Mauzy, Diane K. & R. S. Milne, 2002: Singapore Politics: Under the People’s Action Party,
Routledge.
4152. Maximin, Colette, 2008: Dynamiques interculturelles dans l’aire caribéenne, Paris: Karthala.
4153. May, P. and M. Tuckson, 1982: The Traditional Pottery of Papua New Guinea, Sydney, Bay
2009
CEHA 229
Books.
4154. May, R.J. (ed.), 1986: Between two nations: the Indonesia-Papua New Guinea border and
WestPapua nationalism, Canberra.
4155. May, R.J., & M. Spriggs (eds.), 1990: The Bougainville crisis, Canberra.
4156. May, Ron J., 1997 : Des promesses à la crise: économie politique de la Papousie-Nouvelle
Guinée, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut d’Etude du
Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, Revue Tiers Monde, vol. 38,
no 149, pp. 139-156.
4157. Mayne, Richard, 1981: The Battle of Jersey, London: Phillimore.
4158. Mayo, L.W., 1988: US administration and prospects for economic self-sufficiency; a
comparison of Guam and select areas of Micronesia, PS, 11, 3, 53-76, 1988
4159. Mayol Serra, Joan. 2005: Autonomia i medi ambient a les Balears (1983-2003), Palma:
Edicions Documenta Balear.
4160. Mayr, E. and J. Diamond, 2001: The Birds of Northern Melanesia: Speciation, Ecology, and
Biogeography, New York, Oxford University Press.
4161. Mayr, E.; Diamond, J. 2001: The Birds of Northern Melanesia: Speciation, Ecology, and
Biogeography, New York, Oxford University Press.
4162. Mazzega D., Musitelli J., 1980: L’organisation régionale en Italie, La documentation
française, Paris.
4163. Mazzetti, Ernesto, 1999: Capri, Ischia e Procida: dal mito alla metropoli, [Naples], Electa
Napoli.
4164. Mc Dougall, D., 1997: “Indian ocean regionalism: perspectives from Mauritius, the
Seychelles and Reunion”, Round Table, n° 341, p. 53-66.
4165. McAlister, Elizabeth, 2002: Rara! Vodou, Power, and Performance in Haiti and its Diaspora,
4166. McAteer, William, 1991: Rivals in Eden: a history of the French settlement and British
conquest of the Seychelles Islands, 1742-1818, Sussex, England: Book Guild.
4167. McBride, J. David, 2006: ‘Contraband Traders, Lawless Vagabonds, and the British
Settlement and Occupation of Roatan, Bay Islands, Honduras’, In Skowronek, Russell K.;
Ewen, Charles Robin (ed.), X marks the spot: the archaeology of piracy (New perspectives
on maritime history and nautical archaeology), Gainsville: University Press of Florida, 44-
63.
4168. McBryde, I., 1989: To establish a commerce of this sort; Cross-cultural exchange at the
Port Jackson settlement in Hardy, J. and Frost, A. (Eds), Studies from Terra Australis to
Australia, Canberra, Australian Academy of the Humanities.
4169. McCall, G., 1994: ‘Nissology: A Proposal for Consideration’, Journal of the Pacific Society,
Vol. 17, Nos. 2-3, pp. 1-8.
4170. McCall, G., 1994a: “Nissology: the study of islands”, Journal of the Pacific society, n°2-3,
p. 1-14.
4171. McCall, G., 1996: “Clearing confusion in a disembedded world: the case for nissology”,
Geographische Zeitschrift, nº2, p. 74-85.
4172. McCall, G., 1996a: ‘Nissology; A Debate and Discourse from Below’. Disponível online em
URL: www.southpacific.arts.unsw.edu.au/resourcenissology.htm. Consulta em 11 de julho
de 2009.
2009
4173. McCall, Grant, 2001: The Fateful Hoaxing of Margaret Mead: A Historical Analysis of her
Samoan Research book review”, Australian Journal of Anthropology, April.
4174. McCallan, E. A., 1986: Life on old St. David’s, Bermuda, Hamilton, Bermuda, Bermuda
Historical Society.
4175. McCammon, A. L. T., 1984: Currencies of the Anglo-Norman isles, London: Spink.
4176. McCartney, Donald M., 2004: Bahamian Culture And Factors Which Impact Upon It.
Pittsburgh, PA: Dorrance Publishing.
4177. McClatchey, W. C., 1993: Studies on the Ethnobotany of the Island of Rotuma, Masters
Thesis, Brigham Young University, Provo, Utah.
4178. McColl, G. D., 1984: International trade in the Pacific Basin, Kensington, Australia : Centre
for Applied Economic Research, University of New South Wales.
4179. McCormack, John, 2002: Manors and seigneurial pretensions in the Channel Islands,
In Meirion-Jones, Gwyn; Impey, Edward; Jones, Michael C. E. (ed.), The seigneurial
residence in Western Europe AD c 800-1600 (BAR, International ser., 1088), Oxford:
Archaeopress, 113-29.
4180. McCormick, Larry R....[et. al.], 1984: Living with Long Island’s south shore, Durham, N.C.:
Duke University Press, c1984.
4181. McCosker, A., 1998: Masked Eden: a history of the Australians in New Guinea, Maleny,
Qld., Matala Press.
4182. McCune, Shannon Boyd-Bailey, 1984: Islands in conflict in East Asian waters, Hong Kong:
Asian Research Service, c1984.
4183. McDaniel, C. N. and Gowdy, J. M., 2000: Paradise for Sale, University of California Press
4184. McDermid, Jane, 2003: “Gender and geography: the schooling of poor girls in the highlands
and islands of nineteenth-century Scotland”, in History of Education Review, 32:2 (2003),
30-45.
4185. McDiarmid, Bunny, Elisabeth Mealey, 1997: Pacific paradise, nuclear nightmare: a critique
of the proposal to use the Marshall Islands as a nuclear waste dump, Greenpeace, [edited
by [Washington D.C.: Greenpeace USA].
4186. McDonald, Michelle Craig, 2005: ‘The Chance of the Moment: Coffee and the New West
Indies Commodities Trade’, William and Mary Quarterly, 62:3 (2005), 441-72.
4187. McDougall, Walter A., 1993: Let the Sea Make a Noise: A History of the North Pacific from
Magellan to MacArthur, Basic Books, New York.
4188. McDowell, N., 1988: Reproductive decision making and the value of children in rural Papua
New Guinea, IASER Monograph No. 27, Port Moresby, Institute of Applied Social and
Economic Research.
4189. McElroy, C. J., 2001: Over the Lip of the World: Among the Storytellers of Madagascar,
University of Washington Press.
4190. McElroy, J.L. and de Albuquerque, K., 1986: The tourism demonstration effect in the
Caribbean, Journal of Travel Research, 25(2), pp.31-34.
4191. McElroy, Jerome L., 2003: Tourism Development in Small Islands across the World Tourism
Development in Small Islands across the World, Geografiska Annaler, Series B, Human
Geography.
4192. McFeely, William S., 1994: Sapelo’s people: a long walk into freedom, New York: W.W.
Norton & Co..
2009
CEHA 231
4193. McGarrity, Maria, 2008: Washed by the Gulf Stream: the historic and geographic relation
of Irish and Caribbean literature, Newark: University of Delaware Press; Cranbury, NJ:
Associated University Presses.
4194. McGavin, P. A., 1993: Economic security in Melanesia: key issues for managing contract
stability and mineral resources development in Papua New Guinea, Solomon Islands,
and Vanuatu (Paul A.),Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands Development Program, East-
West Center: Distributed by University of Hawaii Press.
4195. McGavin, P. A., 1993: Industrialization in Papua New Guinea: unrealized potential?,
Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands Development Program, East-West Center: Distributed
by University of Hawaii Press, Order Dept..
4196. McGhee, Robert, 1971: An Archaeological Survey of Western Victoria Island, N.W.T.,
Canada, Ottawa, Ont: National Museums of Canada.
4197. McGlone, M.S., [et al.], 1997: “Late-glacial and Holocene vegetation and environment of
Campbell Island, far southern New Zealand”, in The Holocene, vol. 7: pp. 1 - 12.
4198. McGlone, Matt S.; Wilmshurst, Janet M.; Wiser, Susan K., 2000: “Lateglacial and Holocene
vegetation and climatic change on Auckland Island, Subantarctic New Zealand”, in The
Holocene, vol. 10: pp. 719 - 728.
4199. McGlynn, Frank, 1980: Marginality and flux: an Afro-Caribbean community through two
centuries, Thesis (Ph. D.)--University of Pittsburgh.
4200. McGowan, Joe, 1998: Inishmurray: gale, stone, and fire: portrait of a fabled island,
Mullaghmore, Co. Sligo, Aeolus.
4201. McGowan, Joseph, 2004: Inishmurray: island voices, Mullaghmore, Co. Sligo: Aeolus.
4202. McGowen, Tom, 1984: Midway and Guadalcanal, New York: F. Watts.
4203. Mcgrath, T.B., 1984: Change and persistence among the people of Guam, journal de la
societe des oceanistes, no 79, pp. 257-264
4204. Mcgrath, T.B., 1987: Where church and state meet: responses to civil and religious power
in colonial Micronesia, journal de la societe des oceanistes, no 85, p. p. 235-242.
4205. McGregor, Andrew, 1988: The Fiji fresh ginger industry: a case study in non-traditional
export development, Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands Development Program, East-West
Center.
4206. McGregor, Andrew, 1992: Private sector development: policies and programs for the
Pacific Islands, Honolulu, Hawaii: Published for the East-West Center by University of
Hawaii Press.
4207. McGregor, Andrew, Charles Eaton, Michael Manning, 1992: Commercial management
companies in the agricultural development of the Pacific Islands, Honolulu, Hawaii:
Pacific Islands Development Program, East-West Center.
4208. Mcgregor, D., 1994: Ho’I Ho’I Ea Hawaii; restoring Hawaiian sovereignty, in vom Busch W,
et.al., eds, New politics in the South Pacific, IPS/USP, 31-54.
4209. McGregor, F.M., Duncan, David Barker,Sally Lloyd Evans, 1998: Resource sustainability
and Caribbean development, Kingston, Jamaica, The Press, University of the West Indies.
4210. McGrew, M., and C Brook, eds, 1998: Asia-Pacific in the new world order, Routledge.
4211. McHugh, Patricia, 2003: A reading guide to Island of the Blue Dolphins by Scott O’Dell,
New York, Scholastic.
4212. McInnes, D. (ed), 2000: People of Papua New Guinea, South Melbourne, Vic., Pearson
2009
Education.
4213. McKee, D., Tisdell, C., 1990: Developmental issues in small island economies, New York,
Praeger.
4214. McKinnon, Susan, 1991: From a shattered sun: hierarchy, gender, and alliance in the
Tanimbar Islands, Madison, Wis.: University of Wisconsin Press.
4215. McKnight, Tom L., 1995: Oceania: the geography of Australia, New Zealand, and the
Pacific Islands, Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
4216. McLean, Mervyn, 1991: The structure of Tikopia music, Auckland, N.Z.: Archive of Maori
and Pacific Music, Dept. of Anthropology, University of Auckland, 1991.
4217. McLean, Mervyn, 1995: An annotated bibliography of Oceanic music and dance, Warren,
Mich.: Harmonie Park Press.
4218. McLeod, A., 2000: Island: the Collected Stories, Toronto, McClelland & Stewart.
4219. McLoughlin, Roy, 1997: The sea was their fortune: a maritime history of the Channel
Islands, Bradford-on-Avon: Seaflower.
4220. McManners, Hugh, 2007: Forgotten voices of the Falklands, London: Ebury in association
with the Imperial War Museum.
4221. McNaughton, William Dick, 2003: Early congregational independency in the Highlands and
Islands and the North-East of Scotland, Tiree: Trustees of Ruaig Congregational Church.
4222. McNeil, Gordon, 1990: Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project Working
Paper B: Forestry Sector, Primary Industry Management Services, Tropical Rural
Development Group (ANU) CARE Australia.
4223. McNeil, Robert A. and Barbara G. Valk, eds., 1990: Latin American Studies: A Basic Guide
to Sources, 2nd ed., rev. and enl. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press.
4224. McNeillie, Andrew, 2001: An Aran Keening, Dublin: Lilliput Press.
4225. McPherson, Naomi, (also see Scaletta) 1985: Primogeniture and Primogenitor: Firstborn
Child and Mortuary Ceremonies among the Kabana (Bariai), West New Britain, Papua
New Guinea, Ph.D. Thesis, Supervisor: Prof. David Counts. McMaster Univsersity.
4226. McPherson, (Scaletta) Naomi, 1985a: “Death by sorcery: the social dynamics of dying in
Bariai, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea”, in Aging and Its Transformations: Moving
Towards Death in Pacific Societies, ASAO Monograph Series No. 10. D.A. Counts and
D.R. Counts (eds.) University Press of America. Washington. Pp. 223-247.
4227. McPherson, Naomi, 1991: A question of morality: sorcery and concepts of deviance among
the Kabana, West New Britain, Anthropologica, 33 (1-2): 127-143.
4228. McPherson, Naomi, 1992: Childbirth: A case history from West New Britain, Papua New
Guinea, Oceania, 57: 33 - 52.
4229. McPherson, Naomi, 1994: “Modern obstetrics in a rural setting: women and reproduction
in northwest New Britain” In Urban Anthropology and Studies of Cultural Systems and
World Economic Development, Special Issue: Women and Development in the Pacific. J.
Dickerson-Putnam (editor). 23(1): 39-72.
4230. McPherson, Naomi, 1994: “The legacy of Moro the snake-man in Bariai”, In The Children
of Kilibob: Creation, Cosmos, and Culture in Northeast New Guinea, eds. Ali Pomponio,
David Counts, and Thomas Harding. Special Issue of Pacific Studies 17(4):153-182.
4231. McPherson, Naomi, 1997: (reprint of 1985 article) “Death by sorcery: the social dynamics of
dying in Bariai, West New Britain, Papua New Guinea” In Magic, Witchcraft and Religion:
2009
CEHA 233
An Anthropological Study of the Supernatural, Fourth Edition, Arthur C. Lehman and J.E.
Meyers, eds. Mountainview, Ca: Mayfield Publishing Company.
4232. McPherson, Naomi, 1997: “Firstborn House (Vol. 1.X.10); Birth House (Vol. 1.X.14);
Kabana (Vol. 2.III.5)” In Encyclopedia of Vernacular Architecture of the World, (2 Vols.).
Paul Oliver, ed. Cambridge University Press: Cambridge, UK.
4233. McPherson, Naomi, 2001: ““Wanted Young Man, Must Like Adventure”: Ian McCallum
Mack, Patrol Officer”, Naomi McPherson, Ed. In Colonial New Guinea: Anthropological
Perspectives, ASAO Monograph 19, Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press, Pp 82-
111.
4234. McPherson, Naomi, 2001a: Wanted Young Man, Must Like Adventure, Ian McCallum
Mack, Patrol Officer. Pp 82-111, In Naomi McPherson, Ed. In Colonial New Guinea:
Anthropological Perspectives, ASAO Monograph 19. Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh
Press.
4235. . McPherson, Naomi (ed.), 2001: In Colonial New Guinea: Anthropological Perspectives,
ASAO Monograph 19. Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press.
4236. McPhetres, S.F., 1992: Challenges to democracy in the Commonwealth of the Northern
Marianas Islands, in R Crocombe et.all., eds, IPS/USP, 217-38, McPhetres. A., 1983:
Northern Marianas Islands; US commonwealth in R Teiwaki, et.al., eds Politics in
Micronesia, Institute of Pacific Studies/USP, 146-160, 1983.
4237. McQuarrie, P., 1994: Strategic atolls; Tuvalu and the Second World War, IPS/USP
4238. McQuarrie. Peter, 2007: Tokelau: People, atolls, and history, Peter McQuarrie Press
4239. McQueen, Bob, 2005: Island base: Ascension Island in the Falklands War, Bromley, Kent:
The author.
4240. McRobie, George, 1988: An Island Future: Towards Sustainability and Self-Reliance.
Institute of Islands Studies, Charlottetown Prince Edward Island.
4241. McWatt, Mark A. editor, 1985: West Indian literature and its social context: proceedings of
the Fourth Annual Conference on West Indian Literature, University of the West Indies,
Cave Hill, Mona, St. Augustine, College of the Virgin Islands, University of Guyana /
Conference on West Indian Literature (4th: 1984: University of the West Indies, Cave Hill
Campus) St. Michael, Barbados: Dept. of English, U.W.I., Cave Hill.
4242. McWilliams, Shirley M., 1982: “Rathlin Island”, in Family Links, 1:4, 23-25.
4243. Mead, M., 1928/2001: Coming of Age in Samoa: A Psychological Study of Primitive Youth
for Western Civilization, York, Harper Collins.
4244. Mead, M., 1934/2002: Kinship in the Admiralty Islands, London, Transaction Publishers.
4245. Mead, Margaret, 2001: Coming of age in Samoa: a psychological study of primitive youth
for western civilisation, New York: Perennial Classics.
4246. Mead, Margaret, 2001: Letters from the field, 1925-1975, [with an introduction by Jan
Morris], New York: Perennial, 2001.
4247. Mead, Margaret, 2002: Kinship in the Admiralty Islands, with a new introduction by Jeanne
Guillemin, New Brunswick, N.J. Transaction Publishers.
4248. Mediansky, edited by F.A., 1995: Strategic cooperation and competition in the Pacific
Islands, Sydney: Centre for South Pacific Studies, University of New South Wales;
[Pennsylvania]: Australia-New Zealand Studies Center, Pennsylvania State University.
4249. Medina López, Javier, 1995: El español de América y Canarias desde una perspectiva
2009
histórica, prólogo, Elena M. Rojas, Madrid: Verbum.

4250. Meditz, Sandra W., Dennis M. Hanratty, 1987, 1989: Caribbean Islands: islands of the
Commonwealth Caribbean: a regional study, Federal Research Division, Library of
Congress, Washington, D.C.: Federal Research Division.
4251. Mee, C.; Doole, Jennifer, 1993: Aegean antiquities on Merseyside: the collections of
Liverpool Museum and Liverpool University, Liverpool: National Museums and Galleries
on Merseyside.
4252. Meeks, Brian, Folke Lindahl, 2001: New Caribbean thought: a reader, Jamaica, University
of the West Indies Press.
4253. Méheux, Kirstie, 2007: Fiji Bibliographies & Indexes, Just Pacific. Disponível online em
url: http://www.justpacific.com/fiji/bibliographies/index.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de
2009.
4254. Mehr, Farhang, 1997: A colonial legacy: the dispute over the islands of Abu Musa, and the
Greater and Lesser Tunbs, Lanham, Md., University Press of America.
4255. Mein Smith, Philippa, 2005: A Concise History of New Zealand. Australia: Cambridge
University Press.
4256. Meintel, D.; Cohen, R. (ed.), 1983: African Islands and enclaves, In Cape Verde: Survival
Without Self-Sufficiency; Beverly Hills; Londres; New Delhi: SAGE Publications, 1983. p.
145-164.
4257. Meistersheim A., 1988: «Insularité, insularisme, iléité, quelques concepts opératoires».
Cahiers de l’institut de développement des îles méditerranéennes, n°.1, p. 96-120.
4258. Meistersheim, Anne (dir.), 1999: L’île laboratoire, Ajaccio: Editions Alain Piazzola.
4259. Meistersheim, Anne, 1989: Images d’ileité, in Les îles européennes Politiques Insulaires,
Corse, IDM.
4260. Meistersheim, Anne, 2001: Territoire et insularité. Le cas de la Corse, Paris, 1991, puis
Figures de l’île, Ajaccio.
4261. Meistersheim. Anne, 2001a: Figures de l’île. Ajaccio, DCL.
4262. Meistersheim, Anne, 2006: Le malentendu. Entre imaginaire insulaire et imaginaire
continental, in Ethnologie française, 3 (Vol. 36), p. 503-508.
4263. Melas, Emmanouēl M., 1985: The islands of Karpathos, Saros and Kasos in the Neolithic
and Bronze Age, Göteborg, P. Åströms förlag.
4264. Meleisea, M., 1987: Lagaga; a short history of Western Samoa, IPS/USP.
4265. Meleisea, M., 1987a: The making of modern Samoa: traditional authority & colonial
administrationin the modern history of Western Samoa, Suva.
4266. Meleisea, M., and Schoeffel, P., 1996: Discovering outsiders, in Denoon D, ed, 1996, The
Cambridge history of the Pacific Islanders, CUP, Melbourne, pp.119-51.
4267. Meleisea, Penelope Schoeffel, 1996a: Sociocultural issues and economic development
in the Pacific Islands, [Manila, Philippines]: Office of Pacific Operations and Social
Development Division, Asian Development Bank.
4268. Melià Ques, Josep, 1999: Nacionalisme i constitució: una perspectiva balear, pròleg de
Joan Oliver Araujo, Mallorca: Editorial Moll.
4269. Meliá, Juan Tous; Piqué, Alfredo Herrera, textos. 1995: Las Palmas de Gran Canaria a
través de la cartografía, 1588-1899, [Las Palmas]: Museo Militar Regional de Canarias:
2009
CEHA 235
Casa de Colón: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.

4270. Mellén Blanco, Francisco. 1986. Manuscritos y documentos españoles para la historia de
la isla de Pascua. Madrid: CEHOPU.
4271. Meller, N., 1980: On matters constitutional in Micronesia, Journal of Pacific History, 15,
83-92.
4272. Meller, N., 1983: Hawaii; 50th state, in Afeaki E, et.al., Politics in Polynesia, IPS/USP, 229-
38.
4273. Meller, N., 1990: The Micronesian executive; the FSM and the Marshall Islands, PS, 14,
1, 55-72, 1990.
4274. Meller, Norman, 1985: Constitutionalism in Micronesia, assistance of Terza Meller,
Honolulu, Hawaii, Institute for Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University--Hawaii
Campus: Distributed for the Institute for Polynesian Studies by the University of Hawaii
Press.
4275. Melo (de), J., Panagariya, A., 1993: New dimensions in regional integration. Cambridge,
4276. Melo, João de, 1999: “O «Complexo de Ítaca» nas literaturas insulares – Açores, Madeiras e
Cabo Verde”, in Camões. Revista de Letras e Culturas Lusófonas, Julho/Setembro.
4277. Melo, Lúcia da Costa, 1983: Dinis da Luz sob o signo da insularidade: palestra proferida por
ocasião das festas do Concelho do Nordeste de 1983, Câmara Municipal do Concelho de
Nordeste.
4278. Melville, Herman, 1997: Les îles enchantées, Paris.
4279. Ménanteau, L.; Vanney, J.-R. (cood. scient.), 1997: Atlas côtier du Nord-Est d’Haïti.
Environnement et patrimoine culturel de la région de Fort-Liberté, Port-au-Prince/Nantes.
Projet “Route 2004”. Ministère de la Culture (Haïti)/PNUD.
4280. Menard, Henry W., 1986: Islands, New York, Scientific American Library, Distributed by
W.H. Freeman.
4281. Mendes, John, 1986: Cote ce Cote la: Trinidad & Tobago Dictionary. Arima, Trinidad.
4282. MENDES, José Manuel de Oliveira, 2003: Do ressentimento ao reconhecimento: vozes,
identidades e processos político nos Açores (1974-1996), Porto, Edições Afrontamento.
4283. Mendoza de Arce, Daniel, 2006: Music in North America and the West Indies from the
discovery to 1850: a historical survey, Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press.
4284. Meneses, Avelino de Freitas de, 1993: Os Açores nas encruzilhadas de Setecentos (1740-
1770), Universidade dos Açores, 2 vols.
4285. Mengual, Paul-Gabriel, 1996: Le Cirque de Salazie (Ile de la Réunion): Analyse des risques
naturels et critique des opérations de développement local; sous la dir. de: M. le prof.
J. L. Ballais, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Mémoire de Maîtrise: Géographie
physique: Aix-Marseille.
4286. Menton, LK; Tamura, E.H., 1999: A history of Hawaii, CDRG/University of Hawaii.
4287. Mercado, Leonardo N., ed. 2001: Old cultures, renewed religions: the search for cultural
identity in a changing world, Manila: Logos Publications.
4288. Mercedes Suárez, Lucía de las, 1999: Caribbean women claiming their islands, Thesis
(Ph.D.), Duke University.
4289. Mercer, John, 1980: The Canary Islanders: their prehistory, conquest, and survival, London:
2009
Collings.
4290. Mercer, Julia E., 1982: Bermuda settlers of the 17th century: genealogical notes from
Bermuda, with an index by Judith McGhan, Baltimore: Genealogical Pub. Co..
4291. Mercer, P., 1995: White Australia defied; Pacific Islander settlement in North
Queensland, Townsville, James Cook University.
4292. Merceron, François, 2005: Dynamiques démographiques contemporaines de la Polynésie
française: héritage colonial, pluri-ethnisme et macrocéphalie urbaine, Les Cahiers
d’Outre-Mer, 230, Avril-Juin, Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index246.
html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.
4293. Merchant, S., 1989: Australia’s defence cooperation program and regional security, in
Hegarty DW and Polomka P, eds, The security of Oceania in the 1990s, Canberra ANU
pp.71-8.
4294. Merediz, Eyda M., 2004: Refracted images: the Canary Islands through a New World
lens: transatlantic readings, Tempe, Ariz.: Arizona Center for Medieval and Renaissance
Studies.
4295. Meriç, Recep, 1982: Metropolis in Ionien: Ergebnisse einer Survey-Unternehmung in den
Jahren 1972-1975, Konigstein, Ts: Verlag Anton Hain, 1982.
4296. Merkistein, Suni, 1997: Føroysk telving í 20. øld: úr Avhaldinum til Jerevan, Tórshavn,
Talvsamband Føroya, (ilha Faroe).
4297. Merle, M., 1996: Un système international sans territoire ? In Badie B. et Smouts M. C.,
dir., L’international sans territoires. Cultures et conflits, Paris, L’harmattan, p. 289-309.
4298. Merleau-Ponty Claire et Cécile Mozziconacci, 2006: Histoires des Maori, un peuple
d’Océanie, d’après les contes recueillis par George Grey, Arles.
4299. Merler. Alberto, 1993: I gruppi dirigenti corsi: questioni di insularità, identità, sviluppo,
dipendenza, autonomia, in C. saint-blancat (a cura di), La Corsica: identità etnico
linguistica e sviluppo, Cedam, Padova.
4300. Merler. Alberto, 1993: International Parks: Transbourdary Cooperatio between the Islands
of Corsican and Sardinia, in Insula, 2.
4301. Merler, Alberto, 1993a: L’autonomia insulare che si fà capacità di autogoverno. Una
prospettiva per la gestione ambientale naturale ed umano, in Quaderni bolotanesi, 19.
4302. Merler. Alberto, 1993-94: Gesamttirol als eine Insel, in Tiroler Almanach, 23 Jahrgang.
4303. Merler. Alberto, 1994: “Res mediterranea” e cooperazione sardo-corsa, in Civiltà del mare,
6.
4304. Merler. Alberto, 1994a: Shaki Kankyôteki Na, Tohshosei, Jiritsu. Chichûkai Sekai Ni
Okeru Ichikôsatu (Parchi socio-ambientali, insularità e autonomia. Riferimenti al mondo
mediterraneo), in Sangyô to Kyôiku, 2.
4305. Merler. Alberto, 1994b: Espace méditerranéen et communications interinsulaires, in Res
mediterranea, 1.
4306. Merler. Alberto, 1996: Argomentazioni a proposito di interculturalità insulare e scuola come
servizio sociale, in Quaderni bolotanesi, 22.
4307. Merler. Alberto, 1996a: Strategie globali, mari e isole negli accordi transfrontalieri europei.
Parte prima: dall’interreg corso-sardo all’imedoc fra Baleari, Corsica e Sardegna, in
Civiltà del mare, 3/4.
4308. Merler. Alberto, con M. Niihara, 1996: Le isole mediterranee e Okinawa, in Annuario degli
2009
CEHA 237
studi su Okinawa, 2, 1996.

4309. Merler. Alberto, con M.L. Piga, 1996: Regolazione sociale, Insularità, Percorsi di sviluppo,
Edes, Sassari.
4310. Merler. Alberto, 1997: La prospettiva insulare corso-sarda del mediterraneo, Quaderni
bolotanesi, 23.
4311. Merler. Alberto, 1997a: Strategie globali, mari e isole negli accordi transfrontalieri europei.
Parte seconda: rapporti nei mari e fra i mari europei, in Civiltà del mare, 1.
4312. Merler. Alberto, 1999: La Sardegna terra insulare. Non isolata, in S. Cubeddu (a cura di),
L’ora dei sardi, Edizioni Fondazione Sardinia, Cagliari.
4313. Merouses, Nikos, 2002: Chios. Physiko periballon & katoikese apo te neolithike epoche
mechri to telos tes archaiothtas. (Chios. Natural Environment & Habitation from the
Neolithic Age to the end of Antiquity) pg. 80. Papyros.
4314. Merrill, Tim, ed., 1992: Guyana: A Country Study. Washington: GPO for the Library of
Congress. Disponível online em url: http://countrystudies.us/guyana/. Consulta em 11 de
Julho de 2009.
4315. Mervart, A. M., 1980: The Andamanese, Nicobarese, and hill tribes of Assam / by A.M.
Meerwarth; with a new introduction by N.N. Acharyya, Gauhati: Spectrum Publications:
sole distributors, United Publishers.
4316. Meti, Lauofo, 2002: Samoa: The Making of the Constitution. Apia: Government of Samoa.
4317. Metropolitan Museum of Art (New York, N.Y.), 1987: The Pacific Islands, Africa, and
the Americas, introductions by Douglas Newton, Julie Jones, Kate Ezra, New York,
Metropolitan Museum of Art.
4318. Metz, Helen Chapin ed., 1994: Seychelles: A Country Study. Washington: GPO for the
Library of Congress. Disponível online em url: http://countrystudies.us/seychelles/.
4319. Metz, Helen Chapin, ed., 1994: Madagascar: A Country Study. Washington: GPO for the
Library of Congress. Disponível online em url: http://countrystudies.us/madagascar/.
4320. Metz, Helen Chapin edited by. 1995: Indian ocean: five island countries, Washington, D.C.:
Federal Research Division, Library of Congress: For sale by the Supt. of Docs., U.S.
G.P.O.
4321. Metzner, J., 1980: Disequilibrium of agricultural regions in the eastern lesser sunda islands:
consequences for geoecological regional planning, Applied sciences and development,
no 15, pp. 62-81.
4322. Meyer, Eric, 2001: Sri Lanka, Entre particularismes et mondialisation, Paris: La
Documentation Francaise.
4323. Meyer, Manulani Aluli, 2001: Our Own Liberation: Reflections on Hawaiian Epistemology.
The Contemporary Pacific, 13:124–148.
4324. Meyers, Bruce F., 2004: Swift, silent, and deadly: Marine amphibious reconnaissance in
the Pacific, Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press.
4325. Meyerson, B, D.J. Seyler, and J.F. Hornbeck, 1989: Trinidad and Tobago in Islands of
the Commonwaelth Caribbean: a regional study, S.W. Meditz and D.M. Hanratty (eds.).
Washington DC: GPO, pp. 161-254.
4326. Michal, E., 1993: Protected states; the political status of the FSM and the RMI, The
2009
Contemporary Pacific, 5, 2, 303-32.

4327. Michal, E.J., 1992: American Samoa or Eastern Samoa?; the potential for American Samoa
to become freely associated with the United States, The Contemporary Pacific, 4, 1, 137-
60.
4328. Michalon, Thierry (Directeur scientifique); Daniel, Justin (Préfacier), 2006: Entre assimilation
et émancipation: L’Outre-mer français dans l’impasse?, Paris: Editions Les Perséides,
2006.
4329. Michell, John F., 1994: At the center of the world: polar symbolism discovered in Celtic,
Norse, and other ritualized landscapes, New York, N.Y.: Thames and Hudson.
4330. Micó Pérez, Rafael. 2005: Cronología absoluta y periodización de la prehistoria de las
Islas Baleares, Oxford: Archaeopress.
4331. Middeke, Michael, 2000: “Anglo-American nuclear weapons cooperation after the Nassau
Conference: the British policy of interdependence”, in Journal of Cold War Studies, 2:2,
69-96.
4332. Middlebrook, Martin, 2001: The Falklands War, 1982, Rev. edn. London: Penguin.
4333. Middleton, Angela, 2007: “Silent Voices, Hidden Lives : Archaeology, Class and Gender in
the CMS Missions, Bay of Islands, New Zealand, 1814–1845”, in International Journal of
Historical Archaeology, 11:1, 1-31.
4334. Midgley, M.,1983: ‘Duties Concerning Islands’ in R. Elliot & A. Gare, eds., Environmental
Philosophy, St. Lucia, University of Queensland Press, pp. 166-181.
4335. Midian, Andrew, 1999: The value of indigenous music in the life and ministry of the church:
the United Church in the Duke of York Islands Boroko, Papua New Guinea, Institute of
Papua New Guinea Studies.
4336. Midwinter, Arthur, Keating, Michael and Mitchell, James, 1991: Politics and Public Policy
in Scotland. MacMillan Education Ltd, Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire and London.
4337. Mignot, Arthur T., 2001: ‘”Mon Plaisir” and the Methodists of Guernsey’, Proceedings of the
Wesley Historical Society, 53:2, 42-45.
4338. Mijares, Armand Salvador B., 2007: Unearthing prehistory: the archaeology of Northestern
Luzon, Philippine Islands, Oxford: John and Erica Hedges, Ltd..
4339. Miles, John,1997: Infectious diseases: colonising the Pacific?, Dunedin.
4340. Miles, Melinda and Eugenia Charles, eds., 2004: Let Haiti Live: Unjust U.S. Policies Toward
Its Oldest Neighbor, Coconut Creek, FL: Educa Vision Inc..
4341. Miles, Suzannah Smith, 2004: Writings of the islands: Sullivan’s Island and Isle of Palms,
Charleston, SC: History Press.
4342. Millares Torres, Agustín; Godoy, José Ramón, 1977-1981: Historia general de las islas
Canarias, complementada con elaboraciones actuales de diversos especialistas, Las
Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cedirca.
4343. Millares, Míchel Jorge, 2006: Isla: el turismo en la provincia de Las Palmas, 1946-1969:
entre Néstor y el Desarrollismo, Tenerife: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
4344. Miller, Brian M., 1988: Archaeological investigations on the north coast of Rota, Mariana
Islands, contributions by Melinda S. Allen ... [et al.], Carbondale: Southern Illinois
University.
4345. Miller, Daniel, 1980: Settlement and diversity in the Solomon Islands, Man, 15: 451-466.
2009
CEHA 239
4346. Miller, George (editor), 1996: To The Spice Islands And Beyond: Travels in Eastern
Indonesia, Oxford University Press, Paperback, 3.
4347. Miller, George, 2004: Meta-Guide to Indonesia: Annotated Bibliography of post-1990
Bibliographies on Indonesia. Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/
WWWVLPages/IndonPages/Meta-Bibliography.html.Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
4348. Miller, James, 2003: 1948 Feb. 19-. The North Atlantic front: Orkney, Shetland, Faroe, and
Iceland at war. Edinburgh: Birlinn.
4349. Miller, Kenneth E. (Editor), 1991: Greenland: Bibliography (World bibliographical series)
(Hardcover) by ABC-CLIO Ltd (Jun).
4350. Miller, Rebecca Susan, 2007: Carriacou string band serenade: performing identity in the
eastern Caribbean, Middletown, Conn.: Wesleyan University Press.
4351. Millien, Virginie, 1999: Taille des incisives et structure de taille des communautés de
rongeurs: aspects écologiques et évolutifs en milieu insulaire, Thèse de doctorat:
Géologie et Paléontologie: Montpellier 2.
4352. Mills Peter R., 2003: Neo in Oceania. Foreign Vessels Owned by Hawaiian Chiefs before
1830, The Journal of Pacific History, Vol. 38, No. 1, pp.53-67. Disponível online em url:
http://www.hawaii.edu/geog_mr/geog122online/13-economy/mills.pdf. Consulta em 29 de
Julho de 2009.
4353. Mills, L., 1991: Smallholder Oil Palm Productivity Study, Bath UK, Landell Mills/Department
of Agriculture and Livestock.
4354. Mills, Stevenson Matthew, 2003: Wars End on Okinawa: In Search of Captain Robert
Fowler, Journal of Military History, 67:2.
4355. Milne, David, 2001: “Prince Edward Island; Politics in a Beleaguered Garden,” in Brownsey,
K. and Howlett, M. (editors), The Provincial State in Canada, Broadview Press, Toronto.
111-139.
4356. Milne, eds., 2000: Lessons from the Political Economy of Small Islands: The Resourcefulness
of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp. 214-229.
4357. Milne, S., 1987: The cook Islands tourist industry: ownership and planning, Pacific
Viewpoint, vol. vol. 28, no 2, p. p. 119-138.
4358. Minamura, Takeichi, 1995: Sengo Nihon no keisei to hatten: senryō to kaikaku no hikaku
kenkyū, Tōkyō: Nihon Keizai Hyōronsha.
4359. Minerva, N. – 1995: “Le cercle magique: stratégies de protection du milieu insulaire dans
le mythe et l’utopie”, In: Racault, J. M. & Marimoutou, J. C. L’insularité, thématique et
representations, Paris, L’Harmatan.
4360. Mininberg, Emeshe Juhász, 1996: Estética insular y poética de la identidad en el Caribe:
Paradiso, L’isolé soleil y Omeros, Dissertation Abstracts Internacional, 57[6], 2486A. Yale
University.
4361. Minnesota Museum of Art, 1981: Melanesian images: an exhibition of ritual objects from
islands in the South Pacific, March 10-May 17, 1981, presented by Minnesota Museum
of Art, Saint Paul, Minn.: The Museum.
4362. Miossec, J.-M., 1994: “Malte en transition: démographie, économie et gestion de l’espace”.
Revue du monde musulman et de la Méditerranée, n° 71, p. 199-216. Miranda, Nuno,
1961: Literatura e insularidade, In: Cabo Verde: boletim de propaganda e informação. -
Ano XIII, n.º 145 (Outubro de 1961), p. 1-4.
4363. Miras, C. de, 1987: L’économie martiniquaise: développement sans croissance, in: Iles,
2009
insularité, insularisme, CRET, Talence, pp 399-420. (Collection Iles et Archipels, n°8).

4364. Miras, Claude de, 1997: Le développement des petites économies insulaires relève-t-il
encore de l’économie de marché ?, Revue tiers monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 79-98.
4365. Miras, Claude de., 1985: Le secteur de la menuiserie-ébénisterie à Fort de France
(Martinique): conditions de production et de reproduction, Fort de France: ORSTOM.
4366. Miras, Claude de; Bonnemaison, JoÙl (ed.); Freyss, J. (ed.), Le développement des
petites économies insulaires relève-t-il encore de l’économie de marché? In: Le Pacifique
insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, revue tiers monde, 1997, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p.
79-98.
4367. Mirbagheri, Farid, 1989: Cyprus and International Peacemaking, Hurst.
4368. Miró, Santiago, Maestros depurados en Baleares durante la Guerra Civil, presentación
Manuel Tuñón de Lara, Palma, Mallorca: L. Muntaner.
4369. Mitcham, Allison, 1984: Offshore islands of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, illustrated by
Peter Mitcham, Hantsport, N.S.: Lancelot Press.
4370. Mitcham, Allison, 1986: Paradise or purgatory: island life in Nova Scotia & New Brunswick,
illustrated by Peter Mitcham., Hantsport, N.S.: Lancelot Press.
4371. Mitchell, A., 1989: Fragile paradise: nature and man in the Pacific, London.
4372. Mitchell, Alison; [et al.], 1987: Pre-1855 gravestone inscriptions in Bute & Arran: an index,
Edinburgh.
4373. Mitchell, Frank, 1989: Man and environment in Valencia Island, Dublin: Royal Irish Academy.
4374. Mitchell, James, 1996: The old castle’ on Mutton Island, Journal of the Galway Archaeological
and Historical Society, 48 (1996), 98-103.
4375. Mitchell, R.E., and D.G. Reid, 2001: Community Integration: Island Tourism in Peru, Annals
of Tourism Research, 28(1), pp.113-139.
4376. Mitchell, W. E., 1992: “Introduction: Mother Folly in the Islands” In: W. E. Mitchell, Ed.,
Clowning as Critical Practice: performance humor in the South Pacific, Pittsburgh,
University of Pittsburgh Press, pp. 3-57.
4377. Mitchison, R., 2002: A history of Scotland, London: Routledge.
4378. Mittelman, J., 1996: “Rethinking the “new regionalism” in the context of globalization”,
Global Governance, n°2, p. 189-213.
4379. Mittermeier R.A.; [et al.], 2006: Lemurs of Madagascar, Conservation International,
Washington D.C.
4380. Mittermeier, R.A.; [et al.], 1999: Hotspots – Earth’s Biologically Richest and Most
Endangered Terrestrial Ecoregions, Cemex S.A., Mexico.
4381. Miyagi, Eishō, 1982: Ryūkyū shisha no Edo nobori, Tōkyō: Daiichi Shobō, Shōwa 57.
4382. Miyata, Toshihiko, 1984: Ryūkyū Shinkoku kōekishi: nishū “Rekidai hōan” no kenkyū,
Nantō bunka sōsho – 7,Miyata Toshihiko cho.
4383. Miyazato, Seigen, 1986: Amerika no Okinawa seisaku, Naha-shi: Niraisha, Yamaguchi-
ken Shimonoseki-shi, Hatsubaimoto Shin Nihon Kyōiku Tosho Kabushiki Kaisha.
4384. Moberg, Mark, 2008: Slipping away: banana politics and fair trade in the Eastern Caribbean,
New York: Berghahn Books.
4385. Moerenhout, Jacques-Antoine 2006: Voyages aux îles du Grand Océan - Géographie: les
2009
CEHA 241
tribulations d’un négociant, armateur et ethnographe en Polynésie orientale, 1828-1834,

Besançon.
4386. Moghaddam, Hossein H., 2005: ‘Anglo-Iranian relations over the disputed islands in the
Persian Gulf: constraints on rapprochement’, In Martin, Vanessa (ed.), Anglo-Iranian
relations since 1800 (Royal Asiatic Society books) (London: Routledge), 148-60.
4387. Mohamed, A., 2002: The Diplomacy of Micro-states, La Haye, Netherlands Institute of
International Relations, Discussion Papers in Diplomacy, n° 78.
4388. Mohamed, Naseema; Kalus, Ludvik; Guillot, Claude; Dos Santos Alves, Jorge M.;
Doumenge, François, 2005: Les Maldives, Archipel (Paris), no 70, p. 3-143.
4389. Moir, G. D., 1995: The history of the Falklands, Croydon, Surrey.
4390. Moirab, A.A., 1984: Etudes economique et sociale comparees de quatre petits ensembles
Insulaires: Comores, Maurice, Reunion, Seychelles, Bordeaux: Institut de Geographie et
D’Etudes Regionales, Universite de Bordeaux 3, Talence, France.
4391. Moitt, Bernard, 2004: Sugar, slavery, and society: perspectives on the Caribbean, India,
the Mascarenes, and the United States, Gainesville: University Press of Florida.
4392. Mojetta, Angelo, Andrea and Antonella Ferrari, 2000: Wonders of the coral reefs: the Red
Sea, the Maldives, Malaysia, the Caribbean, Vercelli, Italy: White Star.
4393. Moles A., 1982: «Nissonologie ou sciences des îles», L’Espace géographique, n°4, p. 281-
289.
4394. Moll, V. P. (Verna P.) compiler. 1991: Virgin Islands, Oxford, England; Santa Barbara, Calif.:
Clio Press, [bibliografia].
4395. Monaghan, David, 1998: The Falklands War: myth and countermyth, Palgrave Macmillan.
4396. Monberg, T., 1980: Pacific Studies in Denmark: Research on the Islands of Rennell and
Bellona, Annual Newsletter of Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies, 14:71-82.
4397. Monberg, Torben & Kuschel, Rolf, 1981: Na Tautupu’a o Mugaba ma Mungiki / Tales from
Rennell and Bellona. Copenhagen: National Museum of Denmark, 78 pp., illustrated. In
Rennellese and English
4398. Monberg, Torben, 1991: Bellona Island beliefs and rituals, drawings by Pernille Monberg,
4399. Monberg, T., 1996: The Bellonese: High, Lowóand Equal: Leadership and Change on a
Polynesian Outlier in the Solomon Islands, In Essays Presented to Sir Raymond Firth
on the Occasion of His 90th Birthday, edited by R. Feinberg and K. A. Watson-Gegeo.
London: Athlone Press.
4400. Monberg, T., 2002: Bellona and Rennell Islanders, Encyclopedia of World Cultures
Supplement, edited by M. Ember, C. R. Ember, and Ian Skoggard, New York: Macmillan
Reference USA, Gale Group, Thomson Learning. Pp. 46-50.
4401. Monberg, T., 2002a: Oceaniens Kunst, In Konstens V”rldshistoria, Utomeuropeisk Konst,
edited by G. Paulsson and M. Gelfer-J¯rgensen, Lund: Natur og Kultur. Pp. 450-473.
4402. Monge, J.T., 1997: Puerto Rico: The Trials of the Oldest Colony in the World, New Haven:
4403. Monje, S.C., 1992: The Azores in the Atlantic World: Geostrategic factor, In Camões Center
Quarterly, vol 3. (pp. 2-12).
4404. Monk,, K.A.; Fretes, Y., Reksodiharjo-Lilley, G., 1996, 1997: The Ecology of Nusa Tenggara
and Maluku. Hong Kong: Periplus Editions Ltd.
2009
4405. Monnerie, Denis, 1988: Nitu. Les vivants, les morts et le cosmos selon la société de Mono-
Alu (Iles Salomon), Ph.D. Thesis, Lille, France: Universite de Lille.
4406. Monnier, Yves, 1983: L’Immuable et le changeant: étude de la partie française de l’Ile de
Saint-Martin, Talence: Centre d’études de géographie tropicale du C.N.R.S: Centre de
recherche sur les espaces tropicaux de l’université de Bordeaux III.
4407. Monreal, Edelweiss, 2000: Brandán, el guardián de la fantasía: el secreto de San Borondón,
ilustrado por Violeta Monreal, León, Everest.
4408. Monro. Donald, 2003: Description of the Occidental, i.e., Western Islands of Scotland,
Birlinn Ltd; New ed of 1703 ed edition (6 Jan 2003).
4409. Monsod, jointly with Solita, Akilagpa Sawyerr et al, 1995: Sustainable Development &
International Economic Cooperation, Nations General Assembly 50th session 1/50/501,
33 pages.
4410. Monteil, Michel. 2005: L’émigration française vers Jersey, 1850-1950, Aix-en-Provence:
Publications de l’université de Provence.
4411. Montes, Manuel F., 1993: The Pacific Islands’ trade and investment: a brief historical review
and discussion of prospects / Manuel F. Montes and Gerard A. Finin. Honolulu, Hawaii
(1777 East-West Rd., Honolulu 96848): East-West Center, Pacific Islands Development
Program.
4412. Montesdeoca Medina, J. M., 2001: “Del enciclopedismo grecolatino a los islarios humanitas.
Breve historia de un género”, Revista de Filologia, 19, p. 229-253.
4413. Montesdeoca, J.M., 2004: Los islarios de la época del humanismo: el Insulis de Domenico
Silvestri, edición y traducción, La Laguna, Servicio de Publicaciones Universidad de La
Laguna. (CD-ROM edition).
4414. Montgomery, Michael, edited by. 1994: The crucible of Carolina: essays in the development
of Gullah language and culture, Athens: University of Georgia Press.
4415. Moore, Janie Gilliard, 1980: “Africanisms among Blacks of the Sea Islands”, in Journal of
Black Studies, vol. 10: pp. 467 - 480.
4416. Moore, Brian L., Swithin R. Wilmot, 1998: Before & after 1865: education, politics and
regionalism in the Caribbean: in honour of Sir Roy Augier, Kingston, Ian Randle Publishers.
4417. Moore, C., 1991: The life and death of William Bairstow Ingham; PNG in the 1870s, JRHSQ,
Vol 14/10, pp.393-432.
4418. Moore, C., 1997: Decolonising the history of Australia’s South Sea Islanders, in Denoon
D, ed, Emerging from empire; decolonisation in the Pacific, Canberra, RSPacS, ANU,
pp.194-203.
4419. Moore, C. R., 1985: Kanaka; a history of Melanesian Mackay, Port Moresby, IPNGS/UPNG
Press.
4420. Moore, C.R., 1990: Revising the revisionists; the historiography of immigrant Melanesians
in Australia 1847-1990, Pacific Studies, Vol 15, 2, 61-86.
4421. Moore, C.R., 1992: New Guinea History; a bibliography of journal articles on Papua New
Guinea and Irian Jaya, St Lucia, University of Queensland.
4422. Moore, C.R., 1992a: Pacific History Journal bibliography, PMB, ANU, Canberra.
4423. Moore, C.R., 1993: Australia’s Pacific Islanders 1906-1991, in Reynolds, H. (ed) Race
relations in north Queensland, 2nd Edition.
4424. Moore, C.R., 1993a: The counterculture of survival; Melanesians in the Mackay district
2009
CEHA 243
of Queensland 1865-1906, in Lal, B.V., Munro D. and Beechert, E.D. (eds), Plantation
workers, Honolulu, UH Press.
4425. Moore, C. R., 1997: Australia in the world; nation, community and identity, (Documents), in
Evans, R., Moore, C., Saunders, K. and B. Jamison, eds, 1997, 1901 Our Future’s past;
documenting Australia’s federation, Sydney, Macmillan, 211-29.
4426. Moore, C. R., 1997a: Quanchi M and Bennett S, 1997, Australian South Sea Islanders; a
curriculum resource for secondary schools, Brisbane, AusAID/Queensland Government.
4427. Moore, C. R., 1999: A Papua New Guinea Political Chronicle 1967-1991, Bathurst, Crawford
4428. Moore, C. R., 1999a: Goodbye Queensland, Goodbye White Australia, Goodbye
Christians; Australia’s South Sea Islander community and deportation 1901-1908, The
New Federalist, Vol 4, pp.22-29.
4429. Moore, C. R., 2000: Refocussing indigenous trade and power; the dynamics of early
foreign contact and trade in Torres Strait, Cape York and Southeast New Guinea in the
Nineteenth century, Journal of the RHSQ, Vol 18, No 7, pp.289-302.
4430. Moore, C.R., 2001: The South Sea Islanders of Mackay, Queensland, Australia, in
Fitzpatrick J, ed, Endangered peoples of Oceania, Westport, Greenwood Press, pp.167-
81.
4431. Moore, Clive, 1992: Pacific history journal bibliography, Canberra: Pacific Manuscripts
Bureau, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University. Disponível
online em url: ftp://coombs.anu.edu.au/coombspapers/coombsarchives/pacific-asian-
history/pac-jnl-bibl.txt // http://coombs.anu.edu.au/WWWVLPacific/Pac-Jrnl-Bibliography.
html#search. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
4432. Moore, Clive, 2003: New Guinea: Crossing Boundaries and History. Honolulu: University
of Hawaii Press.
4433. Moore, Clive; Leckie, Jacqueline; Munro, Doug edited by, 1990: Labour in the South Pacific,
Townsville: James Cook University of Northern Queensland.
4434. Moore, David W., 2005: The Other British Isles: a history of Shetland, Orkney, the Hebrides,
Isle of Man, Anglesey, Scilly, Isle of Wight, and the Channel, Jefferson (N.C.); London:
McFarland.
4435. Moore, David W., 2005: The other British Isles: a history of Shetland, Orkney, the Hebrides,
Isle of Man, Anglesey, Scilly, Isle of Wight, and the Channel Islands, Jefferson (NC):
McFarland.
4436. Moore, edited by Brian L., and Swithin R. Wilmot, 1998: Before & after 1865: education,
politics and regionalism in the Caribbean: in honour of Sir Roy Augier, Kingston: Ian
Randle Publishers.
4437. Moore, Janie Gilliard, 1980: “Africanisms among Blacks of the Sea Islands”, in Journal of
Black Studies, Jun; vol. 10: pp. 467 - 480.
4438. Moore, R., 2000: “The debris of empire: the 1981 Nationality Act and the Oceanic Dependent
Territories”, in Immigrants & Minorities, 19:1, 1-24.
4439. Morales Lezcano, Víctor, 1992: Los ingleses en Canarias, Islas Canarias: Viceconsejería
de Cultura y Deportes, Gobierno de Canarias.
4440. Morales Lezcano, Víctor, Javier Ponce Marrero (coordinadores), 2006: Canarias y el
noroeste de África: historia de una frontera: actas del Primer Simposio, Las Palmas de
Gran Canaria, 8 de julio de 2006, [Las Palmas de Gran Canaria]: Gobierno de Canarias,
Presidencia del Gobierno, Dirección General de Relaciones con África: Universidad de
2009
Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones.

4441. Morat, P.; Veillon, J.M.; Mac kee, H.S., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales:
reflexions et exemples, In Affinites floristiques des phanerogames de la foret dense
humide neo-caledonienne, Bordeaux: CEGET; CRET, p. 81-92.
4442. Moré, Gustavo Luis, 2008: Casas reales: manual bibliográfico sobre la arquitectura y
el urbanismo en la historia del Gran Caribe, 1492-2000, Santo Domingo, República
Dominicana: Museo de las Casas Reales.
4443. Moreland, D.A, 1984: The quest that failed; Jack London’s last tales of the South Seas”,
PS, 8, 1, 48-70.
4444. Moreno, Barry, 2008: Ellis Island’s famous immigrants, Charleston, SC: Arcadia Pub..
4445. Moreno, Luis Bourillón...et al, edición y texto, 1988: Islas del Golfo de California, México,
D.F.: Secretaría de Gobernación/UNAM.
4446. Moreton, Cole, 2000: Hungry for home, leaving the Blaskets: a journey from the edge of
Ireland. London: Viking.
4447. Morga, Antonio de, 1990: Historical events of the Philippine Islands, published in Mexico
in 1609 recently brought to light and annotated by José Rizal, preceded by a prologue by
Ferdinand Blumentritt. Manila: National Historical Institute.
4448. Morga, Antonio de, 1990: Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, Manila: National Historical Institute.
4449. Morgan, A., 1996: Mystery in the eye of the beholder; cross-cultural encounters on 19th
century Yap, Journal of Pacific History , Vol 31, No 1, pp.27-41.
4450. Morgan, L., 1990: To Make a Life in the Islands: “Beachcombers”, in Rotuma, Typescript.
4451. Morgan, William N., 1989: Prehistoric architecture in Micronesia, with photographs by
Newton Morgan, assisted by Dylan Morgan, London: Kegan Paul International.
4452. Mori, J., H. Patia, C. McKee, I. Itikarai, P. Lowenstein, P. Desaintours and B. Talai, 1989:
“Seismicity Associated With Eruptive Activity At Langila Volcano, Papua New Guinea”,
Journal of Volcanology and Geothermal Research, 38(3-4): 243-255.
4453. Mori, J.; [et al.], 1989: “Seismicity Associated With Eruptive Activity At Langila Volcano,
Papua New Guinea”, in Journal of Volcanology and Geothermal Research, 38(3-4): 243-
255.
4454. Moriguchi, Katsu, 1985: Kogoi: Yaeyama, Hatomajima seikatsushi, Tōkyō, Marujusha,
Hatsubaimoto Shakai Hyōronsha.
4455. Morison, Samuel Eliot, 2001: History of United States Naval Operations in World War II,
University of Illinois Press.
4456. Morisset, Jean; Waddell, Eric, La francophonie oceane: le souffle des iles lointaines,
Geographie et Cultures, no 15, p. p. 85-103
4456. Moriwaki, Hiroshi, [et al.], 2006: “Holocene changes in sea level and coastal environments
on Rarotonga, Cook Islands, South Pacific Ocean”, in The Holocene, vol. 16: pp. 839 -
848.
4457. Mørkøre, J., 1991: ‘Class Interests and Nationalism in Faroese Politics’, North Atlantic
Studies, Vol. 3, No. 1, pp. 57-67.
4458. Mørkøre, J., 1996: ‘The Faroese Home Rule Model: Theory and Reality’ in L. Lyck (ed.)
Constitutional and Economic Space of the Small Nordic Jurisdictions, NordREFO, 1996:
6, pp. 162-191.
2009
CEHA 245
4459. Moro, Rubén Oscar, 1990: The History of the South Atlantic Conflict: The War for the
Malvinas, New York and London.
4460. Morris, P., Hawkins, F., 1998: Birds of Madagascar: a Photographic Guide, Yale University
Press, New Haven and London.
4461. Morrison, Alex, 2003: Rathlin Island as I knew it, with assistance of John A. I. McCurdy,
Northern Ireland: Help the Aged.
4462. Morrison, John, Paul Geraghty, and Linda Crowl, 1994: Preface to the Series. In Science of
Pacific Island Peoples, Volumes I–IV, edited by John Morrison, Paul Geraghty, and Linda
Crowl, vii–viii. Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific.
4463. Morrison, John, Paul Geraghty and Linda Crowl, editors, 1994a: Science of Pacific
Island Peoples, Volume I: Ocean and Coastal Studies. Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies,
4464. Morrison, John, Paul Geraghty and Linda Crowl, editors, 1994: Science of Pacific Island
Peoples,Volume II: Land Use and Agriculture.Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies, University
Peoples, Volume III: Fauna, Flora, Food and Medicine. Suva: Institute of Pacific Studies,
Peoples, Volume IV: Education, Language, Patterns and Policy. Suva: Institute of Pacific
Studies, University of the South Pacific.
4467. Morrissey, James, 1987: Inishbofin, Connemara, Dublin: Crannóg.
4468. Morro Veny, Guillem, 1998: L’Alçament fora, Palma de Mallorca, El Tall.
4469. Morton, H., 2001: Remembering freedom and the freedom to remember; Tongan memories
of independence, in Mageo J.M., ed, Cultural memory; reconfiguring history and identity
in the postcolonial Pacific, UHPress, 37-57.
4470. Moses, R.S.; Ashby, G., 1992: Tradition and democracy on Pohnpei island” in R Crocombe
et.al., eds, Culture and democracy in the South Pacific, IPS/USP, 205-16.
4471. Moss, Joyce; Wilson, George, 1993: Peoples of the world: Asians and Pacific Islanders:
the culture, geographical setting, and historical background of 41 Asian and Pacific Island
peoples, Detroit: Gale Research.
4472. Mott, P. G., 1986: Wings over ice: an account of the Falkland Islands and Dependencies
Aerial Survey Expedition 1955-57, Long Sutton.
4473. Mottiaux, Aude, 2008: Endémismes... “Vivre” la protection de l’environnement dans les îles
d’Hyères, Techniques et culture (Paris), 1er semestre 2008, vol. Nouvelle série, no 50,
p. 60-83.
4474. Mouchard, Christel, 1989: La reine des boucaniers: une aventurière en Océanie (1850-
1913), Paris: Editions du Seuil.
4475. Moulin, Jane Freeman, 1994: Music of the southern Marquesas Islands, Auckland, N.Z.:
Archive of Maori and Pacific Music, Dept. of Anthropology, University of Auckland.
4476. Mountain, Alan; Alain Proust, 2000: This is Mauritius, Struik.
4477. Mourão, Isabel A. Tavares, 2001: «De Ilhéu em Ilhéu. Sete Anos de Caminho até Macau...
Análise de um Texto Inédito, dos Fins do Século XVII, Intitulado Relação de alguns
naufragantes que se salvarão e viverão em hua Ilha de area sete anos», pp. 359-377,
2009
Avelino de Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo

do Regresso de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a
18 de Abril de 1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as
Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses.
4478. Mourdoukoutas, P., 1985: Seasonal Employment and Tourism Development: The Case of
the Greek Islands, PhD thesis. Economics State University of New York, Stony Brook.
4479. Moureau, études rassemblées par François, 1989: L’Île, territoire mythique [Groupe de
recherches sur la littérature des voyages de l’Université Paris-IV], Paris: Aux Amateurs
de Livres.
4480. Moutzourēs, Iōannēs K., 1984: Hē harmosteia tōn nēsōn tou Aigaiou pelagous sta chronia
tēs Hellēnikēs Epanastaseōs, Athēnai: Syll. pros Diadosin Ōphelimōn Vivliōn.
4481. Mowforth, Martin, Clive Charlton and Ian Munt, 2008: Tourism and responsibility:
perspectives from Latin America and the Caribbean, London; New York: Routledge.
4482. Moya Pons, Frank, 1972: La Dominación Haitiana, 1822-1844, (Colección Èstudios.’)
Santiago, República Dominicana: Universidad Católica Madre y Maestra.
4483. Moya Pons, Frank, 1982: Historia Dominicana, (2 vols.) (Colecciones Dominicanas.) Santo
Domingo: Caribe Grolier,Moya Pons, Frank, 1998: The Dominican Republic: A National
History, Markus Wiener Publishers; 2nd edition.
4484. Moya Pons, Frank, 2007: History of the Caribbean: plantations, trade, and war in the
Atlantic world, Princeton: Markus Wiener Publishers.
4485. Moyle, Richard M., 2007: Songs from the second float: a musical ethnography of Takū
Atoll, Papua New Guinea, Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, University of
Hawai’i Press.
4486. Muckle, A., 2002: Killing the “Fantôme Canaque”: Evoking and Invoking the Possibility of
Revolt in New Caledonia (1853-1915), Journal of Pacific History, Volume 37, Number 1,
1 June, pp. 25-44(20).
4487. Mufty, J., 1986: “Reflexions on “The case of Antonio Rivero and sovereignty over the
Falkland Islands”, in Historical Journal, 29, Publisher: Cambridge University Press. ISSN
0018246X. 427-32.
4488. Mukerjee, Madhusree, 2003: The land of naked people: encounters with Stone Age
islanders, Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
4489. Mulcahy, Matthew, 2006: Hurricanes and society in the British Greater Caribbean, 1624-
1783, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.
4490. Mullins, Steve, 1994: Torres Strait: a history of colonial occupation and culture contact
1864-1897, Rockhampton, Qld.: Central Queensland University Press.
4491. Mulloy, Sheila, 1987-88: “Inishbofin - the ultimate stronghold”, In Irish Sword, 17, 105-115.
4492. Mulloy, Sheila, 1989:”Military history of the western islands” (with special reference to
Inishbofin), in Cathair na Mart (Westport Historical Society), 9, 101-119.
4493. Mumme, Russell; Stevens, Jim; Cook, Jonathan, 1990: Kandrian Gloucester Integrated
Development Project Working Paper E: Transport and Shipping Sector, Final Draft,
Economic Situation, Primary Industry Management Services, Tropical Rural Development
Group (ANU) CARE Australia.
4494. Mundo Lo, Sara de, 1983: The Falkland/Malvinas Islands: a bibliography of books (1619-
1982), Urbana, Ill.: Albatross.
2009
CEHA 247
4495. Munoz, Paul Michel, 2006: Early Kingdoms of the Indonesian Archipelago and the Malay
Peninsula, Singapore: Editions Didier Millet.
4496. Munro, Doug; Firth, Stewart G., 1986: “Towards colonial protectorates: the case of the
Gilbert and Ellice Islands”, in Australian Journal of Politics & History, 32:1, 63-71,
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers.
4497. Munro, Doug; Firth, Stewart G., 1987: “From Company Rule to Consular Control: Gilbert
Island Labourers on German Plantations in Samoa, 1867-96”, in Journal of Imperial and
Commonwealth History, 16:1, 22-[34?], Publisher: Routledge.
4498. Munro, Doug; Munro, Teloma, 1987: “The Rise and Fall of the Vaitupu Company: An
Episode in the Commercial History of Tuvalu”, in Journal of Pacific History, 22:3-4.
4499. Munro, D., 1987: The lives and times of resident traders in Tuvalu: an exercise in history
frombelow, PS, vol. 10(2), 73-106.
4500. Munro, D., 1994/5: The Queensland labour trade, Journal of Pacific Studies, 18, pp.105-
36.
4501. Munro, D., 1995: The labour trade in Melanesians to Queensland; a historiographic essay,
in Journal of Social History, Vol 28, No 3.
4502. Munro, Doug, Brij V. Lal, Colaborador Doug Munro, Brij V. Lal, 2005, 2006: Texts And
Contexts: Reflections in Pacific Islands Historiography, University of Hawaii Press.
4503. Munro, I. S. R., 1958: “The fishes of the New Guinea Region: a check-list of the fishes of
New Guinea incorporating records of species collected by the Fisheries Survey vessel
“Fairwind” during the years 1948 to 1950”, in Fisheries bulletin / Territory of Papua and
New Guinea -- no. 1, Papua and New Guinea agricultural journal -- v. 10, no. 4, Fisheries
bulletin (Papua New Guinea. Dept. of Agriculture, Stock and Fisheries) -- no. 1, p. [97]-
369.
4504. Munro, Jean and R.W. Munro, 1986: Acts of the lords of the Isles, 1336-1493, Edinburgh,
Scottish History Society.
4505. Muratake, Seiichi, 1984: Saishi kūkan no kōzō: shakai jinruigaku nōto, Tōkyō: Tōkyō
Daigaku Shuppankai.
4506. Murgatroyd, compiled by Peter, 1990-2009: Pacific Law Journal Index, Law Librarian of
the University of the South Pacific. Disponível online em url: http://www.vanuatu.usp.ac.fj/
library2/Pacific%20Law%20Pathfinder/Homepage.htm. Consulta em 29 de Agosto de
2009.
4507. Murillo, Mario, 2001: Islands of resistance: Puerto Rico, Vieques, and U.S. policy, New
York: Seven Stories Press.
4508. Murphy, Matt, 1990: An islander looks back, Sherkin Island, Co. Cork: Sherkin Island
Marine Station, 1990.
4509. Murphy, Michael J., 1987: Rathlin: island of blood and enchantment: the folklore of Rathlin,
Dundalk: Dundalgan Press.
4510. Murray, edited by John A., 1991: The Islands and the sea: five centuries of nature writing
from the Caribbean, New York: Oxford University Press.
4511. Murray, Edmundo, 2005: ‘The Irish in Falklands/Malvinas Islands’, Irish Migration Studies
in Latin America, 3.6
4512. Murray, G., 1982: “Proposed Kaliai Cattle Project Report, West New Britain Province”,
Kimbe, D.P.I., in Guinea Incorporating Records of Species Collected by the Fisheries
Survey Vessel “Fairwind” During the Years 1948 to 1950, Port Moresby, Department of
2009
Agriculture, Stock and Fisheries.

4513. Murray, W., 2001: “The second wave of globalisation and agrarian change in the Pacific
islands”, Journal of rural studies, n°2, p. 135-148.
4514. Muschietti, Ulises M., ... [et al.], Conflictos en el Atlántico Sur: (siglos XVII-XIX), Buenos
Aires: Circulo Militar.
4515. Musée de l’Alta Rocca, 1995 : L’homme et son territoire: usages et aménagements de
l’espace par les communautés rurales insulaires: actes / Vèmes rencontres culturelles
interdisciplinaires, 3 et 4 septembre 1994; organisée par le Musée de l’Alta Rocca à
Levie, Lévie : Musée de l’Alta Rocca.
4516. Mut Calafell, Antonio, 1980: Inventario de la documentación del Real Patrimonio Balear,
siglo XIX: Archivo del Palacio Real de Madrid, [Madrid]: Ministerio de Cultura, Dirección
General de Bellas Artes, Archivos y Bibliotecas, Subdirección General de Archivos.
4517. Mutō, Masayuki, 1993: Umi no Shōsōin Okinoshima: yomigaeru kenkoku no kamigami,
Tōkyō: Sekai Nippōsha, Heisei 5.
4518. Myers, Garth Andrew, 1996: “Isle of Cloves, Sea of Discourses: Writing About Zanzibar”, in
Cultural Geographies, Oct; vol. 3: pp. 408 - 426.
4519. Myers, Lynne Born; Myers, Christopher A., 1995: Galápagos: islands of change,
photographs by Nathan Farb, New York: Hyperion Books for Children.
4520. Myers, R.H. & M. Peattie (eds.), 1984: The Japanese colonial empire, 1885-1945, Princeton.
4521. Myka, Frank P., 1993: Decline of indigenous populations: the case of the Andaman
Islanders, foreword by G. Prakash Reddy, Jaipur: Rawat Publications.
4522. Myres, John Nowell Linton, 1981: “The stone vaults of the Jersey churches: their historical
significance” in Annual Bulletin, Société Jersiaise, 23, 85-96.
4523. Nadal, Antoni, 1999: La preautonomía balear: 1975-1983, Palma, Mallorca, Edicions
Documenta Balear: “Sa Nostra”, Caixa de Balears, Consell de Mallorca.
4524. Nagarajan, P., 2006: ‘Collapse of Easter Island: Lessons for Sustainability of Small Islands’,
National Island Jurisdictions, London, Routledge.
4525. Nahmias, Nicolas, 2000 : Aux îles grecques, Hachette.
4526. Nairn, Richard, 2005: Ireland’s coastline: exploring its nature and heritage, Cork: Collins
Press.
4527. Nakanuma, Kaoru; Saitō Kimiko, 1991: Mō hitotsu no Meiji Ishin: Nakanuma Ryōzō to Oki
sōdō, Tōkyō: Sōfūsha.
4528. Nakasone, Kōichi, 1985: Nankai no uta to minzoku: Okinawa min’yō e no izanai, Naha-shi,
Hirugisha.
4529. Nankivell, Paul, 1991: The Solomon Islands economy: prospects for stabilisation and
sustainable growth, PDP Australia Ltd.; [with the assistance of] John Zerby ... [et al.].
4530. Naoki, Inoue, Yamauchi Tamihiro, Kawa Kaoru, 2002: Korean History Studies in Japan:
The 2001 Shigaku Zasshi Review of Historiography, Korean Studies, Vol. 26.
4531. Narokobi, Bernard, 1980, 1983: The Melanesian Way, Suva, Institute of Papua New
Guinea Studies.
4532. Narokobi, Bernard, 1983: Life and leadership in Melanesia, Suva: Institute of Pacific
Studies, University of the South Pacific; Port Moresby: University of Papua New Guinea.
4533. Narsey, Wadan, 2007: Gender issues in employment, underemployment and incomes in
2009
CEHA 249
Fiji, Suva, Fiji: Vanuavou Publications.

4534. Nascimento, Augusto, 1998: “A marginalidade social e política do protestantismo em São
Tome e Príncipe (do último quartel de oitocentos a meados de novecentos)”, in Lusotopie,
pp.307-315.
4535. Nascimento, Augusto, 1995: “Conflitos Locais e Soberania Portuguesa no Príncipe nas
Décadas de 1820 e 1830”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro, pp. 387–397.
4536. Nascimento, Augusto, 2001, “O papagaio e o falcão. A génese da autonomia na ultra-
periférica ilha do Príncipe” in Autonomia e história das ilhas, Funchal, Centro de Estudos
de História do Atlântico.
4537. Nascimento, Augusto, 2001a, “Identidades e saberes na encruzilhada do nacionalismo
são-tomense” in Política internacional nº24, vol.3, Lisboa.
4538. Nascimento, Augusto, 2006, “Cabo-verdianos em S. Tomé e Príncipe: os contornos da
consciência de segundos europeus”. Disponível online em url: http://www.antropologia.
net/publicacoes/actascongresso2006/cap2/AugustoNascimentoVF.pdf. Consulta em 16
de Agosto de 2009.
4539. Nascimento, Augusto, 2007, Ciências sociais em S. Tomé e Príncipe: a independência e
o estado da arte, Disponível online em url: http://www.africanos.eu/ceaup/uploads.EB005/
pdf. Consulta em 16 de Agosto de 2009
4540. Nash, Roy, 1990: Scandal in Madeira: the story of Richard Thomas Lowe, Sussex, England:
Book Guild.
4541. Naswa, Sumedha, 1999: Tribes of Andaman and Nicobar Islands: ethnography and
bibliography, New Delhi: Mittal Publications.
4542. Natalino, Ronzitti, 1984: La Questione delle Falkland-Malvinas nel diritto internazionale,
contributi di A. Accolti-Gil ... [et al.], Milano: A. Giuffrè.
4543. National Library of Australia, 2001: Cook and Omai: The Cult of the South Seas, Canberra:
National Library of Australia.
4544. National Planning Office, 1982: Kandrian-Gloucester Development Study West New
Britain, National Planning Office.
4545. National Statistical Office, 1987: 1980 National Population Census Final Figures West
New Britain Province: Census Unit Populations, Port Moresby, National Statistical Office.
4546. National Statistical Office, 1994: Papua New Guinea, report on the 1990 national population
and housing census in Eastern Highlands province, Port Moresby, PNG:, National
Statistical Office.
4547. Natusch, Sheila, 1992: Hell and high water: a German occupation of the Chatham Islands,
1843-1910, [Christchurch, N.Z.]: Pegasus.
4548. Nau, C., 2002: Dictionnaire des îles, Paris, Mango.
4549. Naudé, Pierre-François, 2009: Spécial Cap-Vert: Insolente insularité, Jeune Afrique, 12 au
18 avril, no 2518, p. 42-44.
4550. Nauerby, Tom, 1996: No nation is an island: language, culture and national identity in
the Faroe Islands, Arhus, Denmark: SNAI-North Atlantic Publications: Aarhus University
Press.
4551. Navarro, Francisco Quintana editor. 1992: Informes consulares británicos sobre Canarias
(1856-1914), [Las Palmas]: Centro de Investigación Económica y Social de la Caja de
Canarias.
2009
4552. Nazarahari, Reza, 2005: ‘An assessment of the withdrawal of British forces from the
Persian Gulf (1971) within the framework of disputed islands’, In Martin, Vanessa (ed.),
Anglo-Iranian relations since 1800 (Royal Asiatic Society books), London: Routledge,
137-47.
4553. NCA, 1995: O Faial e a Periferia Açoriana nos Séculos XV a XX, (Actas do I Colóquio,
realizado nas ilhas do Faial e do Pico em Maio de 1993), Núcleo Cultural da Horta.
4554. NCA, 2004: O Faial e a Periferia Açoriana nos Séculos XV a XX (Actas do III Colóquio,
realizado em Maio de 2002 nas ilhas do Faial e das Flores), Núcleo Cultural da Horta.
4555. NCA, 2007: O Faial e a Periferia Açoriana nos Séculos XV a XX (Actas do IV Colóquio,
realizado em Maio de 2006 nas ilhas do Faial e do Pico), Núcleo Cultural da Horta.
4556. Neary, Peter 1996: Newfoundland in the North Atlantic world, 1929-1949, McGill-Queen’s
University Press, Montreal, Quebec.
4557. Negreira Parets, Juan José, 2006: Baleares en la Guerra de Filipinas (1896-1898), Palma
(Mallorca): Lleonard Muntaner Editor.
4558. Negrón-Muntaner, Frances and Ramón Grosfoguel, 1997: Puerto Rican jam: rethinking
colonialism and nationalism, Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press.
4559. Nekoeng, Jules, 1990: Les paysans kanak et leur espace à Lifou: Iles Loyauté, Nouvelle-
Calédonie, Grenoble: Université Joseph Fourier.
4560. Nelson, Charles E., 1988: “Exotic fruits and seeds from the coasts of Britain and adjacent
islands”, in Journal of the Royal Institution of Cornwall, ns, 10:2, 147-77.
4561. Nelson, H., 1982: The Australians in Papua and New Guinea, in R.J. May & H. Nelson
(eds.), Melanesia beyond diversity, vol. 1, Canberra.
4562. Nelson, H., 1989: Masters in the tropics, in Gammage B and Spearritt P, (eds), Australians
1938, Fairfax, Syme and Weldon.
4563. Nelson, H., 1995: From ANZAC Day to Remembrance Day; remnants of Australian rule in
Papua New Guinea, Lal, BV and Nelson, H, eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance
in the post-colonial Pacific, Brisbane, PHA, pp.25-36.
4564. Nelson, H., 1996: The war diaries of Eddie Allan Stanton, Papua, 1942-45, Sydney, Allen
and Unwin.
4565. Nelson, H., 1998: From frontier to territory; colony and nation; Australia and New Guinea, in
Elizalde D, ed, Les relaciones internacionales en el Pacifico (siglos XVIII-XX) colonizacion,
descolonizacion y encuentro cultural, Madrid, CSdeIC, pp.671-94.
4566. Nelson, H., 2000: Gallipoli, Kokoda and the making of national identity, in Nile R, ed, The
Australian legend and its discontents, St Lucia, UQP, 200-217
4567. Nelson, H., 2000a: Liberation; the end of Australian rule in PNG, JPH, 35, 3, 269-80.
4568. Nelson, H., 2001: Isla del oro; seeking New Guinea gold, in McCalman I, Cook A and
Reeves A, eds, Gold; forgotten histories and lost objects of Australia, Cambridge, CUP,
189-206.
4569. Nelson, R. and Wall, G., 1986: Transport and accommodation: changing interrelationships
on Vancouver Island, Annals of Tourism Research, 13(2), pp.239-260.
4570. Nelson, R., 1991: The Island Within, New York, Random House.
4571. Nerdrum, Monica, 1998: Skärgårdskvinnor: tradition, modernitet och diversitet, Åbo, Åbo
akademis förlag; Pargas: Distribution och försälning Oy Tibo-Trading.
2009
CEHA 251
4572. Nero, K., 1997: The end of insularity, in Denoon D, et.al, eds, The Cambridge history of the
Pacific Islanders, CUP.
4573. Nettles, John, 1991: Bergerac’s Jersey, colour photography by Kim Sayer, etchings by
Michael Richecoeur, London: BBC Books.
4574. Neumann, K., 1989: Not the way it really was: writing a history of the Tolai (Papua New
Guinea), Journal of Pacific History, vol. 24(2), 209-220.
4575. Neumann, K., 1992: Not the way it really was; constructing the Tolai past, UH Press,
Honolulu.
4576. Neumann, K., 1994: In order to win their friendship...: Rewriting First contact, Contemporary
Pacific, Vol 6/1, pp.111-45.
4577. Neumann, Klaus, Nicholas Thomas, Hilary Ericksen, 1999: Quicksands: Foundational
Histories in Australia and Aotearoa New Zealand, University of New South Wales Press.
4578. New Berman, M., 1983: Arawe: a traditional Melanesian culture in modern times, Kimbe,
Papua New Guinea, Asples Productions.
4579. Newall, Venetia, 2000: “The Dutch in Shetland: their influence on the history, trade, folklife
and lore of the islands”, In Owen, Trefor M. (ed.), From Corrib to Cultra: folklife essays in
honour of Alan Gailey (Belfast: Institute of Irish Studies), 216-32.
4580. Newbury, C., 1980: Tahiti Nui: change and survival in French Polynesia, 1767-1945,
Honolulu.
4581. Newbury, C., 1980: The Melanesian labor reserve: some reflections on Pacific labor
markets in the nineteenth century, PS, vol. 4(1): 1-25
4582. Newbury, C., 1988: Spoils of war; sub-imperial collaboration in South West Africa and New
Guinea 1914-20, Journal of Imperial and Commonwealth History, Vol 16, pp.86-106
4583. Newfield, Paul, 2002: A Canary Islands Bibliography-Genealogical and Historical. (Select,
Working, Arbitrary And Expanding Bibliography, Counts, Dorothy Ayers and David
Counts 2004 The good, the bad, and the unresolved death in Kaliai, In Social Science &
Medicine, 58: 887-897.
4584. Newitt, M. D. D., 1984: The Comoro Islands: struggle against dependency in the Indian
Ocean, Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press; London, England: Gower.
4585. Newitt, M., Hintjens, H., 1992: The political economy of small tropical islands: the importance
of being small, Exeter, University of Exeter.
4586. Newitt, M.D.D, 1992: Introduction in The Political Economy of Small Tropical Islands: The
Importance of Being Smal H.M. Hintjens and M.D.D. Newitt (eds.), Exeter: University of
Exeter Press, pp. 1-17.
4587. Newitt, Malyn, 1992: The Perils of Being a Micro State: São Tomé and the Comoros Islands
Since Independence in Hintjens, H.M and Newitt, M.D.D (eds.), The Political Economy
of Small Tropical Islands The Importance of Being Small. University of Exeter Press, pp.
76-92.
4588. Newlands, David, Mike Danson, John McCarthy, 2004: Divided Scotland?: the nature,
causes, and consequences of economic disparities within Scotland, Aldershot, Hants,
England; Burlington, VT: Ashgate.
4589. Newton, D., 1988: “Oil palm: a wolf in sheep’s clothing for Oro Province”, in Bikmaus: a
Journal of Papua New Guinea Affairs, Ideas and the Arts, 4(4): 81-84.
4590. Newton, D., 1988: Reflections in Bronze. Lapita and Dong-Son Art in the Western Pacific,
2009
In: J. P. Barbier and D. Newton, Eds., Islands and Ancestors - Indigenous Styles of
Southeast Asia, New York & Geneva, Metropolitan Museum of Art, & Geneva: Musee
Barbier Mueller, pp. 10-23.
4591. Newton, J., 1983: “Oil palm: a wolf in sheep’s clothing for Oro Province”, Bikmaus: a Journal
of Papua New Guinea Affairs, Ideas and the Arts, 4(4): 81-84.
4592. Newton, John, 1999: “Colonialism above the Snowline: Baughan, Ruskin and the South
Island Myth”, in The Journal of Commonwealth Literature, Jan; vol. 34: pp. 85 - 96.
4593. Nezat, Jack Claude, 2007: The Nezat And Allied Families 1630-2007, Lulu.
4594. NGS, 1998: Islands lost in time, prepared by the Book Division, National Geographic
Society.
4595. Ní Ghuithín, Máire, 1986: Bean an Oileáin, Baile Átha Cliath, Coiscéim.
4596. Ní Shúilleabháin, Eibhlín, 2000: Cín lae Eibhlín Ní Shúilleabháin; editor Máiréad Ní
Loingsigh. Baile Átha Cliath: Coiscéim.
4597. Nibbs-O’Garro, Carmen, 2000: In de calypso tent, St. Thomas, U.S. Virgin Islands.
4598. Nic Craith, Máiréad, 1995: Primary education on the Great Blasket Island 1864-1940,
Journal of the Kerry Archaeological & Historical Society, 28, 77-137.
4599. Nicolas, F., 1997: “Mondialisation et régionalisation dans les pays en voie de développement:
les deux faces de Janus”, Politique Étrangère, Nº2, p. 293-307.
4600. Nicolas, Thierry, 1998: De l’archipel à l’appendice continental ou la logique d’intégration
de la Guadeloupe à la France continentale. Pouvoirs dans la Caraïbe, n° spécial, Fort-
de-France.
4601. Nicolas, Thierry, 2000: Les Antilles françaises entre insularité et continentalité, Géographie
et Cultures, Paris, n° 30.
4602. Nicolas, Thierry, 2001: «La circulation comme facteur díntégration nationale et d’«hypo-
insularité»: le cas des Antilles françaises», Cahiers d’outre-mer, vol. 54, no 216, pp.
397-415, Hommage à Guy Lasserre. Disponível online em URL: http://com.revues.org/
document2307.html. Consulta a 14 julho 2009.
4603. Nicolas, Thierry, 2003 : Les Antilles françaises entre insularité et «continentalité»: un essai
sur les effets de l’intégration de la Guadeloupe et de la Martinique à l’espace national et
européen, Université Paris-Sorbonne. Université de soutenance, Lille: Atelier national de
Reproduction des Thèses
4604. Nicolas, Thierry, 2005: L’hypo-insularité, une nouvelle condition insulaire: l’exemple des
Antilles françaises, Espace géographique, (Paris), octobre-décembre 2005, vol. 34, no
4, pp. 329-341.
4605. Nicolas, Thierry, 2008: «L’insularité aujourd’hui: entre mythes et réalités», Études
caribéennes, 6/2007, L’écotourisme dans la Caraïbe. Disponível online em URL: http://
etudescaribeennes.revues.org/document509.html. Consulta 29 Março 2009.
4606. Nicolas, Thomas, 1992: Liberty and license; the Forster’s accounts of New Zealand
sociality, in Calder A, Lamb J. and Orr B, eds, Voyages and beaches; Pacific encounters
1769-1840, Honolulu, UH Press, pp.132-55.
4607. Nicolet, Claude, 2001: United States Policy Towards Cyprus, 1954-1974, Bibliopolis.
4608. Nicoll, M. E.; Langrand, O., 1989: Madagascar: Revue de la Conservation et des Aires
Protégées, WWF International.
4609. Nicholas, Thomas, 1989: The indigenous appropriation of European things, in Entangled
2009
CEHA 253
objects; exchange, material culture and colonialism in the Pacific, Harvard Uni Press,
Cambridge, pp.83-124.
4610. Nicholson, A., 2002: Sea Room: An Island Life, London, Harper Collins.
4611. Nicholson, Ian Hawkins, 1990: Log of logs: a catalogue of logs, journals, shipboard diaries,
letters, and all forms of voyage narratives, 1788-1988, for Australia and New Zealand,
and surrounding oceans (Roebuck Society publication, 41, 47, 52), 3 vols, Canberra:
Australian Association for Maritime History.
4612. Niemann, M., 2000: A spatial approach to regionalisms in the global economy, Basingstoke,
Macmillan.
4613. Niezen, Ronald, 2000: Spirit Wars: Native North American Religions in the Age of Nation
Building, University of California Press.
4614. Niihara, Michinobu, 1992: Un tentativo di ragionare sulla teoria dell’ insularità e A. Merler,
Le isole, oltre i mari, entrambi, in Quaderni Bolotanesi, 18.
4615. Niihara, Michinobu, 2006:The Obscurity of Autonomia: Autonomy and Identities of the
Åland Islands, in Furuki, Toshiaki (ed.), Self-Governance of Islands in the Era of Regions:
A Comparative Study of the Åland Islands in the Baltic Sea and the Ryukyu Islands in the
East China Sea, Japan, Institute of Social Sciences, Chuo University.
4616. Nile R. and Clerk, C., 1996: The Pacific and the European imagination, in Cultural atlas of
Australia, new Zealand and the South Pacific, Sydney, RD Press, pp.98-123.
4617. Nimmo, H.A., 1986: Recent population movements in the sulu archipelago: implications to
sama culture history, Archipel, 1986, no 32, p. p. 25-38.
4618. NNDB, 2009: Sri Lanka. Subject of Books, NNDB. Disponível online em url: http://www.
nndb.com/geo/335/000080095/bibliography/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
4619. Noble, Vergil E., 1993: The archeological investigation of four lighthouse complexes at the
western end of Lake Superior. The 1988 testing program within Apostle Islands National
Lakeshore, Lincoln, Neb.: U.S. Dept. of the Interior, National Park Service, Midwest
Archeological Center.
4620. Nordqvist, K. Å., 1998: Autonomy as a conflict-solving mechanism – an overview in
Autonomy: Applications and Implications, M. Suksi (ed.), Autonomy: Applications and
Implications, The Hague: London: Kluwer Law International. pp. 59-77.
4621. Nordström, Alison Devine...[et al.], Beiträgen von, 1995: Bi, lder aus dem Paradies: koloniale
Fotografie aus Samoa, 1875-1925, herausgegeben von Jutta Beate Engelhard und Peter
Mesenhöller, Marburg: Jonas; Köln: im Auftrag der Gesellschaft für Völkerkunde, Verein
zur Förderung des Rautenstrauch-Joest-Museums der Stadt Köln.
4622. Norio, Kitano, 1985: Amakusa kaigai hattenshi, Fukuoka-shi: Ashi Shobō, Shōwa 60.
4623. Norman, Albert, The Falkland Islands, their kinship isles, the antarctic hemisphere, &
the freedom of the 2 great oceans: discovery & diplomacy, law & war, Northfield, Vt. A.
Norman.
4624. North-Coombes, Alfred, 1991: The vindication of François Leguat: first resident and
historian of Rodrigues, 1691-1693, Rose-Hill, Mauritius: Editions de l’Ocean Indien.
4625. North-Coombes, Alfred, 1994: La découverte des Mascareignes: rétrospective et mise au
point definitive, [Mauritius: s.n.], 1994 ([Port Louis]: Mauritius Print. Specialists).
4626. Northedge, F.S., 1982: “The Falkland Islands: Origins of the British Involvement”, in
International Relations, Jan; vol. 7: pp. 2167 - 2189.
2009
4627. Northrup, David, ed., 2002: The Atlantic Slave Trade, Second Edition. Boston,
Massachusetts: Houghton Mifflin Company.
4628. Norton, Robert, 1993: Ethno-nationalism and the Constitutive Power of Cultural Politics: A
Comparative Study of Sri Lanka and Fiji, Journal of Asian and African Studies, Jan; vol.
28: pp. 180 - 197.
4629. Nott, John William Frederic, Sir, 2003: Here today, gone tomorrow: recollections of an
errant politician, London: Politico’s.
4630. Nouailhat, René, 1998: Saints et patrons: les premiers moines de Lérins, Paris: Belles
lettres.
4631. Novarese, Daniela, 2003: ‘Tra Inghilterra e Francia: dichiarazione e garanzia dei diritti
fondamentali nel costituzionalismo europeo fra sette e ottocento’, Società e Storia, 26:99,
31-44.
4632. Nufer, H. F., 1978: Micronesia under American rule; an evaluation of the strategic trusteeship
1947-1977, Exposition Press.
4633. Nunes, João Manuel de Sousa, 1989: Entre a insularidade e o cosmopolitismo: a
controvérsia sobre o turismo na Grã-Bretanha dos séculos XVII e XVIII, Islenha, no 4,
Jan-Jun., p. 18-24.
4634. Nunes, João Manuel de Sousa, 1992: Imagens de insularidade na literatura, Islenha, no
9, no 11, pp.36-39, 96-103.
4635. Nunn, P.D., 1990: Recent environmental changes on Pacific Islands, The Geographical
Journal, vol. vol. 156, no 2, p. p. 125-140.
4636. Nunn, Patrick D., 1994: Oceanic islands, Oxford, UK: Cambridge, Mass., USA: Blackwell.
4637. Nunn, P., Waddell, E. (eds), 1994: The margin fades: geographical itineraries in a world of
islands, Suva, University of the South Pacific Press.
4638. Nunn, Patrick D., 1995: “Holocene tectonic histories for five islands in the south-central
Lau group, south Pacific” in The Holocene, vol. 5: pp. 160 - 171.
4639. Nunn, P. D., 1997: Pacific Island Landscapes, Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the
4640. Nunn, P.D., 2000: «Environmental Catastrophe in the Pacific Islands Around A.D. 1300»,
Geoarchaeology, 15(7), p. 715-740.
4641. Nunn, P.D., 2001: «Ecological Crises or Marginal Disruptions: the Effects of the First
Humans on Pacific Islands», New Zealand Geographer, 57(2), p. 11-20.
4642. Nunn, P.D., Britton (J. M. R.), 2001-a: «Human-Environment Relationships in the Pacific
Islands around AD 1300», Environment and History, 7, p. 3-22.
4643. Nunn, P.D., 2001: On the convergence of myth and reality: examples from the Pacific
Islands, The Geographical Journal, vol. 167, no 2, p. p. 125-138.
4644. Nunn P.D., 2003: “Fished Up or Thrown Down: The Geography of Pacific Island Origin
Myths”, in Annals of the Association of American Geographers, Volume 93, Number 2,
June, pp. 350-364(15).
4645. Nunn, P.D., 2003: Nature-Society Interactions in the Pacific Islands, Geografiska Annaler,
Vol. 85 B, No. 4, pp. 219-229.
4646. Nunn, P.D., 2004: Through a Mist on the Ocean: Human Understanding of Island
Environments, Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, Vol. 95, No. 3, pp.
311-325.
2009
CEHA 255
4647. Nunn, Patrick D., 2009: Vanished islands and hidden continents of the Pacific, Honolulu:
University of Hawaií Press.
4648. Núñez Pestaño, Juan Ramón, 2001: La Nivaria triunfante y su capital gloriosa, o, Los
orígenes del pleito insular, La Laguna: Universidad de La Laguna.
4649. Nwulia, Moses D.E., 1981: The history of slavery in Mauritius and the Seychelles, 1810-
1875, Rutherford, N.J.: Fairleigh Dickenson University Press; London: Associated
University Presses
4650. NYPL, 1984: Faroese “pamphlets”: a collection [of 47 Faroese monographs published
1891-1939, assembled by NYPL Research Libraries], New York: New York Public
Library, disponível online em url: http://freepages.genealogy.rootsweb.ancestry.
com/~brasscannon/biblio-2.pdf. Consulta a 11 de julho de 2009.
4651. Ó Cearnaigh, Seán Pheats Tom, 1992: Fiolar an eireabaill bháin, Baile Átha Cliath:
Coiscéim.
4652. Ó Ciarmhaic, Michael, 1984: Cliathan na Sceilg, Baile Átha Cliath: Coiscéim.
4653. Ó Conaire, Breandán, 2000/1: “Nótaí ar fhaisnéis bheatha as Árainn Mhór”, in Studia
Hibernica, 31, 147-67
4654. Ó Conaola, Máirtín, b., 1994: Scéalta Mháirtín Neile: bailiúchán scéalta ó Árainn - Holger
Pedersen, a thóg síos sa bhliain 1895; Ole Munch-Pedersen a chóirigh agus a chuir in
eagar. Baile Átha Claith: Comhairle Bhéaloideas Éireann, An Coláiste Ollscoile.
4655. Ó Conghaile, Micheál, 1988: Conamara agus Árainn, 1880-1980: gnéithe den stair
shóisialta, Béal an Daingin: Cló Iar-Chonnachta.
4656. Ó Conluain, Proinsias, (ed.). 1983: Islands and authors: pen-pictures of life past and
present on the islands of Ireland, Dublin and Cork: Mercier Press in association with
Radio Telefís Éireann.
4657. Ó Criomhthain, Seán, 1997: Cleití gé ón mBlascaod Mór, in eagar ag Pádraig Ó Fiannachta,
An Daingean [Kerry, Ireland], An Sagart.
4658. Ó Dubhshláine, Mícheál, 2003: A dark day on the Blaskets: the drowning of Domhnall Ó
Criomhthain and Eibhlín Nic Niocaill on the Blasket Islands, 1909. Dingle: Brandon.
4659. Ó Gallchoir, Micheál (An Cope), 1986: “Inis Caorach”, in Donegal Annual, 38 (1986), 87-
89.
4660. Ó hEithir, Breandán; Ó hEithir, Ruairí (ed.), 1991: An Aran reader, Dublin: Lilliput Press.
4661. Ó Mainnín, Mícheál B., 1989-90: The element island in Ulster place-names, Ainm, (Ulster
Place-Name Society), 4, 200-210.
4662. Ó Muircheartaigh, Aogán (ed.), 1989: Oidhreacht an Bhlascaoid, Baile Átha Cliath:
Coiscéim.
4663. O.R.S.T.O.M, 1983: Profession, Géographe: Pratique De La Recherche Tropicale,
Laboratoire De Sociologie Et Géographie Africaines, L.A. 94 (CNRS-EHESS) [Et] Office
De La Recherche Scientifique Et Technique Outre-Mer, O.R.S.T.O.M., Paris:
4664. O’Brien, R., 1992: Global financial integration: the end of geography, Londres, Pinter
Publishers.
4665. O’Connell, Monique, 2004: “The Venetian Patriciate in the Mediterranean: Legal Identity
and, and lineage in fifteenth-century Venetian Crete, Renaissance Quarterly, Summer,
2004. Disponível online em url: http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_hb3394/is_2_57/ai_
n29094688/. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009.
2009
4666. O’Crohan, Tomas, 2000: The Islandman, New York: Oxford UP.
4667. O’Donnell, D., 1993: The Pacific guano islands; the stirring of American empire in the
Pacific Ocean, PS, 16, 1, 43-66.
4668. Oakes, Amy, 2006: Diversionary War and Argentina’s Invasion of the Falkland Islands,
Security Studies, 15:3, 431-63.
4669. Oakes, Betsy, 1992: Workers in the British Virgin Islands: the complexities of residence
and migration, Social and economic studies, vol. 41, no 1, pp. 67-87.
4670. Oakley, Derek, 2002: The Falklands military machine, Staplehurst: Spellmount.
4671. Oberling, Pierre, 1982: The Road to Bellapais, Columbia University Press.
4672. Oberti, Georges, 1990: Pasquale de’ Paoli, Editions Pasquale de’ Paoli.
4673. Obeyesekere, G., 1992: The apotheosis of Captain Cook; European mythmaking in the
Pacific, Princeton University Pres
4674. Obrecht, Andreas J., 2006: Geschichten aus anderen Welten: eine Reise nach Neuguinea
und Inselmelanesien, Ostafrika, Nepal und die südöstliche Karibik, Wien, Köln, Weimar,
Böhlau.
4675. O’Brien, Brigid, 1986-87: “Islandmore”, in Cois Deirge, 2-5.
4676. O’Brien, Denise; Tiffany, Sharon W. edited by, 1984: Rethinking women’s roles: perspectives
from the Pacific, Berkeley: University of California Press.
4677. O’Brien, Patty, 2006: The Pacific muse: exotic femininity and the colonial Pacific, Seattle:
University of Washington Press.
4678. O’Brien, William, 1995: Ross Island - the beginning, Archaeology Ireland, 11:1, 24-27.
4679. O’Brien, William, 2004: Ross Island: mining metal and society in early Ireland (Bronze age
studies, 6), Galway: National University of Ireland.
4680. O’Carroll, Cian, 1988: Iniscathaigh Scattery island myth, miracle and legend, in The Other
Clare, 12, 18-20.
4681. OCDE, 1993: Intégration régionale et pays en développement, Paris, OCDE.
4682. OCDE, 1998: Migrations, libre-échange et intégration régionale dans le bassin
méditerranéen, Paris, OCDE.
4683. Ochiai, Tadashi, 1992: Hoppō ryōdo mondai: sono rekishiteki jijitsu, hōri, seijiteki
haikei,Tōkyō: Bunka Shobō Hakubunsha.
4684. Ocho Brun, Miguel Ángel, 2001: España y las Islas Griegas: una visión histórica, Madrid:
Ministerio de Asuntos Exteriores, Secretaría General Técnica.
4685. Ochs, Elinor, 1988: Culture and language development: language acquisition and language
socialization in a Samoan village, Cambridge [Cambridgeshire]; New York: Cambridge
University Press.
4686. Ocock, John Greville Agard, 2005: The discovery of islands: essays in British history,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
4687. O’Collins, Maev., 1984: Youth in Papua New Guinea: with reference to Fiji, Solomon Islands
and Vanuatu, Canberra, ACT: Dept. of Political and Social Change, Research School of
Pacific Studies, Australian National Univerity.
4688. O’Crohan, Seán, 1992: A day in our life; translated by Tim Enright. Oxford: Oxford University
Press.
2009
CEHA 257
4689. Oda Fujio hen, 1998: Okinoshima to kodai saisi, Tōkyō: Yoshikawa Kōbunkan, Shōwa 63.
4690. ODIT-France, 2009: Tourisme durable dans les îles: protéger, développer, valoriser / ODIT
France, Observation, développement et ingénierie touristiques France, Paris: ODIT
France.
4691. Odouard, Albert, 1992: Les Iles Canaries, terres d’Europe au large de l’Afrique, sous la
direction de Max Derruau, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université Blaise Pascal
(Clermont-Ferrand). Université de soutenance, [Clermond-Ferrand]: [s.n.].
4692. Odouard, Albert; Huetz de Lemps, Alain (pref.), 1995: Les Iles Canaries: Terres d’Europe
au large de l’Afrique, Bordeaux: CRET, coll. “Îles et archipels”, n°20.
4693. O’Driscoll, F., 2000: Ils ne siégent pas à l’ONU: revue de quelques micro-Etats, micro-
nations et autres entités éphémères, Toulon: Presses du Midi.
4694. Ofcansky, T.P., 1995: Strategic Considerations in Indian Ocean: five island countries (pp.
285-332), H. Chapin Metz (ed.). Washington DC: GPO.
4695. Ogan, E., 1996: Copra came before copper; the Nasioi of Bougainville and plantation
colonialism 1902-1964, PS, 19,1, pp.31-51.
4696. Ogashiwa, Y., 1991: Microstates and nuclear issues; regional cooperation in the Pacific,
IPS/Usp.
4697. Ogier, D. M. (Darryl Mark), 1996: 1962 - Reformation and society in Guernsey, Woodbridge
and Rochester (NY): Boydell.
4698. Ogier, D. M. (Darryl Mark), 2005: The government and law of Guernsey, Guernsey: States
of Guernsey.
4699. Oglethorpe, M., 1984: Tourism in Malta: a crisis of dependence, Leisure Studies, 3, pp.147-
162.
4700. O’Hanlon, M., 1995: “Medusa’s Art. Interpreting Melanesian Shields” In: Tavarelli, Ed.
Protection Power and Display, Shields of Island Southeast Asia and Melanesia. Boston,
Boston College Museum of Art, pp. 74-104.
4701. O’Hanlon, Michael; Welsch, Robert L., 2000: Hunting the gatherers: ethnographic collectors,
agents and agency in Melanesia, 1870s-1930s, New York; Oxford: Berghahn Books.
4702. Ohnemus, Sylvia, 1998: Zur Kultur der Admiralitäts-Insulaner in Melanesien English An
ethnology of the Admiralty Islanders: the Alfred Bühler Collection, Museum der Kulturen,
Basel,[translation, Robert Williamson; editing, Christian Kaufmann, Antje Denner,
Norma Stephenson; maps, Rudolf Zimmerman; drawings, Susanna Gisin Zimmerman;
photographs, Peter Horner ... et al.) Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press.
4703. Ohno, S., [et al.], 1989: “The Scolytidae and Platypodidae (Coleoptera) from Bismarck
Archipelago found in logs at Nagoya port”, in Research Bulletin of the Plant Protection
Service, Japan, No. 25: 59-69.
4704. Okihiro, Gary Y., 2001: The Columbia Guide to Asian American History, Columbia University
Press.
4705. Ōkuma, Ryōichi, 1985: Ogasawara Shotō ikokusen raikōki Tōkyō, Kondō Shuppansha,
Shōwa 60.
4706. Olafsson, À., 2000: ‘Constitutionalism and Economics in the Faroes’ in G. Baldacchino & D.
Milne (eds.) Lessons from the Political Economy of Small Islands: The Resourcefulness
of Jurisdiction, Basingstoke, Macmillan, pp. 121-140.
4707. Olaneta, José J. de, Editor. 1982: Leyendas, tradiciones, cuentos fabulosos y otros relatos
2009
fantasticos de las islas Cabrera, Formentera, Elivissa, Menorca y Mallorca, Barcelona.

4708. Olausson, P. M., 2007: Aspects of Autonomy – The European Island Regions. Unpublished
Paper Presented at the 2nd International Conference on Regional Autonomy and Ethnic
Minorities, Uppsala, Sweden. Disponível online em URL: em https://oa.doria.fi/bitstream/
handle/10024/33681/OlaussonPar.pdf?sequence=2. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
4709. Olesen, Thorsten B., 2004: The Cold War and the Nordic countries: historiography at a
crossroads, Edição de University Press of Southern Denmark.
4710. Oliveira, Alexandre M. Teixeira Guedes da S., 2001: «Sistemas Defensivos na Costa
Portuguesa: Engenheiros e Construtores do Estado Moderno», pp. 341-351, Avelino de
Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso
de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de
1999, vol.I, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações
4711. Oliveira, J. A. de, 1992: The autonomous region of Madeira in The political administrative
systems of the European Island Regions, Ponta Delgada: Regional Secretariat for Internal
Administration.
4712. Oliver, Douglas L., 1981: Two Tahitian villages: a study in comparisons, Laie, Hawaii:
Institute for Polynesian Studies.
4713. Oliver, Douglas L. 1989: The Pacific Island, Third Edition. Honolulu: University of Hawaii
Press.
4714. Oliver, Douglas L., 1989a: Native cultures of the Pacific islands, Honolulu: University of
Hawaii Press.
4715. Oliver, Douglas L., 1989b: Oceania: the native cultures of Australia and the Pacific Islands,
illustrations by Lois Johnson, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press.
4716. Oliver, Douglas L., 2002: Polinesia in Early Historic Times, Honolulu, The Bess Press.
4717. Oliver, José M. y Alberto Relancio (eds.), 2007: El descubrimiento científico de las Islas
Canarias, La Orotava, Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Fundación Canaria Orotava de Historia
de la Ciencia.
4718. Olivesi, C., 1990: Une gestion périphérique du politique: l’exemple corse, Actes, n° 69,
janvier.
4719. Olivesi, C., Pastorel, J.P., 1990: La place de la Corse dans la coopération Méditerranéenne,
Revue administrative, n° 255, mai-juin.
4720. Olivesi, C., Pastorel, J.P., 1991: Pour la coopération transfrontalière Corse-Sardaigne,
Revue administrative, mai-juin.
4721. Olivesi, C., Pastorel, J.-P., 1992: Statut de la Corse: vers un droit commun des îles
communautaires ? , Revue administrative, juillet-août.
4722. Olivesi, C., 1992: Statut de la Corse vers un droit commun des îles communautaires?,
Revue administrative, n° 268, juillet-août.
4723. Olivesi, C., 1995: Corse contestataire, état, Europe in identité et politique de la caraïbe et
de l’Europe multiculturelle, Economica, Paris.
4724. Olivesi, C., 1998: The failure of regionalist party formation in Corsica in Regionalist parties
in western Europ’, ECPR/Rountledge, London.
4725. Olivier, Anne, 1983: Les bignoniacées à Taiwan: problèmes de l’insularité; sous la dir. de
J. Garnier, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse d’exercice: Pharmacie: Rouen.
2009
CEHA 259
4726. Olivier, Isabelle, 2005: Odyssées arthuriennes: aventures et insularité dans les romans
arthuriens (XIIe-XIIIe siècles), thèse présentée par; sous la direction de Philippe Walter,
Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), [Grenoble]: [Université Stendhal Grenoble 3].
4727. Olmos Giupponi, María Belén, 2006: Derechos humanos e integración en América Latina
y el Caribe, Valencia: Tirant lo Blanch: Publicacions Universitat de València.
4728. Olson, S. L., 1982: ‘Biological archeology in the West Indies’, The Florida Anthropologist,
35(4): 162-8.
4729. Olson, S. L. e James, H. F., 1984: ‘The role of Polynesians in the extinction of the avifauna
of the Hawaiian islands’, in P. S. Martis e R. G. Klein (orgs.), Quaternary extinctions: a
prehistoric revolution, Tucson, University of Arizona Press, pp. 768-80.
4730. Olson, S. L., 1989: ‘Extinction on islands: man as a catastrophe’, in D. Western e M. Pearl
(orgs.), Conservation for the twenty-first century, Nova York, Oxford University Press.
4731. Olson, S. L. 1990: ‘The prehistoric impact of man on biogeographical patterns of insular
birds’, Atti Convegni Lincei, 85: 45-51.
4732. Olwig, Karen Fog, 1980: Vestinderne: fra dansk slaveri til amerikansk masse-turisme
Holte: Skarv; [København]: [eksp. DBK].
4733. Olwig, Karen Fog, 1985: Cultural adaptation and resistance on St. John: three centuries of
Afro-Caribbean life, Gainesville: University of Florida Press.
4734. Olwig, Karen Fog edited by. 1995: Small islands, large questions: society, culture, and
resistance in the post-Emancipation Caribbean, London; Portland, Or.:F. Cass.
4735. Olwig. edited by Karen,1995: Fog Small islands, large questions: society, culture, and
resistance in the post-Emancipation Caribbean, London; Portland, Or.: F. Cass.
4736. O’Malley, Brendan and Ian Craig, 1999: The Cyprus Conspiracy, I.B. Tauris
4737. O’Malley, Brendan and Ian Craig, 2001: The Cyprus Conspiracy: America, Espionage and
the Turkish Invasion, I.B.Tauris,
4738. Ommer, Rosemary E., 1991: From outpost to outport: a structural analysis of the Jersey-
Gaspé cod fishery, 1767-1886, Montreal; Buffalo: McGill-Queen’s University Press.
4739. O’Neal, Eugenia, 2001: From the Field to the Legislature: A History of Women in the Virgin
Islands, Greenwood Press.
4740. O’Neil, Carle F., Pacific Memories: Montana National Guardsmen Recall the Fighting on
New Guinea in World War II, Montana, 52 (Summer), 48-57. Disponível online em url:
http://www.visitmt.com/history/Pacific_Memories.asp. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
4741. O’Neill, T., 1961: And We, the People; Ten Years With the Primitive Tribes of New Guinea,
New York, Kennedy.
4742. Ono, Jūrō, 1982: Amami minzoku bunka no kenkyū, Tōkyō: Hōsei Daigaku Shuppankyoku.
4743. ONU, 1988: Le Droit de la mer. Régime des îles: Travaux préparatoires concernant la
partie VIII (article 121) de la Convention des Nations Unies sur le droit de la mer, Nations
Unies.
4744. Oostindie, G. & Klinkers, I., 2003: ‘The Perpetuation of the Transatlantic Kingdom since
1975’ in G. Oostindie & I. Klinkers (eds.) Decolonizing the Caribbean: Dutch Policies in a
Comparative Perspective, Amsterdam, Amsterdam University Press, pp. 118-152.
4745. Oostindie, Gert, Inge Klinkers, 2003: Decolonising the Caribbean: Dutch policies in a
comparative perspective, Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press.
2009
4746. Oostindie, G., 2006: “Dependence and Autonomy in Sub-National Island Jurisdictions: The
Case of the Kingdom of the Netherlands. The Round Table: The Commonwealth Journal
of International Affairs, Vol. 95, No. 386, pp. 609-626.
4747. Oraison, A., 2001: “La protection de l’environnement terrestre et marin des îles Éparses: le
cas du récif de Tromelin, de l’archipel des Glorieuses et des îlots Juan de Nova, Europa
et Bassas da India”, Revue juridique et politique, indépendance et coopération, n°1, p.
78-87.
4748. Orbell, Margaret; Finnegan, Ruth, edited by, 1995: South Pacific oral traditions, Bloomington
: Indiana University Press.
4749. Ordinas Garau, Antoni, 1994: Actualització del recull bibliogràfic de toponímia i antroponímia
de les Illes Balears, compilador; pròleg de Climent Picornell, Palma: Universitat de les
Illes Balears.
4750. O’Reilly, Jennifer, 2005: ‘Islands and idols at the ends of the earth: exegesis and conversion
in Bede’s “Historia ecclesiastica”’. In Lebecq, Stéphane; Perrin, Michel; Szerwiniack,
Olivier (ed.), Bède le vénérable entre tradition et postérité = The venerable Bede, tradition
and posterity : colloque, Villeneuve d’Ascq et Amiens, du 3 au 6 juillet 2002 (Histoire de
l’Europe du Nord-Ouest, 34) (Villeneuve d’Ascq: Université Charles de Gaulle), 119-45.
4751. O’Reilly, Patrick, 1980: Calédoniens: repertoire bio-bibliographique de la Nouvelle-
Calédonie. 2d ed. Paris: Société dês Océanistes; Musée de l’Homme.
4752. Orfila Pons, Margarita, Miguel Angel Cau Ontiveros, (coord.); Lorenzo Abad Casal ... [et
al.]. 2004: Les Ciutats romanes del llevant peninsular i les Illes Balears, Barcelona, Pòrtic.
4753. Orfila, Jaume Murillo, M. Magdalena Riera Frau, Natàlia Soberats Sagreras, 1997: Sobre
ceràmica: dades per a una bibliografia de la ceràmica a les Illes Balears, Palma Mallorca,
Consejería de Cultura, Educación y Deportes.
4754. Orgill, Andrew, 1993: The Falklands War: background, conflict, aftermath: an annotated
bibliography, London; New York: Mansell.
4755. Orihuela, A. ...[et al.], 1992: De la República a la Guerra Civil en Las Palmas, Las Palmas:
Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de Publicaciones.
4756. Orizio, Riccardo, 2001: Lost White Tribes: The End of Privilege and the Last Colonials in
Sri Lanka, Jamaica, Brazil, Haiti, Namibia, and Guadeloupe, New York: Free Press.
4757. Orotky, K. N. G.; S. Ulerzhitsky, A. M., [et al.], 1998: “Holocene tephra of Kunashir I.
(Kuril. Islands). Volcanology and Seismology”, in The Holocene, 20, 49–63.
4758. Orr, Katherine Shelley, 1983: The natural world of the Turks and Caicos Islands, edited by
Jane Allison Halaby, [S.l. : s.n.], c1983 (Rockville, Md.: McCollum Press).
4759. Orsini, L., 1993: La Corse et la construction européenne: à la recherche d’un statut
économique et fiscal insulaire, Revue de science administrative de la Méditerranée
occidentale.
4760. Orta Galindo, Cosme, 2008: Islas salvajes, Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Unión de Profesionales
de la Comunicación de Canarias.
4761. Ortalli. Gherardo, 2005: Venezia e le Isole Ionie / a cura di Chryssa Maltezou, Venezia:
Istituto veneto di scienze, lettere ed arti.
4762. Osario, J. K., 2001: What kine Hawaiian are you?; a Mo’olelo about nationhood, race,
history and the contemporary sovereignty movement in Hawai’i, TCP, 13, 2 ,359-80.
4763. Osborne, Elizabeth, 1997: Torres Strait Islander women and the Pacific War, Canberra,
Aboriginal Studies Press.
2009
CEHA 261
4764. Osborne, Milton, 2000: Southeast Asia: An Introductory History. Allen & Unwin.
4765. Osborne, Robin, 1985: Indonesia’s secret war: the guerilla struggle in Irian Jaya, Sydney.
4766. O’Shaughnessy, Andrew Jackson, 2000: An Empire Divided - The American Revolution
and the British Caribbean, University of Pennsylvania Press, Philadelphia.
4767. Ōshuri, Rabu, Uehara Masatoshi; kanshū Teruya Yoshihiko, 1987: Aoi me ga mita “Dai
Ryūkyū” = Great Lewchew discovered: 19th century Ryukyu in western art and illustration,
Naha-shi: Niraisha; Yamaguchi-ken Shimonoseki-shi: Hatsubaimoto Shin Nihon Kyōiku
Tosho.
4768. Osifelo, Frederick Sir, 1985, 1986: Kanaka boy: an autobiography, Suva, Institute of Pacific
Studies and the Solomon Islands Extension Centre of the University of the South Pacific.
4769. Osman, Amina, 1997: le discours social et l’imaginaire litteraire dans la litterature
mauricienne de langue francaise; sous la direction de charles bonn, Mémoire ou thèse
(version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Litterature Comparee: Paris 13.
4770. Ospina, Pablo, 2001: Identidades en Galápagos: el sentimiento de una diferencia, Quito,
Ecuador: Ediciones Trama.
4771. Ospina, Pablo y Cecilia Falconí, editores, 2007: Galápagos: migraciones, economía,
cultura, conflictos y acuerdos, Quito, Ecuador: Corporación Editora Nacional: Universidad
Andina Simón Bolívar.
4772. Ospital, Isabelle, 1989: Peuplement et population dans le Pacifique Sud-Ouest: Nouvelle-
Caledonie, Iles Salomon, Vanuatu, Bordeaux: Universite de Bordeaux 3, Uer de
Geographie.
4773. Osterling, J.P., 1987: The Society and Its Environment in Cuba: a country study (pp. 63-
108). Rudolph, J.D. (ed.). Washington DC: GPO.
4774. O’Sullivan, Ted, 1992: Bere Island: a short history, Cork: Inisgragy Books.
4775. Ōta, Masahide, 1985: Okinawa no teiō kōtō benmukan, Tōkyō.
4776. Ōta, Ryū, 1982: Nihon genjūmin to tennōsei, Tōkyō: Shinsensha.
4777. Ott, Kerstin, 1993: Die Utopie der glücklichen Inseln: Wandlungen und Konstanten im
Werk von James Krüss, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine).
4778. Ottenheimer, Martin and Harriet, 1994: Historical dictionary of the Comoro Islands,
Metuchen, N. J.: Scarecrow Press.
4779. Ottino, Pierre, 1985: “Développements et enjeux sociaux en Nouvelle-Calédonie: l’opération
café”, in Les Temps Modernes, 41 (464), p. 1623-1653.
4780. Ottino, Pierre, 1985: “Un site ancien aux îles Marquises: l’abri-sous-roche d’Anapua, à Ua
Pou”, in Journal de la Société des Océanistes, 41 (80), p. 33-37.
4781. Ottino, Pierre, 1985: Archéologie des îles Marquises: contribution à la connaissance de
l’île de Ua Pou, Paris: Univ. Paris 1.
4782. Ottley, Earle B., 1982: Trials and triumphs: the long road to a middle class society in the
U.S. Virgin Islands, Charlotte Amalie, St. Thomas: E.B. Ottley.
4783. Otto, T.; Turner, J.; Filer, C., 1990: “The Sociology of Baitfish Royalties in Papua New
Guinea”, in Occasional Paper No.6, Department of Anthropology and Sociology, University
of Papua New Guinea.
4784. Oueslati, Ameur, 1986: Jerba et Kerkna: (îles de la côte orientale de la Tunisie: leur
évolution géomorphologique au cours du quartenaire, [Tunis], Université de Tunis.
2009
4785. Ouessant; [par l’association Bibliographie de Bretagne et l’Asociation Culture, arts et lettres
des îles], 2001: Quimper: Bibliographie de Bretagne; Ouessant: Association Culture, arts
et lettres des îles.
4786. Ouou, Emulio-Ree, 1980: History of South Malaita, Origin of Livings, Centre and Diameter
of the Universe, Honiara: Government Printer.
4787. Overlack, P., 1992: Australian defence awareness and German naval planning in the
Pacific 1900-1914, War and Society, Vol 10, 1, pp.37-51.
4788. Overlack, P., 1998: Bless the Queen and curse the colonial office; Australasian reaction to
German consolidation in the Pacific 1871-99, Jornal of Pacific History, Vol 33, 2, pp.133-
52.
4789. Overton, J.D., 1987: Roads, rice and cane regional planning and rural development in
western vanua levu, Fiji, Pacific Viewpoint, vol. vol. 28, no 1, pp. 40-54.
4790. Overton, J., 1993: “Small states, big issues? Human geography in the Pacific islands”,
Singapore journal of Tropical Geography, n°2, p. 265-276.
4791. Owen, R.E., Witt, S. and Gammon, S., 1993: Sustainable tourism development in Wales:
From theory to practice, Tourism Management, 14(3), pp.463-474.
4792. Oxford Univ, 2001: Imperialism and Nationalism: Maritime Southeast Asia: Malaysia,
Indonesia and the Philippines, 1830-1966. Disponível online em url: http://www.history.
ox.ac.uk/currentunder/bibliographies/fhs-fs-imperialism_maritime_se_asia.pdf. Consulta
4793. Paci, R., 1997: Crescita economica e sistemi produttivi locali in Sardegna, Cagliari,
Cooperativa Universitaria Editrice Cagliaritana.
4794. Pacific Information Centre (Suva, Fiji). Lisitala, 1984: A Bibliography of Pacific Writers.
Suva, Fiji: Pacific Information Centre.
4795. Padrão Temudo, Marina, 2008: “De serviçal a camponês: A persistência das desigualdades
sociais em São Tomé e Principe”, in Lusotopie, vol. XV, no 2, p. 71-93.
4796. Padrón, Francisco Morales, 1989: Canarias y América, prólogo por Fernando Fernández
Martín, Madrid: Gela: Espasa-Calpe/Argantonio.
4797. Padrón, Francisco Morales, transcripción, estudio y notas. 1993: Canarias: crónicas de su
conquista, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
4798. Pagán Jiménez, Jaime R., 2007: De antiguos pueblos y culturas botánicas en el Puerto
Rico indígena: el archipiélago borincano y la llegada de los primeros pobladores
agroceramistas, Oxford: Archaeopress / John and Erica Hedges Ltd..
4799. Page, S.J. and Thom, K.J., 1997: Towards sustainable tourism planning in New Zealand:
Public sector responses, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 5 (1), pp.59-77.
4800. Page, S. (ed.), 2000: Regions and development: politics, security and economics, Londres,
Frank Cass.
4801. Page, S., 2000: Regionalism among developing countries, Basingstoke, Macmillan.
4802. Pagni, Lucien; Zens, Stefan, 1989: Tuvlu, sans ressources et sans misere - la douceur de
vie polynesienne, Le Courrier Afrique Caraibes Pacifique Communaute Europeenne, no
114, pp. 48-55.
4803. Paiewonsky, Isidor, 1987, 1989: Eyewitness accounts of slavery in the Danish West Indies:
also graphic tales of other slave happenings on ships and plantations, New York: Fordham
University Press.
2009
CEHA 263
4804. Paiewonsky, Micahel, 1990: Conquest of Eden, 1493-1515: other voyages of Columbus,
Guadeloupe, Puerto Rico, Hispaniola, Virgin Islands, Rome: St Thomas: MAPes MONDe,
Editore.
4805. Pain, C. F.; Specht, F., 1985: Tectonic stability of West New Britain; evidence from cave
sediments, Search Sydney, 1511-12: 343-344.
4806. Paine, S.C.M, 2002: The Sino-Japanese War of 1894–1895: Perceptions, Power, and
Primacy, London: Cambridge University Press.
4807. Painter, Kenneth, edited by. 1994: Rosemary Cramp -- The archaeology of the early
church in the Channel Islands, in Churches built in ancient times: recent studies in early
Christian archaeology, London: Society of Antiquaries of London: Accordia Research
Centre, University of London.
4808. Palard, J., 1998: Vers l’Europe des régions? , La documentation française, Paris.
4809. Palermo, V., 2007: Sal en las heridas: las Malvinas en la cultura argentina contemporánea,
Buenos Aires: Sudamericana.
4810. Paletti, C., 1999: Un’operazione riuscita: Corsica settembre 1943 em Memorie storiche
militari, Ufficio Storico Stato Maggiore Esercito, Roma.
4811. Palfreyman, W. D., R. W. Johnson, R. J. S. Cooke, R. J. Bultitude and (compiled by), 1986:
Volcanic activity in Papua New Guinea before 1944: an annotated bibliography of reported
observations, Department of Resources and Energy, Bureau of Mineral Resources,
Geology and Geophysics, Canberra, Australian Government Publishing Service.
4812. Palley, Claire, 2005: An International Relations Debacle: The UN Secretary-General’s
Mission of Good Offices in Cyprus, 1999-2004, Hart Publishing.
4813. Palmer, Margaret 1983: The mapping of Bermuda: a bibliography of printed maps & charts,
1548, London: Holland Press; Pembroke, Bermuda: Sole distribution in Bermuda through
Nicholas Lusher.
4814. Palmié, edited by Stephan, 2008: Africas of the Americas: beyond the search for origins in
the study of Afro-Atlantic religions, Leiden; Boston: Brill.
4815. Pálsson, Gísli, Guđrún Pétursdóttir, 1997: Social implications of quota systems in fisheries:
proceedings of a seminar held in the Vestman Islands in May 1996, Copenhagen, Nordic
Council of Ministers, c1997.
4816. Panagariya, A., 1999: The regionalism debate: an overview, The World economy, n°4, p.
477-513.
4817. Pancorbo, Luis, 2006: Las islas del rey Salomón: en busca de la Tierra Austral, Barcelona:
Laertes.
4818. Pandey, Gauri Shankar, 2000: Patriots of Andaman in freedom struggle movement, 1942-
1945, Port Blair: Sangeeta Pub. House for Homfraygunj Martyrs Memorial Committee.
4819. Pandya, Vishvajit, 1993: Above the forest: a study of Andamanese ethnoanemology,
cosmology, and the power ritual, Delhi; New York: Oxford University Press.
4820. Panikkar, K., 1999: Regionalism and World Security, India Quaterly, n°3/4, p. 131-136.
4821. Panoff, M.; Farani Taioro, 1981: La premiere generation des colons Francais a Tahiti,
Journal de la Societe des Oceanistes, vol. vol. 37, no 70-71, p. p. 3-26.
4822. Panoff, M., 1985: Du travail villageois au travail en plantation, Techniques et Culture, 5:
125-137.
4823. Panoff, M.; 1987: Y Eut-il des esclaves en nouvelle-Bretagne: une critique des temoignages,
2009
Journal de la Societe des Oceanistes, no 85, p. p. 133-155.

4824. Panoff, M. 1994: “L’Art d’Etre Grand-Mere chez les Maenge”, in Journal de la Société des
Océanistes, 98 ?(1): 1-8.
4825. Panoff, M. 1994/95: “Workers, recruiters and planters in the Bismarck Archipelago, 1885-
1914” in The Journal of Pacific Studies, 18: 32-65.
4826. Panoff, Michel, sous la direction. 1995: Trésors des îles Marquises, Paris: Réunion des
Musées nationaux.
4827. Pantin, D., 1997: Alternative Ecological Vulnerability Indices for Developing Countries
with Special Reference to Small Island Developing States (SIDS), Report for the United
Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Sustainable Economic Development
Unit. Trinidad, University of West Indies.
4828. Papadakis, N., 1977: The international legal regime of artificial islands, Leyden: Sijthoff.
4829. Papadakis, Yiannis, 2005: Echoes from the Dead Zone: Across the Cyprus Divide, London-
New York: I.B. Tauris
4830. Papoutsaki, E. and Sundar Harris, U., 2008: Unpacking ‘Islandness’ in South Pacific Islands
Communication. In Papoutsaki and Sundar Harris, South Pacific Islands Communication:
Regional perspectives, local issues Singapore: AMIC. Disponível online em URL: http://
kauri.aut.ac.nz:8080/dspace/bitstream/123456789/197/1/comm_intro.pdf. Consulta em 11
de Julho de 2009, pp. 1-12.
4831. Papua New Guinea Oil Palm Research Association, 1990: Annual report 1989, Kimbe,
Papua New Guinea Oil Palm Research Association.
4832. Papua New Guinea, 1982/3: National Nutrition Survey: Provincial Tabulation West New
Britain Province, Goroka and Boroko, Papua New Guinea Institute of Medical Research
and Nutrition Section, National Department of Health.
4833. Papua New Guinea, 1980: West New Britain Province, Preliminary Field Counts, National
Census.
4834. Papua New Guinea, National Statistical Office, 1982: West New Britain Province, Provincial
Data System Rural Community Register P.O. Wardstrip, Papua New Guinea.
4835. Paquette, R.L. and S.L. Engerman, 1996: The Lesser Antilles in the Age of European
Expansion, Gainesville: University press of Florida.
4836. Paraskevopoulos, Christos J., 2001: Interpreting convergence in the European Union:
patterns of collective action, social learning, and Europeanization, Houndmills,
Basingstoke, Hampshire ; New York: Palgrave.
4837. Paravisini-Gebert, edited by Lizabeth and Ivette Romero-Cesareo, 2008: Displacements
and transformations in Caribbean cultures, Gainesville: University Press of Florida.
4838. Paravisini-Gebert, Lizabeth, 2008: Literature of the Caribbean, Westport, Conn.:
Greenwood Press.
4839. Parfit, Michael, 2003: “Islands of the Pacific”, National Geographic, 203 (March): 106–125.
4840. Parfitt, R. L.; Scotter, D. R., 1972: “Note on the water characteristics and mineralogy of
a soil containing diagnostic pumice”, in The Papua New Guinea Agricultural Journal,
23(1/2): 9-11.
4841. Parish, Michael Woodbine, 1993: Aegean adventures 1940-43: and the end of Churchill’s
dream, Sussex, England: Book Guild.
4842. Parker, Jason C., 2008: Brother’s keeper: the United States, race, and empire in the British
2009
CEHA 265
Caribbean, 1937-1962, Oxford; New York: Oxford University Press.

4843. Parker, R. S., 1995: Appraising the colonial record; Australia in Papua New Guinea, Lal BV
and Nelson H, eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post-colonial Pacific,
Brisbane, PHA, pp.9-24.
4844. Parkinson, Richard, 1986: Ethnography of Ontong Java and Tasman Islands with remarks
re. The Marqueen and Abgarris Islands, translated by Rose S. Hartmann; introduced and
annotated by Richard Feinberg, Pacific Studies, 9(3):1-31.
4845. Parkinson, Richard, 1999: Thirty years in the South Seas: land and people, customs and
traditions in the Bismarck Archipelago and on the German Solomon Islands, edited by B.
Ankermann; translated by John Dennison; translation edited by J. Peter White, Bathurst,
N.S.W.: Crawford House Publishing in association with Oceania Publications, University
of Sydney.
4846. Parmentier, R. J., 1991: The rhetoric of free association and Palau’s political struggle, The
Contemporary Pacific, 3, 1, 146-58.
4847. Parmentier, Jan, 1997: To the Dogger Bank, the Faroes and Iceland. A joint stock fishing
company in Nieuport, 1727-1737, In Holm, Poul; Janzen, Olaf Uwe (ed.), Northern Seas
Yearbook (Fiskeri- og sofartsmuseets studieserie, 10), Esbjerg: Fiskeri- og Søfartsmuseet,
39-56.
4848. Parmentier, Jan, 1999: «The Cape Verde Islands and the Azores as Ports of Call in the
Dutch and Flemish East India Trade During the 17th and 18th Centuries», Avelino de
Freitas de Meneses (ed.) Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso
de Vasco da Gama a Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de
1999, 2 vols., s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional, pp. 257-280.
4849. Parr, J. F., C. Lentfer and W. E. Boyd, 2001: “Spatial patterning of a Lapita landscape at an
archaeological site in the West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea”, Domodomo,
13(2): 7-18.
4850. Parsons, James Jerome, edited by William M. Denevan, 1989: Hispanic lands and peoples:
selected writings of James J. Parsons, Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press.
4851. Parsons, Michael, 2002: “The South Atlantic conflict of 1982: a test for Anglo-American
relations”, in Revue française de civilisation britannique, 12:1, 85-100.
4852. Partridge, C.; Davenport, T. G., 1992: Fortifications of Alderney: a concise history and
guide to the defences of Alderney from Roman times to the second world war, Alderney.
4853. Partridge, Colin; Davenport, Trevor, 1993: The fortifications of Alderney, Alderney, Channel
Islands: Published on behalf of the Alderney Fortifications Centre, by Alderney Publishers.
4854. Partridge, Michael Stephen, 1986: “The defence of the Channel Islands, 1814-1870”,
in Journal of the Society for Army Historical Research, 64, Publisher: Society for Army
Historical Research, 34-42.
4855. Pasqualini, Michel (dir.), 2003: Des îles côte à côte: Histoire du peuplement des îles de
l’Antiquité au Moyen Âge (Provence, Alpes-Maritimes, Ligurie, Toscane), Aix-en-Provence
& Bordighera.
4856. Passo, Fabrizio Dal, 2003: Bibliografia, in Miti, utopie e realtà della rivoluzione corsa (1729-
1769), Tese de doutoramento. Disponível online em url: http://www.tesionline.it/consult/
bibliografia.jsp?idt=8316. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
4857. Pastinelli, Héloïse, 2004 : La prise en compte et le traitement de l’insularité par les Etats
espagnol, italien et français: étude comparative des statuts institutionnels de trois
2009
territoires insulaires en Méditerranée Occidentale: la Corse, les Baléares et la Sardaigne;

sous la direction de Monsieur le Professeur Hugues Portelli, Mémoire ou thèse (version
d’origine), Université Panthéon-Assas (Paris). Université de soutenance.
4858. Pastor, R., 1992: US foreign policy toward latin America and the Caribbean, Princeton,
Princeton University Press.
4859. Paterson, C.B., 1986: In the far Pacific; at the birth of nations, National Geographic, 460-
99, Oct.
4860. Paterson, Donald Edgar, 1999: Introduction to South Pacific Law (coauthored with Jennifer
Corrin Care, Tess Newton Cain), Cavendish Publishing Limited, London.
4861. Paterson, Donald Edgar, 2000: Selected Constitutions of the South Pacific, Institute of
Justice and Applied legal Studies, The University of the South Pacific, Suva, Fiji.
4862. Paterson, Donald Edgar, 2004: South Pacific Property Law, Cavendish Publishing, London
(with Sue Farran).
4863. Patman, Robert G., 2005: “Globalisation, Sovereignty, and the Transformation of New
Zealand Foreign Policy” (PDF). Working Paper 21/05. Centre for Strategic Studies,
Victoria University of Wellington. Disponível online em url: http://www.vuw.ac.nz/css/docs/
Working_Papers/WP21.pdf. Consulta em 13 de Agosto de 2009.
4864. Patourel, J.H., 2004: Le The medieval administration of the Channel Islands, 1199-1399;
Barreau de Guernesey: Guernsey Bar.
4865. Patrick D. Nunn, 2004: “Through a mist on the ocean: human understanding of island
environments”, in Tijdschrift voor Economische en Sociale Geografie, vol. 95, issue 3,
pages 311-325.
4866. Patterson, Carolyn Bennett, 1986: “In the Far Pacific: At the Birth of Nations”, National
Geographic, 170 (October): 460–500.
4867. Patton, Mark, 1995: Neolithic communities of the Channel Islands, Oxford: Tempus
Reparatum.
4868. Patton, Mark, 1996: Islands in time: island sociogeography and Mediterranean prehistory,
4869. Paul, Max., 1983: Black families in modern Bermuda, Göttingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany:
Edition Herodot.
4870. Paulian, R., 1983: Les Iles, Laboratoires Naturels... (conference du 8eme colloque de la
sepanrit, bordeaux 2-3 nov. 1981), bulletin de liaison - sepanrit, 1983, no 12, p. p. 29-40
4871. Paulian, R., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Les
iles, laboratoires naturels, Specificite et contraintes biologiques des milieux insulaires,
Bordeaux: CEGET; CRET, p. 69-80.
4872. Paulin, Élisa, 1997: Théories de la spécialisation internationale et économies insulaires: le
cas des îles de la Caraïbe, l’Harmattan.
4873. Pavão J. Almeida, 1988: Constantes da Insularidade numa Definição de Literatura Açoriana,
online em http://lusofonia.com.sapo.pt/acores/acorianidade_pavao_1988.htm. Consulta
4874. Pavlides, C. and C. Gosden, 1994: 35,000 year old sites in the rainforests of West New
Britain, Papua New Guinea, Antiquity, 68(604-610).
4875. Pavlides, C., 1993: “New archaeological research at Yombon, West New Britain, Papua
New Guinea”, in Archaeology in Oceania, 28(1): 55-9.
2009
CEHA 267
4876. Pawley, Andrew; Ross, Malcolm; Tryon, Darrell, ed. 2001: The boy from Bundaberg:
studies in Melanesian linguistics in honour of Tom Dutton, Canberra: Pacific Linguistics,
Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University.
4877. Paximadopoulou-Staurinou, Miranta, 1980: Hoi exegerseis tēs Kephallēnias kata ta etē
1848 kai 1849, Athēna: [Hetaireia Kephallēniakōn Historikōn Ereunōn].
4878. Payne, A., 2004: Small States in the Global Politics of Development in The Table, Vol. 93.
No 376 (pp. 623).
4879. Paz Sánchez, Manuel de, 1984: Historia de la francmasonería en las Islas Canarias,
1739-1936, prólogo Antonio de Bethencourt Massieu, [La Laguna]: Ediciones del Excmo.
Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
4880. Paz, Manuel de., 1992: La esclavitud blanca: contribución a la historia del inmigrante
canario en América: siglo XIX, [Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
4881. Paz Sánchez, Manuel; González, Manuel Hernández, 1994: Amados compatriotas: acerca
del impacto de la emancipación americana en Canarias, [La Laguna, Canary Islands]:
Ayuntamiento de La Laguna, Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
4882. Paz Sánchez, Manuel de; Carmona Calero, Emilia, 1995: Canarias, la masonería, Santa
Cruz de Tenerife]: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
4883. Peacock, A., 1995: Ministerial memoir; Papua New Guinea’s transition to independence,
Lal BV and Nelson H, eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post-colonial
Pacific, Brisbane, PHA, pp.1-8.
4884. Peacock, Compiled by Dr Karen, 1997: Pacific islands literature - a selective reading
guide, Hamilton Library, University of Hawai‘i at Manoa. Disponível online em url: http://
www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/bibliography/Pacific_literature_bibliography_07.pdf. Consulta em
4885. Peacock, Compiled by Dr Karen, 2001: Island Lives: A Selected Bibliography of Biographies,
Hamilton Library. University of Hawai‘i at Manoa. Disponível online em url: http://www.
hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/bibliography/biog.07.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
4886. Peacock, Karen, 2001: Hamilton Library (UHM) Selected Refs. on Fiji, UHM, Center
for Pacific Island Studies. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/
bibliography/Fiji2001.htm.Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.[Obs.: lista de referências
bibliográficas sobre as ilhas Fiji].
4887. Peacock, Karen, 2001: Reference Sources for Papua New Guinea, Hamilton Library,
University of Hawai‘i at Manoa. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/
bibliography/PNGbib2001.htm. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
4888. Peacock, Karen, 2001a: Selected Reference Sources for Micronesia, Hamilton Library,
University of Hawai‘i at Manoa. Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/
bibliography/micronesia2001.htm. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
4889. Peacock, Karen, 2007: Island Lives: A Selected Bibliography of Biographies, Disponível
online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/bibliography/biog.07.pdf. Consulta em 5 de
Agosto de 2009.
4890. Peacock, Karen, 2007a: Pacific Collections National Library of Australia Pacific Islands
Literature: A Selective Reading Guide, Hamilton Library,University of Hawai‘i at Manoa.
Disponível online em url: http://www.hawaii.edu/cpis/psi/bibliography/Pacific_literature_
bibliography_07.pdf. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
4891. Pearn, editors, John Peggy Carter, 1995: Islands of incarceration: convict and quarantine
2009
islands of the Australian coast, The Australian Society of the History of Medicine. Brisbane,
Q., Australia: Amphion Press.
4892. Pearson, Bill, 1984: Rifled sanctuaries: some views of the Pacific Islands in Western
literature to 1900, [Auckland, N.Z.]: Auckland University Press.
4893. Pearson, M. P.; Godden, K., 2002: In Search of the Red Slave: Shipwreck and Captivity in
Madagascar, Sutton Publishing.
4894. Pearson, Michael; Stehberg, Ruben, 2006: ‘Nineteenth century sealing sites on Rugged
Island, South Shetland Islands’, Polar Record, 42:4, 335-47
4895. Pearson, Paul N.; Nicholas, C. J., 2007: “Marks of extreme violence” : Charles Darwin’s
geological observations at St Jago (São Tiago), Cape Verde islands, In Wyse Jackson,
Patrick N. (ed.), Four centuries of geological travel : the search for knowledge on foot,
bicycle, sledge and camel (Geological Society special publication, 287), London: The
Geological Society, 239-53
4896. Pearson, edited by Richard, 2009: Okinawa: the rise of an Island Kingdom: archaeological
and cultural perspectives: proceedings of a symposium, Kingdom of the Coral Seas,
November 17, 2007, at the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London,
Oxford: Archaeopress.
4897. Peattie, Mark R., 1988: Nanyō: the rise and fall of the Japanese in Micronesia, 1885-1945,
Honolulu: Center for Pacific Islands Studies, School of Hawaiian, Asian, and Pacific
Studies, University of Hawaii: University of Hawaii Press.
4898. Peck, William A., 1993: The pig war and other experiences of William Peck: soldier 1858-
1862, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: the journal of William A. Peck, Jr, senior editor, C.
Brewster Coulter; special editor, Bert Webber, Medford, OR : Webb Research Group.
4899. Peckham, Robert S., 2003: ‘The uncertain state of islands: national identity and the
discourse of islands in nineteenth-century Britain and Greece’, Journal of Historical
Geography, 29:4, 499-515.
4900. Pedersen, Erik Overgaard, 1997: The attempted sale of the Danish West Indies to the
United States of America, 1865-1870, Frankfurt, Haag + Herchen.
4901. Pedgley, David E., 1998: Early Tostevins in Guernsey, Société Guernesiaise Report and
Transactions, 24:3, 469-8.
4902. Pedinielli, L., 1993: Corse, ton identité historique, La Garde.
4903. Pedraza, Silvia, 2007: Political Disaffection in Cuba’s Revolution and Exodus (Cambridge
Studies in Contentious Politics)) Cambridge University Press.
4904. Pedreira, Antonio Salvador, 2001: Insularismo: ensayos de interpretación puertorriqueña,
ed. de Mercedes López-Baralt
4905. Peebles, Patrick, 1982: Sri Lanka: A Handbook of Historical Statistics, Boston: G. K. Hall.
4906. Péhaut, Yves, 1990: Les plantations allemandes des mers du Sud avant 1914, Iles et
4907. Peil, Tiina, 1999: Islescapes: Estonian small islands and islanders through three centuries,
Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell international.
4908. Pelletier, Monique (dir.) et all…, 2002: Les îles, du mythe à la réalité, Paris: Editions du
CTHS, Ministère de la Recherche; France, Ministère de l’Education Nationale; Comité
des Travaux Historiques et Scientifiques.
4909. Pelletier, Philippe, 1992, 1993: L’insularité dans la mer Intérieure japonaise, Bordeaux,
2009
CEHA 269
CRET-CEGET, collection “Iles et archipels”, 16.

4910. Pelletier, Philippe, 1992: Insularité et Démographie dans la Mer Intérieure Japonaise,
in Mappe Monde, 4. Disponível online em URL: http://www.mgm.fr/PUB/Mappemonde/
M492/JAPON.pdf. Consulta em 11 de julho de 2009.
4911. Pelletier, P., 1993: L’insularité dans la mer intérieure japonaise. Bordeaux, CRET, coll. “îles
et archipels”, n°16.
4912. Pelletier, Philippe, 1995: La géopolitique insulaire du Japon, Hérodote, N°78-79, p.20-95.
4913. Pelletier, Philippe, 1997: La Japonésie. Géopolitique et géographie historique de la
surinsularité au Japon, CNRS Editions, Paris.
4914. Pelletier, Philippe, 1997-a: “Aspects géopolitiques de la surinsularité japonaise” in A.-L.(dir.),
Vivre dans une île. Une géopolitique des Insularités, L’Harmattan, Collection”Géographie
et Cultures”, p. 131-141.
4915. Pelletier, Philippe, 1997-b: “Iles-frontières, territoires impossibles?”, Études internationales,
nº1, p. 73-103.
4916. Pelletier, Philippe, 1998: “Le paradigme japonésien”, Revue française de géoéconomie,
nº‹6, p.87-97.
4917. Pelletier, Philippe, 1999: «Iles éloignées, passages obligés: le rôle de la surinsularité dans
la civilisation japonaise», L’Île Laboratoire, Anne Meistersheim éd., Ajaccio, Editions Alain
Piazzola, p. 301-317.
4918. Pelletier, Philippe, 2000a: “Le Japon: territoire insulaire ou montagnard? Une réflexion
anthropo-géographique autour des termes kuni, shima et yama”, Montagnes imaginées,
montagnes représentées, nouveaux discours sur la montagne de l’Europe au Japon,
André Siganos et Simone Vierne dir., Grenoble, Ellug, p. 81-99.
4919. Pelletier, Philippe, 2000b: “Tumulte des flots entre Japon et Corée, à propos de la
dénomination de la “mer du Japon””, Annales de Géographie, 613, p. 279-305.
4920. Pelletier, Philippe, 2005: «L’île, un bon objet géographique - Préface». Les Dynamiques
contemporaines des petits espaces insulaires - De l’île-relais aux réseaux insulaires,
Nathalie Bernardie-Tahir et François Taglioni éd., Paris, Karthala, p. 7-17.
4921. Pelletier, Philippe, Nathalie Bernardie, François Taglioni, 2005; Les dynamiques
contemporaines des petits espaces insulaires: de l’île-relais aux réseaux insulaires,
KARTHALA Editions.
4922. Pelling (M.), Uitto (J. I.), 2001: «Small Island Developing States: Natural Disaster
Vulnerability and Global Change», Environmental Hazards, 3(2), p. 49-62.
4923. Peloso, Silvano, 2004: Al di là delle Colonne d’Ercole: Madera e gli arcipelaghi atlantici
nelle cronache italiane di viaggio dell’età delle scoperte, Viterbo: Sette città.
4924. Pelt, Jean-Marie, 1999: La cannelle et le panda: les naturalistes explorateurs autour du
monde, Paris: Fayard.
4925. Peltre, Wurtz Jacqueline, 1985: “Le ravitaillement en riz à Madagascar de 1974 à 1984: le
cas d’Antananarivo”, In: Bricas N. (ed.), Courade Georges (ed.), Coussy J. (ed.), Hugon
P. (ed.), Muchnik J. (ed.) Nourrir les villes en Afrique sub-saharienne, Paris: L’Harmattan,
p. 231-246. (Villes et Entreprises).
4926. Pempel, T., 2000: International finance and Asian regionalism, The Pacific Review, n°1,
p.57-72.
4927. Peña, Pablo Atoche ... [et al.], 1995: Evidencias arqueológicas del mundo romano en
2009
Lanzarote, Islas Canarias, Arrecife [Canary Islands]: Servicio de Publicaciones del

Excmo. Cabildo Insular de Lanzarote.
4928. Peoples, James G., 1984: Island in trust: culture change and dependence in a Micronesian
economy, Boulder, Colo: Westview Press, 1984.
4929. Peoples, James G., 1993: “Political Evolution in Micronesia”, Ethnology, 32 (Winter): 1–17.
4930. Pepe, Leandro Leone, 2006: “O envolvimento do Brasil na questão Timorense”, in
Lusotopie, vol. XIII, no 2, p. 49-58.
4931. Peraldi, Xavier, Marciano, Alain, 1997: Le financement des infrastructures de transport
dans les régions périphériques. Une approche par les choix publics, Revue économique,
Volume 48 Numéro 2 pp. 257-270.
4932. Peraldi, X., 1999: “ Le système de continuité territoriale de la Corse: coûteux, forcément
coûteux ”, Revue d’économie régionale et urbaine, n°2, pp. 333-352.
4933. Peraldi, X., 2002: Accessibilité des régions périphériques de l’Union Européenne et
politiques publiques de transport, Région et développement, n° 15, p. 121-146.
4934. Perdue, Theda and Michael D. Green, Eds. 1995: The Cherokee Removal: A Brief History
with Documents, Bedford Books.
4935. Perdue, Theda, 1999: Cherokee Women: Gender and Culture Change, 1700-1835,
University of Nebraska Press.
4936. Pereira, Daniel, 2005: Estudos da História de Cabo Verde, Praia, Alfa-Comunicações.
4937. Pereira, Fernando Jasmins, 1979: O destino das ilhas, Lisboa: Edições A Rua.
4938. Peretz, D., 2001: Small States in the global economy, Londres, Commonwealth Secretariat/
World Bank.
4939. Pérez Jr, Louis A., 1995: Essays on Cuban History: Historiography and Research, University
Presses of Florida.
4940. Pérez Jr., Louis A., 1998: The War of 1898: The United States and Cuba in History and
Historiography, University of North Carolina Press.
4941. Pérez Saavedra, Francisco, 1995: Lanzarote, isla de lava y espuma: su historia, su paisaje
y su gente, [Lanzarote, Canary Islands]: Cabildo Insular de Lanzarote, Centro de la
4942. Pérez Vidal, José, 1979: Canarias en Galdós, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo
4943. Pérez Voituriez, Antonio, 1985: Alternativas de Canarias en la integración de España en
la CEE: algunos aspectos jurídicos internacionales de sus posibles relaciones, ante la
incidencia de la integración española, Santa Cruz de Tenerife, Caja General de Ahorros
de Canarias.
4944. Pérez, Christine, 2005: La perception de l’insularité dans les mondes méditerranéen ancien
et archipélagique polynésien d’avant la découverte missionnaire, Paris: Publibook.
4945. Pérez, José Miguel, Guillermo Ascanio, 1997: Capitalismo y lucha de clases en el campo
canario (1931-1936) ensayo preliminar, Ignacio Reyes, Tenerife, Islas Canarias, Baile
del Sol.
4946. Pérez, transcripción, estudio preliminar y notas, Llorenç, Lleonard Muntaner, Mateu Colom
1986: El Tribunal de la Inquisición en Mallorca: relación de causas de fe, 1578-1806;
prólogo de Bartolomé Escandell Bonet, Tribunal de la Inquisición en Mallorca, Palma de
Mallorca: M. Font.
2009
CEHA 271
4947. Perham, Margery edited, 1988: Pacific prelude: a journey to Samoa and Australasia, 1929,
introduction by A.H.M. Kirk-Greene, London: P. Owen.
4948. Perinbanayagam, R. S., 1996: “Book review: To sing with pigs is human: The concept of
person in Papua New Guinea - Goodale, JC”, in Contemporary Sociology-a Journal of
Reviews 25(6): 808-809.
4949. Peristianis, Nicos, (ed.), 2006: Britain in Cyprus: colonialism and post-colonialism 1878-
2006, Mannheim: Bibliopolis.
4950. Perloff, Nancy, 1995: Gauguin’s French Baggage: Decadence and Colonialism in Tahiti, In
Elazar Barkan and Ronald Bush (eds) Prehistories of the Future: The Primitivist Project
and the Culture of Modernism, Stanford: Stanford University Press, 226-269.
4951. Peroin, Jean-François, 2005: Îles et oasis: de lisolat au monde, Annales de géographie,
juiller-août, vol. 114, no 644, p. 339-341.
4952. Péron, Françoise, 1993: Des îles et des Hommes: Insularité Aujourd’hui. Rennes, Editions
de la Cité-Ouest France.
4953. Péron, Françoise, 1991: “Spécifité des sociétés insulaires contemporaines: examples
des îles françaises de l’Atlantique et de la Manche”, In: Territoires et sociétés insulaires,
Colloque International. Brest, Minist. de l’Environment.
4954. Péron, Françoise, 1992: L’évolution démographique récente des îles du Ponant: l’amorce
d’un renouveau insulaire ? , Norois (Caen), no 156, p. 439-450.
4955. Péron, Françoise et Rieucau Jean dir., 1996: La Maritimité aujourd’hui, Paris, L’Harmattan,
Géographie et cultures.
4956. Péron, Françoise, (dir.), 1996a: Les îles en société fonctions sociales, dimensions
subjectives et intégration au système monde, Séminaire de l’URA 904, Brest, 3-5 avril
1996, p. 1-40.
4957. Péron, Françoise, 1996b: «La mer comme valorisation d’un territoire, l’île productrice de
mythes et nouveau géo-symbole», La Maritimité aujourd’hui, F. Péron et J. Rieucau dir.,
Paris, L’Harmattan, Géographie et cultures, 338 p., p. 79-91.
4958. Péron, Françoise, 1997: Ouessant, l’île sentinelle: vie et tradition d’une île bretonne, nouv.
éd. revue et augmentée, Douarnenez: Le Chasse-Marée.
4959. Péron, Françoise, 2004: ‘The Contemporary Lure of the Island’, Tijdschrift voor Economische
en Sociale Geografie, Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 326-339.
4960. Péron, Françoise, 2005: Fonctions sociales et dimensions subjectives des espaces
insulaires (à partir de l’exemple des îles du Ponant), In Troin, Jean-François, Îles et oásis,
Annales de géographie, juiller-août, vol. 114, no 644, p. 422-436.
4961. Perras, Galen R., 2003: Stepping stones to nowhere: the Aleutian Islands, Alaska, and
American military strategy, 1867-1945, Vancouver: UBC Press.
4962. Perrin, M. F. et alii, 1987: Îles tropicales: insularité, insularisme, Bourdeaux, Cret. (Collection
Iles e Archipels; n. 08).
4963. Perrin, François, 2001: Mayotte: L’île au lagon, Orphie.
4964. Pesme, Jacques-Olivier, 1997: Tourisme et développement durable à Saint-Thomas (Îles
Vierges américaines), Iles et archipels n° 24, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
4965. Perroni, C.; Whalley, J., 2000: “The new regionalism”, Canadian Journal of Economics,
n°1, p. 3-18.
4966. Perry, P.J., 1985: Les causes geographiques du partage politique des Iles Samoa, Les
2009
Cahiers D’Outre Mer, no 149, p. p. 53-63.

4967. Pesme, Jacques Olivier, 1995: Developpement economique et social d’une communaute
francaise dans les Antilles anglophones: le cas des Frenchies dans l’ile de Saint-Thomas
aux Iles Vierges americaines, In: Iles tropicales, Les Cahiers D’Outre Mer, vol. vol. 48,
no 191, p. p. 277-293.
4968. Pesme, Jacques Olivier; Singaravelou (pref.). 1997: Tourisme et developpement durable a
Saint-Thomas (Iles Vierges Americaines), Talence: CRET.
4969. Pesme, Jacques-Olivier, 1997: Tourisme et développement durable à Saint-Thomas (Îles
Vierges américaines), Iles et archipels n° 24, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
4970. Petersen, G., 1984: Ponape’s body politic; island and nation, PS, 8, 1, 112-36.
4971. Petersen, G., 1985:A cultural analysis of the Ponapean independence vote in the 1983
plebiscite, PS, 9, 1, 13-52.
4972. Petersen, G., 1986: Redistribution in a Micronesian Commercial Economy, Oceania, vol.
vol. 57, no 2, p. p. 83-98.
4973. Petersen, G., 1994: The FSM’s 1990 Constitutional Convention; calm before the storm?
TCP, 6, 2, 337-70.
4974. Petersen, G., 1995: Why is Micronesian independence an issue? in B.V. Lal and H. Nelson,
eds, Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post colonial Pacific, PHA, p.69-82.
4975. Pethica, James L.; Roy, James C. (ed.). 1998: ‘To the land of the free from the islands of
slaves’: Henry Stratford Persse’s letters from Galway to America, 1821-1832, Cork: Cork
University Press.
4976. Petit Skinner, S., 1980: Micronesie, Region D’Oceanie mal connue, Mondes et Cultures,
no 2, p. p. 483-501.
4977. Petrie, Cameron A., 2008: “Assessing the effects of volcanic disasters on human settlement
in the Willaumez Peninsula, Papua New Guinea: a Bayesian approach to radiocarbon
calibration, in The Holocene, Vol. 18, No. 5, 729-744.
4978. Petruso, Karl, 1992: Ayia Irini: the balance weights: an analysis of weight measurement in
prehistoric Crete and the Cycladic Islands, Mainz on Rine: P. von Zabern.
4979. Petterson, D., 2002: Revolution in Zanzibar – An American’s Cold War, Oxford: Westview
4980. Petty, Bruce M., 2002: Saipan: oral histories of the Pacific War, Jefferson, N.C., McFarland.
4981. Philbrick, Nathaniel, 2003: Sea of Glory: America’s Voyage of Discovery, the U.S. Exploring
Expedition, 1838–1842, Viking Adult.
4982. Philippe, Jean-Alexis, 2008: Le commerce martiniquais entre insularité et mondialisation;
sous la direction d’Alain Metton, Créteil : Université de Paris-Val-de-Marne, Thèse de
doctorat: Géographie-Urbanisme: Paris 12.
4983. Phillips, Fred, Sir, 1991: Caribbean life and culture: a citizen reflects, Kingston, Jamaica:
Heinemann Publishers (Caribbean).
4984. Phillips, Shawn M.; Phillips, Lisa W., 2008: ‘Health Transition in the Cayman Islands: A
Historical Analysis of a Caribbean Population, 1890–1930’, Wadabagei, 11:3, 100-18.
4985. Philp, Jude, Past time: Torres Strait Islander material from the Haddon Collection, 1888-
1905: a National Museum of Australia exhibition from the University of Cambridge,
Canberra: National Museum of Australia.
4986. Philpott, Robert A., 1996: An archaeological survey of Port Egmont, the first British
2009
CEHA 273
settlement in the Falkland Islands, Post-Medieval Archaeology, 30, 1-62.

4987. Phlogaitēs, Spyridōn I., 1981: Système vénitien de successions ab intestat et structures
familiales dans les îles ioniennes, préface, André A. Gasis, Genève: Droz.
4988. Piazza, proceedings editors, Millie M., Patricia Young, 1997: Sustainable development
in the Pacific Islands: conference proceedings, Pacific Islands Conference of Leaders
(16th: 1997: Pohnpei, Micronesia), Pohnpei: Federated States of Micronesia.
4989. Piazza, Walter F., 1992: A epopéia açorico-madeirense, 1747-1756, Florianópolis: Editora
da UFSC: Editora Lunardelli.
4990. Picard, David, 2006 : Les nouveaux jardins sacrés: insularité tropicale et intégration
globale: une approche anthropologique du tourisme international à la Réunion, Lille:
A.N.R.T., Thèse de doctorat: Anthropologie: La Réunion.
4991. Pieters, P. E., 1968: “Village water supply survey, northwest of WNB district 1968”, in Note
on Investigation 674173., Dept of Lands, Surveys and Mines.
4992. Pigafetta, Antonio, 2007: The first voyage around the world, 1519-1522: an account of
Magellan’s expedition, edited by Theodore J. Cachey, Toronto [Ont.]; Buffalo [N.Y.]:
University of Toronto Press.
4993. Pike, G. R. and B. Craig, 1999: “The Usher photographic collection from the South-West
Pacific”, Records of the South Australian Museum, 31(2): 215-253.
4994. Pike, Hew, 2008: From the frontline: family letters and diaries: 1914 to the Falklands and
Afghanistan, Barnsley: Pen & Sword.
4995. Pillon, Patrick, 1985: Développement et enjeux sociaux en Nouvelle Calédonie: l’Opération
Café, Nouméa: ORSTOM, 44 p.
4996. Pillon, Patrick, 1985: Espaces sociaux précoloniaux et identités mélanésiennes, Nouméa:
ORSTOM.
4997. Pillon, Patrick, 1985a: Jeunesse urbaine mélanésienne et différenciations sociales,
Nouméa: ORSTOM.
4998. Pillon, Patrick, 1985b: Rapport de mission en Papouasie-Nouvelle Guinée du 23 août
1985 au 6 septembre 1985, Nouméa: ORSTOM.
4999. Piña Homs, Román, 1982: Els reis de la Casa de Mallorca, [Palma de Mallorca]: Ajuntament
de Palma.
5000. Piña Homs, Román, 1985: La lluita per l’autonomia de les Balears, [Palma], Obra Cultural,
Balear.
5001. Pine, Emilie, 2004: The great escape? ‘The Islandman (1938), In Rockett, Kevin (ed.),
National cinema and beyond (Studies in Irish Film, 1), Dublin: Four Courts, 43-51.
5002. Pinkerton, Alasdair, 2008: Strangers in the Night”: The Falklands Conflict as a Radio War,
20th Century British History, 19:3, 344-75. Publisher: Oxford University Press.
5003. Pinney, Peter, 1992: The devil’s garden: Solomon Islands war diary, 1945, St. Lucia, Qld.,
Australia: University of Queensland Press.
5004. Pinto, Rui Miguel da Costa, 1995: “O Bispo de Cabo Verde, Frei Pedro Brandão e a
Relação Igreja-Moradores nos Finais do Século XVI”, in Mare Liberum, nº 10, Dezembro,
pp. 363–368.
5005. Piper, J., 1981: Iles Salomon: L’Impact du Modernisme sur la vie Traditionnelle, Le Courrier
Afrique Caraibes Pacifique Communaute Europeenne, no 67, p. p. 22-33
2009
5006. Piper, J., 1990: Don’t sit under the coconut tree with anyone else but me!, Australian policy
towards the South Pacific, in Australian Journal of International Affairs, Vol 44/2.
5007. Piper, J., and Urwin, G., 2001: Australian policy towards Papua and New Guinea and the
South Pacific; critique and response, unpublished paper, Canberra, ANU.
5008. Pisanelli, Flaviano, 2005: La Sicile au miroir: Leonardo Sciascia et Gesualdo Bufalino, in
Trabelsi, Mustapha (dir.), L’insularité, Clermont-Ferrand.
5009. Pitt, Barrie William, 2002: Coronel and Falkland: two great naval battles of the First World
War, London: Cassell.
5010. Placeres, César Rodríguez, 1997: Los símbolos de la identidad canaria, Gran Canaria,
Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
5011. Planas Rosselló, Antonio, 1995: El Sindicat de Fora: corporación representativa de las
Villas de Mallorca: (1315-1834), prólogo, Román Piña Homs, Mallorca: Miquel Font.
5012. Planas Rosselló, Antonio, 2006: El notariado en el Reino de Mallorca: siglos XIII-XVIII,
Palma: Lleonard Muntaner.
5013. Platero, Carlos, 2005: La alcaldía de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria (1484-2005) Palmas
de Gran Canaria: Anroart Ediciones.
5014. Platier, A., 1956: “Inégalités économiques et politiques de développement à l’échelle
régionale et à l’échelle mondiale”, L’Égypte contemporaine, n°1, p. 1-48
5015. Plaza, edited by Dwaine E. and Frances Henry, 2006: Returning to the source: the final
stage of the Caribbean migration circuit, Trinidad and Tobago; Jamaica; Barbados:
University of the West Indies Press.
5016. Plender, Richard, 1990: The protocol, the bailiwicks and the Jersey cow, In Plender, Richard
(ed.), Legal history and comparative law: essays in honour of Albert Kiralfy, 193-213.
5017. Plumer, Aytug, 2003: Cyprus, 1963-64: The Fateful Years, Cyrep (Lefkosa).
5018. Plummer, John, 2008: Islands and lifelines: journeys with friends from across a lifetime to
the dramatic edges of Britain and Ireland, Leicester: Matador.
5019. Poche, B., 1983: La région comme espace de référence identitaire, in Espace et Société,
n° 42, janvier-juin.
5020. Pochin-Mould, Daphne, 2004: “The fat monks and the Skellig rocks” in Mizen Journal:
[Mizen Peninsula Historical and Archaeological Society], 12, 31-41.
5021. Pocock, J. G. A. (John Greville Agard), 2005: The discovery of islands: essays in British
history, Cambridge, UK; New York: Cambridge University Press.
5022. Poirine, Bernard, 1991: L’economie de la Polynesie Francaise: de la Rente Atomique Au
Developpement; Sous La Direction De P. Desneuf, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine),
Thèse de doctorat: Sciences économiques: Paris 2.
5023. Poirine, Bernard, 1993: Three essays from French Polynesia, Kensington, NSW: Centre
for South Pacific Studies, University of New South Wales.
5024. Poirine, Bernard, 1995: Les petites economies insulaires: theories et strategies de
developpement, Paris: L’Harmattan.
5025. Poirine, B., 2001: “Insularity and Governance: The Case of French Polynesia”, Public
Organization Review, nº2, p. 193-213
5026. Poisson, Georges, 1998: Présences littéraires en Basse-Normandie et dans les îles anglo-
normandes, avec la collaboration de Dominique Gros, photographies de Tristan Jeanne-
2009
CEHA 275
Valès, Cherbourg, Isoète.

5027. Polack, F., 1998: ‘Writing and Rewriting the Island: Tasmania, Politics and Contemporary
Island Fiction’ in L. Brinklow, F. Ledwell & J. Ledwell, eds., Message in a Bottle: The
Literature of Small Islands, Charlottetown PEI, Institute of Island Studies, University of
Prince Edward Island, pp. 215-230.
5028. Polis, G.; Rose, M., 2000: “Research papers on the insularity of islands”, Ecography, nº 6,
pp. 693-701
5029. Pollard, Bob, 1998: Solomon Islands development assistance 1990-2001: report, [Honiara,
Solomon Islands: Pasifiki Services,]
5030. Pollard, Stephen, 1995: The culture of successful Palauan enterprise, Honolulu, HI: East-
West Center.
5031. Pollock, Griselda, 1992: Avant-Garde Gambits 1888-1893. Gender and the Color of Art
History, Walter Neurath Memorial Lecture 1992, New York: Thames and Hudson.
5032. Pollock, J., 1992: The mining of Nauru and its aftermath; political implications of rehabilitation,
in Rubinstein, D., (ed), Pacific history; Papers of the 8th PHA Conference, Guam, PHA.
5033. Pollock, J., 1995: Nauru’s post-independence struggles, Lal, B.V. and Nelson, H., eds,
Lines across the sea; colonial inheritance in the post-colonial Pacific, Brisbane, PHA,
pp.49-56.
5034. Pollock, Nancy J., 1992: These roots remain: food habits in islands of the central and
eastern Pacific since western contact, Laie, Hawaii: Institute for Polynesian Studies;
Honolulu, Hawaii: Distributed for the Institute for Polynesian Studies by the University of
Hawaii Press.
5035. Pollock, Nancy J.; Ron Crocombe, eds., 1988: French Polynesia: A Book of Selected
Readings, Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies of the University of the South Pacific.
5036. Polo Andrés, Clemente and Elisabeth Valle, 2007:, An Assessment of the Weight of Tourism
in the Balearic Islands, No 2007/04, CRE Working Papers (Documents de treball del
CRE) from Centre de Recerca Econòmica (UIB ·”Sa Nostra”) http://www.cre.sanostra.es/
internet/cre.nsf/pernomcurt/DT_adjunt/$FILE/dt2007_4.pdf.
5037. Pomponi, F., 1977: Le régionalisme en Corse dans l’entre-deux-guerres (1919-1939) in
Gras, C., Livet, G., Régions et régionalisme en France du XVIIIeme siècle à nos jours,
P.U.F., Paris;
5038. Pomponio, Alice, 1992: Seagulls don’t fly into the bush: cultural identity and development
in Melanesia, Belmont, Calif.: Wadsworth Pub. Co..
5039. Pomponio, Alice; Counts, David; Harding, Tom G., 1994: “Children of Kilibob”, in Special
issue of Pacific Studies 17.
5040. Ponce Dentinho, Tomaz; Ferreira, Pedro; Silva, Vasco, 2006: “Input Output Tables for
the Management of Water Resources in Islands”, in The Case of Terceira Island, ERSA
conference papers from European Regional Science Association. Disponível online em
url: http://www-sre.wu-wien.ac.at/ersa/ersaconfs/ersa06/papers/124.pdf. Consulta em 15
de Agosto de 2009.
5041. Pons Bestard, Josep, 1990: Memoria de Mallorca, 1936, pròleg i estudi preliminar, David
Ginard Féron, Palma de Mallorca: El Tall Editorial.
5042. Pons Moll, Clàudia, 2007: La teoria de l’optimitat: una introducció aplicada al catalá de
les Illes Balears, Barcelona: Institut Menorquí d’Estudis, Publicacions de l’Abadia de
Montserrat.
2009
5043. Pons, Antonio, 1984: Los Judíos del Reino de Mallorca durante los siglos XIII y XIV, Palma
de Mallorca: M. Font.
5044. Pontier, Bernard, 2001: Une île britannique: l’insularité et la «britannicité» de l’île de
Vancouver entre 1778 et 1871, Université de la Sorbonne nouvelle (Paris). Université de
soutenance, Lille: Atelier national de Reproduction des Thèses, Thèse de doctorat:
Études anglaises: Paris 3.
5045. Poole, Deborah, 1997: Vision, Race and Modernity: A Visual Economy of the Andean
Image World, Princeton: Princeton University Press.
5046. Poor, Henry V., 1994: Battle of Cape Esperance, The battles of Cape Esperance, 11
October 1942 and Santa Cruz Islands, 26 October 1942, Washington [D.C.]: Naval
Historical Center, Dept. of the Navy.
5047. Popkin, Jeremy D., 2003: Facing Racial Revolution: Captivity Narratives and Identity in
the Saint-Domingue Insurrection, Eighteenth-Century Studies, Volume 36, Number 4,
Summer, pp. 511-533.
5048. Porcel, Baltasar, 1984: Les illes, encantades, Barcelona: Ediciones 62.
5049. Porcheret, Laurent, 2003: Identité et développement d’un espace insulaire périphérique
de l’Union européenne: le cas de l’archipel des Açores / thèse de doctorat nouveau
régime en géographie présentée et soutenue par…; sous la dir. d’Alain Vanneph,... et
Michel Lesourd,..., Université de Versailles-Saint-Quentin-en-Yvelines. Université de
soutenance, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
5050. Porrata-Doria, Rafael Jr., 1992: “The Philippine Bases and Status of Forces Agreement:
Lessons for the Future,” Military Law Review, Vol. 67: 67-132.
5051. Poska, A.; Saarse, L., 2002: “Vegetation development and introduction of agriculture to
Saaremaa Island, Estonia: the human response to shore displacement”, in The Holocene,
Jul 2002; vol. 12: pp. 555 - 568.
5052. Poskitt, Jan (ed.). 2002: Over the sea to Skye: early travel by canoe to the Scottish islands
and west coast 1874-1876, Grange-over-Sands: Solway Dory.
5053. Postel-Vinay, K., 1998: “La transformation spatiale des relations internationales” in Smouts,
M.-C. (dir.), Les nouvelles relations internationales: pratiques et théories, Paris, Presses
de Sciences Po, p. 163-181.
5054. Postel-Vinay, Karoline, 1999: Japon 1979-1999: l’éclatement de l’insularité, Politique
étrangère, Volume 64, Numéro 3,p. 545–555. Disponível online em URL: http://www.
persee.fr/articleAsPDF/polit_0032-342x_1999_num_64_3_4881/article_polit_0032-
342x_1999_num_64_3_4881.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5055. Potter, Edwin, 1985 – 1988: The history of the penal system in the Virgin Islands, [Charlotte
Amalie? : s.n.,].
5056. Potter, R., 2000: The urban Caribbean in an era of global change, Aldershot, Asghate.
5057. Potter, R.; Dann, G., 1995: Globalization, postmodernity and Development in the
Commonwealth Caribbean, Curacao, Paper presented at the 20th Annual Conference of
the Caribbean Studies Association.
5058. Pouchain, Gérard, 1985: Promenades dans l’archipel de la Manche, avec un guide nommé
Victor Hugo, préfaces de Sir Frank Ereaut et de Sir Charles Frossard, Condé-sur-Noireau,
Editions C. Corlet.
5059. Poulgrain, G., 1999: Delaying the discovery of oil in West New Guinea, Journal of Pacific
History, Vol 34, 2, pp.205-18.
2009
CEHA 277
5060. Pouwer, J., 1999: The colonisation, decolonisation and recolonisation of West New Guinea,
Journal of Pacific History, 24, 2, pp.157-79.
5061. Powell, Wilfred, 1883: Wanderings in a Wild Country, or, Three Years Amongst the
Cannibals of New Britain, London: Sampson Low, Marston, Searle and Rivington.
5062. Poyatos, Juan, 2000: Leyendas del Mar Balear: cuentos fantásticos, relatos extraños e
historias populares ocurridas (o imaginadas) en estas aguas, fotografías y dibujos del
autor, Palma de Mallorca: Editorial Moll.
5063. Poyer, L., 1985: The Ngatik massacre: documentary and oral traditional accounts, Journal
of Pacific History, vol. 20(1), 4-22.
5064. Poyer, Lin, 1992: Defining History Across Cultures: Islander and Outsider Contrasts, Isla,
1/1, 73-89.
5065. Poyer, L., 1993: The Ngatik massacre; history and identity on a Micronesian island,
Smithsonian Institute Press, Washington.
5066. Poyer, L., Falgout, S., Carucci, L.M., 2001: The typhoon of war; Micronesian experiences
of the Pacific war, University of Hawaii Press.
5067. Pozdniakov, Konstantin, 1996: Les Bases du Déchiffrement de l’Écriture de l’Ile de Pâques,
Journal de la Societé des Océanistes, 103:2, 289-303.
5068. Prasad, Biman C., 2006: Institutions, economic performance and sustainable development:
a case study of the Fiji Islands, New York: Nova Science.
5069. Prasad, P., 2006: L’insularité, L’«Indigénisme», et L’inceste dans Paul et Virginie in Laporte,
Dominique, L’autre en mémoire, Presses Université Laval.
5070. Prasad, Satendra, Kevin Hince, 2001: Industrial relations in the South Pacific: Samoa,
Tonga, the Cook Islands, Kiribati, Solomon Islands, Vanuatu, and Fiji Islands, [Suva,Fiji]:
Dept. of Sociology, School of Economic Development, University of the South Pacific.
5071. Premdas, R. R., 1983: The Solomon Islands: independance and political change,
Civilisations, vol. 33, no 2, pp. 227-261.
5072. Premdas, R.R. and J. S. Steeves, 1992: Decentralization in a Ministate: The Case of the
Republic of Vanuatu, Public administration in small and island states, R. Baker (ed.).
West Hartford; Conn., Kumarian Press. pp. 84-98.
5073. Premdas, R.; Steeves, J., 1993: “Ethnic politics and inequality in Fiji: understanding the
new Constitution”. Journal de la Société des océanistes, nº 1, p. 63-75.
5074. Premdas, R., 1995: Ethnic conflict and development: the case of Fiji, Aldershot, Avebury.
5075. Prendergast, Mae, 1995: The Aran islands, Galway Roots [Journal of the Galway Family
History Society], 3, 89-95.
5076. Prestholdt, Jeremy, 2007: “Similitude and Empire: On Comorian Strategies of Englishness”,
in Journal of World History [Honolulu], 18:2, 113-38.
5077. Preston, P., 1998: Pacific-Asia in the global system; an introduction, Blackwell.
5078. Preston-Mafham, K., 1991: Madagascar: A Natural History, Facts on File.
5079. Preu, C.; Engelbrecht, C., 1994: Background, conceptual structure and organizational-
administrative establishing of a “sustainable development strategy” for Coral Islands, The
example of the Maldivian Archipielago (Indian Ocean), Geojournal, vol. 33, no 4, p. p.
433-442.
5080. Preziosi, Donald, Louise Hitchcock, 1999: Aegean art and architecture, Oxford, Oxford
2009
University Press.
5081. Price, R. D. and K. C. Emerson, 1986: “Two new species of Hohorstiella (Mallophaga:
Menoponidae) from New Guinea and New Britain”, Journal of Medical Entomology, 23(4):
356-360.
5082. Price, S.; S. Launa and M. Maima, 1994: Gender strategy for galip nut enterprise, Kimbe,
Papua New Guinea, Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project.
5083. Prince, Mary, 2000: The history of Mary Prince: a West Indian slave, London: Penguin.
5084. Prince, Stephen, 2002: “British command and control in the Falklands Campaign”, in
Defense and Security Analysis, 18:4, 333-49.
5085. Pringle, Robert, 2004: Bali: Indonesia’s Hindu Realm; A short history of Asia Series, Allen
& Unwin.
5086. Prior, I.; Stanhope, J.; Dommen, E. (ed.), 1980: Islands, In Epidemics, Health and disease
in a small, isolated environment, Oxford; New York; Paris: Pergamon, p. 995-1016.
5087. Prior, R. N. B., T. Solulu, S. Laup and P. Gende, 2001: “Finschhafen coconut disorder in
some tree crops in Papua New Guinea”, Science in New Guinea, 26(1, 2 ,3): 61-64.
5088. Pritchard, George, 1983: The aggressions of the French at Tahiti and other islands in the
Pacific, edited by Paul de Deckker, [Auckland]: Auckland University Press; [Wellington?]:
Oxford University Press in association with the Alexander Turnbull Library Endowment
Trust.
5089. Pritchard, Mary J., 1984: Siapo: bark cloth art of Samoa, [American Samoa]: American
Samoa Council on Culture, Arts and Humanities, Honolulu: Edward Enterprises.
5090. Pritchard, W. T. (William Thomas), 1985: Polynesian reminiscences: or, Life in the South
Pacific Islands, Papakura, N.Z.: Southern Reprints.
5091. Privatera, J.F., 1998: Basic Sicilian: A brief reference grammar, Lewiston, N.Y.; Lampeter:
Edwin Mellen Press.
5092. Priziac, Michel, 1997: Noms des îles de Bretagne, MP.
5093. Racault, Jean-Michel, 2007: Mémoires du Grand Océan: des relations de voyages aux
littératures francophones de l’océan Indien, Paris: PUPS, Presses de l’Université Paris-
Sorbonne.
5094. Proinnsias Breathnach ... [et al.], 1984: Aspects of rural development in the Scottish
Highlands and Islands: a review of the Highlands and Islands Development Board and its
scheme for the promotion of community development co-operatives: report of a study visit
in September/October 1982, Maynooth (Maynooth, Co. Kildare): Geography Department,
St. Patrick’s College.
5095. Project Preparation Branch, I. D., Department of Agriculture and Livestock, 1991: The
Smallholder Cocoa and Coconut Rehabilitation and Expansion Project (SCCREP) Phase
Three: 1989-1993, West New Britain, Oro, Central and Milne Bay Provinces, Department
of Agriculture and Livestock, Konedobu, Papua New Guinea.
5096. Prontera, F., 1989: ‘Géographie et Mythes dans l’Isolario des Grecs,’ in M. Pelletier, ed.,
Géographie du Monde au Moyen Âge et à la Renaissance, Paris, C.T.H.S., pp. 169-179.
5097. Prosper, J.-G., 1993: L’île Maurice: au sommet de la vague économique francophone,
Paris, l’Harmattan.
5098. Proud, Edward Baxby, 2005: The postal history of the Leeward Islands, Heathfield: Proud-
Bailey Co. Ltd..
2009
CEHA 279
5099. Proud, Edward B., 2006: The postal history of B.I.O.T., Maldive Islands and Seychelles;
(British colonial series). Heathfield, East Sussex: Proud-Bailey Co. Ltd.
5100. Prowse, D. W., 2002: A History of Newfoundland (1895), Boulder Publications, Portugal
Cove, Newfoundland.
5101. Prudhomme, Claude, 1984: Histoire religieuse de La Réunion, Paris: Karthala.
5102. Psaropoulou, Betty, 1984: Teleutaioi tsoukalades tou Anatolikou Aigaiou, Nauplio:
Peloponnēsiako Laographiko Hidryma.
5103. Ptak, R., 1992: The Northern trade route of the spice Islands: South China Sea -Sulu
ZoneNorth Moluccas (14th to early 16th century), Archipel, 1992/05, no 43, p. p. 27-56
5104. Pugh, Philip, 2007: “The Empire strikes back”: the Falklands / Malvinas campaigns of
1982, Mariner’s Mirror, 93:3, 307-24.
5105. Pukui, Mary Kawena; Samuel H. Elbert, 1986: Hawaiian Dictionary, Honolulu: University of
Hawaii Press.
5106. Pulea, Mere, 1986: The family, law and population in the Pacific islands, Suva: Institute of
Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific.
5107. Puri, Shalini, 2003: Marginal migrations: the circulation of cultures within the Caribbean,
Oxford: Macmillan Caribbean.
5108. Putz, G., 1993: “The More Things Change, the More They Get the Same…”: Why
Recreational Culture Kills Island Life’, Island Journal, Maine, Island Institute, No. 10,
pp.53-55.
5109. Quammen, D., 1996: The Song of the Dodo: Island Biogeography in an Age of Extinctions,
New York, Touchstone.
5110. Quammen, David, An Inventory of His Papers, 1856-1999 and undated, at the Southwest
Collection/Special Collections Library. Disponível online em url: http://www.lib.utexas.
edu/taro/tturb/00159/trb-00159.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5111. Adams, R, eds, 1992: Culture Contact in the Pacific, CUP, Melbourne.
5112. Quanchi, M., 1994: A trip through the islands in 1918, Meanjin, Vol 53, No 4, pp.714-22.
5113. Quanchi, M., 1997: References on Australia’s relationship with the Pacific (other than
PNG), Carseldine, School of Humanities and Human Services.
5114. Quanchi, M., 1997a: The invisibility of Gospel ploughmen; the imaging of South Sea pastors
in Papua, Pacific Studies, 20, 4, 77-101.
5115. Quanchi, M., 1997b: Thomas McMahon; photography as propaganda in the Pacific, History
of Photography, Vol 27/ 1, pp.42-53.
5116. Quanchi, M., ed. 1997c: Imaging, representation and photography of the Pacific Islands,
(special issue of PS, 20, 4), Laie, BYU.
5117. Quanchi, M., 1998: Australia’s South Sea Islanders; a call for recognition, Journal of the
Pacific Society, Vol 21, 3-4, pp.3-19.
5118. Quanchi, M., 1998a: Lobbying, ethnicity and marginal voices; the Australian South Sea
Islanders call for recognition, The History Teacher, Vol 36, 1, pp.31-41.
5119. Quanchi, M., 1999: Tree houses, representation and photography on the Papuan coast
1880 to 1930, in Craig, B., Kernot, B. and Anderson, C., eds, Art and performance in
Oceania, Bathurst, Crawford House, pp.218-30.
5120. Quanchi, M., 2000: Australia and the Pacific Islands; a Bibliography 1984-1999, Carseldine,
2009
QUT (held in Library CA).

5121. Quanchi, M., and Shekleton, M., 2001: Disorderly categories in picture postcards from
colonial Papua and New Guinea, History of Photography, 25, 4, 1-19.
5122. Quanchi, Max, 2004: ‘Jewel of the Pacific and planter’s paradise: the visual argument for
Australian sub-imperialism in the Solomon Islands’, Journal of Pacific History, 39:1, 43-
58.
5123. Quanchi, Max; Robson, John, 2005: Historical dictionary of the discovery and exploration
of the Pacific islands; (Historical dictionaries of discovery and exploration, 2), Lanham
(MD): Scarecrow Press.
5124. Quellet, Ricardo Luis, 1982: Historia política de las Islas Malvinas, [Buenos Aires] Fuerza
Aérea Argentina, Escuela Superior de Guerra Aérea.
5125. Quérée, Jennifer, 2003: ‘Seabirds, seals and sailcloth: the clothing of the Dundonald
castaways’, Costume, 37, 75-94.
5126. Quesne, Henri du, 1989: L’île d’Eden (recueil de quelques mémoires servant d’instruction
sur l’établissement de l’isle d’Eden), Saint Denis (La Réunion).
5127. Quevedo Martín, Agustín, 1995: Sociedad y cultura: isleñas, Santa Cruz de Tenerife:
Servicio de Publicaciones de la Caja General de Ahorros de Canarias: Cabildo de
Tenerife, Consejería de Cultura.
5128. Quick, Abdullah Hakim, 2007: Deeper roots: Muslims in the Americas and the Caribbean
from before Columbus to the present, Cape Town, South Africa: DPB Printers and
Booksellers.
5129. Quinault, Roland Edwin, 2001: “Britain 1950: the state of the islands immediately following
the Second World War”, History Today, 51:4, 14-21.
5130. Quinn, David Beers, 1989: Atlantic Islands, In Ireland, John de Courcy, 1911-2006; Sheehy,
David C. (ed.), Atlantic visions, Dun Laoghaire: Boole Press, 77-93.
5131. Quinn, N. J., B. Kojis and P. R. Warpeha, Eds, 1984: Subsistence Fishing Practices of
Papua New Guinea, Traditional Technology Series No. 2. Lae, Appropriate Tech. Develop.
Inst.
5132. Quinn, T. J., 1981: Athens and Samos, Chios and Lesbos, Manchester.
5133. Quintanilla, Mark, 2003: The World of Alexander Campbell: An Eighteenth-Century
Grenadian Planter, Albion: A Quarterly Journal Concerned with British Studies, Vol. 35,
No. 2 (Summer), pp. 229-256.
5134. Quiros Fernandez de, Pedro; Baert, Annie (trad.); Deckker, Paul de (préf.), 2001: Histoire
de la découverte des régions australes. Iles Salomon, Marquises, Santa Cruz, Tuamotu,
Cook du Nord et Vanuatu, Paris: L’Harmattan.
5135. Ra, Herr, 1983: Australia and the southwest Pacific, in Boyce, P. and Angel, J. (eds)
Independence and alliance; Australia in World affairs 1976-1980, Allen and Unwin.
5136. Ra, Herr, 1986: Regionalism, strategic denial and South Pacific security, Jornal of Pacific
History, vol. 21 (4),:170-182.
5137. Raagmaa, Garri, 2002: Regional Identity in Regional Development and Planning. European
Planning Studies, 10(1), pp. 55-76.
5138. Raban, Peter, 1987: “War and trade in the mid-eighteenth century”, in Société Guernesiaise
Report and Transactions, 22, 131-63.
5139. Raban, Sandra, 2001: ‘Edward I’s other inquiries’. In Prestwich, Michael; Britnell, Richard
2009
CEHA 281
Hugh; Frame, Robin (ed.), Thirteenth Century England IX: proceedings of the Durham
Conference, Woodbridge: Boydell, 43-57.
5140. Rabeherifara, Jean Claude, 1985: Rapport de mission à Ambilobe (Madagascar) sur la
société Siramamy Malagazy (Sirama), 17 mai-30 juin 1984, Paris: ORSTOM, p. 217-
248, Les Problêmes posés par l’Etude du Milieu de Travail et des Rapports Travail / Hors
Travail (Concepts, Méthodologies d’Enquêtes), Réunion Thématique, Paris (FRA).
5141. Racault, J. M. & Marimoutou, J. C. et alii – 1995: L’Insularité: thématique et représentations,
Paris, Édit. Harmattan.
5142. Racault, Jean-Michel, 2007: Mémoires du Grand Océan: des relations de voyages aux
littératures francophones de l’océan Indien, Paris: PUPS, DL.
5143. Radcliffe-Brown, A.R., 1922/1948: The Andaman Islanders: A study in social anthropology,
Glencoe IL, Free Press.
5144. Rademaker, Cor S. M., 1994: The Catholic mission in the Cook Islands 1894-1994, Bavel
(Netherlands): Fathers of the Sacred Heart.
5145. Radford, R., 1987: Highlanders and foreigners in the Upper Ramuu; The Kainantu area
1919-1942, MUP, Melbourne
5146. Radiguet, Max, 2001: Les derniers sauvages: aux Iles Marquises, 1842-1859, Paris:
Phébus.
5147. Radike, Floyd W., 2003: Across the dark islands: the war in the Pacific, New York: Ballantine
Books.
5148. Radovsky, Frank J., Peter H. Raven, S.H. Sohmer, edited by. 1984: Biogeography of the
tropical Pacific: proceedings of a symposium, Lawrence, Kan., U.S.A.: Association of
Systematics Collections; [Honolulu, Hawaii]: Bernice P. Bishop Museum.
5149. Raferty, Barry, 1991: The island Celts, In Moscati, Sabatino; Frey, Otto Hermann (ed.), The
Celts, London: Thames & Hudson, 555-572.
5150. Rai, Milan, 1993: Columbus in Ireland, Race & Class, Jan 1993; vol. 34: pp. 25 - 34.
5151. Railon, F., 1999: L’Indonésie, la réinvention d’un archipel, Paris, La Documentation
française.
5152. Raimon Pallàs, [et al.], 2001: “Using tephrochronology to date temperate ice: correlation
between ice tephras on Livingston Island and eruptive units on Deception Island volcano”
(South Shetland Islands, Antarctica), in The Holocene, vol. 11: pp. 149 - 160.
5153. Rainbird, Paul, 2003, 2004: The archaeology of Micronesia, Cambridge, UK; New York:
5154. Rainbird, Paul, 2003: “Taking the Tapu: Defining Micronesia by Absence”, in Journal of
Pacific History, 38 (September 2003): 237–250.
5155. Rainbird, Paul, 2007: The archaeology of islands, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge
University Press.
5156. Rallu, Jean Louis, 1981: La depopulation des archipels du Pacifique: l’exemple de quatre
villages de l’Ile Malekula, Population, vol. vol. 36, no 3, pp. 519-54.
5157. Rallu, Jean-Louis, 2009: Population et développement dans l’Outre-Mer de l’Union
européenne, Population et sociétés, mai, no 456, pp. 1-4.
5158. Ralston, C., & N. Thomas, (eds), 1987: Sanctity and power - gender in Polynesian History,
Jornal of Pacific History, special issue, vol. 22(3& 4).
2009
5159. Ralston, C., 1986: Hawaii 1778-1854; some aspects of maka’ainana response to rapid
cultural change, Jornal of Pacific History, 19, 21-40, 1986.
5160. Rambaud, Catherine, 1985: “Un exemple de développement industriel dans un pays dominé
par l’économie de plantation: la zone franche de l’île Maurice”, In: Femmes et politiques
alimentaires, Paris: ORSTOM, (Colloques et Séminaires), La Place des Femmes dans
l’Autosuffisance et les Stratégies Alimentaires.Séminaire International, Paris (FRA), p.
139-149.
5161. Ramerini, Marco, 1998-2006: Bibliography Of Portuguese Colonial History-Sri Lanka
(Ceylon) Centuries Xvi-Xvii-Xviii. Disponível online em url: http://www.colonialvoyage.
com/biblioPSriLanka.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5162. Ramírez Muñoz, Manuel, 1995: Historia del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria, 1913-1936,
Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
5163. Ramis Puiggros, Andreu, 1997: Malnoms a Llorito: segles XIV-XX: àlies, estratègies de
nominació comunitària, [pròleg de Joan Miralles i Monserrat], Binissalem, Illes Balears,
Di7 Grup d’Edició.
5164. Ramisch, H., 1989: The Variation of English in Guernsey. Channel Islands, Frankfurt am
Main: Verlag Peter Lang.
5165. Ramnarine, Tina K., 2007: Beautiful Cosmos: Performance and Belonging in the Caribbean
Diaspora, London, Pluto Press.
5166. Ramos Pérez, David, 2001: Transporte aéreo, territorio e insularidad en Canarias: una
aproximación en el umbral del siglo XXI, Tauro Producciones.
5167. Ramos, G.; Rivera, A. (eds), 2001: Islands at the crossroads: politics in the nonindependant
Caribbean, Boulder, Lynne Rienner Publishers.
5168. Rampell, E., 1992: Beleu; nuclear free isles under siege, in D Robie, ed, Tu Galala; social
change in the Pacific, Bridgit Williams Books/Pluto Press, 137-44.
5169. Ramsey, Winston G., 1981: The war in the Channel Islands: then and now, After the Battle
5170. Ranney, Austin, Howard R. Penniman, 1985: Democracy in the Islands: the Micronesian
plebiscites of 1983, Washington, D.C., American Enterprise Institute for Public Policy
Research.
5171. Raoulx, Benoit, 1993: Iles Du Grand Large: Des Iles Feroe Aux Iles Malouines; Sous La
Direction De Robert Herin, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat:
Géographie: Caen.
5172. Rapaport, edited by Moshe, 1999: The Pacific islands: environment & society, Honolulu,
Hi.: Bess Press.
5173. Rapson, A. M., 1962: “Shark attacks in New Guinea waters”, in The Papua and New Guinea
Agricultural Journal, 14(4): 141-150.
5174. Rasor, Eugene L. (comp.). 1992: The Falklands/Malvinas campaign: a bibliography,
(Bibliographies of Battles and Leaders, 6). New York; London: Greenwood Press.
5175. Rasor, Eugene L., 1996: The Southwest Pacific Campaign, 1941-1945: Historiography and
Annotated Bibliography, Greenwood Press.
5176. Rasor, Eugene L., 1997: The Solomon Islands campaign, Guadalcanal to Rabau:
historiography and annotated bibliography, Westport, Conn., Greenwood Press.
5177. Ratter, Beate M. W., 1992: Karibische Netze: San Andrés y Providencia und die Cayman
Islands zwischen weltwirtschaftlicher Integration und regionalkultureller Autonomie,
2009
CEHA 283
Hamburg: Wayasbah.
5178. Ratter, Beate M. W., 2001: Redes caribes: San Andrés y Providencia y las islas Cayman:
entre la integración económica mundial y la autonomía cultural regional, [San Andrés
y Providencia, Colombia?]: Universidad Nacional de Colombia, Instituto de Estudios
Caribeños, Sede San Andrés; [Bogotá, Colombia]: Instituto Colombiano para el Fomento
de la Educación Superior (ICFES), Oficina de Planeación.
5179. Ravault, François, 1985: “Polynésie, la bombe et l’indépendance”, In: Ces îles où l’on parle
français, Hérodote, (37/38), p. 163-180.
5180. Ravenhill, 2000: “APEC adrift: implications for economic regionalism in Asia and the
Pacific”, The Pacific Review, n°2, p. 319-333.
5181. Ravina, Mark, 2003: The Last Samurai: The Life and Battles of Saigo Takamori, Wiley.
5182. Ravis-Giordani, textes réunis et publ. par Georges, 1989: L’ Île miroir: actes du colloque
d’Aix-en-Provence, 27-28 novembre 1987/[organisé par le] Centre d’études corses,
Ajaccio, la Marge.
5183. Ravuvu, A., 1995: The facade of democracy: Fijian struggles for political control 1830-
1987, Suva, Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific.
5184. Razjigaeva, N. G. [et al.], 2002: “Holocene climatic changes and environmental history of
Iturup Island, Kurile Islands, northwestern Pacific”, in The Holocene, vol. 12: pp. 469 –
480.
5185. Read, Brian Ahier, 1995: No cause for panic: Channel Islands refugees, 1940-45, St Hélier:
Seaflower Books.
5186. Read, Tory, 2002: Navigating a new course: stories in community-based conservation in
the Pacific islands, New York: United Nations Development Programme.
5187. Rebekah E. Pite, 2003: “The Force of Food: Life on the Atkins Family Sugar Plantation in
Cienfuegos, Cuba, 1884-1900.” Massachusetts Historical Review, 5, 59-93.
5188. Rechebei, E.D. and S McPhetres, eds, 1997: History of Palau; heritage of an emerging
nation, Ministry of Education, Palau.
5189. Reddy, G. P. (G. Prakash), 1982: Scarcity and survival: a study in culture ecology of
Chowra Island in Nicobar archipelago, Delhi: D.K. Publications; New Delhi: distributed by
D.K. Publisher’ Distributors.
5190. Redknap, Mark; Campbell, Ewan; Lane, Alan, 1989: “Llangorse crannog”, in Archaeology
in Wales, 29, 57-58.
5191. Redon, Marie, 2002: Le Nord de Grande-Terre, un paradis raté? Espaces ruraux et
mutations sociales en Guadeloupe, Paris: PRODIG-CNRS, 2002.
5192. Redon, Marie, 2006: Saint Martin / Sint-Maarten, une petite île divisée pour de grands
enjeux, Cahiers (Les) d’Outre-mer, 2006, vol. 59, no 234, p. 233-265. Disponível online
em url: http://com.revues.org/index73.html. Consulté le 19 août 2009. Consulta em 20 de
Agosto de 2009.
5193. Redon, Marie, 2008: Île et frontière: étude comparée de trois îles divisées: Haïti/République
Dominicaine, Timor Leste/Indonésie, Saint-Martin/Sint-Maarten; thèse dirigée par Jean-
Louis Chaléard, Lille : Atelier national de Reproduction des Thèses.
5194. Reed, L., 1998: Part of our own story; representations of indigenous Australians and
Papua New Guineans with in Australia remembers 1945-1995 – the continuing desire for
a homogenous national identity, Oceania, 69, 3, pp.156-73.
2009
5195. Reesink, G. P., 1995: “Book review: Historical atlas of ethnic and linguistic groups in Papua
New Guinea, vol 3, pt 4, New Britain, pt 5, New Ireland, pt 6, Bougainville - Wassmann,J.”
In Bijdragen Tot De Taal- Land- En Volkenkunde, 151(3): 465-467.
5196. Regius, H., 1999: “Our ethnological troops in the field’: Swedes and museum collecting in
Melanesia circa 1900” In: B. Craig, B. Kernot and C. Anderson, Eds. Art and Performance
in Oceania, Bathurst, N.S.W., Crawford House Publishing, pp. 231-245.
5197. Regnault, Jean Marc, 1995: La decentralisation outre-mer: un combat pour l’emancipation
politique et economique. L’exemple du statut de 1984 en Polynesie Francaise, In: Iles
tropicales, les cahiers d’outre mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 405-420.
5198. Rehg, Kenneth L.,1995: The Significance of Linguistic Interaction Spheres in Reconstructing
Micronesian Prehistory, Oceanic Linguistics, Vol. 34, No. 2 (Dec.), pp. 305-326.
5199. Reid, Anthony, 2005: An Indonesian Frontier: Acehnese and Other Histories of Sumatra,
National University of Singapore Press.
5200. Reid, Basil A., 2007: Popular myths about Caribbean history, [S.l.: s.n.,].
5201. Reid, Basil A., 2009: Myths and realities of Caribbean history, Tuscaloosa: University of
Alabama Press.
5202. Reid, R., 1997: The Simpson of the Kokoda Track; Major Albert Moore, Salvation Army,
Wartime, 1, 26-9.
5203. Reig, Daniel, textes réunis et présentés par, 1997: Ile des merveilles: mirage, miroir, mythe:
colloque de Cerisy, Paris, France: L’Harmattan.
5204. Reilly, Q., 1982: Danger of haemolysis from primaquine use”, in Papua New Guinea
Medical Journal, 25(3): 194.
5205. Reinstädler, Janett Ottmar Ette, eds, 2000: Todas las islas la isla: nuevas y novísimas
tendencias en la literatura y cultura de Cuba, Madrid: Iberoamericana: Frankfurt am
Main: Vervuert.
5206. Reitel, Bernard, 1993: Logiques De Desserte D’un Espace D’archipels: L’exemple Des
Transports Dans Le Pacifique Insulaire. (Co-Dirigee Par M. Dupon, Sous La Direction De
Henri Reymond, Thèse de doctorat: Géographie: Strasbourg 1.
5207. Remaudiere, G.; Etienne, J., 1988: Les aphididae (Hom.) des iles et archipels de l’ocean
indien, L’Agronomie Tropicale, vol. vol. 43, no 4, p. p. 327-346.
5208. Renault, Kenneth C., 2005: From corner shop to grand marché: a history of the Channel
Islands Co-operative Society; by; with additions by Allan Smith. St Hélier: Channel Islands
Co-operative Society.
5209. Renault, Lescure Odile, 1985: La question amérindienne en Guyane française: Les Galibi,
in Ethnies, 1 (1/2), p. 19-20.
5210. Renault, Lescure Odile; Grenand, Françoise, 1985: “La question amérindienne en Guyane
française: Le problème scolaire”, in Ethnies, 1 (1/2), p. 36-38.Renfrew, Colin, 1985: The
Prehistory of Orkney, Edinburgh, Edinburgh University Press.
5211. Rennie, N., 1995: Far-fetched facts; the literature of travel and the idea of the South Land,
Clarendon, Oxford.
5212. Rensel, J., 1994: For Love or Money? Interhousehold Exchange and the Economy of
Rotuma, Ph. D. Thesis, University of Hawai’i at Manoa, Honolulu.
5213. Rensel, Jan, & Rodman, Margaret (Editors), 1997: Home in the Islands: Housing and
Social Change in the Pacific, Honolulu. University of Hawai’i Press.
2009
CEHA 285
5213. Revel, Nicole, [et al], 1998: “As if in a Dream ...”: Epics and Shamanism among Hunters.
Palawan Island, The Philippines”, in Diogenes, Mar 1998; vol. 46: pp. 7 - 30.
5214. Reverzy, Jean-François, Jean-Claude Carpanin Marimoutou, 1990: Ile et fables: paroles de
l’autre, paroles du même: linguistique, littérature, psychanalyse: psychanalyse, langues
et littérature: actes du colloque, Saint-Gilles de la Réunion, 5-9 juillet 1988: Faculté des
lettres et sciences humaines, Université de la Réunion, CERFOI-URA 1041 du CNRS /
Paris: L’INSERM et l’ARRPpPOI: L’Harmattan.
5215. Rey, Terry, 2002: The Politics of Patron Sainthood in Haiti: 500 Years of Iconic Struggle,
The Catholic historical review, vol. 88, no3, pp. 519-543.
5216. Reydellet, Dureau, 1994: Mahé de la Bourdonnais: gouverneur des Mascareignes, Saint-
Denis, La Réunion: Editions CNH.
5217. Rhoads, E.C., 1984: The impact of modernisation on the aged in American Samoa, PS, 7,
2, 15-33.
5218. Rhoads, Jim & Specht, Jim, 1980: Aspects of the Oral History of the Bali-Witu Islands,
West New Britain Province, Oral History, 8(8): 10-22.
5219. Ribes i Marí, Enric, 1992, Noms de lloc, Sant Jordi de ses Salines, Eivissa: Edicions Can
Sifre.
5220. Riccardo Pineri (dir.), 2004: Utopies insulaires, Papeete.
5221. Rice, Elizabeth Talbot, 2004: “Defending the Falklands, 1849-1863”, in Journal of the
Society for Army Historical Research, 82:329, 82-84.
5222. Richards, J., 1982: “Politics in small independent communities: conflict or consensus?,
Comparative Politics, n° 2, p. 155-171.
5223. Richards, R., 1990: Indigenous beachcombers; the case of Tapeooe a Tahitian traveller
from 1798 to 1812, Great Circle, Vol 13/1, pp.1-13.
5224. Richards, R., 1994: The decision to lotu.... the spread of Christianity in Samoa, in Pacific
Studies Vol 17 No 1, pp.29-44.
5225. Richards, Rhys, 1982: Whaling and sealing at the Chatham Islands, Canberra [A.C.]:
Roebuck Society.
5226. Richards, Rhys, 1992?: Samoa’s forgotten whaling heritage: American whaling in Samoan
waters 1824-1878: a chronological selection of extracts from primary sources, mainly
whaling logbooks, journals and contemporary news items,Wellington, N.Z.: Lithographic
Services, Ltd..
5227. Richardson, Bonham C., 1997: Economy and environment in the Caribbean: Barbados
and the Windwards in the late 1800s, with a foreword by David Lowenthal, Barbados, The
Press University of the West Indies, Gainesville, University Press of Florida.
5228. Richardson, B., 2001: The South and the Caribbean, Jackson, University Press.
5229. Richer de Forges, Bertrand, 1998: La Diversite Du Benthos Marin De Nouvelle-Caledonie:
De L’espece A La Notion De Patrimoine; Sous La Direction De Philippe Bouchet, Mémoire
ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Sciences Biologiques Fondamentales Et
Appliquees, Psychologie: Museum National D’histoire Naturelle.
5230. Richez, G., 1981: Les grandes îles de la Méditerranée occidentale, in Méditerranée, n° 72.
5231. Richmond, Oliver and James Ker-Lindsay (eds.), 2001: The Work of the UN in Cyprus:
Promoting Peace and Development. Palgrave Macmillan.
5232. Richmond, Oliver, 1998: Mediating in Cyprus, Frank Cass.
2009
5233. Richstad, Jim; Miles M. Jackson edited by.1984: Publishing in the Pacific Islands: a
symposium, [Honolulu]: Graduate School of Library Studies, University of Hawaii.
5234. Richter, Daniel K., 1993: The Ordeal of the Longhouse: Peoples of the Iroquois League
in the Era of European Colonization, Omohundro Institute of Early American History.
5235. Rick, Torben C., 2007: The archaeology and historical ecology of Late Holocene San
Miguel Island, Los Angeles: Cotsen Institute of Archaeology, University of California.
5236. Rick, edited by Torben C. and Erlandson, Jon M., 2008: Human impacts on ancient marine
ecosystems: a global perspective, Berkeley: University of California Press.
5237. Ricklefs, M. C., 1991, 1993: A History of Modern Indonesia since c.1300, Second Edition.
MacMillan.
5238. Ricklefs, M. C., 1993: A History of Modern Indonesia: c. 1300 to the Present, (2d ed.)
Stanford: Stanford University Press,
5239. Ricklefs, M .C., 2001: A History of Indonesia since c 1200, Basingstoke: Palgrave.
5240. Ridgell, Reilly, 1995: Pacific Nations and Territories. The Islands of Micronesia, Melanesia,
and Polynesia, Honolulu. Bess Press, Inc. / Pacific Region Educational Laboratory.
5241. Ridgway, K. R., J. S. Godfrey, G. Meyers and R. Bailey, 1993: “Sea-Level Response to
the 1986-1987 El-Nino Southern Oscillation Event in the Western Pacific in the Vicinity of
Papua New Guinea”, Journal of Geophysical Research-Oceans, 98(C9): 16387-16395.
5242. Riesenberg, S.H., 1980: The native polity of Ponape, Washington: Smithsonian Institution
Press.
5243. Rietveld, P., 1999: Regional development in an age of structural economic change,
Aldershot, Asghate.
5244. Rieucau, Jean, 2004: Bioko (Guinée équatoriale): un espace insulaire stratégique au
centre du golfe de Guinée, les cahiers d’outre mer, 2004, vol. 57, no 226-227, p. 217-232.
5245. Rigby, Nigel, Merwe, Pieter van, Williams, Glyn, 2005: Pioneers of the Pacific: voyages of
exploration, 1787-1810 / Nigel Rigby, Pieter van der and Glyn Williams. Crawley, W.A.:
UWA Press.
5246. Rigby, Nigel; van der Merwe, Pieter, 2002: Captain Cook in the Pacific, National Maritime
Museum, London UK.
5247. Rigler, Robert G. Mrs.; Greenwood, G.R. Mrs., 1984: Descendants of New England
Protestant missionaries to the Sandwich Islands (Hawaiian Islands), 1820-1900: an
alphabetically arranged copy of births, marriages, and deaths from the records of the
Hawaiian Mission Children’s Society Library, Honolulu, Hawaii.
5248. Riley, Carlos Guilherme, 1995: As ilhas e a Abertura da Fronteira Oceânica, in Arquipélago.
História in Memoriam Maria Olimpia da Rocha Gil, Revista da universidade dos Açores,
2ª série, vol.II (nº.1), pp.17-31.
5249. Riley, G., 1981: Three years survey - clinical and children mimeo, Kimbe, WNB Division of
Health.
5250. Ritter, P.L., 1981: The population of Kosrae at contact, Micronesica, vol. vol. 17, no 1-2, p.
p. 11-28.
5251. Rivera Guzman, P. (ed.), 1997: Life in the Caribbean, Kingston, Canoe Press.
5252. Rivera Ortiz, Angel Israel, 2001: Islands at the crossroads: politics in the non-independent
Caribbean, [edited by] Aarón Gamaliel Ramos and Angel Israel Rivera, Kingston, Jamaica:
Ian Randle Publishers; Boulder, Co.: Lynne Rienner Publishers.
2009
CEHA 287
5253. Rivers, William H., 2000: The History of Melanesian Society, Adamant Media Corporation.
5254. Riviere, Emmanuel W., 1990: State systems in the Eastern Caribbean: historical and
contemporary features, Mona, Jamaica: Institute of Social and Economic Research,
University of the West Indies.
5255. Rizvi, S. N. H., 1990: The Shompen: a vanishing tribe of the Great Nicobar Island, Seagull
Books, Calcutta.
5256. RMS, 2006: St. Helena and the South Atlantic islands; Robert A. Wilson. Caithness:
Whittles.
5257. Robarts, Edward, [1797-1824], 2000: ‘A stranger in a strange country’ [Exploration &
exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith
and Thomas Nicholas. In Lamb, Jonathan; Smith, Vanessa; Thomas, Nicholas, (ed.),
Exploration & exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900 (Chicago (IL) and London:
Chicago University Press), 170-79.
5258. Robb, John, 2001: “I Sland Identities: Ritual, Travel and The Creation of Difference in
Neolithic Malta”, in European Journal of Archaeology, Aug 2001; vol. 4: pp. 175 - 202.
5259. Robbins, J. and D. Akin, 1999: An Introduction to Melanesian Currencies: Agency, Identity,
and Social Reproduction, In: D. Akin and J. Robbins, Eds., Money and Modernity: State
and Local Currencies in Melanesia, Pittsburgh, Pa., University of Pittsburgh Press, pp.
1-40.
5260. Robbins, Joel; Wardlow, Holly, ed. 2005: The making of global and local modernities in
Melanesia: humiliation, transformation and the nature of cultural change, Aldershot;
Burlington, VT: Ashgate.
5261. Roberson, James E. 2002: Uchina Pop: Place and Identity in Contemporary Okinawan
Popular Music. in Islands of Discontent: Okinawan Responses to Japanese and American
Power. Lanham: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, Inc., 192-227.
5262. Roberts, Deborah, Thomson, Kenneth J. and Snowdon, Patrick, 1999: Modelling the
Western Isles Economy Regional Accounts 1997, Macaulay Land Research Institute and
the University of Aberdeen.
5263. Roberts, G. H., 1989: “A history of dentistry and diet in the Falkland Islands. Part 2”, in
Dental Historian, 16, 3-37, Publisher: British Dental Association.
5264. Roberts, Gary Boyd, 1986: Mayflower source records: primary data concerning southeastern
Massachusetts, Cape Cod, and the islands of Nantucket and Martha’s Vineyard: from the
New England historical and genealogical register, Baltimore, Genealogical Pub. Co..
5265. Roberts, H. H., 1994: Reefs and lagoons of Grand Cayman (in “Monographiae biologicae”,
ed. Brunt, MA and Davies, JE), Kluwer Academic Publishers, Boston, MA.
5266. Roberts, J., 1997: Voices from a lost world; Australian women and children in Papua New
Guinea before the Japanese invasion, Sydney, Millenium.
5267. Roberts, Peter A., 2008: Roots of Caribbean identity: [language, race and ecology],
Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press.
5268. Robertson, James, 2002: Re-Writing the English Conquest of Jamaica in the Late
Seventeenth Century, The English Historical Review, 117(473):813-839.
5269. Robie, D., 1989: Beleu – trust betrayed, in his Blood on the banner; nationalist struggles in
the South Pacific, Malaya Books, 161-76.
5270. Robie, D., 1989: Blood on their banner: nationalist struggles in the South Pacific, Leichhart,
NSW.
2009
5271. Robie, David, 1992: Tu galala: social change in the Pacific, Wellington.
5272. Robillard, Albert B. edited by. 1992: Social change in the Pacific islands, London; New
York: Kegan Paul International.
5273. Robineau, Claude, 1985: Tradition et modernité aux îles de la Société: 2. Les racines,
Paris: ORSTOM, (100), (Mémoires ORSTOM; 100), Disponível online em url: http://
horizon.documentation.ird.fr/exl-doc/pleins_textes/pleins_textes_6/Mem_cm/16962.pdf.
Consulta em 1 de Agosto e 2009.
5274. Robineau, Claude, 2000: Les îles mystérieuses: paysages et problèmes de sociétés
paysannes, Comores, Congo, Madagascar, Polynésie, Abbeville: F. Paillart, ed..
5275. Robineau, Claude, 2009: Marae, population et territoire aux îles de la Société: Le réseau
mã’ohi, Journal de la Société des océanistes, no 128, p. 79-89.
5276. Robinson, Carline S., William R., 1985: The Blacks in these Sea Islands: then and now,
New York, Vantage Press.
5277. Robinson, Cedric J., 1986: The American press and the repairing of the Philippines, Race
& Class, Jan; vol. 28: pp. 31 - 44.
5278. Robinson, O. and Paul Cashin, 2006: The Caribbean: from vulnerability to sustained
growth. Washington, D.C.: International Monetary Fund.
5279. Robinson, Randall, 2007: An Unbroken Agony: Haiti, from Revolution to the Kidnapping of
a President, New York: Perseus Books Group.
5280. Robinson, Tim, 1986: Stones of Aran: pilgrimage, Westmeath: Lilliput Press in association
with Wolfhound Press.
5281. Robinson, Tim, 1991: Mementos of mortality: the cenotaphs and funerary cairns of Arainn
(Inishmore County, Galway, Republic of Ireland), with photographs by Gilbert Stucky,
Roundstone: Folding Landscapes.
5282. Robson, L. L., 1983: A History of Tasmania. Volume I. Van Diemen’s Land From the Earliest
Times to 1855, Melbourne, Oxford University Press.
5283. Robson, Michael, 2005: St Kilda: church, visitors and “natives”, Port of Ness: Islands Book
Trust.
5284. Robson, Roy R., 2004: Solovki: the story of Russia told through its most remarkable
islands, New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press.
5285. Rocard, Michel, 2000: Corse: Jacobins, ne tuez pas la paix!, Le Monde, Paris.
5286. Rocha, Agostinho, 1986: Subsídios para a História da Ilha de Santo Antão (1462-1983),
Praia, Edição do Autor.
5287. Roche, Richard, 1987: Saltee: islands of birds and legends, New edition, Dublin: [s.n.].
5288. Rodao, Florentino coordinador, 1989: España y el Pacífico, prólogo, Leoncio Cabrero.
5289. Rodney, Walter, 1981: “Guyana: the making of the labour force”, in Race & Class, Jan.; vol.
22: pp. 331 - 352.
5290. Rodney, Walter, 1981: A History of the Guyanese Working People, 1881-1905, Baltimore:
Johns Hopkins University Press.
5291. Rodrigue, Lvesque, compiled and edited. 1992: History of Micronesia: a collection of source
documents, Gatineau, Québec: Éditions Lévesque = Lévesque Publications, 20 volumes.
5292. Rodrigues, Isabel P. B. Fêo, 2003: Islands of Sexuality: Theories and Histories of
Creolization in Cape Verde, International Journal of African Historical Studies; Vol. 36
2009
CEHA 289
Issue 1, p83, 21p.

5293. Rodríguez Pérez, Armando, María Castillo, 2001: La imagen que los canarios tienen de
sí mismos y de las relaciones interinsulares: actitudes y estereotipos insulares en la
comunidad canaria, La Laguna: Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
5294. Rodríguez Rojas, José, 1993: Las islas Galápagos: estructura geográfica y propuesta de
gestión territorial, Quito, Ecuador: Ediciones Abya-Yala.
5295. Rodríguez y Rodríguez de Acuña, Fernando, 1981: Formación de la economía canaria
(1800-1936), Madrid: Biblioteca Financiera del Banco Occidental.
5296. Rodríguez Yanes, José Miguel, 1992: Tenerife en el siglo XVII: tensiones y conflictos en
la segunda mitad de la centuria, prólogo, Antonio Domínguez Ortíz, [La Laguna, Canary
Islands]: Ayuntamiento de La Laguna, Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
5297. Rodríguez, Ileana, 2004: Transatlantic topographies: islands, highlands, jungles,
Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
5298. Rodríguez, Juan José Rodríguez, José Adrián García Rojas, coordinadores, 1999: El
régimen especial político-administrativo de Canarias: las singularidades, Madrid, M.
Pons, Ediciones Jurídicas y Sociales: Gobierno de Canarias, Consejería de Presidencia.
5299. Rodwell, Warwick, 1990: The Fishermen’s Chapel, Saint Brelade, Jersey: its archaeology,
architecture, wall paintings and conservation, sections by Ursula Fuhrer, Gottfried Hauff
and Sven Mieth and contrilbutions by Margaret Finlaison and Juliet Rogers, The Samoa
reader: anthropologists take stock, edited by Hiram Caton. Lanham, Md.: University
Press of America.
5300. Rodwell, Warwick, 1994: The archaeology of the early church in the Channel Islands, In
Painter, Kenneth (ed.), “Churches built in ancient times”: recent studies in early Christian
archaeology (Specialist studies of the Mediterranean, 1; Occasional paper (Society of
Antiquaries of London), ns, 16), London: Society of Antiquaries of London; London:
Accordia Research Centre, University of London, 295-312.
5301. Rodwell, Warwick, 1996: Les Écréhous, Jersey: the history and archaeology of a Channel
Islands archipelago; with sections by Christopher Blackstone and contributions by Michael
J. Andrews, [St Hélier]: Société Jersiaise, 1996.
5302. Roga, Kenneth, 1989: Na Tututi Moa pa Ghanogga: Za Tavakarovo Betoko Zata Kuti pa
Paranga / Historical tales of Ranongga Island, Gizo, Western Province, Solomon Islands:
Western Province Government, 31 pp., illustrated, In Ranongga and English..
5303. Rogers, Anthony, 2003: Churchill’s Folly: Leros and the Aegean: The last great British
Defeat of the Second World War; foreword by the Earl Jellicoe. London: Cassell Military.
5304. Rogers, Pat, 1995: Johnson and Boswell: the transit of Caledonia, Oxford; New York:
Clarendon Press; New York: Oxford University Press.
5305. Rogers, R.F., 1995: Destiny’s landfall: a history of Guam, Honolulu.
5306. Rogers, Reuel Reuben, 2006: Afro-Caribbean immigrants and the politics of incorporation:
ethnicity, exception, or exit, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press.
5307. Rogers, Robert F., 1995: Destiny’s Landfall: A History of Guam, Honolulu: University of
Hawaii Press.
5308. Rogozinski, Jan, 1999, 2000: A Brief History of the Caribbean - From the Arawak and Carib
to the Present, Revised version New York, USA.
5309. Rogozinski, J., 2000: Honour Among Thieves: Captain Kidd, Henery Every and the Pirate
Republic of Libertalia, Stackpole Books.
2009
5310. Røkkum, Arne, 1998: Goddesses, priestesses and sisters: mind, gender and power in the
monarchic tradition of the Ryukyus, Oslo, Boston, Scandinavian University Press.
5311. Røkkum, Arne, 2006: Nature, ritual, and society in Japan’s Ryukyu Islands, New York:
Routledge.
5312. Roland, W., Force and Brenda Bishop, Honolulu: Pacific Science Association.
5313. Roldán Montaud, Inés (ed.), 2008: Las haciendas públicas en el Caribe hispano durante el
siglo XIX, Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Científicas.
5314. Rombaldi, Michel, 1991: Regulation Territoriale Et Planification Decentralisee: Le Cas De
La Corse; Sous La Direction De Claude Berthomieu, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine),
Thèse de doctorat: Sciences économiques: Nice.
5315. Romeril, M., 1985: Tourism and conservation in the Channel Islands, Tourism Management,
6(1), pp.43-49.
5316. Romero Mayo, Rafael, Juan Carlos Arriaga Rodriguez (comps.), 2007: Turismo, medio
ambiente y cooperación internacional en el Caribe: una aproximación situacional,
[Quintana Roo]: Universidad de Quintana Roo, División de Ciencias Políticas y
Humanidades; México, D.F.: Plaza y Valdés.
5317. Romero-Frias, Xavier, 1999: The Maldive Islanders, A Study of the Popular Culture of an
Ancient Ocean Kingdom. Barcelona.
5318. Ronald E. Dolan, ed., 1991: Philippines: A Country Study, Washington: GPO for the Library
of Congress. Disponível on line Disponível em url: http://countrystudies.us/philippines/,
consultado em 11 de julho de 2009.
5319. Ronayne, J. and Campbell Boag, 1989: Science and technology in Australasia, Antarctica
and the Pacific Islands, Burnt Mill, Harlow, Essex, UK: Longman.
5320. Ronquillo Rubio, Manuela, 1991: Los orígenes de la inquisición en Canarias, 1488-1526,
Las Palmas G.C.: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
5321. Roopnarine, Lomarsh, 2007: Indo-Caribbean indenture: resistance and accommodation,
1838-1920, Kingston, Jamaica: University of the West Indies Press.
5322. Roper (T.), 2005: «Small Island States - Setting an Example on Green Energy Use»,
RECIEL, 14(2), p. 108-116.
5323. Ros, Martin, 1993: Night of Fire - The Black Napoleon and the Battle for Haiti, New York:
DaCapo Press.
5324. Rosa Eduardo Ferraz da, 1989: Açorianidade e autonomia, Universidade da Califórnia.
5325. Rosa, Victor M. P. Da, Trigo, Salvato, 1987: Da insularidade à açorianidade: algumas
reflexões, Universidade dos Açores, “Separata de Arquipélago, revista da Universidade
dos Açores, série Ciências sociais, no. 2.
5326. Rosam, Ken, 2001: Operation Pharos and the Cocos/Keeling Islands: the history of the
Allies’ secret air base in the Indian Ocean during the Second World War, Bognor Regis:
Woodfield.
5327. Rose, Edward P. F., 2005’: The first hydrogeological and geological maps of Jersey, Channel
Islands: work by Walther Klüpfel in 1942 and Richard Nelson c. 1828’, Proceedings of the
Geologists’ Association, 16:2, 107-16.
5328. Rose, Michael D. , Gary A. Polis, 2000: On the Insularity of Islands, Ecography, volume 23
Issue 6, Pages 693 - 701.
5329. Rosenberg, Leah, 2007: Nationalism and the formation of Caribbean, New York: Palgrave
2009
CEHA 291
Macmillan.
5330. Rosenwarne, S., 1988: Ruling the region, in Lee, J. & Burgmann, V., (eds.), A most
valuable acquisition; A people’s history of Australia since 1788, Ringwood, Penguin.
5331. Ross, M. J., 1982: Ross in the Antarctic: the voyages of James Clark Ross in Her Majesty’s
ships Erebus & Terror: 1839-1843, Whitby.Ross, Malcolm D., 1996: Studies in languages
of New Britain and New Ireland. Volume 1: Austronesian languages of the North New
Guinea cluster in Northwestern New Britain, Pacific Linguistics/Research School of
Pacific and Asian Studies/The Australian National Un.
5332. Ross, Russell R. and Andrea Matles Savada (eds.), 1990: Sri Lanka, a Country Study, 2d
ed. Washington, D.C.: Library of Congress.
5333. Rosselló Bordoy, Guillermo, 1983, 1986: El poblado prehistórico de Hospitalet Vell
(Manacor), Palma de Mallorca: Institut d’Estudis Baleàrics.
5334. Rosselló Bover, Pere, 1997: Els moviments literaris a les Balears, 1840-1990, [Palma de
Mallorca, Spain?]: Caixa de Balears: Consell Insular de Mallorca: Edicions Documenta
Balear.
5335. Rossille, Richard, 1996: Le Kava à Wallis et Futuna. Survivance d’un breuvage océanien
traditionnel, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.
5336. Rossiter, Mike, 2007: Sink the Belgrano, London: Bantam.
5337. Rotkirch, Holger, 1986: “The Demilitarization and Neutralization of the Åland Islands: A
Regime ‘in European Interests’ Withstanding Changing Circumstances”, in Journal of
Peace Research, Jan 1986; vol. 23: pp. 357 - 376.
5338. Rottman, Gordon L., 2002: World War II Pacific islands guide: a geo-military study, foreword
by Benis M. Frank, Westport, Conn, Greenwood Press.
5339. Rottman, Gordon L., 2004: The Marshall Islands 1944: Operation Flintlock, the capture of
Kwajalein and Oxford: Osprey.
5340. Rouard, Danielle, 1984: Saint Pierre et Miquelon, Iles Oubliees, Le Monde, 23/02/1984, no
12154, p. p. 1-8. (numero 1253 du 22/02/84.)
5341. Rountree, Kathryn, 2000: ‘Re-making the Maori female body: Marianne William’s mission
in the Bay of Islands’, Journal of Pacific History, 35:1, 49-66.
5342. Roura i Aulinas, Lluís, 1999: La crisi de l’antic règim a les Balears: 1780-1814, Palma,
Mallorca, Edicions Documenta Balear, “Sa Nostra”, Caixa de Balears, Consell de Mallorca.
5343. Rousselot, J. 2002 : Ujung Pandang – Makassar: métropole du grand Est Indonésien, in
Cahiers D’outre Mer, 219, pp. 259-278. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/
index991.html. consulta a 20 de Agosto de 2009.
5344. Routledge, D. (ed). 1985: Matanitu: the struggle for power in early Fiji, Suva.
5345. Routledge, D. (ed). 1995: The Fiji and New Caledonia Journals of Mary Wallis, 1851-1853,
Institute of Pacific Studies, Suva and Peabody Essex Museum, Salem.
5346. Roux, J.C., 1984: Nature et hommes dans les iles tropicales: reflexions et exemples, In Le
probleme des migrations dans la zone pacifique insulaire, un eternel recommencement,
Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CEGET; CRET, p. 129-134.
5347. Roux, Jean-Claude, 1985: “Un exemple de migration enracinement dans le Pacifique Sud:
la communauté wallisienne et futunienne de Nouvelle-Calédonie”, in Cahiers, ORSTOM,
Série Sciences Humaines, 21 (4), p. 461-480.
2009
5348. Roux, Jean-Claude, 1995: Wallis et Futuna: espaces et temps recomposés: chroniques
d’une micro insularité, Centre de recherche sur les espaces tropicaux de l’Université
Michel de Montaigne, Bordeaux III.
5349. Rouyer, Philippe, 2006: ‘La vie quotidienne dans les Iles de la Manche sous l’occupation
allemande’, Études Normandes, 3, 67-75.
5350. Rowland, Ian, compiler. 1992: Timor: including the islands of Roti and Ndao, Oxford,
England; Santa Barbara, Calif.: Clio Press.
5351. Roy, James Charles, 1991: Islands of storm = Eileáin annraidh, Chester Springs, Pa.:
Dufour Editions; Dublin: Wolfhound Press.
5352. Roy, Shree Bhagawan, 1995: Bio-social change among the Karens of Andaman Island,
New Delhi: Inter-India Publications.
5353. Royle, S. A., 1983: The economy and society of the Aran Islands, county Galway in the
early nineteenth century, Irish Geography, 16 (1983), 36-54.
5354. Royle, S., 1989: “A human geography of islands”, Geography, n°323, p. 106-116
5355. Royle, Stephen A., 1989: “Settlement, population and economy of the Mayo islands”
(including Inishbofin), in Cathair na Mart (Westport Historical Society), 9, 120-133.
5356. Royle, S. A., 1994: Island life off Co. Down: the Copeland islands, Ulster Journal of
Archaeology, 3rd ser., 57, 177-182.
5357. Royle, S. and Scott, D., 1996: Accessibility and the Irish islands, Geography, 8(12), pp.111-
119.
5358. Royle, S.A., 1999: Bridging the Gap: Prince Edward Island and the Confederation Bridge,
British Journal of Canadian Studies, Vol. 14, No. 2, pp. 242-255.
5359. Royle, S.A., 2001: A Geography of Islands: Small Island Insularity, London, Routledge.
5360. Royle, S.A., 2007: ‘Islands off the Irish Coast and the “Bridging Effect”’ in G. Baldacchino
(ed.) Bridging Islands: The Impact of Fixed Links, Charlottetown, Canada, Acorn Press,
pp. 207-222.
5361. Royle, S. A., 2007: Definitions & Typologies, ‘in G. Baldacchino (ed.) A World of Islands.
An Island Studies Reader, Malta & Canada, Agenda Academic and Institute of Island
Studies, pp. 33-56.
5362. Ruaux, Jean-Yves, 1994: Vichy sur Manche: les îles anglo-normandes sous l’Occupation,
Rennes: Editions Ouest-France.
5363. Rübel, A.; [et al.], 2003: Masoala – the Eye of the Forest, A new Strategy for Rainforest
Conservation in Madagascar (available in English, French, German), Th. Gut-Verlag.
Stäfa.
5364. Rubinstein, D., 1995: Love and suffering; adolescent socialisation and suicide in Micronesia,
TCP, 7, 1, 21-54.
5365. Rubinstein, M., 2006: Taiwan: A New History, M.E. Sharpe.
5366. Rubio Recio, J. Manuel, 1988: Pacífico iberoamericano, islas Galápagos y Pascua, Madrid:
Anaya.
5367. Rugebatu, Colin, et all..., 1995: Custom Stories from Choiseul, Western Province Office,
llustrated by children from the Gizo Primary School, Eleven folktales, Diglot in English
and Choiseul Island languages.
5368. Rugemer, Edward Bartlett, 2008: The problem of emancipation: the Caribbean roots of the
2009
CEHA 293
American Civil War, Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.

5369. Ruíz Rodríguez, Alvaro, 1993: El templo oscuro: la arquitectura del cine, Tenerife, 1897-
1992, prólogo, Fernando Gabriel Martín, Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Filmoteca Canaria.
5370. Ruiz, A.L., 1985: Tourism and the economy of Puerto Rico: an input-output approach,
Tourism Management, 6(1), pp.61-65.
5371. Rule, Margaret, 1990: The Romano-Celtic ship excavated at St Peter Port, Guernsey,
In McGrail, Seán (ed.), Maritime Celts, Frisians and Saxons: papers presented to a
conference at Oxford in November 1988 (CBA research report, 71), 49-56.
5372. Rule, Margaret; Monaghan, Jason, 1993: A Gallo-Roman trading vessel from Guernsey:
the excavation and recovery of a third century shipwreck, Candie Gardens, Guernsey:
Guernsey Museums & Galleries.
5373. Rullan, Onofre, 2007: L’ordenació territorial a les Balears: segles XIX-XX, Palma (Illes
Balears): Edicions Documenta Balear.
5374. Rushby, Kevin, 2001: Hunting pirate heaven: a voyage in search of the lost pirate
settlements of the Indian Ocean, London, Constable.
5375. Russ, William Adam, 1992: The Hawaiian Revolution (1893-94), Associated University
Presses.
5376. Russell R. Ross and Andrea Matles Savada, editors, 1988: Sri Lanka: A Country
Study, Washington: GPO for the Library of Congress. Disponível online em url: http://
countrystudies.us/sri-lanka/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5377. Russell, C. Seighbert, 1980: Nassau’s Historic Buildings, Nassau, Bahamas.
5378. Russell, Scott, 1999: Tiempon alemán: a look back at German rule of the Northern Mariana
Islands, 1899-1914, Saipan, Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Division of
Historic Preservation.
5379. Ruud, J., 2002: Gods and Ancestors: Society and Religion Among the Forest Tribes in
Madagascar, Portland.
5380. Ryan, Jack, 2000: “Inis Cealtra”, in Sliabh Aughty: Journal of the East Clare Heritage
Group, 9, 11-12.
5381. Ryan, Jack, 2000: ‘Inis Cealtra’. Sliabh Aughty: Journal of the East Clare Heritage Group,
9 11-12.
5382. Ryan, Michael, 2004: ‘Church Island a description’, In Mac Shamhráin, Ailbhe (ed.), The
island of St. Patrick: church and ruling dynasties in Fingal and Meath, 400-1148, Dublin:
Four Courts, 106-124.
5383. Ryavec, K.E., 1995: Maldives in Indian Ocean: five island countries (pp. 249- 84), H.
Chapin Metz (ed.). Washington DC: GPO.
5384. Rynne, Etienne, 1992: Dún Aengus and some similar Celtic ceremonial centres, In Bernelle,
Agnes (ed.), Decantations: a tribute to Maurice Craig, Dublin: Lilliput Press, 196-207.
5385. Ryukyu Archaeological Research Team, 1981: Subsistence and settlement in Okinawan
prehistory: Kume and Iriomote, Vancouver: Laboratory of Archaeology, Dept. of
Anthropology and Sociology, University of British Columbia.
5386. Sabino, Acquaviva La Corsica, 1987: Storia di un genocidio, Franco Angeli, Milano.
5387. Sabino, Robin, 1980: A selected bibliography of materials on language varieties spoken
in the Virgin Islands [Charlotte Amalie, St. Thomas]: Bureau of Libraries, Museums &
Archaeological Services, Dept. of Conservation & Cultural Affairs, Govt. of the Virgin
2009
Islands.
5388. Sack, P. G., 1986: “German New Guinea: a reluctant plantation colony?”, in Journal de la
Société des Océanistes, 42(82/3): 109-27.
5389. Sack, P., Ed., 2001: Phantom History the Rule of Law and the Colonial State: The Case
of German New Guinea, Canberra, Division of Pacific and Asian History, RSPAS, The
Australian National University.
5390. Sacks, Oliver W. 1997: The island of the colorblind, New York, Alfred A. Knopf, Sadler, H.
E., 1982: Turks Islands landfall, [S.l. : s.n.,].
5391. Safla, Roucaya (red.), 1989: Fonds iles de l’Ocean Indien: catalogue des microfiches,
Université de la Réunion (Saint-Denis), Service Commun de la Documentation, 1989.
5392. Safla, Roucaya, 1989: Catalogue du fonds “Iles de l’océan Indien”, Université de la
Réunion. Service commun de la documentation. [Saint-Denis]: Université de la Réunion,
Service commun de la documentation.
5393. Sagan, E., 1985: At the dawn of tyranny; the origins of individualism, political oppression
and the state, London, Faber and Faber.
5394. Sahai, Sharad, 1998: Guadeloupe Lights Up: French-lettered Indians in a remote corner
of the Caribbean reclaim their Hindu identity. Hinduism Today, Digital Edition, February
1998.
5395. Sahlins, Marshall David 1981: The stranger-king or Dumezil among the Fijians, JPH, vol.
18(3), 107-132.
5396. Sahlins, Marshall David, 1981a: Historical metaphors and mythical realities: structure in
the early history of the Sandwich Islands kingdom, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan
Press.
5397. Sahlins, Marshall David 1985: Islands of history, Chicago.
5398. Sahlins, Marshall David, 1985-87: Islands of History, Chicago, IL and London.
5399. Sahlins, Marshall, 1988: “Deserted Islands of History: A Reply To Jonathan Friedman”, in
Critique of Anthropology, Dec 1988; vol. 8: pp. 41 - 51.
5400. Sahlins, Marshall David 1989: Des îles dans l’histoire, Paris, Gallimard.
5401. Sahlins, Marshall, 1989: “Captain Cook at Hawaii”, in Journal of the Polynesian Society,
98, 371-423.
5402. Sahlins, Marshall David 1992: Anahulu: Anthropology of History in the Kingdom of Hawai
(2 vols), Chicago, University of Chicago Press.
5403. Sahlins, Marshall David 1993: Goodbye to Triste Tropes: Ethnography in the Context of
Modern World History, Journal of Modern History, 65: 1-25.
5404. Sahlins, Marshall David 1994: The discovery of the true savage, in D. Marwick (ed.),
Dangerous liaisons: essays in honour of Greg Dening, Melbourne, 1994, pp. 41-94
5405. Sahlins, Marshall David 1995: How “natives” think: about Captain Cook, for example,
Chicago.
5406. Said, Edward; Bresnahan, Roger:... [et al.], 1983: Reflections on orientalism, edited by
Warren I. Cohen, East Lansing, Mich.: Asian Studies Center, Michigan State University.
5407. Saith, Radhica and Lyndersay, Mark, 1993: Why Not a Woman? Port of Spain: Paria
Publishing Co. Ltd.
5408. Saint-Guillain, Guillaume, 2003: L’archipel des seigneurs: pouvoirs, société et insularité
2009
CEHA 295
dans les Cyclades à l’époque de la domination latine (XIIIe-XVe siècles); sous la dir.
de Michel Balard, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université Panthéon-Sorbonne
(Paris). Université de soutenance, Thèse doctorat: Histoire: Paris 1.
5409. Saito, H., 1984: “Pasin bilong tumbuna: pasin bilong waitman”, in Annual Review of Social
Anthropology, 10: 171-188.
5410. Saito, H., 1986: “Copra and can: business of Portne village, New Britain Island”, in Journal
of Social Sciences and Humanities, 186: 79-120.
5411. Sakaguchi, K., 1984: “Planting kamerere with special reference to New Britain Island”, in
Tropical Forestry No. 1: 25-35.
5412. Sakihara, Mitsugu, 1987: A Brief History of Early Okinawa Based on the Omoro Soshi,
Tokyo: Honpo Shoseki Press.
5413. Sakihara, Mitsugu, 2000: Part B: Okinawa Since 1945, in Okinawa: The History of an
Island People, ed. Rutland, Vermont: Tuttle Publishing, 550-557.
5414. Salafsky, N., 1997: Eleven steps for setting up community-based timber harvesting
enterprises: an overview of IRECDP experience in New Britain, PNG, Kimbe, WNB,
European Union.
5415. Salanova, Laure, 2000: La question du campaniforme en France et dans les îles anglo-
normandes: productions, chronologie et rôles d’un standard céramique, Paris: Editions
du Comité des travaux historiques et scientifiques: Société préhistorique française.
5416. Salat, Nicole, 1983: La défense des îles bretonnes de l’Atlantique, des origines à 1860,
Vincennes: Service historique de la Marine.
5417. Salat, Nicole, 1980: Etude de l’architecture défensive des îles bretonnes de l’Atlantique
(des origines à 1860); sous la direction de André Mussat, Thèse de 3e cycle: Aart et
archéologie: Rennes 2.
5418. Salazar, Carles, 1998: “Identities in Ireland: History, ethnicity and the nation-state”, in
European Journal of Cultural Studies, Sep; vol. 1: pp. 369 - 385.
5419. Salmon, Anne, 1991: Marion de Fresne in the Bay of Islands, in Two worlds; first meetings
between Maori and Europeans 1642-1772, Auckland, Viking, pp.359-430.
5420. Salmon, A., 1992: Surville in Tokerau (Doubtless Bay), in Two worlds; First meetings
betwen Maori and Europeans 1642-1772, Auckland, Viking/Penguin pp. 299-356.
5421. Salmon, A., 1992: Two worlds; First meetings between Maori and Europeans 1642-1772,
Auckland, Viking/Penguin.
5422. Salmon, A., 1997: Between worlds; early meetings between Maori and Europeans 1772-
1815, Auckland, Viking/Penguin.
5423. Salmon, Anne, 1997: Tamatea (Dusky Sound), in Between worlds; early meetings between
Maori and Europeans 1773-1815, Auckland, Viking, pp.45-64.
5424. Salmon, J.-M., 1997: Marché du travail et développement économique dans les petites
économies insulaires: théorie et application, Paris, l’Harmattan.
5425. Salomé, Karine, 2003: Les représentations des îles bretonnes (1750-1914): étude
comparée du ragard de l’autre et du regard sur soi, Université Panthéon-Sorbonne
(Paris). Université de soutenance, Lille: Atelier national de Reproduction des Thèses.
5426. Salomé, Karine, 2003: Les îles bretonnes, une image en construction (1750-1914),
Rennes: Presses universitaire de Rennes (Histoire).
5427. Salomé, Karine, 2006: Les îles bretonnes au xixe siècle entre éloignement et isolement,
2009
Ethnologie française, 3 (Vol. 36), pp. 435-441.

5428. Salva, B., 1997: Québec-Réunion: propositions pour une coopération originale au
service du développement de deux espaces francophones, La Réunion, Rapport de
mission,Conseil Régional de la Réunion.
5429. Salvador, Mari Lyn, 1997: The art of being Kuna: layers of meaning among the Kuna of
Panama, Los Angeles, Calif., UCLA Fowler Museum of Cultural History.
5430. Samaniega, Francisco, 2004: Historia general de las Islas Marías y demás islas del Nayarit,
Tepic [Mexico]: Nayarit Editorial.
5431. Samaraweera, V K., 1987: Sri Lanka, World Bibliographical series, Vol 20, Santa Barbara,
Clio Press.
5432. Samson, Jane, 1998: Imperial benevolence: making British authority in the Pacific islands,
Honolulu (HI): University of Hawai’i Press.
5433. Samson, Jane, 1998: White savages in Imperial benevolence; Making British authority in
the Pacific Islands, Honolulu, UH Press.
5434. Samson, Jane, 1999: An empire of science; The voyage of The Herald 1845-1851 in A Frost
and J Samson, eds, Pacific empires; essays in honour of Glyndwr Williams, Melbourne,
MUP, pp.69-86.
5435. Samson, Jane (ed.), 2003: British imperial strategies in the Pacific, 1750-1900, Aldershot
and Burlington (VT): Ashgate Variorum, 233-41.
5436. San Martino de Dromi, María Laura, 1982: Gobierno y administración de las Islas Malvinas,
1776-1833, Tucumán: Ediciones UNSTA; Buenos Aires: distribuidor exclusivo Ed. Astrea.
5437. Sanchez Padron, M.; Cohen, R. (ed.). 1983: African islands and enclaves, In interpreting
dependency in the Canary Islands, Beverly Hills; Londres; New Delhi: sage publications,
p. 21-55.
5438. Sand, C. and P. J. Sheppard, 2000: Long distance prehistoric obsidian imports in New
Caledonia: characteristics and meaningImportations prehistoriques d’obsidienne sur de
longues distances en Nouvelle-Caledonie: caracteristiques et significations, Comptes
Rendus de l’Academie des Sciences - Series IIA - Earth and Planetary Science, 331(3):
235-243.
5439. Sanday, Jim, 1988: South Pacific culture and politics, notes on current issues, Australian
National University. Strategic and Defence Studies Centre. Strategic and Defence Studies
Centre, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University.
5440. Sandeau, Jacques, 2006: Le général Decaen à l’île de France: 1803-1810, Nantes:
Amalthée.
5441. Sanders, Paul, 2005: The British Channel Islands Under German Occupation 1940-45,
Sandiford, Wayne, 2000: On the brink of decline: bananas in the Windward Islands, St.
Georges, Grenada, W.I.: Fedon Books.
5442. Sandra, W. Meditz and Dennis M. Hanratty, editors, 1987: Caribbean Islands: A Country
countrystudies.us/caribbean-islands/#Antigua and Barbuda. Consulta em 11 de Julho de
2009.
5443. Sands-O’Connor, Karen, 2008: Soon come home to this island: West Indians in British
children’s literature, New York: Routledge.
5444. Sanguin, André-Louis, 1981: “”Small is not beautiful”: la fragmentation politique de la
Caraïbe”. Cahiers de géographie du Québec, n°66, p. 343-360.
2009
CEHA 297
5445. Sanguin, A. L.; Sterck, G.; Barbotin, M., 1982: Les dependances: Saint-Barthelemy... Saint-
Martin... L’ile de Marie-Galante... La Desirade... Les Saintes, In: Dossier Guadeloupe,
bulletin d’information du cenaddom, 1982, vol. vol. 12, no 68, p. p. 63-128.
5446. Sanguin, André-Louis, 1997: Vivre dans une île: une géopolitique des insularités, Paris,
Harmattan.
5447. Sanguin, A.-L. (dir.), 1998: «L’Atlantique et les géographes», Norois, n°180, p. 569-808.
5448. Sanllorente i Barragan, Francesc, 2005: La persecución económica de los derrotados: el
Tribunal de Responsabilidades Políticas de Baleares (1939-1942), Palma de Mallorca:
Miquel Font Editor.
5449. Sansone, Gena, 2004: Polynesian Tattoo bibliography, Hamilton Library, University of
Hawai‘i at Manoa.. Disponível online em url: www2.hawaii.edu/~jlcampbe/LIS601/bib/
sansone.doc . Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
5450. Santa Cruz, A. de, 1918: Islario general de todas las Islas del Mundo, ed. D.A. Blázquez,
Madrid, Impr. del Patronato de Huérfanos de Intendencia e Intervención Militares.
5451. Santana Pérez, Juan Manuel, 1992: Emigración por reclutamientos: canarios en
Luisiana, Las Palmas de G.C.: Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio de
Publicaciones.
5452. Santana Santana, Antonio, 2001: Evolución del paisaje de Gran Canaria (siglos XV-XIX),
Las Palmas: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
5453. Santana Santana, Antonio, Arcos Pereira, Trinidad, 2006: Las dos islas Hespérides
atlánticas (Lanzarote y Fuerteventura, Islas Canarias, España) durante la Antigüedad:
del mito a la realidad, Gerión, 24, núm. 1, pp. 85-110.
5454. Santana, Antoni [et. al.]. 2002: El conocimiento geográfico de la costa noroccidental de
Africa en Plini: la posición de las Canarias, Hildesheim: Olms.
5455. Santana, Lázaro, 1998: Visión insular, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Edirca.
5456. Santiago de Luxán Meléndez, Ana Viña Brito. 2006: El azúcar el mundo atlántico:
economía y hacienda: patrimonio cultural y geobotánico / XVI Coloquio de Historia
Canario-Americana, 2004; coordinado por Santiago de Luxán Meléndez, Ana Viña Brito.
Coloquio de Historia Canario-Americana (16th: 2004: Las Palmas, Canary Islands) Las
Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo de Gran Canaria, Casa de Colón.
5457. Santos, João Marinho, 1989: Os Açores nos séculos XV e XVI, Direcção Regional dos
Assuntos Culturais e Universidade dos Açores, 2 vols.
5458. Santos, Maria Emília Madeira, 1988: As estratégicas Ilhas de Cabo Verde ou A Fresca
Serra Leoa: uma escolha para a politica de expansão portuguesa no Atlântico, Lisboa:
IICT, Centro de Estudos de História e Cartografia Antiga: Separatas. 22) Sep. de Revista
da Univ. de Coimbra, vol.34, p. 485-491
5459. Sarà, Maurizio, 1996: Uomo e fauna nelle isole mediterranee, Palermo: Medical books.
5460. Sarakāra, Gaurā ga, 1982: Āndāmāna: sekāla, ekāla, Kalikātā: Pūrṇimā Sarakāra.
5461. Sareen, Tilak Raj, 2002: Sharing the blame: Subhash Chandra Bose and the Japanese
occupation of the Andamans, 1942-1945, Delhi: S.S. Publishers.
5462. Sarkar, J., 1990: The Jarawa, Calcutta: Seagull Books on behalf of the Anthropological
Survey of India.
5463. Sathiendrakumar, R. and Tisdell, C., 1989: Tourism and the economic development of the
Maldives, Annals of Tourism Research, 16(2), pp.254-269.
2009
5464. Satish Chand, 2005: Pacific Islands regional integration and governance, ed. Canberra:
Asia Pacific Press at the Australian National Unuiversity.
5465. Saul, John Ralston. 1992: Voltaire’s Bastards: The Dictatorship of Reason in the West,
New York: Free Press; Maxwell Macmillan International.
5466. Saunders, D. Gail, 1985: Slavery in the Bahamas, 1648-1838, Nassau, Bahamas.
5467. Saunders, Gail, 1990: Bahamas Society After Emancipation, Kingston: Ian Randle
Publishing.
5468. Saunders, Gail, 1996: The Social Life in the Bahamas 1880s–1920s, Nassau: Media
Publishing.
5469. Saunders, Gail, 1997: The changing face of Nassau: the impact of tourism on Bahamanian
society in the 1920s and 1930s, Nieuwe West-Indische Gids - New West Indian Guide,
71:1-2, 21-42.
5470. Saunders, Gail, 2002: ‘Slavery and Cotton Culture in the Bahamas’. In Shepherd, Verene
A. (ed.), Working Slavery, Pricing Freedom: Perspectives from the Caribbean, Africa and
the African Diaspora, Oxford: James Currey, 21-43.
5471. Saunders, Gail, 2002: ‘Slavery and Cotton Culture in the Bahamas’. In Shepherd, Verene
A. (ed.), Slavery without sugar: diversity in Caribbean economy and society since the 17th
century, Gainesville (FL): University Press of Florida, 129-51.
5472. Saunders, Rebecca, 2000: Stability and change in Guale Indian pottery, A.D. 1300-1702,
Tuscaloosa, Ala. : University of Alabama Press.
5473. Saunders, William C., 1980: “Sea Islands: Then and Now”, in Journal of Black Studies, Jun
vol. 10: pp. 481 - 492.
5474. Saussol, A., 1988: “Des limites de l’insularité: le cas de Wallis”, Bulletin de l’Association
des géographes français, n°3, p. 271-281.
5475. Saussol, Alain, 1985: Trente mille en Nouvelle-Calédonie, In: Ces îles où l’on parle français,
Herodote, no 37-38, pp. 129-143.
5476. Sauvary, J. C., 1990: Diary of the German occupation of Guernsey 1940-1945, builder,
grower, churchwarden, douzenier, Upton upon Severn: Self Publishing Association.
5477. Savelle, James M., 1984: Cultural and Natural Formation Processes of a Historic Inuit
Snow Dwelling Site, Somerset Island, Arctic Canada, American Antiquity, Vol. 49, No.3.
5478. Savvidēs, Alexēs G. K., 1986: Ta vyzantina heptanēsa, 11os-arches 13ou aiōna: to nautiko
thema Kephallēnias stēn hysterobyzantinē period, Athēna, Vivliopōleio tōn vivliophilōn.
5479. Scafe, Suzanne, 2004: The Caribbean, Journal of Commonwealth Literature, 39.4: 29-47.
5480. Scaglion, R., Ed. 1983: Customary Law in Papua New Guinea. Port Moresby?, Monograph
2. Law Reform Commission of Papua New Guinea.
5481. Scaletta, N. M., 1981: “Gender and the life cycle as intra-related processes in Melanesia
with special reference to the Bariai of Northwest New Britain, Papua New Guinea”, Nexus,
2(1): 29-54.
5482. Scaletta (McPherson), Naomi. 1985: Death by sorcery: the social dynamics of dying in
Bariai, West New Britain. in Aging and Its Transformations. Dorothy Ayers Counts and
America. Reprinted 1992 by the University of Pittsburgh Press, Pittsburgh, Pp. 223-248.
5483. Scaletta (McPherson), Naomi, 1985a: Primogeniture and primogenitor: firstborn child
and mortuary ceremonies among the Kabana (Bariai) of West New Britain, Papua New
2009
CEHA 299
Guinea. Ph.D. dissertation. McMaster University.

5484. Scaletta, N. M., 1986: “Erratum to ‘Childbirth: a case history from west New Britain, Papua
New Guinea” in Oceania, (57:l) 33-52. Oceania, 57(2): 98.
5485. Scammell, Geoffrey Vaughn, 1986: “The English in the Atlantic Islands, c.1450-1650”, in
Mariner’s Mirror, 72, 295-317.
5486. Scanlan, Don, 2003: Memories of an islander: a life on Scattery and beyond, Ennis: Clasp
Press.
5487. Scarano, Francisco, 1982: “Bibliografía histórica puertorriqueña de la década de los
setentas, 1970-1979,” with Carmelo Rosario Natal, Homines, Revista de Ciencias
Sociales, 6, 1 (1982):193-219.
5488. Scarano, Francisco, 1992: Haciendas y barracones: azúcar y esclavitud en Ponce, Puerto
Rico, 1800-1850 [translation of Sugar and Slavery]. Río Piedras: Ediciones Huracán.
5489. Scarano, Francisco, 1993-2007: Puerto Rico: cinco siglos de historia. Bogotá: McGraw-
Hill, 1993. Second ed., Mexico City.
5490. Scarano, Francisco A., 1994: Writing Puerto Rican History: the Challenge of Synthesis,
Social Studies, Vol. 85.
5491. Scarano, Francisco, 1996-2006: Puerto Rico: una historia contemporánea. México City:
McGraw-Hill Interamericana.
5492. Scarano, Francisco, 1998: “The Spanish Caribbean,” A Historical Guide to World Slavery,
eds. Seymour Drescher and Stanley Engerman, New York: Oxford University Press, 137-
142.
5493. Scarano, Francisco, 1999: “Desear el jíbaro: metáforas de la indentidad puertorriqueña en
la transición imperial,” Islas e imperios/Islands and Empires (Barcelona) II (Spring):65-74.
5494. Scarano, Francisco, Ed., 1981-88: Inmigración y clases sociales en el Puerto Rico del
siglo XIX. Río Piedras: Ediciones Huracán Scarano, Francisco, 2007: Ed., with Margarita
Zamora. Cuba: contrapuntos de cultura, historia y sociedad/Cuba: Counterpoints on
Culture, History, and Society. San Juan: Ediciones Callejón.
5495. Scarano, Francisco, 2007a:“¿Una isla que se repite? Contrapuntos cubano-puertorriqueños
entre la Guerra Fría y el reencuentro,” in Scarano and Zamora, Cuba: contrapuntos de
cultura, historia y sociedad/Cuba: Counterpoints on Culture, History, and Society, San
Juan: Ediciones Callejón, 385-402.
5496. Scarano, Francisco, Ed., with Alfred W. McCoy, 2009: Colonial Crucible: Empire in the
Making of the Modern American State, Madison: The University of Wisconsin Press.
5497. Scarr, D., 1973-1980: Viceroy of the Pacific, The Majesty of Colour, A Life of Sir John
Bates Thurston, Pacific Research Monograph Nº 4. Australian National University Press,
Canberra, 2 vols.
5498. Scarr, D., 1982: The British in Fiji, in R.J. May & H. Nelson (eds.), Melanesia beyond
diversity, vol. 1, Canberra.
5499. Scarr, Deryck, 1990: The History of the Pacific Islands: Kingdoms of the Reefs, South
Melbourne, Vic.
5500. Scarr, Deryck, (ed.). 1991: France in the Pacific: Past, Present and Future, Journal of
Pacific History, 26:2, 1469-9605.
5501. Scarr, Deryck, 1998: Slaving and slavery in the Indian Ocean, New York, St. Martin’s Press.
5502. Scarr, Deryck, 2001: A history of the Pacific islands: passages through tropical time,
2009
Richmond: Curzon.
5503. Scarre, Chris, 2002: “A Pattern of Islands: the Neolithic Monuments of North-West Brittany”,
in European Journal of Archaeology, vol. 5: pp. 24 - 40.
5504. Schaffer, Simon, 2007: ‘”On Seeing Me Write”: Inscription Devices in the South Seas’,
Representations, 97, 90-122.
5505. Schallin, Ann-Louise, 1993: Islands under influence: the Cyclades in the Late Bronze Age
and the nature of Mycenaean presence, Jonsered: P. Åströms.
5506. Schamel, Wynell and Charles E. Schamel, 1999: “The 1897 Petition Against the Annexation
of Hawaii”, Social Education, 63, 7 (November/December): 402-408.
5507. Schatan, coordinadores, Claudia, Marcos Avalos, 2006: Condiciones y políticas de
competencia: economías pequeñas de Centroamérica y el Caribe, México, D. F.:
Comisión Económica para América Latina y el Caribe; Fondo de Cultura Económica.
5508. Schaub, Jean Frédéric, 2001: «Conflitos na Ilha Terceira no Tempo do Conde-Duque de
Olivares: Poder Militar Castelhano e Autoridades Portuguesas», pp. 21-31, Avelino de
Freitas de Meneses (ed.), Actas do Congresso Internacional Comemorativo do Regresso
de Vasco da Gama Portugal, Ilhas Terceira e S. Miguel (Açores), 11 a 18 de Abril de
1999, vol.II, s.l., Universidade dos Açores/Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações
5509. Schefold, Reimar, 1980: Spielzeug für die Seelen: Kunst und Kultur der Mentawai-Inseln
(Indonesien), [Fotos der Gegenstände, Isabelle Wettstein... et al.; Feldfotos, Reimar
Schefold; Zeichnungen der Gegenstände, Eric van Dam], Zürich: Museum Rietberg; Delft
Museum Nusantara.
5510. Schefold, Reimar, 1988: Lia: das grosse Ritual auf den Mentawai-Inseln (Indonesien),
Berlin: Reimer.
5511. Schei, Liv Kjørsvik; Moberg, Gunnie, 1991: The Faroe Islands, with drawings by Trondur
Patursson, London: John Murray.
5512. Scheyvens, Regina, 1997: Sustaining women whilst sustaining the land?: engendering eco-
timber production in the Solomon Islands, [East Lansing, Mich.], Women in International
Development, Michigan State University.
5513. Schieffelin, G., and Crittenden, R., eds, 1992: Like people you see in a dream; first contact
in six Papuan societies, Viking/Penguin, Auckland
5514. Schiff, M.; Winters, A., 2003: Regional integration and development, Washington, Banque
Mondiale.
5515. Schindbeck, M., 1998: New Zealand; land of the long white cloud, in Hauser-Schaublin
B and Kriger G, eds, James Cook, gifts and treasures from the South Seas, Prestel,
Munich.
5516. Schirm, S., 2002: Globalization and the new regionalism: global markets, domestic politics
and regional co-operation, Cambridge, Polity Press.
5517. Schlemmer, Bernard, 1985: “Des Hautes Terres de Madagascar et des réformes qu’il
conviendrait d’y mettre en oeuvre”, in Cahiers d’Etudes Africaines, 25 (99), p. 433-441.
5518. Schmidt, Johan Christian, 1998: Blandede Anmærkninger, samlede paa og over St. Croix
i Amerika. English Various remarks collected on and about the island of St. Croix in
America, English translation from the Danish by Svend E. Holsoe, St. Croix, U.S.V.I.:,
Virgin Islands Humanities Council.
5519. Schoeffel, P., 1996: Sociocultural Issues and Economic Development in the Pacific Islands,
2009
CEHA 301
Manila, Office of Pacific Operations and Social Development Division, Asian Development
Bank.
5520. Schoenbaum, Thomas J., 1982: Islands, capes, and sounds: the North Carolina coast,
Winston-Salem, N.C.: J.F. Blair.
5521. Schoenfeld, A.J., 2007: Immigration and Assimilation in the Jewish Community of Late
Venetian Crete (15th–17th Centuries), Journal of Modern Greek Studies, 25(1), 1-15.
5522. Schofield, J. and George, J.J., 1997: Why study islands? In: Irving, R.A., Schofield, A.J.
and Webster, C.J. (eds), Island Studies. Fifty Years of the Lundy Field Society, Bideford:
The Lundy Field Society, pp.5-14.
5523. Schooling, Stephen J., 1990: Language maintenance in Melanesia: sociolinguistics and
social networks in New Caledonia, Dallas, TX: Summer Institute of Linguistics; [Arlington]:
University of Texas at Arlington.
5524. Schouten, Johanna, 2001: “Antropologia e colonialismo em Timor português”, in Lusotopie,
pp. 157-171.
5525. Schrank, Gilbert, 1992: Crossroad of the north: proto-industrialization in the Orkney Islands,
1730-1840, Journal of European Economic History, 21, 365-88.
5526. Schroeder, Roger, 1992: Initiation and religion: a case study from the Wosera of Papua
New Guinea, Fribourg: University Press Fribourg.
5527. Schug, D.M., 1997: The politics of Papuan labour in the Torres Strait marine industry,
Journal of the Royal Australian Historical Society, 83, 1, 59-70.
5528. Schulz, M. et alii., 2001: Regionalization in a globalizing world: a comparative perspective
on forms, actors and processes, Londres, Zed.
5529. Schumacher, Bernard N., 2008: l’autre zanzibar: Géographie d’une contre-insularité,
karthala.
5530. Schurman, Rachel A., 1998: Tuna dream: resource nationalism and the Pacific Island’s
tuna industry, Development and change, vol. 29, no 1, pp. 107-136.
5531. Schutte, H., 1991: Stori bilong wanpela ....., Pacific Studies, Vol 14, No 3, pp.69-96.
5532. Schwalbenberg, H.M., 1985: Marshallese political developments, Jornal of Pacific History,
20, 105-15.
5533. Schwalbenberg, Henry M.; Thomas Hatcher, 1994: “Micronesian Trade and Foreign
Assistance”, Journal of Pacific History, 29 (1): 95–104.
5534. Schwantes, Carlos Arnaldo, 2000: The Pacific Northwest: An Interpretive History, University
of Nebraska Press.
5535. Schwarz, A., 1994: A Nation in Waiting: Indonesia in the 1990s, Westview Press.
5536. Schwarz, edited by Bill, 2008: Caribbean literature after independence: the case of Earl
Lovelace, London: Institute for the Study of the Americas, University of London.
5537. Schweikert, Mark, 2007: ‘The Type 42 in the Falklands War: The influence of the air warfare
destroyer on joint operations’. In Stevens, David, Reeve, John, (ed.), Sea power ashore
and in the air, Sydney: Halstead Press, 222-35.
5538. Sciences Au Sud, Journal Bimestriel De L’ird, Met En Lumière Les Principaux Programmes
De Recherche Et Relate Tous Les Événements De La “Planète IRD”. http://Www.Ird.Fr/
Fr/Actualites/Journal/.
5539. Scoditti, Giancarlo M. G.; Leach, Jerry W., 1983: Kula on Kitava, In: Leach, Jerry W.;
2009
Leach, Edmund, Editors, The Kula: New Perspectives on Massim Exchange. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press; 249-273.
5540. Scoditti, Giancarlo M. G., 1990: The “Golden Section” on Kitawa Island, In: Siikala, Jukka,
Editor. Culture and History in the Pacific. Helsinki: The Finnish Anthropological Society;
233-266. (Transactions of the Finnish Anthropological Society; v. 27).
5541. Scoditti, Giancarlo M. G., 1990a: Kitawa: A Linguistic and Aesthetic Analysis of Visual Art
in Melanesia, Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter; (Approaches to Semiotics; v. 83).
5542. Scoditti, Giancarlo M. G., 1996: Kitawa oral poetry: an example from Melanesia, Canberra:
Australian National University, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Department
of Linguistics; (Pacific Linguistics, Series D; v. 87).
5543. Scollay, R., 2001: “The changing outlook for Asia-Pacific regionalism”, World economy,
n°9, p. 1135-1160.
5544. Scollay, Robert, 2001: Regional trade agreements and developing countries: the case of
the Pacific islands’ proposed free trade agreement, New York: United Nations.
5545. Scott, Caroline 1999. Insight Guide Barbados. Discovery Channel and Insight Guides;
fourth edition, Singapore.
5546. Scott, D.; Royle, S., 1992: Population, society and economy on Tory Island, Co. Donegal,
Irish Geography, 25, 169-176.
5547. Scott, J., 2001: Gender and Sustainability in Mediterranean Island Tourism. In: Ioannides,
D., Apostolopoulos, Y. and Sonmez, S.F. (eds), Mediterranean Islands and Sustainable
Tourism Development: Practices, Management and Policies, London: Pinter, pp. 87-107.
5548. Scott, Michael W., 2000: Ignorance is cosmos; knowledge is chaos: Articulating a
Cosmological Polarity in the Solomon Islands, Social Analysis, 44: 56-83.
5549. Scott, Michael W., 2001: Auhenua: Land, Lineage, and Ontology in Arosi (Solomon Islands),
Ph.D. Thesis, Chicago: University of Chicago.
5550. Scott, Michael W., 2005: Hybridity, vacuity, and blockage: visions of chaos from
anthropological theory, island Melanesia, and central Africa, Comparative studies in
society and history, 47 (1). pp. 190-216.
5551. Scott, Michael W., 2007: The Severed Snake: Matrilineages, Making Place, and a
Melanesian Christianity in Southeast Solomon Islands, Carolina Academic Press.
5552. Scott, Michael, W., 1990-91: Constitutions of Maasina Rule: Timothy George and the Iora,
Chicago Anthropology Exchange, 19: 41-65.
5553. Scott, S., 2003: ‘Loneliest Island may hold Key to Asthma’, National Post, Canada,
Disponível online em URL: http://www.sk.lung.ca/content.cfm/xtra46. Consulta em 11 de
julho de 2009.
5554. Scotti, Giacomo, 2007: L’arcipelago di luce: viaggio nelle isole della Dalmazia centrale,
Reggio Emilia: Diabasis.
5555. Scrimgeour, E. M., 1984: Distribution of Angiostrongylus cantonensis in Papua New Guinea,
Transactions of the Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, 78(6): 776-779.
5556. Seaby, Peter; Purvey, P. F. (comp.), 1984: Coins of Scotland, Ireland & the Islands (Jersey,
Guernsey, Man & Lundy) ([Seaby’s] Standard catalogue of British coins, 2).
5557. Searle, Chris, 1983: The people’s commentator: calypso and the Grenada revolution: An
interview with Cecil Belfon, The Flying Turkey, Race & Class, Jan; vol. 25: pp. 45 - 58.
5558. Searle, Chris, 1991: The Muslimeen insurrection in Trinidad, Race & Class, Jan; vol. 33:
2009
CEHA 303
pp. 29 - 43.
5559. Searwar, Lloyd, 2007: Guyana and the world: selected editorial, Georgetown, Guyana:
Guyana Publications Inc..
5560. Sebba, Mark and Tate, Shirley, 2002: “‘Global’ and ‘Local’ Identities in the Discourses of
British-Born Caribbeans”, International Journal of Bilingualism, 6.1, pp.75-89.
5561. Sebire, Heather, (ed.). 1998: Guernsey connections: archaeological and historical papers
in honour of Bob Burns, St. Peter Port, Guernsey: La Société Guernesiase.
5562. Sebire, Heather, 2005: Archaeology and early history of the Channel Islands, (Revealing
history), Stroud: Tempus.
5563. Sebire, Heather, 2006: ‘Iles anglo-normandes: some coin evidence for the impact of the
events of 1204 on the Channel Islands’. In Cook, Barrie J.; Williams, Gareth (ed.), Coinage
and history in the North Sea world, c. AD 500-1250: essays in honour of Marion Archibald
(The Northern world, 19), Leiden: Brill, 687-700.
5564. Seekins, D.M., 1985: Cook Islands in Oceania: a regional study (pp. 363-70), F.M. Bunge
and M.W Cooke (eds.). Washington DC: GPO.
5565. Seekins, D.M., 1985a: French Polynesia in Oceania: a regional study (pp. 377- 402), F.M.
Bunge and M.W Cooke (eds.). Washington DC: GPO.
5566. Seekins, D.M., 1985b: New Caledonia in Oceania: a regional study (pp. 103-136), F.M.
5567. Seekins, D.M., 1985c: Wallis et Futuna in Oceania: a regional study (pp. 437-440), F.M.
5568. Seekins, D.M., 1992: The Political System in Japan: a country study (pp. 303-366), R.E.
Dolan and R.L. Worden (eds.). Washington DC: GPO.
5569. Seekins, D.M., 1993: Historical Setting in Indonesia: a country study (pp. 1- 68). W.F.
Frederick and R.L. Worden (eds.). Washington DC: GPO.
5570. Seekins, D.M., 1993a: Historical Setting in Philippines: a country study (pp.1-64). R.E
Dolan (ed.). Washington DC: GPO.
5571. Seetohul, Brijlall, D., 1992: Transports et télécommunications à l’Ile Maurice, Pessac:
Université Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3.
5572. Segal, A., 1987: “The Caribbean exodus in a global context: comparative migration
experiences”, in Levine, B. (ed.), The Caribbean exodus, New York, Praeger.
5573. Segal, H.G., 1995: Kosrae; the sleeping lady awakens, Kosrae State Govt.
5574. Segui Llinas, M., 1995 : Les nouvelles Baléares, Paris, L’Harmattan.
5575. Segura, Miquel, 1995: Les illes inoblidables: crónica d’emigrants, Palma de Mallorca:
Iconos de Ferón.
5576. Seibert, Gerhard, 1995: “A política num micro-Estado: São Tomé e Príncipe, ou os conflitos
pessoais e políticos na génese dos partidos políticos”, in Lusotopie, 239-250.
5577. Seibert, Gerhard, 1996: “São Tomé e Príncipe: Military Coup As a Lesson ?”, in Lusotopie,
pp. 71-81.
5578. Seibert, Gerhard, 1997: “Le massacre de février 1953 à São Tomé: raison d’être du
nationalisme santoméen”, in Lusotopie, pp. 173-192.
5579. Seibert, Gerhard, 2001: Camaradas, Clientes e Compadres: colonialismo, socialismo e
democratização em São Tomé e Príncipe, Lisboa, Documenta Histórica, Vega.
2009
5580. Seibert, Gerhard, 2002: The February 1953 Massacre in São Tomé: Crack in the Salazarist
Image of Multiracial Harmony and Impetus for Nationalist Demands for Independence,
Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 10, No. 2, 2002 Pp. 53-80.
5581. Seibert, Gerhard, 2003: ”The bloodless coup of July 2003 in São Tomé e Príncipe”, in
Lusotopie, pp.245-260.
5582. Seidel, Michael, 1991: Robinson Crusoe: island myths and the novel, Boston: Twayne
Publishers.
5583. Seiler, D., 1982: Les partis autonomistes, Presses universitaires de France,
ParisSelanniemi, T., 2001: Trapped by the image: The implications of cultural tourism in
the insular Mediterranean. In Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y. and Sonmez, S.F. (eds),
Mediterranean Islands and Sustainable Tourism Development: Practices, Management
and Policies, London: Pinter, pp. 108-124.
5584. Selby, Bettina, 1989: The fragile islands: a journey through the Outer Hebrides, Glasgow
[Scotland]: R. Drew.
5585. Seller, Robbyn, 1996: Tall Tales of Tradition: Solomon Island Kastom Stories in Transition,
Master’s Thesis, Montreal: McGill University.
5586. Selve, Edgar La, 2004: La république d’Haïti, ancienne partie française de Saint-Domingue
(1879), Le Gosier (Guadeloupe).
5587. Selwyn, P., 1980: ‘Smallness and Islandness’, World Development, Vol. 8, No. 12, pp.
945-952.
5588. Selwyn, T., 2001: Tourism, development and society in the insular Mediterranean. In
Ioannides, D., Apostolopoulos, Y. and Sonmez, S.F. (eds), Mediterranean Islands and
Sustainable Tourism Development: Practices, Management and Policies, London: Pinter,
pp. 23-44.
5589. Semper, C., 1982: The Palau Islands in the Pacific Ocean, edited by Robert D. Craig,
translated by Mark L. Berg, Mangilao, Guam, USA: Micronesian Area Research Center,
University of Guam.
5590. Sen, Satadru, 2000: Disciplining punishment: colonialism and convict society in the
Andaman Islands, New Delhi; New York: Oxford University Press.
5591. Sen, Satadru, 2004: ‘Contexts, Representation and the Colonized Convict: Maulana
Thanesari in the Andaman Islands’, Crime, Histoire et Sociétés, 8:2, 117-39.
5592. Serbin, A., 1996: El ocaso de las islas: el Gran Caribe frente a los desafios globales y
regionales, Caracas, INVESP/Nueva Sociedad.
5593. Serbín, Andrés, 1998: Sunset over the islands: the Caribbean in an age of global and
regional challenges, London: Macmillan Press.
5594. Serbin, Andres, 2004: “Towards an Association of Caribbean States: Raising Some
Awkward Questions.” Journal of Interamerican Studies and World Affair, 1-19.
5595. Serge Bellegarde, 1998: Navassa Island: Haiti and the U.S. – A Matter of History and
Geography, online Disponível em url: http://windowsonhaiti.com/navassa.shtml. Consulta
em 29 de julho de 2009.
5596. Serge, Dunis, (dir.), 1999: D’île en île Pacifique, Paris.
5597. Serpillo, edited with an introduction by Giuseppe, Donatella Badin, 1996: The classical
world and the Mediterranean, Cagliari: Tema; Sassari: Università di Sassari.
5598. Serra, Compiled by Jean, Isidor Mari, 1984: La Nostra pròpia veu: introducció a la literatura
2009
CEHA 305
de les Pitiüses: història i textos, Eivissa: Institut d’Estudis Eivissencs.

5599. Serrano Cañadas, Enrique, 2008: Islas de hielo: naturaleza, presencia humana y paisaje
en las Islas Shetland del Sur: Antartida, Universidad de Valladolid, Secretariado de
Publicaciones e Intercambio Editorial.
5600. Serviable, Mario, 1982 or 1983: L’île tropicale: espace fabuleux, espace fabulé, Saint-
Paul, [Réunion]: Voyages mutalistes Réunion.
5601. Serviable, Mario, 1983: Le tourisme aux Mascareignes-Seychelles, [Saint-Denis]: Centre
universitaire de la Réunion, Université française de l’océan Indien.
5602. Severin, Tim, 1997: The Spice Island Voyage: In Search of Wallace, Abacus, paperback.
5603. Severin, Timothy, 1998: The Spice Islands voyage: the quest for the man who shared
Darwin’s discovery of evolution, photographs by Joe Benyon and Paul Harris, illustrations
by Leonard Sheil, New York, Carroll & Graf Publishers.
5604. Sevestre, Hélène, 1989: Les Iles Malouines, [Paris]: Impr. Nationale,].
5605. Sevin, Olivier, 1985: “Migrations et mise en valeur d’une basse plaine marécageuse:
l’exemple des cocoteraies de la basse Mentaya” (Kalimantan - Indonésie), in Cahiers,
ORSTOM, Série Sciences Humaines, 21 (4), p. 481-496.
5606. Sevin, Olivier, 2001: Migrations, colonisation agricole et terres neuves en Indonésie (2
tomes), Pessac: Cret; Prodig-Cnrs-Pacifica.
5607. Sevin, Olivier, 2004: Timor Lorosa’e: naissance d’un nouvel Etat, les cahiers d’outre
mer, 2004, vol. 57, no 228, p. 387-424. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/
5608. Sevin, Olivier, 2006: Le café au Timor-Oriental, Les Cahiers d’Outre-Mer, 233, Janvier-
Mars. Disponível online em url: http://com.revues.org/index191.html. Consulta em 20 de
Agosto de 2009.
5609. Seward, A.B. and Spinard, B.K. (eds), 1982: Tourism in the Caribbean: The Economic
Impact, Ottawa: International Development Research Centre.
5610. Seward, Robert, 1999: Radio happy isles: media and politics at play in the Pacific, Honolulu,
HI, University of Hawai’i Press.
5611. Seymour, J.-J., 1998: La Caraïbe face à la mondialisation, Petit Bourg, Ibis Rouge.
5612. Shafer, C.L., 1990: Nature Reserves: Island Theory and Conservation Practice, Smithsonian
Institution Press, Washington and London.
5613. Shand, R. T., 1980: ‘Island smallness: some definitions and implications,’ in R.T. Shand
(ed.) The Island States of the Pacific and Indian Oceans: Anatomy of development,
Canberra: Development Studies Centre Monograph 23, Australian National University.
5614. Shand, R.T., editor. 1980a: The Island states of the Pacific and Indian Oceans: anatomy of
development, Canberra: Australian National University.
5615. Shao, Yuming zhu bian, 1991: Feng yun di nian dai: bao Diao yun dong ji liu xue sheng yai
zhi hui yi, Taibei Shi: Lian jing chu ban shi ye gong si, Min guo 80.
5616. Sharp Lesley, A., 2002: The sacrificed generations: youth, history, and the colonized mind
in Madagascar, Berkeley.
5617. Shavit, David, 2003: Bali and the tourist industry: a history, 1906-1942, Jefferson, N.C.:
McFarland & Co.
5618. Shaw, Frances J., 1980: The Northern and Western Islands of Scotland. Their Economy
2009
and Society in the seventeenth century, Edinburgh.

5619. Shaw, Han-yi, 1999: The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands dispute: its history and an analysis
of the ownership claims of the P.R.C., R.O.C., and Japan, Baltimore, Md., University of
Maryland School of Law.
5620. Sheckels, Theodore F., 2003: The island motif in the fiction of L. M. Montgomery, Margaret
Laurence, Margaret Atwood, and other Canadian women novelists, New York: Peter Lang.
5621. Sheen, John, 1998: The reflex impact of Solomon Islands spirituality on Australia, In
Hutchinson, Mark; Treloar, Geoff (ed.), This Gospel shall be preached: essays on the
Australian contribution to world mission (Studies in Australian Christianity, 7) (Sydney
(NSW): Centre for the Study of Australian Christianity, 98-109.
5622. Sheller M, 2009: “Infrastructures of the imagined island: software, mobilities, and the
architecture of Caribbean paradise”, Environment and Planning A 41(6) 1386 – 1403
5623. Shepardson, B. 2006. On the Shoulders of Giants, British Archaeology, January/February:
14-17.
5624. Shepherd, John R., 1993: Statecraft and Political Economy on the Taiwan Frontier, 1600–
1800, Stanford University Press, 7.
5625. Sheridan, Richard B., 1990: “The Condition of the Slaves in the Settlement and Economic
Development of the British Windward Islands, 1763-1775”, in Journal of Caribbean
History, 24:2, 121-45.
5626. Sherman, C., 1993: Australian aid fuels Papua New Guinea law and order problem, Aid
Watch, 1: 3-5.
5627. Sherman, Taylor C., 2009: ‘From Hell to Paradise? Voluntary Transfer of Convicts to the
Andaman Islands, 1921-1940’, Modern Asian Studies, 43:2, 367-88.
5628. Shewman, R. D., 1981: Ethnic institutions and identity: paluan migrants on Guam,
Micronesica, vol. vol. 17, no 1-2, p. p. 29-45.
5629. Shiels, Frederick L., 1980: America, Okinawa, and Japan: case studies for foreign policy
theory, Washington, D.C.: University Press of America.
5630. Shimono, Toshimi, 1989: Yamato Ryūkyū minzoku no hikaku kenkyū, Tōkyō: Hōsei Daigaku
Shuppankyoku.
5631. Shineberg, D. & J.M. Kohler, 1990: Church and commerce in New Caledonia, Journal of
Pacific History, vol. 25(1), 1990: 38-53
5632. Shineberg, D., 1984: French labour recruiting in the pacific islands: an early episode,
journal de la societe des oceanistes, no 78, p. p. 45-50
5633. Shineberg, D., 1986: The image of France: recent developments in French Polynesia,
Journal of Pacific History, vol. 21 (3): 153-168
5634. Shineberg, Dorothy, 1999: The people trade: Pacific Island laborers and New Caledonia,
1865-1930, Honolulu, Center for Pacific Islands Studies, School of Hawaiian, Asian, and
Pacific Studies, University of Hawai’i, University of Hawai’i Press.
5635. Shinn, R. S., 1985: Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands in Oceania: a regional study (pp.
295-348), F.M. Bunge and M.W. Cooke (eds.). Washington DC: GPO.
5636. Shinn, R.S., 1985a: Guam in Oceania: a regional study F.M. Bunge and M.W. Cooke
(eds.). Washington DC: GPO, pp. 261-276.
5637. Shipley, G., 1987: A History of Samos 800–188 BC, Oxford.
2009
CEHA 307
5638. Shirley, Paul, 2004: “Tek Force Wid Force”, History Today, 54, no. 41 (April): 30–35.
5639. Shlomowitz, Ralph, 1986: Infant mortality and Fiji’s Indian migrants, 1879-1919, Indian
Economic & Social History Review, Sep; vol. 23: pp. 289 - 302.
5640. Shlomowitz, R.; Bedford, R.D., 1988: The internal labor trade in new hebrides and salomon
islands, c. 1900-1941, Journal de la societe des oceanistes, no 86, p. p. 61-85.
5641. Shnukal, A., 2001: The interwar Pacific Islander community of Port Lihou, Torres Starit,
Journal of the RHSQ, 17, 10, 433-60.
5642. Shu, Ramsay Leung-hay, 1981: The Samoans, a selected bibliography, Chicago, Ill.:
Pacific/Asian American Mental Health Research Center.
5643. Shuster, D.R., 1980: Palau’s constitutional tangle, Journal of Pacific History, 15, 74-82.
5644. Shuster, D.R., 1988: Elections, compact and assassination in the Republic of Palau, PS,
12, 1, 23-48.
5645. Shuster, D. R., 1994: Palau’s compact; controversy. Conflict and compromise, Isla; A
Journal of Micronesian Studies, 2, 2, 207-36.
5646. Shuster, edited by Donald R., Peter Larmour, and Karin von Strokirch, 1998: Leadership in
the Pacific Islands: tradition and the future, Canberra: National Centre for Development
Studies, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University;
Manilao: Micronesian Area Research Center, University of Guam.
5647. Shutler, R. and J. S. Evrard, 1991: Rotuma: a case of archaeology documenting the
Rotuman oral tradition of the first Tongan landing, Mankind and Culture in Oceania 7:
133-137.
5648. Siegel, Peter E. 2005: Ancient Borinquen: archaeology and ethnohistory of native Puerto
Rico, Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press.
5649. Siikala, Anna-Leena, Jukka, 2005: Return to culture: oral tradition and society in the
Southern Cook Islands, Helsinki: Suomalainen Tiedeakatemia.
5650. Siikala, Jukka, 1991: Akatokamanava: Myth, History and Society in the Southern Cook
Islands, Auckland, New Zealand: The Polynesian Society.
5651. Sillitoé, P., 2000: Social change in Melanesia, development and history, Cambridge,
5652. Silva, Milton N., [et al], 1984: Puerto Ricans of Hawaii: Immigrants and Migrants, Hispanic
Journal of Behavioral Sciences, Mar; vol. 6: pp. 33 - 52.
5653. Silva, António Ribeiro Marques da, 1994: Apontamentos sobre o quotidiano madeirense,
1750-1900, Lisboa: Caminho.
5654. Silva, C. N., 2002: Local and Regional Government: Continuity and Innovation in Local
Governance in Contemporary Portugal: Dimensions of Economic and Political Change
(pp. 197 220), S. Syrett (ed.). Aldershot: Ashgate Publishing Ltd.
5655. SILVA, José Manuel Azevedo e, 1997: A Importância dos Espaços Insulares no Contexto
do mundo Atlântico, in História das Ilhas Atlânticas, vol. I, Funchal, pp.125-161.
5656. Silva-Carneiro de Sousa, Lurdes, 2001: “Some Facts and Comments on the East Timor
2001 Constituent Assembly Election”, in Lusotopie, pp. 299-311.
5657. Simasotchi-Bronès, Françoise, 2004: Le roman antillais, personnages, espace et histoire:
fils du chaos, Harmattan.
5658. Simerl, [transcribed] by Linton E., Martha R. Simerl, 1986: Letters fron the Sandwich
2009
Islands, 1836-1872: [from] original manuscripts ... Knapp, Horton Owen, State College,
Pa., Mrs. D.S. Mead.
5659. Simons, Susan and Hugh Stevenson, 1991: Luk luk gen! Look again! Contemporary Art
from Papua New Guinea, Townsville, Queensland: Perce Tucker Regional Gallery.
5660. Simpson, D. R. F., 1980: Island and coastal communities: economic and social opportunities
: proceedings of a conference organized by the Fraser of Allander Institute at Kyle of
Lochalsh, 26-28 April 1978, with a foreward [sic] by Kenneth Alexander.
5661. Simpson, G., 1997: “Get What You Can While You Can’: The Landowner- Government
Relationship in West New Britain”, C. Filer, Ed. The Political Economy of Forest Mangement
in Papua New Guinea, Port Moresby and London, National Research Institute & IIED.
5662. Simutoga, Pierre-Chanel, 1992: Technologie traditionnelle à Wallis: essai de sauvegarde
de la mémoire collective des charpentiers wallisiens (tufuga) du district de Hihifo, Pierre-
Chanel Simutoga, Paris: Musée de l’Homme.
5663. Sinadinovski, C., [et al.], 2001: “Spectral Characterisation of Tsunamis and Seiches Caused
by Tectonism and Volcanism in Rabaul, Papua New Guinea”, in Natural Hazards, 24(3):
285-294.
5664. Sinclair, James Patrick, 1990: To find a path: the life and times of the Royal Pacific Islands
Regiment, compiled and edited by M.B. Pears, Bowen Hills, Brisbane, Qld.: Boolarong
Publications.
5665. Sinclair, Keith and Raewyn Dalziel, 2000: A History of New Zealand, Penguin Books,
Auckland.
5666. Sinclair, Norma, 2003: Grenada: Isle of Spice (Caribbean Guides). Interlink Publishing
Group; 3rd edition.
5667. Singe, John, 1993: Among islands, Torres Strait Islands, Qld.?: Hillside Securities.
5668. Singh, Chaitram, 1988: Guyana: Politics in a Plantation Society, New York: Praeger.
5669. Singh, K.S. general editor; Pandit, T.N.; Sarkar, B.N. editors, 1994: People of India.
Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Madras: Affiliated East-West Press: Anthropological
Survey of India.
5670. Singleton, Fred, 1989: A Short History of Finland, Cambridge University Press
5671. Singleton, N. 1980: Prevalence of malnutrition among MCH Clinic attenders in WNBP Jan-
July 1980, Kimbe, WNB Division of Health.
5672. Singleton, N. 1981: The relation between some maternal characteristics and birth weight
in the Kimbe area of West New Britain Province, Unpublished report, Kimbe, West New
Britain Province, Nutrition Section, Division of Health.
5673. Sinha, Bejoy Kumar, 1988: In Andamans, the Indian Bastille, New Delhi: People’s Pub,
House.
5674. Siroen, J.-M., 1996: “Régionalisme contre multilatéralisme ?”, Cahiers Français, n° 269,
p. 90-96.
5675. Sisk, Honor, 1990: “The outer islands of Clew Bay: a study” (Islandmore, Knockycahillaun,
Rabbit Island and Quinsheen Island), part 1, in Cathair na Mart (Westport Historical
Society), 10, 11-37.
5676. Sisk, Honor, 1991: The outer islands of Clew Bay: a study, Cathair na Mart (Westport
Historical Society), 11, 35-52.
5677. Sissons, Jeffrey, 1999: Nation and destination: creating Cook Islands identity, Institute of
2009
CEHA 309
Pacific Studies, University of South Pacific.

5678. Sissons, Jeffrey, 2007: ‘From Post to Pillar: God-Houses and Social Fields in Nineteenth-
Century Rarotonga’, Journal of Material Culture, 12:1, 47-63.
5679. Sissons, Jeffrey, Wiremu Wi Hongi, Pat Hohepa, 1987: The pūriri trees are laughing: a
political history of Ngā Puhi in the Inland Bay of Islands, Auckland, Polynesian Society.
5680. Sivadjian, Eve, 1999: Les îles Marquises, archipel de mémoire, Paris.
5681. Sj-+D0ur Skaale, 2004: The Right to National Self-Determination: The Faroe Islands and
Greenland, Brill.
5682. Skaggs, Jimmy M., 1994: The great guano rush: entrepreneurs and American overseas
expansion, New York: St. Martin’s Press.
5683. Skinner, J. and Hills, M. (eds.), 2006: Managing Island Life: Social, Economic and
PoliticalDimensions of Formality and Informality in ‘Island’ Communities, Dundee,
Scotland, University of Abertay Press.
5684. Skinner, J., 2006: ‘Introduction: Introducing Islands’ in J. Skinner & M. Hils, eds., Managing
Island Life: Social, Economic and Political Dimensions of Formality and Informality in
‘Island’ Communities, Dundee, Scotland, University of Abertay Press, pp.1-14.
5685. Skinner, Mark E., 1990: Contemporary Micronesian Literature: A Preliminary Bibliography.
s.l., s.n..
5686. Skully, Michael T., 1987: Financial institutions and markets in the South Pacific: a study
of New Caledonia, Solomon Islands, Tonga, Vanuatu, and Western Samoa, London:
Macmillan Press.
5687. Slattery, David, 1993: The end of the anthropological self: Foucault in the Trobriand Islands,
Poznań: UAM.
5688. Slaughter, Anne-Marie, 2001: International law and international relations. L’état insulaire,
M. Nijhoff.
5689. Slezakowa, Christine Goyens, 1992: L’ile et L’insularite en Grece Ancienne; Sous La
Direction De Paulette Ghiron, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat:
Etudes Grecques: Montpellier 3.
5690. Sloan, Bill, 2003: Given up for Dead: America’s Heroic Stand at Wake Island. Bantam
Books.
5691. Sloan, Geoffrey R., 2005: ‘The geopolitics of the Falklands Conflict’. In Badsey, Stephen;
Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the
future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 23-29.
5692. Slocum, Karla, 2006: Free trade & freedom: neoliberalism, place, and nation in the
Caribbean, Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.
5693. Slone, Thomas H. (THS), 1999-2008: Solomon Islands Folklore, Annotated Bibliography.
Disponível online em url: http://members.tripod.com/~THSlone/PNGFB-Solomons.html.
5694. Slone, Thomas H. (THS), 2008: An annotated bibliography of North Solomons Province
folklore. Disponível online em url: http://www.geocities.com/thslone/PNGFB-NSP.html.
Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009. [bibliografia ilhas Bougainville e Buka].
5695. Slone, Thomas H. (THS), 2008: Bibliography of Melanesian Pidgin English dictionaries,
phrase books and study guides.Annotated bibliography, Disponível online em url: http://
thslone.tripod.com/MPEB.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
2009
5696. Slone, Thomas H. (THS), 2008: Melanesian Folklore, Annotated Bibliography, Disponível
online em url: http://www.geocities.com/thslone/PNGFB.html. Consulta em 5 de Agosto
de 2009.
5697. Small Island Tourism, 1983: The Case of Zakynthos, Greece, Tourism Management, vol.
4, no. 3, September, pp. 212-215.
5698. Small, Cathy, 1997: Voyages: From Tongan Villages to American Suburbs, New York:
Cornell.
5699. Smith, Anita, 2002: An archaeology of West Polynesian prehistory, Canberra: Pandanus
Books, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, the Australian National University
5700. Smith, B., 1983: William Hodges and English plein-air painting, Art History, Vol 6/2, pp.
143-52.
5701. Smith, B., 1985: [1960] European Vision and the South Pacific, Revised second edition,
New York: Harper and Row.
5702. Smith, B., 1985a: “Management Development — ‘An Island of Change”, in Asia Pacific
Journal of Human Resources, May 1985; vol. 23: pp. 46 - 55.
5703. Smith, B., 1988: Depicting Pacific peoples, Alexander Turnbull Library Record, Vol 21, No
1 pp.29-51
5704. Smith, B., 1992: Imagining the Pacific, In the Wake of the Cook Voyages, Carlton: Melbourne
University Press at the Miegunyah Press.
5705. Smith, Bernard, 1992a: Constructing Pacific peoples, in Imagining the Pacific; In the wake
of Cook’s voyages, MUP, Melbourne, pp.193-212.
5706. Smith, Bernard, 1992b: Portraying Pacific peoples, in Imagining the Pacific; In the wake of
Cook’s voyages, MUP, Melbourne, pp.77-110.
5707. Smith, Datus Clifford, 1983: The land and people of Indonesia, New York: Lippincott.
5708. Smith, Dawn; Lee, Peter, 2007: The biographical dictionary of Britain’s railway personalities,
organisations & events 1597-1923: excluding Ireland, Isle of Man, and Channel Islands,
Glebe.
5709. Smith, DeVerne Reed, 1983: Palauan social structure, New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers
University Press.
5710. Smith, Gary, 1991: Micronesia: Decolonisation and US Military Interests in the Trust
Territories of the Pacific Islands(Alcalay), The Contemporary Pacific, 5:467-468.
5711. Smith, Hazel R. Knowles, 2007: The changing face of the Channel Islands occupation:
record, memory and myth; Hazel Knowles Smith. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.
5712. Smith, Jennie Marcelle, 2001: When the Hands are Many: Community Organization and
Social Change in Rural Haiti, Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.
5713. Smith, Leslie Francis, 1962: Modern Norwegian historiography, Norwegian Universities
Press.
5714. Smith, M.G., 1991: Pluralism, politics and ideology in the creole Caribbean, New York:
Research Institute For The Study of Man.
5715. Smith, R. J., 1989: Shetland in the world economy: a sociological perspective, In McCrone,
David; Kendrick, Stephen; Straw, Pat (ed.), The Making of Scotland: Nation, Culture and
Social Change (Edinburgh), 91-107.
5716. Smith, Roger C., 2000: The maritime heritage of the Cayman Islands, Gainesville, University
2009
CEHA 311
Press of Florida.
5717. Smith, Simon David, 2003: ‘Gedney Clarke of Salem and Barbados: Transatlantic Super-
Merchant’. New England Quarterly, 76:4, 499-549.
5718. Smith, T.; G. Keig; J. Marks and R. Grau, 1992: Summary results by environmental zone
from the 1982-83 National Nutrition Survey of Papua New Guinea: implications for future
survey design, Goroka, Papua New Guinea Institute of Medical Research.
5719. Smith, V. L., 1992: Boracay, Philippines: A case study in “alternative” tourism. In: Smith,
V.L. and Eadington, W.R. (eds), Tourism Alternatives: Potentials and Problems in the
Development of Tourism, Chichester: Wiley, pp.134-157.
5720. Smith, Vanessa, 1998: Literary culture and the Pacific: nineteenth-century textual
encounters, Cambridge, New York, NY, USA, Cambridge University Press.
5721. Smith, W., 1983: La question des taux d’echange dans les systemes kula et gimwali des
iles trobriand, journal de la societe des oceanistes, no 76, p. p. 13-20
5722. Smith, W., 1996: Cuba’s long reform, Foreign Affairs, nº 2, p. 99-112
5723. Smitheram, Verner; Milne, David; Dasgupta, Satadal, 1982: The Garden transformed:
Prince Edward Island, 1945-1980, Charlottetown: Ragweed Press.
5724. Smits, Gregory James, 1999: Visions of Ryukyu, Honolulu: University of Hawai.i Press.
5725. Smits, Gregory James, 2006: Recent Trends in Scholarship on the History of Ryukyu.s
Relations with China and Japan, Symposium: State, Current Developments and Future
Tasks in Japanese Studies, Bonn University, Disponível online em url: http://www.personal.
psu.edu/faculty/g/j/gjs4/Smits_bonn06_Revised.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
5726. Smits, Gregory James, 2006: Romantic Ryukyu in Okinawan Politics: The Myth of
Ryukyuan Pacifism. April, 2006. Lecture presented at annual meeting of the Association
of Asian Studies. Disponível online em url: http://www.personal.psu.edu/faculty/g/j/gjs4/
Smits_SF06.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
5727. Smits, Gregory James, The Post-Reversion Era, 1972-1990. in Okinawa in Postwar
Japanese Politics and the Economy. Disponível online em url: http://east-asian-history.
net/Ryukyu/History/Okinawa/Postwar/index.htm. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
5728. Smits, Gregory, 1999: Visions of Ryukyu: identity and ideology in early-modern thought
and politics, Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press.
5729. Smouts, M.C., 1997: La région comme nouvelle communauté imaginaire? In Le Galès P.et
Lequesne C., dir. – Les paradoxes des régions en Europe, Paris, La découverte.
5730. Smurthwaite, David, 1995: The Pacific war atlas, 1941-1945, New York: Facts On File.
5731. Snyder, L.L., 1982: Global mini nationalism: autonomy and independence, Westport,
Conn.: Greenwood Press.
5732. Société pour l’étude, la protection et l’amenagement de la nature dans les régions inter-
tropicales. Colloque (9; 1981; Bordeaux / Nouméa), 1984: Nature et hommes dans les îles
tropicales: réflexions et exemples / [IXe Colloque de la Société pour l’étude, la protection
et l’aménagement de la nature dans les régions intertropicales Bordeaux et Nouméa,
novembre 1981], Talence: CEGET: CRET.
5733. Sodter, François, 1985: “Eléments d’une histoire démographique”, In: Contribution à l’étude
de l’atoll de Tikehau (Archipel des Tuamotu - Polynésie française), Papeete: ORSTOM,
(24), p. 125-134, (Océanographie.Notes et Documents; 24).
5734. Solly, M., 1994: Government and Law in the Isle of Man, Castletown: Parallel Books.
2009
5735. Solomon, Serenah & Padakana, Ezekiel, 1995: Vivinei malivi oro Ninu Mekarane pa
Vangunu / Custom Stories and Way of Life of People of Vangunu, Gizo, Western Province,
Solomon Islands: Western Province Government / Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies.
5736. Solomon-Godeau, Abigail, 1989: Going Native, Art in America, July, 118-128, 161.
5737. Solsten, Eric, ed., 1991: Cyprus: A Country Study. Washington: GPO for the Library of
Congress. Disponível online em url: http://countrystudies.us/cyprus/76.htm. Consulta em
5738. Somerville-Large, Peter, 1999: Ireland’s islands: landscape, life and legends, with
photographs by David Lyons, Dublin: Gill & Macmillan.
5739. Sorensen, Nils Arne, 2000: ‘Militaere aspekter af den Britiske besaettelse af Faerøerne,
1940-1945’, Historie [Århus], 1, 45-54.
5740. Sörgel de la Rosa, Jorge, 2008: Canarias y sus islas míticas, Barcelona: Ariel Rivadeneira.
5741. Sorrenson, Maurice Peter Keith, 1992: Manifest Duty: The Polynesian Society over 100
Years.
5742. Souder, Laura Marie Torres, 1992: Daughters of the Island: Contemporary Chamorro
Women Organizers on Guam, 2nd Edition, University Press of America.
5743. Souhami, D., 2001: Selkirk’s Island, London, Orion.
5744. Soulé, M.E., 1980: Conservation Biology: an Evolutionary – Ecological Perspective,
Sinauer Associates, Sunderland, Massachusetts.
5745. Soupault Rouane, Isabelle, 2000: La Poetique De L’ile Dans Les Oeuvres Romanesques
De Cervantes, s.n.
5746. Sousa, António de, Correia, Natália, 1982: A Ilha de Sam Nunca: atlantismo e insularidade
na poesia de António de Sousa: antologia, AH, Secretaria Regional Educação e Cultura,
Direcção Regional dos Assuntos Culturais.
5747. Soustre, Robert, 1992: Art et nature dans quelques romans de l’insularité, Mémoire ou
thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat: Lettres: Poitiers.
5748. Southerwood, William Terrance, 1998: Catholics in British colonies: planting a faith where
no sun sets - islands and dependencies of Britain till 1900, London: Minerva.
5749. Souyoudzoglou-Haywood, Christina, 1999: The Ionian Islands in the Bronze Age, 3000-
800 BC, Liverpool University Press.
5750. Spaas, edited by Lieve and Brian Stimpson, 1996: Robinson Crusoe: myths and
metamorphoses, Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire Macmillan Press; New York: St.
Martin’s Press.
5751. Sparke, M., 2002: “Between Post-colonialism and Cross-border Regionalism”, Space and
Polity, n° 2, pp. 203-213.
5752. Spate, O.H.K., 1988: Paradise lost and found. The Pacific since Magellan, Canberra.
5753. Speak, Peter, 1992: William Speirs Bruce and the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition,
Scottish Geographical Magazine, 108:3, 138-48.
5754. Speak, Peter, 2003: William Speirs Bruce: polar explorer and Scottish nationalist,
Edinburgh: National Museums of Scotland.
5755. Spear, Thomas C., île en île, Lehman College and the Graduate Center, CUNY (City
University of New York). Disponível online em url: http://www.lehman.cuny.edu/ile.en.ile/.
2009
CEHA 313
5756. Spear, Thomas, 1981: Oral traditions: whose history?, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 16(3),
133-148.
5757. Specht, J.; Gosden, C., 1997: “Dating Lapita pottery in the Bismark archipelago, Papua
New Guinea”, in Asia Perspectives, 36 (2): 175-99.
5758. Specht, Jim, 1980: “Aspects of the Oral History of the Bakovi People of West New Britain
Province”, in Oral History, 8(8): 23-54.
5759. Speiser, Felix, 1990: Ethnographische Materialien aus den Neuen Hebriden und den
Banks-Inseln.
5760. Speiser, Felix, 1990: Ethnology of Vanuatu: an early twentieth century study, translated by
D.Q. Stephenson, Bathurst, Australia: Crawford House Press.
5761. Spellissy, Sean, 2003: Window on Aran, Ennis: The Book Gallery.
5762. Spencer, Jonathan (ed.), 1990: Sri Lanka: History and the Roots of Conflict, New York:
Routledge.
5763. Spennemann, DHR., 1998: The United States annexation of Wake Atoll, Central Pacific,
Journal of Pacific History, 33, 2, 239-48.
5764. Spennemann, Dirk R. 1998: An officer, yes, but a gentleman-- ?: a biographical sketch of
Eugen Brandeis, military adviser, imperial judge and administrator in the German colonial
service in the South, Sydney, Centre for Pacific Studies, University of New South Wales.
5765. Spennemann, Dirk R., 1999: Aurora Australis: the German period in the Mariana Islands,
1899-1914, Saipan, Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands: Division of Historic
Preservation.
5766. Spennemann, Dirk R., An Annotated Bibliography of German Language Sources on the
Mariana Islands (with links to many online sources). Disponível online em url: http://
marshall.csu.edu.au/CNMI/CNMIBIB/CNMIBIB2.html. Consulta em 22 de julho de 2009.
5767. Spennemann, Dirk R., Marshall Islands Online Library & Archive, Disponível online em url:
http://marshall.csu.edu.au/Marshalls/index.html. Consulta em 22 de julho de 2009.
5768. Spica, François, 2001: Quelle place pour la nature à Singapour? Insularité et développement
urbain majeur sous les Tropiques, bulletin de l’association de geographes Francais, no
3, p. p. 246-256
5769. Spicer, Andrew, 2007: ‘The Consistory Records of Reformed Congregations and the Exile
Churches’, Proceedings of the Huguenot Society of Great Britain and Ireland, 28:5, 640-
63.
5770. Spickard, edited by Paul, Joanne L. Rondilla, and Debbie Hippolite Wright, 2002: Pacific
diaspora: island peoples in the United States and across the Pacific, Honolulu: University
of Hawai’i Press.
5771. Spilanis, Ionanis, 1993: “Les territoires en marge: le cas de îles”, in Evénement Européen,
Février, pp. 169-179.
5772. Spinner, Thomas J., Jr., 1984: A Political and Social History of Guyana, 1945-1983. Boulder,
Colorado: Westview Press.
5773. Spinzia, Raymond E., Judith A., 2006: Long Island’s prominent north shore families: their
estates and their country homes. College Station, Tex.: VirtualBookworm.com Pub..
5774. Spiro, Melford E., 1982: Oedipus in the Trobriands, Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
5775. Spittal, Jeffrey; Field, John, 1990: A reader’s guide to the place-names of the United
Kingdom: a bibliography of publications, 1920-1989, on the place-names of Great Britain
2009
and Northern Ireland, The Isle of Man, and the Channel Islands. Stamford.
5776. Sponsel, Leslie E., 2000: Endangered peoples of Southeast and East Asia: struggles to
survive and thrive, Westport, Conn., Greenwood Press.
5777. SPREP, 2006: Island life: celebrating Pacific island biodiversity: case studies, Apia, Samoa:
SPREP.
5778. Spriggs, M.& A. Anderson, (sd): Late colonization of East Polynesia, Antiquity, vol. 67.
5779. Spriggs, M., 1984: The Lapita cultural complex, Journal of Pacific History, vol. 19(2), 202-
223.
5780. Spriggs, M., 1993: “Pleistocene agriculture in the Pacific: Why not?”, M. A. Smith, M. Spriggs
and B. Frankhauser, Eds. Sahul in Review: Pleistocene Archaeology in Australia, New
Guinea and Island Melanesia, Canberra, Department of Prehistory, Research School of
Pacific Studies, Australian National University, pp. 144-154.
5781. Spriggs, M., 1993: Island Melanesia: the last 10,000 years, M. Spriggs, D. E. Yen, W.
Ambroseet al, Eds., A Community of Culture: the People and Prehistory of the Pacific,
Canberra, Department of Prehistory, Research School of Pacific Studies, The Australian
National University, pp. 187-205.
5782. Spriggs, M., 1996: Early agriculture and what went before in Island Melanesia: continuity
or intrusion? In: D. R. Harris, Ed., The Origins and Spread of Agriculture and Pastoralism
in Eurasia, London, UCL Press, pp. 524-537.
5783. Spriggs, M., 1997: The Island Melanesians, Oxford, UK. and Cambridge, Mass., Blackwell
Publishers Ltd.
5784. Spriggs, M., 1999: Pacific archaeologies; contested ground in the construction of Pacific
History, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 34, No 1, pp.109-122.
5785. Spyer, Patricia, 2000: The memory of trade: modernity’s entanglements on an eastern
Indonesian island, Durham [N.C.]: Duke University Press.
5786. Srebrnik, P., 1998: The Meaning of an Island: Paradoxical Space in Writing by Authors
from the Caribbean in L. Brinklow, F. Ledwell & J. Ledwell, eds., Message in a Bottle: The
Literature of Small Islands, Charlottetown PEI, Institute of Island Studies, University of
Prince Edward Island, pp. 159-176.
5787. Sri Lanka Bibliography, from Sri Lanka A Country Study, Library of Congress, Federal
Research Division. Disponível online em url: http://lcweb2.loc.gov/frd/cs/sri_lanka/lk_bibl.
html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5788. Srivastava, Pramod Kumar, 2003: ‘Resistance and repression in India: the hunger strike at
the Andaman cellular jail in 1933’, Crime, Histoire et Sociétés, 7:2, 81-102.
5789. St.Ange, Alain, , 2005: Seychelles in search of democracy: a constitutional & political
history of Seychelles, 1723-2004, A. St. Ange & B. Georges,Victoria, Mahé, Seychelles.
5790. St.Ange, Alain, 2007: Seychelles, The Cry of A People, Alain St.Ange.
5791. Stagles, Joan; Ray, 1980,1984: The Blasket Islands: next parish America, Dublin: O’Brien.
5792. Stair, John B., 1983:Old Samoa: or, Flotsam and jetsam from the Pacific Ocean, Papakura,
New Zealand, R. McMillan.
5793. Stanbury, Myra, Jeremy Green, 2004: Lapérouse and the loss of the Astorlabe and the
Boussole (1788) : reports of the 1986 and 1990 investigations of the shipwrecks at
Vanikoro, Solomon Islands, Fremantle, W.A.: Australian National Centre of Excellence
for Maritime Archaeology; Australasian Institute for Maritime Archaeology.
2009
CEHA 315
5794. Standish, Bill, 1984: Melanesian neighbors: the politics of Papua New Guinea, the Solomon
Islands, and the Republic of Vanuatu, [Canberra]: Legislative Research Service, Dept. of
the Parliamentary Library.
5795. Stanish, Charles and Brian S. Bauer., 2004: Archaeological research on the Islands of the
Sun and Moon, Lake Titicaca, Bolivia: final results of the Proyecto Tiksi Kjarka / edited by
Los Angeles, Calif. Cotsen Institute of Archaeology at UCLA.
5796. Stanley Coleman Jersey, Edward W. Snedeke, 1997: Hells Islands - Th untold story of
Guadacanal, USA: Texas A&M University Press.
5797. Stanley, David, 1989, 1991: Micronesia handbook: guide to the Caroline, Gilbert, Mariana,
and Marshall Islands, Chico, Calif., USA: Moon Publications.
5798. Stanley, G. W., 1938: “Patrol notes. Premecotheca outbreak - Talasea”, in New Guinea
Agricultural Gazette, 4(1): 37.
5799. Stanley, Jo., 2000: Involuntary commemorations: post-traumatic stress disorder and its
relationship to war commemoration, in Ashplant, T. G.; Dawson, Graham; Roper, Michael
(ed.), The politics of war memory and commemoration (Routledge Studies in Memory
and Narrative, 7),London and New York: Routledge, 240-59.
5800. Stannard, D. E., 1989: Before the horror: the population of Hawai’i on the eve of Western
contact, Honolulu.
5801. Stannard, David, E., 1992: American Holocaust -- the Conquest of the New World, Oxford
University Press.
5802. Stansfield, Gareth R. V., 2001: The 1995-96 Yemen-Eritrea conflict over the Islands of
Hanish and Jabal Zuqar: a geopolitical analysis, Durham, Centre for Middle Eastern and
Islamic Studies, University of Durham.
5803. Stark, J. (ed.), 2000: The challenge of change in Latin American and the Caribbean,
Boulder, Lynne Rienner Publishers.
5804. Stark, James H., 1897: Stark’s Guide-Book and History of Trinidad including Tobago,
Grenada, and St. Vincent; also a trip up the Orinoco and a description of the great
Venezuelan Pitch Lake. Boston, James H. Stark, publisher; London, Sampson Low,
Marston & Company.
5805. Staudacher-Valliamée, sous la direction de Gillette, 2007: L’écriture et la construction
des langues dans le sud-ouest de l’océan indien: actes du colloque pluridisciplinaire
international organisé du 5 au 6 octobre 2005 à l’université de La Reunión, Paris:
Harmattan.
5806. Steadman, D. W. e Olson, S. L., 1985: ‘Birds remains from an archaeological site on
Henderson Island, South Pacific: man-caused extinctions on an uninhabited island’,
Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, Washington, 82: 6191-5.
5807. Steadman, D. W.; Pregill, G. K. e Olson, S. L., 1984: ‘Fossil vertebrates from Antigua,
Lesser Antilles: evidence for late holocene human-caused extinctions in the West Indies’,
Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, Washington, 81(3): 4448-51.
5808. Steadman, D. W., 1985: ‘Fossil birds from Mangaia, Southern Cook Islands’, Bulletin of the
British Ornithologists Club, 105(2): 58-66.
5809. Steadman, David W., Steven Zousmer, 1988: Galápagos: discovery on Darwin’s islands,
color plates by Lee M. Steadman, Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press.
5810. Steele, Beverley A. 2003: Grenada: A History of Its People (Island Histories), MacMillan
Caribbean.
2009
5811. Steadman, D. W., 1989: ‘Fossil birds and biogeography in Polynesia’. Acta XIX International
Congress Ornithology, Ottawa, 2.
5812. Steadman, D. W.; D. S. Pahlavan, et al, 1990: Extinction, biogeography, and human
exploitation of birds on Tikopia and Anuta, Polynesia outliers in the Solomon Islands,
Bishop Museum Occasional Papers, 30: 118-153.
5813. Steadman, D. W., 1995: ‘Prehistoric extinctions of Pacific island birds: biogeography meets
zooarcheology’, Science, 267(5201): 1123-31.
5814. Steadman, D., 2006: Extinction and Biogeography in Tropical Pacific Birds, University of
Chicago Press.
5815. Steele, T. L., 1991: Allied and interdependent: British policy during the Chinese offshore
islands crisis of 1958, In Contemporary British history, 1931-1961: politics and the limits
of policy, eds. Gorst, Antony; Johnman, Lewis; Lucas, W.S., 230-47.
5816. Stella, Regis, 2007: Imagining the other: the representation of the Papua New Guinean
subject, Honolulu: University Of Hawai’i Press.
5817. Stenderup, Vibeke. 1985: Pacific Islands Creative Writing: A Selected Annotated Guide for
Students, Librarians, and the General Reader. Hojbjerb: Vibeke Stenderup.
5818. Stephanides, Stephanos, and Susan Bassett, Eds. 2002: Beyond the Floating Islands.
Bologna, Italy: COTEPRA.
5819. Stephen, Ann (ed.), 1993: Pirating the Pacific: Images of Trade, Travel and Tourism,
Sydney: Powerhouse Publishing.
5820. Stephen, Michele, ed. 1987: Sorcerer and Witch in Melanesia, New Brunswick, N.J.:
Rutgers University Press.
5821. Stephenson, Charles, 2006: The Channel Islands 1941-45: Hitler’s impregnable fortress,
illustrated by Chris Taylor, (Fortress: The Castles & Fortifications Quarterly, 41), Oxford:
Osprey.
5822. Stephenson, Pamela. 2005: Treasure islands: sailing the South Seas in the wake of Fanny
and Robert Louis Stevenson, London: Headline.
5823. Steven, M., 1983: Trade tactics and territory; Britain in the Pacific 1783-1823, Melbourne,
Melbourne University Press.
5824. Stevens, D., ed, 1998: Maritime power in the Twentieth century; the Australian experience,
Sydney, Allen and Unwin
5825. Stevens, Graeme R., 1983: Our wandering islands: a New Zealand view of the theory of
continental drift, Nelson, N.Z.: Cawthron Institute.
5826. Stevens, Philip, 2002: Dictionary of painters of the Channel islands, Jersey: J.A.B..
5827. Stevenson, Fanny Van de Grift, 2004: The cruise of the Janet Nichol among the South Sea
Islands: a diary, edited by Roslyn Jolly, Sydney: University of New South Wales Press.
5828. Stevenson, Karen, 1993: The Museum as a Research Tool: A Tahitian Example, In Dark,
Philip J. C. and Roger G. Rose (eds) 1993, Artistic Heritage in a Changing Pacific.
University of Hawai’i Press, Honolulu, 74-83.
5829. Stevenson, Letitia, 1982: “Some memories of Rathlin Island sixty years ago”, in The
Glynns: Journal of the Glens of Antrim Historical Society, 10, 40-44. Stevenson, Robert
Louis, 1994: Treasure islands: a Robert Louis Stevenson centenary anthology, compiled
and edited by Jenni Calder, [Edinburgh]: National Museums of Scotland.
5830. Stevenson, Robert Louis, 1995: Dans les mers du Sud, Paris.
2009
CEHA 317
5831. Stevenson, Robert Louis, 2000: Belated first contract [Exploration & exchange: a South
Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and Thomas Nicholas.
In Lamb, ed (Chicago (IL) and London: Chicago University Press), 299-310.
5832. Stevenson, Robert Louis, 2006: A Footnote to History: Eight Years of Trouble in Samoa,
Biblio Bazaar.
5833. Stewart, Francs, 1982: “The Andaman Islands”, History Today, (Jan.), 43-46.
5834. Stewart, L. L. 1989: Our people are like gardens: music, performance, and aesthetics
among the Lolo, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea. PhD thesis. University
of British Columbia.
5835. Stewart, Pamela J. and Andrew, 2003: Strathern Landscape, memory, and history:
anthropological perspectives, London, Sterling, Va., Pluto.
5836. Stewart, Pamela J.; Strathern, Andrew, ed. 2008: Exchange and sacrifice, Durham, N.C.:
Carolina Academic Press.
5837. Stewart, Paul D. [et al.] 2006: Galápagos: the islands that changed the world, New Haven,
Conn.: Yale University Press.
5838. Stewart, W.H., 1999: The influence of history on the CNMI’s relationship with the United
States and the areas recent development, Journal of the Pacific Society, 82, 3, 1-27.
5839. Stierstorfer, Klaus, editor, 2007: Reading the Caribbean: approaches to Anglophone
Caribbean literature and culture, Heidelberg: Universitätsverlag Winter.
5840. Stoddart, D.R. (dir.); Giglioli, M.E.C. (dir.). 1980: Geographie et ecologie de Little Cayman,
Atoll Research Bulletin, no 241, p. p. 1-181
5841. Stöhr, Waldemar, 1987: Kunst und Kultur aus der Südsee: Sammlung Clausmeyer
Melanesien, Köln: Rautenstrauch-Joest-Museum für Völkerkunde.
5842. Stokes, F. Joseph, 1984: Divers and snorkelers guide to the fishes and sea life of the
Caribbean, Florida, Bahamas, and Bermuda, collaboration with the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia; illustrated by Charlotte C. Stokes, Philadelphia: The Academy.
5843. Stoklund, Bjarne, 1984: Building traditions in the northern world, In Fenton, Alexander;
Pálsson, Hermann (ed.), The Northern and Western Isles in the Viking world: survival,
continuity and change (Edinburgh), 96-115.
5844. Stommel, Henry M., 1984: Lost islands: the story of islands that have vanished from
nautical charts, Vancouver, B.C.: University of British Columbia Press.
5845. Stonich, S.C., Sorensen, J.H. and Hundt, A., 1995: Ethnicity, class, and gender in tourism
development: The case of the Bay Islands, Honduras, Journal of Sustainable Tourism,
3(1), pp.1-28.
5846. Stonich, Susan C.; Sorensen, Jerrel H.; Hundt, Anna, 1995: “Ethnicity, Class, and Gender in
Tourism Develop ment: The Case of the Bay Islands, Honduras”, in Journal of Sustainable
Tourism, vol. 3, no. 1, pp. 1-28.
5847. Storr, Virgil H., 2004: Enterprising Slaves and Master Pirates: Understanding Economic
Life in the Bahamaz. New York: Peter Lang.
5848. Stott, Louis, 1992: Robert Louis Stevenson and the Highlands & Islands of Scotland,
Milton-of-Aberfoyle: Creag Darach Publications.
5849. Stotz, D. F.; Fitzpstrick, J. W.; Parker, T. A. et al., 1996: Neotropical birds: ecology and
conservation, Chicago, University of Chicago Press.
5850. Stover, M., 1999: Individual land tenure in American Samoa, The contemporary Pacific,
2009
11, 1, 69-104.
5851. Strange, Ian J., 1985: The Falklands: South Atlantic islands, New York: Dodd, Mead, the
Prince Andrew, the Duke of York, Newton Abbot, David & Charles, New York, Hippocrene
Books.
5852. Stratford, E., 2003: ‘Editorial: Flows and Boundaries: Small Island Discourses and
Challenges of Sustainability, Community & Local Environments’, Local Environment, Vol.
8, No. 5, pp. 495-499.
5853. Stratford, E., 2006: Technologies of Agency and Performance: Tasmania Together and the
Constitution of Harmonious Island Identity, Geoforum, Vol. 37, No. 2, pp. 273-286.
5854. Stratford, E., 2006a: Isolation as a Resource in the Constitution of the New Tasmania:
Some Thoughts on Subnational Island Status, paper presented at Senses of Place
Conference, University of Tasmania, Hobart, Tasmania, April.
5855. Strathern, Andrew et al., 2002: Oceania: an introduction to the cultures and identities of
Pacific Islanders, Durham, NC: Carolina Academic Press.
5856. Strathern, Andrew; Stewart, Pamela J., 2000: The python’s back: pathways of comparison
between Indonesia and Melanesia, Westport, Conn.: Bergin & Garvey.
5857. Strathern, M.,1988: The Gender of the Gift: Problems with Women and Problems with
Society in Melanesia, Berkeley: University of California Press.
5858. Strathern, Marilyn, ed. 1987: Dealing with inequality: analysing gender relations in
Melanesia and beyond: essays by members of the 1983/1984 Anthropological Research
Group at the Research School of Pacific Studies, the Australian National University,
Cambridge [Cambridgeshire]; New York: Cambridge University Press.
5859. Streiff, Eric, 1982: Inseln am Saume Europas: Tagebuchblätter aus Irland, [mit Photographien
des Autors], Zürich: Sanssouci Verlag.
5860. Strohmann, Michael, 1991: Regionale Berichterstattung von Zeitungen in Periphergebieten:
dargestellt am Beispiel Ostfrieslands, Marburg/Lahn: Im Selbstverlag der Marburger
Geographischen Gesellschaft e. V..
5861. Stuart, Annie, 2006: “Contradictions and Complexities in an Indigenous Medical Service:
The case of Mesulame Taveta”, in Journal of Pacific History, 41:2, 125-43.
5862. Stuart-Fox, Martin, 1995: Australasian Contributions to the Historiography of Southeast
Asia, Australian Journal of Politics & History, VL: 41, NO: s1, PG: 214-222, http://dx.doi.
org/10.1111/j.1467-8497.1995.tb01092.x. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5863. Stubbs, Laurence, 1989: Manoga Maka Vavakato pa Ganoqa / Eleven stories from
Ranongga. Gizo, Western Province, Solomon Islands: Western Province Government.
5864. Stubbs, Laurence, 1991: Kaki Vavakato pa Ganoqa - More stories from Ranongga, Gizo,
Western Province, Solomon Islands: Western Province Government.
5865. Stummann Hansen, S., 2002: The early settlement of the Faroe Islands; in: Barrett J (ed):
Culture contact, continuity and collapse: the Norse colonisation of the North Atlantic.
Studies in the early middle ages 5, York: University of York.
5866. Stuparich, G., 1989: L’Île, Paris, Éditions Verdier.
5867. Sturma, M., 1996: Dressing and undressing in early European contact in Australia and
Tahiti, Pacific Studies, Vol 21/3 pp.87-104.
5868. Sturton, Mark, 1989: Modeling the Fiji economy, Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands
Development Program, East-West Center: Distributed by the University of Hawaii Press.
2009
CEHA 319
5869. Sturton, Mark, 1989: Policy modeling in the small island economies of the South Pacific:
the case of Vanuatu, Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands Development Program, East-West
Center.
5870. Sturton, Mark, 1991: Vanuatu: toward economic growth, Honolulu, Hawaii: Pacific Islands
Development Program, East-West Center.
5871. Sturton, Mark, 1992: Policy implications of an oil shock in Fiji, Tonga, and Vanuatu.
5872. Sturton, Mark, 1992a: Tonga: development through agricultural exports, Honolulu, Hawaii
: Pacific Islands Development Program, East-West Center.
5873. Su, B., Underhill, P., Martinson, J., Saha, N., McGarvey, S. T., Shriver, M. D., Chu, J.,
Oefner, P., Chakraborty, R., Deka, R., 2000: Polynesian origins: Insights from the Y
chromosome. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences. Vol. 97. No. 15.
5874. Suárez Bosa, Miguel, 1995: Economía, sociedad y relaciones laborales en Canarias:
una aproximación a la situación de los trabajadores en Gran Canaria, Lanzarote y
Fuerteventura, Las Palmas G. C.: Universidad de Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Servicio
de Publicaciones: Gobierno de Canarias, Consejería de Empleo y Asuntos Sociales.
5875. Suárez Grimón, Vicente, 1993: Construcción naval y tráfico marítimo en Gran Canaria en
la segunda mitad del siglo XVIII, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Ediciones del Cabildo
5876. Suárez Moreno, Francisco, 1998: La arqueología industrial en Canarias: apuntes para su
estudio, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
5877. SUAREZ, T., 2004: Early Mapping of the Pacific, Tóquio, Tuttle Publishing.
5878. Suarkia, D., C. S. Mgone, K. Bhatia and M. P. Alpers, 1999: “HLA-DQA1 genotyping by
polymerase chain reaction-single-strand conformation polymorphism (PCR-SSCP) and
restriction endonuclease digestion in Papua New Guinea”, Papua New Guinea Medical
Journal, 42(3-4): 114-23.
5879. Subramani, 1992: South Pacific Literature: From Myth to Fabulation, Institute of Pacific
Studies, University of the South Pacific, Suva.
5880. Suksi M. (ed.), 1998: Autonomy: Applications and Implications, The Hague: London:
Kluwer Law International.
5881. Suksi, M., 1995: Frames of Autonomy and the Åland Islands, Åbo: Åbo Akademi.
5882. Sullivan, M., 1991: The impacts and projected climate change on coastal land use in Papua
New Guinea, In: D. Lawrence and T. Cansfield-Smith, Eds., Sustainable Development of
Traditional Inhabitants of the Torres Strait Region, Cairns, Great Barrier Reef Marine Park
Authority, pp. 33-58.
5883. Sullivan, M.P., 1989: The Bahamas in Islands of the Commonwealth Caribbean: a regional
study, D.M. Hanratty and S.W. Meditz (eds.). Washington DC: GPO(p.519-60).
5884. Summerhayes, G. R. and J. Allen, 1993: The transport of Mopir obsidian to late pleistocene
New Ireland. Archaeology, in Oceania, 28(3): 144-8.
5885. Summerhayes, G. R., [et al.], 1998: “Application of PIXE-PIGME to Archaeological Analysis
of Changing Patterns of Obsidian Use in West New Britain, Papua New Guinea” In:
S.Shackley, Ed. Advances in Archaeological Volcanic Glass Studies, New York, Plenum
Press, pp. 129-158.
5886. Summerhayes, G. R., 1998: “The Face of Lapita”, in Archaeology in Oceania, 33: 100.
5887. Summerhayes, G. R., 2000: “Far Western, Western, and Eastern Lapita: a re-evaluation”,
2009
in Asian perspectives, [Hawaii] 39(1-2): 109-138.

5888. Summerhayes, G. R., Allen, J., 1993: The transport of Mopir obsidian to late pleistocene
New Ireland, Archaeology in Oceania, 28(3): 144-8.
5889. Summerhayes, G. R., R. Bird, R. Fullagar, C. Gosden, J. Specht and R.Torrence,
1998: Application of PIXE-PIGME to Archaeological Analysis of Changing Patterns of
Obsidian Use in West New Britain, Papua New Guinea. In: S.Shackley, Ed., Advances in
Archaeological Volcanic Glass Studies, New York, Plenum Press, pp. 129-158.
5890. Summerhayes, G. R.; Allen, J., 1993: “The transport of Mopir obsidian to late pleistocene
New Ireland”, in Archaeology in Oceania, 28(3): 144-8.
5891. Summerhayes, G., 2000: What’s in a pot? In: A. Anderson and T. Murray, Eds., Australian
Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra Academic
Publishing, The Australian National University, pp. 291-307.
5892. Sunia, Fofo, 1988: The Story of the Legislature of American Samoa. Pago Pago: American
Samoa Legislature.
5893. Sung, Dae-Bok, 1992 : Les Ambiguites D’un Developpement En Milieu Insulaire: Tourisme
Et Urbanisation A Chejudo (Coree Du Sud); Sous La Direction De Jean-Luc Bonniol,
Mémoire Ou Thèse (Version D’origine),Thèse De Doctorat: Ethnologie: Aix Marseille 3.
5894. Surry, M., 1999: The good oil, Asian Business (Hong Kong). 35.
5895. Suryanarayan, V.; Sudarsen, V., edited by. 1994: Andaman and Nicobar Islands: challenges
of development, Delhi: Konark Publishers.
5896. Sustaining livelihoods: promoting informal sector growth in Pacific island countries, Suva,
Fiji, United Nations Development Programme.
5897. Sutherland, Heather, 2003: Southeast Asian History and the Mediterranean Analogy,
Journal of Southeast Asian Studies, Vol. 34.
5898. Sutton, M., 1995: Strangers in paradise; Adventurers and dreamers in the South Seas,
Angus and Robertson.
5899. Sutton, Douglas G., 1980: “A Culture History of the Chatham Islands”, in Journal of the
Polynesian Society, 89:1, 67-93.
5900. Sutton, Douglas G.; Flenley, John R.; Li, Xun; Todd, Arthur; Butler, Kevin; Summers,
Rachel; Chester, Pamela I., 2008: “The timing of the human discovery and colonization
of New Zealand”, Quaternary International, 184: 109–121.
5901. Sutton, P. & Payne, A., 1993: Lilliput under Threat: The Security Problems of Small Island
Syndrome at Work, London, Mansell.
5902. Sutton, P. and A. Payne, 1993-a: Under Threat: the Security Problems of Small Island and
Enclave Developing States, in Political Studies, Vol.XLI (4): 579]593.
5903. Sutton, P., 2000: “ Caribbean Politics: A Matter of Diversity”, Social education, n°2, p. 78-
83.
5904. Swaddling, Pamela, 1996: Plumes from Paradise, Papua New Guinea National Museum.
5905. Swadling, P. and A. Chowning, 1981: Shellfish gathering at Nukakau Island, West New
Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, J. de la Societe des Oceanistes, 72-73: 159-167.
5906. Swadling, P., 1991: Garden boundaries as indicators of past land-use strategies: two
case studies from coastal Melanesia. A. Pawley, Ed., Man and a Half: Essays in Pacific
Anthropology and Ethnobiology in Honour of Ralph Bulmer, Auckland, The Polynesian
Society, pp. 550-557.
2009
CEHA 321
5907. Swadling, P., 1996: Plumes from paradise; trade cycles in outer Southest Asia and their
impact on New Guinea and nearby islands until 1920, Robert Brown, Brisbane.
5908. Swadling, P.; Chowning, A., 1981: “Shellfish gathering at Nukakau Island, West New Britain
Province, Papua New Guinea”, in J. de la Societe des Oceanistes 72-73: 159-167.
5909. Sward, Robert, 1983: The Toronto Islands, Toronto, Ont.: Dreadnaught.
5910. Syed, Saifullah; Mataio, Ngatokorua, 1993: Agriculture in the Cook Islands: new directions,
Suva [Fiji]; Rarotonga [Cook Islands]: Institute of Pacific Studies and the Cook Islands
Centre of the University of the South Pacific.
5911. Sykes, editor Karen, 2001: Culture and cultural property in the Papua New Guinea Islands
region: seven case studies, New Dehli: UBSPD.
5912. Sylvie, Vilatte, 1991: L’insularité dans la pensée grecque, Annales littéraires de l’Université
de Besançon, Presses Univ. Franche-Comté.
5913. Tabani, Marc, 2008: Une pirogue pour le Paradis. Le culte de John Frum à Tanna (Vanuatu),
Éditions de la Maison des sciences de l’homme, Paris.
5914. Tabb, Peter, 2005: A peculiar occupation: new perspectives on Hitler’s Channel Islands,
Hersham: Ian Allan.
5915. Tadayo, Watabe; Shigeru hen, Ikuta, 1984: Nantō no inasaku bunka: Yonakunijima o
chūshin ni, Tōkyō: Hōsei Daigaku Shuppankyoku.
5916. Tägil, Sven, editor. 1995: Ethnicity and nation building in the Nordic world, Carbondale, IL:
Southern Illinois University Press.
5917. Taglioni, François, (dir.), Les dynamiques contemporaines des petits espaces insulaires,
De l’île-relais aux réseaux insulaires, Karthala, Paris, pp. 407-429.
5918. Taglioni, Francois, 1995: Geopolitique des petites Antilles: Influences europeenne et nord
americaine, Paris: Karthala.
5919. Taglioni, François, 1997: Géopolitique et insularité: l’exemple des Petites Antilles in Sanguin,
A.-L. (dir.). Vivre dans une île. Une géopolitique des Insularités, Paris, L’Harmattan,
Collection «Géographie et Cultures»p. 175-189. Disponível online em url: http://www.
taglioni.net/Recherche/Taglioniinsularite.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5920. Taglioni, François, 2000: «La frontiere d’facqua, posta in gioco nel bacino caraibico»,
Limes, nº 2, p. 177-188.
5921. Taglioni, François, 2000-a: Méditerranées Eurafricaine et Américaine: Essai de comparaison
in Sanguin, A.-L. (dir.), Mare Nostrum, dynamiques etmutations géopolitiques de la
Méditerranée, Paris, L’Harmattan, Collection “Géographie et Cultures” pp. 73-88.
5922. Taglioni, François, 2003: Recherches sur les petits espaces insulaires et sur leurs
organisations régionales, Paris, Mémoire d’habilitation à diriger des recherches,Université
Paris-IV, volume II. Disponível online em url: http://www.taglioni.net/hdr.htm. Consulta em
5923. Taglioni, François, 2003b: L’île est-elle un objet géographique spécifique? Étude
conceptuelle et critique, in Recherche sur les petits espaces insulaires et sur leurs
organisations régionales, Volume 2. Disponível online em url: http://www.taglioni.net/
Section%202.pdf. Consulta em 11 de julho de 2009.
5924. Taglioni, François, 2004: «La coopération régionale dans l’océanie insulaire: des processus
polymorphes», Cahiers d’outre-mer, 225, Insularité, société et développement. Disponível
online em url: http://com.revues.org/document698.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
2009
5925. Taglioni, François, 2005: «Les revendications séparatistes et autonomistes au sein des
États et territoires multi-insulaires. Essai de typologie». Cahiers de géographie du
Québec, nº146, p. 5-18. Disponível online em url: http://www.cgq.ulaval.ca/textes/vol_49/
no136/03-Taglioni.pdf. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5926. Taglioni, François, 2005a, «La coopération régionale insulaire en question: une
approche des mots et des choses» in Bernardie, N.; Taglioni, F. (dir.), Les dynamiques
contemporaines des petits espaces insulaires. De l’île-relais aux réseaux insulaires,
Karthala, Paris, p. 407-429.
5927. Taglioni, François, 2006, «Les petits espaces insulaires face à la variabilité de leur insularité
et de leur statut politique», Annales de géographie, n°652, p. 24-47.
5928. Taglioni, François, 2006a: Les petits espaces insulaires face à la variabilité de leur insularité
et de leur statut politique, in Les Annales de géographie, nº652, p. 664-687. Disponível
online em url: http://espacepolitique.revues.org/index732.html. Consulta a 11 de Julho de
2009.
5929. Taglioni, François, 2007, «La périphéricité: du concept au lobby politique», L’Espace
politique, n°2, p. 5-11. Disponível online em url: http://www.espacepolitique.org/revue.
php?id_revue=2. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5930. Taglioni, François, 2009: insularisme: une rhétorique bien huilée dans les petits espaces
insulaires. Disponível online em http://www.taglioni.net/Recherche/Insularisme.pdf.
5931. Tagupa, W., 1988: The 1987 Westminster constitutional crisis in Fiji, Pacific Studies, vol.
12 (1), 97-152.
5932. Tagupa, W., 1994: The High Court of Western Samoa and the traditional land tenure disputes
in the context of modern economic development; in R Crocombe and M Meleisea, eds,
Land issues in the Pacific, IPS/USP, 183-190.
5933. Tagupa, W.E., 1981: Education change and assimilation in Nineteenth Century Hawaii,
Pacific Studies, 5, 1.
5934. Tagupa, W.E., 1987: Hawaii and the United States Supreme Court; three cases on law,
history and the United States Constitution, Pacific Studies, 11, 1, 131-48.
5935. Tahindro, Gervais, 1998: Les îles du Sud-Ouest de l’Océan indien et la mise en oeuvre du
nouveau droit de la mer, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine).
5936. Tait, Compiled by Vanessa & Suzanne McMahon, South Asia Bibliographies, Sri Lanka:
an overview. Disponível online em url: http://www.lib.berkeley.edu/SSEAL/SouthAsia/
srilanka.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
5937. Taitano, C. 1983: Guam the struggle for civil and political rights, in R. Teiwaki, et.al., eds
Politics in Micronesia, Institute of Pacific Studies/USP, 131-145.
5938. Tāj al-Dīn, Ḥasan, ...[et al.], 1982-1984: Tārīkh Islām Dībā Maḥall Ṭūkiyū, Institute for the
Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.
5939. Takahashi, Hideyuki, 1999: Maldivian National Security–And the Threats of Mercenaries,
The Round Table (London), No. 351, July, pp. 433–444.
5940. Takayama, Jun, 1991: Minami Taiheiyō no minzokushi: Edo jidai Nihon hyōryūmin no mita
sekai, Tōkyō: Yūzankaku, Heisei 3.
5941. Talbot, Edgar, 1990: “Teampull na Bhfear nGonta or the Church of the Wounded Men”, in
Sliabh Aughty: Journal of the East Clare Heritage Group, 2, 8-9.
5942. Tall, Deborah, 1986: The Island of the White Cow: memories of an Irish island, New York,
2009
CEHA 323
Atheneum.
5943. Tamanaha, Brian Z., 1993: Understanding law in Micronesia: an interpretive approach to
transplanted law, Leiden; New York: E.J. Brill, Tamta, B. R., 1992: Andaman and Nicobar
Islands, New Delhi: National Book Trust, India.
5944. Tan, Kenneth Paul, 2007: Renaissance Singapore? Economy, Culture, and Politics, NUS
Press.
5945. Tanabe, Hiroshi, 1985: Politique d’aménagement territorial aux îles Okinawa, In CEGET-
CNRS, Centre d’Etudes de Géographie Tropicale (Talence): Comité Franco-Japonais de
Géographie (Paris); CRET: Centre de Recherches sur les Espaces Tropicaux, Université
Michel de Montaigne Bordeaux 3. Géographie et écologie des milieux tropicaux:
Problèmes d’analyse et d’aménagement et de développement: IVe Colloque Franco-
Japonais de Géographie, Talence, 1-4 Octobre 1985, Talence: CEGET-CNRS, 1988. p.
125-132.
5946. Tanner, Adrian, 1996-2000: Bibliography of Fijian Society, The World-Wide Web Virtual
Library, Centre for Social Anthropology and Computing, University of Kent at Canterbury.
Disponível online em url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_fiji1.html. Consulta em 5
de Agosto de 2009. [Obs.: lista bibliográfica sobre Antropologia nas ilhas Fidji, que faz
parte de AnthroGlobe (url: http://coombs.anu.edu.au/Biblio/biblio_index.html).].
5947. Tapinos, G., 2000: “Mondialisation, intégration régionale, migrations internationales”,
Revue internationale des sciences sociales, n°165, p. 341-352.
5948. Tapol, 1983: West Papua: the obliteration of a people, London.
5949. Tarling, Nicholas (ed.), 1992: The Cambridge History of Southeast Asia, 1: From Early
Times to c. 1800. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
5950. Tarling, Nicholas, 1992a: The Cambridge History of Southeast Asia, 2: The Nineteenth and
Twentieth Centuries. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
5951. Tarte, Sandra, 1997: Diplomatic strategies: the Pacific Islands and Japan, Canberra, ACT,
Australia-Japan Research Centre.
5952. Tarte, Sandra, 1998: Japan’s aid diplomacy and the Pacific islands, Canberra: National
Centre for Development Studies, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian
National University; Suva, Fiji: Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific.
5953. Tattersall, Ian, 1982: The Primates of Madagascar, Columbia University Press, New York.
5954. Taumoefolau, M., 1991: Is the father’s sister really black?, Journal of Pacific society, vol.
100(1), 91-98
5955. Tavares, Eugène, 2009: Littératures lusophones des archipels atlantiques: Açores, Madère,
Cap-Vert, Sao Tomé e Príncipe, Paris; Torino; Budapest [etc.]: L’Harmattan.
5956. Taylor, Daniel, 2005: In search of sacred places: looking for wisdom on Celtic holy islands,
Saint Paul, Minn.: Bog Walk Press.
5957. Taylor, David, 2003: ‘The rehabilitation and development of the Falkland Islands 1983-87:
a personal experience of colonial administration in the South Atlantic’, Round Table, 369,
269-77.
5958. Taylor, J., 1993?: Urban housing needs among Aborigines and Torres Strait Islanders:
options for estimation in a statistically rare population, [Sydney]: Ian Buchan Fell Research
Centre, Faculty of Architecture, University of Sydney.
5959. Taylor, Jean Gelman, 2003: Indonesia: Peoples and Histories, New Haven and London:
2009
5960. Taylor, John G., 1999: East Timor: The Price of Freedom, Australia: Pluto Press.
5961. Taylor, L. B., 1981: South East Africa: Zimbabwe, Zambia, Malawi, Madagascar, Mauritius,
and Réunion, cover design by Jackie Schuman, New York: Watts.
5962. Taylor, P., 1981: People and resources - planning for the future in West New Britain.
(mimeo). PNG, Department of Urban Development.
5963. Taylor, P., 1981: Population and Urban Growth - People and Resource Planning for the
Future in West New Britain (mimeo). PNG, Dept of Urban Development.
5964. Taylor, Paul Michael; Aragon, Lorraine V., 1991: Beyond the Java Sea: art of Indonesia’s
outer islands, with assistance from Annamarie L. Rice, Washington, D.C.: National
Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution; New York: H.N. Abrams.
5965. Taylor, R.; Bach, F., 1986: Enquete sur la sante des femmes des Iles Marshall, Circulaire
D’Information - CPS, no 107, p. p. 1-6.
5966. Taylor, Robert H. edited by, 1991: Asia and the Pacific, New York: Facts on File.
5967. Taylor, Simon, 2002: What’s in a Name? Norse in the Islands, History Scotland, 2:2, 42-5.
5968. TB., McGrath, 1986: Whalers in Micronesia, Journal of Pacific History, 21, 104-9.
5969. Tcherkezoff, S.; Bare, J.F., 1992: Les enfants de la terre aux iles Samoa: tradition locale et
“developpement, importe, In: La terre et le Pacifique, ER, Etudes Rurales, no 127-128,
pp. 15-40.
5970. Tcherkézoff, Serge, Margaret Mead, Derek Freeman et Samoa, 2001: Le mythe occidental
de la sexualite polynesienne, Paris: Presses universitaires de France.
5971. Teaiwa, T., 1992: Microwomen; US colonialism and Micronesian womenactivists, in
Rubinstein D, ed, Pacific History, University of Guam, 125-42.
5972. Teaiwa, T., 1997: Yaqona/Yagona: Roots and Routes of a Displaced Native, Dreadlocks
in Oceania, 1: 7-13. S. Mishra and E. Guy, eds. Suva: Department of Literature and
Language, University of the South Pacific.
5973. Teiwaki, R., et. all, eds 1983: Politics in Micronesia, Institute of Pacific Studies/USP
5974. Tejera Gaspar, Antonio director, 1992: La prehistoria de Canarias, [Santa Cruz de Tenerife]:
Centro de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
5975. Tejera Gaspar, Antonio, 1992a: Majos y europeos: el contacto de culturas en Lanzarote en
los siglos XIV y XV: un precedente americano, [La Laguna, Canary Islands]: Universidad
de la Laguna, Secretariado de Publicaciones.
5976. Tejera Gaspar, Antonio, 2000: Los cuatro viajes de Colón y las Islas Canarias, 1492-1502,
La Laguna: F. Lemus, editor; [Gomera, Canary Islands]: Cabildo de La Gomera.
5977. Tejera Gaspar, Antonio, 2002: Colón en Gran Canaria, 1492, 1493, 1502: las Islas Canarias
en las Fuentes Colombianas / Antonio Tejera Gaspar; [prólogo de Francisco Morales
Padrón], Las Palmas de Gran Canaria: Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
5978. Tejera Gaspar, Antonio. 2006 Canarias y el África antigua, [La Laguna, España]: Centro
de la Cultura Popular Canaria.
5979. Téllez Alarcia, Diego, 2004: ‘Anson, Wall y el papel del Lago español en el enfrentamiento
colonial hispano-británico (1740-1762)’, Tiempos modernos, 11, 1-8. Disponível em url:
http://www.tiemposmodernos.org/viewarticle.php?id=85&layout=html/. Consulta em 4 de
Agosto de 2009.
5980. Telo, António José, 1993: Os Açores e controlo do Atlântico, Porto, Edições ASA.
2009
CEHA 325
5981. Telo, M., 2001: European Union and new regionalism: regional actors and global governance
in a post-hegemonic era, Aldershot, Ashgate.
5982. Tena-Gachaou, Béthe Selassié, 1993: Stratégie de développement endogène dans une
économie insulaire : l’éxemple du Cap Vert (1975-1990), Mémoire ou thèse (version
d’origine), Aix-en-Provence: Université d’Aix-Marseille II.
5983. Tenakanai, D., 1997: Fruit Fly Fauna in Papua New Guinea. A. J. Allwood and R. A. I.
Drew, Eds. Management of Fruit Flies in the Pacific: A regional symposium, Nadi, Fiji 28-
31 October 1996. Canberra, Auustralian Centre for International Agricultural Research,
pp. 87-94.
5984. Tenant League of Prince Edward Island, 1864-1867, 1998: Leasehold Tenure in the New
World, American Review of Canadian Studies, Vol. 28.
5985. Ténier, J., 2003: Intégrations régionales et mondialisation, Paris, La documentation
Française.
5986. Terrell, J. E., 2004: ‘Islands in the River of Time’, Islands of the World VIII International
Conference ‘Changing Islands – Changing Worlds’: Proceedings. Disponível online em
url:www.giee.ntnu.edu.tw/island. Consulta em 11 de julho de 2009.
5987. Terrell, John, 1986: Prehistory in the Pacific islands: a study of variation in language,
customs, and human biology, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press.
5988. Tessier, Sophie, 2006: «Pratiques alimentaires: effets et méfaits de la modernité en
Sardaigne et à Malte», Cahiers de la Méditerranée, vol. 68, Modernité et insularité en
Méditerranée, 2004. Disponível online em url: http://cdlm.revues.org/document646.html.
Consulta 14 julho 2009.
5989. Teunissen, J. (ed.), 1998: Regional integration and multilateral cooperation in the global
economy. La haye, Fondad.
5990. Thaman, R.R., 1981: Land, people, and distance education in the Pacific Islands. In
Livingston, K. and Crumps, R. (eds.), ASPESA Forum 81 Papers: Supplementary Volume.
Australian and South Pacific External Studies Association Fifth Biennial Forum, Suva.
Pp. 89-108.
5991. Thaman, R.R. 1982: The impact of tourism on agriculture in the Pacific Islands. In Rajotte,
F. (ed.), The Impact of Tourism in the Pacific. Environmental and Resources Studies
Programme Environmental Center, Trent University, Peterborough. Ontario. Pp. 130-155.
5992. Thaman, R.R., 1982: The Natural Ecology of Food Production and Nutrition Systems. In
Orozco, R.C., Jus’at, I., Barba, C. and Nube, M. (eds.), 1982: Guidelines for curriculum
content in food and nutrition planning and management (Proceedings of the Second FNP
Workshop 8-13 November, 1982, Jakarta, Indonesia). Regional Training Programme on
Food and Nutrition Planning, University of Philippines, Los Banos. Pp. 119-130.
5993. Thaman, R.R. and Thomas, P.M., 1982: The cassava invasion: The cultural, nutritional and
ecological impact of cassava on Pacific Island food systems. In Bourke, R.M. and Kesavan,
V. (eds.), Proceedings of the Second Papua New Guinea Food Crops Conference: Part
Two. Department of Primary Industries, Port Moresby. Pp. 330-350.
5994. Thaman, R. R. and Clarke, W. C. (eds.), 1983: Food and national development in the
Pacific Islands, Ray Parkinson Memorial Lectures 1982. The University of the South
Pacific, Suva.
5995. Thaman, R. R., 1983: Food, nutrition and health (FNH)-oriented development and education
in the Pacific Islands: Needs and prospects. Theme of Conference Paper in Flanagan, F.V.
2009
(ed.), Regional Nutrition and Health Education Conference, Suva, Fiji, August 16-18, 1983:
Final Report. The University of the South Pacific, Suva. pp. 32-41.
5996. Thaman, R. R., 1984: Intensification of edible aroid cultivation in the Pacific Islands. Chapter
14 in Chandra, S. (ed.), Edible aroids. Clarendon Press, Oxford. pp. 102-122.
5997. Thaman, R. R. and Thomas, P. M., 1985: Cassava and change in Pacific Island food systems.
Chapter 9 in Cattle, D. J. and Schwerin, K. H. (eds.), Food energy in tropical ecosystems.
Gordon & Breach, New York. pp. 191-228.
5998. Thaman, R. R., 1985: Pacific Islands health and nutrition: Trends and areas for action. In
Development and change: Issue Papers. Pacific Islands Conference, Rarotonga, Cook
Islands, August 1985. Pacific Islands Development Programme, East-West Center,
Honolulu. pp. III-A.1-27.
5999. Thaman, R. R., 1986: Microparks in the Pacific Islands: The relevance of traditional and
modern small-scale conservation areas in the context of nature conservation in the Pacific
Islands. In Thomas, P. E. J. (ed.), Report of the Third South Pacific National Parks and
Reserves Conference (Apia, Western Samoa). Vol. II: Collected Key Issue and Case
Study Papers. South Pacific Regional Environmental Programme (SPREP), South Pacific
Commission, Noumea. pp. 215-236.
6000. Thaman, R. R., 1986: Coming down to earth: Strengthening remote sensing applications
in island countries. In Remote sensing in the Pacific Islands (Report of the Pacific Island
Regional Workshop and Training Course on Resource Mapping, Suva, Fiji). UNDP/ESCAP
Regional Remote Sensing Programme, Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the
Pacific (ESCAP), Bangkok. pp. 46-48.
6001. Thaman, R. R., 1987: Environmental education as a basis for ecological development, in the
Pacific Islands. Directions, 9(2):89-102.
6002. Thaman, R. R. and Clarke, W.C., 1987a: Pacific Island agrosilviculture: Systems for cultural
and ecological stability. Canopy International, 13(1):6-7; 13(2):8-10; 13(1):8-9 (three-part
series).
6003. Thaman, R. R., 1987b: Food, fortune and fatality: Economic, social and nutritional challenges
of the urbanization of Pacific Island food systems. In Bruss, M.B. (ed.), Nutrition Challenges
in a Changing World: Proceedings of the Pacific Conference, July 13-14, 1987, University
of Hawaii, Manoa, Honolulu, Hawaii. Hawaii Nutrition Council and the Select Committee on
International Nutrition, Society for Nutrition Education, Honolulu. pp. 32-75.
6004. Thaman, R.R., 1987c: Consumerism, the media and malnutrition in the Pacific Islands. In
Bruss, M.B. (ed.), Nutrition Challenges in a Changing World: Proceedings of the Pacific
Conference, July 13-14, 1987, University of Hawaii, Manoa, Honolulu, Hawaii. Hawaii
Nutrition Council and the Select Committee on International Nutrition, Society for Nutrition
Education, Honolulu. pp. 76-101.
6005. Thaman, R. R., 1988: The forgotten fruit: Overspecialisation in agricultural and forestry
development and the need for professional reversals and a whole-farm approach. In
Drysdale, P. (ed.), Agricultural extension in Fiji: Proceedings of the Congress of the Fiji
Institute of Agricultural Science, February 4 and 6, Suva. Fiji Institute of Agricultural Science,
Lautoka. pp. 10.1-33.
6006. Thaman, R. R., 1988a: Health and nutrition in the Pacific Islands: Development or
underdevelopment, GeoJournal, 16(2):211-227.
2009
CEHA 327
6007. Thaman, R.R., 1988b: Consumerism, the media, and malnutrition in the Pacific Islands, The
Journal of Pacific Studies, 14:68-96.
6008. Thaman, R. R., 1988c: Environmental issues in the Pacific Islands: Constraints to sustainable
island development, Pacific Issues, 1:1-77 (complete). Pacific Circle Consortium, Woden,
Canberra, Australia.
6009. Thaman, R. R., 1988d: By the people and for the people: Home gardening and national
development in the Pacific Islands. In Hirst, J., Overton, J., Allen, B. and Byron, Y. (eds.),
Small scale agriculture. Commonwealth Geographical Bureau, London and Department
of Human Geography, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University,
Canberra. pp. 167-182.
6010. Thaman, R. R., 1989: Fijian agroforestry: Trees, people and sustainable polycultural
development. In Overton, J. (ed.), Rural Fiji. Institute of Pacific Studies, The University of
the South Pacific, Suva. pp. 31-58.
6011. Thaman, R. R., 1989a: Rainforest management within the context of existing agroforestry
systems. In Heuveldop, J., Homola, M., Maydell, H.J von, and Tuyll, C. van (eds.),
Proceedings: GTZ Regional Forestry Seminar, Fiji, 3-14 October 1988. Fiji-German Forestry
Project, Ministry of Forests, Suva, on behalf of Deutsche Gesellschaft fur Technische
Zusammenarbiet, Hamburg. pp. 354-371.
6012. Thaman, R. R., 1989b: Research for atoll resource development and management:
Priorities and capabilities for applied research in Kiribati. In Thaman, R.R. (Ed.), Applied
atoll research for development: Proceedings of the Kiribati Applied Atoll Research for
Development Consultation, Tarawa 27 February to 2 March 1989. Ministry for Natural
Resource Development, Bairiki, Tarawa, Kiribati. pp. 108-129.
6013. Thaman, R. R., 1989c: Agrodeforestation and agricultural development: The role of modern
agricultural development in deforestation and the neglect of trees. In Haynes, R.J. and
Naidu, R. (eds.), Agricultural development in the Pacific Islands in the 90,s: Proceedings of
an International Conference and Workshop held in Suva Fiji, March 31 to April 1, 1989. Fiji
Institute of Agricultural Science, Chemical Society of the South Pacific and The University
of the South Pacific, Suva. pp. 124-134.
6014. Thaman, R. R., 1990: Coastal reforestation and agroforestry as immediate ameliorative
measures to address global warming and to promote sustainable habitation of lowlying
islands and coastal areas. In Streets, D.G. and Siddiqi, T.A. (eds.), Responding to the
Threat of Global Warming: Options for the Pacific and Asia. Proceedings of a Workshop
Sponsored by Argonne National Laboratory and Environment and Policy Institute, East-
West Center, Honolulu, Hawaii 21-27 June 1989. Argonne National Laboratory, Illinois. pp.
433-457.
6015. Thaman, R. R., 1990a: Hybrid agroforestry: A strategy for addressing deforestation,
agrodeforestation and forest degradation in the South Pacific. In Reti, I. (ed.), A better
environment for development: Country reviews and technical papers, UNDP Regional
Workshop on Environmental Management and Sustainable Development, Suva, 17-21
April, 1990. pp. 343-370.
6016. Thaman, R. R., 1990b: Challenges and constraints to sustainable development in the Pacific
islands - Is there a way forward? In Reti, I. (ed.), A better environment for development:
Country reviews and technical papers, UNDP Regional Workshop on Environmental
Management and Sustainable Development, Suva, 17-21 April, 1990. pp. 371-380.
2009
6017. Thaman, R. R., 1990c: Root crops in the nutritional future of the Pacific Islands. In Howeler,
R.H. (ed.), Tropical root and tuber crops - Changing role in a modern world: Proceedings
of the Eighth Symposium of the International Society for Tropical Root Crops, Bangkok,
Thailand, Oct. 30 - Nov. 5, 1988. International Society for Tropical Root Crops (ISTRIC),
Wageningen, Netherlands. pp. 130-146.
6018. Thaman, R.R., 1990d: Coastal reforestation and coastal agroforestry as strategies to address
global warming and to promote sustainable development in the Pacific Islands. In Hughes,
P.J. and McGregor, G. (eds.), Global warming-related effects on agriculture and human
health and comfort in the South Pacific. South Pacific Regional Environment Programme
(SPREP), Noumea and United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP), Nairobi. pp. 65-
84
6019. Thaman, R. R., 1990e: The evolution of the Fiji food system. In Jansen, A.A.J, Parkinson, S
and A.F.S. Robertson, A.F.S. (eds.), Food and nutrition in Fiji: A historical review. Volume
One: Food production, composition and intake. Department of Nutrition and Dietetics, Fiji
School of Medicine and the Institute of Pacific Studies, The University of the South Pacific,
Suva. pp. 23-107.
6020. Thaman, R. R., 1990f: Mixed home gardening in the Pacific Islands: Present status and
future prospects. In Landauer, K. and Brazil, M. (eds.), Tropical home gardens. United
Nations University Press, Tokyo. pp. 41-65
6021. Thaman, R. R., 1990g: Kiribati agroforestry: Trees, people and the atoll environment, Atoll
Research Bulletin, 333:1-29.
6022. Thaman, R. R. and Neemia, U., 1991: Republic of Kiribati: National Report for the United
Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED), Rio de Janeiro, Brazil,
June 1992. Ministry of The Environment and Natural Resources Development, Bairiki,
Tarawa and South Pacific Regional Environment Programme (SPREP), Noumea.
6023. Thaman, R. R., 1991a: Agroforestry and fuelwood resources in the Pacific Islands: Present
status and future prospects. In Household and rural energy: Pacific household and rural
energy seminar, Port Vila, Vanuatu, November 5-9, 1990 (Proceedings). Vol. 2. Energy
Sector Management and Assistance Programme (ESMAP), World Bank, Washington, D.C.
and UNDP Pacific Energy Development Programme (PEDP), Suva. Pp. 246-285.
6024. Thaman, R. R., 1991b: Evolution and change in Pacific Island food systems. Background
paper no. 3. In Bakker, M.L. and Thaman, R.R. (eds.), Population, Food and Development:
Proceedings - USP/SPC/UNFPA Regional Symposium, The University of the South Pacific,
Suva, Fiji, 12-16 November, 1990. Demographic report 2. Population Studies Programme,
University of the South Pacific, Suva. Pp. 81-100.
6025. Thaman, R. R., 1992: Cultural constraints to sustainable atoll agricultural development. In
Chase, R.G. (ed.), A review of agricultural development in the atolls: Invited papers from
the International Conference on Developing Agriculture Research Programmes for Atolls,
Pacific Harbour, Fiji, November 1990. Institute for Research, Extension and Training in
Agriculture, University of the South Pacific, Apia, Western Samoa. Pp. 7-20.
6026. Thaman, R. R., 1992a: Atoll agroforestry and plant resources: a basis for sustainable atoll
agricultural development. In Chase, R.G. (ed.), A review of agricultural development in
the atolls: Invited papers from the International Conference on Developing Agriculture
Research Programmes for Atolls, Pacific Harbour, Fiji, November 1990. Institute for
Research, Extension and Training in Agriculture, University of the South Pacific, Apia,
Western Samoa. Pp. 55-81.
2009
CEHA 329
6027. Thaman, R. R., 1992b: Vegetation of Nauru and the Gilbert Islands. Pacific Science
46(2):128-158.Thaman, R. R., 1992c: Batiri kei Baravi: The ethnobotany of Pacific Island
coastal plants, Atoll Research Bulletin, 361:1-62.
6028. Thaman, R. R., 1993: Tongatapu Island, Tonga. In Clarke, W.C. and Thaman, R.R. (eds.),
Pacific Island agroforestry: Systems for sustainability. United Nations University Press,
Tokyo. Pp. 89-95.
6029. Thaman, R. R., 1993a: Children and the future of the Pacific Islands, Directions: Journal of
Educational Studies (Institute of Education, University of the South Pacific), 15(1):1-18.
6030. Thaman, R. R., Clarke, W.C., 1993b: Rotuma island, Fiji. In Clarke, W.C. and Thaman, R.R.
(eds.), Pacific Island agroforestry: Systems for sustainability. United Nations University
Press, Tokyo. Pp. 95-98.
6031. Thaman, R.R., 1993c: Rarotonga and Aitutaki, the Cook Islands. In Clarke, W.C. and
Thaman, R.R. (eds.), Pacific Island agroforestry: Systems for sustainability. United Nations
University Press, Tokyo. Pp. 99-111.
6032. Thaman, R. R., Decker, B., 1993d: The Marquesas Islands, French Polynesia. In Clarke,
W.C. and Thaman, R.R. (eds.), Pacific Island agroforestry: Systems for sustainability.
United Nations University Press, Tokyo. Pp. 111-121.
6033. Thaman, R. R., 1993e: Atoll agroforestry on Tarawa and Abemama, Kiribati. In Clarke, W.C.
and Thaman, R.R. (eds.), Pacific Island agroforestry: Systems for sustainability. United
Nations University Press, Tokyo. Pp. 130-144.
6034. Thaman, R. R. and Ali, I., 1993f: Agroforestry on smallholder sugar-cane farms in Fiji.
Chapter 8 in Clarke, W. C. and Thaman, R. R. (eds.), Pacific Island agroforestry: Systems
for sustainability. United Nations University Press, Tokyo. Pp. 157-161.
6035. Thaman, R.R., Manner, H.I and Clarke, W.C., 1993d: Institutionalised agroforestry in
the Pacific Islands. Chapter 9 in Clarke, W.C. and Thaman, R.R. (eds.), Pacific Island
agroforestry: Systems for sustainability. United Nations University Press, Tokyo. Pp. 162-
190.
6036. Thaman, R. R. and Clarke, W. C., 1993e: Agroforestry in the Pacific Islands: Systems
for sustainablility. Chapter 10 in Clarke, W. C. and Thaman, R.R. (eds.), Pacific Island
agroforestry: Systems for sustainability. United Nations University Press, Tokyo. Pp. 191-
215.
6037. Thaman, R. R., 1993f: One hundred Pacific Island agroforestry trees. In Thaman, R. R. and
Clarke, W. C. (eds.), Pacific island agroforestry: Systems for sustainability. Prepared for
the United Nations University, Tokyo, Japan. Geography Department. The University of the
South Pacific, Suva. Pp. 216-266.
6038. Thaman, R. R., 1993g: Moana nui, vanua and wantoks. In Waddell, E., Naidu, V. and Hau’ofa,
‘E. A new Oceania: Rediscovering our sea of islands. A USP 25th Anniversary publication.
School of Social and Economic Development, University of the South Pacific, Suva. Pp.
38-48.
6039. Thaman, R. R., 1993h: Pacific Island biodiversity: A basis for ecological, cultural and economic
survival. In Waddell, E. and Nunn, P. D. (eds.), The margin fades: Geographical itineraries
in a world of islands. Institute of Pacific Studies, the University of the South Pacific, Suva.
2009
Pp. 49-65.
6040. Thaman, R. R. and Clarke, W. C., 1993i: Pacific island agroforestry: Functional and utilitarian
diversity. Chapter 2 in Clarke, W. C. and Thaman, R. R. (eds.), Pacific Island agroforestry:
Systems for sustainability, United Nations University Press, Tokyo. Pp. 17-33.
6041. Thaman, R., 1993: Environmental Issues in the Pacific Islands: Constraints to Sustainable
Island Development, Pacific Circle Consortium, Canberra.
6042. Thaman, R. R., 1993j: Climate change, forestry and agroforestry in the Pacific Islands:
Impacts and appropriate responses. In Hay, J. E. and Kaluwin, C. (eds.), Climate change
and sea level rise in the South Pacific Region: Proceedings of the Second SPREP
Meeting, Noumea, New Caledonia, 6-10 April 1992. South Pacific Regional Environment
Programme, Apia, Western Samoa. Pp. 119-136.
6043. Thaman, R. R., 1994: Land, plants, animals and people: Community-based biodiversity
conservation as a basis for ecological, cultural and economic survival in the Pacific
islands. In Capecchi, B. (ed.), La terre: Acts du sixieme Colloque C.O.R.A.I.L., Noumea,
27, 28 et 29 Octobre 1993. L’association C.O.R.A.I.L (Coordination pour l’Oceanie des
Reserches sur les Arts, les Idees et les Litteratures), Noumea. Pp. 165-195.
6044. Thaman, R. R., Fosberg, F.R., Manner, H.I. and Hassall, D.C., 1994a: The Flora of Nauru.
Atoll Research Bulletin No. 392:1-223, National Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian
Institution, Washington, D.C.
6045. Thaman, R. R., 1994b: Community-based biodiversity management: A foundation for
sustainable island development. In Thomas, P., Bliss, E. and Hussain, R. (eds.), Managing
resources in the South Pacific, Development Bulletin, (Special issue) 31:76-78. Australian
Development Network, Australian National University, Canberra.
6046. Thaman, R. R., 1994c: Land, plants, animals and people: Community-based biodiversity
conservation (CBBC) as a basis for ecological, cultural and economic survival in the Pacific
Islands, Pacific Science Association Information Bulletin, 46 (1-2):1-15.
6047. Thaman, R. R., 1994d: Marine ethnobiology: A foundation for marine science education in
the Pacific Islands. Pacific Curriculum Network: 8-11.
6048. Thaman, R.R. 1994e. Pacific Island agroforestry: An endangered science. In Morrison, J.,
Geraghty, P. and Crowl, L. (eds.), Science of Pacific Island peoples. Vol. 2: Land use and
agriculture. Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific, Suva. Pp. 191-221.
6049. Thaman, R.R., 1994f: Ethnobotany of Pacific Island coastal plants. In Morrison, J., Geraghty,
P. and Crowl, L. (eds.), Science of Pacific Island peoples. Vol. 3: Land use and agriculture.
Institute of Pacific Studies, University of the South Pacific, Suva. Pp. 147-184.
6050. Thaman, R. R., 1995: Urban food gardening in the Pacific Islands: A basis for food security
in rapidly urbanising small-island states, Habitat International, 19 (2): 209-224.
6051. Thaman, R.R., Smith, A., Faka’osi, T. and Filiai, L., 1995a: Tonga coastal reforestation and
protection project, Pacific Islands Forests & Trees, 3/95 (September): 8-10 and 2.
6052. Thaman, R. R., 1995b: Mennesker og kulturer pa Stillehavsoerne (People and cultures of
the Pacific Islands). Geografisk Orientering (Special issue on Oceania), 25 (6)(Nov.- Dec.):
240-245.
6053. Thaman, R. R., 1995c: Moderne udvikling pa Stillehavsoerne - er den baeredygtig? (Modern
2009
CEHA 331
Pacific Island development - is it sustainable?). Geografisk Orientering, (Special issue on

Oceania) 25 (6)(Nov.- Dec.): 254-257.
6054. Thaman, R. R. and Devoe, N. N., 1995d: Ethnobotany and changing land use in North
Ambrym, Vanuatu. In Tang, H.T., Finiasi, L.S. and Enevoldsen, K. (eds.), What value forests
and trees: Proceedings of Heads of Forestry Meeting 1993, 20-24 September, Nadi, Fiji.
Field Document No. 6 (RAS/92/361). South Pacific Forestry Development Programme,
Suva. Pp. 179-189.
6055. Thaman, R. R. and Whistler, W. A., 1995e: Strategies for the protection and planting of trees:
A preliminary report of a study of uses, husbandry and performance of trees in forestry and
agroforestry systems in Samoa, Tonga, Kiribati and Tuvalu. In Tang, H. T., Finiasi, L. S. and
Enevoldsen, K. (eds.), What value forests and trees: Proceedings of Heads of Forestry
Meeting 1993, 20-24 September, Nadi, Fiji. Field Document No. 6 (RAS/92/361). South
Pacific Forestry Development Programme, Suva. Pp. 170-178.
6056. Thaman, R. R., 1996f: Coastal biodiversity and ethnobiology: A ecological, cultural and
economic safety net for Pacific peoples. In Eldredge, L.G., Maragos, J.E. and Holthus, P.L.
(eds.), Marine/coastal biodiversity in the tropical island Pacific region: Vol. II. Population,
development, and conservation priorities. East-West Centre, Pacific Forum Ocean Institute
and Pacific Science Association, Honolulu. Pp.37. (in press).
6057. Thaman, R. R. 1996g: Evolutionary agroforestry: Traditional Pacific Island agroforestry as

a foundation for modern agroforestry development. In Rogers, S. and Thorpe, P. (eds.),
Agroforestry research and practices in the Pacific: Reports and papers from the Second
Annual Meeting of Collaborators, Port Vila, Vanuatu, 22-26 April, 1996. PRAP report No. 3.
Pacific Regional Agricultural Programme, Suva. Pp. 85-113.
6058. Thaman, R. R. 1996h: Critical issues for sustainable farming system development in the
Pacific Islands. In Norman, D., Umar, M., Tofinga, M. and Bammann, H. (eds.), The
farming systems approach to sustainable agriculture development in the South Pacific:
Proceedings of an FAO/IRETA Workshop, The University of the South Pacific, Suva, Fiji,
5-8 August 1996. Institute for Research Extension and Training in Agriculture (IRETA),
University of the South Pacific, Apia, Western Samoa. Pp. 19-23.
6059. Thaman, R. R. and Whistler, W. A., 1996i: A review of uses and status of trees and forests
in land-use systems in Samoa, Tonga, Kiribati and Tuvalu with recommendations for future
action. Working Paper 5, June 1996 (RAS/92/361). South Pacific Forestry Development
Programme, Suva.
6060. Thaman, R. R. 1996f: Distant fields: The relevance of field studies for distance education
in the Pacific Islands. In Ravaga, V., Vatucawaqa, L., Hola, L., Faasalaina, T. and Singh,
V. (eds.), Negociating the distance: A collection of experiences in teaching Distance and
Flexible Learning courses at The University of the South Pacific (Celebrating 25 years
of disntance education at The University of the South Pacific). Distance and Flexible
Learning, The University of the South Pacific, Suva. Pp. 125-142.
6061. Thaman, R. R. and Hassall, D. C., 1998: Republic of Nauru NEMS: National Environmental
Management Strategy and Action Plan. Prepared for the Department of Island Development
and Industry, Nauru and produced with financial assistance from the United Nations
Development Programme (UNDP). South Pacific Regional Environment Programme
(SPREP), Apia.
6062. Thaman, R. R. 1999: Thinking globally and acting locally: Community-based biodiversity
conservation in Oceania as a basis for addressing the erosion of coastal biodiversity. In
2009
Koshy, K. (ed.), Inaugural START - Oceania Workshop: Proceedings of the Joint Coastal
Zone Management and Climate Change Workshops, The University of the South Pacific
Marine Studies Programme Facility, Suva, Fiji, 5-9 October 1998. START - Oceania
Secretariat, University of the South Pacific, Suva. Pp. 125-175.
6063. Thaman, R. R. 1999a: Concepts and information related to the protection and development
of atoll agroforestry systems in the Pacific Islands. In Wescom, R. and Bulai, S. (eds.),
Report on Sub-regional Training Workshop on Agroforestry/Drum Ovens for Atoll Islands,
3-16 August 1999, Majuro, Republic of the Marshall Islands with an annotated checklist
of important Pacific Island atoll agroforestry species. SPC/UNDP/FAO Pacific Islands
Forests and Trees Support Programme, Suva. Pp. 18-25.
6064. Thaman, R. R. 1999b: Annotated checklist of important Pacific Island atoll agroforestry
species. In Wescom, R. and Bulai, S. (eds.), Report on Sub-regional Training Workshop
on Agroforestry/Drum Ovens for Atoll Islands, 3-16 August 1999, Majuro, Republic of the
Marshall Islands with an annotated checklist of important Pacific Island atoll agroforestry
species. SPC/UNDP/FAO Pacific Islands Forests and Trees Support Programme, Suva.
Pp. 26-69.
6065. Thaman, R. R. 1999c: Pacific Island biodiversity on the eve of the 21st Century: Current
status and challenges for its conservation and sustainable use, Pacific Science Association
Information Bulletin, 51 (1-4): 1- 37.
6066. Thaman, R. R., Elevitch, C. R. and Wilkinson, K. M. 2000: Multipurpose trees for agroforestry
in the Pacific Islands. In Elevitch, C. R. and Wilkinson, K. M. (eds.), Agroforestry guides
for Pacific Islands. Permanent Agriculture Resources (PAR), Holuahua, Hawaii. Pp. 24-
69.
6067. Thaman, R. R., Elevitch, C. R. and Wilkinson, K. M. 2001: Traditional Pacific Island
agroforestry systems. In Elevitch, C. R. and Wilkinson, K. M. (eds.), The overstory book:
Cultivating connections with trees. Permanent Agriculture Resources, Holualoa, Hawai’i.
Pp. 21- 26.
6068. Thaman, R. R. 2001a: Ecotourism and the natural environment: Protecting Fiji’s unique
environments. In Bricker, K. S. (ed.). Shaping the future of ecotourism in Fiji: Proceedings
of the 1st Annual Fiji Ecotourism Association Conference, Tanoa International Hotel, Nadi
Fiji, December 11-12, 2000. Fiji Ecotourism Association, Suva, Fiji Islands. Pp. 52-72.
6069. Thaman, R. R., Eritaia, B. and Faka’osi, S. 2001b: Community-based biodiversity surveys
and conservation action plans as tools for nature conservation in the Pacific Islands:
Lessons learned from Fiji, Tonga and Kiribati (Melanesia, Polynesia and Micronesia). In
Miller, S. and Sim, J. (eds.), Tools for conservation: 6th South Pacific Conference on Nature
Conservation & Protected Areas, 29 September - 3 October 1997, Pohnpei, Federated
States of Micronesia. Volume 3: Conference papers. South Pacific Regional Environment
Programme, Apia. Pp. 225-285.
6070. Thaman, R. R., 2002: Trees outside forests as a foundation for sustainable development
in the Small Island Developing States of the Pacific Ocean, The International Forestry
Review, 4 (4), (December): 268- 276.
6071. Thawley, John, 1997: Australasia and South Pacific islands bibliography, Lanham, Md.:
Scarecrow Press.
6072. Theng, Judith Helen, 1997: Lakalai Tales: An Analysis. M.A. Thesis, Victoria University of
Wellington, 436 pp., illustrated.
2009
CEHA 333
6073. Theodat, Jean Marie Dulix, 1997: Haiti, Quisqueya: une double insularite. Essai de
geographie historique, Nanterre: Universite de Paris 10 Nanterre.
6074. Theodat, Jean Marie Dulix, 1998: Haiti-Quisqueya: une double insularite, Mappemonde, no
51, p. p. 7-11.
6075. Théodat, Jean-Marie Dulix, 2000 : Haïti, Quisqueya: une double insularité: essai de
géographie historique, 1804-1915, Lille: Atelier national de Reproduction des Thèses.
6076. Théodora, Roger, 1941, [2006]: Candide et l’ancien puits: libres considérations sur le
passé lointain des îles Mascareignes et de l’Océan Indien, 1941- Sainte-Marie, Île de la
Réunion: Azalées éditions.
6077. Theodosakis, N., 1994: Employment in Tourism Establishments of Crete (1989, 1991,
1993). Heraklio: Institute of Computer Mathematics, [em Grego].
6078. Therin, M., R. Torrence and R. Fullagar, 1997: “The Australian Museum starch reference
collection”, Australian Archaeology, 44: 52-3.
6079. Therin, M.; Fullagar, R.; Torrence, R., 1999: Starch in sediments: a new approach to the
study of subsistence and land use in Papua New Guinea, In: C. Gosden and J. G. Hather,
Eds. The Prehistory of Food: Appetites for Change. London, Routledge, pp. 438-462.
6080. Thierry, Nicolas, 2001: La circulation comme facteur d’intégration nationale et d’« hypo-
insularité»: le cas des Antilles françaises in Cahiers D’outre Mer, 216, pp. 397-416.
Disponível online em url. http://com.revues.org/index2307.html. Consulta a 20 de Agosto
de 2009.
6081. Thiers, Ghjacumu, 1992: Santu Casanova è a lingua Corsa, ADECEC Cervioni.
6082. Thistlethwaite, Bob; Davis, Derrin, 1996: Pacific 2010: a sustainable future for Melanesia?:
natural resources, population and development, [Canberra]: National Centre for
Development Studies, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University,
c1996.
6083. Thomas, Allan; Kuautoga, Takaroga, 1992: Hgorofutuna: report of a survey of the music
of West Futuna, Vanuatu, Auckland, New Zealand: Archive of Maori and Pacific Music,
Dept. of Anthropology, University of Auckland.
6084. Thomas, Harriet Guest and Michael Dettelbach, 1996: Honolulu, University of Hawai’i
Press.
6085. Thomas, Jack Ray, 1995: Biographical Dictionary of Latin American Historians and
Historiography, Westport, CT: Greenwood Press.
6086. Thomas, Leslie, 1983: A world of islands, London: M. Joseph/Rainbird.
6087. Thomas, M., J. Gitai and L. Makara, 1991: The smallholder cocoa and coconut rehabilitation
and expansion project (SCCREP). Phase 3. West New Britain, Oro, Central and Milne
Bay Provinces. Project Document. Konedobu (Papua New Guinea), Department of
Agriculture and Livestock.
6088. Thomas, N., 1987: Complementarity and history: misrecognizing gender in the Pacific,
Oceania, vol. 57: 261-270.
6089. Thomas, N., 1989: The indigenous appropriation of European things, in Entangled objects;
exchange, material culture and colonialism in the Pacific, Harvard Univ. Press, Cambridge
pp.83-124.
6090. Thomas, N., 1990: Partial texts; representation, colonialism and agency in Pacific History,
Journal of Pacific History, 25, 139-58.
2009
6091. Thomas, N., 1991: Entangled Objects. Exchange, Material Culture and Colonialism in the
Pacific, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, p. 111.
6092. Thomas, N., 1991: The European Appropriation of Indigenous Things, In Entangled Objects:
Exchange, Material Culture, and Colonialism in the Pacific, Cambridge: University of
Harvard Press, pp. 125-184.
6093. Thomas, N., 1995: Oceanic Art. London: Thames and Hudson.
6094. Thomas, N., 1996: The dream of Joseph: debates about identity in Pacific art, and From
exhibit to exhibitionism: recent Polynesian presentations of ‘otherness, The Contemporary
Pacific, 8:291-317, 319-348.
6095. Thomas, N., 1997: Marked Men, Art Asia Pacific, 13:66-73.
6096. Thomas, N., 1997: Oceania; visions, artifacts, histories, Duke University Press.
6097. Thomas, N., 1999: Possessions: Indigenous Art/Colonial Culture, London: Thames and
Hudson.
6098. Thomas, N.; Losche, D., eds. 1999: Double vision; art histories and colonial histories in the
Pacific, CUP, Melbourne.
6099. Thomas, Nicholas, 1990: Marquesan societies: inequality and political transformation in
eastern Polynesia, Oxford [England]: Clarendon Press; New York: Oxford.
6100. Thomas, Nicholas, 1992: Colonial Conversions: Difference, Hierarchy, and History in Early
Twentieth-Century Evangelical Propaganda, Comparative Studies in Society and History,
34:2, 366-389.
6101. Thomas, Nicholas, 2003: Cook: the extraordinary voyages of Captain James Cook, New
York Walker & Company
6102. Thomas, Nicholas, Cole, Anna, Douglas, Bronwen, 2005: Tattoo: bodies, art, and exchange
in the Pacific and the West, Durham: Duke University Press.
6103. Thomas, S. D., 1987: The last navigator, New York, Henry Holt.
6104. Thomas, Suzanne, 2007: Littoral Space(s): Liquid Edges of Poetic Possibility, Journal
of the Canadian Association for Curriculum Studies, Volume 5 Number 1, Spring/
Summer. Disponível online em URL: https://pi.library.yorku.ca/ojs/index.php/jcacs/article/
viewFile/17021/15822. Consulta em 11 de julho de 2009.
6105. Thomas, S., 2008: Imperialism, reform, and the making of Englishness in Jane Eyre,
Basingstoke [England]; New York: Palgrave Macmillan.
6106. Thomas-Hope, E., 2002: Caribbean migrations, Kingston, The university of the West Indies
press.
6107. Thompson, C., 1997: A dangerous people whose only occupation is war; Maori and pakeha
in 19th century New Zealand, Journal of Pacific History, Vol 31, No 1, pp.109-19.
6108. Thompson, Jeff, 1992: The rise of the Seventh-Day Adventist Church in the Bahamas and
the Cayman Islands, [Nassau, Bahamas]: [J.K. Thompson].
6109. Thompson, Judi, Taylor, Alan, 1980: Polynesian canoes and navigation, Laie, Hawaii:
Institute for Polynesian Studies, Brigham Young University, Hawaii Campus.
6110. Thompson, Julian, 2005: Force projection and the Falklands Conflict, In Badsey, Stephen;
Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict twenty years on: lessons for the
future (Sandhurst conference series, 5), London; New York: Cass, 81-98.
6111. Thompson, Julian, 2006: ‘Sir Lawrence Freedman, The Official History of the Falklands
2009
CEHA 335
Campaign’, Journal of Strategic Studies, 29:3, 535-51.

6112. Thompson, Lanny, 1995: Nuestra isla y su gente: la construcción del “otro” puertorriqueño
en Our islands and their people, Río Piedras, P.R.: Centro de Investigaciones Sociales y
Departamento de Historia de la Universidad de Puerto Rico.
6113. Thompson, Lanny, 2002: The Imperial Republic: A Comparison of the Insular Territories under
U.S. Dominion after 1898, The Pacific Historical Review, Vol. 71, No. 4. (Nov.), pp. 535-
574. Disponível online em url: http://www.asamst.ucsb.edu/courses/readingsAAS2/43_
thompson.pdf. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009,Thompson, Mary Shine & Celia Keenan,
editors, 2006: Treasure islands: studies in children’s literature, Dublin: Four Courts Press.
6114. Thompson, Neville, 1993: Eastern Europe during the Revolutionary era: the British
Protectorate of the Ionian Islands and the Greek War of Independence 1815-1827,
Proceedings of the Consortium on Revolutionary Europe, 1750 to 1850, 23, 302-311.
6115. Thompson, R., 1980: Australian imperialism in the Pacific; the expansionist era 1820-1920,
Melbourne, MUP.
6116. Thompson, R., 1981: Natives and settlers on the New Hebrides frontier 1870-1900, Pacific
Studies, Vol 5,1, pp.1-18.
6117. Thompson, R., 1992: Edge of empire; Australian colonization in Nauru, in Rubinstein, D.,
(ed) Pacific history; Papers of the 8th PHA Conference, Guam, PHA.
6118. Thompson, Roger C., 1994: The Pacific Basin since 1945: a history of the foreign relations
of the Asian, Australasian, and American rim states and the Pacific islands, London; New
York: Longman.
6119. Thompson, R., 1995: Messy entanglements in British and Australian decolonization in the
Pacific 1960-63, in Talu, A. and Quanchi, M., (eds) Messy entanglements, Brisbane, PHA.
6120. Thompson, Roger C., 1998, 1999: Australia and the Pacific Islands in the twentieth century,
Melbourne, Vic.: Australian Scolarly Publishing.
6121. Thompson, Shawn, 1997: Soul of the river: life in the Thousand Islands, Burnstown,
Ont.,General Store Publishing House.
6122. Thomson, Belinda, 1987: Gauguin, World of Art Series, London: Thames and Hudson.
6123. Thomson, George Derwent, 1988: Island home: the Blasket heritage, Dingle, Co. Kerry,
Ireland; Wolfeboro, N.H.: Brandon.
6124. Thomson, John, 1999: “New Zealand (with the South Pacific Islands)”, in The Journal of
Commonwealth Literature, Jan; vol. 34: pp. 67 – 87.
6125. Thomson, J.-A. R. and J. P. White, 2000: Localism of Lapita pottery in the Bismarck
Archipelago. In: A. Anderson and T. Murray, Eds., Australian Archaeologist: Collected
Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, The Australian
National University, pp. 308-323.
6126. Thomson, Robert, 1980: The Marquesas Islands: their description and early history,
introduction and notes by Robert D. Craig, Laie, Hawaii: Institute for Polynesian Studies,
Brigham Young University-Hawaii Campus.
6127. Thomson, Robert, 1987: Green gold: bananas and dependency in the Eastern Caribbean,
London : Latin America Bureau.
6128. Thomson, R.; White, J. P., 2000: Localism of Lapita pottery in the Bismarck Archipelago, In:
A. Anderson and T. Murray, Eds., Australian Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of
Jim Allen. Canberra, Canberra Academic Publishing, The Australian National University,
pp. 308-323.
2009
6129. Thomson, William P. L., 1987: History of Orkney, Edinburgh: Mercat.

6130. Thomson, William P. L., 2002: ‘Ouncelands and Pennylands in the West Highlands and
Islands’, Northern Scotland, 22, 27-43.
6131. Thorburn, Craig, 2005: Musibah: governance, intercommunal violence and reinventing
tradition in the Kei Islands, southeast Maluku. [Clayton], Vic.: Monash Asia Institute,
Monash University.
6132. Thorhallsson, B., 2000: The Role of Small States in the European Union, Aldershot:
Ashgate.
6133. Thornton, Patricia and Lawrencia Pirpir, 2008: Discovering Disability in Papua New Guinea:
Prevalence, perceived causes, service use and unmet needs, The Melanesian Institute
(Goroka, Papua New Guinea).
6134. Thornton, Tim, 2002: ‘The English king’s French islands: Jersey and Guernsey in English
politics and administration, 1485-1642’, In Bernard, George W.; Gunn, Steven J. (ed.),
Authority and consent in Tudor England: essays presented to C.S.L. Davies (Aldershot:
Ashgate), 197-217.
6135. Thornton, Tim, 2004: British/English attitudes to the Norman Law of the Channel Islands in
the early modern period, in Dawes, Gordon (ed.), Commise 1204: studies in the history
and law of continental and insular Normandy, St. Peter Port, Guernsey: Guernsey Bar,
123-32.
6136. Throop, C., 1988: “Pigs are our hearts”: a functional study of the pig in Melanesia. M. K.
Mayers and D. D. Rath, Eds., Nucleation in Papua New Guinea Cultures, Dallas, Summer
Institute of Linguistics, pp. 13-21.
6137. Throop, C.; Ross, M. D., 1995: Kaulong, D. T. Tryon, Ed. Comparative Austronesian
Dictionary, Part 1. Berlin, Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 719-726.
6138. Thurston, Anne; Rayner, Susie, 1985: Commonwealth Sources in British Official Records:
Colonial and Dominions Offices. London : Commonwealth Archivists Association.
6139. Thurston, W. R., 1980: A Comparative Study of Anem and Lusi, PhD thesis, University of
Toronto, Toronto.
6140. Thurston, William R., 1982: A Comparative Study in Anem and Lusi, Pacific Linguistics,
B-83. Canberra: Australian National University.
6141. Thurston, William R., 1987: Processes of Change in the Languages of North-western New
Britain, Pacific Linguistics, B-99. Canberra: Australian National University.
6142. Thurston, William R., 1989: How exoteric languages build a lexicon: esoterogeny in West
New Britain. Vical 1: Oceanic Languages: Papers from the Fifth International Conference
on Austronesian Linguistics. Auckland, New Zealand: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.
6143. Thurston, William R., 1994: The Legend of Titikolo: An Anem genesis, In The Children of
Kilibob: Creation, Cosmos, and Culture in Northeast New Guinea, eds. Ali Pomponio,
David Counts, and Thomas Harding. Special Issue of Pacific Studies, 17(4):183-204.
6144. Thurston, William R., 1998: The inadvertent acquisition of kinship during ethnographic
fieldwork. in Fieldwork and Families, eds. Juliana Flinn, Leslie Marshall, Jocelyn
Armstrong. Honolulu: University of Hawai’i Press. Pp 154-168.
6145. Tibère, Laurence, 2006: Manger créole: Interactions identitaires et insularité à la Réunion,
Ethnologie française, Juillet, vol. XXXVI, no 3, p. 509-517.
6146. Tiffany, M., 1995: Returning to their roots. Wallis and Futuna Islanders on pilgrim voyage,
The Fiji Times August 29, 1995, p. 13. Fiji Times and Herald, Suva.
2009
CEHA 337
6147. Till, chaired by Geoffrey, 2005: The Falklands War: [seminar] held at the Joint Services
Command and Staff College (JSCSC), Watchfield, Wiltshire on 5 June 2002; paper
by Lawrence Freedman; seminar edited by Andrew Dorman, Michael D. Kandiah and
Gillian Staerck. London: Centre for Contemporary British History, Institute for Historical
Research.
6148. Tim Merrill, ed., 1992: Guyana: A Country Study. Washington: GPO for the Library of
Congress. Disponível online em url: http://countrystudies.us/guyana/. Consulta em 11 de
Julho de 2009.
6149. Timothy, D. J., 2001: Benefits and costs of smallness and peripheral location in tourism:
Saint-Pierre Et Miquelon (France), Tourism Recreation Research, 26(3), pp. 61-72.
6150. Timothy, D.J., 1999: Participatory planning. A view of tourism in Indonesia, Annals of
6151. Tissier, Jean-Louis, 1984: “Iles, insularité, isolement”, Documents pour l’histoire du
vocabulaire scientifique, 3, Paris, Cnrs-Greco, p. 49-67.
6152. Toase, Francis, 2005: ‘The United Nations Security Resolution 502’ [Falklands conflict]. In
on: lessons for the future (Sandhurst conference series, 5) (London; New York: Cass,),
147-69.
6153. Tocci, Nathalie, 2004: EU Accession Dynamics and Conflict Resolution: Catalysing Peace
or Consolidating Partition in Cyprus?, Ashgate.
6154. Todesco, Sergio, 1995: Atlante dei beni etno-antropologici eoliani, Messina: A. Sfameni;
[Palermo: Regione Siciliana, Assessorato dei beni culturali ed ambientali e della Pubblica
Istruzione].
6155. Tōkyō Kokuritsu Hakubutsukan, 1992: Kaijō no michi: Okinawa no rekishi to bunka: fukki
20-shūnen kinen tokubetsuten = History and culture of Okinawa Islands, [Tokyo]: Yomiuri
Shinbunsha, Heisei 4.
6156. Tolentino, André Corsino, 2007: Universidade e transformação social nos pequenos estados
em desenvolvimento: o caso de Cabo Verde, Lisboa: Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian.
6157. Tomassini, Stefano, 2001: Amor di Corsica - Viaggio di terra, di mare e di memoria,
Feltrinelli.
6158. Tomaras, E.J., 1993: Australia and Japan in the Pacific Islands; partners or rivals?,
unpublished paper, PIPSA Conference, Rarotonga, Cook Islands.
6159. Tomé, Mario, 1987: La Isla: utopía, inconsciente y aventura: hermenéutica simbólica de un
tema literario, León: Universidad de León.
6160. Tomich, Dale W., 2004: Through the prism of slavery: labor, capital, and world economy,
Lanham: Rowman & Littlefield.
6161. Tomiche, Paul, 2008: Luttes syndicales et politiques en Guadeloupe, Paris: Harmattan.
6162. Tompson, Richard S., 2000: Islands of law: a legal history of the British Isles, New York:
P. Lang.
6163. Tomlinson, D. 1991. Plant pathology note no. 36. Rhizome and root rot of cardamom,
Harvest, 13(1-4): 23-24.
6164. Tomlinson, Mike, 1995: “Can Britain leave Ireland? The political economy of war and
peace”, Race & Class, 37: 1-22.
6165. Toms, Carel, 1992: Guernsey’s forgotten past, Chichester: Phillimore.
2009
6166. Tønnesson, Stein. ‘The South China Sea in the Age of European Decline’, Modern Asian
Studies, 40:1, 1-58.
6167. Toohey, Edwina, 2001: Before the aeroplane dance: the Torres Strait and Cape York
islanders, aborigines and adventurers from the 1960s to 1914, Rockhampton, Qld.
Central Queensland University Press.
6168. Toohey, John, 2000-2003: Captain Bligh’s Portable Nightmare: From the Bounty to safety
- 4,162 Miles Across the Pacific in a Rowing Boat, Fourth Estate, New York e Londres.
6169. Toorawa, edited by Shawkat M., 2007: The Western Indian Ocean: essays on islands and
islanders, Port Louis, Mauritius: Hassan Toorawa Trust.
6170. Torben C. Rick, [et al.], 2008: “Dogs, humans and island ecosystems: the distribution,
antiquity and ecology of domestic dogs (Canis familiaris) on California’s Channel Islands”,
in The Holocene, vol. 18: pp. 1077-1087.
6171. Torrence, R., Specht, J.; Fullagar, R. 1992: From Pleistocene to Present: obsidian
sources in West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Records of the Australian Museum.
Supplement: 83.
6172. Torrence, R., 1995: Archaeological and Ethnobotanical Fieldwork in West New Britain
Province, PNG, June-July 1995. Report submitted to West New Britain Provincial
Government.
6173. Torrence, R., 1995: Prehistoric agriculture in Papua New Guinea: Report to the PNG
Biological Foundation.
6174. Torrence, R., J. Specht, R. Fullagar and G. R. Summerhayes, 1996: Which obsidian is
worth it? A view from the West New Britain Sources. In: J. Davidson, Irwin, G., Leach, F.
Pawley, A. and Brown, D., Ed. Oceanic Culture History: Essays in Honour of Roger Green
(New Zealand Journal of Archaeology Special Publication), pp. 211-224.
6175. Torrence, R. and G. R. Summerhayes, 1997: “Sociality and the short distance trader:
intra-regional obsidian exchange in the Willaumez Peninsula, Papua New Guinea”,
Archaeology in Oceania, 32: 74-84.
6176. Torrence, R.; Pavlides, C.; Jackson, P.; Webb, J., 2000: Volcanic disasters and cultural
discontinuities in Holocene time, in West New Britain, Papua New Guinea, Special
Publication- Geological Society of London 171: 225-244.
6177. Torrence, R.; Stevenson, C. M., 2000: Beyond the beach: changing Lapita landscapes
on Gatua Island, Papua New Guinea, In: A. Anderson and T. Murray, Eds., Australian
Archaeologist: Collected Papers in Honour of Jim Allen, Canberra, Canberra Academic
Publishing, The Australian National University, pp. 324-345.
6178. Torrence, R., 2002: “Cultural landscapes on Garua Island, Papua New Guinea”, Antiquity,
76(293): 766-776.
6179. Torres, Elías, 1981: Guía de arquitectura de Ibiza y Formentera (Islas Pitiusas) Barcelona:
La Gaya Ciencia.
6180. Torri, Michelguglielmo, 1990: Ethnicity and trade in Surat during the dual government era:
1759-1800, Indian Economic & Social History Review, Dec; vol. 27: pp. 377 - 404.
6181. Toso, Fiorenzo, 2002: Isole Tabarchine: gente, vicende e luoghi di un’avventura genovese
nel Mediterraneo, fotografie di Antonio Torchia, Recco, Genova: Le mani.
6182. Toth, A., 1995: Mauritius in Indian Ocean: five island countries H. Chapin Metz (ed.).
Wahington DC., pp. 89-136.
6183. Toullelan, P.Y.; 1982: Les Colons et l’agriculture a Tahiti dans la seconde moitie du xixeme
2009
CEHA 339
siecle, Journal de La Societe des Oceanistes, no 74-75, pp. 213-224.

6184. Toullelan, P. Y.; 1984: Le Coton Polynesien: Un Mythe Tenace, Journal de La Societe des
Oceanistes, no 79, pp. 165-182.
6185. Toullelan, Pierre-Yves et Bernard Gille, 1999: De la conquête à l’exil: histoire des Océaniens
et de leurs migrations dans le Pacifique, Papeete.
6186. Tournier, M., 1979: Entretiens. Revus Silex, numéro spécial sur les îles, n°14, p. 12-18.
6187. Tous Meliá, Juan, 1994: Santa Cruz de Tenerife a través de la cartografía: (1588-1899),
Santa Cruz de Tenerife: Museo Militar Regional de Canarias.
6188. Tous Meliá, Juan, 1996: El plan de las afortunadas islas del Reyno de Canarias y la isla de
San Borondón, [Santa Cruz de Tenerife]: Museo Militar Regional de Canarias; [Tenerife]:
Museo de Historia de Tenerife; [Las Palmas de Gran Canaria]: Casa de Colón de las
Palmas de Gran Canaria; [Canarias]: Caja General de Ahorros de Canarias.
6189. Tous Meliá, Juan, 1998: La Gomera a través de la cartografía: 1588-1899, [s.l.] Museo
Militar Regional de Canarias, [La Gomera], Cabildo Insular de la Gomera.
6190. Tousignant, Michel, 1998: Suicide in Small-Scale Societies, Transcultural Psychiatry, Jun
1998; vol. 35: pp. 291 - 306.
6191. Toussaint, Auguste, 1997: La route des îles, Contribution à l’histoire maritime des
Mascareignes, Éditions de l’École des hautes études en sciences sociales.
6192. Touwen, Jeroen, 2001: Extremes in the archipelago: trade and economic development in
the Outer Islands of Indonesia, Leiden: KITLV Press.
6193. Towle, Edward L., 1984: The Island microcosm, St. Thomas, U.S. Virgin Islands: Caribbean
Office.
6194. Townsend, John Kirk, 1999: Narrative of a journey across the Rocky Mountains, to the
Columbia River, and a visit to the Sandwich Islands, Chili, & c., with a scientific appendix,
introduction and annotation by George A. Jobanek, Corvallis: Oregon State University
Press.
6195. Trabelsi, études rassemblées par Mustapha, 2005: L’insularité, [publié par le] Centre de
recherches sur les littératures modernes et contemporaines, Clermont-Ferrand: Presses
universitaires Blaise Pascal, Centre de recherches sur les littératures modernes et
contemporaines, 63-Chamalières: Impr. Diazo.
6196. Trapero, Maximiano [compilador], 1989: Romancero tradicional canário, Islas Canarias:
Viceconsejería de Cultura y Deportes, Gobierno de Canarias.
6197. Trapero, Maximiano, 2007: Canarias y canario en el mundo, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria:
Ediciones del Cabildo de Gran Canaria.
6198. Trask, B. (n.d.). Research Report: A comparative research study of the stylistic differences
and functional similarities between the wooden battle and dance shields of East and
West New Britain. Disponível online em url: http://www.arts.uwaterloo.ca/ANTHRO/WNB/
Trask%20Research%20Report%20Text.htm. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009.
6199. Trask, H. K., 1983: Cultures in collision: Hawai’i & England 1778, PS, vol. 7(1), 1983: 91-
117.
6200. Trask, H. K., 1993: Lovely Hula Hands, In From a Native Daughter: Colonialism and
Sovereignity in Hawai’i, Monroe, Maine: Common Courage Press, 179-197.
6201. Trask, K. H., Hawaii; colonization and decolonisation, in A Hooper, et.al., eds, Class and
culture in the South Pacific, IPS/USP, 154-75,
2009
6202. Trenc, actes publiés par Eliseo, 2001: Au bout du voyage, L’ile, myth et realite, Reims:
Presses Universitaires de Reims; Centre de recherche VALS.
6203. Trias Mercant, Sebastià, 1992: Una historia de la antropología balear, Barcelona: Editorial
Boixareu Universitaria.
6204. Trichet, Jean (Editeur scienfitique); [et al], 2008: Environnement dans le Pacifique Sud,
Journal de la Société des océanistes, no 126-127, p. 5-229
6205. Trinkley, Michael editor, 1991: Further investigations of prehistoric and historic lifeways
on Callawassie and Spring Islands, Beaufort County, South Carolina, contributors Colin
Brooker ... [et al.], Columbia, S.C.: Chicora Foundation, [1991].
6206. Tripodi, Paolo, 2003: “General Matthei’s Revelation and Chile’s Role during the Falklands
War. A New Perspective on the Conflict in the South Atlantic”, in Journal of Strategic
Studies, 26:4, 108-23.
6207. Troin, Jean-François (Directeur scientifique); [et al], 2005: Îles et oasis, Annales de
géographie, juillet-août, vol. 114, no 644, p 339-461.
6208. Trompf, G. W., 1991,2004: Melanesian religion, Cambridge [England]; New York:
6209. Trompf, G. W., 1994: Payback: the logic of retribution in Melanesian religions, Cambridge,
UK; New York, NY, USA: Cambridge University Press.
6210. Trompf, G. W., 2006: Religions of Melanesia: a bibliographic survey, Westport, Conn.:
Praeger Publishers.
6211. Trompf, Garry W., 2008: Melanesian Religion and Christianity, The Melanesian Institute
(Goroka, Papua New Guinea).
6212. Trussel, Stephen, 1978, 1995-200: Kiribati Bibliography. Disponível online em url: http://
www.trussel.com/kir/gilbib.htm. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
6213. Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, 1981: Saipan: Micronesian Archaeological Survey,
Historic Preservation Office, Office of the High Commissioner.
6214. Truttmann, Philippe, 1993: Forts, tours et batteries des îles d’Hyères, photographies, Marc
Heller; documents, Service Historique de l’Armée de Terre, [Clermont-Ferrand]: Inventaire
Général SPADEM: Association pour le Patrimoine de Provence: Association Protée.
6215. Tryon, Darrell, Paul de Deckker, 1997: Identités en mutation dans le Pacifique à l’aube
du troisième millénaire.Hommage à Joël Bonnemaison, 1940-1997. Colloque tenu
à l’Ambassade d’Australie, Paris, 29 et 30 mai 1997, Iles et archipels n° 26, Presses
universitaires de Bordeaux.
6216. Tsai, H. M. eds., 2003: Islands of the World VIII, Changing Islands – Changing Worlds:
Proceedings (1), Kinmen, Taiwan & International Small Islands Studies Association, pp.
99-110.
6217. Tsai, H. M., 2003b: ‘Island Biocultural Assemblages – the Case of Kinmen Island’,
Geografiska Annaler, 85 B, No. 4, pp. 209-218.
6218. Tsai, Huei-Min, 2003a: Island Biocultural Assemblages: The Case of Kinmen Island,
Geografiska Annaler. Series B, Human Geography, Vol. 85, No. 4, Special Issue: Nature-
Society Interactions on Islands, pp. 209-218
6219. Tsai, Huei-Min, Eric Clark, 2003b: Nature-Society Interactions on Islands: Introduction,
Geografiska Annaler. Series B, Human Geography, Vol. 85, No. 4, Special Issue: Nature-
Society Interactions on Islands, pp. 187-189
2009
CEHA 341
6220. Tsakos, K., 2003: Samos: A Guide to the History and Archaeology, Athens.
6221. Tsartas, P. and Thanopoulou, M., 1995: A proposal of thinking the role of tourism socialisation
of Greek youth: the case of Ios and Serifos, The Greek Review of Social Research, 86,
pp.114-128.
6222. Tsartas, P., 1989: Socioeconomic Impacts of Tourism Development in the Cyclades,
Particularly on the Islands of Ios and Serifos from 1950-1980, Athens: EKKE, [in Greek].
6223. Tsartas, P., 1992: Socio-economic impacts of tourism on two Greek islands, Annals of
6224. Tsartas, P., 2003: Tourism development in Greek insular ad coastal areas: Sociocultural
changes and crucial policy issues, Journal of Sustainable Tourism, 11(2&3): 116-132.
6225. Tsartas, P., 1988: Different Types of Tourism Development in Different Groups of Islands in
the Cyclades: Causes and Consequences, Sociologia urbana e rurale, 26, pp. 167-180.
6226. Tsuruta, Bunshi, 1983: Saikai no Kirishitan bunka sōran: Amakusa Shimabara Nagasaki
Sotome Ōmura Hirado Ikitsuki Gotō: Nishi Kyūshū Kirishitan shi nyūmon, Hondo:
Amakusa Bunka Shuppansha.
6227. Tsuruta, Bunshi, 1986: Amakusa no rekishi kenkyū no ayumi, Hondo-shi, Amakusa Bunka
Shuppansha.
6228. Tuan, Yi-Fu, 1990: Topophilia: A Study of Environmental Perception, Attitudes and Values,
2, New York, Columbia University Press.
6229. Tucker, Terry, 1983: Bermuda: today and yesterday, 1503-1980s, London: R. Hale.
6230. Tudela Villalonga, Lluís, 2005: Catalunya, Mallorca i Gènova, 1336-1349: economía i
política, Palma de Mallorca: El Tall Editorial.
6231. Tuimaleali’ifano, Morgan: Fiji Oral Traditions (UNESCO Bibliography), United Nations
Education, Scientific And Cultural Organization, Disponível online em url: http://www.
upei.ca:80/~meincke/fijimyth.htm. Consulta em 5 de Agosto de 2009.
6232. Tunbridge, John, 2002: “Large Heritage Waterfronts on Small Tourist Islands: the case of
the Royal Naval Dockyard, Bermuda”, in International Journal of Heritage Studies, 8:1,
41-51
6233. Turner, Ann, 2001: Historical dictionary of Papua New Guinea, 2d ed. Canham,MD:
Scarecrow Press.
6234. Turner, Dennis, 1998: Peasant housing and holdings in a marginal area - medieval
settlement in the west highlands and islands of Scotland: some problems, In Fridrich,
Jan (ed.), Ruralia II (Památky archeologické - supplementum, 11) (Prague: Institute of
Archaeology, 1998), 71-77.
6235. Turner, H., 1988: ‘Christopher Buondelmonti and the Rise of the Isolario,’ Terrae Incognitae,
Vol. 19, pp. 11-28.
6236. Turner, Lucien M., 2008: An Aleutian ethnography, Fairbanks: University of Alaska Press.
6237. Turnock, D., 1982: The Historical geography of Scotland since 1707, Oslo: Scandinavian
University Press.
6238. Twain, Mark, 2000: ‘A Yankee at the court of Captain Cook’ [Exploration & exchange: a
South Seas anthology, 1680-1900]; ed. Jonathan Lamb, Vanessa Smith and Thomas
Nicholas. In Lamb, Jonathan; Smith, Vanessa; Thomas, Nicholas, 1960- (ed.), Exploration
& exchange: a South Seas anthology, 1680-1900 (Chicago (IL) and London: Chicago
University Press,), 275-91.
2009
6239. Twining, Mary A.; Baird, Keith E., 1980: “Introduction To Sea Island Folklife”, in Journal of
Black Studies, Jun; vol. 10: pp. 387 - 416.
6240. Twining, Mary A.; Baird, Keith E., 1980: “The Significance of Sea Island Culture”, in Journal
of Black Studies, Jun; vol. 10: pp. 379 - 386.
6241. Twining, Mary Arnold, 1985: “Movement and Dance on the Sea Islands”, in Journal of
Black Studies, vol. 15: pp. 463 - 479.
6242. Twining, Mary; Baird, Keith E., 1991: Sea Island roots: African presence in the Carolinas
and Georgia, with a foreword by John Henrik Clake, Trenton, N.J.: Africa World Press.
6243. Tyers, Pádraig, 2000: Blasket memories: the life of an Irish island community. Cork: Mercier
Press.
6244. Tyrie, G. R., 1933: Kaliai cattle project: land use potential assessment, Unpublished Report.
Department of Primary Industry Land Utilisation Section, Port Moresby.
6245. Tyrie, G. R., 1982: Lomogai plateau report: a reconnaisance of the Lomogai area, West New
Britain Province, Unpublished Report, Department of Primary Industry Land Utilisation
Section, Port Moresby.
6246. Tyrrell, Timothy J., Spaulding, lrving A., 1984: “A Survey of Attitudes Toward Tourism Growth
in Rhode Island”, in Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Research, Jan; vol. 8: pp. 22 - 33.
6247. Tyson, George F.; Highfield; Arnold R., editors. 1994: The Danish West Indian slave trade:
Virgin Islands perspectives, St. Croix, V.I.: Virgin Islands Humanities Council.
6248. Tyson, P., 2000: The Eighth Continent: Life, Death and Discovery in the Lost World of
Madagascar, William Morrow. New York.
6249. Uchida, Ruriko, 1989: Okinawa no kayō to ongaku = Songs and ballads in Okinawa:
ethnomusicological considerations, Tōkyō: Daiichi Shobō.
6250. Uhlmann, M., 1992: Australia, Vanuatu and the British connection, IPA Review, Vol 45, 4,
pp.48-50.
6251. Uí Ógáin, Ríonach, 1988: “Ceol ón mBlascaod”, in Béaloideas, 56, 179-219.
6252. Uí Shúilleabháin, Mhuiris, 2000: Ó Oileán go Cuilleán ó pheann Mhuiris Uí Shúilleanbháin;
editor Nuala Uí Aimhirgín, Baile Átha Cliath: Coiscéim.
6253. Underwood, R., 1985: Excursions into inauthenticity; the Chamorros of Guam, in M
Chapman, ed, Mobility and identity in the Island Pacific, special issue of Pacific.
6254. Underwood, R., 1996: The State of Guam’s agenda in Washington, in Isla; A journal of
Micronesian studies, 4, 1, 109-130.
6255. UNEP, 1998: Source book of alternative technologies for freshwater augmentation in small
island developing states, South Pacific Applied Geoscience Commission, International
Environmental Technology Centre, United Nations Environment Programme, and Water
Branch, United Nations Environment Programme, [Osaka, Japan], UNEP.
6256. Unesco, 1980: Historical relations across the Indian Ocean: report and papers of the
meeting of experts organized by Unesco at Port Louis, Mauritius, from 15 to 19 July
1974, Paris: Unesco.
6257. UNESCO, 1991: “Appel de Port-Louis en faveur des pays insulaires (1989)”. In UNESCO
(ed), Culture des îles et développement. Islands’ culture and development. Études
prospectives/Future-oriented studies, Paris, UNESCO.
6258. Unesco, 1991a: Culture des îles et développement. Paris, Unesco.
2009
CEHA 343
6259. Unesco, 1997: “Les îles, un autre monde”, Le Courrier de l’Unesco, décembre.
6260. UNESCO, Organisation Des Nations Unies Pour l’Education La Science Et La Culture –
Paris, France; 1981: Proceedings Of The Archipelago Conference, Karachi: Hamdard
Academy.
6261. UNESCO: Organisation des Nations Unies pour l’Education la Science et la Culture –
Paris, France; ACP: Groupe des Etats d’Afrique des Caraïbes et du Pacifique – Bruxelles,
Belgique; CEE: Communauté Economique Européenne CEGET: Centre d’Etude de
Géographie Tropicale, 1991: Culture des iles et developpement = Islands’ culture and
development, Paris: UNESCO.
6262. UNIFEM, 1998: Gender considerations in sectoral planning for Pacific Island planners in
agriculture, fisheries, and forestry, [prepared by UNIFEM Pacific Regional Office, with the
assistance of Pacific Planners], Suva, Fiji, United Nations Development Fund for Women
(UNIFEM), Pacific Office.
6263. United Nations, 1982: Migration, urbanization and development in South Pacific countries,
New York: United Nations.
6264. Universidade dos Açores 1989: Açores, uma experiência da insularidade: exposição
bibliográfica, Serviços de Documentaçao.
6265. Université du Pacifique sud, 1983: Perspectives du pacifique: problèmes et avenir des
peuples insulaires / Centre de l’Université du Pacifique Sud au Vanuatu et de l’Association
des sciences sociales du Pacifique Sud, Raiwaqa, Suva: Association des sciences
sociales de l’Université du Pacifique Sud.
6266. Université de la Réunion (Saint-Denis). service commun de la documentation, 1992 :
Bibliographie sélective [rédigée à l’occasion du] Colloque fécondité – insularité, organisé
par le conseil général de la Réunion du 11 au 15 mai 1922 / Service commun de la
documentation de l’Université des Antilles-Guyane, Service commun de la documentation
de l’Université de la réunion, Saint-Denis de la Réunion : S.C.D. de l’Université de la
Réunion.
6267. Untalan, Faye F., [et al.], 2004: “Stressors Associated with Pacific Islands Children
Diagnosed with Cancer Andsevere Blood Disorders”, in Journal of Pediatric Oncology
Nursing, vol. 21: pp. 40 - 50.
6268. UPEI, 2005: The Literature of Small Islands. A Selected Annotated Bibliography, Created
by the students of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island.
6269. UPM, sd: The UHM Pacific Collection, [One of the world first finest collections of Pacific
materials, with over 90,000 volumes relating to the islands of Melanesia, Polynesia, and
Micronesia], University of Hawai’ I. Disponível online em url: http://libweb.hawaii.edu/
libdept/pacific/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
6270. Urwin, Gregory J.W, 2002: Facing Fearful Odds: The Siege of Wake Island, University of
Nebraska Press.
6271. Uschtrin, Cornelia, Hans-Jürgen Cwik, 1999: Südpazifik, Inselstaaten und Territorien:
eine Auswahlbibliographie = South Pacific, island states and territories: a selected
bibliography, Hamburg: Deutsches Übersee-Institut, Übersee-Dokumentation, Referat
Asien und Südpazifik, Valdman, Albert, Arnold Highfield, edited by, 1980: International
Conference on Theoretical Orientations in Creole Studies (1979: St. Thomas, V.I.),
Theoretical orientations in Creole studies, New York: Academic Press.
6272. Va., Alexandria, 2000: Micronesia: a guide through the centuries, Close Up Foundation,
c2000.
2009
6273. Va’ai, S., 1995: Creative writing in west Polynesia; development themes and trends, in Lal
BV and Nelson H, eds, Lines across the sea, Brisbane, 1995, 213-24.
6274. Vaidik, Aparna, 2006: ‘Settling the Convict: Matrimony and Domesticity in the Andamans’,
Studies in History, [New Delhi], 22:2, 221-51
6275. Valido, Francisco; Maestre, Agapito; Agis, Domingo Fernández editores, 1993: El Proceso
de unidad europea y el resurgir de los nacionalismos, Madrid: Euroliceo; [Canarias]:
Ayuntamiento de Telde.
6276. Van den Bergh. J., 1992: Tourism development and natural environment: an economic-
ecological model for the Sporades islands. In: Van den Straaten, J. and Briassoulis, H.
(eds) Tourism and the Environment: Regional, Economic and Policy Issues. Dordrecht:
Kluwer, pp. 67-83.
6277. Van der Beek, Zita; Vellinga, Marcel, 2005: “Man the collector: Salvaging Andamanese and
Nicobarese culture through objects”, in Journal of the History of Collections, 17:2, 135-53
6278. Van der Bijl, Nicholas, 2007: Victory in the Falklands, Barnsley: Pen & Sword Military.
6279. Van der Bijl, Nicholas; Aldea, David, 2003: 5th Infantry Brigade in the Falklands War.
Barnsley: Leo Cooper / Pen & Sword.
6280. Van der Grijp, Paul, 1987: Terrains et perspectives, In l’ambivalence du progres:
contradictions dans le developpement economique et social aux iles tonga en polynesie
francaise, ORSTOM: Office de la Recherche Scientifique et Technique Outre Mer, Paris,
France, p. 117-128.
6281. Van der Kamp, Marck, 1989: J. M. Synge’s Tir na nÓg, In Barfoot, Cedric Charles; D’haen,
Theo, The clash of Ireland: literary contrasts and connections (DQR studies in literature,
4), Amsterdam/Atlanta: Rodopi, 118-124.
6282. van der Linden, Marcel, 2005: Reading Ethnography as Labour History: The Example of
the Latmul, East Sepik Province, Papua New Guinea, Labour history, 29, pp.197-213.
6283. van der Werf, Janko, 2008: We Live Like In A War, The Melanesian Institute (Goroka,
Papua New Guinea).
6284. Van Duzer, Chet, 2004: Floating islands: a global bibliography, Los Altos Hills (Ca.).
6285. Van Duzer, Chet, 2005: ‘Cartographic Invention: The Southern Continent on Vatican MS
Urb. Lat. 274, Folios 73v-74r (c.1530)’, Imago Mundi, 59:2, 193 – 222.
6286. Van Duzer, Chet, 2006: From Odysseus to Robinson Crusoe: A Survey of Early Western
Island Literature, Island Studies Journal, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 143-162.
6287. Van Duzer, Chet, 2006a: Addenda to Floating islands, a global bibliography with an edition
and translation of G.C. Munz’s Exercitatio academica de insulis natantibus (1711), Los
Altos HIlls, CA: Cantor Press.
6288. Van Duzer, Chet, 2008: “The History of the Azores as Insulae solis or Islands of the Sun in
16th Century Cartography,” Terrae Incognitae, 40, pp. 29-46.
6289. Van Duzer, Chet, 2008a: “The Voyage of Trezenzonio to the Great Island of the Solstice:
English Translation and Commentary,” Folklore, 119.3, pp. 335-345.
6290. Van Fossen, Anthony B., 1992: The international political economy of Pacific Islands
flags of convenience, [Brisbane], Qld., Australia: Centre for the Study of Australia-Asia
Relations, Faculty of Asian and International Studies, Griffith University.
6291. van Groningen a Stuling, D. H., 1980: “Migration of the Kilenge: a village study”, in Yagl-
Ambu (Papua New Guinea Journal of the Social Sciences and Humanities), 7(2): 33-46.
2009
CEHA 345
6292. Van Heekeren, Deborah, 2004: Don’t Tell the Crocodile, An Existentialist View of Melanesian
Myth, Critique of Anthropology, 24(4): 430-454.
6293. van Meijl, edited by Toon and Miedem, Jelle, 2004: Shifting images of identity in the Pacific,
Leiden: KITLV Press.
6294. Van Oosterzee, Penny, 1997: Where Worlds Collide: The Wallace Line. Ithaca: Cornell
University Press.
6295. Van Tilburg, Jo Anne, 1994: Easter Island: Archaeology, Ecology and Culture, Washington
D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press.
6296. Van Trease, H. (ed), 1995: Melanesian Politics: Stael Blong Vanuatu, Macmillan Brown
Centre for Pacific Studies, University of Canterbury, Christchurch and Institute of Pacific
Studies, University of the South Pacific, Suva.
6297. Vance, P. N., S. George and J. Wohuinangu, 1983: Sulfur in the agriculture of Papua New
Guinea. G. J. Blair and A. R. Till, Eds., Sulfur in South East Asian and South Pacific
Agriculture, UNE, pp. 180-190.
6298. Vanegas León, Brenda, 1998: Leyendas y tradiciones de Galápagos en la cultura y literatura
como expresión popular, Quito, Casa de la Cultura Ecuatoriana “Benjamín Carrión”.
6299. Vanney, Jean-René, 2008: Ces îles qui disparaissent. Le cas particulier d’Okinotorijima
(Japon, mer des Philippines), Cahiers (Les) d’Outre-mer, Octobre-Décembre 2008, vol.
61, no 244, p. 489-506.
6300. Vaquer, Onofre, 2007: El comerç marítim de Mallorca a la segona meitat del segle XVI,
Mallorca: El Tall.
6301. Varela, Consuelo, 2001: “Do território de Mayi às ilhas Filipinas”, in oceanos, nº 46, pp.
114 – 122.
6302. Vargas, Patricia; Cristino, Claudio e Izaurieta, Roberto, 2006: 1000 Años En Rapa NUI.
Arqueologia del Asentamiento, Santiago, Universidad de Chile, Editorial Universitaria.
6303. Varigny, Charles Victor Crosnier de, 1981: Fourteen years in the Sandwich Islands,
translated and with an introd. by Alfons L. Korn, Honolulu: University Press of Hawaii:
Hawaiian Historical Society.
6304. Varlack, Pearl; Harrigan, Norwell, 1992: American paradise: a profile of the Virgin Islands
of the United States, [St. Thomas, VI?]: Research & Consulting Services Ltd..
6305. Varma, Lalima, 1980: “Okinawa Before and Since Reversion”, in International Studies, Jan
1980; vol. 19: pp. 43 - 57.
6306. Vatin, sous la dir. de Nicolas et Gilles Veinstein, 2004: Insularités ottomanes, Paris:
Maisonneuve & Larose; [Istanbul]: Institut français d’études anatoliennes.
6307. Vaughan, D. L., 1990: Report on coastwatching radio stations in the Gilbert & Ellice Islands,
1941-45, Raumati South, New Zealand.
6308. Vaughan, R., Andriotis, K. and Wilkes, K., 2000: Characteristics of tourism employment:
The case of Crete. Paper Presented in the 7th ATLAS International Conference. North-
South: Contrasts and Connections in Global Tourism. June 18-21, Savonlinna, Finland.
6309. Vaughn, Bruce edited, 2002: The unraveling of Island Asia?: governmental, communal,
and regional instability, Westport, Conn.: Praeger.
6310. Vaughn, Robert V. edited by. 1992: Papers presented at the annual conferences of the
Society of Virgin Islands Historians held in St. Croix, U.S. Virgin Islands, 1988-1992,
Society of Virgin Islands Historians. Conference, Christiansted, St. Croix, U.S. Virgin
2009
Islands: Society of Virgin Islands Historians.

6311. Vaughn, Robert V., 1993: Biographical dictionary of the Virgin Islands: selected living and
deceased persons, Christiansted, St. Croix, Virgin Islands, U.S.A.: Aye-Aye Press.
6312. Vaxelaire, Daniel, 1999: Le grand livre de l’histoire de La Réunion, Sainte Clotilde.
6313. Vaxelaire, Daniel, 2004: Histoire de La Réunion, Sainte Clotilde, Réunion.
6314. Vedder, J.G., K.S. Pound, and S.Q. Boundy, 1986: Geology and offshore resources of
Pacific island arcs--central and western Solomon Islands, Houston, Tex., U.S.A., Circum-
Pacific Council for Energy and Mineral Resources; Tulsa, Okla.: Available from, AAPG
Bookstore.
6315. Vega, Bernardo editor, 2007: Dominican cultures: the making of a Caribbean society,
Princeton: Markus Wiener Publishers.
6316. Veiga, Manuel, 1998: Cabo Verde: insularidade e literatura, KARTHALA Editions.
6317. Veiga, Manuel, 1999: Diário das ilhas, [Cape Verde], Spleen.
6318. Velázquez Cabrera, Manuel, 1994: Resúmen histórico documentado de la autonomía de
Canarias, [prólogo de Bernardino Correa Viera], Islas Canarias: Gobierno de Canarias,
Viceconsejería de Cultura y Deportes.
6319. Velissariou, E., 1991: The Economic Impacts of Tourism on Crete. (Die wirtschaften
Effekte des Tourismous dargestell am beispiel Kretas) PhD thesis. Frankfurt: University
of Munchen, Peter Lang, [in German].
6320. Vellas, dir. par François, et Patrick Hervé, 1989: Les Économies insulaires: stratégies de
développement des économies insulaires à pouvoir d’achat élevé: actes du colloque de
Saint-Denis de la Réunion, 7-10 novembre 1988 / [organisé par l’] Association pour la
recherche et la technologie à La Réunion], Saint-Denis: Conseil régional de la Réunion.
6321. Vellas, F.; Cauet, Jean Michel, 1997: Le Tourisme et les iles, Paris: L’Harmattan.
6322. Venable, A., 1999: Regional integration agreements: a force for convergence or divergence
? Washington, D.C., Banque Mondiale.
6323. Venables, Stephen, 1991: Island at the edge of the world: a South Georgia odyssey,
London: Hodder & Stoughton.
6324. Venbrux, Eric, 1995: A death in the Tiwi islands: conflict, ritual, and social life in an Australian
aboriginal community, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press.
6325. Vennetier, Pierre (dir.); Huetz de Lemps, C., 1991: Eau et amenagement dans les regions
inter-tropicales, 2, In Evolution des techniques d’irrigation aux iles Hawaii, Talence:
CEGET, p. 79-94.
6326. Vennetier, Pierre (dir.); Lesourd, Michel, 1991: Eau et amenagement dans les regions
inter-tropicales, 2, In L’eau agricole en Republique du Cap-Vert: un enjeu economique et
politique, Talence: CEGET, p. 17-38.
6327. Veracini, Lorenzo, 2003: ‘The “Shadows of the Colonial Period” to “Times of Sharing”:
History Writing in and about New Caledonia/Kanaky, 1969-1998’, Journal of Pacific
History, 38, 3, pp. 331-352.
6328. Vergara, Francesco, 1994: Società e giustizia nelle Isole Eolie (secc. XVI-XVIII): i processi
penali della Curia Vescovile di Lipari, Soveria Mannelli: Rubbettino.
6329. Verhaar, John W.M., 1990: Melanesian pidgin and Tok Pisin: proceedings of the First
International Conference of Pidgins and Creoles in Melanesia, Amsterdam; Philadelphia:
J. Benjamins Pub. Co..
2009
CEHA 347
6330. Vérin, Emmanuel Nirina, 1999: Archives de la révolution comorienne (1975-1978): le verbe
contre la coutume, Paris; Montréal: L’Harmattan.
6331. Vérin, Emmanuel Nirina, 1999a: Histoire de la révolution comorienne: décolonisation,
idéologie et séisme social, Paris; Montréal: L’Harmattan.
6332. Vérin, Pierre, 1986: The History of Civilization in North Madagascar, Brookfield, Vermont:
Ashgate.
6333. Verin, Pierre, 1994: Les Comores, Paris: Karthala.
6334. VERÍSSIMO, Nelson, 1993, «Madeira», in Vinte Anos de Historiografia Ultramarina
Portuguesa. 1972-1992, MATOS, Artur Teodoro de, THOMAZ, Luís Filipe F. Reis, Lisboa,
25.
6335. Verlinden, Charles, 1989: Henri le navigateur songea-t-il a créer un «etat» insulaire?, in
Revista Portuguesa de História, XII, Coimbra, pp. 281-292.
6336. Verlomme, Hugo, David König et Valérie Paillé, 2009: Iles tragiques: histoires terribles et
magnifiques, Paris: Arthaud.
6337. Vermeij, Eef, 2005: WWW-VL History: Indonesia, The International Institute for Social
History (IISH). Disponível online em url: http://www.iisg.nl/w3vlindonesia/. Consulta em
6338. Vernière, Y., 1988: ‘Iles mythiques chez Diodore de Sicile,’ in F. Jouan & B. Deforge, eds.,
Peuples et Pays Mythiques, Paris, Les Belles Lettres, pp. 159-167.
6339. Veth, Peter [et al.], 2007: The archaeology of Montebello Islands, North-West Australia:
late Quaternary foragers on an arid coastline, Oxford, England: Archaeopress.
6340. Vickers, Adrian, Oey, Eric (Editor), 1995: Bali, Singapore: Periplus Editions. pp.
26–35Vickers, Adrian, 2005: A History of Modern Indonesia, Cambridge University Press.
6341. Vieira, Alberto, 1987: O Comércio Inter-insular (Madeira, Açores e Canárias) nos Séculos
XV e XVI, Funchal, CEHA
6342. Vieira, Alberto, 1992: Portugal y Las Islas del Atlântico, Madrid, Mapfre
6343. Vieira, Alberto, 1995: As Ilhas Atlânticas, Lisboa, CTT.
6344. Vieira, Alberto, 1995a: Guia para a investigação e História das ilhas atlânticas, Funchal,
CEHA.
6345. VIEIRA, Alberto, 1995, «Madeira», in Guia para a História e Investigação das Ilhas
Atlânticas, Funchal, CEHA, pp. 57-72.
6346. Vieira, Alberto (comps.), 1998: Obras clásicas para la historia de las Islas del Atlántico
[electronic resource] Madrid: Fundación Histórica Tavera: DIGIBIS: Mapfre Mutualidad.
6347. Vieira, Alberto, 1997, Os arquivos insulares, atlântico e Caraíbas, [actas da Sessão de
Arquivos do IV Colóquio Internacional de História das Ilhas Atlânticas, Canária, Gran
Canaria/Tenerife, 9 a 14 outubro de 1995, coordenação da edição, Alberto Vieira,
Colóquio Internacional de História das Ilhas Atlânticas (4th: 1995: Tenerife, Canary
Islands) Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e Cultura, Centro de Estudos de
História do Atlântico.
6348. Vieira, Alberto, 1999: Descobrir Atlântico nos séculos XVIII e XIX, in Boletim do Instituto
Histórico da Ilha Terceira, vol. LVII, Angra do Heroísmo, IHIT, pp. 353-392.
6349. Vieira, Alberto (coordenação), 2000: As Ilhas e o Brasil, Funchal, CEHA.
2009
6350. Vieira, Alberto, 2001: A Fortuna das Afortunadas, in Oceanos, 46 (Abril/Junho), pp.56-83.
6351. Vieira, Alberto, 2001a: As Migrações e os Descobrimentos Portugueses. Séculos XV e
XVI, in Imigração e Emigração nas ilhas, Funchal, CEHA, pp.27-62.
6352. Vieira, Alberto, 2001b: Las Islas y el Mundo Atlântico 1580-1648, in Bethéncourt Massieu,
Antonio, Coloquio Internacional. Canarias y el Atlântico 1580-1648, Las Palmas, Casa
de Colon, pp.309-347.
6353. Vieira, Alberto, 2002: The Fortune of the Fortunate. The Islands and the Atlantic System,
Atlantic History. History of the Atlantic system 1580-1830, Cottingen-Vandenhoeck &
Ruprecht, pp199-248.
6354. Vieira, Alberto, 2004: As Ilhas Atlânticas. Para uma visão Dinâmica da Sua História, in
Anuario de Estudios Atlánticos, nº.50, vol.I, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Casa de Colón,
pp219-264.
6355. Vieira, Alberto, 2004a: Cana-de-açúcar e meio Ambiente nas ilhas, in Islenha, nº.34
(Janeiro-Junho), Funchal, DRAC, pp.121-134.
6356. Vieira, Alberto, 2005: A Madeira na Rota das Ciências e das Investigações Científicas,, in As
Ilhas e a Ciência. História da Ciência e das Técnicas. Actas do I Seminário Internacional,
Funchal, CEHA, pp. 23-36.
6357. Vieira, Alberto, 2005a: As cidades Atlânticas e a Ciência in As Ilhas e a Ciência. História
da Ciência e das Técnicas. Actas do I Seminário Internacional, Funchal, CEHA, 2005,
pp.109-130.
6358. Vieira, Alberto, 2006: Os Municípios das Cidades Insulares Atlânticas. Séculos XV a XVI,
in História do Municipalismo. Poder Local e Pode Central no Mundo Ibérico, Funchal,
CEHA, pp.17-38.
6359. Vieira, Alberto, 2007: O Arquipélago da Madeira no Quadro da Economia Europeia e
Atlântica, in Documentos Congresuales. Economia e Insularidade (siglos XIV- XX), T.1,
La Laguna, 261-287.
6360. Vieira, Alberto, 2008: As Ilhas e o Sistema Atlântico, in Anuario de Estudios Atlánticos,
n.54-1, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Casa de Colón, pp.207-222.
6361. Vieira, Alberto, 2008a: Das Ilhas Jardins aos Jardins das Ilhas, Jardins do Mundo. Discursos
e Práticas, Coordenação de José Eduardo Franco e Ana Cristina Costa Gones, Lisboa,
Gradiva, pp.91-106.
6362. Vieira, Alberto, 2009: A emigração portuguesa nos Descobrimentos. Do litoral às ilhas,
Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 15, Nos. ½.
6363. Vieira, Francine, 1998: “La caboverdianidade entre mythe et réalité: déconstruction
identitaire ou condition minoritaire parmi les migrants capverdiens en Europe”, in Des
protestantismes en Lusofonie Catholique, p. 55-65.
6364. Vienne, Bernard, 1985: “Nouvelles Calédonie 1985: la fin du colonialisme ?” in Les Temps
Modernes, 41 (464), p. 1602-1611.
6365. Vieux, Caroline; Chancerelle, Yannick; Aubanel, Annie; Salvat, Bernard, 2008: Les
modifications de la ligne de rivage dans les îles de la Société (Polynésie française) :
un indicateur des pressions anthropiques en zone côtière, Journal de la Société des
océanistes, 2008, no 126-127, p. 59-66.
6366. Vieweg, B., 1990: Big Fellow Man: Muschelgeld und Südseegeister; Authentische Berichte
aus Deutsch-Neuguinea 1906-1909, Stuttgart, Verlag Josef Margraf Scientific Books.
6367. Vieyra, Enrique, 1985: An Annotated Legal Chronology of the Malvinas (Falklands) Islands
2009
CEHA 349
Controversy, Córdoba.
6368. Viggiano, Alfredo, 1998: Lo specchio della Repubblica: Venezia e il governo delle isole
Ionie nel ‘700, Caselle di Sommacampagna (Verona), Cierre.
6369. Vigla, Jean-Louis, 1995: Evadés d’Aurigny: hiver, 1942-1943, Cherbourg: Isoète.
6370. Vigla, Jean-Louis, 2002: Histoire d’un camp nazi: l’île d’Aurigny (Alderney). Saint-Cyr-sur-
Loire: A. Sutton.
6371. Vigne, J.-D. (dir.), 1997: Îles, vivre entre ciel et mer, Paris, Nathan/Muséum national
d’histoire naturelle.
6372. Vigneau, J. Y., 2007: Speaking of islands. Artist statement from visual art exhibit,
presented at the 3rd. International Conference on Small Island Cultures: Cultures and
the construction of islandness. Charlottetown, Prince Edward Island: University of Prince
Edward Island & Institute of Island Studies.
6373. Vigneron, Emmanuel, 1985: “Victor Hugo et les îles Marquises ou le poète, le géographe
et la politique” in Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Océaniennes, 19 (10), pp. 55-66.
6374. Vigneron, Emmanuel, 1985: Recherches sur l’histoire des attitudes devant la mort en
Polynésie française, Toulouse: EHESS, Th. 3e cycle: Sci. Soc. Disponível online em url:
http://horizon.documentation.ird.fr/exl-doc/pleins_textes/pleins_textes_7/carton05/25014.
pdf. Consulta em 15 de Agosto de 2009.
6375. Vigneron, E.; Simon, V.; Jeannette, F., 1989: Problemes de sante dans un territoire insulaire
: les evacuations sanitaires en Polynesie francaise, In: La desserte en soins medicaux:
variations socio-geographiques, Cahiers Geos, no 16, pp. 34-42.
6376. Vigneron, Emmanuel, 1992: Mesures du developpement: la viabilite des iles du Pacifique
Sud, Espace Populations Societes, no 3, pp. 355-369.
6377. Vignoli, G., 1981: L’irredentismo italiano in Corsica durante la seconda guerra mondiale.
La sentenza di condanna a morte degli irredentisti corsi, Ipotesi, Rapallo.
6378. Vigus, T. 1995. Regenerating logged forests in Papua New Guinea. Tropical Forest,
Update, 5(1): 6-7.
6379. Vigus, T., 1995: Reforestation: Naturally! Canberra, Project Design and Management and
ANUTECH, Tom Bigus, Kandrian Gloucester Integrated Development Project, Dr. Gary
Simpson, Project Design and Management.
6380. Vilatte, S., 1989: ‘L’Insularité dans la Pensée Grecque: Au Carrefour de la Géographie, de
l’Ethnographie, de l’Histoire,’ Revue Historique, Vol. 281, No. 569, pp. 3-13.
6381. Vilatte, S., 1991: L’Insularité dans la Pensée Grecque, Paris, Diffusé par les Belles Lettres.
6382. Vilgon, Lars, 1994: Maldive and Minicoy Islands Bibliography with the Laccadive Islands.
Published by the author. Stockholm.
6383. Villacrés M., Jorge W., 1985: Las ambiciones internacionales por las Islas, Guayaquil,
Ecuador, Casa de la Cultura Ecuatoriana “Benjamín Carrión”, Núcleo del Guayas.
6384. Villain-Gandossi, Christiane (dir.); [et al], 2001: Les petits systèmes isolés face aux risques
naturels: l’exemple des Antilles, Paris: CTHS.
6385. Villain-Gandossi, Christiane, Louis Durteste, Salvino Busuttil, 1995: Méditerranée, mer
ouverte, Colloque international, Marseille, 21-23 sept. 1995, Éditions de la Maison des
sciences de l’homme, Paris.
6386. Villecroix, Pascal, 1998: L’imaginaire spatial et la micro-insularité: l’exemple de Nosy-
Boraha (île de Sainte-Marie) et Mayotte, Saint-Denis: IUFM, Extr. de «Expressions: revue
2009
de recherches disciplinaires et pédagogiques, no 11, mai 1998.

6387. Vinci, Felice, 2006: Omero nel Baltico. English The Baltic origins of Homer’s epic tales: the
Iliad, the Odyssey, and the migration of myth, Vt.: Inner Traditions.
6388. Virassamy, sous la dir. de Georges, 2004: L’entreprise insulaire: moyens et contraintes:
actes du colloque du 29 novembre 2002 / [organisé par le] Centre d’études et de
recherches juridiques en droit des affaires, CERDJA, Faculté de droit et d’économie de
Martinique, Université des Antilles et de la Guyane, Paris; Budapest; Torino: l’Harmattan.
6389. Vitousek, Peter M.; Loope, Lloyd L.; Adsersen, Henning (eds.), 1995: Islands: biological
diversity and ecosystem function, New York: Springer-Verlag.
6390. Vizetelly, Henry, 1992: Facts about port and madeira: with notices of the wines vintaged
around Lisbon, and the wines of Tenerife, with one hundred illustrations, chiefly from
sketches by Ernest A. Vizetelly, Baltimore: Bacchus Press.
6391. Vogae, B., 1996: “West New Britain provincial goverment development policies”,
D. Gladman, D. Mowbray and J. Duguman, Eds. From Rio to Rai: Environment and
Development in Papua New Guinea up to 2000 and beyond Volume 1: From Hearts and
Minds, Port Moresby, University of Papua New Guinea Press, pp. 109-113.
6392. Vogt, J., 1995: Les effets sur la nature du seisme antillais du 8 fevrier 1843, In: Iles
tropicales, Les Cahiers D’Outre Mer, vol. vol. 48, no 191, p. p. 421-425.
6393. Vogt, Norbert B., 1991: Faroer: Bibliographie des deutschsprachigen Schrifttums,
Leverkusen: Literaturverlag Norden.
6394. Vogt, Norbert B., Uwe Kordeck, 1997: Works in English from and about the Faroe Islands:
an annotated bibliography, Tórshavn: Føroya fróðskaparfelag.
6395. Voisset, [sous la dir. de] Georges, 2003: L’imaginaire de l’archipel: [actes du colloque
pluridisciplinaire, Université des Antilles et de la Guyane, campus de Schoelcher, 13-15
mars 2000] / [organisé par le CRELIC, Centre de recherches en littérature compare],
Paris: Éd. Karthala.
6396. Voisset, Georges, 2008: Les lèvres du monde: littératures comparées de la Caraïbe à
l’Archipel Malais, Bécherel: Les Perséides.
6397. von den Steinen, Karl, 1997-1999: Mythes marquisiens, vol. I-III, Papeete.
6398. von den Steinen, Karl, 2005: Mythes Marquisiens, éd. revue et augmentée, Papeete.
6399. Von Hauenschild, Gerhard, 1982: Attitudes and perceptions towards casino gambling in
Caribbean destinations: Bahamas, Puerto Rico, Barbados, US Virgin Islands, Barbados,
W.I.: Caribbean Tourism Research and Development Centre.
6400. Vorlaufer, K., 1991: Die Seychellen: Tourismus als Entwicklungsoption fur einen insularen
Kleinstaat, Afrika Spectrum, vol. vol. 26, no 2, p. p. 221-255. Electronic Text Centre, the
Victoria University of Wellington Library. Disponível online em url: http://www.nzetc.org/
index.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
6401. VVAA., 1982: II Jornadas de Estudios Económicos Canarios: la pesca en Canarias,
Jornadas de Estudios Económicos Canarios (2nd: Universidad de La Laguna), Santa
Cruz de Tenerife: Secretariado de publicaciones, Universidad de La Laguna.
6402. VVAA., 1986: Actes du 1er Colloque international francophone de gérontologie des îles de
l’océan Indien: île de la Réunion, 2-3-4 juillet 1986, île Maurice, 7-8 juillet 1986. Colloque
international francophone de gérontologie des îles de l’océan Indien (1st: 1986: Réunion
and Mauritius, [Saint-Denis?], Société gérontologique de l’île de la Réunion.
6403. VVAA., 1987: I Jornadas de História de Fuerteventura e Lanzarote. Homenaje a Francisco
2009
CEHA 351
Navarro Artiles, Tomo I. Historia y Geografia, T. II. Arqueologia, Arte y Literatura, Puerto
del Rosario, Puerto del Rosario: Cabildo Insular de Fuerteventura: Cabildo Insular de
Lanzarote.
6404. VVAA., 1988: 1ª Jornadas de Estudio Canarias-Europa: 10/11 junio de 1988, Las Palmas
de Gran Canaria, Centro de Estudios e iniciativas sociales Sansofe.
6405. VVAA., 1988: Energy for islands: proceedings of an international conference (Energy for
Islands: Opportunities for British Science, Technology and Industry), organized by the
Society for Underwater Technology and held in London, UK, 10 December.
6406. VVAA., 1988: Problèmes particuliers des pays insulaires en developpement, Rapport de la
réunion du groupe d’experts sur les pays en développement, réunion tenue à Malte les
24 et 25 mai 1988, Unctad/ST/LDC/9.
6407. VVAA., 1989: Actes du colloque Territoires et Sociétés insulaires, Brest, 15-17 novembre,
Collection Recherche et Environnement, n° 36.
6408. VVAA., 1990: II colóquio Internacional de história da Madeira, Funchal, Setembro de 1989,
Funchal, Comissão Nacional para a Comemoração dos Descobrimentos Portugueses.
6409. VVAA., 1990: II Jornadas de Historia de Lanzarote y Fuerteventura, Tomo I. Historia,
Tomo II. Geografia, Arte, Prehistoria y Linguística, Arrecife, Servicio de Publicaciones del
Cabildo Insular de Lanzarote.
6410. VVAA., 1990: III Jornadas de Estudios sobre Fuerteventura y Lanzarote, Tomo I. Historia
y Geografia, tomo II. Prehistoria, Arqueologia, Etnologia, Arte, Lengua. Tomo III. Archivos
y bibliotecas, Puerto del Rosario, Cabildo Insular de Fuerteventura: Cabildo Insular de
Lanzarote.
6411. VVAA., 1991: Uncle Sam in Micronesia: Social benefits, social costs, papers from the Ninth
Annual Social Work Conference, Area Research Center, University of Guam.
6412. VVAA., 1992: Actes du Colloque International de Saint Denis de la Réunion, L’insularité.
Thematique et Represenations, Paris, L’Hamarttan.
6413. VVAA., 1992: Ile des merveilles. Mirage, miroir, mythe, «Actes du colloque de Cerisy du
2-12 août «, Paris: L’Harmattan.
6414. VVAA., 1992: Les actes du Colloque international fécondité & insularité: publications
intégrales: Saint-Denis de la Réunion, du 11 au 15 mai 1992, Colloque international
Fécondité & insularité (1992 : Saint-Denis de la Réunion), [Saint-Denis, La Réunion]:
Conseil général de la Réunion.
6415. VVAA., 1992: Primer Congreso Internacional de Historia Económica y Social de la Cuenca
del Caribe, 1763-1898, Congreso Internacional de Historia Económica y Social de la
Cuenca del Caribe, 1763-1898 (1st: 1987: San Juan, P.R.) San Juan de Puerto Rico:
Centro de Estudios Avanzados de Puerto Rico y el Caribe.
6416. VVAA., 1993: As sociedades insulares no contexto das inter-influências culturais do séc.
XVIII, Funchal, CEHA.
6417. VVAA., 1993: III colóquio Internacional de história das Ilhas Atlânticas. Actas, Funchal,
Secretaria Regional do Turismo e Cultura - Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico.
6418. VVAA., 1993: V Jornadas de Estudios sobre Fuerteventura y Lanzarote: 23-27 de septiembre
de 1991, Puerto del Rosario, Puerto del Rosario: Cabildo Insular de Fuerteventura:
6419. VVAA., 1994: Ē Chartographēsē tou Hellēnikou paraliou kai nēsiōtikou chōrou: praktika
tou ēbdomou diēthnous symposiou tēs IMCoS, Athēna 6-8 Oktōvriou 1989 = The
2009
Cartography of the shores and islands of Greece: proceedings of the IMCoS seventh
international symposium, Athens 6-8 October 1989. Athēna: Olkos.
6420. VVAA., 1994: Infante e as ilhas, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e Cultura- Centro
de Estudos de História do Atlântico.
6421. VVAA., 1995, “O Mundo do Infante”, Congresso, in Boletim do Instituto Histórico da Ilha
Terceira, vol LIII, Angra do Heroísmo, IHIT.
6422. VVAA., 1995: Homenaje a Antonio de Béthencourt Massieu, Las Palmas de Gran Canaria:
Ediciones del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria, 1995, 3 tomos.
6423. VVAA., 1995: IV Jornadas de Estudios sobre Lanzarote y Fuerteventura, Arrecife: Servicio
de Publicaciones del Cabildo Insular de Lanzarote.
6424. VVAA., 1995: Les organisations internationales à vocation régionale, Paris, La
Documentation Française.
6425. VVAA., 1995: VI Jornadas de Estudios sobre Lanzarote y Fuerteventura: 26-30 de
septiembre de 1994, Arrecife: Servicio de Publicaciones del Cabildo Insular de Lanzarote;
Fuerteventura: Cabildo Insular.
6426. VVAA., 1996: Escravos com e sem açúcar, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e
Cultura- Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico.
6427. VVAA., 1997: “História das Ilhas Atlânticas” (Arte, Comércio, Demografia, Literatura),
in Actas do IV Coloquio Internacional de História das Ilhas Atlânticas, Canárias, Cran
CanariaTenerife 9 a 14 de Outubro de 1995), 2 vols Funchal, CEHA.
6428. VVAA., 1997: “Os Arquivos Insulares” (Atlântico e Caraíbas), in Actas da sessão de
Arquivos do IV Coloquio Internacional de História das Ilhas Atlânticas, Canárias, Cran
Canaria Tenerife 9 a 14 de Outubro de 1995), Funchal, CEHA.
6429. VVAA., 1997: Documentação e Arquivos insulares, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do
Turismo e Cultura- Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico.
6430. VVAA., 1998: O Faial e a Periferia Açoriana nos Séculos XV a XX, (Actas do II Colóquio,
realizado em Maio de 1997 nas ilhas do Faial e de S. Jorge), Núcleo Cultural da Horta.
6431. VVAA., 1998: Os vinhos licorosos e a História, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e
6432. VVAA., 1999: Después de 1898: Identidad nacional, racial y social en Cuba, España,
Filipinas y Puerto Rico, Simposio Internacional in Islas e Imperios/Islands and Empires,
no.2 Primavera, Barcelona, Univ. Pompeo Fabra.
6433. VVAA., 1999: História e o meio ambiente - o impacto da expansão europeia. Funchal,
6434. VVAA., 1999: IV Colóquio Internacional de história das Ilhas Atlânticas.
6435. VVAA., 1999: VIII Jornadas de Estudios sobre Lanzarote y Fuerteventura: 22-25
septiembre 1997, Arrecife: Servicio de Publicaciones del Cabildo Insular de Lanzarote,
1999
6436. VVAA., 1999:VII Jornadas de Estudios sobre Lanzarote y Fuerteventura: 22-25 septiembre
1997, Arrecife: Servicio de Publicaciones del Cabildo Insular de Lanzarote.
6437. VVAA., 2000: História e Tecnologia do Açúcar, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e
6438. VVAA., 2000: IX Jornadas de estudios sobre Fuerteventura y Lanzarote: 20-24 de
septiembre de 1999, Puerto del Rosario: Cabildo Insular de Fuerteventura; [Arrecife]:
2009
CEHA 353

6439. VVAA., 2000: V Colóquio Internacional de história das Ilhas Atlânticas, Funchal, Secretaria
Regional do Turismo e Cultura- Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico.
6440. VVAA., 2000: V Colóquio Internacional de História das Ilhas do Atlântico, “O Papel das
Ilhas do Atlântico na Criação do Contemporâneo”, in Actas do Congresso realizado erm
Angra do Heroismo de 24 a 28 de MAio de 1999, Angra do Heroismo, Angra do Heroísmo,
Instituto Histórico da Ilha Terceira.
6441. VVAA., 2001: Emigração e Imigração nas ilhas, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo
e Cultura- Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico.
6442. VVAA., 2001: II Seminário Internacional: História do município no mundo Português,
Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e Cultura - Centro de Estudos de História do
Atlântico.
6443. VVAA., 2002: História e Açúcar, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e Cultura -
Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico.
6444. VVAA., 2003: III Seminário Internacional: O Município no Mundo Português, Funchal,
6445. VVAA., 2003: III Simpósio da Associação Internacional de História e Civilização da Vinha
e do Vinho, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e Cultura - Centro de Estudos de
6446. VVAA., 2003: VI Colóquio Internacional de história das Ilhas Atlânticas, Santa Catarina
IHGST.
6447. VVAA., 2004: III Seminário Internacional de História do Açúcar, em cooperação com
AIHCA, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e Cultura- Centro de Estudos de
6448. VVAA., 2004: Proceedings of the Nature of the Islands: a conference on Caribbean island
natural history in memory of Peter R. Bacon [Port of Spain, Trinidad?]: Trinidad & Tobago
Field Naturalists’ Club.
6449. VVAA., 2004: X Jornadas de Estudios sobre Lanzarote y Fuerteventura 24 al 18 de
septiembre 2001, Arrecife: Cabildo de Lanzarote; [Puerto del Rosario]: Cabildo Insular
de Fuerteventura, T. I. Historia-Geografía. T. II. Hª del Arte, Prehistoria-Arqueología,
Lengua-Literatura
6450. AAVV, 2005: As Ilhas e a História da Ciência, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e
6451. VVAA., 2005: XI Jornadas de estudios sobre Fuerteventura y Lanzarote: 22-26 de
septiembre de 2003, Caleta de Fuste, La Antigua, Puerto del Rosario: Servicio de
Publicaciones del Cabildo de Fuerteventura; [Arrecife]: Servicio de Publicaciones del
Cabildo de Lanzarote
6452. VVAA., 2006: As Cidades do Vinho, Funchal, Secretaria Regional do Turismo e Cultura-
Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico.
6453. VVAA., 2007: Economía e insularidad (siglos XIV-XX), Recoge los trabajos presentados
en el Seminario Internacional celebrado en la Laguna los días 17, 18 y 19 de octubre de
2005, La Laguna, Servicio de Publicaciones, Universidad de La Laguna.
6454. VVAA., 2007: Interculturalidad, insularidad, globalización, San Cristóbal de La Laguna,
[XI Congreso AES en Tenerife, La Laguna, 3-5 noviembre 2004] Asociación Española
de Semiótica Simposio Internacional 11º 2004, La Laguna, Servicio de Publicaciones,
2009
Universidad de La Laguna.
6455. VVAA., 2008: Coloquios de Historia Canario Americana, 1976-2006, “Casa de Colon”,
Las Palmas de Gran Canaria, Contine Dvd con todas las Ponencias de los 17 Coloquios
editados [ 35 volumes dos Colóquios realizados entre 1976-2006].
6456. VVAA., 2008: XII Jornadas de Estudios sobre Lanzarote y Fuerteventura 2008: septiembre,
2005, Arrecife: Servicio de Publicaciones del Cabildo Lanzarote.
6457. VVAA., 2009: VII Colóquio Internacional de história das Ilhas Atlânticas, Funchal, CEHA
(em CDROM).
6458. VVAA., 1987: Verbali delle riunioni tenute dal Capo di SM Generale, Vol. IV (1° janeiro - 7
setembro 1943), Ufficio Storico Stato Maggiore Esercito, Roma.
6459. Waddell, E., Naidu, V. and Hau’ofa, E. (eds) 1993: A New Oceania: Redefining our Sea of
Islands, SSED, University of the South Pacific, in association with Beake House.
6460. Wagner, edited by Warren L. and V.A. Funk, 1995: Hawaiian biogeography: evolution on a
hot spot archipelago, Washington: Smithsonian Institution Press.
6461. Wagner, Wilfried, 1989: Mentawai: Identität im Wandel auf indonesischen Ausseninseln,
Bremen: Übersee-Museum Bremen: Geographische Gesellschaft Bremen: Universität
Bremen.
6462. Wagner-Wright, S., 1992: “When unity is torn asunder; the distressing case of Thomas and
Lucia Holman”, in PS, 15, 2, 39-60.
6463. Wahlroos, Sven, 1989: “HMS Bounty: the Bloodless Mutiny” in Pacific Islands Monthly,
59:16, 54.
6464. Waiko, J. D.; [et al], 1985: Mobility and identity in the Island Pacific, Pacific Viewpoint, vol.
26, no 1, pp. 1-371.
6465. Waiko, John, 1995: land: customary ownership vs. state control in Papua New Guinea and
Australia, Sydney: Centre for South Pacific Studies, University of New South Wales.
6466. Waite, Deborah, 1987: Artefacts from the Solomon Islands in the Julius L. Brenchley
Collection London, Published for the Trustees of the British Museum by British Museum
Publications.
6467. Waldren, William H., 1982: Balearic prehistoric ecology and culture: the excavation and
study of certain caves, rock shelters and settlements, Oxford, England: B.A.R..
6468. Waldren, William H. ...[et al.], edited by, 1984: Early settlement in the Western Mediterranean
Islands and their peripheral areas, Deya Conference of Prehistory (1982?: Deya, Balearic
Islands), Oxford, England : B.A.R..
6469. Waldren, William H. 1998: The Beaker culture of the Balearic Islands: an inventory of
evidence from caves, rock shelters, settlements and ritual sites, Oxford, Archaeopress.
6470. Waldrenedited, W.H. and J.A. Ensenyat, 2002: World islands in prehistory: international
insular investigations: V Deia International Conference of Prehistory /.Deia International
Conference of Prehistory (5th: 2001: Museo Arqueológico y Centro de Investigaciones
de Deia) Oxford: Archaeopress.
6471. Waldroup, Heather, 1998: Without Mythological or Allegorical Excuse: Gauguin’s
Representation of Tahitian Women in the Contact Zone, MA thesis, Department of Art
History, Florida State University.
6472. Walker, Isaiah Helekunihi, 2005: Terrorism or Native Protest? The Hui ‘O He’e Nalu and
Hawaiian Resistance to Colonialism, Pacific Historical Review, November Vol. 74, No. 4,
2009
CEHA 355
Pages 575–602.
6473. Wallace, Alfred Russel, 2000(originally published 1869): The Malay Archipelago, Singapore:
Periplus Press.
6474. Wallace, D. A.; Dent, V. F., 1972: “Investigation of Langila Craters, West New britain - July
1972”, in Note on investigation 72-027, Dept of Lands, Surveys and Mines.
6475. Wallin, Paul, 1993: Ceremonial stone structures: the archaeology and ethnohistory of the
Marae Complex in the Society Islands, French Polynesia, Uppsala: Societas Archaeologica
Upsaliensis: Distributed by Dept. of Archaeology, Uppsala University, Walpole, M.J. and
Goodwin, H.J. (2000) Local economic impacts of dragon tourism in Indonesia, Annals of
6476. Walsh, Edward, 2005: Documents and correspondence concerning and from James Foran,
Irish priest and chaplain in the Falkland Islands 1876-86, Collectanea Hibernica, 46-47,
241-274.
6477. Walsh, Edward, 2007: ‘The archive of St. Mary’s, Stanley, Falkland Islands’, Catholic
Archives, 27, 36-53.
6478. Walsh, K., 1981: A review of the West New Britain fisheries project, Papua New Guinea
(mimeo), Fisheries Management Division, NZ Ministry of Agrilculture and Fisheries,
Tauranga, NZ.
6479. Walsh, Pat. edited by,1994: Melanie Nolan -- Nurturers or watchdogs of labour? New
Zealand and trade union internationalism in the South Pacific Islands, in Pioneering New
Zealand labour history: essays in honour of Bert Roth, Palmerston North, N.Z.: Dunmore
Press.
6480. Walter, Annie, 1996: The Feminine Art of Mat-Weaving on Pentecost, In Arts of Vanuatu,
edited by Joël Bonnemaison, Christian Kaufmann, Kirk Huffman, and Darrell Tryon.
Bathurst: Crawford House Publishing, 100–109.
6481. Walter, Richard, 1998: Anai’o: the archaeology of a fourteenth century Polynesian
community in the Cook Islands, Auckland, New Zealand Archaeological Association.
6482. Walvin, James edited by, 1982: Slavery and British society, 1776-1846, Baton Rouge:
Louisiana State University Press.
6483. Wanquet, Claude (dir.), 1989: Fragments pour une histoire des economies et societes de
plantation a la Reunion, Saint Denis: Universite de la Reunion, Centre de Documentation
et Recherche en Histoire Regionale.
6484. Wanquet, Claude, 1998: La France et la première abolition de l’esclavage, 1794-1802: le
cas des colonies orientales, Ile de France (Maurice) et la Réunion, Paris: Karthala.
6485. Wanquet, Claude, 1980: Histoire de une Revolution. La Réunion, Marseille, J. Lafitte, 3
vols.
6486. Ward R.G., 1989: Earth’s emptyquarter? The Pacific Islands in a Pacific Century, Geographical
Journal, Vol 155, 2, 235-46.
6487. Ward, Evan R., 2008: Packaged vacations: tourism development in the Spanish Caribbean,
Gainesville: University Press of Florida.
6488. Ward, Gérard; Chandra, Rajesh, 1997: Fidji, un nouveau départ: développement et
problème ethnique, In: Le Pacifique insulaire: nations, aides, espaces, IEDES: Institut
d’Etude du Développement Economique et Social - Nogent sur Marne, Revue Tiers
Monde, vol. vol. 38, no 149, p. p. 157-176.
6489. Ward, Marion W., 1995: Pacific 2010: women and employment in Solomon Islands / Marion
2009
W. Ward., [Canberra, Australia]: National Centre for Development Studies, Research

School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University.
6490. Ward, Martha Coonfield, 1989: Nest in the wind: adventures in anthropology on a tropical
island, [illustrations by Nancy Zoder Dawes], Prospect Heights, Ill.: Waveland Press.
6491. Ward, R. G., 1989:”Earth‘s Empty Quarter? The Pacific Islands in a Pacific Century‘, The
Geographical Journal, Vol. 155, No. 2, pp. 235-246.
6492. Ward, R. G., 1991: “Culture and development: Issues for island countries”. In UNESCO
(ed), Culture des îles et développement. Islands’ culture anddevelopment. Études
prospectives/Future-oriented studies, Paris, UNESCO & Fondation pour la coopération
culturelle ACP-CEE/Foundation for ACP-EEC Cultural Co-operation. Pp. 19-33.
6493. Ward, R. Gerard; Kingdon, Elizabeth, edited by, 1995: Land, custom, and practice in the
South Pacific, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press.
6494. Ware, Leonard, 1994: The landing in the Solomons, 7-8 August 1942, Washington [D.C.]:
Naval Historical Center, Dept. of the Navy.
6495. Warner, Denis Ashton; Warner, Peggy; Seno, Sadao, 1992: Disaster in the Pacific: new
light on the Battle of Savo Island, Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press.
6496. Warren, J.A. and Taylor, C.N., 1994: Developing Eco-tourism in New Zealand, The New
Zealand Institute for Social Research and Development Ltd, Wellington.
6497. Washbrook, D.A., 1999: Orients and Occidents; Colonial discourse theory and the
historiography of the British Empire, in Winks RW, ed, Historiography; the Oxford History
of the British Empire; Vol 5, Oxford, OUP, pp 596-611.
6498. Wassmann, edited by Jürg, 1998: Pacific answers to Western hegemony: cultural practices
of identity construction, Oxford; New York: Berg.
6499. Wassmann, J., 1995: Historical Atlas of Ethnic and Linguistic Groups in Papua New Guinea,
Basel, Institute of Ethnography, University of Basel.
6500. Wastegård, Stefan, [et al.], 2001: “The Mjáuvøtn tephra and other Holocene tephra horizons
from the Faroe Islands: a link between the Icelandic source region, the Nordic Seas, and
the European continent”, in The Holocene, vol. 11: pp. 101 - 109.
6501. Watanabe, Yoshio, 1985: Okinawa no shakai soshiki to sekaikan, Tōkyō: Shinsensha.
6502. Waterhouse, Joseph, 1997: The king and people of Fiji, Honolulu, University of Hawai’i
Press.
6503. Waterston, E., 1998: ‘The Iconography of Islands: Margaret Atwood and L.M. ’ in L.
Brinklow, F. Ledwell & J. Ledwell, eds., Message in a Bottle: The Literature of Small
Islands, Charlottetown PEI, Institute of Island Studies, University of Prince Edward Island,
pp. 265-276.
6504. Watlington, Roy A., Shirley H. Lincoln, 1997: Disaster and disruption in 1867: hurricane,
earthquake, and tsunami in the Danish West Indies: a collection of accounts and reports,
[St. Thomas, V.I.], Eastern Caribbean Center, University of the Virgin Islands.
6505. Watson, J.B., 1991: Australians living plantation lives, South West Pacific 1900-1975,
Journal of the Royal Australian Historical Society, Vol 77.
6506. Watson, Tim, 2008: Caribbean culture and British fiction in the Atlantic world, 1780-1870,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
6507. Watterson, Gerald G., 1993: Tobago heritage: drawings of the island’s past, St. James,
Trinidad, Republic of Trinidad and Tobago, W.I.: G.G. Watterson.
2009
CEHA 357
6508. Watts, R.L., 2000: Islands in Comparative Constitutional Perspective in Lessons from the
Political Economy of Small Islands (pp. 17-39), G Baldacchino and D. Milne (eds.). New
York: St. Martin’s Press; Basingstoke: Macmillan.
6509. Wawn, Andrew, 1993: Shrieks at the stones: the vikings, the Orkneys and the Scottish
Enlightenment, In Batey, Colleen E.; Jesch, Judith; Morris, Christopher D. (ed.), The
viking age in Caithness, Orkney and the north Atlantic (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University
Press, 1993), 408-22.
6510. Weale, D., 1991: ‘Islandness’, Island Journal, Maine, Island Institute, No. 8, pp. 81-82.
6511. Weale, D., 2002: ‘Here and Away’, paper presented at the Islands of the World VII
conference, Charlottetown PEI, University of Prince Edward Island. Disponível online em
url: www.bisd.hollandc.pe.ca/islands7/. Consulta em 29 de Julho de 2009.
6512. Wearing, S., 1993: Ecotourism: the Santa Elena rainforest project, The Environmentalist,
13(2), pp. 125-135.
6513. Weatherbee, D. E., 1993: Government and Politics in Indonesia: a country study W.H.
Frederick and R. L. Worden (eds.). Washington DC: GPO. (pp. 207-278).
6514. Weatherill, John, 1985: Faces of Bermuda, foreword by Lord Martonmere, Wylye Head,
Kilmington, Warminster, Wiltshire, Morrell Wylye Head.
6515. Weaver, D. B., 1988: The evolution of a “plantation” tourism landscape on the Caribbean
Island of Antigua, TESG: Tijdschrift voor economische en sociale geografie, vol. vol. 79,
no 5, pp. 319-331.
6516. Weaver, B. B., 1998: Peripheries of the periphery: Tourism in Tobago and Barbuda, Annals
of Tourism Research, 25(2), pp.292-313.
6517. Weaver, D. B., 1991: Alternative to mass tourism in Dominica, Annals of Tourism Research,
18(2), pp. 414-432.
6518. Weaver, D. B., 1993: Model of urban tourism for small Caribbean islands, Geographical
Review, 83 (2), pp.134-140.
6519. Weaver, D., 1993a: Ecotourism in the small island Caribbean, GeoJournal, 31(4), pp. 457-
465.
6520. Weaver, D. B., 1995: Alternative tourism in Montserrat, Tourism Management, 16(8), pp.
593-604.
6521. Weaver-Hightower, Rebecca, 2007: Empire islands: castaways, cannibals, and fantasies
of conquest, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
6522. Webb, Paul, 1986: Palms and the Cross: socio-economic development in Nusatenggara,
1930-1975, Townsville, Australia: Centre for Southeast Asian Studies, James Cook
University of North Queensland.
6523. Webber, Bert, 1993: Aleutian headache: deadly World War II battles on American soil
(documentary), Medford, Or., U.S.A.: Webb Research Group.
6524. Weber, Marie-Hélène, 1993: Robinson et robinsonnades: étude comparée de Robinson
Crusoë de Defoe, Le Robinson suisse de J.R. Wyss, L’île mystérieuse de J. Verne,
Sa Majesté des mouches de W. Golding, Vendredi, ou, les limbes du Pacifique de M.
Tournier, Toulouse: Editions universitaires du Sud.
6525. Webster, Steven, 1989: “Some History of Social Theory in Sahlins’ Structuralist Culture
History”, in Critique of Anthropology, Dec; vol. 9: pp. 31 - 58.
6526. Wei, edited by Deborah and Rachael Kamel, 1998: Resistance in paradise: rethinking
2009
100 years of U.S. involvement in the Caribbean and the Pacific, Philadelphia: American
Friends Service Committee in cooperation with Office of Curriculum Support, School
District of Philadelphia.
6527. Wei, S.- J.; Frankel, J., 1998: “Open regionalism in a world of continental trade blocs”,
International Monetary Fund Staff Papers, n°3, p. 440-453.
6528. Weinbaum, Batya, 1999: Islands of women and Amazons: representations and realities,
Austin: University of Texas Press.
6529. Weiner, Annette, 1980: Stability in Banana Leaves: Colonization and Women in Kiriwina,
Trobriand Islands, In Women and Colonization, edited by Mona Etienne and Eleanor
Leacock. New York: Praeger, 270–293.
6530. Weiner, Annette, 1989: Why Cloth? Wealth, Gender and Power in Oceania, In Cloth and
Human Experience, edited by Annette B Weiner and Jane Schneider, Washington and
London: Smithsonian Institution Press, 33–72.
6531. Weiner, Jonathan, 1995: The beak of the finch: a story of evolution in our time, New York:
Vintage Books.
6532. Weisgall, Jonathan M., 1994: Operation crossroads: the atomic tests at Bikini Atoll,
Annapolis, Md. : Naval Institute Press.
6533. Weiss, Gabriele, 1982: Über die Glaubensvorstellungen der Santa-Cruz-Insulaner
(Melanesien): ein Beitrag zur ethnohistorischen Religionsforschung, In Wiener
ethnohistorische Blätter; Heft 23, p.25/66.
6534. Weissler, D., 2004: On the Economics of Electricity Consumption in Small Island Developing
States: A Role for Renewable Energy Technologies?’ Energy Policy, Vol.32, No. 1, pp.
127-140.
6535. Welch, Richard F. 1993: An island’s trade: nineteenth-century shipbuilding on Long Island,
Mystic, Conn.: Mystic Seaport Museum.
6536. Wells, H. G., 1894: The Island of Dr. Moreau. Disponível online em url: http://etext.lib.
virginia.edu/toc/modeng/public/WelIsla.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
6537. Wells, Marjorie D., 1982: Micronesian handicraft book of the Trust Territory of the Pacific
Islands, New York, N.Y.: Carlton Press Inc..
6538. Welsch, R. L., Ed., 1998: An American anthropologist in Melanesia: A B. Lewis and the
Joseph N. Field, South Pacific Expedition 1909-1913, Honolulu, University of Hawaii
Press.
6539. Welsh, Sarah Lawson, 1999: “The West Indies” in The Journal of Commonwealth Literature,
Jan; vol. 34: pp. 191 - 210.
6540. Wernhart, Karl R., 1982: Frühe ethnographische Nachrichten von Rakahanga, Zentralpazifik,
In Wiener ethnohistorische, Blätter; Heft 24, p. 57-78.
6541. Wesley-Smith, T., 1994: Australia and New Zealand, in Howe K, Kiste RC and Lal BV, eds,
Tides of History; the Pacific Islands in the Twentieth century, Sydney, Allen and Unwin,
pp.195-226.
6542. Wesley-Smith, Terence, 1994: New Directions for Pacific Islands studies, Canberra,
Australia: Dept. of Political and Social Change, Division of Politics and International
Relations, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University.
6543. Wesley-Smith, T., 2000: Asia in the Pacific; migrant labour and tourism in the Republic of
Palau, a special issue of TCP, 12, 2.
2009
CEHA 359
6544. West, John F., 1980: Faroese folk-tales & legends; illustrations by Barður Jákupsson,
Shetland: Shetland Pub..
6545. West, J.; Falgout, S., 2002: Time traces; cultural memory and World War 11 in Pohnpei,
The Contemporary Pacific, 14, 1, 101-132.
6546. Wester, L.; Juvik, J.O.; Holthus, P., 1992: Vegetation history of Washington Island (Teraina),
Northern Line Islands, Atoll Research Bulletin, 1992/0.
6547. Westlake, Michael, 1990: 1 Sōkō: to the islands on the other side of the world. Edinburgh
[Scotland]: Polygon.
6548. Westport, Conn, 1995: Nico J.P. Hoogervorst - Dynamic analysis of economic development
and natural environment on the Greek Sporades Islands, in Integrating economic and
ecological indicators: practical methods for environmental policy analysis, edited by J.
Walter Milon and Jason F. Shogren, Praeger.
6549. Weth, Georg A.; Gabriel, Maria; Rom, Emile, 1984: ärchentraum der Balearen: 30 Märchen
aus Mallorca, Menorca, Ibiza und Formentera, Bern: Edition Erpf.
6550. Wetherall, D., 1988: First contact Mission narratives from Eastern New Guinea, Journal of
Pacific History, Vol 33, No 1, pp.111-16.
6551. Wetherall, D., 1989: The bridegroom cometh’: The lives and deaths of Queensland
Melanesians inNew Guinea, 1893-1956, PS, vol. 12(3).
6552. Wetherall, D., 1998: The Anglicans in New Guinea and the Torres Strait Islands, PS, 21,
4, pp.1-32.
6553. Wettinger, Godfrey, 2000: Place-names of the Maltese Islands: ca. 1300-1800, San Gwann,
Malta: Publishers Enterprises Group.
6554. Wheeler, S., 2002: “The new regionalism: key characteristics of an emerging movement”,
Journal of the American Planning Association, n°3, p. 267-278.
6555. Whelan, Franziska; Kelletat, Dieter, 2003: “Submarine slides on volcanic islands - a source
for mega-tsunamis in the QuaternaryProgress” in Physical Geography, vol. 27: pp. 198
- 216.
6556. Whilde, Tony, 1989: “The natural history of our western islands”, in Cathair na Mart
(Westport Historical Society), 9, 79-90.
6557. Whitaker, Ian, 1985-86: “Core values among the Blasket islanders”, in Folk Life, 24, 52-69,
Publisher: Society for Folk Life Studies.
6558. White, Alan T., 1987: Philippine coral reefs: a natural history guide, introduction by James
Berdach, Quezon City, Philippines, New Day Publishers, Detroit, Mich., U.S.A., Exclusive
distributors, Cellar Bk. Shop.
6559. White, Colin, 1998: 1797: Nelson’s year of destiny: Cape St. Vincent and Santa Cruz de
Tenerife, Stroud, Gloucestershire, Sutton.
6560. White, G., ed. et all..., 1988: The big death; Solomon Islanders remember World War 11,
IPS/USP.
6561. White, Geoffrey M.; Lindstrom, Lamont (ed.), 1989a: The Pacific Theater: Island
Repesentations of World War II (Pacific Islands Monograph, 8), Honolulu (HI).
6562. White, G. M. and L. Lindstrom, Eds., 1990: The Pacific Theatre: Island representations of
World War II, Melbourne, University of Melbourne.
6563. White, G., 1991: Identity through history; living stories in a Solomon Islands society,
Cambridge, CUP.
2009
6564. White, G., ed, 1991a: Remembering the Pacific war, CPIS/UH.
6565. White, Geoffrey M. (Geoffrey Miles), 1991: Identity through history: living stories in a
Solomon Islands society, Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press.
6566. White, Geoffrey M., Lamont Lindstrom, 1997: Chiefs today: traditional Pacific leadership
and the postcolonial state, Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press.
6567. White, J. Peter and Jim Allen, 1980: Melanesian prehistory: some recent advances,
Science, 207(15):728-734.
6568. White, J. Peter, editor, 1999: Translation of R. Parkinson’s Dreissig Jahre in der Sudsee
[Thirty Years in the South Seas] (1907), In full, with all the illustrations, linguistic accents
and a long introduction by Jim Specht. Oceania Publications, University of Sydney in
conjunction with Crawford House.
6569. White, M., 2001: “Your study of the things would be valuable: the Solomon Islands collection
of the Revd Charles Elliot Fox”, in Journal of the History of Collections, 13:1, 45-56.
6570. White, Rowland, 2007: Vulcan 607, London: Corgi.
6571. Whitlam, G., 1981: New nations and old imperialism, Australian Quarterly, vol. 35 (1).
6572. Whittaker, R. J., 1999: Island Biogeography: Ecology, Evolution and Conservation, Oxford,
6573. Whitten, Tony, 1999: The Ecology of Sumatra, Tuttle Publishing.
6574. Whyte, Donald, 2001: Clock & watchmakers of the Scottish highlands & islands, 1780-
1900: includes Moray & Nairn. Inverness: Highland Family History Society.
6575. Whyte, William Hollingsworth, 2000: A time of war: remembering Guadalcanal, a battle
without maps, with an introduction by James C. Bradford, New York: Fordham University
Press.
6576. Wickman, S. B., 1985: Solomon Islands in Oceania: a regional study, M. Bunge and M.W.
Cooke (eds.). Washington DC: GPO, pp. 207-232.
6577. Wickman, S. B., 1985a: Tonga in Oceania: a regional study F.M. Bunge and M.W. Cooke
(eds.). Washington DC: GPO, pp. 413-430.
6578. Widfeldt, A., 1996: Alternative development strategies and tourism in the Caribbean. In:
Briguglio, L., Butler, R., Harison, D. and Filho, W.L. (eds), Sustainable Tourism in Islands
& Small States: Case Studies, London: Pinter, pp.147-161.
6579. Wiener, M., 1995: Visible and Invisible Realms: History, Magic and Colonial Conquest in
Bali, University of Chicago Press.
6580. Wiggins, Kenneth, 2000: “A rescue excavation on Rathlin Island, county Antrim”, in Ulster
Journal of Archaeology, 59, 47-70.
6581. Wilkie, Laurie A., Farnsworth, Paul, 2005: Sampling many pots: an archaeology of memory
and tradition at a Bahamian plantation. Gainesville (FL): University Press of Florida.
6582. Wilkinson, Charles, 1999: Fire on the Plateau: Conflict and Endurance in the American
Southwest, Island Press.
6583. Wilkinson, Charles, 1999: The 1997-1998 Mass Bleaching Event Around the World, AIMS
Research. Disponível online em url: http://coral.aoml.noaa.gov/gcrmn/mass-bleach.html.
6584. Wilkinson, P. F., 1987: Tourism in small island nations: a fragile dependency, Leisure
studies, 6(2), pp.127-146.
2009
CEHA 361
6585. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1987a: “The environmental impact of energy use on forest resources: St.
Lucia.” In J. G. Nelson and K. D. Knight (eds.), Research, Resources and the Environment
in Third World Development, Publications Series No. 27. Waterloo: Department of
Geography, Faculty of Environmental Studies, University of Waterloo, 187-192.
6586. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1987b: “Tourism in small island microstates: inevitability and/or folly?”,
Les Cahiers du Tourisme, Série C-111. Aix-en-Provence: Centre des Hautes Etudes
Touristiques, Université d’Aix-Marseille III.
6587. Wilkinson, P. F., 1989: Strategies for tourism in island microstates, Annals of Tourism
Research, 16(2), pp.153-177.
6588. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1989: “Le Tourisme dans les petites Antilles anglophones”, Dans A.
Huetz de Lemps (ed.), Iles et Tourisme en Milieux Tropical et Subtropical, Collection «Iles
et Archipels» No 10. Talence: Société pour l’Etude, la Protection et l’Aménagement de la
Nature dans les Régions Inter-Tropicales, Le Centre d’Etudes de Géographie Tropicale
du Centre Nationale de Recherches Scientifiques de France, et Le Centre de Recherches
sur Les Espaces Tropicaux de l’Université de Bordeaux III, 105-124.
6589. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1990: “Tourism and national parks in Caribbean island microstates”, In J.
G. Nelson and S. Woodley (eds.), Heritage Conservation and Sustainable Development,
Occasional Paper 16, Waterloo: Heritage Resources Centre, University of Waterloo, 239-
250.
6590. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1991: “Tourism and national parks in island microstates: Caribbean
case studies.” In M. L. Miller and J. Auyong (eds.), Proceedings of the 1990 Congress on
Coastal and Marine Tourism, Volumes I and II. Newport, OR: National Coastal Resources
Research and Development Institute, 292-298.
6591. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1991a: “Planning for tourism in developing countries.” In P. F. Wilkinson
(ed.), “Perspectives on tourism in Indonesia,” University Consortium on the Environment
Research Series Paper #9. Bandung, Indonesia: Pusat Penelitian Lingkungan Hidup,
Institut Teknologi Bandung, 61-84.
6592. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1991c: “Tourism and integrated national development: the case of the
Caribbean.” In P. F. Wilkinson and W. C. Found (eds.), Resource Analysis Research
in Developing Countries: The Experience of Ontario Geographers. Toronto: Faculty of
Environmental Studies, York University, 83-97.
6593. Wilkinson, Paul F., (Ed.) 1991d: “Perspectives on tourism in Indonesia,” University
Consortium on the Environment Research Series Paper #9. Bandung, Indonesia: Pusat
Penelitian Lingkungan Hidup, Institut Teknologi Bandung.
6594. Wilkinson, Paul F., and M. P. Gunawan, 1991: The changing face of tourism in Indonesia:
opportunities and constraints, University Consortium on the Environment Research Series
Paper #8. Bandung, Indonesia: Pusat Penelitian Lingkungan Hidup, Institut Teknologi
Bandung.
6595. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1993: “Tourism policy and planning in the Eastern Caribbean: four case
studies.” In M. S. Searle (ed.), Proceedings of the 7th Canadian Congress on Leisure
Research. Winnipeg: University of Manitoba, 23-27.
6596. Wilkinson, Paul F., and M. P. Gunawan, 1992: “The changing face of tourism in Indonesia:
opportunities and constraints.” In B. Matthews (ed.), The Quality of Life in Southeast Asia:
Transforming Social, Political and Natural Environments. Montreal: Canadian Council for
Southeast Asian Studies and Canadian Asian Studies Association, 87-108.
6597. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1994: “Tourism and small islands: problems of resource analysis,
management, and development.” In A. V. Seaton (ed.), Tourism: The State of the Art.
2009
Chichester, West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, 41-51.

6598. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1996: “The tourist area cycle of evolution: graphical images of the
Commonwealth Caribbean.” In L. C. Harrison and W. Husbands (eds.), Practicing
Responsible Tourism: Case Studies in Tourism Planning, Policy and Development.
Toronto: Wiley, 16-40.
6599. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1997: “Jamaican tourism: from dependency theory to a world-economy
perspective.” In D. G. Lockhart and D. Drakakis-Smith (eds.), Island Tourism. London:
Mansell, 181-204.
6600. Wilkinson, Paul F., 1997a: Tourism Policy and Planning: Case Studies from the
Commonwealth Caribbean, Elmsford, NY: Cognizant Communications Corporation.
6601. Wilkinson, P.F., 1997b: Jamaican tourism: from dependency theory to a world-economy
approach, In: Lockhart, D.G. and Drakakis-Smith, D. (eds), Island Tourism: Trends and
Prospects, London: Pinter, pp.182-204.
6602. Wilkinson, Paul F., and M. P. Gunawan, 1999: Towards a more sustainable and competitive
Caribbean tourism sector, Trends for a Common Future 5. Washington, DC: Organization
of American States.
6603. Wilkinson, Paul F., 2003: “The political ecology of tourism in the Caribbean.” In S. Gössling
(ed.), Tourism and Development in Tropical Islands: A Political Ecology Perspective.
Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishing, 88-120.
6604. Wilkinson, Paul F., 2004: “Caribbean tourism policy and planning.” In D. Duval (ed.), Island
Tourism: Trends, Development, Prospects. Wallingford, UK: CAB International, 81-98.
6605. Wilkinson, Paul F. With D. Duval, 2004: “Tourism development in the Caribbean: meaning
and influences.” In D. Duval (ed.), Island Tourism: Trends, Development, Prospects.
Wallingford, UK: CAB International, 59-80.
6606. Wilkinson, Paul F., 2006: “Caribbean cruise tourism: delusion? illusion?” In C. Jayawardena
(ed.), Caribbean Tourism: People, Service, Hospitality. Kingston, Jamaica: Ian Randle
Publishers, 58-78.
6607. Wilkinson, Paul F., 2006a: “The changing geography of cruise tourism in the Caribbean.” In
R. Dowling (ed.), Cruise Ship Tourism around the World. Wallingford, UK: CABI, 17-183.
6608. Wilkinson, Paul F., 2008: “Barbados.” In M. Lück (ed.), Encyclopedia of Tourism and
Recreation in Marine Environments. Wallingford, UK: CAB International.
6609. Wilkinson, R., 2001: “Birdwatching in Papua New Guinea and New Britain”. Avicultural
Magazine, 108(1): 17-23.
6610. Willens, Howard P., 2000: National security and self-determination: United States policy in
Micronesia (1961-1972), Westport, Conn., Praeger.
6611. Willens, Howard P.; Siemer, Deanne C., 2000: National security and self-determination:
United States policy in Micronesia (1961-1972) Westport, Conn.: Praeger.
6612. William H. Frederick and Robert L. Worden, editors, 1993: Indonesia: A Country
countrystudies.us/indonesia/. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
6613. Williams, Ann, 2005: ‘Stone or wooden walls?’: the problems of land and sea defence in
the islands of Rhodes (1421-1522) and Malta (1510-1631) in CORTIS, T. and GAMBIN,
T., eds., De Triremibus, pp. 415-26.
6614. Williams, G., 1982: Enlarging the sphere of contemplation; the exploration of the Pacific
1760-1800, in Marshall PJ and Williams G., The great map of mankind, Dent, London,
2009
CEHA 363
pp.258-98.
6615. Williams, G., 1983: From Columbus to Castro: the history of the caribbean 1492-1969,
Londres: Deutsch.
6616. Williams, G., 1990: And annotated bibliography of the natural history of the Cocos (Keeling)
Islands, Indian Ocean, Atoll Research Bulletin, no 331, p. p. 1-17.
6617. Williams, Gerwyn, 1963-. ‘Don’t mention the war?: interpreting and contextualizing the
1982 Falklands/Malvinas War’. In Cragoe, Matthew; Williams, Chris (ed.), 2007: Wales
and war: society, politics and religion in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, Cardiff:
University of Wales Press, 204-29.
6618. Williams, J. Randolf, 1984: The Samoan journals of John Williams, 1830 and 1832, with
an introduction by Richard M. Moyle, Canberra; New York: Australian National University
Press.
6619. Williams, J. Randolf, 1987: Man of stature: Sir Henry James Tucker, Bermuda: Camden
Editions.
6620. Williams, M. I. (ed.). 1985: A directory of rare book and special collections in the United
Kingdom and the Republic of Ireland, London: Library Association.
6621. Williams, M.; Macdonald, B., 1985: The phosphateers, Melbourne, MUP.
6622. Williams, M. T., 1993: An expansion of the tourist site cycle model: The case of Minorca
(Spain), Journal of Tourism Studies, 4(2), pp.24-32.
6623. Williams, Marianne[1793-1879], 2004: Letters from the Bay of Islands: the story of Marianne
Williams; ed. Caroline Fitzgerald. Stroud: Sutton.
6624. Williams, Neville, 1992, 1998: A history of the Cayman Islands, Grand Cayman: Government
of the Cayman Islands.
6625. Williams, Thomas; Calvert, James, 1982: Fiji and the Fijians, edited by George Stringer
Rowe; with a new introduction by Fergus Clunie, Suva, Fiji: Fiji Museum.
6626. Williams, Thomas, 1990: A call to solidarity in the Pacific, North Sydney, Australian Catholic
Social Justice Council.
6627. Willmot, Louise, 2000: “The Channel Islands”, In Moore, Bob (ed.), Resistance in Western
Europe (Oxford and New York: Berg), 65-91.
6628. Willmot, Louise, 2002: ‘The goodness of strangers: help to escaped Russian slave
labourers in Occupied Jersey, 1942-1945’, Contemporary European History, 11:2, 211-27
6629. Willmot, Louise, 2005: ‘”Nothing was ever the same again”: public attitudes in the occupied
Channel Islands, 1942’. Local Historian, 35:1, 9-20.
6630. Willocks, Harold W. L., 1995: The umbilical cord: the history of the United States Virgin
Islands from pre-Columbian era to the present, St. Croix, V.I.?: H.W.L. Willocks.
6631. Willocks, Harold W. L., Myron Allick, 1997: Massacre in paradise: the untold story of the
Fountain Valley massacre, St. Croix, V.I., The author.
6632. Wilson, A. Jeyaratnam. 1988: The Break-up of Sri Lanka: The Sinhalese-Tamil Conflict,
6633. Wilson, edited by Samuel M., 1997: The indigenous people of the Caribbean, Gainesville:
6634. Wilson, Leonard G., 2007: ‘The geological travels of Sir Charles Lyell in Madeira and
the Canary Islands, 1853–1854’. In Wyse Jackson, Patrick N. (ed.), Four centuries of
2009
geological travel: the search for knowledge on foot, bicycle, sledge and camel (Geological
Society special publication, 287), London: The Geological Society, 207-28.
6635. Wilson, Robert A., 2006: RMS St. Helena and the South Atlantic islands, Caithness:
Whittles.
6636. WIN, 2007: Island writings: a unique collection from 14 islands off the coast of Ireland,
[Dublin?]: Womens Interisland Network.
6637. Winchester, Simon, 1985: Outposts: Journeys to the Surviving Relics of the British Empire
Hodder & Stoughton.
6638. Winchester, Simon, 1991: The Pacific, Hutchinson.
6639. Winchester, Simon, 1992: Pacific Nightmare, Sidgwick & Jackson.
6640. Wingham, E.J., 1997: Nomination of East Rennell, Solomon Islands for inclusion in the
World Heritage List - Natural sites, NZ: New Zealand Official Development Assistance
Programme, Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade.
6641. Winkelmann, R., 2000: “The labour market performance of European immigrants in New
Zealand in the 1980s and 1990s”, The International Migration Review, 33: 33–58.
6642. Winks, Robin W, George Bennett, 1966: The Historiography of the British Empire-
Commonwealth: Trends, Interpretations and Resources, Duke University Press.
6643. Winney, Geoffrey N., 2007: “The Scottish National Antarctic Expedition (1902-04) and the
founding of Base Orcadas”, in Scottish Geographical Journal, 123:1, 48-67
6644. Winterflood, Herbert, 2002: Occupied Guernsey: July 1940 - December 1942, Vale,
Guernsey: Guernsey Press.
6645. Wintle, Claire, 2008: ‘Career Development: Domestic Display as Imperial, Anthropological,
and Social Trophy’, Victorian Studies, 50:2, 279-88
6646. Wise, conference co-chairs John, David A. Schaller, Eliuel K. Pretrick ... [et al.]; 1997:
Pacific Islands Conference of Leaders (16th: 1997: Pohnpei, Micronesia) Sustainable
development in the Pacific Islands: conference proceedings, proceedings editors, Millie
M. Piazza, Patricia Young, Pohnpei: Federated States of Micronesia, Schreier, Daniel,
2003:” Insularity and Linguistic Endemicity”, in Journal of English Linguistics, Sep 2003;
vol. 31: pp. 249 - 272.
6647. Wise, David A. edited by. 1994: Studies in the economics of aging, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press.
6648. Wissink, D., 1996: “Galip (Canarium indicum) as a cash crop in West New Britain, Papua
New Guinea: experiences of the Kandrian Gloucester integrated development project”,
M. L. Stevens, R. M. Bourke and B. R. Evans, Eds. South Pacific Indigenous Nuts:
Proceedings of a Workshop Held From 31 October to 4 November 1994 at le Lagon
Resort, Port Vila, Vanuatu, Canberra, Australian Centre for International Agricultural
Research, pp. 84-91.
6649. Withall, Mary, 2001: Easdale, Belnahua, Luing & Seil: the islands that roofed the world,
Edinburgh: Luath Press.
6650. Witt, S.F., 1987: Economic impact of tourism on Wales, Tourism Management, 8, pp.306-
316.
6651. Wittmann, Henri, 1998: “Grammaire comparée des variétés coloniales du français populaire
de Paris du 17e siècle et origines du français québécois.” Le français des Amériques, ed.
Robert Fournier & Henri Wittmann, 281-334. Trois-Rivières: Presses universitaires de
Trois-Rivières; Calvet, Louis-Jean et Robert Chaudenson. Saint-Barthélemy: une énigme
2009
CEHA 365
linguistique, Paris, CIRELFA, Agence de la Francophonie.

6652. Wolanski, E., 1985: Water circulation around headlands and continental shelf islands,
Bulletin des Seances - Academie Royale des Sciences D’Outre Mer, vol. vol. 31, no 2,
p. p. 231-241.
6653. Wolfe, Michael C., 2000: The abundant life prevails: religious traditions of Saint Helena
Island , Waco, Tex.: Baylor University Press.
6654. Wolken, Gabriel J., [et al.], 2008: “Changes in late-Neoglacial perennial snow/ice extent
and equilibrium-line altitudes in the Queen Elizabeth Islands, Arctic Canada”, in The
Holocene, vol. 18: pp. 615 - 627.
6655. Wood, Houston, 1999: Displacing Natives: The Rhetorical Production of Hawai‘i,
Rowman & Littlefield Pub Inc.
6656. Woodard, Colin, 2000: Ocean’s End: Travels Through Endangered Seas. New York. Basic
Books.
6657. Woodcock, D., 2003: To Restore the Watersheds: Early Twentieth-Century Tree Planting
in Hawai‘I, Annals of the Association of American Geographers, Volume 93, Number 3,
September, pp. 624-635(12).
6658. Woodcock, K. and France, L., 1994: Development theory applied to tourism in Jamaica, In:
Seaton, A.V. (ed), Tourism: The State of Art, Chichester: Wiley, pp.110-11
6659. Woodhead, J. D. and R. W. Johnson, 1993: “Isotopic and Trace-Element Profiles Across the
New-Britain Island-Arc, Papua New Guinea”, Contributions to Mineralogy and Petrology,
113(4): 479-491.
6660. Woodhead, J. D., S. M. Eggins and R. W. Johnson, 1998: “Magma genesis in the New
Britain island arc: Further insights into melting and mass transfer processes”, Journal of
Petrology, 39(9): 1641-1668.
6661. Woodroffe, C. D., [et al.], 1990: “Holocene emergence in the Cook Islands, South Pacific”,
in Journal Coral Reefs, Volume 9, Number 1, pp. 31-39.
6662. Woods, Edith deJongh, 1989: The three quarters of the town of Charlotte Amalie: a study
of architectural details and forms that have endured from 1837, London: MAPes MONDe
Editore.
6663. World Bank, 1998: Enhancing the role of government in the Pacific Island economies,
Washington, D.C., World Bank.
6664. Worthington, Ross, 2002: Governance in Singapore, Routledge/Curzon.
6665. Wright, Burton III, 1993: Eastern Mandates, [Washington, DC]: U.S. Army Center of Military
History.
6666. Wright, Gavin, 1987: “Capitalism and Slavery on the Islands: A Lesson from the Mainland”,
in Journal of Interdisciplinary History, 17:4, 851-870.
6667. Wright, R., 1986: The Forgotten Generation of Norfolk Island and Van Diemen’s Land,
Sydney, Library of Australian History.
6668. Wright, Ronald, 1986: On Fiji Islands, Viking NY .
6669. Wrigley, W. D., 1987: “The British enforcement of Ionian neutrality against Greek and
Turkish refugees, 1821-1828, a study in selectivity”, in Südost-Forschungen, 46, 95-112.
6670. Wrigley, W. D., 1988: “The issue of Ionian neutrality in Anglo-Ottoman relations, 1821-
1830”, in Südost-Forschungen, 47, 109-43.
2009
6671. Wu, Tianying, 1994: Jia wu zhan qian Diaoyu lie yu gui shu kao: jian zhi Riben Aoyuan
Minxiong zhu jiao shou, Beijing: She hui ke xue wen xian chu ban she: Xin hua shu dian
jing xiao.
6672. Wuerch, William L. and Dirk A. Ballendorf, 1994: Historical dictionary of Guam and
Micronesia, Metuchen.
6673. Wurm, S., 1994: Australasia and the Pacific in Atlas of the World languages, ed. C. Moseley
and R.E. Asher (eds.). Routledge, pp. 93-158.
6674. Www-Vl History: Sri Lanka, European University Institute, Florence, Italy. Disponível online
em url: http://vlib.iue.it/history/asia/SriLanka/index.html. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
6675. Wylie, Jonathan, David Margolin, 1980: The ring of dancers: images of Faroese culture,
foreword by Einar Haugen, Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
6676. Wylie, Jonathan, 1987: The Faroe Islands: interpretations of history, Lexington, Ky,
University Press of Kentucky.
6677. Yamaji, K., 1994: Plant and gender: the reproductive image of mother in the Nakanai of
Papua New Guinea, K. Yamaji, Ed., Gender and Fertility in Melanesia, Nishinomiya,
Japan, Department of Anthropology, Kwansei Gakuin University, pp. 13-46.
6678. Yamaji, K., ed. 1994: Gender and Fertility in Melanesia, Nishinomiya, Japan, Department
of Anthropology, Kwansei Gakuin University.
6679. Yamazaki, James N.; Fleming, Louis B., 1995: Children of the atomic bomb: an American
physician’s memoir of Nagasaki, Hiroshima, and the Marshall Islands, Durham: Duke
University Press.
6680. Yanes Mesa, Julio Antonio, 1997: Crisis económica y emigración en Canarias: el puerto
de Santa Cruz de Tenerife durante la guerra europea, 1914-1918, Tenerife, Centro de la
6681. Yanes Mesa, Julio Antonio, 2006: El ocaso de la emigración canaria a Cuba, 1920-1935,
Tegueste (Sta. Cruz Tenerife): Ediciones Baile del Sol
6682. Yang, Zuozhou, 1993: Nan hai feng yun: Hai yu ji xiang guang di tan tao, Taibei Shi: Zheng
zhong shu ju ; Flushing, N.Y.: Meiguo zong jing xiao Hua qiang tu shu gong si, Min guo
82.
6683. Yeats, W. B., 1899: The Lake Isle of Innis free. Disponível online em url: www.poetryarchive.
org/poetryarchive/singlePoem.do?poemId=1689. Consulta em 11 de Julho de 2009.
6684. Yew, Lee Kuan, 2000: From Third World To First: The Singapore Story: 1965-2000, New
York: Harper Collins.
6685. Yokoyama, Manabu, 1987: Ryūkyūkoku shisetsu torai no kenkyū, Tōkyō, Yoshikawa
Kōbunkan, Shōwa 62
6686. Yonekura, Nobuyuki, 1988: Landforms and Land Use of Tropical Islands in the Pacific. A
Study of the Southern Cook Islands, [Trad. Formes du relief et utilisation du sol d’îles
tropicales du Pacifique: Etude des îles Cook du Sud], In CEGET-CNRS, Centre d’Etudes
de Géographie Tropicale (Talence); Comité Franco-Japonais de Géographie (Paris);
CRET-Centre de Recherches sur les Espaces Tropicaux, Université Michel de Montaigne
Bordeaux 3, Géographie et écologie des milieux tropicaux: Problèmes d’analyse, et
d’aménagement et de développement: IVe Colloque Franco-Japonais de Géographie,
Talence, 1-4 Octobre 1985, Talence: CEGET-CNRS, p. 139-149.
6687. Yorke, Edmund. ‘”The empire strikes back”? The Commonwealth response to the Falklands
Conflict’. In Badsey, Stephen; Havers, Rob; Grove, Mark (ed.), The Falklands conflict
2009
CEHA 367
York: Cass, 170-92.
6688. Young, B., 1983: Touristisation of traditional Maltese fishing-farming villages, Tourism
6689. Young, G.V.C., 2005: From the Vikings to the reformation: a chronicle of the Faroe Islands
up to 1538. Onchan, Isles of Man: Shearwater Press.
6690. Young, J., 1983: Australia’s Pacific frontier: economic and cultural expansion into the
Pacific, 1795-1885, Sydney.
6691. Young, J.M.R., 1984: Adventurous spirits; Australian immigrant society in pre-cession
Fiji, Brisbane, UQP.
6692. Young, L. B., 1999: Islands: Portraits of Miniature Worlds, New York, W.H. Freeman and
Company.
6693. Young, M.W. (ed.), (sd): The history and anthropology of the Massim, Papua New Guinea.
6694. Ximénez, Isaías, 2008: Islas y cabos atlánticos del Uruguay, [Montevideo, Uruguay]:
Academia Uruguaya de Historia Marítima y Fluvial: Paideia Ediciones.
6695. Zaide, Gregorio F., Sonia M. Zaide, 2004: Philippine History and Government, Sixth Edition,
All-Nations Publishing Company.
6696. Zainuddin, Ailsa Gwennyth. 1980: A Short History of Indonesia, (2d ed.) North Melbourne,
Victoria, Australia: Cassell.
6697. Zakaria, Houssen, 2000: Familles comoriennes face au collège: entre l’école et la tradition,
6698. Zamit, Loukianos, 1981: Hē akonomia tēs heptanēsou epi anglikēs prostasias, 1815-1864,
Kerkyva: [Hetaireia Kerkyraïkōn Spoudōn].
6699. Zanotti, Paolo, 2001: Il giardino segreto e l’isola misteriosa: luoghi della letteratura
giovanile, Firenze, Le Monnier.
6700. Zarkia, C., 1996: Philoxenia: Receiving tourists - but not guests - on a Greek island. In:
Boissevain, J. (editor), Coping with Tourists: European Reactions to Mass Tourism,
Oxford: Berghahm, pp.143-173.
6701. Zarkias, Cornelia, 1991: Société et espace dans l’île de Skyros; sous la dir. de Paul-Henri
Stahl, Thèse de doctorat: Ethnologie: EHESS.
6702. Zaslow, Morris editor. 1981: A century of Canada’s Arctic Islands, 1880-1980, 23rd
Symposium = Un siècle des Iles Artiques du Canada, 1880-1980, 23e Colloque
6703. Zavala, Silvio Arturo, 1991: Las conquistas de Canarias y América, Las Palmas: Ediciones
del Cabildo Insular de Gran Canaria.
6704. Zei, Eleftheria, 2003: Pàros dans l’archipel grec, XVIIe-XVIIIe siècles: les multiples visages
de l’insularité, Université Panthéon-Sorbonne (Paris). Université de soutenance, Lille:
Atelier national de Reproduction des Thèses, Thèse doctorat: Histoire: Paris 1.
6705. Zelenietz, M., 1980: After the despot: changing patterns of leadership and social control in
Kilenge, West New Britain Province, Papua New Guinea, Ph.D. dissertation, McMaster
University, Hamilton, Ontario, Canada.
6706. Zelenietz, M.; Grant, Jill, 1980: Kilenge Narogo: ceremonies, resources and prestige in a
West New Britain community, Oceania, 51:98-117.
6707. Zelenietz, Martin C., 1981: “One step too far: sorcery and social change, in Kilenge, West
2009
New Britain”, in special issue Sorcery and Social Change in Melanesia, M. Zelenietz and
S. Lindenbaum, eds. Social Analysis, 8: Pp. 101-118.
6708. Zelenietz, M., Grant, J., 1982: Alcohol use in a West New Britain community, M. Marshall,
Ed. Through a Glass Darkly: Beer and Modernization in Papua New Guinea, Boroka,
Institute of Applied Social and Economic Research, pp. 353-363.
6709. Zelenietz, M.; Grant, Jill, 1986: The ambiguities of education in Kilenge, Papua New
Guinea, Pacific Studies, 9 (3):33-52.
6710. Zelenietz, Martin C.; Grant, Jill, 1986: “The problem with pisins: an alternative view of
social organisation in West New Britain”, in Oceania, 56:199-214, 264-274.
6711. Zelenietz, M.; Saito, H. 1986: Both sides now: anthropological reflections of Kilenge
reminiscences of the Second World War, Man and Culture in Oceania, 2:101-114.
6712. Zelenietz, M., 1988: So that’s why they dance: the story behind the Sia stamps of Papua
New Guinea, American Philatelist, 102(9): 854-859.
6713. Zelenietz, M.; Saito, H. 1989: The Kilenge and the war: an observer effect on stories from
the past, in G. White and L. Lindstrom, eds., The Pacific Theater: Island Representations
of World War II, Pacific Islands Monograph Series No. 8. Honolulu: University of Hawaii
Press. Pp 167-184.
6714. Zelenietz, M., 1990: A letter from the field. Chapter 16 (pp. 121-128), in P.R. DeVita (ed.)
The Humbled Anthropologist: Tales from the Pacific, Belmont, California: Wadsworth.
6715. Zelenietz, M., 1991: Invisible islanders: Melanesians in American war mythology, Man and
Culture in Oceania 7:1-9.
6716. Zelenietz, M., 1991: Kilenge, Pp. 118-120 in Encyclopedia of World Cultures, Vol. 2,
Oceania, Terence E. Hays, volume editor, Boston: G.K. Hall.
6717. Zelenietz, M., 1991: Villages without people: a preliminary analysis of American views of
Melanesians during World War II as seen through popular histories, Chapter 18 (pp. 187-
206) In G. White (ed.), Remembering the Pacific War, Occasional Paper #36, Center for
Pacific Islands Studies, Honolulu: University of Hawaii at Manoa.
6718. Zelenietz, Martin C., 1991: “Invisible islanders: Melanesians in American war mythology”,
in Man and Culture in Oceânia, 7:1-9.
6719. Zimmerman, B. L. & Bierregaard, Jr., R.O., 1986: Relevance of the equilibrium theory of
island biogeography with an example from Amazonia, J. Biogeogr., 13:133-143.
6720. Zocca, Franco and Jack Urame, 2008: Sorcery, Witchcraft and Christianity in Melanesia,
The Melanesian Institute, Goroka, Papua New Guinea.
6721. Zomora, Mario D., 1992: Los Indígenas de las Islas Filipinas, Madrid: Editiorial Mapfre.
6722. Zubatsky, David S., 1986: Latin American Literary Authors: An Annotated Guide to
Bibliographies, Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press.
6723. Zucca, Raimondo, 1998: Insulæ baliares: le isole baleari sotto il dominio romano, prefazione
di Marc Mayer, Roma, Carocci editore.
6724. Zurick, David, 1990: Hawaii, naturally: an environmentally oriented guide to the wonders
and pleasures of the islands, Berkeley: Wilderness Press
2009

BibliografiaInsular1980 2009

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

BibliografiaInsular1980 2009

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ANEXO

Bibliografia INSULAR. 1980-2009

Centro de Estudos de História do Atlântico

REGIÃO AUTÓNOMA DA MADEIRA

Secretaria Regional de Educação e Cultura

BIBLIOGRAFIA INSULAR. 1980-2009

58. 1994: Verslunarskýrslur, Reykjavík: Statistical Bureau of Iceland.

Studies, Commonwealth Youth Programme, Honiara & Huddersfield.

(Anthem South Asian studies), London; New York: Anthem Press.

Anthropology”, in Diogenes, May; vol. 55: pp. 7 - 16.

Bank, Portuguese Studies Review, Vol. 11, No. 1, Pp. 169-185.

and Tourism Administration, 4(3): 23-48.

Polynesie Ocidentale, Iles et archipels n° 19, Presses universitaires de Bordeaux.

[Cambridgeshire], New York, Cambridge University Press.

Inhabitants, Productions and Trade, Colombo.

direction de jean chaussade, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Thèse de doctorat:

PS, vol. 8 (1), 71-94.

(Enjeux, menaces et perspectives), Paris; Pointe-à-Pitre: Karthala; CREJETA.

Sous La Direction De Fernand Verger, Mémoire ou thèse (version d’origine), Université

926. Brown, M., 1995: A History of Madagascar, Damien Tunnicliffe, UK.

1946, Sydney, Allen and Unwin.

Politiques de Toulouse, p. 147-158.

Les outre-mers français, Mappemonde, no 54, p. p. 10-14.

Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University.

ou thèse (version d’origine), Habilitation à diriger des recherches: Géographie: Paris 4.

1178. Chazan-Gillig, Suzanne, 2004: Insularité et mondialisation: Diasporas et créolisation de la

in the Economy: A Series of Review Papers, Volume 2. Port Moresby, Department of

Polynesian Outlier, Tonga.].

Calif.: University of California Press.

culturale: il caso dei Tabarchini di Sardegna: documenti del Convegno internazionale

England: Book Guild.

Publishing, Belmont, CA, pp. 18-24.

and Mary, Pp. 1-26.

1455. Craddock, C. N., 1985: Rotuma: A Changing Mobility: 1978-1983, M. A. Thesis in

Press, University of Hawaii Press.

Education, Research & Information, Internationalizing Higher Education, Kinokuniya

& Solomon Islands College of Higher Education.

the Cook Islands, Proceedings of the Conference on Political Culture, Representation

revues.org/index239.html. Consulta em 20 de Agosto de 2009.

troisième millénaire, Bordeaux, CRET, “Îles et archipels”, n°26.

Comissão Nacional para as Comemorações dos Descobrimentos Portugueses, pp. 353-

de Educacíon, Centro Nacional de Documentación e Información Educativa,

touristiques et bouleversements ecologiques dans les petites iles: l’exemple de Saint-

Nouvelle-Caledonie? Reflexions autour d’une identite insulaire, Universite de Bordeaux

services: l’exemple des Hawaii, Universite de Bordeaux 3 – Talence, France, CRET, p.

P., 1987: Iles tropicales: insularite, «insularisme», In Disparites dans le developpement

Upton-upon-Severn: Self Publishing Association.

2081. Durand, Olivier, 2003: La lingua còrsa, Paideia Editrice, Brescia.

German Occupation: Comparison with Schoolchildren on Mainland Britain’, Human

2216. Fairbairn-Dunlop, Peggy, 1993c: `Women and Agriculture in Western Samoa’, in Momsen,

2343. Feinberg, Richard, 2006a: Schneider, David M. In Encyclopedia of Anthropology, edited

New York: Oxford University Press.

American Affairs, New York University.

in Austronesian ethnography, Canberra: Dept. of Anthropology, Australian National

Nineteenth-Century Christchurch, New Zealand, Journal of Social History, Volume 36,

economic policy in the Pacific Islands 1945-47, PS, 20, 1, 63-88.

Novato, CA: Presidio Press.

Réunion), n° 11 (Propos géographiques sur le sud-ouest de l’océan Indien), p. 137-152.

World, New York, Palgrave Macmillan.

Ottoman Crete, Oriente moderno, 20(81), 193-207.

Episcopal History, 69:3, 295-314

crise dans le Pacifique insulaire, Paris, Presses universitaires de la Sorbonne.